E4-5 MV Switchgear

FOR REVIEW
A Jan.14.10 Initial Issued J.H.Kim J.T.Choi J.T.Choi Y.S.Lee

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION BY CHK RVR APP
EMPLOYER :
ENGINEER :
CONTRACTOR : SUBCONTRACTOR :
Ltd.
PROJECT TITLE :
AL KHALIJ
4 X 350 MW POWER PLANT PROJECT
CONTRACT NO. :
55/2007 (CP-004)
TITLE :
INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR MV SWGR
SCALE PROJ. NO. CONTRACTOR’S DOCUMENT NO.
N/A 25458 AK-0-ESE-NM-78-001
OWNER’S DOCUMENT NO. :

ABB
Date : 2010-01-14 AK-0-ESE-NM-78-001
INDEX
Rev. : A
INDEX
1. Unigear ZS1 Unigear ZS1
2. Vacuum Circuit Breaker VD4
3. Multifunction Relay REF542plus
4. Multifunction Relay REF610

UniGear type ZS1
Installation, service and maintenance
instruction manual
Your safety first – at all times!
This is why our instruction manual begins with the following recommendations:
• Only install switchgear and/or switchboards in closed rooms suitable for electrical equip-
ment.
• Ensure that installation, operation and maintenance are carried out by specialist electricians
only.
• Fully comply with the legally recognized standards (IEC or local), the connection conditions
of the local electrical utility and the applicable safety at work regulations.
• Observe the relevant information in the instruction manual for all actions involving switchgear
and switchboards.
• Danger!
Pay special attention to the hazard notes in the instruction manual marked with this warning
symbol.
• Make sure that the specified data are not exceeded under switchgear or switchboard
operating conditions.
• Keep the instruction manual accessible to all personnel involved in installation, operation and
maintenance.
• The user’s personnel must act responsibly in all matters affecting safety at work and correct
handling of the switchgear.
WARNING
Always follow the instruction manual and respect the rules
of good engineering practice !
Hazardous voltage
can cause electrical shocks and burns.
Disconnect power, then earth and short-circuit before proceeding
with any work on this equipment.
If you have any further questions about this instruction manual, the members of our field
organization will be pleased to provide the required information.
We reserve all rights to this publication. Misuse, and including in particular, duplication and
making this manual - or extracts thereof available to third parties is prohibited. We do not
accept any responsibility for the information provided, which is subject to alternation.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 1/106
Contents Page 5.5 Installation of the top-mounted boxes ....................... 41
1 Summary ..................................................................... 3 5.5.1 Voltage transformer for busbar metering ................... 41
1.1 General ......................................................................... 3 5.5.2 Earthing switch for busbar earthing ........................... 42
1.2 Standards and specifications ....................................... 3 5.6 Pressure relief ducts .................................................. 42
1.3 Operating conditions .................................................... 3 5.7 Cable connection ....................................................... 42
1.3.1 Normal operating conditions ........................................ 3 5.7.1 Power cables .............................................................. 42
1.3.2 Special operating conditions ........................................ 3 5.7.2 Control cables ............................................................ 44
5.8 Earthing the switchgear .............................................. 44
2 Technical data ............................................................. 4 5.9 Laying the ring circuits ............................................... 44
2.1 Electrical data ............................................................... 4 5.10 Final erection work ..................................................... 44
2.1.1 Main parameters for panels with circuit breakers ........ 4 5.11 Floor drawings ............................................................ 45
2.1.2 Main parameters for panels with 5.12 Photos assembly ........................................................ 57
switch-disconnectors NALF ......................................... 4 5.13 Busbar junctions and partitioning drawings
2.2 Resistance to internal arc faults ................................... 4 (12, 17.5 kV) ................................................................ 59
2.3 Dimensions and weights .............................................. 5 5.14 Busbar junctions and partitioning drawings (24 kV) .... 62
2.3.1 Dimensions and weights of 12/17.5 kV units ............... 5 5.15 Top mounted drawings (12, 17.5 kV) .......................... 66
2.3.2 Dimensions and weights of 24 kV units ....................... 6 5.16 Top mounted drawings (24 kV) ................................... 68
2.3.3 Dimensions and weights of panels with the 5.17 LVC swivel plate photos ............................................. 70
switch-disconnector NALF 12 and 17,5 kV ................. 6 5.18 Ith Limitors drawings .................................................... 70
2.3.4 Dimensions and weights of panels with the 5.19 Cross sections of cable compartment ....................... 71
switch-disconnector NALF 24 kV ................................. 6 5.19.1 12 and 17.5 kV units (standard) .................................. 71
5.19.2 24 kV units (standard) ................................................. 72
3 Panel design and equipment ..................................... 7 5.19.3 12 and 17.5 kV units (switch disconnector) ............... 73
3.1 Basic structure and variants ......................................... 7 5.19.4 24 kV units (switch disconnector) .............................. 73
3.2 Enclosure and partitioning ............................................ 7 5.19.5 12 and 17.5 kV units (series 550) ............................... 74
3.2.1 Ventilation of the panels ............................................... 8
3.3 Compartments in the panels ........................................ 8 6 Operation of the switchgear .................................... 75
3.3.1 Busbar compartment ................................................... 8 6.1 Commissioning ........................................................... 75
3.3.2 Circuit-breaker compartment ....................................... 9 6.1.1 Preparatory work ........................................................ 75
3.3.3 Withdrawable parts ...................................................... 9 6.1.2 Start-up ...................................................................... 76
3.3.4 Cable connection compartment ................................... 9 6.2 Switching operations .................................................. 76
3.3.5 Control cabinet ........................................................... 10 6.2.1 Withdrawable circuit-breaker part .............................. 76
3.3.6 Switch-disconnector and cable compartment in 6.2.2 Circuit-breaker - type VD4 and V-max ...................... 78
the panel with switch-disconnector ........................... 10 6.2.3 Circuit-breaker - type VM1 ........................................ 78
3.4 Interlock/protection against erroneous operation ...... 11 6.2.4 Circuit-breaker - type HD4 ........................................ 79
3.4.1 Panel internal interlocking .......................................... 11 6.2.5 Vacuum contactor - type V-Contact .......................... 79
3.4.2 Doors interlocking ...................................................... 11 6.2.6 Withdrawable metering parts ..................................... 79
3.4.3 Interlocks between panels ......................................... 11 6.2.7 Earthing switch - type EK6 and ST-VG-01 ................. 79
3.4.4 Locking devices ......................................................... 11 6.2.8 Busbar earthing switch ............................................... 80
3.4.5 Internal interlocking of panel with 6.2.9 Earthing and short-circuiting with earthing module ... 80
switch-disconnector ................................................... 12 6.2.10 Swich-disconnector type NALF ................................. 81
3.5 Circuit breaker and contactor plug connector 6.3 Test procedures .......................................................... 82
coding ........................................................................ 12 6.3.1 Testing the off-circuit condition .................................. 82
3.6 Fast recovery .............................................................. 12 6.3.2 Current and voltage tests ........................................... 83
3.7 Ith Limitors ................................................................... 12 6.4 Service trucks ............................................................. 83
3.8 Cross sections of 12-17.5 kV panel variants .............. 13
3.9 Cross sections of 24 kV panel variants ...................... 17 7 Maintenance ............................................................. 95
3.10 Phptos of interlock on doors ...................................... 22 7.1 General ....................................................................... 95
3.11 Fast recovery device photos ...................................... 24 7.1.1 Intervals for inspection, servicing and repairs .......... 95
3.12 Device photos ............................................................ 25 7.2 Inspection ................................................................... 96
3.13 Apparatus plug coding ............................................... 34 7.3 Servicing ..................................................................... 96
7.4 Repair ......................................................................... 97
4 Dispatch and storage ............................................... 35 7.4.1 Switchgear in general ................................................. 97
4.1 Condition on delivery ................................................. 35 7.4.2 Replacement of complex functional groups .............. 98
4.2 Packing ....................................................................... 35 7.5 Testing withdrawable parts ........................................ 99
4.3 Transport .................................................................... 35 7.5.1 Motor-driven withdrawable parts ............................... 99
4.4 Delivery ....................................................................... 35 7.5.2 Checking correctness of dimensional settings .......... 99
4.5 Intermediate storage .................................................. 36 7.5.3 Checking auxiliary switch settings on
withdrawable parts ..................................................... 99
5 Assembly of the switchgear at site ........................... 37
7.5.4 Checking the direction of rotation of the travel
5.1 General site requirements .......................................... 37 motors on motor-driven withdrawable parts ............ 100
5.2 Foundations ............................................................... 37 7.5.5 Testing of interlock conditions .................................. 100
5.2.1 Method of installation A - Installation of the 7.6 Tests on the panel .................................................... 101
base irons ................................................................... 38 7.6.1 Auxiliary switch settings on the earthing switch ...... 101
5.2.2 Method of installation B - Fixing with anchoring 7.7 Spare parts, auxiliary materials, lubricants .............. 101
bolts to concrete floor ................................................ 38 7.7.1 Spare parts ............................................................... 101
5.2.3 Method of installation C – Fixing to a flouting floor ..... 39 7.7.2 Auxiliary materials, lubricants ................................... 101
5.3 Assembly of the switchgear panels ............................ 39
5.4 Installation of the busbars and bushings ................... 40
8 Product quality and enviromental
5.4.1 Busbars and bushings for units 12/17.5 kV ............... 41
protection ................................................................ 105
5.4.2 Busbars and bushings for units 24 kV ....................... 41
2/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
1. Summary
1.1 General
UniGear is the new name of the ZS1 switchgear in release 1.2 (ZS1.2). It is a three-phase, metal-clad,
air-insulated switchgear and all the units are factory-assembled, type-tested and suitable for indoor
applications up to 24 kV. The units are designed as withdrawable modules and are fitted with a single
busbar system. The withdrawable parts are equipped with circuit-breakers and contactors.
Details of the technical design and configuration of individual switchgears, such as the technical data,
detailed equipment lists for the individual panels and comprehensive circuit documentation etc., can be
found in the relevant order documents.
Notice:
The switchgear UniGear is indicated in the test reports and type test certificates with the abbreviation ZS1.2
1.2 Standards and specifications

UniGear switchgear panels comply with the standards and specifications for factory-assembled, metal-
clad and type tested high voltage switchgears to IEC publications 62271-200 and 60694. In addition,
in accordance with IEC 60529, the switchgear panels have the following degrees of protection:
IP 4X for the enclosure and IP 2X for the partitions.
All other corresponding IEC publications, national or local safety at work regulations and safety
regulations for production materials must followed during erection and operation of these systems.
Above and beyond this, the order-related data from ABB must be taken into account.
1.3 Operating conditions

1.3.1 Normal operating conditions
The switchgears are basically suitable for normal operating conditions for indoor switchgears and
switchboards in accordance with IEC 60694. The following limit values, among others, apply:
Ambient temperature:
Maximum + 40 °C
Maximum 24 h average + 35 °C
Minimum (according to “minus 5 indoor class”) - 5 °C
The maximum site altitude is 1000 m above sea level.
1.3.2 Special operating conditions

Switchgears are suitable for operation in the climate of Wda type according to IEC 60 721-2-1. Special
operating conditions must be discussed with the manufacturer in advance. For example:
• At site altitudes above 1000 m, the effects of the reduction in dielectric strength of the air on the
insulation level must be taken into account (please refer to diagram in figure 1/1).
• Increased ambient temperatures must be compensated for in the design of the busbars and branch
conductors as well as for the withdrawable parts, otherwise the current carrying capacity will be
limited. Heat dissipation in the switchgear panel can be assisted by fitting additional ventilation
facilities.
Note on any special climatic operating conditions:

When switchgears are operated in areas with high humidity and/or major rapid temperature fluctuations,
there is a risk of dew deposits which must remain an exception in normal operating conditions for indoor
switchgear. Preventive action (e.g. fitting electric heaters) must be taken in consultation with the
manufacturer to avoid this condensation phenomenon and any resulting corrosion or other adverse
effects. The control of the heaters depends on the relevant project and details must be taken from the
order documents.
Figure 1/1: Curve for determination of the altitude factor k in relation to the altitude H.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 3/106
2. Technical data
2.1 Electrical data
2.1.1 Main parameters for panels with circuit breakers
Rated voltage kV 12 17.5 24
Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV 28 38 50
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 95 125
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated current of busbars A …4000 …4000 …2500
Rated current of circuit-breaker branches A …4000 …4000 …2500
Rated peak withstand current1) kA …125 …100 …63
Rated short-circuit breaking current of c.-breaker kA …50 …40 …25
Rated short- time current 3 s 1) kA …50 …40 …25

1)
The short-circuit withstand capacity of the instrument transformers must be taken into account separately.
2.1.2 Main parameters for panels with switch-disconnectors NALF
Rated voltage kV 12 17,5 24
Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV 28 38 50
Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage kV 75 95 125
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated current of busbars A ...4000 ...2500
Rated current of branches A ...630 ...630
Rated breaking current of switch-disconnector A ...630 ...630

(power factor = 0.7)
Rated short-time withstand current of

switch-disconnector 1s 1) kA ...25 ...20
Rated short-circuit making current kA ...40 ...38
Rated peak withstand current kA ...62.5 ...62.5
Auxiliary voltage V DC 24, 48, 110, 220;

AC 110, 230
1)
The short-circuit withstand capacity of instrument transformers must be taken into account separately.
For individual switching device data, see the instruction manual for the relative switching device, as
listed under 7.1.
2.2 Resistance to internal arc faults

The fault withstand capacity is as follows: 12 kV - 40 kA 1s - 50 kA 0.5s
17.5 kV - 40 kA 1s
24 kV - 25 kA 1s
The switchgear units have been tested according to IEC 62271-200 standard (appendix AA, class A,
criteria 1 to 5) and also to PEHLA recommendation no. 4. In individual cases, depending on the
configuration of the switchgear panels and/or the switchroom conditions (e.g. low ceiling height),
additional measures may be necessary to ensure compliance with criterion 5.
4/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
2.3 Dimensions and weights
2.3.1 Dimensions and weights of 12/17.5 kV units
Dimension mm
Height A 2100/2200/2595 1)
Width B
- Feeder panels up to 1250 A (25 kA) 7) 550
- Feeder panels up to 1250 A (up to 31.5 kA) 6) 650
- Feeder panels up to 1250 A (above 31.5 kA) 800
- Feeder panels 1600 - 2000 A 800 2)
- Feeder panels above 2000 A 1000
Depth C 1300/13403) or 1350/13904)
Height of the basic part of panel D 2100
E 1495
1)
Height of the control cabinet is 580/705/1100 mm, except for the 3150/4000 A panels, where it is only available in heights 705/1100 mm.
2)
1000 mmon request.
3)
Up to 2500 A - panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is 1340 mm, in other cases A=1300 - however always
consider annotation 5)
4)
For 3150 A and 4000 A - panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is 1390 mm, in other cases B=1350 mm
- however always consider annotation 5)
5)
Dimension must be verified according to documentation of the relevant order.
6)
Feeders equipped with contactor "V-Contact" are 650 mm wide up to the 50 kA short-time current.
7)
Unigear type ZS1 series 550 only
Weights of 12/17.5 kV panels (including withdrawable circuit-breaker parts):
Rated current Mass
A Kg
...1250 800-850
1600 850-900
2000 850-900
2500 1200
3150 1200
4000 1400
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 5/106
2.3.2 Dimensions and weights of 24 kV units
Dimension mm
Height A 2200/2325/2720 1)
Width B
- Feeder panels up to 1250 A 800 2)
- Feeder panels above 1250 A 1000
Depth C 1520/1560 3)
Height of the basic part of panel D 2200
E 1620
1)
Height of the control cabinet is 580/705/1100 mm.
2)
1000 mm on request.
3)
Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is 1560 mm, in other cases C=1520 mm - however always
4)
Dimension must be verified according to documentation of the relevant order.
Weights of 24 kV panels (including withdrawable circuit-breaker parts):
Rated current Mass
A Kg
...1250 1000-1050
1600 1200
2000 1200
2500 1200
2.3.3 Dimensions and weights of panels with the switch-disconnector NALF 12 and 17,5 kV
Dimension mm
1)
Height A 2075/2200/2595
Width
- Outgoing and incoming panels with B 800
switch-disconnector 630 A
Depth C 1300/1340 2)
Height of basic part of panel D 2100
E 1495
1) Height of control cabinet is 580/705/1100 mm.
2) The depth of panel with the switch-disconnector in combination with HD4 circuit breaker panels is recommended to 1340 mm,
in other cases 1300 mm – take always into account the note 3)
3) The dimensions must be verified according to the documentation of relevant order
Weights of 12/17,5 kV panel (including the switch-disconnector):

Outgoing and incoming panels of width 800 mm......ca 750 kg
2.3.4 Dimensions and weights of panels with the switch-disconnector NALF 24 kV

Dimension mm
1)
Height A 2200/2325/2720
Width
- Outgoing and incoming panels with B 1000
switch-disconnector 630 A
Depth C 1520/1560 2)
Height of basic part of panel D 2200
E 1620
1) Height of control cabinet is 580/705 /1100mm
2) The depth of panel with the switch-disconnector in combination with HD4 circuit breaker panels is recommended to 1560
mm, in other cases 1520 mm – take always into account the note 3)
3) The dimensions must be verified according to the documentation of relevant order
Weights of 24 kV panel (including the switch-disconnector):

Outgoing and incoming panels of width 1000 mm......ca 950 kg
6/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
3. Panel design and equipment
3.1 Basic structure and variants (Figures 3/1 to 3/3)
The basis for the UniGear panel is the incoming/outgoing feeder panel with SF61) or vacuum circuit-
breaker using insertion technology. It is divided into busbar compartment I., circuit-breaker compart-
ment II., cable compartment III. and control cabinet IV. for the secondary equipment. Apart from this,
there are variants for all operating needs. Pictures 3/1 and 3/2 show examples of possible configura-
tions of a panel including electrical equipment.
For busbar sectionalising, two panels are necessary, the coupling panel with the withdrawable circuit-
breaker part and a bus riser panel (optional with busbar metering and earthing). In equipment without
busbar sectionalising, a direct bar connection between the busbars will be established.
The switchgear UniGear includes also the variant of incoming/outgoing panel with the switch-
disconnector NAL-F with the stationary mounting of switch-disconnector. The panel is divided into
busbar compartment A, switch-disconnector compartment including cables B and control cabinet for
the secondary equipment D. Figures 3/1-9 and 3/2-9 show examples of panel arrangement including
the electrical equipment.
The UniGear panels can also be set up in two rows; back to back fixed together so called duplex arrangement
with a double busbar system.
Figure 3/2-10 shows an example of duplex arrangement with two circuit breakers.
Further details about installation and switchgear equipment can be obtained from the documents of
relevant order.
1)
For series 550 only vacuum breaker is available
3.2 Enclosure and partitioning (Figure 3/3)

The enclosure and internal partitions of the panels are of 2 mm thick high quality galvanised steel sheets.
The three high voltage compartments (busbar compartment, circuit-breaker compartment and cable
connection compartment) are equipped with top-mounted and secured pressure relief flaps. These
open in the case of overpressure due to an internal arc fault.
The front of the panel is closed off by pressure resistant doors which open to an angle of 130°.
Cable and circuit-breaker compartments have their own doors. The circuit-breaker compartments can
be equipped with inspection windows made of security glass. Neighbouring panels are partitioned from
one another by the side walls of each panel and, as a result of the design, the air cushion remains
between these walls when the panels are jointed together.
The enclosure is completed above by top-mounted pressure-relief flaps which, according to the rated
branch conductor current, are made of sheet steel or expanded metal and below by means of floor-
covering 17, made of sheet metal which cannot be magnetized. The pressure-relief flaps are secured
with steel screws on one longitudinal side and on the other longitudinal side with plastic screws. In the
case of internal overpressure, the plastic screws are the point of rupture.
Arc fault current limitation can be achieved by undelayed circuit-breaker release, carried out by auxiliary
switches operated by the pressure wave.
The switchgear can be equipped with the following systems:
– Ith limiter: the auxiliary switches 11.5 (figure 5/40) are operated by the pressure relief flaps. For units
over 25 kA.
– Fast recovery device: the auxiliary switches are mounted on the pressure sensors and operated by
the sensor stroke pin (see chapter 3.6).
The necessary safety measures to counteract the effects of an internal arc fault must be ensured in
relation to the ceiling height. In individual cases, this may require additional operator protection
measures on the switchgear panels. These measures include:
1. Mounting a pressure relief duct 50 on the top of the switchgear, with further channels leading out of
the switchgear room in a form appropriate for the design of the building. The shock wave and arc
discharge are channelled off in ducts (figure 5/17).
2. Mounting a pressure relief duct with blow-out apertures located above the duct at the ends of the
switchgear and pointing towards the centre of the switchgear (diverter duct). The shock wave and
arc discharge then emerge in an extremely attenuated form and in a location which is not critical for
the operating personnel.
The rear wall of the busbars of busbar compartment 84, intermediate wall 9, mounting plate 12 with
shutters 12.1/12.2 and horizontal partition 20, form part of the internal partitioning.
The internal partitioning makes safe access to the circuit-breaker and cable compartments possible
even when the busbars are live.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 7/106
The low voltage compartment for the secondary equipment is completely protected from the high voltage
area thanks to its steel-sheet casing.
On the end sides, cover plates ensure good appearance and are mechanically and thermally arc fault
proof should such an event occur in the end panel.
Doors and rear walls as well as the cover plates are thoroughly cleaned and treated against corrosion
before receiving a high quality double coating of paint. The finishing coat is in the standard RAL 7035
colour (special colours by agreement). Stoving completes the procedure and provides considerable
insensitivity to impact and corrosion.
The circuit-breaker compartment and cable connection compartment doors are pressure resistant and
can either be fitted with screws or manual closing systems. (central handle)
3.2.1 Ventilation of the panels (Figures 3/3, 6/20, 6/21)

Openings in the outer enclosure are needed for the purpose of ventilation in the case of certain rated
currents in the busbars and branch bars.
For incoming air to the circuit-breaker compartment, the horizontal partition is provided with air-vents
20.2. IP4X degree of protection and safety in the case of any release of hot gas due to an arc fault are
provided by flap 20.3 in the horizontal partition 20. For outgoing air, the pressure relief flaps 1.1 are
made of expanded metal instead of flat steel sheets. The shape and size of the vents in expanded metal
provide the IP4X degree of protection.
In cases of higher ambient temperature (>40 °C) and/or increased frequency (60 Hz) it may be
necessary to install a fan in the horizontal partition. This is not standard. Please refer to figure 6/20 and
6/21.
It is necessary to use forced fan ventilation in 3600 A and 4000 A panels for 12/17.5 kV rated voltage
and in 2500 A panels for 24 kV rated voltage.
3.3 Compartments in the panels

3.3.1 Busbar compartment (Figures 3/3, 5/21 to 5/26, 5/29 to 5/34)
The busbars 3 have a flat cross-section made of copper and are laid in sections from panel to panel.
For higher rated currents (3150, 3600 and 4000 A), the busbars have a D-shaped cross-section.
According to the current rating, either single or double configuration is used. They are held by flat branch
conductor 2 and, if installed, by busbar bushings 29. No special connection clamps are needed.
Busbars and branch conductors for 17.5 and 24 kV are insulated by means of shrink-on sleeves. The
bolt connections in the 17.5 and 24 kV busbar system are covered by insulating covers 58. The busbars
for 12 kV units up to 2000 A are without any covers. Flat busbars 2500 A and D-shaped busbars 3150,
3600 and 4000 A are insulated and the connections are covered.
By means of bushing plates 28 and busbar bushings 29, partitions can be created between panels.
These partitions are necessary for higher rated short-time currents – see the following table.
Rated voltage Rated short-time withstand current Partitions
25 kA No 1)
12/17.5 kV 31.5 kA Every third panel 2)
40 kA, 50 kA Every panel 3)
24 kV 25 kA No 1)
Marine version All ratings Every panel

1) In these panels, busbar bushings 29 and bushing plates 28 need not be mounted - the dynamic strength of the busbar system is
sufficient.
2) In these panels, busbar bushings 29 and bushing plates 28 must be mounted in every third panel. (Only in panels 800 and 1000 mm
wide).
3) In these panels, busbar bushings 29 and bushing plates 28 must be mounted in every panel.
According to customer requirements, this separation into individual panels by means of busbar
bushings 29 and bushing plates 28 can also be provided in switchgear panels where it is not technically
necessary.
Top-mounted boxes with busbar earthing switches, or busbar voltage transformers can be placed
above the units. For details, see figures 5/27, 5/28, 5/35, 5/36 and chapter 5.5.
8/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
3.3.2 Circuit-breaker compartment (Figures 3/3, 3/8, 3/9, 3/10, 3/11, 5/20, 6/22)
The circuit-breaker compartment contains all the necessary equipment for reciprocal operation of the
withdrawable part and the panel. Like the busbar compartment, it is metallically partitioned on all sides.
The tulip isolating contacts 5, together with the fixed isolating contacts, are located in mounting plate
12. The metal shutters 12.1/12.2, covering the insertion openings, are also included. The shutters are
opened by means of actuating bars 13.16 of the withdrawable circuit-breaker part, using lever 38 when
inserting into the service position, and are closed when the latter is removed. In the test/disconnected
position of the withdrawable part, partitioning by separation is established in the main current circuit.
Connection of the control wiring, required for test purposes, need not be interrupted when in the test/
disconnected position.
In the test/disconnected position, the withdrawable part is still completely inside the panel with the door
closed. The ON/OFF pushbutton located on the circuit-breaker, and the mechanical indicators for ON/
OFF and CHARGED/DISCHARGED can be observed through an inspection window. If the circuit
breaker is in service position.
The switching operations are carried out with the doors closed. Installation of an additional mechanical
switching device for manual operation of the circuit-breaker in the service position is also possible (see
Fig. 3/14, 3/15).
The socket 10.1 for the control wiring is mounted fixed in the circuit-breaker compartment.
3.3.3 Withdrawable parts (Figures 3/3, 3/12, 3/13, 3/16 to 3/19, 3/25)
1. Withdrawable circuit-breaker parts
The withdrawable circuit-breaker forms a complete module consisting of the Vaccum circuit breakers
type VD4, V-Max or VM1, SF6 circuit breaker type HD4 the withdrawable assembly 13.15, isolated
contact arm 4.2 with contact system 4.3 and control wiring plug 10.2.
The withdrawable assembly 13.15 and the circuit-breaker are coupled via a multi-pole control wiring
plug connector 10.3.
The withdrawable assembly establishes the mechanical connection between the panel and the circuit-
breaker. The fixed part is connected to the panel by forking, which is form coded on both sides. The
moving part with the circuit-breaker is moved manually or by a motor by means of a spindle, between
the service or test/disconnected positions with the front doors closed. Service and test disconnected
positions are set precisely by means of auxiliary switches, which register the final position reached and
the angular position of the spindle.
The earthing connection between the withdrawable part and the panel is established by its rollers and
travel rails 42, which are bolted onto the panel.
Withdrawable parts of the same design are interchangeable. In the case where the withdrawable parts
have the same dimensions, but different circuit-breaker fittings, the control wiring plug coding prevents
any erroneous connections between the withdrawable part and the panel. The coding is indicated in
the order documents (see Fig. 3/25).
2. Withdrawable contactor parts (Figures 3/3, 3/20, 3/21)
In place of the circuit-breaker type, the withdrawable part can also be fitted with the V-Contact type
vacuum contactor.
V-Contact is fitted with MV fuses 91.15 and can be used for rated voltage up to 12 kV.
All the data mentioned in this chapter for circuit-breakers also apply to the contactors.
3. Other withdrawable parts
The withdrawable part can also be fitted with the following trucks:
– metering voltage transformers truck with fuses;
– earthing truck without making capacity (for main busbar system and power cables);
– earthing truck with making capacity (for main busbar system and power cables);
– power cable testing truck;
– isolation truck;
– isolation truck with fuses.
– shutters lifting truck.
3.3.4 Cable connection compartment (Figures 3/3, 5/18 to 5/20, 5/41, 5/42)
The cable compartment contains current transformers 7, fixed and withdrawable voltage transformers
8, and earthing switch 6, according to individual operating requirements in each case.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 9/106
The cable compartment is constructed for installation of three current transformers. Should all three
current transformers not be required, dummies will be installed in their place, using the same
installation and connection procedures.
The voltage transformers mounted fixed are connected on the primary side with flexible, fully- insulated
cables which are inserted into the transformers.
The removable voltage transformers are fitted with HRC fuses.
The EK6 type earthing switch can be used with either a manual or motor-operated mechanism. Its
switching position will be indicated both mechanically by indication on the shaft and electrically by
means of the auxiliary switch. Earthing switch in 550 series cannot be equipped with a motor-operated
mechanism.
Three surge arrestors can be mounted fixed, instead of one position of single-core cables.
Cable connection of 12/17.5 kV units:

In the 550 and 650 mm wide panel, up to three parallel plastic cables can be connected with single-
core cable protection and push-on sealing ends with a maximum cross-section of 630 mm2.
In the 800 or 1000 mm wide panel, up to six parallel plastic cables can be connected with single-core
cable protection and push-on sealing ends with a maximum cross-section of 630 mm2.
Customer requests regarding connections to bars, three-core cables, special cables or sealing ends
of different types must be considered during the order-planning stage.
Cable connection of 24 kV units:

In the 800 mm wide panel, up to three parallel plastic cables can be connected with single-core cable
protection and push-on sealing ends with a maximum cross-section of 500 mm2.
In the 1000 mm wide panel, up to six parallel plastic cables can be connected with single-core cable
protection and push-on sealing ends with a maximum cross-section of 500 mm2.
For more information regarding cable connection, see chapter 5.7.
3.3.5 Control cabinet (Figures 3/3, 3/7, 5/20, 5/39)

The control cabinet is for all control and protection aspects, suitable for both conventional or
microprocessor control technology.
The height of the control cabinet is 580/705/1100 mm. For details, see chapter 2.3.
If the secondary devices are not intended for door installation, they are mounted on DIN RAILS.
They enable any subsequent changes to the wiring. In the lower part of the control cabinet, there are
three rows of DIN RAILS on the swivelling DIN RAILS holder and, below these, there is an easily
accessible auxiliary switch for the control wiring plug.
Secondary wiring inside the panel is in a duct on the right side of the panel. The left side of the panel
is for the external wiring. The ducts are covered with steel sheet metal 43.1, 43.2. There are holes for
sliding in the ring conductors at the side of the control cabinet.
3.3.6 Switch-disconnector and cable compartment in the panel with switch-disconnector

The switch-disconnector and cable compartment is merged. The switch-disconnector is mounted
stationary and connected to busbars. The interconnection to the busbar compartment is carried out by
means of bushings, which secures the separation of busbar compartment from all other switchgear
compartments. The switch-disconnector and cable compartment is also separated from other compart-
ments by means of metal partitions.
The switch-disconnector can optionally contain an integrated earthing switch. The switching positions
of the integrated earthing switch type E can be indicated by an auxiliary switch.
The closing and opening of switch-disconnector is performed manually by means of lever with the door
closed. By request the device can be also mounted for the motor operation of switch-disconnector. The
switch-disconnector can be consequently operated not only locally but also remotely. The earthing
switch is operated always locally by means of operating lever.
The switchgear is constructed for the use of one-core cables as standard. The cable compartment
contains usually supporting insulators for the fastening of cables. By request the cable compartment can
contain instead of supported insulators the instrument current transformers. If all three current
transformers are not required, the relevant insulators are installed instead of them.
Cable connection in the panels for 12kV, 17,5 kV and 24 kV:
In the panel with switch-disconnector 1 plastic one-core cable can be connected on each phase with the
cross-section up to 240 mm2 as standard.
10/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Important notice:
In the case of any atypical cable connections an agreement must be reached between customer and
manufacturer already in the technical preparation stage of order.
3.4 Interlock/protection against erroneous operation

3.4.1 Panel internal interlocking (Figure 3/3)
To prevent hazardous situations and erroneous operation, there is a series of interlocks to protect both
personnel and equipment:
• The withdrawable part can only be moved from the test/disconnected position (and back) when the
circuit-breaker and earthing switch are off (i.e. the switch must be off beforehand.) In the intermediate
position, the switch is mechanically interlocked. When the circuit-breakers have an electrical release,
the interlock is also electrical.
• The circuit-breaker can only be switched on when the withdrawable part is in the test or service
position. In the intermediate position, the switch is mechanically interlocked. When the circuit-
breakers have an electrical release, the interlock is also electrical.
• In panels with digital control technology, prevention of malfunction of the switch can also be achieved
by means of the control terminal (i.e. REF542plus).
• In the service or test positions, the circuit-breaker can only be switched off manually when no control
voltage is applied and it cannot be closed (electromechanical interlock).
• Connecting and disconnecting the control wiring plug 10.2 is only possible in the test/disconnected
position of the withdrawable part.
• The earthing switch 6 can only be switched on if the withdrawable part is in the test/disconnected
position or outside of the panel (mechanical interlock 1) ).
• If the earthing switch is on, the withdrawable part cannot be moved from the test/disconnected position
to the service position (mechanical interlock).
• Optionally there can be interlocking on shutters to prevent opening them by hands. If it is applied then
a shutter device needs to be ordered.
• Details of other possible interlocks, e.g. in connection with a locking magnet on the withdrawable part
and/or earthing switch drive, can be obtained from the relevant order documents.
3.4.2 Doors interlocking (Figure 3/4-1 to 3/4-8)

The panels can be equipped with the following interlocks (all optional):
• The apparatus (circuit-breaker or contactor) cannot be racked-in if the apparatus compartment door
is open (3/4-1 and 2).3)
• The apparatus compartment door cannot be opened if the apparatus (circuit-breaker or contactor) is
in service or in an undefined position (3/4-3 and 4).
• The earthing switch cannot be operated if the cable compartment door is open (3/4-5 and 6).
• The cable compartment door cannot be opened if the earthing switch is open (3/4-7 and 8).
Note: When the interlocking for circuit breaker is used then is necessary to use OFF push buton on
door to provide emergency switching OFF.
3.4.3 Interlocks between panels (Figure 3/1-6, 3/1-7, 3/2-6, 3/2-7)

• The busbar earthing switch can only be closed when all the withdrawable parts in the relative bus-bar
section are in the test/disconnected position (electromechanical 2) interlock).
• When the busbar earthing switch is closed, the withdrawable parts in the earthed busbar section
cannot be moved from the test/disconnected position to the service position (electromechanical 2)
interlock).
3.4.4 Locking devices (Figures 3/3, 6/13, 6/22)

• The shutters 12.1/12.2 can be secured independently of each other with padlocks when the
withdrawable circuit-breaker part has been removed.
• Access to the operating-shaft 14.1 of the earthing switch can be restricted with a padlock.
1) In the case of a motor operator, the mechanical interlock or the locking magnet is replaced by an electrical interlock of
the earthing switch. The manual emergency switch is not locked!
2) The locking magnet is not installed in the case of a motor operator; busbar earthing switches or the withdrawable parts
are electrically locked. The manual emergency switch is not locked!
3) This interlock is not available for motor-operated withdrawable apparatus as a mechanical device.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 11/106
• Access to the circuit-breaker racking slot can be restricted with a padlock.
• Access to the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable compartment can be restricted with a
padlock.
3.4.5 Internal interlocking of panel with switch-disconnector

To prevent hazardous situations and erroneous operation, there is a series of interlocks to protect both
personnel and equipment:
• The switch-disconnector can only be switched on if the earthing switch is off. The earthing switch can
only be switched on if the switch-disconnector is off. The switch-disconnector and earthing switch are
mutually mechanically interlocked.
• The door of lower cable HV part on the panel can only be opened if the earthing switch is on. During
the closing of earthing switch the insulating plate 205.1 is automatically inserted in the isolating
distance of switch-disconnector, which increases the safety. This plate is automatically removed
again during the opening of earthing switch.
• The earthing switch can only be operated if the cable compartment door is closed.
• If the control voltage is not connected, the switch-disconnector can be open and closed only manually.
The manual operation of switch-disconnector and earthing switch can be prevented if the slides 201.2
and 208.1 of operating openings are locked up.
• In the panels with digital control techniques the protection against erroneous operation is basically
carried out by means of panel software. But the earthing switch is operated locally by means of
operating lever 215. The mechanical interlocking between the switch-disconnector and earthing
switch is still in operation.
• Details of other possible interlocks, e.g. in connection with a locking magnet on the switch-
disconnector, can be obtained from the relevant order documents.
Warning:
• The door of upper HV part on the panel can only be opened if the off-circuit condition of switch-
disconnector is verified. This means that the off-circuit condition must be unconditionally verified both
on the upper and lower contacts of switch disconnector.
3.5 Circuit breaker and contactor plug connector coding (Figure 3/25)
The control wiring plug connector coding allows withdrawable parts for switching devices to be assigned
to particular panels. This ensures, for example, that withdrawable parts with different rated currents or
different control wiring circuits can only be used in the panels they are intended for.
Coding pins are fitted in the control wiring sockets 10.1 or control wiring plugs 10.2, and engage with
the corresponding bores of the relevant plug 10.2 or socket 10.1 when the two parts are connected.
The plug connector coding is order-related, and is noted in the relevant wiring documentation.
3.6 Fast recovery (Figure 3/5-1 to 3/5-4)

UniGear switchgears can optionally be equipped with “Fast Recovery”, a specific protection system.
This system is based on pressure sensors 3/4-1, suitably located in the switchgear and directly
connected to the shunt opening release installed in the circuit-breaker operating mechanism 3/4-2.
The sensors detect the pressure rise front at the moment of an internal arc and promptly open the circuit-
breaker.
Thanks to the “Fast recovery” system, only the part involved in the fault is selectively excluded in under
100 ms (including the circuit-breaker opening time). Rapid elimination of the fault along with the metal
segregation between compartments and the use of self-extinguishing materials drastically reduces any
possible damage.
3.7 Ith Limitors (Figure 3/5-40)

UniGear switchgears over 25 kA fault current ore mandatory equipment with microswitches on the top
of each unit. Units for lower faut currents can be equipped by Ith limitors opationally. The microswitch
generates a signal of fault immediatelly ahen overpressure flat is being opened. Reaction time is less
then 15 ms. The signal from microswitch can be sent directly to circuit breaker OFF trigger.
12/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
3.8 Cross sections of 12-17.5 kV panel variants.
Figure 3/1-1: Feeder unit - 12 kV, 630 A, 31.5 kA - Figure 3/1-2: Feeder unit - 12 kV, 1250 A, 31.5 kA -
with fixed voltage transformers with removable voltage transformers
and 1100 mm high control cabinet
Figure 3/1-3: Feeder unit - 12 kV, 1250 A, 40 kA - Figure 3/1-4: Feeder unit - 12 kV, 1250 A, 31.5 kA -
with fixed voltage transformers, surge with top mounted busbar earthing switch
arrestors and pressure relief duct
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 13/106
Figure 3/1-5: Feeder unit 12 kV, 4000 A, 40 kA, with forced Figure 3/1-6: Bus tie - 12 kV, 2500 A, 40 kA - with earthing
ventilation switch
Figure 3/1-7: Bus riser - 12 kV, 2500 A, 40 kA, with Figure 3/1-8: Busbar metering - 12 kV, 40 kA - with
withdrawable voltage transformers withdrawable voltage transformers
14/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Figure 3/1-9: Panel with 12/17,5 kV switch-disconnector with fuses and earthing switch
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 15/106
470
634
Busbar 80x10
26
Busbar 60x10
831
2200
2100
85
606
Busbar 60x15
50
328
B
1230
10
1340
Earthing Busbar 30x8
A-A
Figure 3/1-10a: Feeder unit 550 series - 12 kV 1250 A Figure 3/1-10b: Detail B
Fixed voltage transformer Feeder with short bushing for ring type CTs
470 470
634
634
Busbar 60x15
Busbar 80x10
26
26
831
831
2200
2200
2100
2100
85
85
606
606
328 328
50
50
1230 1230
10
10
1340 1340
Earthing Bar 30x8
A-A Earthing Busbar 30x8
A-A
Figure 3/1-11: Bus tie unit 550 series 12 kV 1250 A Figure 3/1-12: Bus riser unit 550 series 17 kV 1250 A
(block type current transformer)
16/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
3.9 Cross sections of 24 kV panel variants.
Figure 3/2-1: Feeder unit 24 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA Figure 3/2-2: Feeder unit 24 kV, 2000 A, 25 kA,
with removable voltage transformers
Figure 3/2-3: Feeder unit 24 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA, with top- Figure 3/2-4: Feeder unit 24 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA, with top-
mounted busbar voltage transformers mounted busbar earthing switch
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 17/106
Figure 3/2-5: Feeder unit - 24 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA - Figure 3/2-6: Bus tie - 24 kV, 2000 A, 25 kA - with
with forced ventilation earthing switch
Figure 3/2-7: Bus riser - 24 kV, 2000 A, 25 kA - with Figure 3/2-8: Busbar metering - 24 kV, with withdrawable
withdrawable voltage transformers voltage transformers
18/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Figure 3/2-9: Panel with 24 kV switch-disconnector with fuses and earthing switch
Figure 3/2-11 Duplex arrangement of switchgear 24kV, 1000A, 25kA

Installation back to back
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 19/106
1.1
D
1
A B
2
15.1
3
84
204 1.2
200.1
200
201
201.1
201.2 205
205.1
203
B 202
207.1
16
208 1.2
208.1
208.2
207.2
19 207 17 21
A Busbar compartment
B Switch-disconnector and cable compartment
D Low voltage control cabinet
1 Enclosure
1.1 Pressure relief flaps
1.2 Control wire duct
2 Branch conductor
3 Busbar
15.1 Terminal rack
16 Cable sealing end
17 Floor cover - split
19 Main earthing bar
21 Cable clamp
84 Partition
200 Switch-disconnector
200.1 Position indicator of switch-disconnector
201 Operating mechanism of switch-disconnector
201.1 Operating shaft of switch-disconnector
201.2 Slide
202 Fuse or link
203 Insulator or current transformer
204 Bushing
205 Insulating partition wall
205.1 Movable insulating plate
207 Earthing switch
207.1 Position indicator of earthing switch
207.2 Interlocking of earthing switch
208 Operating mechanism of earthing switch
208.1 Operating shaft for earthing switch
208.2 Slide
Figure 3/2-10: Example of panel with 12 kV switch-disconnector with fuses and earthing switch
20/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
1.7
1.1
A D
1 12.1
2
15.1
3
10
84
1.2
12.2
12 B
5 13
18
18.1
6 18
18.2
7
20.2 20.2
14 20
14.1
14.2 14
8 1.2
C 16
21
17
19
A Busbar compartment 12.1 Top shutter

B Circuit-breaker compartment 12.2 Lower shutter
C Cable compartment 13 Withdrawable part
D Low voltage compartment 14 Earthing switch operating mechanism
14.1 Operating shaft for earthing switch
1 Enclosure 14.2 Slide
1.1 Pressure relief flap 15.1 Terminal rack
1.2 Control wiring duct 16 Cable sealing end
1.7 Pressure relief flap made of expanded metal 17 Floor cover – split
2 Branch conductor 18 Spindle mechanism
3 Busbar 18.1 Spigot on spindle
5 Isolating bushing 18.2 Hole in spindle for insertion lever
6 Earthing switch 19 Main earthing bar
7 Current transformer 20 Horizontal partition, removable
8 Voltage transformer 20.2 Ventilation grid
9 Partition – removable 21 Cable clamp
10 Control wiring plug connector 84 Partition
12 Mounting plate
Figure 3/3: Example of UniGear feeder unit
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 21/106
3.10 Photos of interlock on doors
A
Figure 3/4-1: Circuit-breaker compartment door enabling device (A)
Figure 3/4-2: Circuit-breaker truck enabling slot (A)
Figure 3/4-3: Circuit-breaker compartment door locking device (B)
Figure 3/4-4: Circuit-breaker compartment door locking pin (B)
22/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
C
Figure 3/4-5: Cable compartment door enabling device (C)
C1
C2 Pin ON Pin OFF
Figure 3/4-6: Cable compartment door enabling slot (C1) and earthing switch enabling pin (C2)
Figure 3/4-7: Cables compartment door locking device (D)
Figure 3/4-8: Cables compartment door locking pin (D)
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 23/106
3.11 Fast recovery device photos
Resetting the auxiliary contacts
Figure 3/5-1: Pressure sensor Figure 3/5-2: Shunt opening release
Compressed air system
Figure 3/5-3: Fast recovery system
3 1 Pressure reducer
2 Lever for opening the air valve
3 Manometer
Figure 3/5-4: Testing equipment
24/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
3.12 Device photos
Figure 3/6: Feeder unit Figure 3/7: Low-voltage compartment, internal view
10.2
13.1
18.1
14
Figure 3/8: Circuit-breaker compartment, open. Figure 3/9: Circuit-breaker compartment, open.
Withdrawable part in service position Withdrawable part in disconnected position,
control wiring plug connector open
10.2 Control wiring plug
13.1 Withdrawable part
14 Earthing switch operating mechanism
18.1 Square spigot
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 25/106
Mechanical override for under-
voltage release (optional)
Undervoltage release de-

activated. The circuit-
breaker can be closed
even if the undervoltage
release is de-energised.
1 4
5 Undervoltage release ac-
6 tivated. The circuit-
2
breaker can be closed
11 only if the undervoltage
release is energised.
8
3
7
Figure 3/9-1: VD4 Circuit breaker - operating elements
1 Key lock (if provided).

2 Lever for manually charging the closing springs.
3 Coupling lever for racking-out operation (only for withdrawable circuit-breakers).
4 Opening pushbutton.
5 Closing pushbutton.
6 Signalling device for circuit-breaker open/closed.
7 Signalling device for closing springs charged/discharged.
8 Operation counter.
9 Handles for operating the truck locks (only for withdrawable circuit-breakers).
10 Operating lever for circuit-breaker racking-in/out.
11 Mechanical override for undervoltage release (optional).
26/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
12.1
4.3 5
4.2
4.1
5
12.2
12.2
Figure 3/10: Withdrawable part during insertion into the Figure 3/11: View inside the circuit-breaker compartment,
service position, shutters not yet fully open withdrawable part removed, shutters open
4.2 Contact arm, with insulating sleeve
4.3 Contact system 4.1 Isolating contact
5 Isolation tulip 5 Isolating tulip
12.1 Top shutter 12.2 Lower shutter
12.2 Lower shutter
13.16
13.15
Figure 3/12: Withdrawable part with circuit-breaker, type Figure 3/13: Withdrawable part with VD4 type circuit-
VD4, operating mechanism side breaker, - pole side
13.10 Pole tube cover
13.15 Withdrawable assembly 3.16 Actuating bars
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 27/106
45.3
45.2
45.1
Figure 3/14: Push button for mechanical ON/OFF breaker Figure 3/15: View of the push rod extension swung out by
operation with the door closed (on request). the knob at the front, with the withdrawable
If the withdrawable part is in the service circuit-breaker part in service position and the
position, operation is carried out using the door open
knob which swings a push rod extension out.
45.1 Mechanical pushbutton 45.3 Swivelling push rod
45.2 Turning knob
31.9
31.16
31.2
31.3
31.4
31.5 31.6
Figure 3/16: Withdrawable part with VM1 type circuit-
breaker - operating mechanism side
31.2 “Ready” display
31.3 ON pushbutton
31.4 OFF pushbutton
31.5 Mechanical operating cycle counter
31.6 Mechanical switch position indicator
31.9 Catch for emergency manual operating
lever Figure 3/17: Withdrawable part with VM1circuit-breaker -
31.16 Front cover plate pole side
28/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
13.2
13.1
13.4
13.8
13.5
128a
13.15
Figure 3/21-1: V-max Circuit breaker - Front view Figure 3/21-2: V-max Circuit breaker - pole side
13.2 Mechanical OFF push-button

13.4 Mechanical switch position indicator
13.5 Mechanical operating cycle counter
13.8 Charging condition indicator
13.11 Sliding handle, connected with the catch
on the withdrawable assembly
128 Charging lever
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 29/106
10.2 90.4 90.5
90.1
90.2
90.3 90.7
90.6
13.15
Figure 3/18: HD4 type circuit-breaker - side view Figure 3/19: Operating and signalling parts of HD4 circuit-
breaker
10.2 Control wiring plug 90.1 Signalling device for state of SF6
13.15 Withdrawable assembly pressure (on request)
90.2 Opening pushbutton
90.3 Closing pushbutton
90.4 Operation counter
90.5 Circuit-breaker open/closed indicator
90.6 Shaft for manual closing spring
charging
90.7 Signalling device for closing springs
charged/discharged
91.15
91.13
91.14
Figure 3/20: V-Contact type vacuum contactor - front view Figure 3/21: V-Contact type vacuum contactor - pole side
91.13 Signalling device ON/OFF
91.14 Operating cycle counter 91.15 MV fuses
30/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
13.9
13.13
18.2 18.1 S9 S8 10.3
Figure 3/22: Withdrawable assembly for circuit-breaker, with Figure 3/23: Withdrawable part with VD4 type high current
auxiliary switches circuit- breaker - pole side
S8 Test position indicator
S9 Service position indicator 13.9 Transport caps (to be removed on
10.3 Control wiring plug connector for commisioning)
withdrawable assemly 13.13 Lifting eyebolt (to be removed on
18.1 Square spigot commissioning)
18.2 Hole in spindle for insertion lever spindle
95.2
95.1
95.3
Figure 3/24: Withdrawable part with metering unit 95.3 Mini circuit breakers of transformers
95.1 Voltage transformer secondary circuits (mounted in the cabinet of
95.2 Cast resin tube (with fuse cartridge) auxiliary circuits as standard)
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 31/106
206
200
203
202
207.2
Figure 3/26: Panel UniGear 24kV with the switch-disconnector NAL, fuses and instrument current transformers
202 Fuse or link
203 Instrument current transformer
206 Protective insulating cover
207.2 Blocking of earthing switch
200.1
200
205.1
205
Fig. 3/27: Switch-disconnector compartment - open Fig. 3/28: Switch-disconnector compartment - closed
position. Insulating plate in the isolating position.
distance of switch-disconnector Insulating plate outside the isolating distance
of switch-disconnector
200.1 Position indicator of switch-disconnector 200 Switch-disconnector
205 Insulation partition wall 205 Insulation partition wall
205.1 Movable insulation plate
32/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
39
17.2
19.1
19
207.1
17
21
Fig. 3/29: Compartment of cable connection and Fig. 3/30: Compartment of cable connection and
earthing in panel with the switch-disconnector earthing in panel with the switch-disconnector
Earthing switch in the closed position Earthing switch in the open position
17 Floor cover – split 19 Main earthing bar

17.2 Reducer ring 19.1 Connection part
21 Cable clamp 39 Fastening rail
207.1 Position indicator of switch-disconnector
209
200.1
210
207.1
Fig. 3/31-1: Locking of side in the operating opening Fig.. 3/31-2: Locking of side in the operating opening
of the earthing switch in panel with the switch- of the switch-disconnector in panel with the
disconnector switch-disconnector
207.1 Position indicator of earthing switch 200.1 Position indicator of switch-disconnector

209 Lockable operating handle – Chubb lock 210 Lockable operating handle – padlock
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 33/106
3.13 Apparatus plug coding
10.5 10.4 10.1
B5 Coding:
(B5)
B2
(B1)
B1
(B2)
(...) The corresponding coding
47 48
designation for the control wiring
45 49 46 plug is given in brackets (10.2)
43 44
10 50 21 The coding pins can be fitted in
42 32
11 51 22
the control wiring socket (10.1)
1 33 and/or in the control wiring plug
12 52 23 (10.2).
2 34
13 53 24
3 35
14 25 Basic design:
4 54 36
15 26 The number of sockets is
5 37
16
55
27
optional, but the basic
6 56 38 assignment is 1, 8, 10, 20, 21,
17 28 31, 33 and 40.
7 57 39
18 29
8 40
19
58
30
Sockets and pins can be mixed
9 41 as required in the control wiring
20 31 socket (10.1) and control wiring
B3 B4 plug (10.2).
B6 (B3)
(B4) (B6)
10.4
Figure 3/25: Control wiring plug connector coding, shown for a 58-pole connector
10.1 Control wiring socket
10.4 Centring striking tabs
10.5 Bore for actuating pin of the control wiring plug for controlling the auxiliary switch
34/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
4. Dispatch and storage
4.1 Condition on delivery
At the time of dispatch, the UniGear panels are factory-assembled, the withdrawable parts are in the
service position and the doors are closed.
The factory-assembled panels are checked at the works for completeness in terms of the order and
simultaneously subjected to routine testing (normally without AC voltage testing of the busbars) to IEC
publication 62271-200, and are therefore tested for correct structure and function.
The busbars are not assembled. The busbar material, fasteners and accessories are packed
separately.
4.2 Packing
According to the kind of transport and country of destination, the panels remain unpacked or are welded
in foil and packed in seaworthy crates. A drying agent is provided to protect them against moisture:
• Panels with basic packing or without packing.
• Panels with seaworthy or similar packing (including packing for containerised shipments):
- Sealed in polyethylene sheeting
- Transport drying agent bags included
- Moisture indicator included
• Observe the directions for use of the drying agent bags. The following applies:
- Coloured indicator blue: contents dry
- Coloured indicator pink: contents moist (relative humidity above 40%).
4.3 Transport (Figure 4/1)

The transport units normally comprise individual panels and, in exceptional cases, small groups of
panels. The panels are each fitted with four lifting lugs.
Transport panels upright. Take the high centre of gravity into account. Only ever carry out loading
operations when it has been ensured that all precautionary measures to protect personnel and materials
have been taken and use the following:
• Crane
• Fork-lift truck and/or
• Manual trolley jack.
Loading by crane:
• Fit lifting ropes of appropriate load capacity with spring catches (eyebolt diameter: 30 mm)
• Keep an angle of at least 60° from the horizontal for the ropes leading to the crane hook.
• Hang the unit using ALL four eyebolts!
4.4 Delivery
The responsibilities of the consignee when the switchgear arrives at site include, but are not limited to,
the following:
• Checking the consignment for completeness and lack of any damage (e.g. also for moisture and its
detrimental effects). In case of doubt, the packing must be opened and then properly resealed, putting
in new drying agent bags, when intermediate storage is necessary.
• If any quantities are short, or defects or transport damage are noted, these must be:
- documented on the respective shipping document.
- notified to the relevant carrier or forwarding agent immediately in accordance with the relative liability
regulations.
Note:
Always take photographs to document any major damage.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 35/106
4.5 Intermediate storage
Optimum intermediate storage, where it is necessary, without any negative consequences depends on
compliance with a number of minimum conditions for the panels and assembly materials.
1.Panels with basic packing or without packing:
• A dry well-ventilated store room with a climate in accordance with IEC 60694.
• The room temperature must not fall below –5 °C.
• There must not be any other negative environmental influences.
• Store the panels upright.
• Do not stack panels.
• Panels with basic packing:
- Open the packing, at least partially.
• Panels without packing:
- Loosely cover with protective sheeting.
- Ensure that there is sufficient air circulation.
• Check regularly for any condensation until installation is started.
2. Panels with seaworthy or similar packing with internal protective sheeting:

• Store the transport units:
- protected from the weather,
- in a dry place,
- safe from any damage.
• Check the packing for damage.
• Check the drying agent (also see section 4.2):
- on arrival of the consignment,
- subsequently at regular intervals.
• When the maximum storage period, starting from the date of packing, has been exceeded:
- the protective function of the packing can no longer be guaranteed,
- take suitable action if intermediate storage is to continue.
Warning:
Do not walk on the roof of the panels (rupture points in pressure relief devices!).
The pressure relief devices and/or Ith limitors could by demaged.
Figure 4/1: Handling by crane

1.5 Lifting eyebolt
36/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5. Assembly of the switchgear at site
In order to obtain an optimum installation sequence and ensure high quality standards, site installation
of the switchgear should only be carried out by specially trained and skilled personnel, or at least by
personnel supervised and monitored by responsible persons.
5.1 General site requirements

On commencement of installation on site, the switch-room must be completely finished, provided with
lighting and the electricity supply, lockable, dry and with facilities for ventilation. All the necessary
preparations, such as wall openings, ducts, etc., for laying the power and control cables up to the
switchgear must already be complete. Where switchgear panels have top-mounted structures for
earthing switches or instrument transformers, it must be ensured that the ceiling height is sufficient for
the opening travel of the pressure relief plates.
The ceiling must be high enough for assembly of pressure relief duct and/or top mouted VT box and
earting switch box.
Compliance with the conditions for indoor switchgear according to IEC 60694, including the conditions
for the “minus 5 indoor” temperature class must be ensured.
5.2 Foundations (Figures 5/1 to 5/14-5)

We distinguish following 3 basic installation methods of switchgear in the switch room:
Method A – installation on the base irons of „C" profile shape
As standard it is recommended to install the switchgear on the base irons of „C" profile shape set into
the concrete floor of switch room. In this case we use for the fastening of units the special bolt blocks
(ABB delivers by request).
Method B – installation on the levelled concrete floor
The installation directly on the levelled concrete floor makes much higher demands on the levelling of
floor, which must, in this case, fulfil the same tolerances as the base irons during the installation method
A. The fastening is carried out by means of anchoring bolts in the concrete floor.
Method C – installation on the raised false floor
In this case the fastening of units is carried out by welding of outside panels to the steel floor frame in
the place where the frame exceeds the switchgear bottom, this means on the outside lateral walls of
units row. This method of installation is not recommended if the seismic resistance is required.
Generally it is possible to recommend the following procedure of switchgear anchoring and
namely for any from the cited methods of installation:
1) The switchgear panels are bolted together in the front and rear part into one unit
2) If the seismic resistance is not required, it is not necessary to attach each switchgear panel to the floor
or frame, but it suffices to fix outside panels in each raw of switchgear only.
3) If the seismic resistance is required, it is necessary to attach each switchgear panel to the floor or
frame. To reach the seismic resistance the special fixing system is used. This system makes preferably
use of steel floor frame with „C" profile shape but moreover with an addition special fixing element –
please contact the manufacturer for details.
Further given structural data guideline makes possible a rough calculation of the space required and
planning of the room design for a switchgear project.
When the final construction documents are compiled for the execution of building, the binding
data supplied by ABB for a particular case must always be taken into account!
Dimension chart of structural data (also see figures 5/1 to 5/14)
Rated voltage kV 12/17.5 kV 24 kV
Panel width FT mm 550 650 800 1000 800 1000
Aisle width 1) G mm 1300 1350 1500 1700 1500 1700
Door width mm 750 850 1000 1200 1000 1200
Door height 2) mm 2400 2400 2400 2400 2525 2525
Assembly opening in celing:
Width mm 1000 1000 1000 1200 1000 1200
Length mm 1500 1500 1500 1500 1800 1800
Ceiling load 3) kg/m2 1200 1200 1400 1400 900 850

1)
Pay attention to appropriate national standards.
2)
Applies to low voltage compartments of standard height.
3)
Approximate numbers depending on the type of panels.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 37/106
5.2.1 Method of installation A – Installation of the base irons:
The general foundation drawing is given in the figures 5/1 to 5/4 according to parameters of units.
• The base irons of „C" profile shape can be supplied by ABB manufacturer together with the switchgear.
Their installation is usually carried out by site personnel and should, if possible, be performed under
supervision of an ABB specialist. The base irons must be installed in the slab before finishing the floor:
• Rest the irons in the specified position on the concrete floor as shown in the relevant foundation
drawing and mark out holes for drilling in the place of prepared holes. Then drill the holes for anchoring
bolts i.e. for plugs 14 for fixing of base irons in the floor. Then put the plugs in holes and attach the
base irons to the floor slightly with the bolts 13 without end tightening to make possible the required
levelling.
• Carefully level base irons both longitudinally and transversally over the entire length and to the correct
height by putting under strips of suitable thickness and using a levelling instrument.
Tolerances for laying the floor frame are:
Evenness tolerance: ± 1 mm within a measuring length of 1 m
Straightness tolerance: 1 mm per 1 m, but not more than 3 mm over entire length of frame.
• After levelling of base irons tighten the bolts 13. The adjusted position of base irons on the concrete
floor must not be changed during this operation! Check again and if need be correct deviations.
• Weld Individual parts of base irons inside „C" profile in the seams together so that the conductive
connection is mutually reached. In the version of intermittent base irons intended for the switch-
disconnector panel of rated voltage 12/17,5 kV figure 5/4-1 the individual base irons must be
conductive connected by the welding of galvanized steel strips of min. dimensions 30 x 4 mm in the
shape of loop. The connection strips must avoid the opening for power cables so that they do not
obstruct the cables.
• Make necessary measures for perfect earthing of the base irons with galvanized steel strips of
dimensions min. 30 x 4 mm. Two earthing connections are recommended for the panel row longer as
approx. 5 panels.
• When the floor top covering is applied, carefully backfill the floor frame, leaving no gaps. The top edge
of floor frame should be 2 mm above the finished floor surface; the tolerance of this value is in the limits
of 0 to 5 mm. This facilitates erection and alignment of the switchgear panels. In some cases, this
means that the material thickness of an additional floor covering to be fitted later must be taken into
account separately.
• The base irons must not be subjected to any harmful impact or pressures, particularly during the
installation phase.
If these conditions are not respected, problems during assembly of the switchgear and possibly with
movement of the withdrawable parts, as well as opening a closing of the doors cannot be ruled out.
Attachment of units to the base irons of „C" shape (Figure 5/14-2)
The switchgear is attached to the base irons by means of special bolt blocks, which can be supply by
request.
• Put individual units of switchgear in successive steps on correct levelled installed base irons and level
them according to the relevant foundation drawings.
• Level the units and then bolt them together in the front and rear part.
• To attach to base irons insert into fixing holes in the bottom of units prepared special bolt blocks and
tighten.
5.2.2 Method of installation B – Fixing with anchoring bolts to concrete floor (Figure 5/14-1):
The general foundation drawing is given in the figures 5/9 to 5/13 according to parameters of units.
• Clean carefully the installation area of switchgear.
• On the slab, visibly trace according to the relevant drawing perimeter of all units making the
switchboard, taking the minimum wall and obstacle clearances into account.
• Level the floor both longitudinally and transversally; evenness tolerance is± 1 mm within a measuring
length of 1 m.
• Drill the floor at the foreseen fixing points, referring to the slab drilling drawings. To make the holes,
use a hammer drill with the bit according to used steel plugs.
• Insert the plugs in the holes and on the traced perimeters of units put the individual panels creating
switchgear.
• Fix the units with bolts with special washers (The coupling material is supplied by request).
• In the case of metal floor use the attachment according to the figure (Figure 5/14-3 or 5/14-4)
To make the holes, use a drill with a suitable bit for the type of fixing to be made (through orthreaded
hole).
38/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.2.3 Method of installation C – Fixing to a flouting floor – Figure 5/15:
The general foundation drawing is given in the figure 5/15 according to parameters of units.
In most cases the flouting floor is created by steel structure in which the welded steel frame is installed.
It is used the frame produced from suitable steel profiles. ABB does not supply this frame.
• Clean the installation area.
• After installation of frame make necessary measures for perfect earthing of frame with galvanized
steel strips of dimensions min. 30 x 4 mm. Two earthing connections are recommended for the panel
row longer as approx. 5 panels.
• Put units on the frame according to the relevant foundation drawings, taking the minimum wall and
obstacle clearances into account.
• Carry out the attachment by welding of outside panels to the steel floor frame in the place where the
frame exceeds the switchgear bottom, this means on the outside lateral walls of units row. This method
of installation is not recommended if the seismic resistance is required.
• In the case of metal floor use the attachment according to the figure (Figure 5/14-3 or 5/14-4)
To make the holes, use a drill with a suitable bit for the type of fixing to be made (through or threaded hole).
5.3 Assembly of the switchgear panels (Figures 3/3, 5/15 to 5/42)

Use screws of tensile class 8.8. The tightening torques for the busbar screw connections with dished
washer are as follows:
Recommended tightening torque 1) 2) Nm

Lubricant 3)
Thread Without Oil or grease
M6 10.5 4.5
M8 26 10
M10 44,1 20
M12 74,6 40
M16 165 80
1)
The rated tightening torques for fasteners without lubrication are based on a coefficient of friction for the thread of 0.14 (the actual
values are subject to an unavoidable range, in part not inconsiderable).
2)
Rated tightening torques for fasteners with lubrication in accordance with DIN 43 673 Standard .
3)
Thread and head contact surface lubricated.
Any tightening torques which deviate from those in the general table (e.g. for contact systems or device
terminals) must be taken into account as stated in the detailed technical documentation.
It is recommended that the threads and head contact surfaces of bolts should be lightly oiled or greased,
so as to achieve a precise rated tightening torque.
The individual installation stages are as follows:
• Remove withdrawable parts 13 from the switchgear panels and store them with suitable protection.
• Dismantle lifting eyebolts 1.5.
• Transport the switchgear panels to the prepared installation point following the sequence shown on
the switchgear plan.
• Remove vertical partitions 9 in front of the busbar compartments by releasing the fixing screws.
• Release the fixing screws and draw out horizontal partition 20 below the withdrawable part travel rails.
• Release and remove floor cover 17.
• Remove covers 43.2 and 43.3 from the vertical control wiring ducts at the front right and left of the
panel.
• If any top-mounted enclosures with busbar earthing switches or instrument transformers have been
removed for transport, bolt these in place in the specified position where the rear and middle pressure
relief plates would otherwise be located on the switchgear panels, and make the internal connections
again. (Figures 5/26 to 5/28, 5/33 to 5/38).
• Fit and screw the separate mechanism enclosures for any top-mounted earthing switches in the
specified position on the low voltage compartment with the front edge flush.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 39/106
Note the correct positions of the parts fitted on the hexagonal drive shaft supplied loose, and then
remove the parts from the shaft, discarding the rubber ring at the front.
Insert the drive shaft step by step at the front of the mechanism enclosure until it is completely fitted,
threading on the individual parts in the correct positions for the open position of the earthing switch.
Secure the setting rings. Adjust the mounting positions and operating moments of the auxiliary switches:
1. Adjust the positions of the auxiliary limit position switches in their slots in such a way that there is
a run-on of 0.5 mm in the fully operated position before the plunger reaches the stop (for safety
reasons).
2. The auxiliary limit position switch 78.4 for earthing switch ON must operate immediately after the
dead centre position of the toggle spring mechanism is reached in the closing process and the
automatic quick-closing process has started.
3. The auxiliary limit position switch 78.5 for earthing switch OFF must be operate during the opening
movement of the slide (78.2) 1 mm before the tab of the slide makes contact with the armature of
the de-energised locking magnet 78.6 (see Fig. 5/28).
Fit and screw down the lids.

• Align the switchgear panels on the floor frame for correct positioning and vertical alignment
(deviations of the panel edges from the vertical must not exceed 2 mm, especially at the front) and
bolt the panels together. It is advisable to start from the centre when assembling switchgears with
more than ten panels.
• When the switchgear has been properly assembled, fix the panels to the concrete floor using plugs,
or weld or adequately bolt them to the foundation frame.
5.4 Installation of the busbars and bushings (Figures 3/3, 5/22 to 5/34)
Access to busbars is possible either from above after dismounting of the pressure relief plate 1.1 (fig.
3/3), or from the front of the circuit breaker compartment. After circuit breaker 13 has been withdrawn
and horizontal partition 20 dismounted, partition 9 can be dismantled, which makes access to busbars
from the circuit breaker compartment possible.
• Install bushings 29 (for switchgears with busbar barriers only).
• Clean the insulation on the busbar sections with a soft, dry cloth, and check for insulation damage.
Remove greasy or adhesive dirt as described in section 7.3.
• Busbar connections:
– The silver plated surfaces of the connections must be cleaned with a metal-free non-woven cleaning
cloth and thinly and evenly coated with Isoflex Topas NB 52 grease.
– The non-silver plated surfaces of the connections are either brushed with a wire brush, preserving
the grease film, or cleaned with a metal-free non-woven cleaning cloth and evenly greased with a
thin coat of Isoflex Topas NB 52.
• Prepare insulating covers 58 and lids 58.5 to suit the relevant busbar connections and thread them
onto the busbar. (For insulated busbars only).
• Install the busbars panel by panel. Screw on the individual busbar elements one above the other
(depending on the system layout) and in line with the flat branch conductor. Use the hexagonal socket
head screws 163 provided. See the table above for the tightening torque. Use two dished washers for
each screw.
• Bolt one holder 58.1 to each end of the busbars to support insulating cover 58. The screws for holder
58.1 must be tightened with a lower torque. (For insulated busbars only).
• Position insulating covers 58 and lids 58.5 over the relevant bolted joint, and slide the lid onto the cover
until it clicks into place. (For insulated busbars only).
Note:
The connection of busbars is carried out with so called “stabilized connections”. This means that quality
of the copper busbar connections does not change depending on the operating time and therefore it is
not necessary to inspect tightness of busbar connections regularly. But this is on condition that correct
assembly is carried out as described above and especially that all connections are tightened with the
prescribed torque according to the table in sect. 5.3.
We recommend only inspecting tightness of busbar connections during repairs - see sect. 7.4.1.
40/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.4.1 Busbars and bushings for units 12/17.5 kV (Figures 5/21 to 5/26)
Busbars are made of copper and have a flat cross-section for rated current up to 2500 A. For 3150, 3600
and 4000 A, the busbars have a double D-shaped cross section. Branch conductors always have a flat
cross-section.
12/17.5 kV bushings are made of epoxy resin castings and are arranged as a single casting for all three
phases (see fig 5/22). For bus-tie units the bushings are single and are arranged in the lower part of the
unit. Bushings are held in bushing plates.
For 12 kV, the busbars are bare (without insulation) and without insulating covers up to 2000 A. 2500
A flat busbars and 3150, 3600 and 4000 A D-shaped busbars are insulated by means of shrink sheaths
and fitting with insulating covers. For 17.5 kV, the busbars are insulated and fitted with covers over the
whole current range.
5.4.2 Busbars and bushings for units 24 kV (Figures 5/29 to 5/34)

Busbars and branches are made of copper and both have a flat cross-section. Bushings are different
from the 12/17.5 kV ones. They are single for each phase and have an electrode inside, which must be
connected to the busbar. Busbars for 24 kV units are insulated by means of shrink sheaths and the
connection points are covered by insulating covers.
Assembly procedure for bushings – main (upper) busbar system:
Insert bushing 29 for the lower busbar into bushing plate 28 from the right side, and the middle and upper
one from the left side (see Fig. 5/29).
Lower bus-tie system:

Insert bushing 29 for the lower rear bus-tie into bushing plate 28.2 from the right side in contrast to the
procedure for the other two bushings (see Fig. 5/30).
Important note:
Always check that there is good contact between the metal tube in the bushing and the busbar
via contact spring 29.3. Ensure that the contact spring is in the correct position! (See Fig. 5/32).
5.5 Installation of the top-mounted boxes (Figures 5/26, 5/34)

For transport reasons, attachments to the panels are not completed at our works. As far as possible
however, they are pre-mounted.
5.5.1 Voltage transformer for busbar metering (Figures 5/26, 5/27, 5/34, 5/35)
• Top-mounted box 79 with screw fixing material in the set of bags “Top-mounted box for metering” must
be mounted on the busbar compartment.
Notes:
- In panels without busbar bushing plate 28, the partition between the busbar compartment and the
top-mounted box is necessary. They are installed at the works in the top-mounted box.
- As far as equipment with busbar partitioning is concerned (i.e. with bushing plate 28), the space
between the busbar compartment and the top-mounted box must remain open for purposes of
pressure relief.
• Connecting bars 2.2 with branch conductors 2 at the junction point must be screwed together
according to figures 5/26 and 5/34. However, if necessary, the additional spacer plate 3.2 or 3.3 and
threaded plate 3.4 or 3.8, as well as the screw fixing material from the “top-mounted box for metering”
set of bags must be used.
• Insulating cover 58 must be brought into position as is described in section 5.4.
• Intermediate box 79.1, with the screw fixing material from the “top-mounted box for metering” set of
bags must be mounted on the control cabinet. Conduction tube 79.2 must be positioned and inserted
in reducer rings 79.3.
• Secondary circuits from the voltage transformers must be led to the terminal strips and connected
according to the cable core markings and circuit diagram.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 41/106
5.5.2 Earthing switch for busbar earthing (Figures 5/26, 5/28, 5/34, 5/36 to 5/38)
• Top-mounted box 77 with screw fixing material from the “top-mounted box for earthing” set of bags
must be mounted on the busbar compartment.
• Operating mechanism box 78 with screw fixing material from the “top-mounted box for earthing” set
of bags must be mounted on the control cabinet.
• Pre-mounted single parts of hexagonal shaft 78.1 must be removed.
Please pay attention to the sequence and angling of the parts!
• Hexagonal shaft from the operating mechanism box must be pushed through into the bevel gear of
the earthing switch.
Sequence and angles of the part must be restored!
• Connecting bars 2.2 with the branch conductors 2 at the junction point must be screwed together
according to figure 5/26 and 5/34. However, if necessary, additional spacer plate 3.3 or 3.2 and
threaded plate 3.4 or 3.8, as well as the screw fixing material from the “top-mounted box for earthing”
set of bags must be used.
• Insulating cover 58 must be brought into position as described in section 5.4.
Note:
The auxiliary switches for the earthing switch are adjusted at the works. Problem-free operation is only
guaranteed if the working elements on the hexagonal shaft are correctly mounted.
Because of final installation of the earthing switch and operating mechanism on site, it may be necessary
to make precise adjustment of the auxiliary switches. In that case, the following is important:
• The auxiliary switch OFF 78.5 must be operated:
- before slide 78.2 has uncovered half of the opening in front of the hexagonal shaft and
- before the lower edge of the slide has touched the anchor of locking magnet 78.6.
• The auxiliary switch ON 78.4 must be operated
- before the toggle spring of the earthing switch has reached its dead centre point.
• The push-rod of the auxiliary switch must still have about 0.5 mm to go to the end position in the
operated position.
5.6 Pressure relief ducts (Figure 3/1-3, 5/5 to 5/7, 5/17)

• The pressure relief duct is supplied dismantled in single parts. The rear and front wall correspond, as
far as length is concerned, with the appropriate panel width. They are joined together by means of the
attachment strips.
• The screw fixing material is contained in the “pressure relief duct” set of bags. Rivet nuts are already
provided in the metal sheets.
Note:
The rear pressure relief flap must be mounted according to figure 5/17.
Details regarding connection to the wall and a discharge grating for pressure relief outside the
switchroom will be agreed on with the customer.
5.7 Cable connection

5.7.1 Power cables (Figures 5/18, 5/19, 5/41, 5/42, 5/43, 5/44)
The standard method for entry of power cables in the switchgear is shown in Fig. 5/18 and 5/19. The
cables are conveyed from below through floor covering 17, which is divided at the cable entry point. The
cables go through rubber reducer rings 17.2, which can be adapted to the required cable diameter in
a range from 27 to 62 mm. Cables are fastened in the panel by means of cable clamps mounted on cable
strips, which are part of the panel floor covering. The clamps make it possible to fasten cables with
diameters between 35 and 54 mm.
42/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Cable sealing ends are mounted on the cable cores according to the manufacturer’s instructions. It is
possible to use cable sealing ends of different manufactures (e.g. Pirelli, Raychem etc.), but it is
necessary to keep the length of the cable ends, including cable sealing ends, which is given by the
distance of cable connecting bars 23 from the panel floor covering. These bars have different versions,
which differ in their number of parallel cables and the values of rated and short-circuit currents. See Fig.
5/41, 5/42.
The bars are equipped with holes for M16 screws. If M12 screws are used for cable connections, special
washers with the diameter for M12 screws are supplied. In all cases, the earthing of cable screens is
carried out on the strip-holding cable clamps. The cable strip is connected to the earth potential.
It is also possible to place the removable arrangement of voltage transformers in the cable compartment.
These can be fitted with HV fuses similar to those in the measuring panel. Three fixed mounted surge
arresters can also be installed here. But in both these cases the number of parallel cables must be
reduced – see the table.
Connection of cables in typical panels:
Rated Panel Max. number Max. cross Range of Range of

voltage width of parallel section of cable clamp reducer ring
cables cables
(kV) (mm ) in phase (mm2) (mm) (mm)
12 550 3 600
1)
650 3
12/17.5 800 6 2) 630
1000 35 - 54 27 - 62
24 800 3 1) 500
2)
1000 6
1)
In the case where there are removable voltage transformers on the truck, or surge arresters are used, the number of parallel cables
is reduced to a max. of 2 per phase.
2)
In the case where there are removable voltage transformers on the truck, or surge arresters are used, the number of parallel cables
is reduced to a max. of 4 per phase.
Cable connection in the panel with switch-disconnector:
Rated Panel Max. number Max. cross Range of Range of

voltage width of parallel section of cable clamp reducer ring
cables cables
(kV) (mm ) in phase (mm2) (mm) (mm)
12/17,5 800 1 240 35 - 54 27 - 62

24 1000
Important notice:
Connection with single-core plastic insulated cables is presumed in the typical panels. In the case of any
atypical cable connections or of special cables (e.g. three-core cables, cables with paper or special
insulation etc.), an agreement must be reached between the customer and manufacturer.
Mounting procedure for power cables:

• Power cables must be inserted, cut to length and stripped.
• Reducer rings 17.2 must be adapted to the cable diameter and fitted onto the cable.
• Cable sealing ends 16 must be prepared and mounted on cable cores according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
• Cable eyes must be connected to the prepared connections bars 23 with strain relief.
• Earthing of cables must be connected.
• Individual parts of the floor covering must be mounted.
• Reducer rings 17.2 must be moved down so that nuts in the rings fit into the corresponding recesses
in the floor coverings. In this way, the cable passages are sealed.
• Cables must be fastened in the prepared cable clamps 21 (the maximum tightening torque
applicable to the clamp screws is 9 +2 Nm).
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 43/106
5.7.2 Control cables (Figures 3/3, 5/20)
The control cables are conveyed into the panel through the control wiring duct 1.2 on the left-hand panel
side.
Mounting procedure:
• Insert the cables into the control wiring duct 1.2 on the left-hand side (Fig. 3/3). The duct is covered
by covers 43.1, 43.2 (Fig. 5/20).
• Fasten the control cables at the top end of the duct, strip the insulation and convey cable control cores
into the low voltage compartment D, after the terminal strip frame has been swung up (Fig. 5/39).
• Connect control cables to the terminal strip according to the circuit diagram.
• Make the control wiring connections to adjacent panels using bushing 24 (Fig. 5/15).
5.8 Earthing the switchgear (Figures 3/3, 5/19)

• Connect main earthing bar 19 with connections 19.1 provided in every panel.
• Protection wiring connection of the floor frame or the erected raised false floor respectively, should
be made.
• Connect the earthing conductor coming from the earth electrode, preferably via a removable bolted
connection for testing purposes, to the main earthing bar 19 of the switchgear.
5.9 Laying the ring circuits

The ring circuits are supplied rolled up in a bundle in the control cabinet or in the accessories. They are
marked and fitted with ferrules or connectors at both ends. Openings are provided in the side walls of
the control cabinet for these lines to be looped through from panel to panel.
5.10 Final erection work

• Check painted areas of the switchgear for possible damage, touching up where required (see also
section 7.4.1).
• Check bolt connections and tighten where required, in particular all those carried out during on-site
erection of the busbars and earthing system.
• After the lifting eyebolts have been removed, the Ith limiter auxiliary switch (if delivered) must be
mounted and adjusted:
- The auxiliary switch holder is fixed by means of screws 49.5 in the panel (Fig. 5/40).
- The auxiliary switch holder must be positioned horizontally (Fig. 5/40).
- The control pin of the auxiliary switch must be moved to the centre of the hole in the pressure relief
flap.
- Adjust the auxiliary switch according to figure 5/40.
- If the auxiliary switch is mounted and adjusted according to the above instructions, checking during
regular inspections is not necessary.
• Clean the switchgear thoroughly.
• Remove all foreign bodies from the panels.
• Correctly replace all coverings, etc. removed during erection and connection.
• In the enclosure, any remaining openings must be closed if they are no longer needed.
• Check the isolating contacts and interlocking mechanisms for smooth motion, and grease again with
Isoflex Topas NB 52 where necessary (see section 7.4.1).
• Withdrawable circuit-breaker parts must be inserted and the control wirings connected.
• Panels doors must be properly closed.
44/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.11 Floor drawings
Structural data
Top view
A
11
35
50 1)
100 800 100 100 600 100 100 450 50 450 50

12
< 2500A
< 2000A
< 1250A
< 1250A
2)
C
30
cca 20
75 75 75 75 75
801) FT=1000 FT=800 FT=650 FT=550 nxFT 801)
A 10
1)
G
TB
TH
Section A-A
G 1) C2) 50 1)
843 116 13
50 1)
14
>0 <5
25 25
4
200 94 670 240

50
80
Fig. 5/1: UniGear 12/17,5 kV up to the nominal current of T-offs 2500 A
Guideline structural data for foundation frame on concrete floor
It is not valid for the panel with switch-disconnector
C Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is C = 1340 mm, in other cases
C = 1300 mm – however always onsider annotation 2)
G Width of operating aisle
FT Panel width
TB Door width = FT + 200 mm
TH Door height = panel height + 200 mm
1) Min. dimensions
2) Dimension must be verified in documentation of the relevant order
10 Door
11 Rear cover
12 Side end cover
13 Screw
14 Steel dowel
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 45/106
Structural data
Stavební údaje
A Pohled
Top shora
view
11
85
35
1)
100
50
100 800 100 100 800 100 100 600 100 100 450 100
12
3150/4000A
2)
< 2500A
< 2000A
< 1250A
C
30
cca 20
75 75 75 75
1) 1)
80 FT=1000 FT=1000 FT=800 FT=650 nxFT 80
A
1)
10
G
TB
TH
Section
řez A-AA-A
1) 2) 1)
G C 100
843 166 13
1)
50
14 >0 <5
4
25 25
200 94 670 290
50
80
Fig. 5/2: UniGear 12/17,5 kV for the nominal current of T-offs 3150/4000 A
C Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is C = 1390 mm, in other cases C
= 1350 mm – however always consider annotation 2)
FT Panel width
1) Min. dimensions
10 Door
11 Rear cover
12 Side end cover
13 Screw
14 Steel dowel
46/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Stavební údaje
Structural data
Pohled
Top shora
view
A
11
40
1)
50
cca 20
12
30
< 2500A
< 1250A
< 1250A
2)
C
100 800 100 100 600 100 100 600 100
75 75 75
1) 1)
80 FT=1000 FT=800 FT=800 nxFT 80
A
1)
10
G
TB
TH
řez A-A
Section A-A
1) 2) 1)
G C 50
1300 150 13
1)
50
14
>0 <5
4
25 25
200 170 785 255
50
80
Fig. 5/3: UniGear 24 kV

C Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is C = 1560 mm, in other cases C
= 1520 mm – however always consider annotation 2)
FT Panel width
1) Min. dimensions
10 Door
11 Rear cover
12 Side end cover
13 Screw
14 Steel dowel
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 47/106
Stavební údaje
Structural data
Pohled shora
Top view
A
11
35
1)
50
545
545
545
160 300 160 300 160 300 12
1004
2)
C
30
600
600
600
cca 20
200
75 75 75
1) 1)
80 FT=800 FT=800 FT=800 nxFT 80
A
1)
10
G
TB
TH
řez A-A
Section A-A
1) 2) 1)
G C 50
843 116 13
1)
50
14
>0 <5
4
25 25
200
50
80
Fig. 5/4-1: UniGear 12/17,5 kV with Switch-disconnector NAL

C Panel depth is C=1340 mm or 1300 mm according to the depth of the other cubicles – however always
FT Panel width
1) Min. dimensions
2) Dimension must be verifed in documentation of the relevant order
10 Door
11 Rear cover
12 Side end cover
13 Screw
14 steel dowel
48/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Stavební údaje
Structural data
Pohled shora
Top view
A
11
40
1)
50
cca 20
580
580
150 300 150 300
12
30
1210
2)
C
800
800
200
75 75
1) 1)
80 FT=1000 FT=1000 nxFT 80
A
1)
10
G
TB
TH
Section A-A
řez A-A
1) 2) 1)
G C 50
13
1300 150
1)
50
14
>0 <5
4
25 25
200
50
80
Fig. 5/4-2: UniGear 24 kV with Switch-disconnector NAL

C Panel depth is C = 1560 mm or 1520 mm according to the depth of the other cubicles – however always
FT Panel width
TH Door heigh = panel height + 200 mm
1) Min. dimensions
10 Door
11 Rear cover
12 Side end cover
13 Screw
14 Steel dowel
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 49/106
16 17 6 8
A2)
14
10
12 9
Figure 5/5: Example of 12/17,5 kV switchgear up to 2500A on foundation frame on concrete floor.
Panel with pressure relief to the outside.
A Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is
A=1340 mm, in other cases A=1300 mm - however always consider annotation 2)
Caption to fig. 5/5 to 5/7:

1) Minimum dimensions
2) Dimension must be verified according to documentation of the relevant order
1 Operator aisle
6 Control cabinet (optional)
8 Opening for ventilation
9 Height of cable base - as required
10 Concrete - see also fig. 5/8
12 Opening for power cables
14 Door
16 Wall opening for pressure relief
17 Pressure relief duct
B2)
Figure 5/6: Example of 12/17,5 kV switchgear for 3150/4000A on foundation frame on concrete floor.
B Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is
B=1390 mm, in other cases B=1350 mm - however always consider annotation 2)
50/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
C2)
Figure 5/7: Example of 24 kV switchgear on foundation frame on concrete floor.

C Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them is
C=1560 mm, in other cases C=1520 mm - however always consider annotation 2)
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 51/106
Additional details for proparation of footprint – It is not valid for the panels with Switch-disconnector
81
81
205
205
100 B 100 100 B 100
843
843
670
670
1235
1235
360
360
200
200
311
311
66
66
75 75
105 A 105 105 A 105

FT FT
Fig. 5/9-1: 12/17,5 kV – 650/800/1000 mm wide units Fig. 5/9-2: 12/17,5 kV – 650/800/1000 mm wide units
– anchoring bolt fixing system – base iron fixing system
FT A B
(width of cubicle)
mm mm mm
650 440 450
800 590 600
1000 790 800
37
37
843
843
60 430 60 60 430 60
1231
1231
300
300
50 200
50 200
340
340
200
200
311
311
50
50
70 70 70 70
72
72
105 340 105 105 340 105

550 550
Fig. 5/9-3: 12/17,5 kV – 550 mm wide units Fig. 5/9-4: 12/17,5 kV – 550 mm wide units
52/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Additional details for proparation of footprint – It is not valid for the panels with Switch-disconnector
110
110
215
215
785
785
1300
1300
1450
1450
100 600 100 100 600 100
75 75
450
450
200
200
80
80
40
40
105 590 105 105 590 105
800 800
Obr. 5/10-1: 24 kV – 800 mm wide units Obr. 5/10-2: 24 kV – 800 mm wide units
– anchoring bolt fixing system - base iron fixing system
110
110
215
215
785
785
1450
1450
1300
1300
100 800 100 100 800 100
75 75
450
450
200
200
80
80
40
40
105 790 105 105 790 105
1000 1000
Obr. 5/11-1: 24 kV – 1000 mm wide units Obr. 5/11-2: 24 kV –1000 mm wide units
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 53/106
Additional details for proparation of footprint – It is not valid for the panels with Switch-disconnector only
160 300 160 300
81
81
510
510
843
843
1235
1235
600
600
200
200
311
311
66
66
75 75
105 590 105 105 590 105

800 800
Obr. 5/12-1: 12/17,5 kV – cubicle with Switch-disconnector Obr. 5/12-2: 12/17,5 kV – cubicle with Switch-disconnector
150 300 150 300
110
110
540
540
1450
1450
1300
1300
800
800
75 75
200
200
80
80
40
40
105 790 105 105 790 105
1000 1000
Obr. 5/13-1: 24 kV – cubicle with Switch-disconnector Obr. 5/13-2: 24 kV – cubicle with Switch-disconnector
54/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
80
80
Æ 16
Æ 16
Figure 5/14-1: anchoring bolts on concrete floor Figure 5/14-2: base irons on concrete floor
M 12
M 12
Figure 5/14-3: through hole on metal structure Figure 5/14-4: threaded hole on metal structure
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 55/106
Stavební údaje
Structural data
Top view
Pohled shora
1)
100 A B
B
2)
A
20 20 20 20 20
x) x) x) x)
10 10 10 10 10
1) 1)
80 FT FT n x FT FT 80
1)
A
G
TB
TH
Řez A-A
Section A-A
1) 2) 1)
A 100
Example of profiles
Příklad profilů pro for foundation
základový rám na zdvojenou
frame for a raised false floor
podlahu
Řez B-B
Section A-A
1) B
1)
60
B C
80
800
6
42
Pohled
View BB
Jmenovité
Rated Hloubka
Panel B B C 1)
C 1) 30
voltage
napětí depht A 2) A 2)
skříně
kV
kV m m m m m m
60
12/17,5 up
doto2500A
2500A 1340/1300 135 135
80
12/17,5 1340/1300 12351235

12/17,5 for 3150/4000A
12/17,5 pro 3150/4000A 1390/1350
1390/1350
185
185
24 1560/1520 1450 140
25 1560/1520 1450 140
2,5
Obr. 5/14-5: Guideline structural data for a raised false floor – UniGear 12, 17,5 and 24 kV
A Larger dimension is valid for the cubicle with circuit breaker HD4 including combination with them, in
other cases smaller dimension is valid – however always consider annotation 2)

FT Panel width
1) Min. dimensions
x) Max. dimensions
56/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.12 Photos assembly
1.5
27
27
1.11
28
1.9
1.9
1.3 Main earthing bar slot

1.4 Bore
1.4 1.5 Lifting lug
1.9 Threaded bush, for switchgear assembly
1.11 Bore, for control wiring bushing 24
27 Shim plate - it is mounted instead bushing plate 28 on
1.3 panels without busbar barriers
28 Bushing plate
Figure 5/15: For bolting the switchgear panels together, through holes are provided on the left-hand side and threaded bushes
on the right-hand side, near the front and rear edges of the side walls, and through holes on both sides in the central
part of the walls
1)
26
Figure 5/17: Schematic diagram of the pressure relief duct.

The components are assembled panel by panel
and bolted together with overlaps at the panel
joints.
50 pressure relief duct
1) If the switchgear is equipped with a pressure
relief duct, the pressure relief flap for the cable
Figure 5/16: End panel of a switchboard with bolted-on cover connection compartment is fixed to the rear side
plate of the panel and will open to the front (into the
26 Cover plate duct) in case of an arc fault.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 57/106
39
6.1
23
19.1 21 17 17.2 19 19.2

17.2
17
Figure 5/19: Partial view of the cable compartment, prepared
here for connection of triple cables
Figure 5/18: View into the cable connection compartment, 17 Floor cover, split
max. six parallel cables possible 17.2 Reducer ring
19 Main earthing bar
6.1 Earthing switch position indicator 19.1 Connecting link
17 Floor cover, split 19.2 Earthing connection pin
17.2 Reducer ring 21 Cable clamp
23 Cable connection bar 39 Mounting rail, conncted to earth potential
43.1
9
1.8
20
43.2
5
Figure 5/20: View into the high voltage area at the front Figure 5/21: View into the busbar compartment, shown
without insulating covers
1.8 Central catch 2 Branch conductor
20 Horizontal partition, removable 3 Busbar
43.1 Duct cover for external control cables 5 Tulip isolating contact
43.2 Duct cover for external control cables 9 Partition, removable
58/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.13 Busbar junctions and partitioning drawings (12, 17.5 kV)
L1
3
28
29.1
L2
29.2
2
29
9.3
L3
a) Bushings with busbar supports with double D-shaped conductor b) Bushings with busbar supports with single flat conductor
Figure 5/22: Panels - 12/17.5 kV - Arrangement of the bushing plate and busbar bushing on the right-hand panel side wall. View
of the inside
2 Branch conductor 29 Busbar bushing
3 Busbar section 29.1 Busbar support for single conductor
9.3 Partition 29.2 Busbar support for double conductor
28 Bushing plate
29.4 29.4
L1
28.2 L1 28.2
L2 L2 29.1
L3 29.2 L3
Figure 5/23: Panels - 12/17.5 kV - Arrangement of the bushing plate and busbar bushings on the right-hand panel side wall
in bus-tie panels. View of the inside
28.2 Bushing plate
29.1 Busbar support for flat conductor
29.2 Busbar support for D-shaped conductor
29.4 Busbar bushing
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 59/106
Rated busbar current
≤ 1250 A ≤ 2500 A ≤ 2500 A ≤ 4000 A
≤ 1250 A ≤ 1250 A ≤ 2500 A ≤ 4000 A
Rated branch current
Figure 5/24: Panels – 12/17,5 kV – Busbar junctions
2 Branch conductor
3 Busbar section
3.2 Spacer plate, 5 mm thick
3.3 Spacer plate,15 mm thick
3.4 M10 Bolt
59 Insulation cover – It is necessary only for 12kV for rated busbar current of 3150/4000A
and for 17,5kV in the whole range of rated currents or in case of request to the higher testing voltage
Detail X
Figure 5/25: Panels – 12/17,5 kV: Installation of the busbars. The lower picture shows the installation at the busbar ends
29 Busbar bushing 58.5 Lid

58 Insulating cover 58.6 Washer, ISO 7089
58.1 Support for cover (at end panels only) 58.7 Washer, 25 mm diameter
60/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
2.2
3.8
3.2
3.2
Figure 5/26: Panels - 12/17.5 kV - Bar connection to the top-mounted box. The figure shows the arrangement in panels the
busbar ends
2 Branch conductor
2.2 Connection bar
3.8 Tapped plate
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 61/106
5.14 Busbar junctions and partitioning drawings (24 kV)
a) Bushing with busbar supports for busbar systems with double b) Version with busbar supports for busbar systems with single
conductor conductor
Figure 5/29: Panels - 24 kV - Arrangement of the bushing plate and busbar bushings on the right-hand panel side wall with
busbar barriers. View of the inside
2 Branch conductor
3 Busbar section
28 Bushing plate
29 Busbar bushing
29.1 Busbar support for single conductor
29.2 Busbar support for double conductor
a) Bushing with busbar supports for busbar systems with double b) Version with busbar supports for busbar systems with single
conductor conductor
Figure 5/30: Panels - 24 kV - Arrangement of the bushing plate and busbar bushings on the right-hand panel side wall in bus-
tie panels. View of the inside
28.2 Bushing plate

29 Busbar bushing
29.1 Busbar support for single condudtor
29.2 Busbar support for double conductor
62/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Rated busbar current
≤ 1250 A ≤ 2500 A ≤ 2500 A
≤ 1250 A ≤ 1250 A ≤ 2500 A
Rated branch current
Figure 5/31: Panels - 24 kV - Busbar junctions
2 Branch conductor
3 Busbar section
3.4 M10Bolt
58 Insulating cover
Important note:
The contact springs 29.3 must be inserted
during the installation of busbars. These contact
springs make the connection between the
busbar 3 and the metal tube 29.4 and prevent
Figure 5/32: Panels - 24 kV - detail of the busbar bushing, sectional view damage caused by partial discharges inside
the bushing on live busbars.
3 Busbar
29 Busbar bushing Always check that there is good contact
29.2 Busbar support for double conductor between the metal tube 29.4 in the bushing and
29.3 Contact spring the busbars via the contact spring.
29.4 Metal tube
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 63/106
58.5 58.1 165 165 58 2 58.5 3
(10)
During assembly, cut out the insulating cover and lid to fit the cross
section of the feeder bar or busbar.
(58.6) 163 164 58.7
a) Arrangement for 1250 A branch current and 1600 or 2500 A

busbar current
58.5 3.5 165 2 165 58 2 58.5 3

(10)
b) Arrangement for 2500 A branch and busbar current
58.1 58.7 163 164(58.6) 165 3
Figure 5/33: Panels - 24 kV - Arrangement of the busbar and branch conductors at the busbar ends. In continuous busbars,
the connections are similar, but without lid holder 58.1 and without spacer plate 3.5.
2 Branch conductor
3 Busbar section
3.5 Spacer plate
58 Insulating cover
58.1 Lid holder
58.5 Lid for insulating cover
(58.6) Washer ISO 7089
58.7 Washer 25 mm diameter
163 M10 hexagon socket head screw
164 M10 nut
165 10 mm spring washer
64/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
58.5 3.5 (58.6) 3.4 58 162 2.2 58.5 3
(35)
58.1 58.7 163 165 2 3
3.3 3,4 162 2.2

(10)
58.1 58.7 163 (58.6) 165 2 3
3.3 3.4 3.5

35 25
M10 35 15
24
24
50
80
80
32
32
32
70
Figure 5/34: Panels 24 kV - Bolted busbar joint for top mounted box, shown for left-hand busbar end. In continuous busbars
is the connection similary, but without the lid holder 58.1 and without the spacer plate 3.5.
2 Branch conductor 58.1 Lid holder

2.2 Branch conductor to the top-mounted box 58.5 Lid for insulating cover
3 Busbar section (58.6) Washer 2 mm
3.3 Spacer plate, 10 mm thick 58.7 Washer 3 mm
3.4 Threaded plate 162 Cylinder screw
3.5 Spacer plate 163 M10 hexagon socket head screw
58 Insulating cover 165 10 mm spring washer
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 65/106
5.15 Top mounted boxes drawings (12, 17.5 kV)
79
79.2 79.3 79.1
28.3
Figure 5/27: Panels - 12/17.5 kV - Top-mounted box with

voltage transformers for busbar metering. The
figure shows the arrangement in panels without
the busbar bushing plate 28 (see the notes in
section 5.5.1)
28.3 Partitioning
79 Top mounted box with voltage transformer
66/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
77 78
78.1
Figure 5/28: Panels - 12/17.5 kV - Top-mounted box with

earthing switch for busbar earthing
77 Top-mounted box for top mounted earth-

ing switch
78 Operating mechanism box
78.1 Operating shaft
78.2 Slide
78.4 Auxiliary switch ON
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 67/106
5.16 Top mounted boxes drawings (24 kV)
79.4
79
79.2 79.3 79.1
2.3
28
Figure 5/35: Panels - 24 kV - Top-mounted box with high voltage transformers for busbar metering. The figure shows the
arrangement in panels with busbar bushing plate 28 and bushings 29
2.3 Flat branch conductor for voltage transformers

28 Bushing plate
79 Top-mounted box for busbar voltage transformers
79.1 Intermediate box
79.2 Conductor tube
79.3 Reducer ring
79.4 Pressure relief flap
77
78.1 78
2.2
Figure 5/36: Panels - 24 kV - Top-mounted box with earthing switch for busbar earthing. The arrangement is the same as the
figure above
2.2 Flat branch conductor for earthing switch

77 Top-mounted box for earthing switch
78 Operating mechanism box
78.1 Hexagonal shaft
68/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
Figure 5/37: The earthing switch drive shaft is supplied loose when the top-mounted boxes are removed for transport purposes.
View for the open position of the earthing switch with individual mechanism parts fitted in the positions for correct
operation
Figure 5/38: Operating mechanism area of top-mounted earthing switch in detail. Follow the sequence and arrangement of
the parts on the drive shaft precisely when assembling. The figure shows the arrangement for the open position
of the earthing switch
78.4 Auxiliary limit position switch for earthing switch ON

78.5 Auxiliary limit position switch for earthing switch OFF
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 69/106
5.17 LVC swivel plate photos
Figure 5/39: Terminal frame swung up for connection works
5.18 Ith limitors drawings

11.5
+0,5
49.2
-0
55
PANEL
A) IT IS VALID FOR MICROSWITCH OF TYPE CROUZET
11.5
11.5
49.2
+0,5
49.2
-0
49.5
41,5
49.4
PANEL
B) IT IS VALID FOR MICROSWITCH OF TYPE M1S 6610
Figure 5/40: Auxiliary Ith limiter switch. It may be necessary to move the auxiliary switches into their service position when the
lifting eyebolts have been removed
It is necessary to adjust the centre of the switch knob of the auxiliary switch to the centre of the pressure relief flap’s
hole. Correct value of the adjustment of the auxiliary switches’ height in pressed position according to the particular
type of the switch is on the figure A) or B).
11.5 Ith limiter

49.2 Pressure relief flap, made of steel sheet
49.4 Rupture bolt (plastic)
49.5 Socket screw
70/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.19 Cross sections of cable compartment
5.19.1 12 and 17.5 kV units (standard)
23
A
C C C C C B
D1)
17.2 21
In width Ith max. number A B C

of cables
A mm kA in one phase mm mm mm
630 1 840 –
1000 650 31.5 535
1250 3 480 180
1250 40 465
1600 800
2000
1600 31.5/40 440
2000 6 460 100
2500 1000
3150
40 455
4000
Figure 5/41: Dimension of power cable connection of UniGear 12/17,5 kV panels
D Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 is 1340 mm, in other cases 1300 mm - however always consider
annotation 1)
Panel depth for rated current 3150 to 4000 A with circuit breaker HD4 is 1390 mm, in other cases
1350 mm - however always consider annotation 1)

17.2 Reducer ring
21 Cable clamp
23 Cable connection bar
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 71/106
5.19.2 24 kV units (standard)
23
A
C C C C C B
D1)
17.2 21
In width Ith max. number A B C

of cables
A mm kA in one phase mm mm mm
1000 800
1250
3 497 608 180
1000
1250 25
1600 1000
2000 6 432 645 100
2500
Figure 5/42: Dimension of power cable connection of UniGear 24 kV panels
D Panel depth with circuit breaker HD4 is 1560 mm, in other cases 1520 mm - however always consider
annotation 1)

17.2 Reducer ring
21 Cable clamp
72/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
5.19.3 12 and 17.5 kV units (switch disconnector)
23
450
230 170 170 235

800 D
1)
21 17.2
Figure 5/43: Dimensions of cable connection in panels of switchgear UniGear with 12/17,5 kV switch-disconnector
D The depth of panel with the switch-disconnector in combination with HD4 circuit
breaker panels is recommended to 1340 mm, in other cases 1300 mm – take always
into account the note 1)
1) The dimension must be verified according to the documentation of relevant order

17.2 Reducer ring
21 Cable clamp
5.19.4 24 kV units (switch disconnector)
23
450
276.5 275 275 236

1)
1000 D
21 17.2
Figure 5/44: Dimensions of cable connection in panels of switchgear UniGear with 24 kV switch-disconnector
D The depth of panel with the switch-disconnector in combination with HD4 circuit
breaker panels is recommended to 1560 mm, in other cases 1520 mm – take always
into account the note 1)
1) The dimension must be verified according to the documentation of relevant order

17.2 Reducer ring
21 Cable clamp
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 73/106
5.19.5 12 and 17.5 kV units (series 550)
600
50
328
105 428
35 1230 75
1340
In width Ith max. number A

of cables
A mm kA in one phase mm
630
550 25 2 105
1250
Figure 5/45: Dimension of power cable connection of UniGear series 550, 12 and 17.5 kV panels
74/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5, en
6. Operation of the switchgear
Note on safety at work

The relative work and operating procedures must be carried out carefully by trained specialists familiar
with the installation, taking into account all the relative safety regulations according to the IEC and other
relevant professional bodies, as well as any local and work regulations and instructions.
Warning:
Do not walk on the top surfaces of the switchgear panels (rupture points for pressure relief).
The pressure relief devices could be demaged!
6.1 Commissioning
6.1.1 Preparatory work (Figures 3/13, 3/23)
In preparation for commissioning, the following work must be carried out prior to connection with the
high voltage power supply:
• Check the general condition of the switchgear for any damage or defects.
• Visually inspect the switching devices, withdrawable parts, isolating contacts, insulating parts, etc.
• Check connection of the main earthing bar to the installation earthing conductor (following the
appropriate safety regulations).
• Check the paintwork for damage and, where necessary, touch up as described in section 7.4.
• Remove all residues of materials, foreign bodies and tools from the switchgear.
• Clean the switchgear, rubbing down insulating parts with a soft, dry, clean, non-fraying cloth. Remove
any greasy or sticky dirt as described in section 7.3.
• Correctly remount all covers etc. removed during assembly and testing procedures.
• Transport caps 13.9 on vacuum circuit-breakers - if still fitted - must be removed.
• Pole tube lids 13.10 on vacuum circuit-breakers may be fitted in certain systems and on certain circuit-
breakers. Check that they are fitted correctly.
• Lifting eyebolts 13.13 on high current vacuum circuit-breakers must be removed if still fitted.
• Preparatory works for SF6 circuit-breakers:
- Clean the insulating parts with clean dry cloth.
- Check that the upper and lower terminals are clean and free of any deformation caused by shocks
received during transport and storage.
- It is advisable to check the SF6 gas pressure.
• Perform AC voltage testing of the main circuits according to IEC 62271-200 where necessary. Pay
special attention to voltage transformers and cables, etc. during this procedure. A testing and earthing
module 142 can be used to make the connections (see section 6.3.2).
• Switch the auxiliary and control voltage on.
• Carry out testing operations on switching devices manually or by electrical control, and simultaneously
observe the relative position indicators.
• Check mechanical and electrical interlocks for effectiveness, without using force.
• Set the protective devices in the switchgear to the required values and check their function with test
equipment.
• In switchgear panels with an additional ventilation system for high current circuit-breakers (required
for ambient temperature higher than > 40 °C and/or higher frequency - 60Hz -according to section
1.3 and figure 6/20 and 6/21), flap 20.3 hanging in partition 20 must rest loosely against leaf spring
20.4 (with the centrifugal fan at a standstill, if fitted ). This is not standard.
To check:
– Insert a suitable screwdriver through opening 20.5 in horizontal partition 20 and into bracket 20.6
on flap 20.3.
– Swing flap 20.3 upwards and allow it to rest loosely again on leaf spring 20.4.
– If the flap is in the locked position, use the screwdriver to press leaf spring 20.4 downwards by approx.
5 mm to release the lock before swinging the flap.
– If any centrifugal fans controlled in relation to primary current are fitted, also check that these function
correctly.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 75/106
• On motorized withdrawable parts, check the direction of rotation of the travel motor in accordance
with section 7.5.4.
• For any other matters regarding operation of the withdrawable circuit-breaker part and testing
facilities for the withdrawable part, see section 7.5.
• Instruct local operators regarding the basic details of regular handling of the switchgear.
• Check readiness for operation and switching status of electrical systems upstream and downstream
of the switchgear.
Depending on allocation of responsibilities, it may also be necessary to check the following equipment
in areas adjacent to the switchgear:
• power cables
• auxiliary cables
• auxiliary power source
• remote control system
• complete earthing system
• switchroom equipment
• switchroom conditions
6.1.2 Start-up
• Comply with all relevant safety regulations.
• Ensure that the circuit-breakers in the system are in the OFF position.
• Remove any existing earthing and short circuiting connections in the critical switching area.
• Energize the feeder cables.
• Connect the switchgear step by step, observing the signals and indicators.
• Check that relative conductors are in phase, where necessary, when there are several incoming
feeder cables and switchgear sections (also see section 6.3.2).
• Carry out all measurements and check all functions which depend on high voltage power supply
being connected.
• Watch out for irregularities of any kind.
6.2 Switching operations

Carry out switching operations with the front doors closed!
6.2.1 Withdrawable apparatus (Figures 3/22, 6/1, 6/5 to 6/12)

Manual insertion from the test/disconnected position to the service position:
• Connect control wiring plug 10.2
• Close the front door.
• Ensure that the apparatus is in the OFF position.
• Fit hand crank 121 on square spigot 18.1 of the spindle mechanism 18, after opening the hole for
them by turning slide 121.1.
• Turn the crank clockwise (approx. 20 turns at 12 - 17.5 kV and 30 at 24 kV) until the stop is reached
and the withdrawable part is in the service position.
• Observe the position indicator.
• Remove hand crank 121.
It must be considered that the spring loaded pin head 18.2 will lie completely on the rear side of the
panel door when the hand crank is moved from square spigot 18.1 of spindle mechanism 18. This
ensures that the rear part of the pin head has been shifted onto the hexagonal cap of the spindle and
prevents unintentional wrenching of the spindle during panel service. Wrenching may lead to the
circuit-breaker blocking.
Note:
The withdrawable part must not be stopped in any intermediate position in the travel range between
the service and test/disconnected position!
76/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
Manual withdrawal from the service position into the test/disconnected position:
• Ensure that the apparatus is in the OFF position.
• Reverse the procedure described above for insertion into the service position.
Important note:
Insertion and withdrawal of circuit-breakers (and other withdrawable parts) must be gradual, in order
to avoid any shocks which could deform the mechanical interlock. If the operations are prevented, do
not force the interlocks and check that the operating sequence is correct. The force normally applicable
to the insertion/withdrawing lever is 260 N. In any case, the maximum applicable force must never
exceed 400 N. Please also refer to the technical documentation of the circuit-breakers for installation
operations.
Caution: the insertion and withdrawal must always be carried out with the apparatus open!
Do not use force to move withdrawable parts with locking magnet Y0 or RL2 in the event of an auxiliary
voltage drop. If this occurs, they are locked along the whole travel range between the service and test
positions.
To remove the interlock, consult the technical documentation of the circuit-breakers.
Motorized movement of the withdrawable part:

• Briefly operate the electrical control for insertion or withdrawal (the withdrawable part then
automatically moves into the opposite position).
• Observe the position indicator.
Note:
When the drive motor is faulty, the withdrawable part can be moved using the emergency manual
operation.
If the drive motor fails during movement of the withdrawable part, the withdrawable part must be moved
into a limit position using emergency manual operation.
Emergency manual operation is carried out with hand crank 121 on spindle mechanism 18, in a similar
way to operation of a withdrawable circuit-breaker part with manual systems. To disengage the
motorized withdrawable part, consult section 7.5.1.
• Switch off the auxiliary power (m.c.b.), since the motor would otherwise be braked electrically.
• Turn hand crank 121 in the required direction.
When the withdrawable part moves, the motor turns. In this case, the motor functions like a generator,
i.e. it can lead to reserve voltages in the terminals.
The motor fuse must not be changed from the specified type and rated value, otherwise the behaviour
of the permanent magnet motor could be irreversibly impaired!
Caution.
In emergency manual operation of a motorized withdrawable circuit-breaker part, the interlock with the
earthing switch is not effective!
Withdrawal from the test/disconnected position onto the service truck:

• Open the door of the circuit-breaker compartment.
• Release control wiring plug 10.2 and place it in the storage position on the withdrawable part.
• Position service truck 124 with guide pins 124.2 of the adjustable bench top at the correct height
facing the panel front, and allow catch 124.3 to engage.
• Move sliding handles 13.11 inwards against the springs to release withdrawable part 13, draw the
withdrawable part out onto the service truck and secure it in the catches on the truck.
• Press release lever 124.4 (at the front underneath the bench top) and release the service truck from
the switchgear panel.
• Secure the position of the shutters with padlock 130 (Fig. 6/22).
Insertion from the service truck into the test/disconnected position:

• Carry out the procedure described above for withdrawal in reverse order.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 77/106
6.2.2 Circuit-breaker - type VD4 and V-max (Figures 3/12, 3/13, 3/21)
Charging the stored energy spring system:
• On the circuit-breaker with charging motors, charging is carried out automatically. If the charging
motor should fail, the charging procedure can be carried out or completed manually.
• On breakers with manual charging systems, Either open the door with the withdrawable part in the
disconnected position, insert charging lever 128 into the recess and pump for approx. 25 strokes
until the charged condition is indicated.
• Or breakers where the charging lever is integrated, take the lever and pump 10 times see fig. 6/4a.
• When the charged condition is reached, the charging mechanism is automatically disengaged, and
any further strokes of the lever have no effect. See the fig. 6/4b. Pumping is effective if the lever is
moved in angle 90°.
Opening and closing the circuit-breaker:

• Opening and closing operations with the withdrawable part in the service position should only be
performed with the door closed.
• Operate the local or remote electrical control.
• Observe the switch position indicator.
The switching operation counter 13.5 for the circuit-breaker automatically increases by one unit with
each operating cycle.
An additional control mechanism fitted in the door of the circuit-breaker compartment enables
mechanical operation of the circuit-breaker with the door closed and with the withdrawable part in either
position (figures 3/14, 3/15 and 6/8).
• Press the relative mechanical pushbutton, having previously turned knob 45.2 anti-clockwise to the
stop if the withdrawable part is in the service position.
For further details regarding operations and maintenance of VD4 and V-max circuit-breakers, see
instruction manuals BA 460-06, BA 414-06, 647654/001 E 0059.
6.2.3 Circuit-breaker - type VM1 (Figures 3/16, 3/17, 6/23, 7/5, 7/6)
The maintenance-free VM1 circuit-breaker applies a combination of moulded-in vacuum interrupters,
a magnetic actuator and an electronic controller without auxiliary switches and with sensors.
Before connecting the primary voltage:
• Connect the auxiliary voltage. OFF command (closed – circuit release) and the closing lock-out must
be energized before the circuit-breaker can be closed.
The auxiliary voltage has been established when the (Ready) LED 31.2 lights up.
• Carry out the closing and opening test of the circuit-breaker by pressing pushbuttons 31.3 and 31.4.
• Closing:
- by remote control via closing contacts or locally by pressing ON pushbutton 31.3.
• Opening:
- by remote control via closing contacts or locally by pressing OFF pushbutton 31.4.
• Opening on failure of the auxiliary power supply:
- Electrical opening is still possible within the first 200 s.
- After a period of 200 s, emergency manual opening is necessary:
- Insert emergency manual operating lever 31.28 onto the spigot of the emergency shaft 31.9 in the
front plate and turn it anticlockwise to open the circuit-breaker.
Just before the final stop is reached, a slight resistance on the emergency shaft has to be overcome.
• Closing on failure of the auxiliary power supply:
- Closing is not appropriate and not possible.
• After each operating cycle (ON-OFF), the operating cycle counter 31.5 increases by one full digit.
On termination of a switching operation, the position indicator 31.6 in the window of the front plate
displays the relative switch position.
• Anti-pumping system:
- The circuit-breaker controller ensures that circuit-breaker closing is locked when an opening
command is active.
- When closing on a subsequent opening command, further closing with the closing command still
active is locked. The closing command must be given again for the next closing operation.
For details, refer to manual BA 433/E.
78/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
6.2.4 Circuit-breaker - type HD4 (Figures 3/18, 3/19, 6/15)
Manual operation for spring charging:
To manually charge the closing springs, fully insert charging lever 90.8 into seat 90.6 and turn it until
the yellow indicator 90.7 appears.
Electrical operation for spring charging:
On request, the circuit-breaker can be fitted with the following accessories for electrical operation:
• geared motor for automatic charging of the closing springs
• shunt closing release
• shunt opening release
The geared motor automatically recharges the springs after each closing operation until the yellow
indicator 90.7 appears. Should there be no voltage during charging, the geared motor stops and then
starts recharging the springs automatically when the voltage is on again. In any case, it is always
possible to complete the charging operation manually.
Circuit-breaker closing:
This operation can only be carried out with the closing springs completely charged. For manual closing
press pushbutton 90.3. When there is a shunt closing release, the operation can also be carried out
by means of a control circuit. The indicator 90.4 shows that closing has been accomplished.
Circuit-breaker opening:
For manual opening, press pushbutton 90.2. When there is a shunt opening release, the operation can
also be carried out with remote control by means of a control circuit. The indicator 90.4 shows that
opening has been accomplished.
An additional control mechanism fitted in the door of the circuit-breaker compartment enables
mechanical operation of the circuit-breaker with the door closed and with the withdrawable part in either
position (figures 3/14, 3/15 and 6/8).
• Press the relative mechanical pushbutton, having previously turned knob 45.2 anti-clockwise to the
stop, if the withdrawable part is in the service position.
Detailed information about installation and maintenance can be found in instruction manual 647016.
6.2.5 Vacuum contactor - type V-Contact (Figure 3/20, 3/21)

The V-Contact type vacuum contactor is ideal for controlling users in a.c. requiring a high number of
operations. The contactors basically consist of a moulded resin monoblock, where the vacuum
interrupters, moving apparatus, control electromagnet, multivoltage control feeder and auxiliary
accessories are housed. The monoblock is also the support for assembly of the fuse-holder frame.
Closing of the main contacts is carried out by means of the control electromagnet. Opening is carried
out by means of a special opposing spring. The contactor can be equipped with electrical or mechanical
latching.
The fuses are positioned in special supports to be connected in series between the contactor and the
user. The supports can house fuses in compliance with DIN or BS standards.
For details, please refer to manual 6497011.
6.2.6 Withdrawable metering parts (Figures 3/1-2, 3/1-7, 3/1-8, 3/2-2, 3/2-7, 3/2-8, 3/24)
Handling of the withdrawable metering part in the metering panel is as described in section 6.2.1,
without, however, the switching operations and interlocking functions.
Withdrawable metering parts in incoming and outgoing feeder panels are put into the cable compartment
using a ramp. They reach their service position immediately and engage in the panel earthing by means
of the two locking pins at the sides. The voltage transformers used correspond to the type used in the
metering panel, and therefore HRC fuses can also be used along with the voltage transformers.
6.2.7 Earthing switch - type EK6 and ST-VG-01 (Figures 3/1, 3/2, 3/3, 6/12, 6/13, 6/14, 6/24)
The earthing switch - has a snap closing mechanism which is independent of the rotation of the drive
shaft. An earthing switch 6 allocated to a circuit-breaker is only enabled for switching when
withdrawable part 13 is in the test/disconnected position or removed from the switchgear panel. Only
turn earthing switches on when the doors are closed.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 79/106
Manual opening and closing:
• Press slide 14.2 onto the operating lever recess socket downwards. (When the switch is closed, it
is already in this position!)
Caution!
If the operation is prevented, do not force the interlock and check that the operation sequence is correct.
• Fit operating lever 122 onto hexagonal shaft 14.1,which is now released for operation.
Note:
Put operating lever 122 in pointed upwards or downwards on the hexagonal shaft so that there is
sufficient room for movement of the operating lever even if space is limited at the sides.
• Turn the lever clockwise through approx. 180° until the stop is reached to close the earthing switch,
or anticlockwise until the stop is reached to open the earthing switch.
• Observe the mechanical/electrical switch position indicator.
• Remove operating lever 122. Slide 14.2 remains open if the earthing switch is in the closed position.
Make sure that the operating lever is turned right up to the stop in the opening process, to ensure that
the earthing switch is in its defined limit position. The manual operating mechanism can also be fitted
with a locking magnet.
Opening and closing with motor operator: (EK6 only)

The earthing switch can also be fitted with a motor operator.
• Briefly operate the electrical control for opening or closing. The earthing switch is then switched
automatically into the opposite position.
Emergency manual operation:

If a fault should occur in the motor operator, the earthing switch can be switched to emergency manual
operation with lever 122, in a similar way to manually operated earthing switches.
Caution!
During emergency manual operation of a motor-operated earthing switch, the interlock is not
functional!
On emergency manual operation, coupling with the motor operator is automatically released. To
disengage the coupling to the motor operator, first turn the lever 122 further in the pre-selected direction
up to the relative stop (small angle of turning). On the next operation with the motor operator after its
function has been restored, the coupling automatically engages again.
Note:
The lever may only be fitted temporarily to carry out an emergency manual switching operation.
The power to the motor operator must be switched off for the duration of any breakdown.
6.2.8 Busbar earthing switch (Figures 3/1-4, 3/2-4, 5/28, 5/36 to 5/38)
To earth the busbars, earthing switches are used, also of type EK6. Their operating mechanism is
identical to that of the branch earthing switches (see section 6.2.5). The conditions for panel to panel
interlocking of the busbar earthing switches are described in section 3.4.2.
6.2.9 Earthing and short-circuiting with earthing module (Figure 6/19)

• Isolate the area to be earthed and secure it against reconnection.
• Carefully follow all safety regulations.
• Remove the withdrawable circuit-breaker part from the relative switchgear panel.
• Secure the shutter in front of the live contact pins by means of the padlock. Screw on the earthing
module 142 actuating bars 142.1 as follows:
- To the top position for opening of bottom shutter.
- To the bottom position for opening of top shutter.
• Further screw on the earthing module 142 insulating plate 142.5 with 3 removable bushings as
follows:
- Contact arms 142.2 in the bottom position for earthing of cable output feeder.
- Contact arms 142.2 in the top position for earthing of busbars.
80/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
• Insert the earthing module 142 into the test/disconnected position and then move it into the service
position with the hand crank 121 (for procedure - see sect. 6.2.1).
• Using a high voltage tester, check that contact pins 142.7 of the earthing module are definitely off-
circuit.
• Withdraw the earthing module back into the test/disconnected position (see sect. 6.2.1).
• Mount a complete short circuit link 142.8 on the earthing module 142. Connect one end of earthing
cable 133.1 under one of three screws M12, with which short circuit link 142.8 is connected to contact
pins 142.7. Connect the second end of this cable to the earthing terminal 19.3 in the panel.
• Insert the earthing module 142 with short-circuit link 142.8 mounted and earthing cable 133.1
returned from the test/disconnected position into the service position in the panel with hand crank
121. For safety reasons, insert the module only with the circuit- breaker compartment door closed
and with door catches 1.8 locked (see Fig. 5/20).
• Display earthing warning label on the switchgear panel door.
• Secure neighbouring areas to prevent inadvertent contact with live parts (e.g. feeder cables).
The procedure for removing earthing is the same, only in reverse order.
6.2.10 Switch-disconnector type NALF

The switch-disconnectors type NALF, combination of switch-disconnector with fuses and earthing
switches type E are intended for the indoor use in switchboards. The switch-disconnectors are capable
to open and close loaded and unloaded inductive and capacitive circuits. In the open position the
device has a visible isolating distance.
The switch-disconnectors is used in combination with power fuses as short-circuit protection . This
combination excludes two-phase power supply, because the interruption of any fuse link causes the
opening of switch-disconnector by means of its tripping system.
The earthing switches type E are constructed with a snap closing mechanism. They are capable to
close and carry short-circuit currents.
Operating mechanism of switch-disconnector for the use in the switchgear UniGear:
Operating mechanism A – with two springs.

The opening spring is always charged before the closing of switch-disconnector. This means, that the
closed switch-disconnector has always stored energy of opening spring and the opening follows
immediately with the manual lever, opening shunt release or tripping mechanism of fuses. This
mechanism makes possible the remote opening and in the combination with motor operating mecha-
nism it makes possible a complete remote control.
The earthing switch type E is always operated locally by means of operating lever 215.
To secure the protection of connected HV equipment the switchgear UniGear with switch-disconnector
uses high voltage fuses type CEF. The switchgear UniGear with switch-disconnector NALF can be
equipped with fuses in the range according to the following table:
Urated [kV] Irated min. [A] Irated max. [A]

3,6 / 7,2 6 200
12 6 125
17,5 6 160
24 6 125
In the case that the switch-disconnector without HV fuses will be required the current-carrying bars will
be inserted in holders instead of HV fuses to maintain the same location of earthing switch.
Notice:
The switch-disconnector and earthing switch can only be operated with closed panel door of switchgear
The switch-disconnector and earthing switch are mutually mechanically interlocked.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 81/106
Closing and opening of switch-disconnector NALF
• The switch-disconnector can only be switched on if the earthing switch is open
• Put operating lever 215 in pointed upwards or downwards on the grooved shaft of switch-disconnector
so that there is sufficient room for movement of the operating lever even if space is limited at sides
• Turn the lever clockwise through approx. 180° to charge the opening spring
• Turn the lever anticlockwise to charge the closing spring and to close the switch-disconnector
• Turn the lever clockwise through approx. 20° to open the switch-disconnector
• Observe switch positioning indicator 200.1
Caution: Until the latch of opening or closing spring snaps, the lever is returned back in the
starting position through the action of spring. Proceed with caution during the manipulation to
prevent the slipping of lever from hand – RISK OF INJURY
Closing and opening of integrated earthing switch type E

• The earthing switch can only be switched on if the switch-disconnector is open
• Put operating lever 215 in pointed leftwards or upwards on the grooved shaft of earthing switch so that
there is sufficient room for movement of the operating lever even if space is limited at sides
• Turn the lever clockwise through approx. 90° until the stop is reached to close the earthing switch
• Turn the lever anticlockwise through approx. 90° until the stop is reached to open the earthing switch
• Observe switch positioning indicator 207.1
Closing and opening of switch-disconnector NALF with the motor operating mechanism
The switch-disconnector can also be equipped with the motor operating mechanism type UEMC 40 K3
• Briefly operate the control buttons for closing or opening. The switch-disconnector is then switched
automatically or the springs of switch-disconnector are charged
Notice: We recommend using of protective circuit breaker in the supply circuit of motor operating
mechanism. The opening time of mechanism A operated with motor operating mechanism is approx.
1s. If the faster opening is required, it is necessary to equip the mechanism A with opening coil
Emergency manual operation

If a fault should occur in the motor operating mechanism, the switch-disconnector can be switched
manually with the operating lever 215 directly on the shaft of switch-disconnector 201.1
Notice: After the manual operation the motor operating mechanism will not be synchronous with the
switch-disconnector, which means, that it must be manipulated twice to reach synchronization, e.g.
opening – closing.
Caution: The operating lever may only be fitted temporarily to carry out an emergency manual
switching operation – RISK OF INJURY.
6.3 Test procedure

6.3.1 Testing the off-circuit condition (Fig. 3/10, 3/11, 6/16, 6/17)
In switchgear panels which are not equipped with capacitive voltage indication, checking the off-circuit
condition is carried out with a HV tester on the isolating contacts 4.1 in the isolating tulips 5, after the
corresponding upper shutter 12.1 or lower shutter 12.2 has been opened. Shutter opening can be
carried out by means of module 129 - see Fig. 6/17.
If the panels are equipped with capacitive voltage indication, checking the off-circuit condition can be
carried out by means of this device. In this case, proceed according to the manufacturer’s instructions
or the indicators. (Optionally, switchgear can be equipped with various types of indicators coming from
various manufacturers).
In case of any doubt about correct operation of capacitive voltage indication, the off-circuit condition
must be checked using a HV tester.
82/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
Checking the off-circuit condition must always be carried out in compliance with the relevant safety
regulations and local operating conditions!
6.3.2 Current and voltage tests (Figures 6/16, 6/19)

The testing and earthing module 142 is available for carrying out current and voltage tests. It is also
suitable for supplying primary current to any current transformers which may be fitted during measure-
ments in the protection circuit and, for example, for application of a test voltage during insulating tests.
• Isolate and secure the working area in accordance with the IEC safety regulations.
• For primary current supply, fix the connecting cable of the test transformer to the contact pins 142.7.
• For AC voltage tests, ball 142.4 is required on the contact pin. The bore in the ball is used for
connection of the voltage supply.
• For current tests, for example of small connected generators, the short-circuit bridge 142.8 must be
fixed onto the contact pins.
Note:
With voltage tests at power frequency withstand voltage and/or impulse voltage, carry out the following
procedure:
• Disconnect any voltage transformers and capacitive dividers and cover them with an insulating plate.
6.4 Service trucks (N/A for 550 series)

Instead of earthing, short-circuiting and testing with module 142 (see Fig. 6/18, 6/19 and chapters 6.2.9,
6.3.1, 6.3.2), it is possible to use the service trucks.
These trucks are divided into four different types:
Earthing truck without making capacity
These trucks carry out the same function as the earthing switches without making capacity. Therefore
they do not have any capacity to earth the live circuits under fault conditions. They are used to ensure
fixed additional earthing, as required byhe plant service and maintenance procedures, as at further
guarantee for personnel. The use of these trucks foresees removal of the switching device from the
switchgear (circuit-breaker or contactor) and its replacement with the truck. The units preset for use of
earthing trucks are fitted with a key lock which, if activated, prevents their racking-in.
This truck is available in two versions:
• main busbar system earthing;
• power cable earthing.
During the racking-in phase, the main busbar earthing truck only lifts the top shutter and earths the
contacts connected to the top branches (and therefore to the main busbar system) by means of the
switchgear structure.
During the racking-in phase, the power cable earthing truck only lifts the bottom shutter and earths the
contacts connected to the bottom branches (and therefore to the power cables) by means of the
switchgear structure.
These trucks can also be used in the bus-tie units. In this case, they earth the two sides of the main
busbar system.
Earthing truck with making capacity

These trucks carry out the same function as the earthing switches with making capacity. They consist
of circuit-breakers only fitted with top (main busbar earthing) or bottom (power cable earthing)
terminals. The contacts without terminals are short-circuited by means of a copper bar and connected
to earth by means of the apparatus truck. They keep all the characteristics of the circuit-breakers, such
as full making capacity and opening of the live circuits under fault conditions. They are used to ensure
extremely efficacious earthing on circuits stressed by a fault. They allow opening and closing
operations to be carried out rapidly with remote electric control.
The use of these trucks foresees removal of the switching device from the switchgear (circuit-breaker
or contactor) and its replacement with the truck. The units preset for use of earthing trucks are fitted
with a key lock which, if activated, prevents their racking-in.
This truck is available in two versions:
• main busbar system earthing;
• power cable earthing.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 83/106
During the racking-in phase, the main busbar earthing truck only lifts the top shutter and presets the
contacts connected to the top branches (and therefore the main busbar system) for closing to earth by
means of a control.
During the racking-in phase, the power cable earthing truck only lifts the bottom shutter and presets the
contact connected to the bottom branches (and therefore to the power cables) for closing to earth by
means of the control.
These trucks can also be used in bus-tie units. In this case, they earth the two sides of the main busbar
system.
Power cable test truck

These trucks allow the insulation tests to be carried out on the power cables without accessing the
feeder unit or disconnecting the cables from the switchgear.
The use of this trucks foresees removal of the switching device from the switchgear (circuit-breaker
or contactor) and its replacement with the truck.
During the racking-in phase, the truck only lifts the bottom shutter and, by means of the connectors it
is fitted with, allows connection of the test apparatus cables.
This truck can only be used in the incoming/outgoing units.
Isolation truck
The isolation truck allows the switchgear top and bottom contacts to be connected directly.
Connection is made extremely safe by using the poles of the HD4 circuit-breakers to insulate the
connection bars from the external environment. In the incoming/outgoing units, it connects the main
busbar system to the power cables, whereas in the bus-tie units, to the two sides of the busbar system.
This truck is used in the UniGear switchgears to make incoming/outgoing units without circuit-breakers
in radial networks, to make cable connections between two switchgears placed in front of each other,
and for constructing interconnection units and creating bus-tie-riser units with double insulation (in this
case, both the units are made from bus-ties, the first fitted with a circuit-breaker and the other with an
isolation truck).
84/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
1.18 145 1.17
145
Figure 6/1: Operation of the door screw Figure 6/2: Operation of the door catch
1.18 Door screw 1.17 Door catch

145 Double bit screw
46
Figure 6/3: Operation and communication via digital control

system
46 REF542 Bay control and protection unit
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 85/106
13.12 13.2 13.1
128
13.2
13.4
13.5
13.4 13.8
128a
90° 13.5
13.8
13.11
13.11
Figure 6/4A: Manual operation of withdrawable part with VD4 Figure 6/4B: Manual operation of withdrawable part with VD4
circuit-breaker (old design) (V-max) circuit-breaker
13.2 Mechanical OFF push-button 13.2 Mechanical OFF push-button
13.4 Mechanical switch position indicator 13.4 Mechanical switch position indicator
13.5 Mechanical operating cycle counter 13.5 Mechanical operating cycle counter
13.8 Charging condition indicator 13.8 Charging condition indicator
13.11 Sliding handle, connected with the catch 13.11 Sliding handle, connected with the catch
on the withdrawable assembly on the withdrawable assembly
128 Charging lever 13.12 Locking OFF position
128 Charging lever
86/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
121
145 121.1
Figure 6/5: Before inserting the hand crank, it is necessary Figure 6/6: Movement of the withdrawable part between the
to open the hole for it - turn the slide by means test/disconnected position and the service
of the key position, clockwise up to the stop to the to the
service position and anti-clockwise for the test/
121.1 Slide disconnected position
145 Double bit key
121 Hand crank
45.2
32
45.1
10.2
10.1
Figure 6/7: Control wiring plug connector blocked to prevent Figure 6/8: Handling of the mechanical circuit-breaker op-
disconnection with the withdrawable part in the eration in the switchgear panel door (non-
service position standard equipment) with the withdrawable part
in the service position
10.1 Control wiring socket
10.2 Control wiring plug 45.1 Mechanical pushbutton
32 Interlock 45.2 Knob
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 87/106
13
13.11
124.4
124 13.12 124.1 124

Figure 6/9: Service truck engaged with the switchgear panel. Figure 6/10: Withdrawable part standing on service truck
Withdrawable part released for withdrawal with and secured in the catches
the handles slid inwards
13 Withdrawable part
13 Withdrawable part 13.11 Sliding handle
13.11 Sliding handle 13.12 Catch (connected to sliding handle
124 Service truck 13.11)
124 Service truck
124.1 Height adjuster
124.4 Release lever for catch pin (124.3)
10.1
12.1
43.3
124.2
124.3 12.2
42
124.1
14/
14.1
Figure 6/11: Positioning the service truck with the guide pins Figure 6/12: View into the circuit-breaker compartment
on the adjustable height bench top at the correct 10.1 Control wiring socket
height for approach to the switchgear panel, and 12.1 Top shutter
engaging the catch 12.2 Lower shutter
14 Earthing switch operating mechanism
124.1 Height adjuster 14.1 Drive shaft
124.2 Guide pin 42 Right-hand travel rail
124.3 Catch pin 43.3 Duct cover, top right
88/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
14.1
122
14.2
Figure 6/13: Preparation for operation of branch earthing Figure 6/14: Preparation for operation of branch earthing
switch - press the slide downwards. switch - operating lever prepared for switching
on/off
14.1 Hexagonal shaft of earthing switch
operating mechanism 122 Operating lever
14.2 Slide
90
90.8 125
Figure 6/15: Manual charging of HD4 circuit-breaker springs. Figure 6/16: Voltage indicator, placed on door of control
cabinet. It is possible to use various types of
90 SF6 circuit-breaker type HD4 indicators from various manufacturers.
90.8 Charging lever
125 Voltage indicator
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 89/106
135
19.3
12.1
133.1
142
Figure 6/17: Shutter operating module, side view- actuating Figure 6/18: Earthing at the bottom pins
bars must be bolted in the top position (for
operation of the bottom shutters) or in the bottom 12.1 Shutter
position (for operation of the top shutters), as 19.3 Earthing terminal
required (example version) 133.1 Earthing cable
135 Warning label
129 Shutter operating module 142 Earthing module
129.1 Actuating bars (one pair), removable
90/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
133.1
Figure 6/19: Testing and earthing module with:
- Actuating bars, removable - top position for bottom shutter

- bottom position for top shutter
- Contact arms, removable - bottom position for cable area
- top position for busbar area
- Insulating plate with alternative mounting positions for cable or busbar earthing
(turn through 180o for busbar earthing)
- Contact systems, replaceable for different contact pin diameters on the switchgear
- Ball handles, removable, for voltage tests
- Short-circuiting connection - can be replaced with ball handles
133.1 Earthing cable

142 Testing and earthing module with manual mechanism
142.1 Actuating bars (1 pair)
142.2 Contact arms (3 pcs.)
142.3 Contact systems
142.4 Ball handles (3 pcs.)
142.5 Insulating plate with 3 removable bushinghs
142.6 Bushings
142.7 Contact pin
142.8 Short-circuiting connection, complete
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 91/106
Figure 6/20: Fitting of horizontal partition 20 with additional
ventilation for high current circuit-breakers,
required due to increased ambient temperature
(>40°C) and/or increased frequency (60 Hz)
according to section 1.3. The internal flap is
shown in the service position (open). Side view,
but without the wind vane with micro-switch
required with a fan. Not standard.
20 Horizontal partition, here fitted with the

additional ventilation facilities for the
circuit-breaker
20.3 Flap
20.4 Leaf spring Figure 6/21: Horizontal partition with additional ventilation
20.5 Inspection aperture facilities. Checking unimpeded movement of
20.6 Bracket the internal flap 20.3
20.7 Centrifugal fan
20.5 Inspection opening
28
38 130
Figure 6/22: Lower shutter secured with padlock to prevent Figure 6/23: Emergency manual switch-off
unauthorized operation
8 Recess for emergency manual opening
38 Lever for shutter operation lever
130 Padlock (customer component) 28 Emergency manual opening lever
92/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
145 31.29
147
128
31.28
122 121
90.8
Figure 6/24: Operating accessories
31.28 Emergency manual operating lever (for switching off VM1 type circuit-breaker)
31.29 Auxiliary spring to secure the opening capacity (for VM1 type circuit-breaker)
90.8 Charging lever (for HD4 type circuit-breaker)
121 Hand crank (for moving the withdrawable part inside the panel)
122 Operating lever (for earthing switch)
128 Charging lever (for HD4 type circuit-breaker)
145 Double bit key (for using the central catch and screw type door catch)
147 Hand crank (for using the central catch or screw type door catch)
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 93/106
209
210
207.1
208.1
215
Fig. 6/25: Preparation for the operation of earthing switch Fig. 6/26: Preparation for the operation of earthing switch
in panel with the switch-disconnector in panel with the switch-disconnector
Operating lever prepared for the operation ON Operating lever prepared for the operation
OFF
207.1 Position indicator of earthing switch
208.1 Operating shaft for the earthing switch 215 Operating lever
209 Lockable operating handle – Chubb lock
210 Lockable operating handle – padlock
94/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
7. Maintenance
7.1 General
Maintenance serves to preserve trouble-free operation and achieve the longest possible working life
of the switchgear. It comprises the following closely related activities:
Inspection: Determination of the actual condition
Servicing: Measures to preserve the specified condition
Repair: Measures to restore the specified condition
Note:
When carrying out all maintenance work, the regulations in the country of installation must be strictly
complied with.
Maintenance work may only be performed in a careful manner by trained personnel familiar with the
characteristics of the individual switchgear, in accordance with all relevant IEC safety regulations and
those of other technical authorities, and with other overriding instructions. It is recommended that ABB
service personnel be called in to perform the servicing and repair work detailed below.
The inspection and servicing intervals for some of the equipment/components (e.g. parts subjects to
wear) are determined by fixed criteria, such as switching frequency, length of service and number of
short-circuit breaking operations. On the other hand, for other parts the length of the intervals may
depend, for example, on the different modes of operation in individual cases, the degree of loading,
and also environmental influences (including pollution and aggressive air).
The following operating instructions must also be followed, together with this instruction manual in the
individual cases concerned:
• Vacuum circuit-breaker: type VD4
• Vacuum circuit-breaker: type VD4- high-current
• Vacuum circuit-breaker with magnetic actuator mechanism: type VM1
• Vaccum circuit-breaker type V-max
• SF6 circuit-breaker: type HD4
• Vacuum contactor: type V-Contact
• Switch-disconnector NAL - catalogue
• Switch-disconnector – installation, service and maintenance instruction manual
• Operating mechanisms for HV switches - catalogue
• Motor operating mechanism UEMC 40 K3 – installation, service and maintenance instruction manual
(for units with NALFE disconnector)
If necessary, further details can be taken from the technical documentation for the switchgear
installation (including, for example, any special operating conditions agreed on).
7.1.1 Intervals for inspection, servicing and repairs

Time intervals for maintenance work to be carried out always depend on the operating conditions of the
switchgear, and mainly on the mode of operation, the number of rated and short-circuit current switching
operations, ambient temperature, pollution etc. We recommend carrying out the maintenance work at
the following intervals:
Activity performed According to section Time interval in years According to number

of switching operations
Inspection 7.2 4 1)
Servicing 7.3 4 2) 10 000 3)
Repair 7.4 As required As required

1)
Under more demanding service conditions, we recommend shortening this interval appropriatel – also sect. 7.1 and 7.2.
2)
According to results of inspection.
3)
See the instruction manual of the circuit-breakers.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 95/106
7.2 Inspection
• Where necessary, the working area must be isolated and secured against reconnection in accordance
with the Safety Regulations specified by IEC and appropriate national standards before inspection.
• Correct condition of the switchgear should be monitored by regular inspections.
• Under normal operating conditions, inspection should be carried out once every four years by
specially trained professional electricians.
• Under abnormal operating conditions (including adverse climatic conditions) and/or special
environmental stresses (heavy pollution and aggressive atmosphere, among others), inspection
may be necessary at shorter intervals.
• Inspection is primarily to carry out a visual check for grime, corrosion and moisture:
- Effects of high temperature on the main circuits,
- Traces of partial discharge on the insulating material parts,
- Traces of leakage current on the insulating material parts,
- Surfaces of the contact systems.
• However, inspection must also to include correct mechanical/electrical operation of the following
parts: switching devices, actuating, interlocking, protection and signalling devices.
Special conditions:
• On panels with additional ventilation devices due to increased ambient temperature (see also
section 1.3):
1. Check flap 20.3 for correct operation. (Also see section 6.1.1 and figures 6/20 and 6/21.)
2. The centrifugal fan (if fitted) does not require any special maintenance. Its working life - depending
on the service conditions, and one significant parameter being the room temperature - is approx.
between 20,000 and 30,000 operating hours.
Checking readiness for operation can be carried out as follows:

a) Load-dependent functional test with controllable primary current supply of the relative instrument
transformer. On current rise:
1. to approx. 70% of the rated instrument transformer current, the fan must start;
2. to 80 % of the rated instrument transformer current, the fan must have reached the required
minimum air flow. Corresponding monitoring/signalling by the wind vane with microswitch.
b) Basic checking with temporary operation of the centrifugal fan with an external power supply of
220 V AC.
c) In both cases, check for unimpeded normal running of the fan and listen for any unusual bearing
noise. Remove any dirt on the fan rotor.
d) Check unimpeded operation of the wind vane and microswitch by starting the fan several times.
e) The wiring to removable horizontal partition 20 can be disconnected behind the right-hand side
duct cover. Follow the circuit diagram and carefully reconnect the wiring again on completion.
Caution: instrument transformer circuit.

• With regard to the switching devices, their separate Instruction manual should be followed.
• Check all switchgear accessories and auxiliary devices (e.g. storage batteries).
• No partial discharge must occur on the surfaces of equipment at operating voltage. This can, for
example, be detected by characteristic noises, a clearly perceptible smell of ozone, or visible glowing
in the dark.
• Visually checking the contact system. We recommend to turn the contact system alternately in order
to clean the inner contact points of the contact system.
The contact points should be cleaned if signs of overheating (discoloured surface) are visible (see
section 7.4).
• If any irregular conditions are detected, then relative repair measures must be taken.
7.3 Servicing
If, during the course of an inspection in accordance with section 7.2, the need for cleaning measures
has been established, proceed as follows:
• Where necessary, the working area must be switched off and secured against reconnection in
accordance with the Safety Regulations specified by IEC and appropriate national standards before
cleaning.
96/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
• Clean the surfaces in general:
- Weakly adhering dry dust deposits: with a soft dry cloth.
- More strongly adherent grime: with mildly alkaline household cleanser or with ETHANOL F 25 M.
• Clean insulating surfaces and conductive components with ETHANOL F 25 M.
• Wipe down after cleaning, using clean water, and dry properly.
• Should partial discharges occur as a result of condensation, application of a thin silicone film on the
surface concerned is often effective as a temporary remedy. It is advisable to ask the ABB after-sales
service department for advice regarding permanent solutions to this type of unusual problem.
7.4 Repair
7.4.1 Switchgear in general
Repair of surface damage:
• Carry out repair work immediately after a defect has been discovered.
• Completely remove all rust from damaged paintwork areas on steel sheet and other steel parts by
mechanical means, e.g. with a wire brush.
• Lightly grind the surrounding paint coat and carefully degrease the entire area. Then immediately
apply an anti-rust primer and, after an appropriate hardening time, apply the top coat. Only use
suitable and compatible paint products.
• Apply the top coat in standard RAL 7035 colour, or the relevant special colour.
• Carefully remove any white rust on aluminium/zinc surfaces with a wire brush or cleaning pad, e.g.
Scotch-Brite, and clean loosely adhering particles with a dry, non-fraying cloth. Next treat the cleaned
parts with zinc spray or zinc powder paint and, finally, treat with aluminium spray for colour matching.
• Carefully remove any white rust from passivated operating parts and rust formation on phosphatised
parts with a wire brush or metal-free cleaning pad, e.g. Scotch-Brite, and clean with a dry cloth. Then
grease evenly (with Isoflex Topas NB 52).
Switchgear in general:
• Follow the maintenance instructions in the manuals for individual equipment components.
• Check that the bolt connections at the contact points in the busbar system and the earth connections
are tight, and that the contact system functions correctly.
• Where necessary, grease slide plates and bearings in the panel again or thoroughly clean them.
Then grease them again with Isoflex NB 52 lubricant.
• Top up grease on contact areas in the contact system when corroded or otherwise as necessary,
or, when lubrication is inadequate or missing, thoroughly clean the areas concerned and grease
them again with Isoflex Topas NB 52 lubricant.
• Remove the contact system for thorough cleaning as described below (Figures 7/1, 7/3):
- Slide in the two inner ring tension springs 4.4 facing the breaker pole to a position beside the other
two outer ring tension springs, thus releasing contact system 4.3, and remove the contact system
- The contact pin of the contact system and the slot on the contact arm must be cleaned and greased.
Fit contact system back to front on the thin end of arbor 127 and slide it forwards onto the thicker
part of the shank.
- Fit arbor 127 onto the relative contact arm 4.2, slide the contact system 4.3 over onto the contact
arm, and withdraw the arbor.
- Check that all contact fingers and ring tension springs have a perfect fit.
Note:
The set installation position of contact arms 4.2 must not be changed by undue use of force
Replacement of the contact pins when the surface is damaged:
(Figure 3/11)
After any required replacement of contact pins 4.1, the latter should be retightened using the socket
head bolts.
Thread Rated tightening torque ungreased

M10 46 Nm
M20 250 Nm
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 97/106
7.4.2 Replacement of complex functional groups (Figures 3/3, 3/11, 7/3 to 7/11)
Precise matching of functions for control, interlocking and signalling only permits replacement of
individual components to a limited extent.
The following assemblies are prefabricated and tested at the works, maintaining high quality
standards. In the case of faults, they must therefore be completely replaced.
1. Withdrawable assembly:
• Disconnect plug connector 10.3.
• Remove interlock rod 13.91 with pin 13.27 from the withdrawable assembly.
• For motor-operated withdrawable assemblies, remove the two socket head bolts (M4), which are
accessible from below the assembly.
• Remove the circuit-breaker from the withdrawable assembly (4 x M12 bolts).
• Mount the circuit-breaker on a new withdrawable assembly in the reverse order, using new circlips
and special pliers for pin 13.27.
• Check the setting of interlocking rod 13.91.
- Turn spindle 18 anti-clockwise to the stop for the disconnected position:
The distance between lever 13.26 and cam 13.25 must be 2앐1 mm.
The distance between roller 13.24 and angle lever 13.92 must be 0.5 mm.
- Turn spindle 18 clockwise to the stop for the service position:
The distance between lever 13.26 and cam 13.25 must be 2앐1 mm.
The distance between roller 13.24 and angle lever 13.92 must be 0.5 mm.
- Loosen bolts 13.91.2 or 13.92.1 for any necessary adjustment.
2. Motor operator for the earthing switch:

• Disconnect the terminals.
• Loosen the grub-screw in the set collars.
• Withdraw operating shaft 14.1.
• Observe the position of locking disc 14.6 relative to cam 14.7!
• Replace the motor operator.
• Slide the operating shaft through from the front.
• Observe the position of locking disc 14.6 relative to cam 14.7!
• Tighten the grub-screw in the set collars.
• Connect the control wiring.
• Set the operating mechanism manually to an intermediate position and only then perform a test
run to determine the direction of rotation.
• Ensure that the motor shuts down correctly in the final positions!
Note:
The auxiliary switches of the interchangeable groups are adjusted at the works.
When final installation of the earthing switch and operator takes place on site, it may be necessary
to carry out further precise adjustment of the auxiliary switch. In this case, the following should be taken
into account:
• There must be a run-on of 0.5 mm in the fully operated position before the plunger reaches the stop
(for safety reasons).
• Auxiliary limit switch 11.4 for earthing switch ON must be operated immediately after the dead centre
position of the toggle spring mechanism has been reached in the closing process and the automatic
quick-closing process has started.
• Auxiliary limit switch 11.3 for earthing switch OFF must
a) be operated on earthing switches with manual mechanisms during the opening movement of
slide 14.2 before half of the hexagonal shaft has become visible, or 1 mm before the tab of the
slide makes contact with the armature of the de-energised locking magnet.
b) be operated on earthing switches with motor operator (no slide 14.2 fitted) immediately after
the toggle spring mechanism has passed the dead centre position during rotation to the OFF
position.
98/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
7.5 Testing withdrawable parts (Figures 7/3, 7/4)
When functional tests are carried out on withdrawable parts, compliance with the conditions listed
below should also be checked.
7.5.1 Motor-driven withdrawable parts (not standard)

Carry out testing of motor-driven withdrawable parts in the same way as for manually operated
withdrawable parts:
• Switch off the auxiliary power (m.c.b.), since the motor could otherwise be braked electrically.
• Ensure that the spindle nut is correctly lubricated.
Note:
When the withdrawable part moves, the motor turns. The motor functions like a generator in these
cases, i.e. it can lead to reverse voltages in the terminals.
7.5.2 Checking correctness of dimensional settings (Figures 7/3, 7/9, 7/10)

1. The distance between lever 13.26 operated by tie-rod 13.91 and plastic cam 13.25 should be
2
If adjustment is required, loosen the two bolts 13.91.1 and 13.91.2. Deviations from the specified
value can have the following effects:
• Dimensions too large, locking system for the drive spindle deactivated.
• Dimensions too small, proper action of the electrical interlock no longer guaranteed.
2. The distance between roller 13.24 and angle lever 13.92 should be 0.5 mm when the circuit-
breaker is closed.
If adjustment is required, loosen the two bolts 13.91.2 and 13.92.1.
7.5.3 Checking auxiliary switch settings on withdrawable parts (Figures 3/22, 7/3)
Compliance with the interlock conditions in the test/disconnected and service position areas is ensured
by position signalling switches S8 and S9 located in the withdrawable assembly and factory-set.
During testing operations, the withdrawable part must be moved by hand with the crank fitted and with
the motor power switched off.
1. Settings in the area of the test/disconnected position:
• Move the withdrawable part out of the test/disconnected position towards the service position with
a few turns of the crank.
• Slowly move the withdrawable part back to the stop.
Auxiliary switch S8 must then switch over just before the stop is reached.
• Slowly insert the withdrawable part from the test/disconnected position towards the service position
until auxiliary switch S8 just operates.
In this position, it must still just be possible to move closing push-rod 13.2.1. For this test, the function
of the locking magnet Y0 must be deactivated manually.
This condition ensures that the electrical interlock takes effect before the mechanical interlock in
the motion sequence involved.
2. Settings in the area of the service position:

• Move the withdrawable part out of the limit position towards the test/disconnected position with a
few turns of the crank.
• Slowly move the withdrawable part forward again to the stop. Auxiliary switch S9 must then switch
over just before the stop is reached.
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 99/106
7.5.4 Checking the direction of rotation of the travel motors on motor-driven withdrawable parts
• Move the withdrawable part by hand into a central position between the test/disconnected position
and the service position.
• Remove the hand crank.
• Switch the auxiliary voltage for the travel motor on.
• Use the local electrical controls to check that the withdrawable part moves in the correct direction.
Caution:
Do not allow the withdrawable part to run up against a lock when the travel direction is incorrect! Switch
the motor power off immediately (the travel process functions electrically by a seal-in system with limit
position switch-off).
There may be a danger of injury when the door is open!
7.5.5 Testing interlock conditions (Figures 3/9, 3/22, 6/6 to 6/8, 7/7)
1. The withdrawable part must only be movable from the test/disconnected position into the service
position when the circuit-breaker is open and the earthing switch is open.
Check the following conditions individually:
• With the circuit-breaker closed, insertion of the withdrawable part towards the service position
must be locked after only half a turn of the crank in the clockwise direction, and it must not be
possible to switch on the travel motor on motor-operated withdrawable parts.
• With the earthing switch closed, insertion of the withdrawable part towards the service position
must be locked after only two clockwise turns of the crank, and it must not be possible to switch
on the travel motor on motor-operated parts.
Use no force! Also see the note in chapter 6.2.1!
2. The withdrawable part must only be movable from the service position into the test/disconnected
position with the circuit-breaker open.
Check this condition as follows:
• With the circuit-breaker closed, withdrawal movement of the withdrawable part must be locked
after only half a turn of the crank in anti-clockwise direction, and it must not be possible to switch
on the travel motor on motor-operated withdrawable parts.
3. Closing of the circuit-breaker must only be possible when the withdrawable part is in the defined
test/disconnected position or service position.
The control wiring plug 10.2 must previously have been inserted.
• It must not be possible to close the circuit-breaker with the withdrawable part in any position
between the test/disconnected position and the service position.
Enabling of switching when the withdrawable part moves into the service position is carried out
electrically by operation of auxiliary switch S9 in the withdrawable assembly, and slightly earlier
mechanically - this corresponds to a position approximately half a turn of the crank before the stop.
• For movement into the test/disconnected position, the same enabling conditions apply in the same
way, in this case by means of auxiliary switch S8 in the withdrawable assembly.
4. It must only be possible to open the circuit-breaker (manually) when the withdrawable part is in the
service position or test/disconnected position and the control voltage has failed.
Check this condition.
5. Withdrawable parts with order-related locking magnet Y0 may not be moved in case of control power
failure, or when there is no control power. Do not forcibly move locked withdrawable parts! The
locking magnet Y0 is only present on manually operated withdrawable parts.
Releasing the locking magnet Y0:
• Remove front plate 13.17.
• Disengage locking magnet Y0 by pulling the magnet armature,
• While doing so, turn crank 121 about one half turn (either direction of rotation is permissible).
The locking magnet is only active in the test position and service position. In intermediate positions
it has no effect.
6. Disconnection of the control wiring plug 10.2 as well as later insertion must be locked in the
withdrawable part service position.
100/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
Check this condition:
7. Operation of the earthing switch must only be possible when withdrawable part 13 is in the test/
disconnected position or the removed position (subject to any additional electro-magnetic inter-
locks in individual cases).
Check this condition:
• With the withdrawable part in the test/disconnected position, it must be possible to press slide 14.2,
in front of the earthing switch operating shaft 14.1, downwards to the opening position. The
earthing switch can then be operated.
• With the slide pressed down, it must also be impossible to start the travel motor on motor-driven
withdrawable parts.
• If the slide is pressed down slightly when the travel motor is running, the motor must then
automatically switch off immediately.
The selected travel direction is continued by pressing the button.
It is only possible to press slide 14.2 down fully with a running travel motor when the latter is in
the start-up phase.
• When the withdrawable part is moved inwards towards the service position, pressing down of slide
14.2 must be locked after only one and a half clockwise turns on the crank.
7.6 Tests on the panel

7.6.1 Auxiliary switch settings on the earthing switch (Figures 7/7, 7/8)
1. There must be a run-on of 0.5 mm in the fully operated position before the plunger reaches the stop
(for safety reasons).
2.Auxiliary limit switch 11.4 (Q8S2) for earthing switch ON must be operated immediately after the dead
centre position of the toggle spring mechanism is reached in the closing process and the automatic
rapid closing process has started.
3. Auxiliary limit switch 11.3 (Q8S1) for earthing switch OFF must
a) be operated on earthing switches with manual mechanisms during the opening movement of the
slide 14.2 before half of the hexagonal shaft has become visible, or 1 mm before the tab of the
slide makes contact with the armature of the de-energised locking magnet.
b) be operated on earthing switches with motor operators (no slide 14.2 fitted) immediately after the
toggle spring mechanism has passed the dead centre position during rotation to the OFF position.
Note:
Check the direction of rotation of the motor after repair work.
Do not allow the motor to run up against a lock if the direction of rotation is incorrect (also see section
7.5.4).
7.7 Spare parts, auxiliary materials, lubricants

7.7.1 Spare parts
A spare parts list is available on request for procurement of spare parts. It basically includes moving
parts and parts subject to wear. When parts are required, the serial number of the relative switchgear
or switching device should always be quoted.
7.7.2 Auxiliary materials, lubricants

Lubricant:
• Isoflex Topas NB 52
Halogen-free cleansers:
• ETHANOL F 25 M (for general cleaning)
Touch-up paint:
Standard colour RAL 7035
1VLM000363-Rev5,en - 101/106
127.1 127 4.3 4.6 4.2 (4.5) 4.3 4.4 127
Figure 7/1: Fit the contact system back-to-front on the thin Figure 7/2: Slide the contact system over from the arbor
end of the arbor and slide it onto the thicker onto the isolating contact arm and allow it to
shank area engage there
4.3 Contact system 4.2 Contact arm

127 Arbor 4.3 Contact system
127.1 Journal 4.4 Internal tension spring
4.5 Hexagon socket head screw
127 Arbor
Y1
13.2.1 13.2.1
13.25
13.26
13.26
13.24
13.3
13.92
Figure 7/3: Motorized withdrawable part with VD4 type cir- Figure 7/4: Detailed view of the opening and closing
cuit-breaker in an intermediate position close to mechanism (VD4 type circuit-breaker)
the test/disconnected position, with fitted crank
for manual operation and circuit-breaker front 13.2.1 ON push rod
panel removed 13.25 Plastic cam
13.26 Lever
10.3 Control wiring plug connector of with- Y1 Blocking magnet
drawable assembly
13.2.1 ON push rod
13.24 Roller
13.26 Lever
13.92 Angle lever
102/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
31.9 31.6 31.15 31.16 31.26
31.27
31.10
31.26
31.6
31.5
Figure 7/5: View of the magnetic actuator mechanism with Figure 7/6: VM1 type circuit-breaker, switch position
auxiliary systems, front plate removed (VM1 indicator
type circuit-breaker)
31.5 Mechanical operating cycle counter 31.6 Mechanical switch position indicator
31.6 Mechanical switch position indicator 31.15 Sensor for VM1 circuit-breaker
31.9 Catch for emergency manual operation OFF signal
lever 31.16 Sensor for VM1 circuit-breaker
31.10 Actuator ON signal
31.26 Storage capacitor 31.26 Storage capacitor
31.27 Circuit-breaker control unit
11.3
14.6
14.7
14.1
14.1
14.2
14.3
11.4
11.4 11.3
Figure 7/7: Manual earthing switch mechanism with auxiliary Figure 7/8: Motorized earthing switch mechanism with
switches, side cover removed auxiliary switches installed, covers removed
11.3 Auxiliary switch Q8S1 - earthing switch 11.3 Auxiliary switch Q8S1 - earthing switch
OFF OFF
11.4 Auxiliary switch Q8S2 - earthing switch 11.4 Auxiliary switch Q8S2 - earthing switch
ON ON
14.1 Drive shaft (earthing switch) 14.1 Operating shaft for earthing switch
14.2 Slide 14.6 Locking disk
14.3 Cam plate, adjustable 14.7 Cam
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 103/106
3.25 13.25
3.26 13.26
13.91
13.91
13.90
13.91.1
13.91.1
13.91.2 13.91.2
3.24 13.92.1 13.24 13.92.1
max. 0.5
max. 0.5
13.27 13.27
3.92 13.92
Figure 7/9: Detail in the area of a withdrawable part with VD4 Figure 7/10: Mechanical interlock, withdrawable assembly/
type circuit-breaker with travel motor, viewed VD4 type circuit-breaker, with manually
from the left-hand side operated withdrawable part
13.24 Roller 13.24 Roller

13.25 Plastic cam 13.25 Plastic cam
13.26 Lever 13.26 Lever
13.27 Pin 13.27 Pin
13.90 Travel motor 13.91 Tie- rod
13.91 Tie-rod 13.91.1 Bolt
13.91.1 Bolt 13.91.2 Bolt
13.91.2 Bolt 13.92 Angle lever
13.92 Angle lever 13.92.1 Bolt
13.92.1 Bolt
41.1
41.3
41.2
0.1 +0.4
35.5
Figure 7/11: Mechanical interlock between the withdrawable

assembly and the VM1 type circuit-breaker,
setting the side lock
• Circuit-breaker in closed position

35.5 Pawl in the withdrawable assembly
41.1 Link to the actuator
41.2 Side blocker
41.3 Screw
104/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
8. Product quality and environmental protection
The UniGear type panels are produced in compliance with the requirements of international standards
for the quality management system and environmental management system. In these fields, the
excellent level is proved by quality certificates according to ISO 9001 and by the EMS according to ISO
14 001.
End of life of product
The ABB company is committed to complying with the relevant legal and other requirements for
environment protection according to the ISO 14 001 standard.
The duty of company is to facilitate subsequent recycling or disposal at the end of product life.
During disposal of the product, it is always necessary to act in accordance with local legal requirements
in force.
We the following methods of disposal:

Disposal can either be carried out thermally in an incineration plant or by storing on a waste site.
RAW MATERIAL RECOMMENDED METHOD OF DISPOSAL
Metal material (Fe, Cu, Al, Ag, Zn, W, others) Separation and recycling
Thermoplasts Recycling or disposal
Epoxy resin Separation of metal material and the disposal of rest
Rubber Disposal
Oil as dielectric (transformer oil) Draining from equipment and further recycling or disposal
SF6 gas Discharging from equipment and further recycling or disposal
Packing material – wood Recycling or disposal
Packing material – foil Recycling or disposal
1VLM000363-Rev5, en - 105/106
106/106 - 1VLM000363-Rev5,en
The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve the right to make
changes in the course of technical development of the product.
1VLM000363-Rev5, en 2005.09.30
ABB s.r.o. ABB Trasmissione & Distribuzione S.p.A.

Vídeňská 117 Divisione Sace T.M.S.
CZ-619 00 Brno Via Friuli, 4
Tel. +420 547 152 413 I-24044 Dalmine
Fax: +420 547 152 190 Tel: +39 035 395111
E-mail: info@cz.abb.com Fax: +39 035 395874
Internet://www.abb.com E-mail: sacetms.tipm@it.abb.com
Customer support line +420 547 151 888 Internet://www.abb.com
VD4
Vacuum circuit-breaker
Instruction manual BA 460/06 E
PowerIT
Power IT
Your safety first – always!
That's why our instruction manual begins with these recommendations:
• Only install switchgear and/or switchboards in enclosed rooms suitable for

electrical equipment.
• Ensure that installation, operation and maintenance are carried out by
specialist electricians only.
• Comply in full with the legally recognized standards (DIN VDE / IEC), the
connection conditions of the local electrical utility and the applicable safety
at work regulations.
• Observe the relevant information in the instruction manual for all actions
involving switchgear and switchboards.
• Danger!
Pay special attention to the hazard notes in the instruction manual marked with
this warning symbol.
• Make sure that under operation condition of the switchgear or switchboard
the specified data are not exceeded.
• Keep the instruction manual accessible to all persons concerned with
installation, operation and maintenance.
• The user’s personnel are to act responsibly in all matters affecting safety at
work and the correct handling of the switchgear.
WARNUNG
Anerkannte Regeln der Technik und Betriebsanleitungen
beachten !
Gefährliche Spannung
kann elektrischen Schock und Verbrennungen verursachen.
Vor Aufnahme von Arbeiten jeder Art dieses Gerät unbedingt freischalten,
erden und kurzschließen.
WARNING
Always observe the instruction manual and follow the rules
of good engineering practice !
Hazardous voltage
can cause electrical shock and burns.
Disconnect power, then earth and short-circuit before proceeding
with any work on this equipment.
If you have any further questions on this instruction manual, the members of our
field organization will be pleased to provide the required information.
Contents Page Contents Page
1 Summary 5 7.2 Preparatory activities 36
1.1 General 5 7.3 Movement of the withdrawable part 36
1.2 Standards and specifications 5 7.3.1 Manual insertion from the
1.2.1 Switchgear manufacture 5 test/disconnected position to
the service position 36
1.2.2 Installation and operation 5
7.3.2 Manual withdrawal from the service
1.3 Operating conditions 5 position into the test/disconnected
1.3.1 Normal operating conditions 5 position 37
1.3.2 Special operating conditions 5 7.3.3 Motor-driven movement of the
2 Technical data withdrawable part 37
Circuit-breakers for fixed installation 6 7.3.4 Withdrawal from the test/disconnected
2.1 Technical data and weight 6 position onto the service truck 37
2.2 Technical data 7.3.5 Insertion from the service truck into
Releases and blocking magnet 7 the test/disconnected position 38
2.3 Technical data 7.4 Operation of the circuit-breaker 38
Charging motor for stored-energy 7.4.1 Charging the spring energy
spring mechanisms 8 storage mechanism 38
2.4 Permissible number of vacuum 7.4.2 Closing and opening the circuit-breaker 38
interrupter switching operations 10
8 Maintenance 40
2.5 Dimensional drawings
Circuit-breakers for fixed installation 13 8.1 General 40
2.6 Circuit-breaker wiring diagram 15 8.1.1 Service-life 40
8.2 Inspection and functional testing 40
3 Technical data
Circuit-breakers on withdrawable part 16 8.2.1 Switching device in general 40
3.1 Technical data and weight 16 8.2.2 Stored-energy spring mechanism 40
3.2 Dimensional drawings 18 8.2.3 Breaker pole 41
3.3 Wiring diagrams for C.B. on 8.2.4 Withdrawable assembly 41
withdrawable part 24 8.3 Servicing 41
4 Structure and function 30 8.3.1 Switching devices in general 41
4.1 Basic structure of the C.B. on 8.3.2 Stored-energy spring mechanism 41
withdrawable part 30 8.3.3 Breaker pole 41
4.2 Structure on the breaker poles 30 8.4 Repair 42
4.3 Structure of the breaker 8.4.1 VD4 circuit-breaker run-on block 42
operating mechanism 30
8.4.2 Replacement of circuit-breaker
4.3.1 Releases, blocking magnet and parts and accessories 42
auxiliary switches 30
8.4.3 Touch up of surfaces 42
4.3.2 Mounting of the VD4 on trucks from
other manufacturers 31 8.4.4 Circuit-breakers in general 43
4.4 Function 31 8.4.5 Replacement of contact systems 43
4.4.1 Charging of the spring energy 8.4.6 Replacement of withdrawable assembly 43
storage mechanism 31 8.5 Testing withdrawable parts with a
4.4.2 Closing procedure 31 VD4 type circuit-breaker 43
4.4.3 Opening procedure 32 8.5.1 Motor-driven withdrawable parts 43
4.4.4 Auto-reclosing sequence 32 8.5.2 Checking the correctness of
dimensional settings 43
4.4.5 Quenching principle of the
vacuum interrupter 32 8.5.3 Checking auxiliary switch settings
on type A withdrawable parts 44
4.5 Interlocks/protection against
maloperation 32 8.5.4 Checking auxiliary switch settings
on type B withdrawable parts 44
5 Despatch and storage 35
8.5.5 Checking the direction of rotation of the
5.1 Condition on delivery 35 travel motors on motor-driven
5.2 Packaging 35 withdrawable parts 44
5.3 Transport 35 8.5.6 Testing of interlock conditions 44
5.4 Delivery 35 8.6 Spare parts, auxiliary materials, lubricants 45
5.5 Intermediate storage 35 8.6.1 Spare parts 45
6 Installation and mounting of the breaker 36 8.6.2 Auxiliary materials 47
7 Commissioning/Operation 36 9 Application of the
7.1 Note on safety at work 36 X-ray regulations 51
We reserve all rights to this publication. Misuse, particularly including duplication and making available of this manual –
or extracts – to third parties is prohibited. The information supplied is without liability. Subject to alteration.
© ABB Calor Emag Mittelspannung GmbH, 2004
4
1 Summary 1.3 Operating conditions
1.3.1 Normal operating conditions

1.1 General
Your safety first – always!
(Figures 2/1 to 2/8) Design to VDE 0670, part 1000, “Common
specifications for high-voltage switchgear and
The vacuum circuit-breakers of type VD4 are controlgear standards“ and IEC publication
intended for indoor installation in air-insulated 60694, with the following limit values:
switchgear systems. They have a switching
• Ambient temperature:
capacity capable of handling the loads occuring
at start-up and shutdown of equipment and plant – Maximum +40 °C
units both in normal and in fault state. – Maximum 24 hour average +35 °C
Vacuum circuit-breakers have particular advan- – Minimum (according to
tages for use in networks where there is a high “minus 5 indoor class”) –5 °C
switching frequency in the working current range
and/or where a certain number of short-circuit • Humidity:
breaking operations are expected. Type VD4 – the average value of the
vacuum circuit-breakers are suitable for autore- relative humidity, measured over
closing, and have exceptionally high operating a period of 24 h, does not exceed 95%
reliability and long life.
– the average value of the water
The vacuum circuit-breakers of type VD4, vapour pressure, over a period
designed in column form, can be supplied both of 24 h, does not exceed 2,2 kPa
as individual units for fixed installation and
mounted on chassis. Their basic structure is – the average value of the
shown in figures 2/1 to 2/8. relative humidity, over a period
of one month, does not exceed 90%
1.2 Standards and specifications
– the average value of the water
1.2.1 Switchgear manufacture
vapour pressure, over a period
The switchgear complies with the following of one month, does not exceed 1,8 kPa
specifications in accordance with DIN VDE and
• Maximum site altitude:
the relevant IEC publications:
≤ 1000 m above sea level.
• VDE 0670, part 1000/IEC 60694.
1.3.2 Special operating conditions
1.2.2 Installation and operation
Special operating conditions are to be agreed on
The relevant specifications are to be taken into
by the manufacturer and user. The manufacturer
account during installation and operation,
must be consulted in advance about each special
particularly:
operating condition:
• DIN VDE 0101, Power installations exceeding
• Site altitude over 1000 m:
AC 1 kV
– Allow for the reduction in the dielectric
• VDE 0105, Operation of electrial installations
strength of the air.
• DIN VDE 0141, Earthing systems for special power
• Increased ambient temperature:
installations with rated voltages above 1 kV
• Accident prevention regulations issued by the – Current carrying capacity is reduced.
appropriate professional bodies or comparable – Provide additional ventilation for heat
organisations. dissipation.
In Germany, these comprise the following safety • Climate:
regulations:
– Avoid the risk of corrosion or other damage in
– Health and Safety at Work Standards BGV A1 areas:
and BGV A2
• with high humidity and/or
• Safety guidelines for auxiliary and operating
materials • with major rapid temperature fluctuations.
• Order-related details provided by – Implement preventive measures (e.g. electric

ABB Calor Emag. heaters) to preclude condensation pheno-
mena.
5
2 Technical data
Circuit-breaker for fixed installation
2.1 Technical data and weight
Breaker Rated Rated Rated Short-circuit Rated Rated Poles Weight 2)

type votage current short-circuit breaking short-circuit short- centres
breaking current making circuit
current asym- current duration
symmetrical1) metrical1) (peak)1)
VD4 ... kV A kA kA kA s mm ca. kg

1206-16 3) 12 630 16 17.4 40 3 150/210 69/74
1212-16 1250 150/210 70/75
1206-20 3) 630 20 21.8 50 3 150/210 69/74
1212-20 1250 150/210 70/75
1216-20 1600 210/275 147/155
1220-20 2000 210/275 147/155
1225-20 2500 210/275 147/155
1206-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 150/210 69/74
1212-25 1250 150/210 70/75
1216-25 1600 210/275 147/155
1220-25 2000 210/275 147/155
1225-25 2500 210/275 151/159
1206-31 630 31.5 34.3 80 3 150/210 80/85
1212-31 1250 150/210 81/86
1216-31 1600 210/275 147/155
1220-31 2000 210/275 147/155
1225-31 2500 210/275 151/159
1212-40 1250 40 43.6 100 3 210 94
1216-40 1600 210/275 147/155
1220-40 2000 210/275 147/155
1225-40 2500 210/275 151/159
1706-16 3) 17.5 630 16 17.4 40 3 150/210 69/74
1712-16 1250 150/210 70/75
1706-20 630 20 21.8 50 3 150/210 69/74
1712-20 1250 150/210 70/75
1716-20 1600 210/275 147/155
1720-20 2000 210/275 147/155
1725-20 2500 275 159
1706-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 150/210 80/85
1712-25 1250 150/210 81/86
1716-25 1600 210/275 147/155
1720-25 2000 210/275 147/155
1725-25 2500 275 159
1706-31 630 31.5 34.3 80 3 150/210 90/93
1712-31 1250 150/210 91/94
1716-31 1600 210/275 147/155
1720-31 2000 210/275 147/155
1725-31 2500 275 159
2406-16 3) 24 630 16 17.4 40 3 210/275 76/81
2412-16 1250 210/275 78/83
2416-16 1600 275 167
2420-16 2000 275 167
2425-16 2500 275 167
2406-20 630 20 21.8 50 3 210/275 76/81
2412-20 1250 210/275 78/83
2416-20 1600 275 167
2420-20 2000 275 167
2425-20 2500 275 167
2406-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 210/275 76/81
2412-25 1250 210/275 82/87
2416-25 1600 275 167
2420-25 2000 275 167
2425-25 2500 275 173
1)
When the operating voltage is lower than the rated voltage, the same values apply as for rated voltage. Higher values on request.
2)
Individual unit (without chassis) with motor-operated mechanism and basic release equipment.
3)
Optional according to chamber type up to 15.000 or 30.000 switching operations (see section “Permissible number of ...“)
6
Guideline values for function times:
Closing time approx. 60 ms
Opening time ≤ 45 ms
Arcing time (at 50 Hz) ≤ 15 ms
Break time ≤ 60 ms
Minimum command
time on closing 20 ms 1) (120 ms 2))
Minimum command
time on opening 20 ms 1) ( 80 ms 2))
1)
At the rated supply voltage.
2)
If the activating relay contact cannot itself interrupt the release
coil current.
Rated voltage kV 12 17.5 24

Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 95 125
Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV 28 1) 38 1) 50
Rate of rise of transient recovery voltage kV/µs 0.34 0.42 0.47
Peak of transient recovery voltage kV 20.6 30 41
Rated operating sequence O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
Rated operating sequence with autoreclosing O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO
1)
42 kV on request.
2.2 Technical data

Releases and blocking magnet
Equipment Power consumption 1)

AC DC
VA W
Shunt release OFF -Y2 3), -Y9 3) 250 250
-Y2 5), -Y9 5) 310 310
Shunt release ON -Y3 3) 250 250
-Y3 5) 310 310
Blocking magnet -Y1 3) 5) 10 10
Undervoltage release: -Y4
• undelayed 3) 5) 11 10
• delayed 4) 10 –
Indirect overcurrent release -Y7
with intermediate current transformer:
• two-phase 3.5 2) /15 –
• three-phase 2.0 2) /15 –
1)
Approximate values
2)
With short-circuited intermediate current transformer
3)
Rated supply voltages AC: 110 and 220 V, DC: 24, 48, 60, 110 and 220 V.
4)
See RN3U for supply voltage
5)
Rated supply voltage AC: 240 V, DC: 125 and 240 V.
7
2.3 Technical data
Charging motor for stored-energy spring mechanism
Rated supply Power Motor protection Charging time

voltage consumption 1) (ABB-Stotz m.c.b.) (maximum) 2)
V VA/W A s
AC
110 150 1.6 S 281UC-K 15
220 150 0.75 15
240 170 0.75 15
DC
24 130 4.0 S 282UC-K 15
48 130 3.0 15
60 130 2.0 15
110 140 1.0 15
125 160 1.0 15
220 140 0.75 15
240 150 0.75 15
1)
Approximate values
2)
At rated supply voltage
Figure 2/1: VD4 circuit-breaker for fixed installation, Figure 2/2: VD4 circuit-breaker for fixed installation,
12 kV, 1250 A, mechanism side 12 kV, 1250 A, pole side
8
Figure 2/3: VD4 circuit-breaker for fixed installation, Figure 2/4: VD4 circuit-breaker for fixed installation,
Figure 2/5: Vacuum circuit-breaker, type VD4, high-current, Figure 2/6: Vacuum circuit-breaker, type VD4, high-current,
for 12 kV and rated current 2000 A, mechanism side for 12 kV and rated current 2000 A, pole side
9
Figure 2/7: VD4 circuit-breaker, on withdrawable part, Figure 2/8: VD4 circuit-breaker, on withdrawable part,
2.4 Permissible number of vacuum interrupter switching operations
10 5 10 5
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1,5 1,5
10 4 10 4
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 Rated 4 Rated
3 current: 3 current:
2 630 A 2 630 A
10 3 10 3
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
Number of operating cycles n
10 2 10 2
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 10
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Breaking current la (kA) Breaking current la (kA)
a) Breakers of type VD4: b) Breakers of type VD4:

• 12 kV, 630 A, ≤ 20 kA • 24 kV, 630 A, 16 kA
• 17.5 kV, 630 A, 16 kA
Figure 2/9 A: Permissible number of vacuum interrupter operating cycles n as a function of the breaking current Ia.
(Switch variants with vacuum interrupter for max. 15.000 switching operations).
10
10 5 10 5
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 4 10 4
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 Rated 4 Rated
2 630 A 2 630 A
1250 A 1250 A
10 3 10 3
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2

10 2 10 2
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 10
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50

• 12 kV, 630 A, ≤ 25 kA • 12/17.5 kV, 630/1250 A, 31.5 kA
• 12/17.5 kV, 1250 A, ≤ 25 kA
• 17.5 kV, 630 A, ≤ 20 kA
10 5
8
7
6
5
4
3
10 4
8
7
6
5
4 Rated
3 current:
2 630 A
1250 A
10 3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
10 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
10
8
7
6
5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Breaking current la (kA)
c) Breakers of type VD4:

• 24 kV, 630 A, ≤ 25 kA
• 24 kV, 1250 A, ≤ 25 kA
Figure 2/9 B: Permissible number of vacuum interrupter operating cycles n as a function of the breaking current Ia.
11
10 5 10 5
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 4 Rated 10 4 Rated
7 7
6 1600 A 6
5 5 1600 A
1600
2500AA 4
4
2000 A 2000 A
3 3
2500 A 2500 A
2 2
10 3 10 3
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2

10 2 10 2
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 10
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50

• high-current, 12/17.5 kV, ≥ 1600 A, ≤ 25 kA • high-current, 12/17.5 kV, ≥ 1600 A, 31.5 kA
10 5 10 5
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 4
Rated 10 4
8 current: 8
Rated
7 7
6
current:
1600 A
6 1250 A
5 5
1600 A 4
2500 A
4
2000 A 1600 A
3 3
2500 A 2000 A
2 2 2500 A
10 3 10 3
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 2 10 2
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
10 10
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 0,05 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
c) Breakers of type VD4: d) Breakers of type VD4:

• high-current, 12 kV, ≥ 1250 A, 40 kA • high-current, 24 kV, ≥ 1600 A, ≤ 25 kA
Figure 2/10: Permissible number of vacuum interrupter operating cycles n as a function of the breaking current Ia.
12
Circuit-breakers for fixed installation
608
d
T 95
p p K Rated Rated Rated
voltage current short-
ABB VD 4
circuit
A breaking
205
ø115 current
30
40 ° 80 °
461
475
433
217,5 kV A kA p a a1 c d f
M12
! 77,5
12 630/ ... 31.5 150 450 395 400 450 300
M12
c
M 1250 210 570 515 520 570 390
25
345 44
a 409 17.5 630/ ... 31.5 150 450 395 400 450 300
424 1250 210 570 515 520 570 390
550
24
35
60
100
a1 368 K = Cable entry
30
480
T = Handling bores, both sides
A = View “A"
M M GA = Tested terminal zone
A M = Minimum distance to DIN VDE 0101
200
A1
M12
Insertion A1 = Terminal for 630 A
depth 18 + 2
A2 = Terminal for 1250 A
GA A3 = Terminal bar to DIN 46 433,
ø45
22
for 17.5 kV shrink sleeve fitted

A2
200
M10 = Earthing conductor terminal, use contact washer

24
Insertion
depth 15 + 1
A3
22
M M 40(50)
f Figure 2/11: Dimensional drawing of circuit-breaker type VD4:
M12 • 12 kV, 630 A and 1250 A, ... 31.5 kA
• 17.5 kV, 630 A and 1250 A, ... 31.5 kA
d 608
T
p p 95
Rated Rated Rated
K voltage current short-
A circuit
310
ABB VD 4
breaking
ø115
631
current
30
40 ° 80 ° kV A kA p a a1 c d f
475
433
282,5
M12 24 630/ ... 25 210 570 515 520 570 390

77,5
!
1250 275 700 645 650 700 488
M12 M
c 25 345 44
a 409
424
550
24
35
60
K = Cable entry
100
T = Handling bore, both sides

a1 368
A = View “A"
30
480
M M GA = Tested terminal zone
M = Minimum distance to DIN VDE 0101
200
A1 = Terminal for 630 A

A A1
M12 A2 = Terminal for 1250 A
Insertion
depth 18 + 2 A3 = Terminal bar to DIN 46 433,
GA for 24 kV shrink sleeve fitted
ø45
22
= Earthing conductor terminal, use contact washer

200
A2
M10
24
Insertion
22 depth 15 + 1
M M 40 (50) Figure 2/12: Dimensional drawing of circuit-breaker type VD4:

A3 f
24 kV, 630 A and 1250 A, ... 25 kA.
M12
13
A Rated Rated Rated
d 608
p p M 424
95
circuit
breaking
T K current
kV A kA p a a1 c d e f g
310
ABB VD 4
A
12 ... 1250 40 210 610 515 520 570 345 390 409
588.5
40°
475
80°
434
... 1600 40 210 610 555 560 600 320 405 428
237,5
ABB
40 275 750 695 700 750 345 512 428
77,5
!
M12
c 25 e 44
a g
385 24
550
35 50
100
530 30
K = Cable entry
a1 670
GA Note: Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before commissioning
50 M M
A = View „A“
GA = Tested terminal zone
A-A M = Minimum distance to DIN VDE 0101
22
A1: M12/18 +2 deep

A1 = Terminal for contact arm
A2: M10/15 +2 deep A2 = Terminal for connecting bar
ø45
22
A3 = Terminal bar to DIN 46 433

Figure 2/13: Dimensional drawing of circuit-breaker type VD4:

24
A3 M12 f • 12 kV, ...1600 A, ... 40 kA.
608
1)
d
Rated Rated Rated
p p A 95
1) K
circuits
T breaking
current
310
ABB VD 4
kV A kA p a a1 c d e f g
616
599
40°
433
475
12 2000/ 40 210 610 555 560 600 320 405 428

80°
2500 1) 275 750 695 700 750 345 512 428
237,5
78
M12 M12
! 12/17.5 1600 ... 31.5 210 610 555 560 600 320 405 409
c 25 M ... 2500 A1) 275 750 695 700 750 345 512 409
e 44
a 1)
g Breakers with rated currents 2500 A are fitted with a cooling element.
424
550
35 385 24
50
100
530
a1
30
670
K = Cable entry
GA T = Handling bores, both sides
M M 80 Note: Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before commissioning
A = View „A“
A3 A1
200
M10
A Insertion depth
GA = Tested terminal zone
20 + 2
M = Minimum distance to DIN VDE 0101
A1 = Terminal for contact arm
20
1)
12
A2 = Terminal for connecting bar

A3 = Terminal bar to DIN 46 433,
12
20
20 20 A2
M12 for 17.5 kV shrink sleeve fitted
200
Insertion depth
24
25 + 2
M M Figure 2/14: Dimensional drawing of circuit-breaker type VD4:

A3 M12 high-current.
f
• 12 kV, ...2500 A, 40 kA
• 12/17.5 kV, ...2500 A, ...31.5 kA
14
1) 1)
608
d
p p A 95 T K
310
ABB VD 4
Rated Rated Rated
642
661
40° circuit
433
475
80° breaking
77,5
282,5
M12 M12
current
!
kV A kA p a a1 c d f e
c 25 M 44
e
a
409
24 ... 25001) ... 25 275 750 695 700 750 512 345
424 1)
Breakers with rated currents 2500 A are fitted with a cooling element.
550
385 24
35
50
100
530
a1 K = Cable entry
30
670

GA Note: Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before commissioning
M M 80
A = View „A“
A3 A GA = Tested terminal zone

200
A1
M10 M = Minimum distance to DIN VDE 0101
Insertion depth
20 + 2 A1 = Terminal for contact arm
A2 = Terminal for connecting bar
20
1)
12
A3 = Terminal bar to DIN 46 433,

for 24 kV shrink sleeve fitted
12
20
20 20
A2 = Earthing conductor terminal, use contact washer
200
M12
Insertion depth
24
25 + 2
M M
Figure 2/15: Dimensional drawing of circuit-breaker type VD4:
M12
f high-current, 24 kV, ...2500 A, ... 25 kA.
15
2.6 Circuit-breaker wiring diagram
OFF
ON
Standard
arrangement
Type 21
1) Only when -Y1 not fitted

2)
External operation
Special arrangement for: -S5
Type 19 Type 20 Type 22 Type 23 Type 24
– S1 Auxiliary switch on operating mechanism – Y1 Blocking magnet – V3 Series rectifier for – Y3 and – K0
– S2 Auxiliary switch on blocking magnet – Y2 Shunt release OFF – V4 Series rectifier for – Y4
– S3 Auxiliary switch on the breaker shaft – Y3 Shunt release ON – V7 Series rectifier for – Y7
– S4 Auxiliary switch on the breaker shaft – Y4 Undervoltage release – V9 Series rectifier for – Y9
– S5 Auxiliary switch on the breaker shaft – Y7 Indirect overcurrent release – M0 Charging motor for spring
– S7 Auxiliary switch for fault annunciation – Y9 Second shunt release OFF energy store
(fleeting contact, time ≥ 30 ms) – V1 Series rectifier for – Y1 – K0 Anti-pumping relay
– V2 Series rectifier for – Y2 – R0 Series resistor
Shown with the spring energy storage mechanism in the Note:

discharged state. The wiring diagram comprises the Shunt releases and blocking magnets are fundamentally
basic components and all further equipment options for wired with rectifiers (e.g. magnet holder 40 with integrated
the various VD4 types. The scope of equipment possible rectifiers -V1, -V2, -V3 and -V9).
within an individual type series is listed in the relevant Rectifiers function as free-wheeling diodes if d.c.-supply.
switchgear list, and the equipment fitted in each indivi-
dual case can be found in the order documentation.
Figure 2/16 : Wiring diagram

Arrangement for DC 24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 240 V; AC 110, 220, 240 V
16
3 Technical Data
Circuit-breakers on withdrawable part
3.1 Technical data and weight1)
1) 3)
Breaker Rated Rated Rated Short-circuit Rated Rated Poles Weight
type votage current short-circuit breaking short-circuit short- centres1)
symmetrical2) metrical2) (peak)2)
1206-164) 12 630 16 17.4 40 3 150/210 105/110

1212-16 1250 150/210 120/125
1206-204) 630 20 21.8 50 3 150/210 105/110
1212-20 1250 150/210 120/125
1216-20 1600 210/275 190/195
1220-20 2000 210/275 195/200
1225-20 2500 275 205
1206-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 150/210 105/110
1212-25 1250 150/210 120/125
1216-25 1600 210/275 190/195
1220-25 2000 210/275 195/200
1225-25 2500 275 205
1206-31 630 31.5 34.3 80 3 150/210 105/110
1212-31 1250 150/210 120/125
1216-31 1600 210/275 190/195
1220-31 2000 210/275 195/200
1225-31 2500 275 205
1212-40 1250 40 43.6 100 3 210 185
1216-40 1600 210/275 190/195
1220-40 2000 210/275 195/200
1225-40 2500 275 205
1706-164) 17.5 630 16 17.4 40 3 150/210 105/110
1712-16 1250 150/210 120/125
1706-20 630 20 21.8 50 3 150/210 105/110
1712-20 1250 150/210 120/125
1716-20 1600 210/275 190/195
1720-20 2000 210/275 195/200
1725-20 2500 275 205
1706-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 150/210 105/110
1712-25 1250 150/210 120/125
1716-25 1600 210/275 190/195
1720-25 2000 210/275 195/200
1725-25 2500 275 205
1706-31 630 31.5 34.3 80 3 150/210 105/110
1712-31 1250 150/210 120/125
1716-31 1600 210/275 190/195
1720-31 2000 210/275 195/200
1725-31 2500 275 205
1)
For more details to cell-type allocations see section dimensional drawings.
2)
When the operating voltage is lower than the rated voltage, the same values apply as for rated voltage.
Higher values on request.
3)
With manual charging mechanism.
Weight is increased by around 5 kg if charging motor is fitted.
Weight is increased by around 5 kg if the motor-driven withdrawable assembly is used.
4)
Optional according to chamber type up to 15.000 or 30.000 switching operations
(see section “Permissible number of ...“)
17
Breaker Rated Rated Rated Short-circuit Rated Rated Poles Weight 1) 3)
type votage current short-circuit breaking short-circuit short- centres1)
symmetrical metrical (peak)
2406-164) 24 630 16 17.4 40 3 210/275 110/115

2412-16 1250 210/275 120/125
2416-16 1600 275 205
2420-16 2000 275 205
2425-16 25005) 275 205
2406-20 630 20 21.8 50 3 210/275 110/115
2412-20 1250 210/275 120/125
2416-20 1600 275 205
2420-20 2000 275 205
2425-20 25005) 275 205
2406-25 630 25 27.3 63 3 150/210 105/110
2412-25 1250 150/210 120/125
2416-25 1600 210/275 190/195
2420-25 2000 210/275 195/200
2425-25 25005) 275 205
1)
For more details to cell-type allocations see section dimensional drawings.
2)
When the operating voltage is lower than the rated voltage, the same values apply as for rated voltage.
Higher values on request.
3)
With manual charging mechanism.
Weight is increased by around 5 kg if charging motor is fitted.
Weight is increased by around 5 kg if the motor-driven withdrawable assembly is used.
4)
Optional according to chamber type up to 15.000 or 30.000 mechanical switching operations
(see section “Permissible number of ...“)
5)
≥ 2300 A with fan cooling
18
J S
F1 G1 T
1) 2)
30 1) 2)
ø74
ABB VD 4
Z
205
Y
Q
O
N
ø35
70.5
260
21.5
154
19
!
76
*)
4
18
C 25 320
D 370
E 13.5 383
438
A 8 +2 0
16 p p 16 306 - 303 200 -3 50
)
*)
**
Rail
**)
Front edge of bar
55
1)
Exists only for withdrawable parts of SACE (z.B. UniSafe)
2)
Versions up to 630 A with insulating tube
3)
Versions from 1250 A with shrink sleeve
4)
• With manual charging mechanism.
• Weight is increased by around 5 kg if charging motor is fitted.
• Weight is increased by around 2 kg if the motor-driven
Stroke 8 - withdrawable assembly is used.
11mm
Table 1
Panel type Parameters Parameters Weight5)
3) 4)
12 kV 17.5 kV p A C D E J Y Z ca. kg
ZS1/Powerbloc/ 630 A, ...31.5 kA 630 A, ...31.5 kA 150 502 466 490 503 492 x - 105
Mounting 630 A, ...31.5 kA 630 A, ...31.5 kA 210 650 616 640 653 636 x - 110
frame 1250 A, ...31.5 kA 1250 A, ...31.5 kA 150 502 466 490 503 492 - x 120
1250 A, ...31.5 kA 1250 A, ...31.5 kA 210 650 616 640 653 636 - x 125
UniSafe/UniGear 630 A, ...31.5 kA 630 A, ...31.5 kA 150 502 466 490 503 492 x - 105
Type ZS1 1250 A, ...31.5 kA 1250 A, ...31.5 kA 150 502 466 490 503 492 - x 120
Table 2
Panel type p F1 G1 N O Q R S T
ZS1/Powerbloc/ 150 38 203 624 618 628 618 128 120±1
Mounting frame 210 47 279 624 618 628 618 118 120±1
UniSafe/UniGear 150 38 203±1 624±2 618 628 620±2 128±1 120±1
Type ZS1
Figure 3/1: Vacuum circuit-breaker on withdrawable part, type VD4.

• Use in ZS1, UniGear Type ZS1, UniSafe and Powerbloc or mounting frame
• 12 kV, ...1250 A, ...31.5 kA
• 17.5 kV, ...1250 A, ...31.5 kA
19
J
G1
S
F1
30 1) 3) T
ø 120
2)
310
O
N
Q
R
71
ø 79
280
165
21,5
19
*)
76
D 25 320 4
18
0
13,5 E 13,5 359,5 200 -3 50
370
382,5
A
286 ±2 303
p p 8 **)
16 16
*)
Rail
**)
Front edge of bar
55
1)
Only fitted on withdrawable parts for SACE (z.B. UniSafe)
2)
Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before commissioning
3)
Not available for Powerbloc/Mounting frame
• Weight (manual charging mechanism) 185 kg.
Stroke 8 - 11 mm
• Weight is increased by around 2 kg if the motor-driven with
drawable is used
Table 1:
Panel type Parameters p A D E J

12 kV
ZS1, UniSafe/ ...1600 A, ...40 kA 210 650 640 653 636

UniGear-Typ ZS1/
Powerbloc/ 1600 A, ...40 kA 275 850 836 853 844
Mounting frame
Table 2:
ZS1/ 210 44 276 694 688 698 688 118 110
Powerbloc/ 275 144 376 694 688 698 688 118 110
Mounting frame
Unisafe / 210 44±1 273±1 691±2 688 698 688±2 119 111±1
UniGear-type ZS1 275 144±1 373±1 691±2 688 698 688±2 119 111±1

• 12 kV, ...1600 A, ...40 kA
20
S
J
30 2)
1) 4) T
1) 4)
M
F1 G1 3)
310
ABB VD 4
Q
O
N
W
70.5
280
21.5
165
19
!
76
*)
25 320 4
18
359.5
C
D 370
13.5 E 13.5
383
0
A 8 286 ±2 303 200 -3 50
16 p p 16 *) ** )
Rail
**)
Front edge of bar
1)
Only fitted on withdrawable parts for SACE (z.B. UniSafe)
2)
Cooler elements only fitted for rated currents of 2500 A and above
55
3)
Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before commissioning
4)
5)
Versions for 1250 A to 2000 A (with shrink sleeve)
6)
Versions for 2500 A (with cooler elements, without shrink sleeve)
7)
2) • With manual charging mechanism.
• Weight is increased by around 2 kg if the motor-driven with
drawable is used
Stroke 8 -
11mm
Table 1
5) 6)
12 kV 17.5 kV p A C D E J M W Y Z ca. kg
ZS1 1600 A, ...31.5 kA 210 650 618 640 653 636 120 79 x - 190
1600 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 120 79 x - 195
2000 A, ...40 kA 2000 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 120 79 x - 200
2500 A, ...40 kA 2500 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 149 109 - x 205
Powerbloc/ 1600 A, ...31.5 kA 210 650 618 640 653 636 120 79 x - 190
Mounting 1600 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 120 79 x - 195
frame 2000 A, ...40 kA 2000 A, ...31.5 kA 210 650 618 640 653 636 120 79 x - 195
UniSafe/ 2000 A, ...40 kA 2000 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 120 79 x - 200
UniGear 2500 A, ...40 kA 2500 A, ...31.5 kA 275 850 812 836 853 844 149 109 - x 205
Type ZS1
Table 2
ZS1/ 210 44 230 694 688 698 688 118 110
Powerbloc/ 275 144 230 694 688 698 688 118 110
Mounting
frame
UniSafe/ 210 44±1 229±1 691±2 688 698 688±2 119 111±1
UniGear 275 144±1 229±1 691±2 688 698 688±2 119 111±1
Type ZS1

• 12 kV, 2000/2500 A, ...40 kA
• 17.5 kV,1600 ...2500 A, ...31.5 kA
21
450
ø74
ABB VD 4
205
549
475
ø35
260
21.5
!
19
25 320 4
18
370
383
503 13.5 H 303 S 50
502 8
16 150 150 16
55
Stroke 8 -11mm

12 kV 17.5 kV H±2 S±3 ca. kg
ZS8.4 without
tee-off
partitioning 630 A, ...25 kA 630 A, ...20 kA 193 200 95
1250 A, ...25 kA 1250 A, ...20 kA 193 200 110
ZS8.4 with
tee-off
partitioning 630 A, ...25 kA 630 A, ...20 kA 283 250 95
1250 A, ...25 kA 1250 A, ...20 kA 283 250 110
1)
• Weight is increased by around 2 kg if the motor-driven withdrawable assembly is used.

• Use in ZS8.4
• 12 kV, ...1250 A, ...25 kA
• 17.5 kV, ...1250 A, ...20 kA
22
G
F 232 20±1
1)
1)
310
771 ± 2
+3
775 -0
767.5
ABB VD 4 Y
790
ø35
70.5
325
21.5
198
! 19
72
4
18
25 320
C 370
D 383
E 13.5 458
0
444±2 303 300 -3 50
A 8
16 P P 16 *)
Rail
**)
Front edge of bar
55
1)
Exists only for withdrawable parts of SACE (i.e. UniSafe)
2)
3)
Versions up to 630 A with insulating tube
4)
Versions from 1250 A with shrink sleeve
5)
• Weight is increased by around 2 kg if the motor-driven withdrawable
Stroke 8 -11mm assembly is used.
Table 1
Panel type Parameters Weight5)
3) 4)
24 kV p A C D E J Y Z ca. kg
ZS1/Powerbloc/ 630 A, ...25 kA 210 650 612 636 653 632 x - 110
Mounting frame 630 A, ...25 kA 275 850 812 836 853 842 x - 115
1250 A, ...25 kA 210 650 612 636 653 632 - x 120
1250 A, ...25 kA 275 850 812 836 853 842 - x 125
UniSafe/UniGear 630 A, ...25 kA 210 650 612 636 653 632 x - 110
Type ZS1 1250 A, ...25 kA 210 650 612 636 653 632 - x 110
Table 2
ZS1/ 210 44 232 780 770 785 775 16 164
Powerbloc/ 275 144 232 780 770 785 775 16 164
Mounting
frame
UniSafe/ 210 44±1 232 772±2 770 788 768±2 19±1 119±1
UniGear
Type ZS1

• 24 kV, ...1250 A, ...25 kA
23
842
T
F1 G1
34 S
1) 3) 1)
2)
310
ABB VD 4
ø79
N
Q
R
O
70.5
345
198
!
21.5
19
72
*)
25 320 4
18
812 370
836 383
853 13.5
458
0
850 8 434 ±2 303 300 -3 50
275 275 16
)
**
*)
Rail
**)
Front edge of bar
55
1)
Exists only for withdrawable parts of SACE-CBE
2)
Remove the lifting lugs on both sides before
commissioning
3)
With cooling element and forced ventilation for
rated currents of 2500 A and above.
4)
3) • Weight with manual charging mechanism
approx. 205 kg.
• Weight is increased by around 5 kg if charging
motor is fitted.
Stroke 8 -
11mm • Weight is increased by about 2 kg if the motor-
driven withdrawable assembly is used.
Panel type Weight4)

p F1 G1 N O Q R S T ca. kg
ZS1 275 144 232 820 815 825 815 16 376 205
UniSafe/ 275 144±1 232±1 817±1 815 834 814±2 191 119±1 205
UniGear
Type ZS1

• Use in ZS1, UniGear Type ZS1 and UniSafe
• 24 kV, 1600 ...2500 A, ...25 kA
24
310
ABB VD 4
681
549
ø35
475
325
21.5
!
19
4
18
25 320
370
383
0
653 13.5 283 ±2 303 250 -3 50
650 8
16 210 210 16
55
Stroke 8 -11mm
Weights:
• Weight with manual charging mechanism approx. 110 kg.
• Weight is increased by around 5 kg if charging motor
is fitted.
• Weight is increased by about 2 kg if the motor-driven withdrawable
assembly is used.

• Use in ZS8.4, with or without tee-off partitioning
• 24 kV, ...1250 A, ...25 kA
25
-X0 26 24 25 10 4 5 3 27 43 32 31 11 8 23 6 7 9 28 29 1 40
26
3.3
- S6 3 –K0 1
OFF
4
2 4
Note:
22 53
-S1 32 13
31 14
21 54 -S7 1
2
-M0
S3 21 31 53 13 43 -S4 13 53 41 31 21 -S5 13 43 53 31 21
M P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22
order documentation.
41 -Y7
42 -Y1
-S2 0 -R0
2
ON
-Y0 -V1 -Y3 A -Y9 -Y4 -Y2

-K0
E
B
A
-V0
-V3 -Y9 -Y4 -Y2

Wiring diagrams for C.B. on withdrawable part
fitted in each individual case can be found in the

the relevant switchgear list, and the euquipment
ponents and all further equipment options for the
various VD4 types. The scope of equipment
The wiring diagrams comprise the basic com-
possible within an individual type series is listed in
-X0 36 34 35 45 46 20 14 15 2 13 37 44 42 30 41 21 22 18 33 16 17 19 38 39
-Q0
-X0
Note:
-Y0 Block Magnet on truck with rectifier -V0 -S1 Auxiliary switch on mechanism Mode of presentation:
-Y1 Closing block magnet with rectifier -V1 -S2 Auxiliary switch on block magnet -Y1
• Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
withdrawable part
-Y2 1. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V2 -S3 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft
-Y3 Closing release with rectifier -V3 -S4 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • C.b.-unit in service position
-Y4 Undervoltage release U< with rectifier -V4 -S5 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Control wiring plug 58-pole
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S6 Auxiliary switch at c.b.-unit • Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 -S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication a) C.b.-unit in test position:
Earth. switch can be operated
-M0 Charging motor
b) Earth. switch open position:
-K0 Antipumping relay C.b.-unit can be moved in the service position
Figure 3/8: Wiring diagram for VD4 vacuum circuit-breaker on manually movable withdrawable assembly.
• Type A of withdrawable part
• Maximum of equipment
• Control wiring plug 58-pole
• Use in panel system ZS, in powerbloc and mounting frame
Please see section 8.5 for explanation to the
• Drawing no. GCE2032404

-X0 26 24 25 4 5 3 27 43 32 31 11 8 23 6 7 9 28 29 1 40 55 57 10 49 52
1
OFF -K0
2 4 -X 7 9 2 4 1
22 53 32 13
-S1
1
21 54 31 14 53 43 33 23 13
-S7
-S8
-M0 21 31 53 13 43 2 13 53 41 31 21 13 43 53 31 21 54 44 34 24 14
M -S3 -S4 -S5
P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22
-X 8 3 5 6
41
-Y7
-Y1 0
42 -X 17 12 13
-S2 -R0
2
ON
~
53 43 33 23 13
+ -
-S9
E
-Y0 A -V1 -Y3 A -Y9 -Y4 -Y2 SERVICE-
~ 54 44 34 24 14
-K0 POSITION
B
+ ~ ~ ~ ~
-V0 - + + - + - + -
~ ~ -X 18 11 14 15 16
TEST-
- -V3 -V9 -V4 -V2 POSITION
~ ~ ~ ~
-X0 36 34 35 45 46 20 14 15 2 13 37 44 42 30 41 21 22 18 33 17 19 38 39 56 58 16 54 53 51 50
-Y2 1. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V2 -S3 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication • Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 -S8 Limit switch test position a) C.b.-unit in test position:
-M0 Charging motor -S9 Limit switch service position Earth. switch can be operated
-K0 Antipumping relay
C.b.-unit can be moved in the service position
• Type B of withdrawable part
• Auxiliary switch -S5 wired
• Drawing no. GCE2132701P0101
27
-X0 26 24 25 32 4 5 3 27 43*) 32 *) 31 11 8 23 6 7 9 28 29 1 40 55 57 10 49 52 47 44
28
1
OFF -K0
2 4 -X 7 9 4 13 2 1
22 53 32 13
-S1
1
21 54 31 14 53 43 33 21 13
-S7
-S8
-M0 21 31 53 13 43 2 13 53 41 31 21 13 43 53 31 21 54 44 34 22 14
M -S3 -S4 -S5
P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22
-X 8 5 3 6
41
-Y7
-Y1 0
42 -X 17 12
-S2 -R0
2
ON
~
-X1 5 53 43 33 21 13
+ -
-S9
E
GN
A -V1 -Y3 A -Y9 -Y4 -Y2 SERVICE-
~ 54 44 34 22 14
-M1 -K0 POSITION
M
B
WH
~ ~ ~ ~
-X1 7 - + + - + - + -
-X 18 11 15 14 16
TEST-
-V3 -V9 -V4 -V2 POSITION
~ ~ ~ ~
-X0 36 34 35 12 20 14 15 2 13 37 44*) 42 *) 30 41 21 22 18 33 16 17 19 38 39 56 58 53 54 48 45 51 50
-Y1 Closing block magnet with rectifier -V1 -S1 Auxiliary switch on mechanism Mode of presentation:
-Y2 1. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V2 -S2 Auxiliary switch on block magnet -Y1
-Y3 Closing release with rectifier -V3 -S3 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
-Y4 Undervoltage release U< with rectifier -V4 -S4 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • C.b.-unit in service position
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S5 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Control wiring plug 58-pole
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 • Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication
a) C.b.-unit in test position:
-M0 Charging motor -S8 Limit switch test position Earth. switch can be operated
-K0 Antipumping relay -S9 Limit switch service position b) Earth. switch open position:
-M1 Motor drive for draw out C.b.-unit can be moved in the service position
*) Connection points when undervoltage release -Y4

or indirect overcurrent release -Y7 are fittet:
-Y4: 42-43
-Y7: 42-43
Figure 3/10: Wiring diagram for VD4 vacuum circuit-breaker on motor-driven withdrawable assembly.
• Auxiliary switch -S5 free used
• Drawing no. GCE2132702P0101
-X0 A7 A16 A1 C9 A5 B15 C15 A10 C3 C5 B4 A12 B2 B5 B11 B7 A15 B9 B13 D15 D7 D5 C7 C14 D9 D11 D2
-S6 3 -K0 1
OFF
4
2 4 7 9 2 4 1
-X
22 53
S1 32 13
31 14
21 54 -S7 1
-S8 53 43 33 23 13
2
54 44 34 24 14
-M0
M -S3 21 31 53 13 43 -S4 13 53 41 31 21 -S5 13 43 53 31 21
P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22
-X
8 3 5 6
41 -Y7
42 -Y1
0 -X 17 12 13
-S2 -R0
2
ON
-S9 53 43 33 23 13
E
54 44 34 24 14
-Y0 A -V1 -Y3 A -Y9 -Y4 -Y2 SERVICE-
-K0 POSITION
-V0 -X
TEST- 18 11 14 15 16
POSITION
-V3 -V9 -V4 -V2
-X0 A8 A9 A2 D13 D14 C8 A6 B16 C2 C1 A11 C4 C6 A4 A3 A14 A13 B3 B6 B12 B8 B1 B10 B14 D16 D8 D6 D10 D12 D4 D3 D1 C16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
-Q0
• Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
• C.b.-unit in service position
-Y3 Closing release with rectifier -V3 -S4 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft
-Y4 Undervoltage release U< with rectifier -V4 -S5 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft
• Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S6 Auxiliary switch at c.b.-unit
a) C.b.-unit in test position:
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 -S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication Earth. switch can be operated
-M0 Charging motor -S8 Limit switch test position b) Earth. switch open position:
-K0 Antipumping relay -S9 Limit switch service position C.b.-unit can be moved in the service position
Figure 3/11: Wiring diagram for VD4 vacuum circuit-breaker on manually mov able withdrawable assembly.
• Type B of withdraw part or/and with auxiliary switch -S6 at withdrawable part
• Use in panel systemZS, in powerbloc and mounting frame
29
• Drawing no. GCE2009153
-X0 A7 A16 A1 A5 B15 C15 A10 C3 C5 B4 A12 B2 B5 B11 B7 A15 B9 B13 D15 D7 D5 C7 C14 D2
30
-K0 1
OFF
7 9 2 4 1
2 4 -X
22 53 32 13
-S1
1
21 54 31 14 -S7 53 43 33 23 13
-S8
2
-M0 21 31 53 13 43 13 53 41 31 21 13 43 53 31 21 54 44 34 24 14
-S3 -S4 -S5
M P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22 -X
8 3 5 6
41
-Y7
-Y1 0 -X 17 12 13
42 -S2 -R0
2
ON
~
+ 53 43 33 23 13
- -S9
E
-V1 A SERVICE-
-Y0 A ~ -Y3 -Y9 -Y4 -Y2 54 44 34 24 14
-K0
POSITION
B
+ ~ ~ ~ ~
-V0 - + + - + - + - -X
~ ~ 18 11 14 15 16
-V3 -V9 -V4 -V2 TEST-
- ~ ~ POSITION
~ ~
-X0 A8 A9 A2 D13 D14 C8 A6 B16 C2 C1 A11 C4 C6 A4 A3 A14 A13 B3 B6 B8 B1 B10 B14 D16 D8 D6 D12 D4 D3 D1 C16
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
-Q0
-Y0 Block magnet on truck with rectifier -V0 -S1 Auxiliary switch on mechanism Mode of presentation:
-Y2 1. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V2 -S3 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication • Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 -S8 Limit switch test position a) C.b.-unit in test position:
-M0 Charging motor -S9 Limit switch service position Earth. switch can be operated
-K0 Antipumping relay b) Earth. switch open position:
• With closing block magnet -Y1
• Auxiliary switch -S5 wired
• Use in panel system ZS8.4
• Drawing no. GCE5589251S0101
-X0 A7 A16 A1 A5 B15 C15 A10 C3 C5 B4 A12 B2 B5 B11 B7 A15 B9 B13 D15 D7 D5 D9 D11 D2
-K0 1
OFF
7 9 2 4 1
2 4 -X
22 53 32 13
-S1
1
21 54 31 14 -S7 53 43 33 23 13
-S8
2
-M0 21 31 53 13 43 13 53 41 31 21 13 43 53 31 21 54 44 34 24 14
-S3 -S4 -S5
M P
22 32 54 14 44 14 54 42 32 22 14 44 54 32 22 -X
8 3 5 6
41
-Y7
42 -X 17 12 13
-R0
ON
53 43 33 23 13
-S9
E
-Y0 A -Y3 A -Y9 -Y4 -Y2 SERVICE-
POSITION 54 44 34 24 14
-K0
B
+ ~ ~ ~ ~
-V0 - + + - + - + - -X
~ ~ 18 11 14 15 16
-V3 -V9 -V4 -V2 TEST-
- ~ ~ POSITION
~ ~
-X0 A8 A9 A2 D13 D14 A6 B16 C2 C1 A11 C4 C6 A4 A3 A14 A13 B3 B6 B12 B8 B1 B10 B14 D16 D8 D6 D10 D12 D4 D3 D1 C16
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
D10
D11
D12
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
D13
D14
D15
D16
-Q0
-Y3 Closing release with rectifier -V3 -S4 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • Aux. switch -S1 shown for c.b.-mechanism discharged
-Y4 Undervoltage release U< with rectifier -V4 -S5 Auxiliary switch on switch shaft • C.b.-unit in service position
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release -S7 Fleeting contact 35ms for c.b. tripped indication • Control wiring plug 64-pole
-Y9 2. Shunt release OFF with rectifier -V9 -S8 Limit switch test position • Earthing switch mechanical interlock with c.b.-unit:
-M0 Charging motor -S9 Limit switch service position a) C.b.-unit in test position:
-K0 Antipumping relay Earth. switch can be operated
• Without closing block magnet -Y1
• Auxiliary switch -S5 free used
• Use in panel system ZS8.4
31
• Drawing no. GCE5589251S0200
4 Structure and function The stored-energy spring mechanism essentially
consists of drum 33 containing the spiral spring,
the charging system, the latching and operating
4.1 Basic structure of the circuit-breaker on mechanism and the linkages which transmit the
withdrawable breaker assembly force to the breaker poles. In addition, there are
(Figures 4/1 to 4/3 and 7/1) supplementary components such as the charging
motor, releases, auxiliary switches and the controls
The withdrawable part, which can be moved
and instruments located on the front of the
manually or by a motor if fitted, consists of a steel
mechanism enclosure 9.1.
sheet structure on which the circuit-breaker with its
ancillary components is mounted. The operating mechanism is fundamentally suitable
for auto-reclosing and, due to the short charging
Insulated contact arms 6 with the spring-loaded
times, also for multi-shot auto-reclosing.
contact systems 7 are fitted to the circuit-breaker
poles. These create the electrical connection to the In the basic version of the circuit-breaker, the
panel when the withdrawable part is inserted into spring energy storage mechanism is charged
the service position. manually. The operating mechanism can optionally
be fitted with a charging motor.
A multi-pole control wiring plug connector 8
connects the signalling, protection and control There is one rating plate with the main data of the
wiring between the panel and the withdrawable switch equipment on front plate 9.2, and another at
part. the lower front right in mechanism enclosure 9.1.
The withdrawable assembly and the circuit-breaker The basic version of the stored-energy spring
are connected via a multi-pole control wiring plug mechanism is fitted with the following auxiliary
connector 8.3. equipment:
As soon as the withdrawable part has been slid • Shunt release OFF -Y2
into the panel and its base frame has engaged in
• Five-pole auxiliary switch -S4 for
the test/disconnected position, it is positively con-
annunciation purposes
nected to the panel. At the same time, it is earthed
by its travel rollers in their rails. The stored-energy • Auxiliary switch -S7 for fault annunciation
spring mechanism of the circuit-breaker, including • Mechanical ON push-button 11
its controls and indicators, is accessible at the front
of the withdrawable part. • Mechanical OFF push-button 12
Withdrawable parts of the same version are • Mechanical position indicator 13
interchangable. With the same dimensions but dif- • Charging condition indicator 18 for the
ferent circuit-breaker equipment, coding of the spring energy storage mechanism
control wiring plug prevents impermissible
combinations of withdrawable parts and panels. • Mechanical operating cycle counter 14.
The following additional equipment can be installed:
4.2 Structure of the breaker poles
• Blocking magnet -Y1 with auxiliary switch -S2
(Figures 4/2, 4/5 and 4/6)
• Shunt release ON -Y3
The poles in column design are mounted on the
bracket-shaped rear part of mechanism enclosure 9.1. • Second shunt release OFF -Y9
The live parts of the breaker poles are enclosed in
• Indirect overcurrent release -Y7
cast resin and protected from impacts and other
external influences. • Undervoltage release -Y4
With the breaker closed, the current path leads • Five-pole auxiliary switches -S3 and -S5
from the upper breaker terminal 21 to the fixed
contact 20.2 in the vacuum interrupter 20, then via • Charging motor -M0
the moving contact 20.3 and flexible connector 23 • Five-pole auxiliary switch -S1 to switch the
(or via multi-contact strips, depending on rated charging motor.
current) to the lower breaker terminal 22.
The switching motions are effected by means of 4.3.1 Releases, blocking magnet and auxiliary switches
the insulated link rod 26 with internal contact force (Figures 2/15, 4/4, 4/7 and 8/1 to 8/3)
springs 25.
• The releases and the blocking magnet are
4.3 Structure of the breaker operating mechanism mounted at the top left on the spring operating
mechanism.
(Figures 4/4, 4/6 and 4/7)
• The allocation of the auxiliary switches can be
The operating mechanism is of the stored-energy seen in the wiring diagram of figure 2/15.
spring type. The necessary operating energy is
stored ready for activation by charging the spring
energy storage mechanism.
32
• The five-pole auxiliary switch -S1 is operated by 2. The undervoltage release (-Y4) and/or indirect
the charging condition indicator 18. It controls the overcurrent release (-Y7) are pure safety and
charging motor -M0, serves as an electrical inter- protection releases and must not be used for
lock for shunt release ON -Y3 when the spring switching in normal operation.
mechanism is not sufficiently charged, and also
4.3.2 Mounting of the VD4 on trucks from other
provides an electrical switching readiness signal.
manufacturers
• Operation of the five-pole auxiliary switches VD4 circuit-breakers which are not installed on
-S3, -S4 and -S5 is dependent on the switching ABB Calor Emag withdrawable parts must be fitted
position of the circuit-breaker. with one or two additional auxiliary switches which
• Auxiliary switch -S3 interrupts the circuit of the are dependent on the mechanical lock and release
optional additional shunt release OFF -Y9 with device. These must interrupt the circuit of shunt
the circuit-breaker in the open position, and the release ON -Y3.
circuits of shunt release ON -Y3 and the optional Similary to auxiliary switches -S8 and -S9 in Calor
blocking magnet -Y1 with the circuit-breaker in Emag withdrawable parts, no electrial pulse may
the closed position. There is one further NOC for arrive during and before mechanical blocking of the
other purposes. spindle mechanism, and may only be applied again
after the end of mechanical blocking.
• On failure or absence of the control voltage,
This ensures that the shunt release ON cannot be
blocking magnet -Y1 mechanically locks the ON
loaded with an electrical ON pulse when the
half shaft and simultaneously acts on the corre-
withdrawable part is in an intermediate position,
sponding auxiliary switch -S2 to interrupt the
which could burn out the coil.
circuit of shunt release ON -Y3.
• Blocking magnet -Y1 is accessible when front 4.4 Function
plate 9.2 is removed. 4.4.1 Charging of the spring energy storage mechanism
• Auxiliary switch -S4 interrupts the circuit of shunt (Figures 4/6, 4/7 and 7/1)
release OFF -Y2 with the circuit-breaker in To provide the necessary motive energy, the spring
the open position. One further NOC and three energy storage mechanism, either charged auto-
NCCs are available for annunciation, control and matically by a charging motor or manually in a
interlock purposes. vertical pumping action with charging lever 19,
• Auxiliary switch -S5 can be optionally designed depending on the equipment fitted to the circuit-
with any possible combination of contacts from breaker. The current charging condition is shown at
five NOCs to five NCCs. Its contacts are availa- charging condition indicator 18.
ble for any required control, annunciation or in- As a precondition for an auto-reclosing sequence,
terlock functions. The auxiliary switch is normally the operating mechanism is either (re-)charged after
configured as shown in figure 2/15. a closing operation automatically by the charging
• The single pole auxiliary switch -S7 (fleeting con- motor, or it requires (re-)charging by hand if the
tact time ≥ 30 ms) serves to provide a fault signal operating mechanism is of the manual type.
("breaker released"). 4.4.2 Closing procedure
With remote control, the auxiliary switch is (Figures 4/4, 4/6 and 4/7)
necessarily operated by:
The closing process is started by the mechanical
– Shunt release OFF -Y2 or ON push-button 11, or by activation of shunt release
– Shunt release OFF -Y9 or ON -Y3. The release mechanism 31 then permits
drive shaft 30 to be rotated by the (previously)
– Undervoltage release -Y4 or
charged spiral spring. The moving contact 20.3 in
– Indirect overcurrent release -Y7. vacuum interrupter 20 is moved until the contacts
Note: touch by cam disk 29 and further kinematic links. In
the further sequence of motion, spring arrangement
1. Shunt releases OFF (-Y2) and ON (-Y3) are ex- 25 is tensioned and the appropriate amount of
clusively provided for opening and closing in nor- contact force thus applied. The available overtravel
mal operation. For safety breaking operations, is higher than the maximum value of contact erosion
the second shunt release OFF (-Y9) must be during lifetime of the interrupter. During the closing
used, in most cases with a separate control process, opening springs 27 are simultaneously
voltage supply. tensioned.
These three releases are of the solenoid type
and suitable for a large number of operating
cycles.
33
4.4.3 Opening procedure 4.5 Interlocks/protection against maloperation
(Figures 4/4, 4/6 and 4/7) for the withdrawable circuit-breaker part
The opening procedure is initiated by mechanical OFF A series of interlocks are provided to prevent
push-button 12 or by activation of one of releases -Y2, dangerous situations and any maloperation. The
-Y4, -Y7 or -Y9. Observe the notes in section 4.3.1 on interlocks of the panel system ZS and/or the
control of the releases. Release mechanism 31 then mounting frame, which are normally effective, are
permits drive shaft 30 to be turned further by the spring as follows (concerning the circuit-breaker):
energy storage mechanism, which is still sufficiently
• The withdrawable part can only be moved from
charged. Opening spring 27, which is thus released,
the test/disconnected position into the service
moves contact 20.3 into the open position at a defined
position (and back) with the circuit-breaker open
speed.
and the earthing switch open (that means that
4.4.4 Auto-reclosing sequence the breaker must opened before)
An OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF auto-reclosing sequen- • The circuit-breaker can only be closed when the
ce is activated and checked by the protection withdrawable part is precisely in the defined test
system. It is necessary for the spiral spring in the position or service position (mechanical inter-
operating mechanism to be in the (re-)charged lock, with additional electrical interlock for
condition, with the circuit-breaker in the closed circuit-breakers with electrical releases).
position. The (re-)charging process is carried out
• The circuit-breaker can only be opened
automatically after closing of the breaker on
manually in the service or test position when no
breakers with motor charging mechanisms, but
control voltage is applied, and cannot be closed
must be carried out manually on breakers without
(electromechanical interlock).
charging motors (or when the charging motor has
broken down). Opening of the breaker is also • Connection and disconnection of the control
possible during the (re-)charging process, but sub- wiring plug connector (8.1) is only in the test/
sequent closing of the breaker is however blocked disconnected position possible.
until the charging process has been completed. • The earthing switch can only be closed when the
4.4.5 Quenching principle of the vacuum interrupter withdrawable part is in the test/disconnected
position or the removed position (mechanical
Due to the extremely low static interrupter cham-
interlock).
ber pressure of 10-4 to 10-8 mbar, only a relatively
small contact gap is required to achieve a high • The withdrawable part cannot be moved from
dielectric strength. The arc is extinguished on one the test/disconnected position into the service
of the first natural current zeros. position when the earthing switch is closed
(mechanical interlock).
Due to the small contact gap and the high
conductivity of the metal vapour plasma, the arc • Details of any additional interlocks, e.g. in
drop voltage, and additionally, due to the short connection with a blocking magnet on the
arcing time, the associated arc energy, are extre- withdrawable part and/or earthing switch
mely low, which has advantageous effects on operating mechanism, can be found in the order
the life of the contacts and thus on that of the documents for each individual case (see also
vacuum interrupters. section 8.5.6).
34
8.1
6
9.3 7
10
Figure 4/1: Withdrawable part with circuit-breaker, mechanism side. Figure 4/2: Withdrawable part with circuit-breaker, pole side.
3 Withdrawable assembly 6 Contact arm with insulating sleeve

8.1 Control wiring plug 7 Contact system
9 Circuit-breaker operating mechanism
9.3 Handling hole on both sides
10 Breaker pole
3 4.1 4 -S9 -S8 8.3
Figure 4/3: Withdrawable assembly with built-in auxiliary switch

(type B, see section 8.5)
-S8 Test position indicator

-S9 Service position indicator
3 Control wiring connector plug for
withdrawable assembly
4 Spindle
4.1 Scene head on spindle
8.3 Control wiring connector plug for withdrawable
assembly
35
9.1
9.2
11
12 20.1
20.2
14
20.3
13 20.4
15 20.5
18 20.7
17 20.6
Figure 4/4: Circuit-breaker front with controls and annunciations Figure 4/5: Partial section of a vacuum interrupter,
simplified schematic diagram
9.1 Mechanism enclosure (Details vary according to the specified switching duties)
9.2 Front plate
11 ON push-button 20.1 Insulator
12 OFF push-button 20.2 Fixed contact
13 Mechanical position indicator 20.3 Movable contact
14 Mechanical operating cycle counter 20.4 Metal bellows
15 Recess for charging lever 19 20.5 Screen
17 Rating plate 20.6 Guide
18 Mechanical charging condition indicator 20.7 Interrupter lid
39
38
15
37
35
34
31 33
Figure 4/6: Basic structure of the stored-energy spring mechanism

15 Recess
19 Charging lever
20 Vacuum interrupter
20.3 Movable contact
21 Upper breaker terminal
22 Lower breaker terminal
23 Flexible connector Figure 4/7: View of the stored-energy spring mechanism and
25 Contact force spring auxiliary equipment with the front plate removed
26 Insulated coupling rod
15 Recess for charging lever 19
27 Opening spring
31 Release and control mechanism on the drive shaft
28 Shift lever pair
33 Drum with spiral spring
29 Cam disk
34 Chain drive
30 Drive shaft
35 Ratchet wheel
31 Release mechanism
37 Charging motor
32 Stop disk
38 Release and control mechanism area
39 Auxiliary switch block
34 Chain drive
35 Ratchet wheel
36 Left-hand control cam
36
5 Despatch and storage 5.5 Intermediate storage
Intermediate storage of the switchgear in the
5.1 Condition on delivery switch position OFF and the stored-energy spring
• The factory-assembled switching devices are mechanisms discharged
checked at the works for completeness of the
equipment installed and simultaneously
subjected to a routine test in accordance with (Indicator DISCHARGED: ).
VDE 0670, part 1000 or IEC publication 60694,
thus verifying their correct structure and Conditions for optimum intermediate storage:
function. 1. Devices with basic packaging or unpacked:
5.2 Packaging • A dry and well ventilated storeroom with
The switching devices are mounted individually on climate in accordance with VDE 0670, part
a wooden pallet and sealed in film and/or packed in 1000 / IEC 60694.
cardboard for delivery. • Room temperature which does not fall below
Packaging for overseas shipment: –5 °C.
• Drying agent bags inserted in the film-sealed • Do not remove or damage the packaging.
packaging. • Unpackaged devices:
• See instructions for use of the drying agent bags – Are to be loosely covered with protective
in accordance with DIN 55 473: sheeting.
– If colour indicator is blue: contents dry, – Sufficient air circulation must be
– If colour indicator is pink: contents moist maintained.
(e.g. relative humidity above 40%).
• Check regularly for any condensation.
5.3 Transport
2. Devices with seaworthy or similar packaging
Loading of the package units must only be carried
with internal protective sheeting:
out with a
• Store the transport units:
• crane,
• fork-lift truck and/or – protected from the weather,
• trolley jack. – dry,
Notes: – safe from damage.
• Avoid impact during handling. • Check the packaging for damage.
• Do not subject to other damaging mechanical • Check the drying agent (see also section
stresses. „Packaging“):
• Lifting gear must not be attached to the breaker – on arrival of the consignment,
poles or parts of the operating mechanism. Use – subsequently at appropriate intervals.
the lifting lugs T for hoists. • If the maximum storage period starting from
5.4 Delivery the date of packaging has been exceeded:
The duties of the consignee on receipt of the – The protective function of the packaging is
switching devices at site include the following: no longer guaranteed.
• Checking the delivery for completeness and – Suitable action must be taken if inter-
freedom from damage (e.g. moisture and its mediate storage is to continue.
adverse effects).
• Any short quantities, defects or damage in
transit:
– Must be precisely documented on the
consignment note.
– The shipper/carrier is to be notified
immediately in accordance with the liability
provisions of the German general conditions
for forwarders (ADSp/KVO).
Note:
Always take photographs to document any major
damage.
37
6 Installation and mounting of the 7 Commissioning / Operation
breaker 7.1 Note on safety at work
Careful and professional installation of the switch- • This switchgear may only be operated by
gear is one of the fundamental conditions of specially trained personnel who are familiar with
trouble-free circuit-breaker operation. the characteristics of the particular device.
• Install the mechanism enclosure in the panel • Observe the relevant instructions in section
without tension or distortion, inserting dished „Standards and specifications“.
washers below the nuts or bolt heads at each of 7.2 Preparatory activities
the four mounting points (dependent on the (Prior to application of primary voltage)
order).
• Check the circuit-breaker for any kind of damage
• Connect the main terminals without any perma- or other injurious environmental influence, and
nent tension or pressure forces, exerted for restore to the proper condition where necessary.
example by the conductor bars. • Remove any contamination, particularly on
• When connecting the conductor bars, the bolts insulating parts, which has occurred during
must be inserted to the depth shown on the transit, storage or installation.
dimensional drawing. • Lifting lugs for high current circuit-breakers, if still
• Take account of any tested terminal zone. fitted, must be removed.
• Check the primary and secondary connections
• Use DIN bolts of tensile class 8.8, fastening and the protectiv conductor terminal.
conductor bars together with dished washers.
• Check mechanical and electrical interlocks for
• Make a short-circuit proof connection between effectiveness, without using force.
the PE conductor and the main earthing bar in • Charge the spring energy storage mechanism
the switchgear, using contact washers. by hand (see section „Charging the spring
• Remove any dirt. See also section „Servicing“. energy storage mechanism“).
• For test purposes, switch the mechanism on and
off using the mechanical operating elements 11 or
Recommended
12 (note in this context any specified design
rated tightening torque 1)
Nm
supply voltage and any interlocks installed).
Lubricant 2) • Check the charging motor on circuit-breakers
with motor-operated mechanisms by applying
Thread size without Oil supply voltage.
or grease
• On motor-driven withdrawable parts, check the
M 6 10.5 4.5 direction of rotation of the travel motors as
described in section „Checking the direction of
M 8 26 10
rotation of the travel motors ...“.
M 10 50 20 • For any further questions on the functions of the
M 12 86 40 withdrawable circuit-breaker part and its testing,
see section „Testing withdrawable parts“.
M 16 200 80
• Ensure that the Instruction Manual is available to
the operators at all times.
1)
• Rated tigthening torques for fasteners without Lubrication
are based on the thread friction coefficient 0.14 (the 7.3 Movement of the withdrawable breaker part
actual values of which are subject to unavoidable, in some
cases not insignificant, spread). (Figures 4/1, 4/2, 4/3, 7/1 to 7/4)
Perform switching operations with the front doors shut.
• Rated tigthening torques for fastener with lubrication in
accordance with DIN 43673. 7.3.1 Manual insertion from the test/disconnected
2)
position to the service position
Thread and contact face of head lubricated.
• Connect control wiring plug 8.1.
Take account of any tightening torques which deviate from
the general table (e.g. for contact systems or device • Close the front door.
terminals) as stated in the detailed technical documentation. • Ensure that the circuit-breaker is in the OFF
position.
It is recommended that the threads or head contact surfaces
of the bolts be lightly oiled or greased, so as to achieve a • Fit hand crank 5 on square spigot 4.2 of the
precisely defined rated tightening torque. spindle mechanism 4.
38
Note: 7.3.3 Motor-driven movement of the withdrawable part
In order to avoid damage to the operating • Briefly operate the electrical control for insertion
mechanism, use the original hand crank only: or withdrawal (the withdrawable part then
– Standard version without slip clutch automatically moves into the opposite position).
– Optional version with slip clutch. • Observe the position indicator.
• Turn the crank clockwise according the table Note:
until the stop is reached and the withdrawable When the motor fails, the withdrawable part can be
part is in the service position. moved in emergency manual operation. If the drive
motor fails during movement of the withdrawable
Note:
part, the withdrawable part must be moved into a
Do not force to move the withdrawable limit position in emergency manual operation.
breaker part (max. torque 25 Nm)!
Comply with the conditions for movement of the As a precondition for an auto-reclosing sequence,
withdrawable part as set out in section 8.5.6! the operating mechanism is either (re-)charged
after a closing operation automatically by the
Number of crank turns
charging motor, or it requires (re-)charging by
Panel type 12/17.5 kV 24 kV hand if the operating mechanism is of the manual
type.
ZS1, Powerbloc,
mounting frame 20 30 Emergency manual operation:
Emergency manual operation is carried out with the
ZS8.4
hand crank 5 on the spindle mechanism 4, in a
without feeder
similar manner to operation of a withdrawable
partitioning 20 25
breaker part with manual systems:
ZS8.4 • Turn off the supply voltage (m.c.b.), since the
with feeder motor would otherwise be braked electrically.
partitioning 25 25
• Observe the position indicator. When the withdrawable part moves, the motor
turns. The motor functions in such a case like a
• Remove hand crank 5 by pressing first against
generator, i.e. it can lead to reverse voltages in
the hand crank and then remove.
the terminals.
Note:
The motor protection device must not be
When removing the crank, it is essential to ensure changed from the specified type and rated
that the spring-loaded scene head 4.1 slides into value, or the behaviour of the permanent magnet
the untensioned front position. Spindle 4 is thus motor could be irreversibly impaired
locked in place, preventing inadvertent turning of
the spindle. Turning of the spindle opens auxiliary 7.3.4 Withdrawal from the test/disconnected position
switches -S8/-S9 and thus prevents the circuit- onto the service truck
breaker from being operated. • Open the door of the circuit-breaker compartment.
Note: • Release control wiring plug 8.1 and engage it in
The withdrawable part must not be stopped at any the storage position on the withdrawable part.
position in the travel range between the service • Position service truck 48 with the guide pins
position and test/disconnected position! 48.2 of the adjustable bench top at the correct
7.3.2 Manual withdrawal from the service position into height facing the panel front, and allow catch
the test/disconnected position 48.3 to engage.
• Ensure that the circuit-breaker is in the OFF • Move sliding handles 3.1 inwards against the
position. springs to release withdrawable part 1, withdraw
onto the service truck and secure it in the
• Reverse the procedure described above for catches on the truck.
insertion into the service position.
• Press the release lever (at the front underneath
Note: the bench top) and release the service truck
Withdrawable parts with blocking magnet -Y0 may from the panel.
not be forcibly moved during power failures. In
such a case they are blocked in the service and test
positions. For deblocking, see section 8.5.6.
39
7.3.5 Insertion from the service truck into the test/ 7.4.2 Closing and opening the circuit-breaker
disconnected position
With the withdrawable part in the service position,
• Carry out the procedure as described above for on and off switching operations should only be
withdrawal, changing the order accordingly. carried out with the doors closed.
7.4 Operation of the circuit-breaker • Closing operation:
(Figures 4/4 and 7/1)
Press mechanical ON push-button 11, or
7.4.1 Charging the spring energy storage mechanism operate the electrical control unit.
Circuit-breakers with charging motors: • Opening operation:
• Charging takes place automatically.
Press mechanical OFF push-button 12, or
• If the charging motor breaks down, the charging operate the electrical control unit.
process can be carried out or completed manually.
Observe the notes in section 4.3.1.
Circuit-breakers with manual charging mecha-
nisms: The operating cycle counter 14 is automatically
• Insert charging lever 19 into recess 15 and incremented by one complete figure with each
pump up and down for approx. 25 strokes switching cycle. On completion of a switching
until the charged condition is displayed. operation the position indicator 13 in the window
of front plate 9.2 shows the appropriate position
• When the charged condition is reached, the
of the circuit-breaker.
charging mechanism automatically disengages,
and further strokes of the charging lever have no • Anti-pumping relay:
effect. The anti-pumping relay-K0 (wiring diagram in
Key to the charging condition indications: figure 2/15) prevents repeated ON-OFF swit-
ching operations if, for example, the breaker is
tripped by a protection relay in response to a
primary side fault while a permanent electrical
Discharged Charged closing command is simultaneously applied. The
circuit-breaker can then only be closed after the
closing command has been interrupted.
As a precondition for an autoreclosing sequence, • Closing on failure of supply voltage:
the operating mechanism is either (re-)charged
after a closing operation automatically by the – With standard equipment:
charging motor, or it requires (re-)charging by On failure of the control voltage, mechanical
hand if the operating mechanism is of the manual closing by means of ON push-button 11 is
type. possible at any time.
– With blocking magnet -Y1 fitted:
On failure of the control voltage, blocking
magnet -Y1 mechanically locks the ON
haflshaft and simultaneously interrupts the
circuit shunt release ON -Y3 via the cor-
responding auxiliary switch -S2.
Closing with the blocking magnet de-
energised requires manipulation of the circuit-
breaker operating mechanism:
– Remove front plate 9.2.
– Take care to avoid rotating parts!
• Opening on failure of supply voltage:
On failure of the supply voltage, mechanical
opening by means of OFF push-button 12 is
possible at any time.
40
8
11
12
19
13
14
18
3.1
(4)/
4.2 4 1 5
Figure 7/1: Manual operation and mechanical indicators Figure 7/2: Movement of the withdrawable breaker part between
of a withdrawable breaker part, withdrawable the test/disconnected position and the service position,
circuit-breaker part in test/disconnected position clockwise up to the stop for the service position and
anti-clockwise for the test/disconnected position
Note:
1 Withdrawable circuit-breaker part
Test switching of the circuit-breaker without primary
4 Spindle mechanism
voltage can be carried out with the withdrawable part in
5 Hand crank
the test position (with the control wiring plug fitted).
3.1 Sliding handle, connected to the catch in
the withdrawable part base frame
(4) Spindle mechanism
4.2 Square spigot
8 Control wiring plug connection
11 Mechanical ON push-button
12 Mechanical OFF push-button
13 Mechanical position indicator
14 Mechanical operating cycle counter
18 Charging condition indicator
19 Charging lever
48.2
48.3
48.1
48 1 3.1
Figure 7/3: Approaching the panel and positioning the service Figure 7/4: Service truck engaged with the panel. Withdrawable
truck with the guide pins of the adjustable height bench circuit-breaker part released for removal by moving the
top at the correct height for the catch to engage sliding handles inwards
48.1 Height adjuster 1 Withdrawable circuit-breaker part
48.2 Guide pin 3.1 Sliding handle
48.3 Catch 48 Service truck (not included in supply)
41
8 Maintenance 8.1.1 Service-life
Typical life-expectancies for VD4 circuit-breakers:
Maintenance serves to ensure trouble-free • Vacuum interrupter chambers: Up to 30,000
operation and achieve the longest possible work- switching cycles, depending on chamber type
ing life of the switchgear. In accordance with (see section “Permissible numbers of switching
DIN 31 051 / IEC 61208 it comprises the following cycles“)
closely related activities:
• Device: Up to 30,000 cycles under normal
Inspection: Determination of the actual operating conditions, depending on breaker
condition type, and given regularly and conscientiously
Servicing: Measures to maintain the performed maintenance
specified condition • Withdrawable assembly: With careful operation
Repair: Measures to restore the and appropriately performed inspection work,
specified condition. up to 1000 movement operations can be
achieved.
8.1 General See also IEC 60298
Vacuum circuit-breakers are characterized by
The service life data fundamentally apply to all
their simple and robust construction. They have a
components which are not directly influenced by
long life expectancy. Their operating mechanisms
the operator.
have a low maintenance requirement, and the
interrupters are maintenance-free during their Components operated manually (movement of the
working life. There is no adverse effect on the withdrawable part, etc.) may deviate.
vacuum, even from frequent switching of operating
and short-circuit currents. 8.2 Inspection and functional testing
The servicing intervals and scope are determined by 8.2.1 Switching devices in general
environmental influences, the switching sequences
and number of short-circuit breaking operations. • The proper condition of the switching device is
to be verified by regular inspection.
Note:
• The checks are to be performed in accordance
The following must be observed for all maintenance with BGV A2 standard.
work:
• Inspection at fixed intervals may be waived if the
• The relevant specifications in section “Standards switchgear is permanently monitored by a
and specifications“ qualified personnel.
• Notes on safety at work in section “Commis-
• The checks first and foremost comprise visual
sioning/Operation“
examination for contamination, corrosion,
• Standards and specifications in the country of moisture and discharge phenomena.
installation.
• In unusual operating conditions (including
Maintenance work may only be performed by fully adverse climatic conditions) and/or special envi-
trained personnel, observing all the relevant safety ronmental pollutions (e.g. heavy contamination
regulations. It is recommended that ABB Calor and aggressive atmosphere), inspection may
Emag after-sales service personnel should be also be necessary at shorter intervals.
called in, at least during the performance of
servicing and repair work. • Visual checking of the isolating contact system.
We recommend to turn alternately the contact
While the work is in progress, all supply voltage system in order to clean the inner contact points
sources must also be disconnected and secured of the contact system.
to prevent reconnection.
The contact points should be cleaned if signs of
Note: unperminable overheating (discoloured surface)
In order to prevent accidents (particularly injury to are visible (see section “Repair“)
hands!) extreme care should be taken during • If an incorrect condition is found, appropriate
all repair work on the operating mechanism, servicing measures are to be initiated.
especially with front plate removed.
The spiral spring in the spring energy storage 8.2.2 Stored-energy spring mechanism
mechanism, for instance, retains a basic tension Functional testing of the operating mechanism is to
which is independent of the charging and be performed:
discharging processes during switching, so as to
• after 5000 operating cycles or
ensure correct function. This spring energy can
be inadvertently released if work is performed • during servicing work as set out in section
incorrectly on the spring mechanism! „Inspection, switching devices in general“.
42
Prior to functional testing, switch the breaker off necessary in accordance with the safety
and regulations of DIN VDE/IEC.
• move it into the test position (withdrawable • Cleaning of surfaces in general:
breaker) or – Dry, lightly adhering dust deposits with a soft,
• isolate the outgoing feeder (with stationary dry cloth.
mounted breakers). – More strongly adhering contamination with
slightly alkaline household cleanser or Rivolta
Note:
BWR 210.
Isolate and secure the working area in accor-
• Cleaning of the insulating material surfaces and
dance with the safety regulations specified by
conductive components:
DIN VDE/IEC.
– Light contamination:
Scope of functional testing: with Rivolta BWR 210.
• Perform several switching operations under no- – Strongly adhering contamination:
load, above all with circuit-breakers seldom with cold cleanser 716.
operated in normal service.
Wipe down after cleaning, using clean water,
• Switch off the charging motor (if fitted) and and dry properly.
discharge the spring energy storage mechanism
• Observe the manufacturer’s instructions and the
by ON/OFF switching operations.
special ABB Instruction Manuals BA 1002/E or
• Examine visual the condition of the lubrication on BA 1006/E on safety at work.
rotary bearings, sliding surfaces, etc.
Note:
• Check the proper mechanical/electrical sequence
of the individual functions. Use only halogen free cleansers, and in no case
1.1.1-trichloroethane, trichloroethylene or carbon
8.2.3 Breaker pole tetrachloride!
No inspection of the breaker pole above and
beyond the stipulations of section „Inspection, 8.3.2 Stored-energy spring mechanism
switching devices in general“ is necessary. Servicing of the operating mechanism is to be
8.2.4 Withdrawable assembly performed after 10,000 operating cycles.
• The inspection should always include a visual Prior to servicing, switch the breaker off, and
examination of the withdrawable part assembly. • move it out of the panel (with withdrawable
Special attention is to be paid to those parts breakers) or
which may possibly be damaged by improper
• isolate the outgoing feeder (with stationary
handling. (See section “Inspection/Circuit-
mounted breakers).
breaker in general“.)
Observe the safety regulations.
• Visual checking of the isolating contact system.
We recommend turning the contact system Details of the servicing:
alternately in order to clean the inner contact • Switch off the charging motor (if fitted), and
points. discharge the spring energy storage mechanism
The contact points should be cleaned if signs of by closing and opening the breaker once.
impermissible overheating (discoloured surface) • Replace parts subject to high climatic and
are visible (see section “Repairs“). mechanical stresses as a precaution after
• The interlock conditions and the ease of 10,000 operating cycles (for details see ABB
movement of the lock and release device are to Calor Emag After-Sales Service).
be checked as described under “Repairs“. • For replacing highly stressed parts neutralize
When checking the interlock conditions, it is basic tension of the spiral spring, state the rate.
essential to ensure that no force is used. Be careful when carrying out!
Maximum torque 25 Nm! • Relubricate pawls, support shafts, sliding and

rotating bearing surfaces. Lubricant:
8.3 Servicing Isoflex Topas NB 52.
8.3.1 Switching devices in general • Check the fit of fasteners (e.g. locking pins) in
If cleaning is found to be necessary during cranks, pins, bolts etc. Check the tightness
inspections as set out in „Inspection, switching of fastening bolts.
devices in general“, the following procedure is to • Always replace any spring lock washers, split
be adopted: pins and other fasteners removed during the
• Prior to cleaning, the working area is to be work with new parts when reassembling the
isolated and secured against reclosing where equipment.
43
• Check the general condition of the operating • Isolate and secure the working area in
mechanism and recharge the spring energy accordance with the Safety Regulations to
storage mechanism. DIN VDE / IEC.
• Perform comprehensive mechanical and electrical • Open the circuit-breaker.
functional tests. Observe the instructions on • Earth all poles of the circuit-breaker on one side.
setting.
• Connect the earthed test lead of the the VIDAR
• Ensure that the bolted joints at the contact
vacuum checker conductively to the station
locations of the conductor bar system and the
earth.
earthing connections are tight.
• Connect the high voltage test lead of the VIDAR
Note: vacuum checker with phase L1 of the unearthed
This work may only be performed by the after-sales pole side and test the vacuum interrupter
service personnel of ABB Calor Emag or ade- chamber with the circuit-breaker contact gap
quately qualified personnel. open. Repeat for phases L2 and L3.
Note:
8.3.3 Breaker pole
Connected cables may lead to a “detective“
The breaker pole with the vacuum interrupter is indication on the vacuum checker as a result of
maintenance-free up to reaching the permissible their cable capacitance. In such cases, the cables
number of vacuum interrupter operating cycles in are not be removed.
accordance with section „Permissible number of
vacuum interrupter switching operations“. 8.4 Repair
The working life of the vacuum interrupter is 8.4.1 VD4 circuit-breaker run-on block
defined by the sum current limit corresponding to
In case of any irregularity in the area of the inner
the equipment data in individual cases in
control mechanism and of the charging function of
accordance with section „Permissible number of
the stored-energy spring mechanism, the run-on
vacuum interrupter switching operations“:
block disables the immediately subsequent
• When the sum current limit is reached, the switching operation.
complete breaker poles are to be replaced. This is a protective measure to prevent damage to
Note: the circuit-breaker
Dismantling and Replacement of the complete Release of the run-on block is described in
breaker poles should only be carried out by instruction manual BA 383/E.
ABB Calor Emag after-sales service personnel or
by specially trained personnel, particularly as pro- 8.4.2 Replacement of circuit-breaker parts and
per adjustment is necessary. accessories
For testing the vacuum without dismantling the Only remove and reassemble circuit-breaker parts
circuit-breaker you may use: and accessories when the breaker has been switched
off and the working area is to be isolated and
• Vaccuum tester VIDAR, from Programma
secured against reclosing. The spring energy storage
Electric GmbH, Bad Homberg v.d.H.
mechanism must be discharged.
The following test values have to be set for All supply voltage sources must be disconnected
checking of the internal interrupter chamber and secured against reclosing during the removal
pressure with the VIDAR vacuum tester: and installation work.
Rated voltage of DC test voltage 8.4.3 Touch up of surfaces
the circuit-breaker
• Sheet steel parts, painted:
12 kV 40 kV – Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.
17.5 kV 40 kV – Grind off paint coat and degrease.
24 kV 60 kV – Apply anti-rust primer and top coat.
– Use top coat paint in the standard colour
Testing must always be performed with the device
RAL 7035.
switched off:
• Sheet steel parts, with zinc surface and
• 12 to 24 kV: with rated contact distance passivated functional parts:
• 36 kV: with additional provisions – Remove white rust with a wire brush or
(obtainment of information from cleaning pad (e.g. Scotch-Brite white).
breaker manufacturer necessary)
– Remove loosely adhering particles with a dry
Procedure for vacuum interrupter testing for cloth.
stationary mounted switching devices: – Apply zinc spray or zinc dust primer.
44
• Functional parts, phosphated: • Check the setting of interlocking rod 46.5:
– Remove rust with a wire brush or cleaning pad – Turn spindlel 4 anti-clockwise to the stop for
(e.g. Scotch-Brite white). the disconnected position:
The distance between lever 46.3 and cam
– Clean with a dry cloth.
46.2 must be 2+1 mm.
– Grease with Isoflex Topas NB 52. The distance between roller 46.1 and
blocking bracket 46.8 must be 0.2-0.5 mm.
8.4.4 Circuit-breaker in general:
– Turn spindle 4 clockwise to the stop for the
• Check that the bolt connections at the contact
service position:
points in the busbar system are tight, and that
the isolating contact system functions correctly. The distance between lever 46.3 and cam
46.2 must be 2+1 mm.
• Regrease the contact points and mechanism of
the withdrawable part insertion system as The distance between roller 46.1 and
necessary, or, when lubrication is inadequate or blocking bracket 46.8 must be 0.2-0.5 mm.
missing, thoroughly clean the areas concerned – Loosen bolts 46.7 or 46.9 for any necessary
and regrease with Isoflex Topas NB 52 lubricant. adjustment.
• Where required, regrease or thoroughly clean
slide plates and bearings in the panel and 8.5 Testing withdrawable parts with a VD4 type
regrease them with Isoflex NB 52 lubricant. circuit-breaker
8.4.5 Replacement of contact systems When functional tests are carried out on
withdrawable parts, compliance with the con-
(Cover illustration of „Maintenance“ section) ditions listed below should also be checked. In
Remove the contact system for thoroughly this context, a distinction should be made
cleaning as described below (Figures) between two types of the devices for the VD4
withdrawable part:
– Slide the two inner annular tension springs
facing the breaker pole to a position beside the • Type A: Withdrawable assembly without inte-
other two outer annual tension springs, thus grated auxiliary switches (manual operation
releasing contact system, and remove the only).
contact system from contact arm. • Type B: Withdrawable assembly with integrated
– Fit a new contact system back to front on the auxiliary switches (manual or motorized
thin end of arbor, and slide it forwards onto the operation).
thicker part of the shank.
8.5.1 Motor-driven withdrawable parts
– Fit arbor onto the relevant contact arm, slide the
contact system over onto the contact arm, and (non-standard)
withdraw the arbor. Carry out testing of motor-driven withdrawable
– Check all contact fingers and annular tension parts in the same way as for manually operated
springs for perfect fit. withdrawable part:
Note: • Turn off the supply voltage (m.c.b.), since the
motor could otherwise be braked electrically.
The set installation position of contact arms must
not be changed by the improper use of force. • Turn hand crank 5 in the required direction.
Note:
8.4.6 Replacement of the withdrawable assembly
When the withdrawable part moves, the motor
(Figures 8/7, 8/10 and 8/11) turns. The motor functions in such a case like a
• Disconnect plug connector 8.3 (only for generator, i.e. it can lead to reverse voltages in the
withdrawable assembly of type B) terminals.
• Remove interlock rod 46.5 with pin 46.4 from
8.5.2 Checking the correctness of dimensional settings
the withdrawable assembly
(Figures 8/7 to 8/11)
• For motorized withdrawable assemblies,
remove the two socket head bolts which are 1. The distance between lever 46.3 operated by
accessible from below the assembly link rod 46.5 and plastic cam 46.2 should be
• Unbolt the circuit-breaker from the withdrawable 2+1 mm. If adjustment is required, release the
assembly (4 x M12 bolts) two bolts 46.6 and 46.7. Deviations from the
specified value can have the following effects:
• Mount the circuit-breaker on a new with-
drawable assembly in the reverse order, using • Dimensions too large: blocking system for the
new circlip and special pliers for pin 46.4 drive spindle deactivated.
45
• Dimensions too small: proper action of the In test operations, the withdrawable part must be
electrical interlock no longer guaranteed. moved by hand with the crank fitted with the motor
power switched off.
2. The distance between roller 46.1 and angle lever
46.8 should be 0.2-0.5 mm when the circuit- 1. Settings in the area of the test/disconnected
breaker is closed. position
If adjustment is required, release the two bolts • Move the withdrawable part out of the test/
46.7 and 46.6. disconnected position towards the service
position with a few turns of the crank.
8.5.3 Checking auxiliary switch settings on type A • Slowly move the withdrawable part back to
withdrawable parts the stop.
(Figure 8/7 ) Auxiliary switch -S8 must then switch over
Compliance with the interlock conditions in the just before the stop is reached.
areas of the test/disconnected position and the • Slowly insert the withdrawable part from the
service position is ensured by auxiliary switch -S6, test/disconnected position towards the service
located in the breaker housing and factory-set. position until auxiliary switch -S8 just operates.
In test operations, the withdrawable part must be In this position, it must still just be possible to
moved by hand with the crank fitted. move closing push rod 11.1. For this test, the
1. Settings in the area of the test/disconnected function of the blocking magnet -Y0
position (dependent on the order) must be deactivated
manually.
• Move the withdrawable part out of the test/
disconnected position towards the service This condition ensures that the electrical
position with a few turns of the crank. interlock takes effect before the mechanical
interlock in the motion sequence involved.
• Slowly move the withdrawable part back to
2. Settings in the area of the service position
the stop.
• Move the withdrawable part out of the limit
Auxiliary switch -S6 must then operate when
position towards the test/disconnected
the hand crank has a remaining angle of ≥ 60o
of turn to reach the stop.
• Slowly move the withdrawable part forwards
• Slowly insert the withdrawable part from the again to the stop:
test/disconnected position towards the
service position until auxiliary switch -S6 just Auxiliary switch -S9 must then switch over
operates. just before the stop is reached.
In this position, it must still just be possible to 8.5.5 Checking the direction of rotation of the travel
move closing push rod 11.1. For this test, the motors on motor-driven withdrawable parts
function of the blocking magnet -Y0
(dependent on the order) must be deactivated • Move the withdrawable part by hand into a
manually. central position between the test/disconnected
position and the service position.
This condition ensures that the electrical
interlock takes effect before the mechanical • Remove the hand crank.
interlock in the motion sequence involved. • Switch the supply voltage for the travel motor on.
2. Settings in the area of the service position • Use the local electrical controls to check that the
• Move the withdrawable part out of the limit withdrawable part moves in the correct direction.
position towards the test/disconnected Caution:
• Slowly move the withdrawable part forwards Do not allow the withdrawable part to run up
again to the stop: against a block when the travel direction is
incorrect! Switch the motor power off immediately
Auxiliary switch -S6 must then operate when (the travel process functions electrically by a seal-in
the hand crank has a remaining angle of ≥ 60o system with limit position switch-off).
of turn to reach the stop.
There may be a danger of injury when the door is
8.5.4 Checking auxiliary switch settings on type B open!
withdrawable parts
8.5.6 Testing of interlock conditions
(Figures 4/3 and 8/7)
(Figures 7/1, 7/2 and 8/7)
Compliance with the interlock conditions in the
test/disconnected and service position areas is The testing procedures for type A and type B
ensured by position signalling switches -S8 and withdrawable parts are identical.
-S9 located in the withdrawable assembly and 1. The withdrawable part must only be movable
factory-set. from the test/disconnected position into the
46
service position when the circuit-breaker is open 5. Withdrawable parts with order-related blocking
and the earthing switch is open. magnet -Y0 may not be moved in case of control
Check the following conditions individually: power failure, or when there is no control power.
Do not forcibly move blocked withdrawable
• With the circuit-breaker closed, insertion of
parts! The blocking magnet -Y0 is only present
the withdrawable part towards the service
on manually operated withdrawable parts.
position must be blocked after only half a turn
of the crank in the clockwise direction, and Releasing the blocking magnet -Y0.
the travel motor on motor-operated
• Remove front plate 9.2,
withdrawable parts must not be capable of
being switched on. • Disengage blocking magnet -Y0 by pulling the
• With the earthing switch closed, insertion of magnet armature,
the withdrawable part towards the service • While doing so, turn crank 5 about one half
position must be blocked after only two turn (either direction of rotation is permissible).
clockwise turns of the crank, and the travel
The blocking magnet is only active in the test
motor on motor-operated parts must not be
position and service position. In intermediate
capable of being switched on.
positions it has no effect.
Do not use force (max. torque 25 Nm)!
6. Disconnection of the control wiring plug 8.1 as
2. The withdrawable part must only be movable well as later insertion must be blocked in the
from the service position into the test/ withdrawable part’s service position.
disconnected position with the circuit-breaker
open. Check this condition.
8.6 Spare parts, auxiliary materials, lubricants
• With the circuit-breaker closed, withdrawal
movement of the withdrawable part must be
8.6.1 Spare parts
blocked after only half a turn of the crank in
the anti-clockwise direction, and the travel When parts are required, the serial number of the
motor on motor-operated withdrawable parts relevant withdrawable breaker part or circuit-
must not be capable of being switched on. breaker should always be quoted. Setting
instructions are to be requested separately.
3. Closing of the circuit-breaker must only be
possible when the withdrawable part is in the Circuit-breaker VD4:
defined test/disconnected position or service
• Shunt release, auxiliary switch:
position.
For notes on settings see drawing
The control wiring plug 8.1 must previously have GCE 717 96 11
been inserted.
• Charging motor with gearbox:
Check this condition as follows: No special notes required
• It must not be possible to close the circuit- (table 1)
breaker with the withdrawable part in any
Withdrawable assembly of VD4:
position between the test/disconnected
position and the service position. • Manually moveable withdrawable assembly :
• Enabling of switching when the withdrawable – type A:
part moves into the service position is For notes on settings see drawing
effected electrically by operation of auxiliary GCE 7003570, sheet 1 and 2
switch -S6 in the breaker housing (for type A),
– type B:
or of auxiliary switch -S9 in the withdrawable
For notes on settings see drawing
assembly (for type B), and mechanically
GCE 7003570, sheet 1 and 2.
slightly earlier; the latter corresponds to a
position approximately half a turn of the crank • Motor-driven withdrawable parts:
before stop. For notes on settings see drawing
• For motion into the test/disconnected GCE 7003571
position, the same enabling conditions apply • Blocking magnet -Y0:
analogously, in this case by means of auxiliary For notes on settings see drawing
switch -S6 in the breaker housing(for type A) GCE 7003820, sheet 1.
or the auxiliary switch -S8 in the withdrawable (table 2)
assembly (for type B).
4. It must only be possible to open the circuit-
breaker (manually) when the withdrawable part
is in the service position or test/disconnected
position and the control voltage has failed.
Check this condition.
47
Table 1: VD4 circuit-breaker
Designation Item Rated supply Part no.

no. voltage (order code)
• Auxiliary switch -S1 GCE7002397R0122

(with clamp-type terminal) -S3 GCE7002397R0121
-S4 GCE7002397R0122
-S5 GCE7002397R01..1)
• Auxiliary switch on blocking magnet -S2 GCE7003022P0101
• Auxiliary switch for fault annunciation -S7 GCE0905121P0100
• 1st shunt release OFF -Y2 GCE7004590P01..2)
• 2nd shunt release OFF -Y9 GCE7004590P01..2)
• Shunt release ON -Y3 GCE7004590P01..2)
• Blocking magnet -Y1 GCE9478103P01..2)
• Undervoltage release -Y4 GCE9371466R01..2)
with spring mechanism
• Delayed undervoltage release -Y4 GCE9371466R01..2)
with spring mechanism
• Indirect overcurrent release with intermediate -Y7 GCE9371466R0112
current transformer and spring mechanism
• Intermediate current transformer for GCE9476148R0100
indirect overcurrent release
• Magnet holder, complete GCE7000880R0111
(with integrated rectifiers -V1, -V2, -V3, -V9)
• Series rectifier -V4/-V7 GCE7004046R0101
• Charging motor -M0 24V...240V GCE0940084P01..3)
(with gearing)
• Push-on sleeve 4,8-2,5 DIN 46247 Page 2

for push-on blade 0,8 thick
(for additionel external connections)
1)
Quote contact arrangement
2)
State the type of release and voltage
3)
State the rated supply voltage
48
Table 2: VD4 withdrawable assembly
Designation Item Rated supply Part no.

no. voltage (order code)
Auxiliary switch for manually operated

mechanism (type A) -S6 GCE7004023R0101
Auxiliary switch for manually operated

mechanism (type B) -S8/-S9
• contacts silver plated GCE7004024R0101
• contacts gold plated GCE7004024R0103
Auxiliary switches for motor-operated

driving mechanism -S8/-S9
• contacts silver plated GCE7004024R0102
• contacts gold plated GCE7004024R0104
Blocking magnet -Y0 24 V GCE7003820R0101

30 V R0102
48 V R0103
60 V R0104
110 V R0105
125 V R0107
220 V R0106
Motor with gearbox -M1 24 V GCE0940150P0111

30 V P0112
48 V P0113
60 V P0114
110 V P0115
220 V P0116
8.6.2 Auxiliary materials Part no.

(order code)
• Lubricants:
– Isoflex Topas NB 52 GCE0007249P0100
• Cleaning agents for general cleaning:
– Rivolta BWR 210 GCE0007707P0100
– Observe the relevant ABB instruction manual BA 1002/E GCEA901002P0102
• Cleaning agent for conductive parts,
insulating-material parts, and all parts with heavy
contamination:
– Cold cleanser 716 GCE0007706P0100
– Observe the relevant instruction manual BA 1006/E GCEA901006P0102
• Touch-up paint:
Standard colour RAL 7035
– 1 kg-box GCE9014060R0103
– Spray tin GCE0007895P0100
49
40 43 41.1 41 41.1 -Y4 44 -Y3 -Y1
43 41.2 42.1 41.2 42

Figure 8/1: Auxiliary switch block, equipment example Figure 8/2: Undervoltage release and operation area, equipment
example
40 Magnet holder, complete
41 Mounting plate 44 Interlock plate for -Y4
41.1 Upper (plug-in) fixing point -Y1 Blocking magnet
41.2 Lower fixing point -Y3 Shunt release ON
42 Auxiliary shaft -Y4 Undervoltage release
42.1 Crank
43 Fastening screw
35
34
37
33
37.1
-Y7 14 11.1 12.1
Figure 8/3: Indirect overcurrent release and operation area, Figure 8/4: Charging motor, charging system and spring energy store
equipment example
11.1 ON push-rod 34 Chain drive
12.1 OFF push-rod 35 Ratchet wheel
14 Operating cycle counter 37 Charging motor with gearing
-Y7 Indirect overcurrent release 37.1 Fastening screw (gearbox)
50
47.1 47 7
Bild 8/5: Fit the contact system back-to-front on the thin end of the
arbor and slide it onto the thicker shank area
7 Contact system
47 Arbor
47.1 Journal
11.1
46.3
46.1
8.3
46.8
(-S6)
6.2 6 (6.1) 7 7.1 47 5
Figure 8/6: Slide the contact system over from the arbor onto the Figure 8/7: Motor-driven withdrawable part in an intermediate
contact arm and allow it to engage there position close to the test/disconnected position, with
fitted crank for manual operation and breaker front plate
6 Contact arm removed
(6.1) Cheese head bolt
6.2 Insulating sleeve 5 Hand crank
7 Contact system 8.3 Control wiring plug connector for withdrawable
7.1 Internal tension springs assembly
47 Arbor 11.1 ON push rod
46.1 Roller
46.3 Lever
46.8 Angle lever
(-S6) Auxiliary switch (only with type A withdrawable part)
51
-Y1
11.1
46.2
46.3
-Y0
Figure 8/8: Detailed view of the opening and closing mechanism Figure 8/9: Manually moveable withdrawable part, front plate
removed
11.1 ON push rod
46.2 Plastic cam -Y0 Blocking magnet for withdrawable part
46.3 Lever
-Y1 Blocking magnet
46.2 46.2
1
2+
1
2+
46.3 46.3
46.5
46.5
49
46.6
46.6 46.7
46.7 46.9
46.1 46.1
46.9
46.4
0,2 - 0,5
0,2 - 0,5
46.4
46.8 46.8
Figure 8/10: Detail in the area of a withdrawable part with travel Figure 8/11: Mechanical interlock, withdrawable assembly/circuit-
motor, viewed from the left-hand side breaker with manually operated withdrawable parts
46.1 Roller 46.1 Roller
46.2 Cam 46.2 Cam
46.3 Lever 46.3 Lever
46.4 Pin 46.4 Pin
46.5 Link rod 46.5 Link rod
46.6 Bolt 46.6 Bolt
46.7 Bolt 46.7 Bolt
46.8 Angle lever 46.8 Angle lever
46.9 Bolt 46.9 Bolt
49 Travel motor
52
9 Application of the X-ray • The application of the rated power frequency
withstand voltage specified for the switching
regulations devices by VDE 0670 and IEC 62271-100 is also
One of the physical properties of vacuum insulation safe.
is the possibility of X-ray emissions when the • Higher voltages than the rated power frequency
contact gap is open. The specified type test withstand voltage or DC test voltage specified in
performed by the Physikalisch-Technische Bun- VDE or IEC standards must not be applied!
desanstalt (PTB) in Brunswick demonstrates that
the local dosage output of 1 µSv/h at a distance of • The containment of the above mentioned local
10 cm from the touchable surface is not exceeded. dosage output with the vacuum interrupter in the
open position is dependent on maintenance of
The results are as follows:
the specified distance between the contacts
• The use of the vacuum interrupters at rated (which is automatically ensured with correct
operating voltage is completely safe. mechanism function and force transmission).
53
54
55
Instruction manual no. GCEA 67 0460 P0102 Printed in Germany (06.04-2000-PPI)
ABB Calor Emag Mittelspannung GmbH Note:

We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the contents of this
Oberhausener Strasse 33 Petzower Strasse 8 document without prior notice. With regard to purchase orders, the agreed
particulars shall prevail.
40472 Ratingen 14542 Werder (Havel) OT Glindow ABB does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors
DEUTSCHLAND DEUTSCHLAND or possible lack of information in this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations
Phone: +49(0)21 02/12-12 30, Fax: +49(0)21 02/12-19 16 contained therein. Any reproduction – in whole or in parts – is forbidden without
E-mail: powertech@de.abb.com ABB’s prior written consent.
Copyright© 2004 ABB
Internet: http://www.abb.de/calor All rights reserved.
REF 542plus
Technical Reference Manual

1MRS755859 Multifunction Protection and Switchbay Control REF 542plus
Unit
Issued: 29.03.2002
Version: G/23.10.2008 Technical Reference Manual
Contents
Copyrights ................................................................................. 5
1. Introduction..............................................................7
1.1. This manual.............................................................. 7
1.2. Use of symbols ......................................................... 7
1.3. Intended audience ..................................................... 7
1.4. Product documentation ............................................... 8
1.5. Document revisions.................................................... 8
2. Safety information.....................................................9
3. General .................................................................. 11
4. Functions ............................................................... 19
4.1. Configuration .......................................................... 19
4.2. Measurement .......................................................... 19
4.2.1. Directly measured values .............................. 20
4.2.2. Calculated values ........................................ 20
4.2.3. Other values ............................................... 20
4.2.4. Monitoring and self-diagnosis......................... 21
4.3. Protection ............................................................... 21
4.4. Control................................................................... 22
4.5. Event recording ....................................................... 23
4.6. Fault recorder.......................................................... 23
4.7. Time synchronization................................................ 24
4.8. Interface to the primary process ................................. 25
4.8.1. Analog inputs .............................................. 25
4.8.2. Binary inputs and outputs.............................. 26
4.9. Interfacing a station automation system ....................... 27
4.10. Embedded Web Server........................................... 28
4.11. CAN Open (only for ABB switchgear companies) .......... 29
4.12. ABB Product Data Registration .................................. 30
5. Construction........................................................... 31
5.1. Base unit versions ................................................... 31
5.2. Mounting and installation........................................... 34
5.3. HMI ....................................................................... 34
6. Technical data ........................................................ 37
6.1. Analog inputs .......................................................... 37
6.1.1. Measurements ............................................ 37
6.1.2. Protection ................................................... 37
6.1.3. Analog input modules ................................... 38
6.1.4. Reaction time.............................................. 38
6.2. Protection functions technical data.............................. 39
3
REF 542plus Multifunction Protection and Switchbay Control 1MRS755859
Unit
6.3. Configuration restriction ............................................ 44

6.4. Binary inputs and outputs.......................................... 45
6.4.1. BIO module with mechanical output relays
(version3) ................................................... 45
6.4.2. BIO module with static outputs....................... 46
6.5. Interfaces ............................................................... 47
6.6. Power supply .......................................................... 48
6.7. Environmental conditions .......................................... 49
6.8. Protection degree .................................................... 49
6.9. Tests ..................................................................... 49
7. Ordering................................................................. 51
8. Connections ........................................................... 59
8.1. Connector plates ..................................................... 59
8.2. Binary input and output connections ........................... 63
8.3. Typical connection schemes ...................................... 65
8.3.1. Generic outgoing feeder................................ 65
8.3.2. Feeder with differential protection ................... 66
8.3.3. Incoming feeder with synchrocheck................. 67
9. Abbreviations ......................................................... 69
4
Unit
Copyrights
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by ABB Oy. ABB Oy assumes no responsibility for
any errors that may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB Oy be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or

consequential damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document,
nor shall ABB Oy be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from
use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB Oy, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license

and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such
license.
© Copyright 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB is a registered trademark of ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Guarantee
Please inquire about the terms of guarantee from your nearest ABB representative.
5
6
Unit
1. Introduction
1.1. This manual
This manual provides thorough information on the protection relay REF 542plus
and its applications, focusing on giving a technical description of the relay.
1.2. Use of symbols
This publication includes the following icons that point out safety-related conditions
or other important information:
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to

the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a
hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader to relevant facts and conditions.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it should be understood

that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions,
result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death.
Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.3. Intended audience
This manual is intended for operators and engineers to support normal use of as
well as configuration of the product.
7
Unit
1.4. Product documentation

Name of the Manual Document ID
Real Time Clock Synchronization, IRIG-B Input Time Master 1MRS755870
Product Guide 1MRS756269
Configuration Manual 1MRS755871
iButton Programmer User Manual 1MRS755863
Manual Part 3, Installation and Commission 1 VTA100004
Manual Part 4, Communication 1VTA100005
Motor Protection with ATEX Certification, Manual 1MRS755862
SCL Tool Configuration Manual 1MRS756342
Protection Manual 1MRS755860
Technical Reference Manual 1MRS755859
Technical Reference Modbus RTU 1MRS755868
Web Manual, Installation 1MRS755865
Web Manual, Operation 1MRS755864
IEC 61850 Protocol Implementation extra Information for 1MRS756360
Testing (PIXIT)
IEC 61850 Conformance Statement 1MRS756361
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement 1MRS756362
1.5. Document revisions

Version IED Revision number Date History
1VTA100001- Release 1.1, software version 25.10.2002
Rev 6, en V4C01
1VTA100001- Release 2.0, software version 15.09.2003
Rev 7, en V4D02
A Release 2.0 Service Pack3 28.02.2006 Document updated
* language
*
layout
B 2.5 30.09.2006 Updated to software
version V4E03x.
C 2.5 30.04.2007 Updated to software
version V4E04x.
D 2.5 15.08.2007 Document updated
E 2.5 28.09.2007 Document updated
F 2.5 14.02.2008 Document updated
G 2.6 23.10.2008 Updated to software
version V4F06x
Applicability
This manual is applicable to the REF 542plus release 2.6, software version V4F06x.
8
Unit
2. Safety information
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the

auxiliary voltage has been disconnected.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial

property damage.
Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical

installation.
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be

followed.
The frame of the device has to be carefully earthed.
The device contains components which are sensitive to electrostatic

discharge. Unnecessary touching of electronic components must
therefore be avoided.
9
10
Unit
3. General
REF 542plus is a Switchgear Multifunction Protection and Switchgear Control Unit
and it is the further development of the former REF 542 multifunctional unit. Like
its predecessor, it features the following functions:
* Protection
* Measurement
* Control
* Monitoring and self diagnosis
* Communication
All above-mentioned and also power quality functions are integrated into a
programmable environment. The exceptional flexibility and scalability of this new
generation device lead to a smart solution where the traditional approach would be
ineffective and expensive.
The following figures Fig. 3.-1 and Fig. 3.-2 show examples of the REF 542plus
installation in several switchgears.
A050395
Fig. 3.-1 REF 542plus installed in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS)
11
Unit
A070118
Fig. 3.-2 REF 542plus installed in an air-insulated switchgear (AIS)
REF 542plus is composed of two parts: a base unit and a separate human machine
interface (HMI). The base unit contains the power supply, the processor board, the
analog input board and binary input and output (I/O) modules, as well as optional
modules for supplementary functions. The base unit and a HMI are connected with a
serial cable.
The HMI is a stand-alone unit with its own power supply. It can be installed on the
low voltage (LV) compartment door or in a dedicated compartment close to the
central unit. The HMI can be used to set the protection parameters to locally operate
the switching devices in the switchgear and to visualize events and measurements. A
shielded, isolated twisted pair according to the RS-485 standard interface connects
the HMI to the base unit. Fig. 3.-4 shows an installation of the central unit and the
HMI Control Unit in the LV compartment of a switchboard for the switchgear.
12
Unit
A070117
Fig. 3.-3 Mounting of the central unit in the LV compartment and the HMI on the door
REF 542plus is a real-time system. A digital signal processor (DSP) carries out the
measurement and protection functions, and a micro controller (MC) the control
functions. Due to the task separation, there is no impact between the implemented
protection scheme and the control scheme to be modified. An optional
communication processor (CP) is needed when connecting to a station automation
system. A block diagram of the REF 542plus is shown in Fig. 3.-4.
The main module is equipped with the DSP and the MC. The CAN Open interface,
the Ethernet interface for the embedded Web server, the optical input port for time
synchronization are located on the main module as well. The optional
communication module takes care of the communication with the substation
automation system. The binary input and output modules interface the primary
process to send commands and to acquire status information. The analog input
module acquires the current and voltage signals, both from instrument transformers
or non-inductive sensors. The optional analog 0/4 ... 20 mA output module and
analog 4 ... 20 mA input module allow exchanging information with the 4 ... 20 mA
or 0 ... 20 mA current loop.
13
Unit
Analog Output Board Analog Input Module Communication board
RX TX
0/4...20mA 0/4...20mA
CP
Communication Processor
Analog Input Board

IL1
IL2 DSP µC
IL3
start L1
Time Synch.
UL1 start L2 Control
Protection,
UL2 start L3
measurement,
UL3 Release/Trip
Io Autoreclosure
Vo
CAN Eth.
Main Board
Binary Binary
inputs outputs
Binary Input Output Board(s)

A050397
Fig. 3.-4 REF 542plus block diagram
The HMI control unit, as shown in Fig. 3.-5, features a back-illuminated liquid
crystal display (LCD), eight push buttons, several LEDs and an electronic key
interface. The language of the display can be selected by using the related
configuration software tool, which is also used to define the protection and the
control scheme.
A050399
Fig. 3.-5 HMI control unit
The left side of the LCD display is reserved for the single line diagram. The right
side is for plain text visualization such as measurement and protection events. The
LCD backlight is switched off automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
The HMI is a complete system for the local management of the switchgear. The
HMI allows the operator to set the protection functions, operate the primary objects,
visualize measurements and events, reset alarms and change the unit working mode.
The HMI includes:
14
Unit
* Unit Ready LED

* Network Communication LED
* Alarm LED
* Interlocking Error LED
* Electronic Keys Sensor
* Object Control push buttons
* Menu Navigation push buttons
* Programmable LEDs
* PC interface
* Measurements Bars
* Text
* SLD view
* CB fast opening
* User defined command buttons
Unit Ready LED
This green LED is turned on when the unit is operational. This LED is switched off
when there is no power supply or when the unit is not operational.
Network Communication LED
This LED is meaningful only when the REF 542plus is equipped with a
communication module and configured to use it. When a communication module is
detected inside the unit, the LED turns on to green. If a communication module is
not detected or fails, the LED turns from green to red. When the unit is not
configured for the communication, the LED is switched off.
Alarm LED
The alarm LED turns to red when user-defined alarms become true. Several
arbitrary alarm conditions can be defined and configured with the operating tool.
Alarm conditions can be a trip of a protection function, loss of SF6 in the circuit
breaker and so on. When this LED is on, it is not possible to close the circuit breaker
or to download a new configuration. The alarm condition has to be removed and the
alarm must be acknowledged first.
Interlocking Error
The interlocking error LED is usually green. The LED turns temporarily to red when
the user attempts an operation that would violate the programmed interlocking
conditions, for example switching a disconnector with the circuit breaker in closed
position.
15
Unit
Electronic Keys Sensor
The Electronic Keys Sensor recognizes electronic keys. Two different electronic
keys are provided. One key allows changing the parameters of the protection
functions. The other one is used to change the control modes. The sensor
automatically detects which key has been inserted. The two keys are labeLED
“Protect” and “Control” to distinguish them. When required, a general key to access
both modes can be provided. It is also possible to program an 8-character custom
code in the keys to increase the security levels or for any other specific reason. This
can be done easily with a program available on request.
Object Control
Object Control push buttons allow operating the primary objects.
Menu Navigation
Menu Navigation push buttons allow navigating trough the REF 542plus menu.
Programmable LEDs
8 freely programmable, three-color LEDs are available for indications. There are 4
pages of these LEDs. The assignment of the LED to a specific condition is done
with the Operating Tool.
PC interface
PC interface is the infrared serial (IrDa) interface port to connect the REF 542plus
with a personal computer. By using the appropriate cable and the Operating Tool,
the following actions are possible:
* Downloading a configuration into the unit
* Uploading the current configuration from the unit
* Uploading the fault recorder
* Uploading other information (measurements, binary inputs status, binary output
status).
Measurements Bars
3 freely programmable bars are provided for a quick inspection of the switchgear
load situation. The three bars are marked M1, M2, and M3. Each bar is composed of
twelve LEDs: ten green and two red. The ten green LEDs are normally dedicated to
display between 0% and 100% of the nominal value of the configured measurement,
each LED corresponding then to 10% of the nominal value. The two red LEDs
indicate an overload condition of 20%. The measurement displayed by the bar is set
with the Operating Tool. M1..M3 reference text can be configured and displayed on
the display is display´s graphical side.
16
Unit
Text
There is a textual part of the LCD, which shows the menu, the measurement values,
the events and any information accessible through the menu structure.
SLD view
The SLD view is the graphical part of the LCD. This part shows the single line
diagram of the switchgear. The status of the primary objects is dynamically updated
after every operation: for example, if the circuit breaker has been opened, the SLD
view will reflect it.
Open CB for Fast Opening
When pressed simultaneously with the normal open button, the Open CB button
allows the fast opening of the circuit breaker independently from the selected
control mode. This feature must be enabled in the unit with the Operating Tool.
Moreover, it is also possible to have several, completely user defined command

buttons on the HMI. These virtual push buttons are available from the dedicated
HMI menu. During REF 542plus configuration, the user defines what command
buttons are required. Typical examples might be: start of a transfer switch or of any
other automation sequence, fault recorder activation, start of a load shedding
sequence and so on.
Due to the user defined command buttons, REF 542plus automation capabilities can
cope with any requirements.
17
18
Unit
4. Functions
REF 542plus switchgear protection and control unit integrates all secondary
functions in a single unit. This multifunctional unit features also a self-monitoring
function. All functions are designed as freely configurable software modules.
Therefore, a wide range of operation requirements in MV stations can be met
without any problems. The versatility of the software makes it possible to use the
REF 542plus on every switchgear irrespective of the specific application required.
4.1. Configuration
The REF 542plus unit is configured for the specific application using the Operating
Tool running on a personal computer. With the graphical editor, the needed
functions blocks are combined together. The available protection functions are
represented with specific function blocks, which can be combined with logic
function to define the required protection and automation scheme. The flexibility of
REF 542plus is advantageous for defining control functions and automation
sequences which can, for example, include the interlocking of the switching devices,
blocking the release of specific protection functions, as well as starting switching
sequences.
The REF 542plus unit provides a wide range of logical functions so that each
specific requirement can be met. The functions include logical gates such as AND,
OR, timers, counters, pulse generators, flip-flops and so on. All functions in the
switchgear are specified in collaboration with ABB. The REF 542plus configuration
is a file, which is then downloaded into the unit via the optical serial port on the
HMI. The Operating Tool allows also these additional functions, once connected to
the HMI via the serial cable:
* Protection functions setting
* Measurement values read-out
* On-line binary inputs and outputs status read-out
* Fault recorder data acquisition
The Operating Tool allows on line, real time monitoring of the internal control
signals and logic states, a powerful tool for application debugging.
The specific software configuration of the required protection scheme

can only be carried out in-house at ABB.
4.2. Measurement
REF 542plus can have a maximum of 8 analog input channels for measuring current
and voltage signals. These channels are organized into three groups.
19
Unit
Group 1 and group 2 have to be homogeneous, which means they can measure 3
currents or 3 voltages. For example, measurement of 1 current and 2 voltages is not
allowed. Group 3 can get any type of signals, for example, 2 currents, 2 voltages, or
1 current and 1 voltage. REF 542plus analog input is designed to be very flexible in
order to support all the protection functions of the unit itself.
Group 1 and group 2 can be used for homogeneous current or voltage measurements
both from instrument transformers and non-conventional sensors. Group 3 can be
used in a heterogeneous way, but in most cases with instrument transformers only.
For example channel 7 in group 3 can be used for earth-fault current with current
transformer type input, or for the synchro-check function with voltage transformer
type input.
The most common configuration uses three current and three voltage inputs and one
earth fault current input. All values are shown on the display as primary values. The
values registered over an extended time period, for example, energy, number of CB
operations, and maximum and measurement values are permanently saved. Even
after power interruptions this data is still available. Using this common
configuration, the following measured values are displayed:
4.2.1. Directly measured values

* Phase currents, three phases
* Phase line voltages, three phases
* Residual current (it can be calculated)
* Residual voltage (it can be calculated)
* Frequency
4.2.2. Calculated values
The following values can be calculated from the measured quantities listed above:
* Phase or Line voltages, three phases
* Average value/maximum value current, three-phase (determined over several
minutes)
* Apparent, active and reactive power
* Power factor
* Active and reactive energy
* THD (total harmonic distortion)
4.2.3. Other values
Moreover, the following quantities can be provided for monitoring purposes:

* Operating hours
* Switching cycles
* Total switched currents
* Metering pulses from an external metering device (up to 10)
20
Unit
4.2.4. Monitoring and self-diagnosis
The REF 542plus offers several features for monitoring the primary part as well for
self-diagnosis. The following computed quantities are available for primary part
monitoring:
* Maximum and mean currents in the observation period (0 ... 30 min)
* Sum of interrupted currents
* Working hours
* Number of switching cycles (open-close circuit breaker)
* Spring charging time supervision (when applicable)
* Opening coil supervision
The REF 542plus is equipped with self-diagnosis routines that constantly check the
hardware and software modules status. Every REF 542plus binary input and output
module is equipped with a watchdog contact that triggers in case of fault or power
loss. This contact can be used to detect unit failure and to initiate the appropriate
actions. Analog input channels can be optionally supervised. A broken wire in the
connection with an instrument transformer or a sensor can be detected and an alarm
can be activated.
4.3. Protection
REF 542plus offers a wide range of functions for protection. As previously

mentioned, a wide range of protection schemes for the protection of several system
components can be configured. The available protection functions can be combined
together to form the required protection scheme.
Current protection
* Inrush blocking (68)
* Overcurrent instantaneous (50)
* Overcurrent definite time, 2 thresholds (51)
* Overcurrent directional, 2 thresholds (67)
* Overcurrent IDMT (51 IDMT)
* Earth fault, 2 thresholds (51N)
* Earth fault IDMT (51 IDMT)
* Earth-fault directional, 2 thresholds (67N)
* Earth-fault directional sensitive (67S)
* Earth-fault directional sector (67NS), 10 thresholds.
Voltage protection
* Overvoltage instantaneous (59)
* Overvoltage definite time, 2 thresholds (59)
* Undervoltage Instantaneous (27)
* Undervoltage definite time, 2 thresholds (27)
* Residual overvoltage, 2 thresholds (59N)
21
Unit
Line protection
* Distance (21)
Differential protection
* Differential protection for motors and transformer (87)
* Restricted earth-fault for transformer (87N)
Thermal protection
* For cables, motors and transformers (49)
Motor-specific protection
* Number of starts counting (66)
* Locked rotor (51LR)
* Motor start (51MS)
* Low load (37)
* Unbalanced load (46)
Power quality mitigation
* Power factor controller (55)
* Switching resonance protection
* THD protection
Other protections and related functions
* Frequency protection (81), 6 thresholds per net
* Synchro check (25)
* Fault recorder
* Autoreclosure (79)
* Lock-out (86)
* Reverse power (32).
At most 24 protection functions can be installed inside the

REF 542plus unit. The maximum number is anyway dependent upon
the available processing power.
4.4. Control
The control and automation capabilities inside the REF 542plus are extremely
powerful. Simple interlocking against switching errors as well complex load-
shedding schemes can be easily implemented with the control possibilities offered
by the REF 542plus.
22
Unit
It is also possible to implement interlocking between the switchgear connected to

the same busbar system. This requires the availability of status information of the
switching devices to and from other switchgear. The status information must be
provided by:
* Conventional, hard-wired ring bus system
* Using the ABB station automation system with ABB LON protocol per LAG
1.4, which allows horizontal communication among the REF 542plus units
connected on the interbay bus
* Using the CAN Open digital fieldbus (only to be applied by the ABB switchgear
companies)
The REF 542plus foresees different control modes, selectable with the control key.
In local mode, the HMI control buttons are used to operate on the primary objects.
Remote operations are inhibited. In remote control mode, only switching actions
from a remote control device like a station automation system are permitted. Local
control from the HMI is inhibited. All possibilities to operate on the primary objects
can be inhibited by setting the unit to the no control mode.
4.5. Event recording
The last 30 recorded events can be shown locally on the HMI. Most of the events
are related to protection activities. In addition to displaying the event name,
additional information about the event, time, date and the RMS value of the short-
circuit current switched off by the CB are provided. Each event is stamped with the
time and the date. Events are stored in non-volatile memory, so they are maintained
also in case of a power loss.
A050403
Fig. 4.5.-1 Event list on the LCD of the HMI
4.6. Fault recorder
The REF 542plus unit is equipped with a powerful and flexible fault recorder
function. This function can be used to record at most eight analog input channels
and thirty-two binary signals. The analog input signals are recorded with a sampling
23
Unit
rate of 1.2 kHz for a time interval of at least 1 second and for a maximum of 5
seconds. The recording time is a combination of pre- and post-fault time. The total
recording capability is 5 seconds. There can then be configured 5 records of 1
seconds or a single record of 5 seconds. The recording can be started by a protection
event, by a binary signal change or by any user-defined condition.
Fault records can be transferred locally to a personal computer from the HMI optical
port with the Operating Tool on from the communication interface. When extracted
with the Operating Tool, the fault records are automatically converted into the
standard COMTRADE format. When retrieved from the communication interface,
they can be converted with a utility program. Fault records are stored in non-volatile
memory, so they remain available also after a power failure.
Fault records can be exported and converted with the configuration software. The
transfer of fault records can be done also via the interbay. Fig. 4.6.-1 shows a record
of a cross-country fault in an earth-fault compensated MV system starting with the
earth fault.
A050404
Fig. 4.6.-1 Record of a cross-country fault in MV system
4.7. Time synchronization
REF 542plus is equipped with an internal real-time clock, which is used to time
stamp events. The internal clock is buffered by a special capacitor. In case of a DC
power supply failure, the stored electrical energy in the capacitor ensures continued
operation of the internal clock for at least another two hours. The date and time of
the clock can be set via the HMI control unit.
REF 542plus internal clock can be kept in synchronization with an external clock in
different ways.
When connected to an ABB station automation system, REF 542plus is

synchronized via an interbay bus using the facilities of, for example, SPA protocol
or ABB LON per LAG 1.4 protocol. For connection to third party system the
24
Unit
standard protocol IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 or modified Modbus RTU protocol
are available. If better accuracy is required, REF 542plus can be synchronized using
the dedicated IRIG-B optical input port and a GPS master clock. The accepted
timeformats are IRIG format B 000, B002 and B003. The Fig. 4.7.-1 shows the time
distribution architecture for the synchronization.
A050501
Fig. 4.7.-1 Synchronization of the internal clock by a GPS master clock
4.8. Interface to the primary process
The REF 542plus offers a flexible interface to the primary process which is
described in the following sections.
4.8.1. Analog inputs
REF 542plus switchbay protection and control unit is designed for connecting to
non-conventional current and voltage sensors as well as to instrument transformers.
At most 8 analog input channels are available. Due to their linear characteristic,
modern current and voltage sensors provide greater accuracy and reliability in signal
measurements. Compared to instrument transformers, the new sensors have the
following advantages:
* Higher linearity
* High accuracy
* Compact dimensions
* Wide dynamic range
* Easy integration in the panels
25
Unit
The current sensor is based on the Rogowsky coil principle and consists of a single
air-wounded coil. Due to the lack of an iron core, the saturation effects of
conventional current transformers do not exist anymore. Current sensors are thus
well suited for the deployment of distance and differential protection functions.
The current sensor output is a voltage signal, proportional to the derivative of the
primary current being measured. The numerical integration of the signal is
performed by the DSP in the REF 542plus unit. The current sensors cover a range
between 0.5 to 2.0 of the rated current. The 80 A current sensors, for example, are
very suitable for applications between a current range of 40 A to 160 A. Other
current sensors are defined for the range 120 A to 480 A, 320 A to 1280 A and 800
A to 3200 A.
The voltage sensor is based on the resistive divider principle. Therefore, the voltage
sensor is linear throughout the whole measuring range. The output signal is a
voltage, directly proportional to the primary voltage. The following Fig. 4.8.1.-1
and Fig. 4.8.2.-1 shows a combined sensor. The current and voltage sensors are
encapsulated into a single resin unit. Therefore, they are referred to as "combined"
or "combi sensors".
A050502
Fig. 4.8.1.-1 Combined sensor
Coupling electrode is incorporated in the sensors, for voltage detecting systems

(VDS).
4.8.2. Binary inputs and outputs
The REF 542plus unit acquires the primary objects status with auxiliary contacts,
which are read by binary inputs, and sends commands using binary outputs. Several
signals coming from other components are also monitored. Among others, the
following operations are implemented using binary inputs and outputs:
26
Unit
* Primary objects control and interlocking in the switchgear

* Primary objects status acquisition (for example circuit breaker in opened/closed
position)
* Circuit breaker spring supervision (when applicable).
Binary inputs are isolated by opto-couplers. Binary outputs can be implemented

either with mechanical relays or with static (semiconductor) devices. In a switchgear
with directly driven motors, static power outputs are usually required
A051256
Fig. 4.8.2.-1 Combined sensor in block type (DIN) execution
4.9. Interfacing a station automation system
An optional communication module can be provided for interfacing a station

automation system. The six different protocols available for the REF 542plus make
possible to interface any kind of station automation system, both from ABB or from
third parties.
The following typical functions are possible:

* Primary objects status monitoring
* Primary objects control
* Protections parameterization
* Measurements, alarms end events acquisition
* Fault recorder data acquisition
The available protocols are:
* SPA
* ABB LON according to LON Application Guide (LAG) 1.4 definitions
* MODBUS RTU
* MODBUS TCP
27
Unit
* IEC 60870-5-103 with the extensions for control functions according to VDEW
(Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke = Association of German Utilities)
* IEC 61850 (only vertical communication, no GOOSE messages provided)
The first two protocols, SPA and LON according to LAG 1.4, are ABB specific. The
LON LAG 1.4 protocol has specific features for high accuracy time
synchronization. In this case, the REF 542plus units are synchronized from the
interbay bus. The other protocols, MODBUS RTU, MODBUS TCP, IEC 60870-5-
103 and IEC 61850 guarantee an open connectivity to any third party system.
MODBUS RTU and SPA protocols can run on a module equipped with two serial
channels.Simultaneous use of the two serial channels as physical redundancy is not
possible. The connection to two different SCADA systems is possible (for the SPA
protocol, provided that one of the two SCADA systems is for monitoring purposes
only).
Moreover, the presence of the Ethernet port located on the mainboard of the
REF 542plus extends the potential future connectivity of the REF 542plus unit.
Multiport communication can now be operated, for example, ABB LON protocol on
the optional communication module and simultaneously MODBUS TCP and the
embedded Web server.
4.10. Embedded Web Server
REF 542plus can be equipped with an embedded Web server for monitoring
purposes (WEB REF). The Ethernet port on the main module provides connectivity
to the Web. By using a standard PC with a commercial Web browser, the user can
gain access to the substation units using the Web facilities. Monitoring the
substation units is then possible from everywhere; the implemented security
mechanism prevents unwanted accesses and guarantees the required safety.
As soon as the browser is connected to the REF 542plus unit, the switchgear
overview is displayed. From here, the user can scroll through the single line
diagram. Clicking on the address button, the specific REF 542plus unit single line
diagram is loaded, with also all the information that would be normally available
standing in front of the HMI. REF 542plus data are available in read mode only
(monitoring access).
WEB REF makes also available the possibility to send SMS messages or e-mail via
the GSM network upon specific, user-defined condition (trips, alarms, etc.). A
suitable GSM modem must be connected to the mainboard module.
28
Unit
A051259
Fig. 4.10.-1 REF 542plus main page as seen from the Internet browser
A051260
Fig. 4.10.-2 Switchgear equipped with REF 542plus: single line diagram as seen from
the Internet browser
4.11. CAN Open (only for ABB switchgear companies)
The REF 542plus is equipped on the main module with a CAN Open standard
interface. The CAN Open interface has two main purposes:
* Replacing the switchgear internal hard-wired connections by means of a high-
speed digital bus;
* CAN Open standard devices connectivity (intelligent IO modules, sensors, and
so on)
29
Unit
Replacing the switchgear internal hard-wired connections by means of a high-speed

digital bus allows building new highly standardized switchgear with a more efficient
life cycle. Fast interlocking data among several REF 542plus units can be
exchanged on the CAN Open bus.
The utilization of the CAN Open bus is limited to the ABB switchgear
company. Stand alone devices may not be operated with theCAN Open
system.
In addition, the digital bus moves “the intelligence” closer to the process, allowing
the construction of switchgear systems with increased configuration and
maintenance flexibility. The CAN Open interface allows connecting any off-the-
shelf product compliant with the CAN Open standard, thus making the automation
capabilities of the REF 542plus almost unlimited.
The Fig. 4.11.-1 describes an architecture where two REF 542plus units and some
IO modules are connected with the CAN Open.
A051257
Fig. 4.11.-1 REF 542plus CAN Open connectivity
4.12. ABB Product Data Registration
The ABB Product Data Registration system is used to collect all the composition
information throughout the IED's life cycle and add them in ABB's data server.
ABB lifecycle services collects product data like product hardware, product
software, site information related to an IED. The firmware of each REF 542plus
terminal detects changes in the hardware composition or in the firmware. Thanks to
the existing history record technical support as well as services and repairs can be
provided by ABB as soon as possible.
30
Unit
5. Construction
5.1. Base unit versions
The REF 542plus base unit housing is made from aluminum sheets. Its exterior is
chromatized both to protect the housing against corrosion and to improve immunity
against EMC disturbances. Two different housings are available:
* Standard
* Wide
In both versions, at least the following modules have to be present:

* The power supply, the mainboard.
* The analog input module
* One binary input and output module
The standard housing can additionaly house:

* Another binary input and output module
* Alternatively the communication module or the 4/0 ... 20 mA analog output
module
Backplane differs from 4/0 ... 20 mA analog output module and communication
module. The backplane type has to be specified.
The wide housing can additionaly house:

* Other 2 binary input and output modules
* The communication module
* Alternatively the 4/0 ... 20 mA analog output module or the 4 ... 20 mA analog
input module
The 4 ... 20 mA analog input module can be used with the wide
housing only.
Standard housing summary

* One power supply
* One mainboard module
* One analog input module
* At most two binary input and output modules
* Optionally the communication module or the 4/0 ... 20 mA analog output one
31
Unit
75,5 ± 0,1
75,5 ± 0,1
M4
10 233,5 ± 0,1 18
106,3 ± 0,1
244,8
106,3 ± 0,1
M4
33 140 ± 0,1 12 ca. 70 261,5
185
10 233,5 ± 0,1 18
75,5 ± 0,1
75,5 ± 0,1
M4
A051268
Fig. 5.1.-1 Standard housing version dimensions.
Wide housing summary

* One power supply
* One mainboard module
* One analog input module
* At most three binary input and output modules
32
Unit
* Optionally the communication module

* Optionally the 4 ... 20 mA analog input module or the 4/0 ... 20 mA analog
output module
97,5 ± 0,1
97,5 ± 0,1
M4
10 233,5 ± 0,1 18
106,3 ± 0,1
244,8
106,3 ± 0,1
M4
33 184 ± 0,1 12 ca. 70 261,5
229
10 233,5 ± 0,1 18
97,5 ± 0,1
97,5 ± 0,1
M4
A051269
Fig. 5.1.-2 Wide housing version dimensions.
33
Unit
5.2. Mounting and installation
The Fig. 5.2.-1 shows an example of wide housing base unit installation inside a
low voltage compartment.
A051270
Fig. 5.2.-1 Base unit installation in the low voltage compartment of GIS switchgear
Use always the broad flexible cables for grounding of the housing.
Also, use the whole low voltage compartment including the door to
reduce the impact of the high frequency electromagnetic disturbances
into the electronic circuit.
5.3. HMI
The HMI dimensions are shown in Fig. 5.3.-1 and Fig. 5.3.-2.
34
Unit
A051271
Fig. 5.3.-1 Dimensions of the HMI version without cover
The advisable panel hole is 240,5 mm x 140,5 mm. The existing connectors for the
former version of the HMI can be used.
35
Unit
A070119
Fig. 5.3.-2 Dimensions of the HMI version with cover
The advisable panel hole is the same as before.
36
Unit
6. Technical data
6.1. Analog inputs
6.1.1. Measurements
The REF 542plus unit uses the same analog inputs both for measurements and
protections.
Table 6.1.1.-1 Measurements

Quantity Class Range
Phase current, earth current 0.5 0.1-4In
Line voltage, phase voltage 0.5 0.2-1.5Vn
Active, reactive energy 2 -
Active, reactive, apparent power 1 -
Cosφ 1 –1 - +1
Frequency 0.02 40-75 Hz
To achieve highest accuracy the instrument transformers or the sensors must have
0.5 percent accuracy or better in the same range.
6.1.2. Protection
Table 6.1.2.-1 Protection functions and operation time

Protection functions Class 3
Operation time Class 3 or minimum ±15 ms
Table 6.1.2.-2 Current and voltage transformer input values

Rated current ln 0.2 A or 1A or 5 A
Rated voltage Un 100 V - 125 V
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Table 6.1.2.-3 Thermal load capacity

Current path 250 In (peak value), dynamic 100 In for 1s,
4 In continuous
Voltage path 2 Un /√3 continuous
Table 6.1.2.-4 Consumption

Current path ≤ 0.1 VA with In
Voltage path ≤ 0.25 VA with Un
37
Unit
Table 6.1.2.-5 Current and voltage sensor input values

Voltage at rated current In 150 mV (rms)
Voltage at rated voltage Un 2 V (rms)
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz or 60 Hz
6.1.3. Analog input modules
Several different types of analog input modules are available to manage the different
protection functions.
The modules are equipped with the following combinations of input current and/or
voltage transformers:
* 3 or 6 current transformers for phase currents
* 3 or 6 voltage transformers for phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages
* 1 or 2 current transformers for residual currents
* 1 or 2 voltage transformers for residual voltages
There are also versions for sensor inputs and mixed ones, to connect both
conventional instrument transformers and sensors. At most, eight input channels are
available. If programmed, input channels can be supervised.
The first three analog input channels (1-3) are designed for connecting current
transformers and the next three channels (4-6) for connecting voltage transformers.
The last two channels (7 and 8) are designed for measuring the residual current and
residual voltage.
The power flows can still be calculated, if six current transformers, for example in
case of transformer differential protection, are connected and the related line
voltages of the network are connected to the last two analog input channels. The
analog input channels 1 and 3 must be connected to the current transformers of
NET1. The last two input channels 7 and 8 must be connected to the line voltages of
NET1. If required, the power flow calculation can be done in the bus tie part of the
switchgear, where six voltage transformers are connected to the analog input
channels 1-6. The analog input channels 4 and 6 must be connected to the phase
voltage of NET1. The last two input channels 7 and 8 must be connected to the
current transformer of NET1.
6.1.4. Reaction time
In this context the protection reaction time is defined as the time elapsed between
the fault detection and the closing of the contact that gives supply to the circuit-
breaker tripping coil (or the equivalent tripping mechanism for magnetic drive or
contactors). This time is the sum of different intervals:
1. Fault detection time
2. User defined pre set delay (for definite time protection functions)
3. Trip information processing
4. Relay output contact actuation
38
Unit
The REF 542plus is a protection and control unit and the programmed automation
logic is executed cyclically in a PLC–style mode. The cycle time, in the range of ten
millisecond, is depending upon the logic complexity.
The REF 542plus has an internal fixed compensation both for the relay output
contact actuation time and for the logic execution time. Nevertheless, the actual trip
information processing time depends upon the complexity of the actual logic
programmed inside the unit.
As a result, the protection reaction time, in the worst case, can be the user-defined
preset delay plus twice the cycle time.
Direct channel
In extremely demanding applications, the protection has to react as fast as possible

and the system behavior has to be absolutely deterministic. The REF 542plus offers
then to the protection system designer the direct channel option.
Using this option, the programmed logic execution flow inside the unit is skipped
and the trip command is instantly delivered to the switching object representing the
circuit breaker. All the interlocking conditions are nevertheless respected and
assured. Should the circuit breaker be blocked for any reason, for example,
insufficient SF6 pressure, the trip command is not actuated. The direct channel
option grants then an absolutely deterministic behavior to the REF 542plus
6.2. Protection functions technical data
The following Table 6.2.-1 illustrates the protection functions technical data.
Table 6.2.-1 ANSI code Protection function and parameters

Current protection functions
68 Inrush stabilization N = 2.0 … 8.0
(only in connection M = 3.0 … 4.0
with 50 and 51) Time = 200 … 100 000 ms
68 Inrush harmonic Min current threshold = 0.05 ... 40.00 In
Fault current threshold = 0.05 ... 40.00 In
Harmonic ratio threshold = 5 ... 50 %
50 Overcurrent I>>> = 0.100 ... 40.000 In
instantaneous t = 15 ... 30 000 ms
51 Overcurrent high I>> = 0.05 ... 40.00 In
t = 20 ... 300 000 ms
51 Overcurrent low I > = 0.05 ... 40.00 In
t = 20 ... 300 000 ms
51 IDMT Overcurrent IDMT Inverse time characteristics: Normal, Very, Extreme and
(inverse definite Longtime
minimum time) Ieb = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
K = 0.050 ... 1.500
39
Unit
50/51 Overcurrent with Is = 0.050 – 40.000 x In

free t (def) = 0.015 – 300.000 s
programmable A = 0.005 – 200.000
characteristic (8 P = 0.005 – 3.000
thresholds B = 0.000 – 50.000 s
available) Td = 0.050 – 5.000
Tr = 0.020 – 100.000 s
67 Overcurrent I>> = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
directional high t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
Direction = backward, forward
67 Overcurrent I> = 0.05 ... 40.00 In
directional low t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
67 Overcurrent Is = 0.050 – 40.000 x In
directional with t (def) = 0.040 – 300.000 s
free A = 0.005 – 200.000
programmable P = 0.005 – 3.000
characteristic (8 B = 0.000 – 50.000 s
thresholds Td = 0.050 – 5.000
available) Tr = 0.020 – 100.000 s
Earth Fault (1)
51N Earth fault high Io>> = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
51N Earth fault low Io> = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
51N IDMT Earth fault IDMT Curve type = standard, very, extremely, or long time
(inverse definite inverse time characteristic
minimum time) Ieb = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
K = 0.050 ... 1.500
50N/51N Earth-fault with Is = 0.050 – 40.000 x In
free t (def) = 0.015 – 300.000 s
programmable A = 0.005 – 200.000
characteristic (8 P = 0.005 – 3.000
thresholds B = 0.000 – 50.000 s
available) Td = 0.050 – 5.000
Tr = 0.020 – 100.000 s
Direction = forward, backward
Net type = isolated (sin φ), earthed (cos φ)
67N Earth fault Io>> = 0.050 ... 40.000
directional high t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
Uo> = 0.02 ... 0.70 Un
direction = forward, backward
net type = isolated (sin phi), earthed (cos phi)
67N Earth fault Io> = 0.050 ... 40.000 In
directional low t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
Uo> = 0.02 ... 0.70 Un
direction = forward, backward
net type = isolated (sin phi), earthed (cos phi)
67S Earth fault Io> = 0.050 ... 2.000 In
directional t = 100 ... 10 000 ms
sensitive Angle alpha = 0.0 ... 20.0°
Angle delta = -180.0 ... +180.0°
Uo> = 0.05 ... 0.70 Un
40
Unit
67N Sector Earth fault Direction = Enable (directional behavior)…Disable (non

directional Sector directional behavior)
(10 thresholds Start Criteria = neutral current magnitude/ neutral current
available) basic angle
Io> = 0.002 … 8.000 In
Uo> = 0.004 … 0.700 Un
t = 30 … 60 000 ms
Sector Basic Angle = -180.0 … +180.0°
Sector Width = 0.0 … 360.0°
Io> drop off delay = 0 … 1000 ms
Uo> drop off delay = 0 … 1000 ms
67N Earth Fault Is = 0.050 – 40.000 x In
directional with t (def) = 0.040 – 300.000 s
free A = 0.005 – 200.000
programmable P = 0.005 – 3.000
characteristic (8 B = 0.000 – 50.000 s
thresholds Td = 0.050 – 5.000
available) Tr = 0.020 – 100.000 s
Voltage protection functions
59 Overvoltage U>>> = 0.100 ... 3.000 Un
59 Overvoltage high U>> = 0.100 ... 3.000 Un
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
59 Overvoltage low U> = 0.100 ... 3.000 Un
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
27 Undervoltage U<<< = 0.10 ... 1.20 Un
27 Undervoltage high U<< = 0.10 ... 1.20 Un
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
27 Undervoltage low U< = 0.10 ... 1.20 Un
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
25 Synchronism Delta Voltage = 0.02 ... 0.40 Un
check Delta Phase = 5 ... 50°
t = 0.20 ... 1000.00 s
59N Residual Uo>> = 0.05 ... 3.00 Un
overvoltage high t = 20 ... 300 000 ms
59N Residual Uo> = 0.05 ... 3.00 Un
overvoltage low t = 20 ... 300 000 ms
Motor protection functions
49 Thermal overload Nominal Temperature = 50 ... 400 °C (nominal
protection with Temperature at I nom)
total memory Nominal current (IMn) = 0.100 ... 5.000 In (primary value of
the nominal motor current)
Initial Temperature = 10 ... 400 °C
Time Constant at I < 0.1 IMn = 10 ... 100 000 s
Time Constant at 0.1 IMn < I < 2 IMn = 10 ... 20 000 s
Time Constant at I > 2 IMn = 10 ... 20 000 s
Trip Temperature = 50 ... 400 °C
Warning Temperature = 50 ... 400 °C
Environmental Temperature = 10 ... 50 °C
Reset Temperature = 10 … 400 °C
51MS Motor start IMn = 0.200 ... 2.000 IMn (motor current) (2)
Is = 1.000 ... 20.000 IMn (start value)
t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
I> = 0.200 ... 0.800 Is (motor start)
41
Unit
51LR Locked rotor IMn = 0.200 ... 2.000 In (motor current)

(definite time Is = 1.000 ... 20.000 IMn (start value)
characteristic) t = 40 ... 30 000 ms
66 Number of starts n (warm) = 1 ...10 (number of warm starts)
n (cold) = 1 ...10 (number of cold starts)
t = 1.00 .. 7200.00 s
T (warm) = 20 ... 200 °C (warm start temp. thereshold)
46 Unbalance load Is = 0.05 ... 0.30 In (start value of the negative phase
sequence)
K = 0.5 ... 30.0
t Reset = 0 ... 2000 s
Timer decreasing rate = 0 … 100%
37 Low load Pn = 50 ... 1000 000 kW (primary values)
Minimal load P = 5 ... 100% Pn
Minimal current I = 2 ... 20 % In
Operation time = 1.0 ... 1000.0 s
Differential protection functions
87 Differential Differential
Transformer group = 0 ... 11
Transformer earthing = primary and or secondary side
Primary nominal current = 10.00 ... 100 000.00 A (prim
value)
Secondary nominal current = 10.00 ... 100 000.00 A (prim
value)
Threshold current = 0.10 ... 0.50 Ir (p.u.)
Unbiased region limit = 0.50 … 5.00 Ir (p.u.)
Slightly biased region threshold = 0.20 ... 2.00 Ir (p.u.)
Slightly biased region limit = 1.00 ... 10.0 Ir (p.u.)
Slope = 0.40 ... 1.00
Trip by Id> = 5.00 ... 40.00 In
Blocking by 2nd harmonic = 0.10 … 0.30 In
Blocking by 5th harmonic = 0.10 … 0.30 In
87N Restricted earth Reference nominal current = 1.00 ... 100000.00 A
fault protection Unbiased region threshold = 0.05 ... 0.50 Ir
(restricted Unbiased region limit = 0.01 ... 1.00 Ir
differential) Slightly biased region slope = 0.01 ... 2.00
Slightly biased region limit = 0.01 ... 2.00 Ir
Heavily biased region slope = 0.10 ... 1.00
Relay operate angle = 60 ... 180°
t = 0.04 ... 100.00 s
Frequency protection function
81 Frequency Start value = 40.00 ... 75.00 Hz
protection Frequency gradient = 0.01 ... 1.00 Hz/s
t = 0.10 ... 30.00 s
U< = 0.10 ... 1.00 Un
Trip logic = freq. only / freq. AND freq. gradient / freq. OR
freq. gradient
Frequency supervision
Frequency Start value = 0.04 ... 5.00 Hz
supervision Time = 1.00 ... 300.00 s
Distance protection function
42
Unit
21 Distance Net type = high/low ohmic

protection earth start IE> used, unused
switching onto faults = normal, overreach zone, trip after
start
Signal comparison overreach scheme time set =
30 ... 300 000 ms
U / I- Start I>, IE> and IF> = 0.05 ... 4.00 In
characteristic: UF< = 0.05 ... 0.90 Un
Phase selection = cyclic/acyclic
Earth factor: factor k = 0.00 ... 10.00, angle (k) = -60 ... 60°
3 Impedance, 1 R = 0.05 ... 120.00 Ohm (secondary values)
overreach stage X = 0.05 ... 120.00 Ohm (secondary values)
and 1 autoreclose t = 20 ... 10 000 ms
control stage: Angle delta 1 = -45.00 ... 0.00°
Angle delta 2 = 90.00 ... 135.00°
1 directional stage
Angle delta 1 = -45.00 ... 0.00°
Angle delta 2 = 90.00 ... 135.00°
t = 20 ... 10 000 ms
1 non directional stage
t = 20 ... 10 000 ms
Power quality functions
Power factor Switching sequence: linear, circular
controller Switching histeresis: neutral zone 105 ... 200% of Qco
Pick up value: 0 ... 100% of Qco
Reactive power of smallest bank Qco: 1.000 ... 20 000.000
kVar
Configuration banks: 1:1:1:1, 1:1:2:2, 1:2:2:2, 1:2:4:4,
1:2:4:8
Number of banks: 1 ... 4
Max switching cycles: 1 ... 10 000
Set point cos φ: 0.7 ... 1.00 ind. or cap.
Limiting value cos φ: 0.00 ... 1.00 ind. or cap.
Method of operation: direct, integrating
dicharge blocking time: 1 ... 7200 s
dead time: 1 ... 120 s
power on delay: 1 ... 7200 s
duration of integration: 1 ... 7200 s
High harmonic Voltage THD startvalue = 5 ... 50%
protection Voltage THD time delay = 0.01 ... 360.00 s
Time = 0.05 ... 360.00 s
RMS voltage start value = 0.10 ... 1.00 Un
Switching Voltage THD Start value = 5 ... 50%
resonance Delta Voltage THD Start Value = 1 ... 50 %
protection Voltage THD Time Delay = 0.01 ... 60.00 s
t = 0.05 ... 60.00 s
PFC OP Time = 0.01 ... 120.00 s
RMS Voltage start value = 0.10 ... 1.00 Un
Other functions
43
Unit
Fault recorder Time before fault = 100 ... 2000 ms

Recording time = 1000 ... 5000 ms
Time after fault = 100 ... 4900 ms
Max. 5 records
79 Autorecloser Operation mode = Start and Trip controlled, Start
Controlled
Number of reclosing cycle = 0 ... 5
Reclaim time = 10.00 ... 1000.00 s
Specific/operation time first shot = 0.04 ... 1000.00 s
Dead time first shot = 0.10 ...1000.00 s
Specific/operation tìme second shot = 0.04 ... 1000.00 s
Dead time second shot = 0.10 ... 1000.00 s
Specific/operation time third shot = 0.04 ... 1000.00 s
Dead time third shot = 0.10 ... 1000.00 s
Specific/operation time fourth shot = 0.04 ... 1000.00 s
Dead time fourth shot = 0.10 ... 1000.00 s
Specific/operation time fifth shot = 0.04 ... 1000.00 s
Dead time fifth shot = 0.10 ... 1000.00 s
32 Directional power Direction = forward, backward
Nominal real power Pn = 1 ... 1000 000 kW (primary
values)
Max. reverse load P> = 1 ... 50% Pn
Op. time = 1.0 ... 1000.0 s
6.3. Configuration restriction
There are some limitations that must be respected during the REF 542plus
configuration.
* At most 24 protection functions can be configured inside the unit.
* A protection function can activate only one single direct channel.
* The number of direct channel is limited to 24.
* The configuration cycle time must be below 30 ms, to guarantee the proper
working of the unit.
* At most 1000 wires can be drawn and the connections are limited to 512.
* Only one store object can be configured. (The store object allows storing binary
data between a power failure and the next start-up, see the programming manual
for more details).
* At most 62 switching objects can be configured (a switching object is used to
represent a primary object like a circuit breaker, a contactor and so on.)
* At most 15 energy counters can be configured.
* At most 10 analog threshold objects per analog input can be configured (analog
threshold objects allow to undertake some actions depending upon the level of
voltage and current, see the programming manual for more details).
LCD and HMI

* At most ten icons can be displayed on the LCD.
* At most eight switching devices icons can be displayed on the LCD.
* When binary I/O modules with mechanical relays are used, a maximum of seven
switching devices can be controlled.
44
Unit
* At most, 40 lines can be drawn.

* At most 32 signaling LEDs organized in 4 pages can be configured.
* At most 48 control objects can be installed.
* At most 48 timer functions can be controlled.
* At most 32 command object for sequencer starting can be applied
6.4. Binary inputs and outputs
Binary input and output modules are available in two main versions: with
electromechanical relays and with static outputs (power transistor types). For both of
them, binary inputs are of the same type, insulated with optic couplers.
Inside a REF 542plus unit, only modules of the same type have to be present. It is
not possible to have both static and electromechanical modules.
6.4.1. BIO module with mechanical output relays (version3)
Binary input and output modules type BIO3 are available in several versions.
* Voltage range low, with inputs able to withstand a voltage range from 19 ... 72 V
DC. The input threshold activation level is 14 V DC.
* Voltage range high, with inputs able to withstand a voltage range from 88 ... 132
V DC. The input threshold activation level is 50 V DC.
* Voltage range high, with inputs able to withstand a voltage range from 88 ... 132
V DC. The input threshold activation level is 72 V DC.
* Voltage range high, with inputs able to withstand a voltage range from 176 ...
264 V DC. The input threshold activation level is 143 V DC.
All above mentioned modules can be equipped with an optional static output (power
transistor) on binary output 7, instead of the normal electromechanical contact. This
static output is usually needed to feed external energy meters with pulses.
To make wiring easier, there are also module versions for the wide voltage range
(high and low) available with the binary inputs minus (-) connected together on the
module by an internal line.
The following Table 6.4.1.-1 shows the main features
Table 6.4.1.-1 BIO3 module features

14 input channels Possible auxiliary voltage 19... 72 V DC (threshold 14 V
ranges: DC)
88 ... 132 V DC (threshold 50 V
DC)
88 ... 132 V DC (threshold 72 V
DC)
176 ... 264 V DC (threshold 143
V DC)
45
Unit
Hardware fixed filter time 1 ms.

Additional filter time can be
configured in software.
6 power outputs (channels Maximum operating voltage 250 V AC/DC
BO 1 to 6) Make current 8A
Load current 6A
Breaking capacity 1 contact 70 W, 2 contacts in
series 130 W at L/R ≤ 40 ms and
10.000 operations
Operating time 8 ms
2 signal outputs (BO7 and Maximum operating voltage 250 V AC/DC
BO8) and 1 watchdog Load current 2A
output (WD)
Operating time 8 ms
Optional: 1 static output on Maximum operating voltage 250 V DC
BO7 Make current 1.5 A peak
Load current 0.7 A continuous
Operating time 1 ms
1 coil supervision circuit on Coil OK when impedance below 10 Ω
BO2
6.4.2. BIO module with static outputs
The technical data for the binary input and output module with static outputs are
listed in Table 6.4.2.-1. This module is full range and covers the complete voltage
range from 48 up to 265 VDC.
Table 6.4.2.-1 Technical data for the binary input and output module with
static outputs
14 inputs (BI 1-14) Auxiliary voltage range: 48 to 265 V DC (Threshold 35 V
DC)
Hardware fixed filter time 5 ms.
Additional filter time can be
configured in software.
3 power outputs (BO1,2 and Operating voltage 48 to 250 V DC
þ7) Make current 64 A
Load current 16 A
Operating time 1 ms
4 power outputs (BO3 ... 6) Operating voltage 48 to 250 V DC
Make current 120 A
Load current 31 A
Operating time 1 ms
2 signal outputs (BO8,9) Operating voltage 48 to 250 V DC
and 1 watchdog output Make current 1.5 A (100 ms)
(WD)
Ron 1.06 Ω
Roff 40 MΩ
Operating time 1 ms
2 coil supervision circuits on Coil OK when impedance below 10 kΩ
BO1 and BO2 channels
46
Unit
6.5. Interfaces
HMI control unit

* Serial infrared (IrDa)/electrical RS-232 interface to a PC (at the front)
* Electrically isolated RS-485 standard interface to the base unit (at the rear)
* Electrical standard interface RJ-45 for Modbus TCP and/or the embedded WEB
server
* Power supply
Base unit
* Electrically isolated RS-485 standard interface to the HMI
* RS-232 standard service interface (service port for updating configuration and
firmware)
* Power supply
0/4 ... 20 mA analog output module (optional)

* Four output channels 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, freely configurable.
4 ... 20 mA analog input module (optional)

* Six input channels 4 ... 20 mA
Communication to a station automation system (optional)

* SPA, optical plastic fiber interface with snap-in type connector; or glass fiber
(multi mode) with F-SMA or ST connectors
* LON (according to ABB LAG1.4), glass fiber (multi mode) optical interface
with ST connectors
* IEC 60870-5-103 with extension according to VDN guidelines for controlling,
glass fiber (multi-mode) optical interface with ST connectors
* Modbus RTU/SPAbus electrical interface with two galvanically insulated SPA-
bus RS-485 ports or optical interface with four standard ST connectors for glass
fiber (multi-mode)
* IEC 61850 electrical interface with two RJ45 connector or optical interface with
two pair LC connector for glass fiber (50/125 µm multi-mode fiber)
47
Unit
Ethernet Interface
* Standard RJ45 connector on the main module
CAN Open (optional and only for ABB switchgear companies).

* Open style connector compliant with CAN Open standard and ISO11898
Input for time synchronization (optional, the supported protocol

is IRIG, format B000, B002, B003).
* Glass fiber
* Wavelength: 820 nm
* Max distance: 1500 m
* Connector type: ST
6.6. Power supply
Table 6.6.-1 Base unit

Rated voltage 110 V DC Operative range 70% to 120% of 110 V DC
Rated voltage 220 V DC Operative range 70% to 120% of 220 V DC
Rated voltage 48 VDC to 220 V DC Operative range 80% of 48 V DC to 120% of
220 V DC
Power consumption ≤ 20 W (Typical, 2 BIOs)
Inrush current Module 750 168: 10 A, 1 ms; 35 A, 100 µs
Module 750 126: 8.3 A, 4 ms; 21 A, 100 µs
Admissible ripple Less than 10%
Table 6.6.-2 HMI

Rated voltage 48 V DC to 90 V DC Operative range 85% of 48 V DC to 110% of
90 V DC
Rated voltage 110 V DC to 240 V DC Operative range 85% of 110 V DC to 110% of
240 V DC
Power consumption ≤ 6 W backlight off and < 10W backlight on
Admissible ripple Less than 10%
48
Unit
6.7. Environmental conditions
Table 6.7.-1 Environmental conditions

Ambient operation temperature -10 + 55 °C
Ambient transport and storage -25 +70 °C
temperature
Ambient humidity Up to 95% without condensation
Altitude < 1.000m a.s.l
6.8. Protection degree
Base unit
* Housing: IP 20
HMI
* Front: IP 44
* Rear: IP 20
HMI with cover

* Front: IP 54
* Rear: IP 20
6.9. Tests
Type test
Detailed information on type tests are listed in the document: REF 542plus. Type
test certificate, 1MRS756443.
Protection functions
Protection functions are type tested according to IEC 60255 standard series.
Electromagnetic compatibility
All relevant tests are according to the following standard series:

* IEC 60255 for electromagnetic compatibility and product standard
* EN 61000 for electromagnetic compatibility
* EN 50263 for measuring relays and protection equipment
* EN 60694 + IEC 60694AMD 12000 for common specifications for high-voltage
switchgear and control gears
Insulation resistance
Greater than >100 MΩ at 500 V DC.
49
Unit
Mechanical robustness
According to IEC 60255-21-1.
Climatic conditions
Cold test according to IEC 60068-2-1.
Dry heat test according to IEC 60068-2-2.
Certifications
ATEX
The REF 542plus unit, when used as a motor protection, can optionally comply with
the directive 94/9/EC from the European Community for explosives environments.
This directive defines how motor protection units behave in potentially explosive
environment. The EC type certification number from PTB (Physikalisch Technische
Bundesanstalt) is PTB 02 ATEX 3000.
DNV
The REF 542plus unit, when used in marine application, can optionally comply with
Det Norske Veritas’ Rules for classification of ships, High Speed & Light Craft and
Det Norske Veritas’ Offshore Standards.
IEC 61850 Certificate level A
The conformance test has been performed according to IEC 61850-10 by KEMA
Nederland.
50
Unit
7. Ordering
The different variants have their own specific order numbers that identify the type
designation for the desired hardware and software combination.
The type code designation can be seen in Fig. 7.-1:
A060505
Fig. 7.-1 Type code designation for ordering REF 542plus
Each code is dedicated to a specific application or module. The description for each
type code is listed in the following tables. The codes mentioned below are mostly
used for the operations field of REF 542plus. The codes are slightly different in
DNV and ATEX. Because ATEX certification is only valid for a specific version of
REF 542plus, it is required to obtain a new certification after each release. The
release 1.1 of ATEX certified units is REF 542plus with version V4C02, release 2.0
with version V4D02 and release 2.5 with version V4E04. For releases 1.1 and 2.0
the REF 542plus unit is delivered with the previous HMI V4 and for release 2.5
with the new HMI V5. Order the DNV certifies for marine application. Note that the
DNV version can only deliver with the previous HMI V4.
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-1 Family code

NUMBER CODE NAME DESCRIPTION
7 REF 542plus Product family for the feeder terminal
unit REF 542plus
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
51
Unit
Table 7.-2 Application areas

6 REF 542plus Normal operation
A REF 542plus DNV Marine and offshore application
B REF 542plus ATEX-1 Protection of motor in an explosive
area (Release 1.1)
D REF 542plus ATEX-2 Protection of motor in an explosive
area (Release 2.0)
F REF542plus ATEX-2.5 Protection of motor in an explosive
area (Release 2.5)
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-3 Mainboard versions

B 751021/ Basic Version with RJ 45 Ethernet port
802
S 751021/ Standard Version with additional IRIG B and
803 CAN interface
F 751021/ Full Version with additional optical links
801
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-4 Power supply versions

1 750126/801 Un = 110 V DC Operative range 70% to 120% of 110
V DC
2 750126/802 Un = 220 V DC Operative range 70% to 120% of 220
V DC
3 750168/801 Un = 48 - 220 V DC Operative range 80% of 48 V DC to
120% of 220 V DC
6 750168/802 Un = 48 - 220 V DC Marine application with operative
range 80% of 48 V DC to 120% of 220
V DC
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
52
Unit
Table 7.-5 Analog I/O modules

N none No analog input or output Empty analog I/O module slot
A 750211/801 Analog input module 4- Analog input module for 4-20 mA
20 mA installed, up to 6 inputs
B 750237/801 Analog output module 0 Analog output module for 0(4)-20 mA
(4)-20 mA installed, up to 4 outputs
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-6 Binary I/O modules

1 701052/801 Static I/O Application in GIS panel with coil
supervision through a control
continuity check
2 701052/802 Static I/O - without Static I/O without control continuity
control continuity check check
5 750132/801 Binary I/O3 - 19-72 V/14 Standard version with a 14 V DC
V DC, standard threshold value for an application in
an auxiliary circuit with a DC voltage
range of 19-72 V DC
6 750132/803 Binary I/O3 - 19-72 V/14 As no. 5 + one static output channel
V DC, with static for energy metering
channel
7 750161/801 Binary I/O3 - 19-72 V/14 As no. 5 + interconnected binary
V DC, interconnected inputs
input, standard
8 750161/803 Binary I/O3 - 19-72 V/14 As no. 5 + interconnected binary
V DC, interconnected inputs + one static output channel for
input, with static channel energy metering
9 750132/802 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ Standard version with a 50V DC
50 V DC, standard threshold value for an application in
range of 88-132 V DC
A 750132/804 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ As no. 9 + one static output channel
50 V DC, with static for energy metering
channel
B 750161/802 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ As no. 9 + interconnected binary
50 V DC, interconnected inputs
input, standard
C 750161/804 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ As no. 9 + interconnected binary
50 V DC, interconnected inputs + one static output channel for
input, with static channel energy metering
D 750132/805 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ Standard version with a 72 V DC
53
Unit

E 750132/806 Binary I/O3 - 88-132 V/ As no. D + one static output channel
channel
F 750132/807 Binary I/O3 - 176-264 V/ Standard version with a 143 V DC
G 750132/808 Binary I/O3 - 176-264 V/ As no. F + one static output channel
channel
Static I/O: 14 inputs, 7 power outputs, 2 signal outputs and 1 watchdog output.
BIO 3: 14 inputs, 6 power outputs, 2 signal outputs and 1 watchdog output.
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Binary IO Slot 2: Version of binary I/O. Possible selection depends on the selected
version of the binary I/O 1. If no binary I/O is needed, the slot can remain empty.
The corresponding code can be taken from Table 7.-6.
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Binary IO Slot 3: Version of binary I/O. Possible selection depends on the selected
version of the binary I/O 1. If no binary I/O is needed, the slot can remain empty.
The corresponding code can be taken from Table 7.-6.
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Analog Input XX: There are three different types of analog input versions which can
be selected, as shown in the following tables:
Table 7.-7 Sensors

NUMBER CODE DESCRIPTION
01 750138/803 Analog Input sensors version
Table 7.-8 Mix of sensors and transformers

10 750170/843 3 sensors + 3 sensors + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 VT
11 750170/846 3 sensors + 3 VT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 VT
12 750170/847 3 sensors + 3 sensors + 1 CT
13 750170/851 3 sensors + 3 sensors + 1 CT + 1 VT
14 750170/852 3 sensors + 3 sensors + 1 CT/0.2 A
15 750170/853 3 sensors + 3 sensors + 1 VT + 1 VT
54
Unit

16 750170/854 3 sensors + 3 CT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 VT
17 750170/855 3 sensors + 3 CT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 CT/0.2 A
Table 7.-9 Mix of transformers

30 750170/804 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 VT
31 750170/806 3 VT + 3 VT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 CT/0.2 A
32 750170/807 3 CT + 3 CT
33 750170/809 3 CT + 3 CT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 VT
34 750170/812 3 VT + 3 VT + 1 VT
35 750170/817 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 CT
36 750170/819 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 CT + 1 VT
37 750170/821 3 CT + 0 VT + 1 CT
38 750170/822 3 CT + 0 VT + 1 CT/0.2 A
39 750170/825 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 CT/0.2 A + 1 CT/0.2 A
40 750170/826 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 VT + 1 VT
41 750170/827 3 CT + 3 CT + 1 CT + 1 CT
42 750170/828 3 CT + 3 CT + 1 CT + 1 VT
43 750170/824 3 CT + 3 VT + 1 CT + 1 CT
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-10 Communication (with optional communication module)

E 1VCR009634001 IEC 61850/MODBUS TCP
with RJ45
F 1VCR009634002 IEC 61850/MODBUS TCP
with LC optical connector
N none Without communication No communication is
requested
1 750079/801 Modbus RTU / SPA RS
485
2 750079/802 Modbus RTU / SPA glass
fibre with ST connectors
3 701842/801 SPA plastic fibre
4 701842/802 SPA glass fibre with SMA
connectors
5 701842/803 SPA glass fibre with ST
connectors
6 750071/801 LON - LAG 1.4
7 750071/803 IEC 60870-5-103
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
55
Unit
Table 7.-11 Enclosure versions

S 750154/801 Normal base unit Normal version
W 750102/801 Wide base unit Wide version
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-12 HMI variations

N none No HMI
A 007346/003 HMI V5 - IEC, auxiliary
voltage 48-90 V DC
B 007346/004 HMI V5 - IEC, auxiliary
voltage 110-240 V DC
C 007346/007 HMI V5 - IEC, external cover,
auxiliary voltage 48-90 V DC
D 007346/008 HMI V5 - IEC, external cover,
auxiliary voltage 110-240 V
DC
E 007346/011 HMI V5 - IEC, Chinese,
auxiliary voltage 48-90 V DC
F 007346/012 HMI V5 - IEC, Chinese,
auxiliary voltage 110-240 V
DC
G 007346/015 HMI V5 - IEC, Chinese,
external cover, auxiliary
voltage 48-90 V DC
H 007346/016 HMI V5 - IEC, Chinese,
external cover, auxiliary
voltage 110-240 V DC
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-13 Connection cables between the HMI and the base unit1)
N none No cable No cable
1 750142/801 HMI cable - 1.8 m 1.8 m cable with corresponding
connectors
connectors
connectors
connectors
56
Unit
7 6 B 6 A 3 3 3 03 6 S Z 4 1
Table 7.-14 Software licenses1)

1 1MRS090002 Software base license Software level : Base
2 1MRS090003 Software high license Software level : High
3 1MRS090004 Software basic low Software level : Basic Low
license
4 1MRS090005 Software basic license Software level : Basic
5 1MRS090006 Software multi low Software level : Multi Low
license
6 1MRS090007 Software multi license Software level : Multi
7 1MRS090008 Software differential Software level : Differential
license
8 1MRS090009 Software distance Software level : Distance
license
1)
A limitation of the protection functionality with a software license. Contact your
local ABB organization for more detailed information. The software level Base can
only be ordered by ABB switchgear companies. It is of the same level as the
software level Distance.
Table 7.-15 SW tool licenses

Code Description
1MRS 151022 REF 542plus Operating Tool CD
1MRS 151062 REF 542plus Configuration Tool CD
Use the key in Fig. 7.-2 to generate the type designation. The code numbers in the
example are not complete and should be taken from the corresponding tables above.
57
Unit
7 6 B 6 A333 03 6 S Z 4 1
Software
1 = SW level: Base
3 = SW level: Basic Low
(For more information, see Table 7.-14)
Cable
N = None
1 = Cable 1.8 m
2 = Cable 2.5 m
(For more information, see table Cable)
HMI
N = None
A = HMI V5 for IEC, 48 - 90 V DC
B = HMI V5 for IEC, 110 - 240 V DC
C = HMI V5 for IEC, 48 - 90 V DC, with cover
Housing
S = Normal
W = Wide
Communication
N = No communication
1 = Modbus/SPA RS485
2 = Modbus/SPA glass fibre, ST connector
Analog input
01 = Sensors
10-17 = Mixed sensors and transformers
30-43 = Transformers
(For more information, see Tables 7.-7 - 7.-9)
Binary I/O slot 1
1 = Static I/O
2 = Static I/O without check
3 = Binary I/O version 3
Binary I/O slot 2 and Binary I/O slot 3
(For more information, see Table 7.-6 and page 52)
Analog I/O modules
N = No I/O module
A = Analog input module 0(4) - 20 mA
B = Analog output module 4 - 20 mA
Power supply
1 = 110 V DC
2 = 220 V DC
3 = 48 - 220 V DC
6 = 48 - 220 V DC, DNV/marine
Main board
B = Basic
S = Standard version
Applications
6 = REF 542plus
A = REF 542plus DNV/marine
B = REF 542plus ATEX-1
Feeder terminal family code
7 = REF 542plus
A060520_2
Fig. 7.-2 The key for generating the type designation
58
Unit
8. Connections
8.1. Connector plates
The pictures show the connections for REF 542plus both in the standard and wide
housing versions. The wide housing version can house three binary input and output
modules, the communication module, the 0/4 ... 20 mA analog output module or
alternatively the 4 ... 20 mA analog input module. The standard housing version can
house at most two binary input and output modules and alternatively the
communication module or the analog output module.
X80
1 5 9 13 17 21
3 7 11 15 19 23
2 6 10 14 18 22
4 8 12 16 20 24 X86 X85 X84 X83 X82 X81
X77 X76 X75 X74 X73 X72 X70

X71
X65 X64 X63 X62 X61 X60
X31 X30
X21 X20
3 2 1
X10
- +
A051272
Fig. 8.1.-1 REF 542plus standard housing connections with mixed analog input
connector and connector for the communication module
59
Unit
X80
1 5 9 13 17 21
3 7 11 15 19 23
2 6 10 14 18 22
4 8 12 16 20 24 X86 X85 X84 X83 X82 X81
X77 X76 X75 X74 X73 X72 X70

X71
X31
X31 X30
X21 X20
3 2 1
X10
- +
A051273
Fig. 8.1.-2 REF 542plus standard housing connections with mixed analog input
connector and connector for the 0/4 ... 20 mA analog output module
X80
1 5 9 13 17 21
3 7 11 15 19 23
2 6 10 14 18 22
4 8 12 16 20 24 X86 X85 X84 X83 X82 X81
X77 X76 X75 X74 X73 X72 X70

X71
X65 X64 X63 X62 X61 X60
X50
X41 X40
X31 X30
X21 X20
3 2 1
X10
- +
A051274
Fig. 8.1.-3 REF 542plus wide housing connections plate
The connectors meaning is explained in the following Table 8.1.-1. A few

connectors have different meaning depending upon the used communication module
type. Sensors connectors X87 and X88 are placed instead of X80 when only sensors
are used.
60
Unit
Table 8.1.-1 Meaning of connectors

Connector Meaning
X10 Base unit power supply
X20 First BIO, inputs
X21 First BIO, outputs
X30 Second BIO, inputs
X31 Second BIO, outputs
X40 Third BIO, inputs
X41 Third BIO, outputs
X50 Analog output 0/4 ... 20 mA or Analog input 4 ... 20 mA
X60 Modbus RS-485, channel 2; COM L-COM I RX; SPABUS TX
X61 Modbus RS-485, channel 1; COM L-COM I TX; SPABUS RX
X62 Optical Modbus, RX channel 1
X63 Optical Modbus, TX channel 1
X64 Optical Modbus, RX channel 2
X65 Optical Modbus, TX channel 2
X66 Optical LC connector on the Ethernet module
X67 Optical LC connector on the Ethernet module
X68 Electrical RJ-45 connector on the Ethernet module
X69 Electrical RJ-45 connector on the Ethernet module
X70 Ethernet interface (RJ-45 on the mainboard)
X71 CAN interface
X72 RS-232 service port (null modem connection)
X73 Connection to HMI
X74 IRIG-B interface for time synchronization
X75 HSTD input
X76 HSTD input
X77 HSTD output
X80 Connector for CTs and VTs
X81 Sensor 1
X82 Sensor 2
X83 Sensor 3
X84 Sensor 4
X85 Sensor 5
X86 Sensor 6
X87 Sensor 7
X88 Sensor 8
61
Unit
The REF 542plus HMI connection is shown in Fig. 8.1.-4

* The X10 connector connects REF 542plus to the auxiliary voltage for the power
supply.
* Connector type: Weidmuller SLA2/90B3.2SNOR
* The X20 connector connects REF 542plus to the base unit.
* Connector type: D-SUB9 FCT F09P5G2-K216
HMI MODULE
-PI
X10
+ 1
_
2
X20
a
3
RS-485
8
b
A051275
Fig. 8.1.-4 REF 542plus HMI connection
Analog input connections
The analog input connector changes when conventional instrument transformers,

sensors or mixed combinations have to be connected. When sensors are used, they
are connected with CPE type connectors.
X81 corresponds to sensor 1, and X88 connects sensor 8. They can be indifferently
current or voltage sensors. The choice is a software configuration inside the
REF 542plus unit.
62
Unit
When conventional instrument transformers are in use, the connector looks like in
the Fig. 8.1.-5
X88 X87 X86 X85 X84 X83 X82 X81
X80
1 5 9 13 17 21
3 7 11 15 19 23
2 6 10 14 18 22
4 8 12 16 20 24
A051277
Fig. 8.1.-5 Connector for analog input module sensors and connector for
conventional instrument transformers
8.2. Binary input and output connections
Binary inputs and outputs modules use the following connectors:

* X20 (inputs), X21 (outputs) for the first module
* X30 (inputs), X31 (outputs) for the second module
* X40 (inputs), X41 (outputs) for the third module, available with the wide case
only
The Fig. 8.2.-1 shows the connection diagram for the binary inputs and outputs
module BIO3.
63
Unit
A070134
Fig. 8.2.-1 Binary inputs and outputs module BIO3

1: BIO3 standard
2: BIO3 with 1 static channel
3: BIO3 with interconnected inputs
The following Fig. 8.2.-2 shows the binary inputs and outputs module called Static
I/O.
64
Unit
A070135
Fig. 8.2.-2 Binary inputs and outputs module Static I/O

1: Standard static I/O
2: Static I/O without control continuity check
In the binary inputs and outputs module BIO3, the trip coil supervision is located in
BO2. Binary outputs BO7 and BO8 are exchange contacts, normally used for
signalling. WD1 is the watchdog contact. In the static output module, there are two
trip coil supervision circuits in BO1 and BO2.
8.3. Typical connection schemes
Some exemplary connection schemes are reported below. Many others are possible.
8.3.1. Generic outgoing feeder
This picture represents the typical connection scheme for outgoing feeders, when
both voltage and current protections are required. There is also a current balance
transformer for earth-fault current sensing. Analog input channel 8 is not used.
65
Unit
A070120
Fig. 8.3.1.-1 Generic outgoing feeder
8.3.2. Feeder with differential protection
The schematic diagram below shows the connection for a power transformer feeder
with differential, earth-fault and restricted earth fault protection.
The used analog input board has 8 inputs for currents. The first 6 channels are used
for the differential protection; channel 7 is used for the restricted earth fault
protection and channel 8 for the earth protection.
66
Unit
L1
L2
L3
Q1
X80
11
7
AI1
S1 3
TI/L1 S2
22
S1 18
AI2
TI/L2 S2 14
S1 10
TI/L3 S2 6
AI3
2
S1 S2
21
13
AI4
S1 17
TI/L1 S2
5
S1 9
AI5
TI/L2 S2 1
S1 23
TI/L3 S2 15
AI6
19
24
20
AI7
18
12
8
AI8
4
A051283
Fig. 8.3.2.-1 Power transformer differential protection
8.3.3. Incoming feeder with synchrocheck
The Fig. 8.3.3.-1 shows a possible connection diagram for a generic incoming
feeder with synchrocheck function on the busbar.
Channels 1, 2, 3 are used for current sensing and Channels 4, 5, 6 are used for phase
to earth voltage measurements and protection of the incoming feeder. Channel 7 is
used for the residual current for earth fault protection while channel 8 is used for
busbar phase-to-phase voltage to perform the synchrocheck.
67
Unit
L1
L2
L3
X80
11 (1A)
S1
7 (5A) AI1
TI/L1 S2
3
22 (1A)
S1
18 (5A) AI2
TI/L2 S2
14
10 (1A)
S1
6 (5A) AI3
TI/L3 S2
2
TV1/L1 A
21
AI4
17
N
TV2/L2 A
5
AI5
1
N
TV3/L3 A
23
AI6
19
N
24 (1A)
20 (5A) AI7
18
8
AI8
4
A051284
Fig. 8.3.3.-1 Incoming feeder with synchrocheck capability
68
Unit
9. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
CAN Controller area network
CB Circuit-breaker
CT Current transformer
DC Direct current
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
GIS Gas insulated switchgear
GPS Global positioning system
HMI Human-machine interface
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time characteristic
LAG Lon application guide
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
LON Local operating network
LV Low voltage
MC Micro controller
MV Medium voltage
RMS Root mean square
RTU Remote terminal unit
SLD Single-line diagram
SPA Data communication protocol developed by ABB
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
VDEW Association of German Electrical Utilities
VDN Association of German Electrical Utilities
VT Voltage transformer
69
1MRS755859 EN 10/2008
ABB Oy
Distribution Automation
P.O.box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
+358 10 22 11
+358 10 22 224 1094
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
REF 542plus
Configuration Tool Manual

Unit
Issued: 22.10.2002
Version: D/19.12.2008 Configuration Tool Manual
Contents
Copyrights ................................................................................. 7
1. Introduction..............................................................9
1.1. This manual.............................................................. 9
1.2. Use of symbols ......................................................... 9
1.4. Product documentation ............................................. 10
1.5. Document revisions.................................................. 10
2. Safety information................................................... 11
3. Installation of REF 542plus Configuration Tool .......... 13
3.1. System requirements................................................ 13
3.2. Installing the REF 542plus Configuration Tool............... 13
3.2.1. Installable components ................................. 13
3.2.2. Installing a new version of the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool ........................................ 15
3.2.3. Restart after an installation ............................ 16
3.3. Removing the REF 542plus Configuration Tool ............. 16
3.4. Starting the REF 542plus Configuration Tool ................ 16
3.5. Using the REF 542plus Configuration Tool ................... 17
3.5.1. Operating Tool............................................. 18
3.5.2. First steps in creating or editing an application... 18
3.5.3. Working with projects ................................... 18
3.5.4. Selecting the language version ...................... 20
3.5.5. Setting the PC and REF 542plus connection .... 20
3.5.6. Configuring REF 542plus .............................. 20
3.5.7. Creating a function chart (FUPLA) .................. 21
3.5.7.1. Adding and moving function blocks... 21
3.5.7.2. Adding and moving a connection ..... 23
3.5.7.3. Starting configuration dialogs........... 24
3.5.7.4. Deleting objects in the function
chart ........................................... 26
3.5.7.5. Checking function chart .................. 26
3.5.7.6. Setting the LCD and display
language...................................... 27
3.5.8. Uploading/downloading configuration............... 27
3.5.9. Description of the Main menu items ................ 29
3.5.9.1. File ............................................. 29
3.5.9.2. Connect ....................................... 31
3.5.9.3. View............................................ 34
3.5.9.4. Configure ..................................... 35
3.5.9.5. Utilities ........................................ 53
3
Unit
3.5.9.6. Options........................................ 54
3.5.9.7. Help ............................................ 56
3.5.10. Description of the Drawing menu items ........... 57
3.5.10.1. File ............................................. 57
3.5.10.2. Edit ............................................. 58
3.5.10.3. View............................................ 59
3.5.10.4. Insert........................................... 60
3.5.10.5. Utilities ........................................ 61
3.5.10.6. Options........................................ 63
3.5.10.7. Help ............................................ 63
3.5.11. Description of the status bar .......................... 64
4. Setting REF 542plus................................................ 65
4.1. Connecting inputs and outputs ................................... 65
4.2. General settings ...................................................... 66
4.2.1. Serial Port .................................................. 66
4.2.2. Global Settings............................................ 69
4.2.3. Hardware ................................................... 74
4.2.4. Analog inputs .............................................. 76
4.2.5. Analog Input 20 mA ..................................... 78
4.2.6. Analog outputs 20 mA .................................. 80
4.2.7. Single line diagram ...................................... 83
4.2.7.1. User controls of the LCD editor........ 84
4.2.7.2. Working with the LCD editor............ 87
4.2.7.3. Configuration dialog box for
symbols ....................................... 90
4.2.7.4. Configuration dialog box for lines ..... 92
4.2.8. Display language ......................................... 92
4.2.9. Char maps (For operation with HMI V4)........... 94
4.2.10. LED Bars ................................................... 96
4.3. Function and configuration of the function blocks .......... 97
4.3.1. Control panel on the HMI control unit .............. 97
4.3.1.1. Indication LED .............................. 98
4.3.1.2. Alarm LED ..................................102
4.3.1.3. Alarm Reset ................................103
4.3.1.4. LR-Key .......................................104
4.3.1.5. Emergency Buttons ......................105
4.3.1.6. HMI Command.............................106
4.3.1.7. Enable/Disable.............................107
4.3.2. Binary IO (switching objects).........................108
4.3.2.1. Switching Object 0-1 ..................... 114
4.3.2.4. Switching Object 1-1 .....................122
4
Unit

4.3.2.8. Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge ........143
4.3.2.9. Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge ........152
4.3.2.10. Module for truck (withdrawal unit)....163
4.3.2.11. IO-Supervision .............................165
4.3.3. Digital logic 1 .............................................167
4.3.3.1. Inverter .......................................167
4.3.3.2. Constant 1/Constant 0...................168
4.3.3.3. AND logic gate with inverting output..168
4.3.3.4. AND logic gate with an inverting
input...........................................169
4.3.3.5. AND logic gate.............................170
4.3.3.6. OR logic gate ..............................171
4.3.3.7. OR logic gate with inverting output ..172
4.3.4. Digital logic 2 .............................................172
4.3.4.1. Exclusive OR logic gate ................173
4.3.4.2. Exclusive OR logic gates with
inverting output ............................174
4.3.5. Flip-Flops ..................................................174
4.3.5.1. R-S Flip-Flop ...............................175
4.3.5.2. R-S Flip-Flop with timing input
(clock) ........................................176
4.3.5.3. J-K Flip-Flop................................177
4.3.5.4. D Flip-Flop ..................................178
4.3.5.5. T Flip-Flop...................................179
4.3.5.6. Monoflop retriggerable...................180
4.3.5.7. Monoflop non-retriggerable.............181
4.3.5.8. Drop Delay/Rise Delay (slope
delay) .........................................182
4.3.5.9. Counter ......................................184
4.3.5.10. Pulse generator............................186
4.3.5.11. Digital Store object .......................188
4.3.6. Analog Objects...........................................189
4.3.6.1. Analog Threshold .........................189
4.3.6.2. Measurement supervision NPS and
PPS ...........................................192
4.3.6.3. Analog Input 20mA object..............197
4.3.6.4. Energy management.....................201
4.3.6.5. Energy Counter............................202
4.3.6.6. Energy Pulse Output.....................204
4.3.6.7. Power Factor Controller.................207
4.3.7. Communication objects................................216
5
Unit
4.3.7.1. Binary Write.................................217

4.3.7.2. 16-Bit Write .................................220
4.3.7.3. Binary Read ................................223
4.3.7.4. 16-Bit Read .................................226
4.3.7.5. Direct Read-Write .........................229
4.3.7.6. Event Generator...........................231
4.3.7.7. Bay Reserve................................234
4.3.7.8. Switch Authority Allocation .............238
4.3.8. CAN Communication Objects........................241
4.3.9. Miscellaneous objects..................................241
4.3.9.1. Parameter Set Selector .................241
4.3.9.2. Operating hours counter ................245
5. Terminology ......................................................... 247
6. Abbreviations ....................................................... 249
6
Unit
Copyrights


license.
Trademarks
respective holders.
Guarantee
7
8
Unit
1. Introduction
1.1. This manual
This manual describes how to use the REF 542plus Configuration Tool program.
1.2. Use of symbols

in personal injury.

It should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain

operational conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to
information or property loss. Therefore, comply fully with all notices.
This manual is intended for engineers to support configuration and engineering of

systems and/or applications.
9
Unit

Testing (PIXIT)

Version IED Revision Date History
number
1VTA100003-Rev.2, en 22.10.2002 First release
1VTA100172-Rev 3, en 22.11.2003 Updated to version 4D02
A 28.02.2006 Document updated
* language
* layout
B 2.5 30.09.2006 Updated to software

version V4E02e.
C 2.5 31.05.2007 Updated to software
version V4E04x.
D 2.6 19.12.2008 Updated to software
version V4F06x
Applicability
This manual is applicable to REF 542plus Release 2.6, software version V4F06x.
10
Unit


property damage.

installation.

followed.

11
12
Unit
3. Installation of REF 542plus Configuration Tool

3.1. System requirements
* IBM compatible personal computer
* Intel Pentium processor
* Minimum 128 MB RAM
* CD-ROM drive or DVD-ROM drive
* Free hard drive 50 MB
* Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Vista
* Mouse
3.2. Installing the REF 542plus Configuration Tool
There are two different versions of the REF 542plus Configuration

Tool. The REF 542plus Configuration Tool can only be used by ABB
switchgear companies. The use of the Operating Tool has no
restrictions. The REF 542plus Configuration Tool allows inserting
protection function blocks. The Protection function menu is disabled in
the Operating Tool.
The installation software automatically selects the language used to guide the user
through the installation process based on the User Locale Settings of the Windows
system. The following languages are available:
* English (US)
* German
* Italian
* Czech
* Slovak
* In all the other cases English is the default
Follow the instructions and observe the information provided by the installation
program. Every step in the installation process can be reversed or the entire program
can be cancelled.
To start the installation software, start the set up.exe program on the disk for
example by double-clicking the left mouse button when the cursor is over the file.
3.2.1. Installable components
In the setup wizard it is possible to choose between two setup types: complete and
custom.
13
Unit
A051663
Fig. 3.2.1.-1 Choosing the setup type
The complete setup installs automatically the following components:

* The REF 542plus Configuration Tool (mandatory) which contains:
* Executable and language libraries
* Latin and Cyrillic fonts for the HMI
* English and Russian
* String files (STC)
* The Analog Input Boards definition
* The Web Server configuration file
* An example of drawing (optional) and an empty drawing into the Drawings
folder
* The character map bitmaps (for Latin and Cyrillic ASCII chars). These bitmaps
can be used to customize the characters downloaded to the HMI.
The Custom Setup allows the user to select/deselect the optional components.
14
Unit
A051664
Fig. 3.2.1.-2 Custom Setup
Select/deselect a program feature by clicking on the component in the Custom Setup

window.
A051665
Fig. 3.2.1.-3 Selecting and deselecting features in the Custom Setup window
Complete Setup is recommended.
3.2.2. Installing a new version of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool
A new installation does not overwrite older configuration tools. All older
configuration tools not used anymore should be uninstalled from the system.
15
Unit
First uninstall old configuration tools if you intend to reuse the target
directory or group names of an older installation.
3.2.3. Restart after an installation
Depending on the update status of your Windows libraries, the installation software
can ask for a computer restart at the end of the process. Restarting is recommended.
3.3. Removing the REF 542plus Configuration Tool
The installed REF 542plus Configuration Tool is compliant with MSI (Microsoft
Installer) technology. Thus it is always possible to repair or remove the tool from the
computer.
To remove the REF 542plus Configuration Tool:

1. Go to the Start Menu and choose Settings.
2. Go to the Control Panel and select Add/Remove Programs.
3. Mark the REF 542plus Configuration Tool you would like to uninstall and click
Remove.
4. Follow the instructions.
3.4. Starting the REF 542plus Configuration Tool
After the installation has been completed as described in Section 3.2. Installing the
REF 542plus Configuration Tool, the REF 542plus Configuration Tool can be
started as follows:
The program groups are accessed through the Start button. By default the program
group with the REF 542plus configuration software is in:
<programs folder>\ABB\REF 542plus\….
For example:
C:\Program Files\ABB\REF 542plus\ConfToolV4E06x\
This folder structure is not mandatory. Usually the common “ABB” folder is
followed by the product name (REF 542plus). Leave the version of the tool in the
folder name so that it would be easier to handle side-by-side installation of different
configuration tools on the same computer.
16
Unit
A080362
Fig. 3.4.-1 Main view of the IED Configuration Tool
The menu is described in Section 3.5.9. Description of the Main menu items. The
status bar of the main view is described in Section 3.5.11. Description of the status
bar.
Pay attention to the version in the main view of the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool or in the About dialog box (available in the Help
menu). Ensure it is the latest available version and compatible with the
firmware version of the REF 542plus to be configured.
3.5. Using the REF 542plus Configuration Tool
The following sections provide basic information on using the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool. The most important activities in creating or editing an
application are described.
Section 3.5.9. Description of the Main menu items explains the menu items in the
main menu and the character menu in the sequence in which they are displayed in
the REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
The limitations of the operating tool that are described in this section
are not explained any further in the configuration tool manual.
17
Unit
3.5.1. Operating Tool
The Operating Tool has the following limitations:
Additional protection functions cannot be added to the application. If a protection

function in the application is deleted, it cannot be added again later.
3.5.2. First steps in creating or editing an application
All the functions of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool are not described in the
following sections. All menu items in the REF 542plus Configuration Tool are
described in Section 3.5.9. Description of the Main menu items.
The sequence of the following sections corresponds to the same sequence of steps
required when defining a new application. When an existing application is opened,
all basic settings are of course already specified. The function chart is also complete.
However, the procedure for editing an application is the same as for creating a new
one.
3.5.3. Working with projects
The set of files that belongs to an application in connection with the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool is referred to a project. Projects can be created, opened and
saved in the REF 542plus Configuration Tool. After starting the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool, a new project by the name new.ref is created.
When saving a new project for the first time, always use Main Menu >
File > Save as F7. Otherwise the name "new.ref" is used.
Table 3.5.3.-1 describes the set of files associated with a project. Not all of them are
created in every application. In addition, the table shows when the files are created
or updated. If the files need to be created, the corresponding menu Generate Report
File must be activated.
Table 3.5.3.-1 File descriptions

File Contents Created Updated
*.ref File comprising: - Drawing - Parameter - When saving When saving
HMI LCD configuration - LCD texts All other
files can be recreated from this file, with the
exception of the fault record files and of the
SCL file (WEBREF configuration)
*.bak Application back-up file When opening When opening
*.doc - Device configuration - Rated values of the When printing or When printing or
analog inputs - Configured protection generating reports generating
functions with setting values reports
18
Unit
File Contents Created Updated

*.wir All connections in use are counted, the When printing or When printing or
connection number and the associated text generating reports generating
is saved. The object number sorts the reports
connections to which they are connected
and by the number of the connector pin.
Also the object type to which the connection
is linked is written to this file.
*.lst All events generated by the application are When printing or When printing or
listed here. generating reports generating
reports
*.can CAN related information (I/O blocks, When printing or When printing or
addresses, and so on) generating reports generating
reports
*.lcu The mimic diagram configuration of the When exporting a When exporting
current application. mimic diagram a mimic diagram
*.svg The mimic diagram configuration of the When generating When generating
current application in Standard Vector the SVG file if the the SVG file if the
Graphic format. Web interface is Web interface is
enabled enabled
*.ri1 The setting parameter set 1 of the distance When saving an When saving an
protection. The Omicron test set uses this application with application with
file for automatic testing. distance protection distance
protection
*.ri2 The setting parameter set 2 of the distance When saving an When saving an
protection. The Omicron test set uses this application with application with
file for automatic testing. distance protection distance
protection
*.rca XML file contains the SPA registers of the When generating When generating
objects which are applied in the specific the SPA address the same menu
configuration and used as input by the file in the main again
Modbus Suite Tool and the SCL Tool for menu
IEC 61850.
*.rce The default events for each FUPLA object Provided with the When clicking
based on the 61850 data model application Save default in
Event page of
each FUPLA
object
*.rcm The setting parameter of the When saving the
communication described in the ascii-file file generated in
the communication
menu
*.cfg Configuration file for the fault recorder When exporting a
module. fault record
*.dat Fault record file with the recorded data. When exporting a
fault record
Only files with the names *.ref can be opened directly in the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool.
19
Unit
3.5.4. Selecting the language version
Select the language of the menus, dialog boxes and messages of the configuration
software in Main Menu > Options > Language > [English, German, Italian,
Czech]. The setting takes effect immediately and it is also kept after closing the
software.
3.5.5. Setting the PC and REF 542plus connection
To download the application from the PC to the REF 542plus or to upload an

application or other data from the REF 542plus, the connection must be established
first. A serial/optical cable is needed. One end is plugged into the optical interface of
the HMI. The other end is plugged into the PC serial RS-232 interface. To enable
data to be transferred over this connection, open the dialog box in Main Menu >
Connect > Serial Port.
Ensure that the parameters of the dialog box Serial Interface in the
configuration software are the same as the parameters for the serial
interface configured in the operating system.
Ensure that the slave address of the dialog box Serial Interface … in
the configuration software is the same slave address of the connected
base unit. If this is different, then the communication between the PC
and REF 542plus cannot be established.
3.5.6. Configuring REF 542plus
To be able to configure the application, the hardware module installed in the

REF 542plus must be entered into the configuration software. Enter the hardware
module to the REF 542plus Configuration Tool in Main Menu > Configure >
Global Settings and in Main Menu > Configure > Hardware.
The communication with the station control system can be configured by selecting
Main Menu > Communication. In this submenu you can define the properties for
the communication via the Ethernet interface on the mainboard of the REF 542plus.
The properties can be defined for the communication using TCP/IP, for example
MODBUS TCP/IP, WEBSERVER or GSM/SMS, can be defined accordingly.
Besides that, the communication setting using the optional communication module
can also be selected. The setting is for example SPA, Modbus RTU, ABB LON or
IEC 60870-5-103 can also be selected. The communication setting can then be
saved to a file. Downloading the communication parameter can later be performed
separately from the downloading of the FUPLA.
20
Unit
The analog inputs and outputs should be defined before making the application
settings in Main Menu > Configure > Terminals > Analog Inputs and if
necessary in Main Menu > Configure > Terminals > Analog Outputs. If an
analog output board is not used, this menu item cannot be selected.
The analog inputs 0/4-20 mA can be defined if necessary in Main Menu >
Configure > Terminals > Analog Inputs 4-20 mA. If an analog input 4-20 mA
board is not used, this menu item cannot be selected.
The menu Main Menu > Component is prepared for future use. It has currently no
functionality.
It is recommended to define the display language (Main Menu > Configure > HMI
> Display Language) before continuing the configuration. This setting influences
the translation to REF 542plus fonts of strings on the configuration software in case
of non-Latin characters (for example Cyrillic, Chinese, Hebrew, and so on).
3.5.7. Creating a function chart (FUPLA)
To create the function chart, start the function chart editor in Main Menu >
Configure > Drawing.
Before the function chart editor can be started, make the settings for a
new application in Main Menu/Configure/Global Settings and in Main
Menu > Configure > Hardware.
The first page of the application is displayed. To make an application more

manageable, it can be distributed over several pages. One page is larger than the PC
screen. All areas of the current page can be viewed by using the scroll bars to the
right and at the bottom of the drawing editor window. The arrow keys (arrow keys)
on the keyboard can also be used for this.
3.5.7.1. Adding and moving function blocks
Function blocks can be added and moved in the working mode.
Add a function block
Select Drawing Menu > Insert. A submenu with various function groups is
displayed. Selecting a function group brings up another submenu listing the
individual function blocks. The selected function block is placed on the top left of
the page.
Example: Select Drawing Menu > Insert > Control Panel > Indication LED to
select the indication LED function block.
21
Unit
Move a function block
To move, hold the left mouse button down when the cursor is on the function block
and drag it with the mouse.
Restrictions
Note that not all function blocks can be combined together.
Restrictions for function blocks and connections are listed in Table 3.5.7.1.-1.
Table 3.5.7.1.-1 Restrictions in the FUPLA

Function block Restrictions
Protection function Max. 24 protection functions
Max. 250 protection parameters
100% DSP load
Fault recorder Max. 1 fault recorder and Min. 1 configured
protection function
Digital store object Max. 1
Energy counter Max. 15
Switching object Max. 62
Analog threshold objects Max. 10
Analog Input 0-20 mA object Max. 48
Direct read write object Max. 99
Net number Max. 512
Wire Max. 1000
Signaling LED Max. 32 on 4 sides of 8 LED's each
Number of pages Max. 99
HMI commands Max. 32
Control objects visible on HMI Max. 48
Determining the cycle time
Once a new application has been created and loaded into the
REF 542plus device, its cycle time must be checked. The cyclic time is
displayed on the HMI menu Service/Statistics.
The application cycle time must be less than 30 ms to ensure proper

functioning of REF 542plus. Longer times can result in poor and
dangerous performances like missing events and binary I/O changes.
22
Unit
3.5.7.2. Adding and moving a connection
The function blocks can be linked to each other in the drawing mode. By
positioning the cursor over a connection point on a function block or at the
beginning or at the end point of a connection, the cursor changes to a shape of a
soldering iron.
A total of 512 connections can be added. There are 502 numbers available for
connections (11 … 512). Connection numbers 0 … 10 are for internal use.
Add a connection
When the soldering iron is displayed, hold the right mouse button down and drag
the mouse to make a connection. The connection ends when the mouse button is
released.
The terminals of two function blocks can be connected in this way. The connection
can also end in the FUPLA without connecting to a terminal. The connection
number is automatically 1 or 2 in this case to indicate that it does not connect two
function blocks. Use the configuration dialog box to assign a previously used
connection number to the connection. Connections with the same connection
number can be linked even if they do not contact each other.
Connections run at right angles or in a straight line, therefore also diagonally,

depending on their setting. The relevant setting is made in Drawing Menu > View
> Wires > Right-angled or Drawing Menu > View > Wires > Straight.
Move a connection
When the soldering iron is displayed, hold the left mouse button down and drag the
mouse to move a connection point. When the mouse button is released, the
connection point remains at this position.
When a connection point is dragged or moved from one function block

terminal to another, ensure that the connection is properly positioned at
the function block.
23
Unit
Check connections after a move
There are two options how to check the connections:

* Move the cursor over the connection wire. Double-click the left mouse button to
start the configuration dialog box for the wire. The terminal information area
shows the number of the wire that is properly terminated. The numbers 11 and 12
indicate that there is still no connection.
OR
* Move the function block in the FUPLA. If the connections are moved with it, the
connection is correct.
3.5.7.3. Starting configuration dialogs
A dialog box can be opened for all function blocks and connections by moving the
cursor over the function block or the wire and double-clicking the left mouse button.
The configuration dialog box is displayed.
Configuration dialog box function block
The configuration dialog box for a connection enables the function block to be
configured and/or provides information on the terminated connections.
Configuration dialog box for a connection
A051667
Fig. 3.5.7.3.-1 Configuration dialog box for a connection
Net number
Enter the wire connection number in the Net number text box. The currently
assigned connection number is displayed, a 1 or a 2. Only numbers 1 or 2 are
displayed when the connection ends with a terminal point in the FUPLA. To find the
currently assigned connection number, the configuration software searches the
connection numbers from 11 upwards for a free connection.
24
Unit
The connection number is also displayed in the function chart beside the connection.
Setting range: 11 … 512 (steps: 1)

Default: currently assigned connection, 1 or 2
Next unused net number
The next free connection is assigned in Next unused net number. The configuration
software searches the connection numbers from 11 upwards for a free connection.
Maximum number of wires
The Maximum number of wires information field displays the maximum possible
number of connections in the current function chart. A total of 1000 connections can
be used. There are 502 connection numbers available.
Used
The Used information field displays how many connections are already set up in the
function chart.
Comment
Enter a comment, a name, for the connection in the Comment text box. The name is
also displayed in the function chart beside the connection. This name is assigned to
all connections with the same connection number.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters of the standard character set

Default: [Empty]
Choose next free
Click on the Choose next free button to assign the next free connection number to
the connection. The dialog box is then closed, and the connection has the
corresponding number.
OK
Click OK to save all settings in the configuration software. The dialog box is closed.
Cancel
When clicking on the Cancel button, the settings are not saved in the configuration
software. The dialog box is closed.
25
Unit
3.5.7.4. Deleting objects in the function chart
Deleting a function block:

1. Move the cursor over the function block to be deleted.
2. Double-click the right mouse button.
3. A confirmation query is displayed.
4. Click the OK button to delete the function block or Cancel to keep the function
block.
Deleting a connection:
1. Move the cursor over the connection which is to be deleted.
2. Double-click the right mouse button.
4. Click the OK button to delete the connection or Cancel to keep the connection.
Deleting the current page:
1. Select Draw Mode > Edit > Delete Page.
3. Click the OK button to delete the page or Cancel to keep the page.
Deleting all connections in the application:
1. Select Draw Mode > Edit > Delete All > Wires.
3. Click the OK button to delete the connections or Cancel to keep the
connections.
Deleting all pages in the application:
1. Select Draw Mode > Edit > Delete All > Pages.
3. Click the OK button to delete the pages or Cancel to keep the pages.
3.5.7.5. Checking function chart
The function chart can be checked both in draw mode and in connection mode.
Press the F9 key on the keyboard or select Drawing Menu > Utilities > Check
Drawing F9 or Main Menu > Utilities > Check Drawing F9.
The checking routine of the configuration software runs the following tests:
* Binary inputs and outputs: checks availability of the numbers of the binary
inputs and outputs used in the application. The availability depends on the
number and type of binary input and output boards in use.
* Device configuration: checks availability of a device configuration. Checks if the
configuration dialog box in Main Menu > Configure > Hardware has been
processed.
* Function blocks: all function blocks must be linked to at least one connection.
26
Unit
* DSP load: the DSP load (load on the protection and measuring unit) can be
maximum 100%. Maximum 250 protection parameters and maximum 24
protection functions can be used.
* Connections: the number of connections must not exceed 512.
* Double connections: connections with the same number may only be connected
to one function block output.
* Calculation of power: the configuration of the analog inputs must match the type
of power calculation.
* Switching objects: a maximum of 62 switching objects may be configured.
Every switching object must have its own Field bus address and binary output
represented by the switching object must be physically present.
* Direct write-read command: a maximum of 100 function blocks of this type are
permitted.
3.5.7.6. Setting the LCD and display language
When the application has been set up, the mimic diagram for the LCD can be
configured and the language in which the messages are displayed on the LCD
selected in Main Menu > Configure > Display and in Main Menu > Configure >
Display Language.
3.5.8. Uploading/downloading configuration
Once the configuration is completed, the next action is usually to download it to the
device. The REF 542plus Configuration Tool is able to perform such action if the
following conditions are valid:
The communication between REF 542plus HMI unit and the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool has been established and it is working. To check the connection,
check the version of the REF 542plus device (refer to Section 3.5.9.2. Connect).
The following problems can happen:
1. General communication error is that the REF 542plus device is not available.
The problems and the possible solutions could be:
Table 3.5.8.-1 Problems and solutions

Problem Solution
REF 542plus base unit is not turned on. Connect the right power cable to the power
supply.
REF 542plus HMI is not turned on. Connect the right power cable to the power port
of the HMI.
REF 542plus HMI is not connected to the Connect it with the serial cable the right ports.
REF 542plus base unit.
REF 542plus HMI is not ready. It is ready when waiting a configuration or when a
configuration has been already downloaded.
Broken cable Replace the cable.
Coupling of optical connector to the HMI is Re-insert the connector.
not perfect.
PC COM port malfunction Change the COM port or the PC.
27
Unit
Problem Solution
COM settings on the REF 542plus Change the COM settings. Refer to
Configuration tool do not match the current Section 3.5.5. Setting the PC and REF 542plus
connection. connection and Section 4.2.1. Serial Port. In
particular, pay attention to: baud rate, data bits
and base unit slave address.
PC COM port is already used by another Close the application (for example TeraTerm),
software. which is using the COM port, and set again the
COM settings in the REF 542plus Configuration
Tool.
2. Not all the version information is published by the REF 542plus device. If the
mandatory information is not published then the download command is not
allowed. A REF 542plus V4E02x version should publish the following
information:
* REF 542plus software/firmware versions are mandatory. Whatever the
version is, REF 542plus has to publish them.
* Configuration information is optional. Available partially in version older
than V4D02x. Remember that sometimes the information can be also a blank
space and it can be a valid value.
* Char map information is mandatory. Available only in V4D02x REF 542plus
versions. Needed only for REF 542plus V4E02 with HMI V4, which is the
HMI version until now. For the new version HMI V5 the Unicode fonts are
mandatory for displaying international characters.
3. The version of the REF 542plus in general must be compliant with the
REF 542plus Configuration Tool. For example, if the device is a V4E02x, then
the configuration tool should also be of the same version. For more detailed
information, contact your local ABB representative.
4. The Char Map for HMI V4 or the Unicode fonts for HMI V5 in the REF 542plus
device must match with the String file (STC) active in the configuration to be
downloaded. For example, if the device contains the Latin char map, then only
configurations with String file using this char map are downloadable. The
REF 542plus device with HMI V4 is provided by default with a Latin char map,
thus if another one is needed, then download first the new char map (for example
Cyrillic, refer to Section 4.2.9. Char maps (For operation with HMI V4)).
From the version V4E04x onwards, the application of the HMI V4 is

not recommended anymore.
The configuration of REF 542plus is always uploadable from the device. The
REF 542plus Configuration Tool is able to perform such action, if the following
conditions are valid:
Communication between REF 542plus HMI unit and REF 542plus Configuration
Tool is established and working. To check the connection, check the version of the
REF 542plus device (refer to Section 3.5.9.2. Connect). Follow the troubleshooting
procedure of the download above.
28
Unit
The version of the REF 542plus device must be at least V4B.0x. During the upload,
the configuration information is translated to the V4E02x version.
3.5.9. Description of the Main menu items
The menu items of the configuration software are grouped into main and drawing
menus. The following sections provide a description of main menu items.
The main menu is displayed after starting the configuration software. The drawing
menu items are described in Section 3.5.10. Description of the Drawing menu items
3.5.9.1. File
New
A new project under the name new.ref is created. Save it immediately under a
different name, because this name is always reserved for new projects.
Open … F2
A dialog box for opening a file is displayed. The default file ending for the file
format is ref. If necessary, browse through the disk and directory structure to open a
configuration file.
The dialog box for opening the file is also displayed when the F2 key on the PC
keyboard is pressed.
After the project has been opened, a drawing check is run. Any error messages must
first be acknowledged before the project can be edited.
Save F6
The open application file is saved. If a new application file has been created, the file
new.ref is saved in the default work directory of the configuration software. In case
of a new file saved for the first time, use Save as.
An application can also be saved by pressing the F6 key on the PC keyboard.
Before saving, the configuration software runs a check of the

application. Any messages that are displayed must be acknowledged
before saving.
29
Unit
Save as F7
A dialog box for saving a file is displayed. The file can be given any wanted name
and location. The default file ending for the file format is ref.
The dialog box can also be started by pressing the F6 key on the PC keyboard.
The configuration software runs a check of the application before

saving. Any messages that are displayed must be acknowledged before
saving.
Send E-Mail
Calls the default e-mail editor and inserts the currently open *.ref-file of the
configuration software as attachment.
Print
A Print dialog box is displayed. Its appearance depends on the operating system and
the installed printer. Additional inputs regarding the print process can be made in the
dialog box.
Print > Drawing
The function chart is printed out, if necessary on several pages.
Print > Parameters
A file is printed with a list of all the parameters in the application sorted by their
origin. For example, this includes the device settings and also the parameter sets for
the protection functions.
Print > Eventlist
A file that lists all possible events that could be generated by the application is
printed out. They are sorted by the function block that generated them.
Print > Connections
The connection numbers and the associated comments are printed out in a list form.
Print > CAN Settings
All the configured CAN addresses are printed. Not applicable for the time being.
30
Unit
Print Setup
When the configuration program is installed, the default printer is activated. If

required, another printer can be directly selected and defined as the default printer.
Print Preview
Print Preview displays the preview of the drawing.
MRU (Most Recently Used files)
The four most recently used configuration files.
Exit Application
Ends the session of the configuration software.
3.5.9.2. Connect
To be able to use this menu, the REF 542plus device must be

connected to a PC.
Serial Port
Starts the configuration dialog box for the connection from the PC to REF 542plus
via the serial port. The baud rate is to be set 9600 for former release 1.0 (version
V4C01x), 19200 for release 2.0 (version V4D02x) or for release 2.5 using the
existing HMI V4 and 115200 for release 2.5 using the new HMI V5 or connect it
directly to the base unit by zero modem cable.
Send to REF 542plus
Sends (or downloads) the data from the opened application in the PC to
REF 542plus.
Load from REF 542plus
Loads (or uploads) the application currently in REF 542plus from the device to the
PC.
Read Fault recorder
Loads (or uploads) the fault record data saved in REF 542plus into the PC when the
New Data button is clicked in the dialog box.
31
Unit
Input Status
Loads (or uploads) the current status of the binary inputs of the first two input/
output boards of REF 542plus when the New Data button is clicked in the dialog
box. The data are marked with the current PC system date and time and can be
saved and printed.
Output Status
Loads (or uploads) the current status of the binary outputs of the first two input/
output boards of REF 542plus when the New Data button is clicked in the dialog
box. The data is marked with the current PC system date and time and can be saved
and printed.
Measurement
Loads (or uploads) the current status of the operational measured values from
REF 542plus. These are certain values that can also be displayed in the LCD screen
above the mimic diagram.
The continuous measured value transmission to the PC can be configured in the

operational measured values dialog box. The operational measured values and, if
wanted, the values from the binary inputs and outputs, are then regularly transmitted
from REF 542plus to the PC.
The data is marked with the current PC system date and time and can be saved and
printed.
CB Monitoring
Displays the dialog that enables the CB Monitoring data reading to:
* upload data from the connected device
* reset data in the connected device
* save uploaded data to a recording file (text format)
* upload data from a recorded file
Send Lifecycle data ...
Requests the Lifecycle composition file from the device and sends it automatically
to the Lifecycle Service Tool.
Site information
Displays the dialog for customer site information stored into REF542plus unit and
allows updating it.
32
Unit
A080210
Fig. 3.5.9.2.-1 Site address data
Connect > Version
Reads the current versions of the REF 542plus micro controllers (MC) and the
configuration software. The information is displayed in a dialogue box. If a
connection to REF 542plus cannot be established, an error message is displayed.
A051668
Fig. 3.5.9.2.-2 Connection warning when REF 542plus is not reachable
If the REF 542plus is available, the version dialog box is displayed.
33
Unit
A051669
Fig. 3.5.9.2.-3 Software, FUPLA and Char Map versions dialog box
The versions are divided into three groups:

1. Software: micro controller, DSP, HMI, field bus type, analog input 20 mA,
configuration software versions. The REF 542plus version must be equal to the
REF 542plus Configuration Tool version in order to download a configuration.
Uploading is always possible.
2. FUPLA: configuration information like file name, project name, feeder name,
FUPLA date, strings file name and license key.
3. For application with the HMI V4 the Char Map is to be used: header version,
char map version, char map description and code page (and char map family
code page, which is a reserved parameter). The REF 542plus stored char map
must be equal to the downloaded configuration STC file. For example, if the
REF 542plus Configuration Tool is on English STC file, then the char map on
the device must be Latin. If not, it is necessary to download first the char map
into the device (refer to Section 4.2.9. Char maps (For operation with HMI V4))
and then the configuration download. For the application with the new HMI V5
the Unicode fonts must be downloaded accordingly.
3.5.9.3. View
Toolbar
Opens the toolbar on the top side of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
34
Unit
Status Bar
Sets the status bar at the bottom of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
Transfer Bar
Opens the transfer bar below the toolbar.
3.5.9.4. Configure
Global Settings
Starts a configuration dialog box in which the basic settings are made. Functions
such as fault monitoring, coil monitoring and default values such as the general filter
time and the device address are defined here. In addition, the system messages
(events), which can be sent from the system itself to a station control system, can be
configured in two other dialog boxes.
This configuration dialog box must be edited before an application can

be created.
Hardware
Starts a configuration dialog box in which settings that describe the delivery
variations of the REF 542plus device can be made.
This configuration dialog box must be edited before an application can

be created.
Communication
This dialog box must be filled in to set the properties for the communication ports.
35
Unit
A080212
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-1 Dialog box for the Communication Port Properties
The left side of the box describes the properties of the Ethernet port on the
mainboard and the right side the parameter for the communication using the
optional communication module. The Ethernet port can be used for MODBUS TCP,
SPA TCP, the embedded WEB SERVER and the connection to GSM. In addition,
for time synchronization of the mainboard, the connection to SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol) by using the Ethernet port is also provided.
The optional communication module is foreseen for the following protocols:

* SPA
* ABB LON per LAG 1.4
* IEC 60870-5-103
* MODBUS RTU
* Ethernet module for IEC 61850 and/or MODBUS TCP
The buttons in the Menu section for generating actions on the rcm file are the
following:
* Upload from file: is used to upload a configuration (rcm file) previously saved
on disk. A file pop-up dialog opens showing the folder from where to upload the
file.
* Save to file: is used to store a configuration (rcm file) on disk. A file pop-up
dialog opens showing the folder from which to download the file.
36
Unit
* Upload from device: is used to read the communication section parameters from
a device.
* Download to device: is used to write the configuration of the communication
parameters to a device.
* Clear all settings: is used to remove all previously configured settings.
Click OK to accept all the changes and close the dialog.
Click Cancel to discard all the changes and close the dialog.
Click Apply to accept all the changes and keep the dialog open.
MAINBOARD > ETHERNET PORT
If the connection to REF 542plus has been established, the MAC address can be
obtained.
The MAC address is needed for the communication is not possible.
MAINBOARD > TCP/IP properties
When the TCP/IP properties have been selected, the following dialog box opens.
A060418
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-2 TCP/IP properties dialog box
The parameters for the IP address of REF 542plus, subnet mask and default gateway
are crucial for the TCP/IP communication.
37
Unit
MAINBOARD > MODBUS TCP
For the MODBUS TCP section there are two configuration settings to be done for
the client IPs on:
* Access control module enabling/disabling
* Priority pool list
A080214
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-3 MODBUS TCP properties dialog box
Access Control Module:
If you enable the security access module you have to enter a list of authorized client
IPs that are the unique clients that may establish a MODBUS TCP connection
(maximum 10 IPs). Connections of clients with different IPs will be refused.
If the Access Control Module is not enabled, all the clients will be accepted to
establish a connection.
38
Unit
Access Control Module Enabled
A080216
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-4 Access control module enabled
The authorized clients can belong to priority or non-priority connection pools with
the constraint that the total number of priority and non-priority connections will be
4. When you enter client IPs in the priority pool from the authorized IP address, the
number of free connections will be automatically updated. In fact, the number of
non-priority client connections will be defined as the number of remaining free
connections (not used by the priority pool) after the priority client connection
configuration.
It is also necessary to configure the maximum number of connections allowed for

each IP address belonging to the priority connection pool (in the above example the
IP 10.10.10.176 of priority pool has 2 available connections, while the IPs
10.10.10.172 and 10.10.10.171 belong to two non-priority connections).
Access Control Module Disabled
If the Access Control Module is disabled, all the client's IPs are accepted. The
configuration or priority pool/non-priority pools' client remains the same as
described above with the freedom to add any IP (it is no longer present in the list of
authorized IPs). In the below example, see figure 3.5.9.4.-4, the IP 10.10.10.175 is a
priority client with 1 connection and the number of free connections for non-priority
pools is then equal to 3.
39
Unit
MAINBOARD > SNTP
The following dialog box shows the SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
properties
A080218
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-5 SNTP properties
MAINBOARD > SNTP > Read Info Status
The following dialog box shows the SNTP Info Status dialog. From here it is
possible to receive information only once or every two seconds about configuration
values and status of the SNTP client and the 4 SNTP servers.
40
Unit
A080220
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-6 SNTP data
MAINBOARD > SPA TCP
The following dialog box shows the SPA TCP properties. The user has to select
wether to enable or not the Access Control Module. Only when enabled is it
possible to insert one or more clients as authorized IPs.
The maximum number of authorized IP addresses is 10.
41
Unit
A080222
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-7 SPA TCP properties
MAINBOARD > WEB SERVER
The following dialog box shows the user configuration for the embedded WEB
server communication.
42
Unit
A060420
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-8 Dialog box for the user configuration of the WEB SERVER
The following dialog box shows the user administration of new or existing users.
A060421
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-9 Dialog box for the administration of WEB SERVER users
43
Unit
MAINBOARD > GSM/SMS
REF 542plus can operate on its own as an SMS gateway via a GSM modem, or it
can refer to another connected device via TCP/IP. Usually only one REF 542plus in
a switchgear has a GSM modem, and thus all the others refer to it.
A060422
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-10 Configuration dialog box for the SMS messaging system
The type of modem to be used can be selected from the modem configuration dialog
box.
The modem does not require a PIN code for the SIM card.
44
Unit
A060423
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-11 Configuration dialog box for the GSM modem
COM BOARD
This part of the dialog box is dedicated for the communication setting using an
optional module.
COM BOARD > MODULE TYPE
Several different module types can be selected:

* SPA
* ABB LON per LAG 1.4
* IEC 60870-5-103
* MODBUS RTU (the same module can be reprogrammed for SPA)
* Ethernet module for IEC 61850 or MODBUS TCP (both protocols can be
applied simultaneously).
COM BOARD > PORTS
The slave address or unit ID for the communication can be defined in the following
dialog box.
45
Unit
A060424
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-12 Configuration dialog box for the optional communication module type
In case of the Ethernet module, the IP addresses of the two ports are not configured
yet and are fixed to temporary invalid values 0.0.0.0. The configuration of valid IP
addresses is needed, otherwise it is not possible to accept the changes made in the
dialog or to download REF542plus of the *.rcm file. To configure the IP addresses,
perform the following steps:
* Click the Properties button. A dialog for configuring the Ethernet card
parameters opens.
* Click the Read info status button. A dialog displaying information status values
for the Ethernet card opens.
The following Port1 and Port2 related parameters configured in the Properties
dialog are displayed in the PORTS section:
* Protocol: the type of protocol loaded in the communication card.
* IP address: the IP address for the port.
* MAC Address: the MAC address for the port.
These values are displayed after you have given input in the Properties dialog. After
clicking the Properties button, the Properties dialog opens and it is ready for data
input.
46
Unit
A080224
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-13 Ethernet module properties dialog
The parameters that need configuring are grouped into three main sections (round
circled in the Fig. 3.5.9.4.-13):
* TOPOLOGY
* TCP/IP
* TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
If you select the Single Channel topology option button, you need to select the
channel number. The default value is CHANNEL 1.
After that the input data area for parameter settings of channel 1 (port 1) or channel
2 (port 2) is enabled. If required, for example for redundancy purposes, Dual
Channel topology can also be used. Note that each port has to be connected to
different network.
The default IP address for a completely new Ethernet module is

192.168.2.10. The related subnet mask is 255.255.255.0
A subnet mask does not work like an IP address, nor does it exist independently
from the IP address. Instead, a subnet mask accompanies an IP address and the two
values work together. All valid subnet masks contain two parts: the left side with all
47
Unit
mask bits set to '255' (the extended network portion) and the right side with all bits
set to '0' (the host portion). If an invalid address for the IP address or for the subnet
mask is inserted, an error message is displayed (see Fig. 3.5.9.4.-14).
A070416
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-14 Error message for wrong IP address or the related subnet mask
If the Ethernet parameters are invalid, it is not possible to accept the changes made
in the dialog or to download REF 542plus of the *.rcm file. An error message is
displayed, see Fig. 3.5.9.4.-15.
A070417
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-15 Error message for wrong Ethernet module configuration
If the Ethernet parameters in an existing *.ref file are already

configured with communication parameters, it is strongly
recommended to cross-check them by uploading the existing
communication settings from the device.
It is always possible to save the *.rcm file, but the same error message
appears again if the file is reused.
Use the check box in the Time Synchronization section to enable or disable the
SNTP based time synchronization of the REF 542plus.
To accept the input data and close the dialog, click OK.
To discard any changes, click Cancel.
Once the configuration is completed, it is possible to start the download phase to

REF 542plus.
However, if the GPS clock with IRIG-B is connected to the

REF 542plus, the time is used as the time source regardless of whether
this check box is checked or not.
48
Unit
COM BOARD > Read Info Status
If Module type is “ETHERNET,” the button Read Info Status displays the
following dialog to read:
* GENERAL: The working status of the Ethernet board
* PROTOCOLS: For each protocol IEC61850 or MODBUS TCP it is possible to
read
* Status information
* The number of active clients and the indication of the maximum number of
allowed connections
* Protocol configuration with the name of the configuration file.
* TCP/IP: The following information is provided for each port:
* MAC address
* IP address
* Subnet mask
* Default gateway
* Status
* TIME SYNCHRONIZATION: Provides the CONFIGURATION value and the
STATUS information regarding:
* SNTP Client
* SNTP Server 1
* SNTP Server 2
* SNTP Server 3
* SNTP Server 4
The button Start polling can be used to refresh data every two seconds.
49
Unit
A080226
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-16 Ethernet board data
Terminals
The Terminals menu item enables the selection of three submenu items. With them
the analog inputs, analog inputs 20 mA and analog outputs 20 mA can be
configured. Correct configuration of the analog inputs in particular is very important
if REF 542plus is to function properly.
Terminals > Analog Inputs
Starts a configuration dialog box in which settings can be made to adapt the analog
inputs of REF 542plus to the sensors or transformers used. These informations are
important for starting and tripping protection functions. Measured values are also
recorded with these sensors or transformers.
This configuration dialog box allows also the arrangement of other parameters:
network settings and calculated values, such as the selection of metering system and
the type of power calculation.
50
Unit
The same sensors or transformers are used for the protection and the
measurement functions.
Terminals > Analog Inputs 20 mA
Starts a configuration dialog box in which settings can be made to adapt the 20mA
Analog Inputs of the REF 542plus to the used sensors. Several SF6- density-sensors
but also general purpose sensors with 4..20mA-interface can be connected to these
inputs.
Terminals > Analog Outputs 20 mA
Starts a configuration dialog box in which settings can be made to adapt the analog
output 20 mA board of the REF 542plus used.
Component
Not applicable for the time being.
Drawing
Starts the function chart editor. Function blocks can be added, connected and
configured to set the wanted functions for the bay control and protection unit.
The menu bar with the drawing menu is displayed. The menu items of the drawing
menu are described later.
HMI
The HMI menu item enables the selection of further submenu items for the
configuration of the single line diagram to be shown on the display, the language
selection and so forth.
HMI > Single Line Diagram
Starts the editor for the LCD. The single-line diagram can be set up. Its elements are
connected to the corresponding function blocks. At any time it is always possible to
select IEC or ANSI bitmaps to be shown on the HMI.
51
Unit
HMI > Display Language
Starts the dialog box that sets the language version for the texts displayed on the
LCD. At the same time the correct message texts for the application are selected.
The dialog box shows also the char set code page of the selected language. The
REF 542plus Configuration Tool uses this value in order to handle properly the non-
Latin characters like Arabic, Cyrillic and Hebrew.
HMI > User Text
In case two languages are configured, the first language is always defined as the
local one and the second language as English as default language. The display can
be switched from one language to the other alternatively. This submenu item shows
the text of the information to be displayed in those two languages.
HMI > Download Unicode Fonts
The Unicode fonts are already implemented on the HMI V5. If for some reason
other unicode fonts need to be used, the download can be performed with this
submenu item.
HMI > Char Maps
The user can manage the Char Maps bitmap fonts both on the PC and in
REF 542plus. Refer to Section 4.2.9. Char maps (For operation with HMI V4)(for
operation with HMI V4.
HMI > Key Code
The HMI > Key Code menu contains two submenus that allow online setting up of
the protection and control keys. If REF 542plus is connected properly, the current
key is displayed in the dialog box. Then the key can be changed. When the OK
button is clicked, the key is sent to REF 542plus.
The key can be composed of maximum 16 alphanumeric chars.
HMI > Key Codes > Set protection key
Opens the dialog box to change the current protection key.
HMI > Key Codes > Set control key
Opens the dialog box to change the current control key.
52
Unit
HMI > LED Bars
Assigns the display of the measurement values to the LED bars according to the
following configuration dialog box.
A051670
Fig. 3.5.9.4.-17 Configuration dialog box to assign the measurement values of the LED
bars
CB Monitoring
With Release 2.6 the CB monitoring function is introduced. It can be used to

supervise the contact wear condition by calculating of the switched current and to
help fault analysis by storing all configured measurements in case of CB trip. The
function can be opened in menu configure on the main page of the REF 542
configuration or operation tool. For more detailed information please refer to the
same section in REF 542 Product Manual, document number 1MRS755860.
3.5.9.5. Utilities
Check Drawing F9
Starts the software routine that checks the drawing according to specific criteria. If
necessary, relevant error messages are displayed after the check.
Generate Report Files
Creates report file of the currently opened configuration file.
53
Unit
Generate SPA Addresses File
Creates a file with SPA addresses of all configured blocks for the application.
Protection Functions
Lists all protection functions configured. The configuration dialog box for the
setting parameter can be opened by double-clicking the wanted protection function
Events
This feature is provided for the automatic events checking. The configuration tool
setup will provide a default ETHERNET_IEC61850.RCE file with default events
for each configured FUPLA object based on the 61850 data model. This default file
is in accordance with the 61850 data model. It is also possible to edit/modify it and
create other *.rce files. The configuration tool can be used to select which *.rce file
to be used through the menu option called “Options,” which will be described later.
The menu Events precedes the following submenus:

* Set All Events
* Clear All Events
* Set Default Events
* Save Default Events
With the functions “Set Default Events” and “Save Default Events” the required
default events for the configured application can be defined and saved. The defined
default events can de used for other similar applications. Functions for set and clear
all events are also provided.
3.5.9.6. Options
Customize
This menu provides the customization of location for a file generated by the tool (ie
SPA RCA file and Com RCE file), the language to be used and the handling of
Lifecycle Service remote server for test. The following two figures show the
customization of the file location SPA RCA file and the COM RCE file.
54
Unit
A080228
Fig. 3.5.9.6.-1 Customization of the file location SPA RCA file
A080230
Fig. 3.5.9.6.-2 Customization of the file location Com RCE file
In this dialog it is possible to select the folder containing the default events RCE file.
If more files are present, it is possible to select one of them that will be used in the
application. Moreover, it is also possible to create a new empty RCE file that will be
filled afterwards from inside the events page of each FUPLA object.
The following figures show the customization of the language used in the
configuration or in the operating tool and the options for the Lifecycle Service
definition. More detailed information can be obtained in the corresponding manual
for the Lifecycle Tool.
55
Unit
A080232
Fig. 3.5.9.6.-3 Customization of the language in the configuration/operating tool
A080234
Fig. 3.5.9.6.-4 Customization of the Lifecycle Service remote servers
This dialog provides the possibility to configure a test remote server for the ABB
Lifecycle Service to avoid sending “dummy” data to official production database.
3.5.9.7. Help
Function key F1
Opens an information window that shows the assignment of the function keys on the
PC keyboard. The appropriate function keys are also shown with the corresponding
menu items.
Table 3.5.9.7.-1 shows the assignment of the function keys in the main menu and in
the drawing menu.
56
Unit
Table 3.5.9.7.-1 Assignment of the function keys

Key Main Menu Drawing Menu
F1 Help on function keys Information dialog box function keys
F2 Open file… -
F3 - Wire mode: Connect FUPLA symbols
F4 - Draw mode: Move FUPLA symbols
F5 - Refresh drawing (screen refresh)
F6 Save Save
F7 Save as… -
F8 - Repeat last add action (only for logic
symbols)
F9 Check Drawing Check drawing
F10 - Sequences ON/OFF
F11 - -
F12 - FUPLA Monitor
About
Opens an information window with copyright and version information of the

REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
3.5.10. Description of the Drawing menu items
The menu items of the configuration software are grouped into main and drawing
menus. The following sections provide a description of drawing menu items.
The main menu is displayed after starting the configuration software. The drawing
menu is displayed when Main Menu > Configure > Drawing has been selected.
The main menu items are described in Section 3.5.9. Description of the Main menu
items.
3.5.10.1. File
Save F6
The open application file is saved. If a new application file has been created, the file
new.ref is saved in the default work directory of the configuration software. In case
of a new file, use the menu item Save as when it is saved for the first time.
A project can also be saved by pressing the F6 function key on the PC keyboard.
Before saving, the configuration tool runs a check of the application.

Any messages that are displayed must be acknowledged before saving.
57
Unit
Exit Edit
The editor used to create and edit the function chart is closed. The function chart
display disappears and the main menu bar is displayed again.
3.5.10.2. Edit
Copy Page
The displayed page on the editor is copied into the Windows clipboard.
Paste Page
If the Windows clipboard contains a Drawing page, then it is pasted into the
displayed page. The REF 542plus Configuration Tool checks the pasted object.
Thus, if an object reached the maximum number of installations, it is not pasted into
the page.
Insert Page
Opens a dialog box with which a page can be added. The number of the page is
entered in the text box before an empty page is added. An information window
displays the last page that has been used in the application. The Accept and Cancel
buttons are used to add the page or to cancel the procedure. The dialog box is closed
and the user is returned to the drawing menu.
The configuration software provides a maximum of 99 pages for one application.
Delete Page
Opens a dialog box with which the current page can be deleted. The Accept and
Cancel buttons are used to delete the page or to cancel the procedure. The dialog
box is closed and the user is returned to the drawing menu.
Delete All
The Delete All menu item has two submenu items. They provide the option of
deleting all connections or all pages.
After the selection, a confirmation window is displayed. Click OK to confirm the

deletion or Cancel to cancel the deletion. The dialog box is closed and the user is
returned to the drawing menu.
Domain
Not applicable for the time being.
58
Unit
Search Wire
Opens a dialog box where all connections with the same number can be found. The
connection number is entered into the appropriate text box.
The OK button closes the dialog box and the connections with the number input are
marked red on all pages of the function chart.
The Cancel button closes the dialog box and returns the user to the drawing menu.
Search Object
The Search Object menu item has two submenu items. They enable a function block
(referred to as an object here) to be searched either by its Field bus address or its
object number.
A dialog box is displayed after making the selection. The Field bus address or the
object number can be entered into the text box.
The OK button closes the dialog box and the object with the Field bus address or
the object number that was entered is displayed in the function chart.
The Cancel button closes the dialog box and returns the user to the drawing menu.
3.5.10.3. View
Toolbar
Opens the toolbar on the top side of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
Status Bar
Sets the status bar at the bottom of the REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
Sequences F10
The Sequences menu item shows and hides all labels on the function blocks and
connections. The F10 function key on the PC keyboard does the same thing.
Wires
The Wires menu item has two submenu items. This enables the user to select
whether connections can run only at right angles (perpendicular and horizontal) or
in straight lines (perpendicular, horizontal and diagonal).
This setting may be changed at any time and affects all connections.
59
Unit
Next page PgDn
Shows the next page in the function chart. The PgDn (Page Down) key or Screen↓
on the PC keyboard does the same thing.
Previous page PgUp
Shows the previous page in the function chart. The PgUp (Page Up) key or Screen↑
on the PC keyboard does the same thing.
Go to page
Opens a dialog box with which any page of the function chart can be displayed. The
number of the page required is entered into the text box. An information window
displays the last page that has been used in the application. The OK and Cancel
buttons display the page or cancel the procedure. The dialog box is closed and the
user is returned to the drawing menu.
The configuration software provides a maximum of 99 pages for one application.
Zoom
Opens a dialog box with which the page view can be enlarged. The percentage
factor is entered into the appropriate text box. It is always based on the default size
of 100%.
Redraw F5
Refreshes the display on the screen. The size and the markings of searched objects
remain as before.
Reset
Removes the markings on searched objects and resets the size to the default factor of
100%. Page 1 of the application is displayed also.
3.5.10.4. Insert
A menu with all possible function blocks arranged by function groups is displayed.
The various submenus are used to select the corresponding function blocks. The
selected one is then added to the function chart.
The sequence of descriptions corresponds to the menu structure of the Insert menu
described here. Therefore, a list of the function groups with their function blocks is
not given here.
60
Unit
3.5.10.5. Utilities
Check drawing F9
Checks the drawing according to specific points. If necessary, relevant error

messages are displayed after the check.
FUPLA Monitor F12
The FUPLA Monitor menu item can be marked by selecting it. A < > is then
displayed beside the menu item. If also the special cable for the optical − RS 232
interface for the communication between the PC with the HMI control unit is
connected, the logical level of the connection in the FUPLA can be shown on line.
Switching objects
An information dialog box is displayed. It lists the field bus addressField bus
addresses available for the switching objects. Additional information is also shown
adjacent:
- - - - - - - - - -: The field bus addressField bus address is not used by a switching

object.
“EXAMPLE TEXT”: Text from the Comment text box in the configuration dialog
box of the switching object.
“empty“: The field bus addressField bus address is used by a switching object.
However, no comment text has been entered.
When the cursor is placed over a line with the data of a switching
object and the left mouse button is double-clicked, the dialog box is
closed and the switching object is marked in the function chart.
DSP Information
The dialog box is shown in Fig. 3.5.10.5.-1. The DSP load, number of protection
parameters and the number of protection functions used are listed accordingly.
61
Unit
A051768
Fig. 3.5.10.5.-1 Dialog box Drawing menu > Utilities > DSP information
Protection functions
The dialog box shown in Fig. 3.5.10.5.-2 is displayed. It lists the protection
functions in the application.
A051676
Fig. 3.5.10.5.-2 Dialog box Drawing menu > Utilities > Protection Functions
Double-clicking a protection function from the list, the protection function block on
the editor is shown and marked. The Close button ends the dialog.
Wires
An information dialog box with the numbers of the connections in use opens. The
number of connections with this number is shown adjacent in parentheses. At the
end of the text that was entered into the Comment text box of the configuration
dialog box of the connection follows.
62
Unit
When the cursor is placed over a line with the data of a connection and
the left mouse button is double-clicked, the dialog box is closed and all
relevant connections are marked in the function chart.
Drawing Set 1
Shows the configured protection trip characteristics according to parameter set 1.
Drawing Set 2
Shows the configured protection trip characteristics according to parameter set 2.
3.5.10.6. Options
Block Moving of Objects
Objects already present in FUPLA cannot be moved anymore.
Moving Objects Transparently
Objects in FUPLA can be moved transparently.
FUPLA Monitor
Can be used to monitor online the logical condition of the signals in the FUPLA.
Unicode Fonts
The fonts are used for application with HMI V5 and checked by default if HMI V5
is selected as Hardware in menu Configuration.
3.5.10.7. Help
Function key F1
The function key F1 opens an information window that shows the assignment of the
function keys on the PC keyboard. The function keys are also shown with the
corresponding menu items.
63
Unit
About
Opens an information window with copyright and version information of the

REF 542plus Configuration Tool.
3.5.11. Description of the status bar
The main view status bar shows the following information:

* COM port settings: the selected COM port and the base unit address
* Web server settings: it is displayed if the Web server is enabled. The IP address is
shown as well between square brackets.
* String file name (STC): When the opened configuration is an old one (Release 1
− V4C or older) the file name is not shown. Then it is strongly suggested to
update it with the new STC files.
* Charset and codepage: It represents the charset used by the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool in order to interpret and convert the Unicode strings of the
configuration to the ASCII chars handled by REF 542plus.
64
Unit
4. Setting REF 542plus

In this chapter the following information is available:
* Options for adding required functions to the configuration of the REF 542plus
device
* Settings that can be made in the configuration software to adapt the REF 542plus
to the application
* Configuring the function chart or plan (FUPLA) to the bay in which the unit is
operating
* Implementing the protection functions by using the related function blocks
* All other function blocks that can be added to the FUPLA
If the unit has been delivered with a custom application, this section helps in
understanding the function blocks with respect to their function and configuration.
The variety of functions offered by REF 542plus results mainly from the PLC-like
programming option provided by the REF 542plus Configuration Tool. Various
function blocks are linked to one another in one FUPLA.
The objects that can be added to the function chart are referred to as function blocks.
They are used to address binary and analog inputs and outputs and to define
switching operations, interlocking and protection functions.
Each function block has inputs and/or outputs that can be used within the FUPLA.
To open the configuration dialog box of a function block, point the wanted function
block and double-click the left mouse button.
Normally a configuration or an application has been created to be precisely

customized for the purpose and location location of the REF 542plus device. The
configuration has been loaded and saved into the related REF 542plus device. The
configuration specifies what protection functions are applied, when and what
interlockings are activated and what initial variables are set for the analog and
binary outputs of REF 542plus. The application implemented with the FUPLA
provides exactly the protection, measurement, supervision and control functions that
are required.
4.1. Connecting inputs and outputs
The REF 542plus device receives a great variety of information on the equipment
being monitored through its analog and binary inputs. These input quantities are
digitally processed in the function chart. The REF 542plus outputs are addressed
from the FUPLA, for example to trip the switching objects in the bay.
To enable the REF 542plus inputs and outputs to be used in the function chart, they
are represented by function blocks, the switching objects. This enables several
inputs and outputs to be combined.
65
Unit
4.2. General settings
Before a FUPLA can be created and exported to REF 542plus, settings must be
made in the PC.
4.2.1. Serial Port
To enable the serial port (RS-232) of the computer to be used to transmit the
configuration/application, the applicable dialog box must be edited. After starting
the configuration software, open Main Menu > Connect > Serial Port. The dialog
box has five option fields where the settings for the computer serial port can be
made.
Configuration dialog box
A051677
Fig. 4.2.1.-1 Configuration dialog box for the REF 542plus serial port
ComPort
Under ComPort click the active interface on the computer to enable communication
from the PC to REF 542plus over a special serial optical cable.
66
Unit
Setting range: COM1, COM2

Default: COM 1
BaudRate
Under BaudRate click the baud rate of the COM port. Release 1.1 supports 9600
bps, release 2 supports 19200 bps and release 2.5 115200 bps.
Setting range: 9600, 19200 and 115200

Default: 115200 (for release 2.5)
Data Bits
Under Data Bits click the data bits of the COM port. REF 542plus V4D.02 operates
with 8 bits. Older versions operate with 7 bits.
Setting range: 7, 8
Default: 8
Slave Address
Enter the REF 542plus base unit slave address in the Slave Address text box. This
address allows the user to connect more REF 542plus base units to the same HMI. It
has nothing to do with the REF 542plus communication card interface.
Setting range: 1 … 254

Default: 99
Since it is possible to connect more REF 542plus base units to the

HMI, the engineer must configure the referred base unit. In fact, the
REF 542plus Configuration Tool uploads/downloads the configuration
from/to the REF 542plus base unit addressed by the base unit slave
address in the serial port configuration.
Fig. 4.2.1.-2 shows a PC with the REF 542plus Configuration Tool that is connected
to an HMI via serial communication port (COM1 or COM2). The HMI is shared
by three REF 542plus base units, which have three different addresses (on a RS-485
bus). In order to connect the REF 542plus Configuration Tool with a certain
REF 542plus base unit it is necessary to configure the right salve unit address. For
example if the REF 542plus Configuration Tool wants to communicate with the first
REF 542plus base unit, then the slave address base unit (in the serial port dialog
box) must be set to 99.
67
Unit
A051678
Fig. 4.2.1.-2 PC connected via HMI to several base units
The base unit address set in the Serial Port dialog box can be different
from the slave address set into the hardware configuration. This is the
case when it is necessary to change a slave address of a REF 542plus
base unit. For example if it is needed to change the second
REF 542plus base unit address (in Fig. 4.2.1.-2) from 100 to 103, it is
necessary to communicate with the current base unit which has address
100, but then configure the hardware configuration with 103. After the
download of the configuration, REF 542plus restarts with the new
address 103. Any further connection request with address 100 fails.
By default, in production, the REF 542plus base unit is set with

address 99 (which is the default of the REF 542plus Configuration
Tool as well).
The following options are set:
Parity: Default: Even
Stop BITS: Default: 1
OK
Cancel
68
Unit
4.2.2. Global Settings
The Global Settings are available in Main Menu > Configure > Global. The
wanted general configuration inputs are made in this dialog box. With the exception
of those for trip circuit supervision, the inputs are independent of the REF 542plus
model supplied.
It is absolutely essential to edit the configuration dialog boxes in Main

Menu > Configure > Global Settings and in Main Menu >
Configure > Hardware before the drawing editor is opened.
Configuration
A080236
Fig. 4.2.2.-1 Configuration box for the REF 542plus Global Settings
69
Unit
To assure the correct behavior of the communication using the Ethernet module and
the communication protocol IEC 61850, select the No events when function blocked
check box. The selection is possible after you have selected the Events check box.
The check box “No Events when function blocked” is a feature for IEC 61850
communication protocol. It is based on the related standard as it is needed to have a
complete deactivation of a blocked function in the FUPLA for the generation of the
related events.
If the check box “Lifecycle Service used” is not checked and downloaded with the
configured application in order to allow for switching off the warning message
“Compos. has Changed. Pls Connect to Tool” in the status bar of the HMI.
Node address
The Node address sets the addressing of the bay control and protection unit over the
field bus. Every device installed on a field bus is assigned a unique device address.
Setting range: 1 ... 255

Default: 99
Project
Enter a name for the project in the Project text box. The name entered is only a more
precise description and has nothing to do with the name under which the application
can be saved. One project can include several bays.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Feeder
In the Feeder text box, enter a name for the feeder for which the application is
created as part of the project above. The name entered is only a more precise
description and has nothing to do with the name under which the application can be
saved.
Global filter time
In the Global filter time text box, enter the time in ms that is required for an input
signal to address the binary input to be detected as such. The general filter time is
valid for all binary inputs and is added to a non-adjustable filter time that is set by
the design of the unit (1 ms). The last is referred to as the hardware filter time.
70
Unit
Setting range: 0 … 999 ms (increment: 1 ms)

Default: 20
Active protection set
In the Active protection set text box, enter a parameter set of the protection
parameter that is intended to be active when REF 542plus is started. The active
parameter set can be changed later with the local control on the REF 542plus
operator view.
Setting range: 1 … 2 (increment: 1)

Default: 1
Changes
A variable that shows the number of changes to the configuration for the service in
encrypted form is displayed here.
Name of configuration
The Name of configuration displays the name as which the application file/
configuration file is saved.
Coil supervision
In the former version of the binary I/O module version V2 there were four check
boxes in the Coil supervision area that enabled trip circuit supervision (= coil
supervision) to be activated for two trip circuits each for a maximum of two or three
binary input and output modules. However, since REF 542plus release 2.0, the
binary I/O module version V2 is not available anymore. Note that the succesor
version, the binary I/O module version V3, provides only one coil supervision on
each module. The maximum number of coil supervision is two or three, depending
on the ordered housing.
Card1_1 (not available anymore in BIO V3)
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 1 on the 1st input
and output board.
Card1_2
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 2 on the 1st input
and output board.
71
Unit
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 1 on the 2nd input
and output board.
Card2_2
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 2 on the 2nd input
and output board.
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 1 on the 3rd input
and output board.
Card3_2
Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output 2 on the 3rd input
and output board.
Error supervision
In current version of REF 542plus is not to be used anymore.
Doubleswitching
Doubleswitching provides the option of activating double actuation. After selecting

a switching object once on the LCD of the REF 542plus HMI control unit, the
option of sending two switching commands to this switching object is available. In
general, three seconds are available for sending a switching command after selecting
a switching device. If double actuation is activated, another 10 seconds is available
to send another switching command after the first switching command.
Events
Select the Events check box to allow event data to be generally sent to a station
automation system. See also the system events' 1, 2 and 3 buttons.
Autoreclosure (AR)
Since release 2.0 (version V4D02x) the embedded Autoreclose is not to available
anymore. Therefore an independent and separate function blocks Autoreclose can be
applied.
72
Unit
Test mode
Click the used option button in the Test mode area to allow entry to the test mode
via the HMI control unit in general. Click not used in the Test mode area to deny
entry to the test mode via the HMI control unit.
System events 1
Clicking on the System events 1 button displays a dialog box in which various
device-based events can be enabled. If they occur they are then sent to the station
automation system.
See also the buttons System events 2 and System events 3 and the check box
events. Events may also be enabled in the configuration dialogs of some function
blocks and they are then based on these.
System events 2
Clicking on the System events 2 button displays another dialog box in which
various device-based events can be enabled. If these events occur they are then sent
to the station control system.
See also the buttons for System events and check box events. Events may also be
enabled in the configuration dialogs of some function blocks and they are then
based on these.
System events 3
Clicking the System events 3 button displays another dialog box in which various
device-based events can be enabled. If these events occur, they are then sent to the
station control system.
See also the buttons System events 1 and System events 2 and check box events.
Events may also be enabled in the configuration dialogs of functions blocks and the
events are then based on the dialogs.
OK
Cancel
73
Unit
4.2.3. Hardware
The general hardware configuration is available in Main Menu > Configure >
Hardware.
It is absolutely essential first to edit the configuration dialog boxes in

Main Menu > Configure > Global Settings and in Main Menu >
Configure > Hardware to get to the drawing editor.
A051053
Fig. 4.2.3.-1 REF 542plus hardware configuration
REF 542plus Housing
Choose 2 IO-Slots option button for a normal housing (2 input/output slots) or 4 IO-
Slots option button for a wide housing (4 input/output slots).
74
Unit
Binary IO Boards
<+> button increases and <-> button reduces the number of active binary input and
output boards. The wanted number is shown on the left after Number:.
Choose the type of relay that is used on the active binary input and output boards.
Either mechanical (conventional) relays or solid state (transistor) relays.
Different binary I/O boards cannot be combined in one REF 542plus

device (mechanical relays and solid state relays).
The related information fields binary inputs and binary outputs show how many
inputs and outputs are available depending on the number and type of boards in use.
Analog input board
The dialog box provides a selection of predefined analog input boards according to
the ordering code. Further description can be found later in Section 4.2.4. Analog
inputs.
Analog Input 20 mA Boards
Configure the number of analog input 4-20 mA boards in use under Analog Input 4-
20 mA Boards. These boards can only be used in deep housing. The <+> and <->
buttons are used for settings.
Analog Output 20 mA Boards
Configure the number of analog output boards in use under 4-20mA Analog Output
Boards. These boards can only be used in deep housing. The <+> and <-> buttons
are used for settings. The information field shows the number of possible analog
outputs.
Field Bus
Select whether the process bus is to be used or not. CAN option is dedicated only
for application designed by ABB switchgear companies.
Communication Interface
In the Communication Interface drop-down menu a field bus variation can be

selected. Depending on the type of field bus the parameters button is then activated.
75
Unit
Parameters
Click the Parameters... button and a dialog box is displayed depending on the
protocol selection. When SPA is selected, the REF 542plus slave address is required
and the network topology. When Modbus is selected, the first and the second port
addresses can be set. When IEC 60870-5-103 is selected, it is possible to change the
unit address, the baud rate and the ASDU type. When LON is used, only the unit
address can be set.
Base Unit
Configure the address of the configured REF 542plus base unit in Slave Address
text box under the Base Unit. This value can be different from the current one (refer
to Chapter Serial Port settings).
OK
Cancel
4.2.4. Analog inputs
Main Menu > Configure > Terminals > Analog Inputs displays the dialog box
below. The analog measurement inputs of REF 542plus can be configured and set
for the transducers in use. The settings are particularly important for the safe and
proper functioning of the unit.
76
Unit
A051681
Fig. 4.2.4.-1 Inputs tab in the Analog Inputs configuration dialog box
The Inputs tab displays the complete overview of the analog input settings: sensors,
nominal values, calculated values.
The Analog Input Board field represents the ID of the installed board in
REF 542plus. The REF 542plus Configuration Tool automatically configures the
sensor when the user selects the board from the dialog box below, by clicking the
Get group data button.
A051682
Fig. 4.2.4.-2 Analog Boards dialog box
Selecting the board from the list, the sensor type is displayed on the right. The
sensor acronyms are:
* CT − current transformer
* RC − current rogowsky coil
77
Unit
* VT − voltage transformer
* VS − voltage sensor
* CT 0.2 − current transformer with Input Nominal Value set to 0.2 A
The REF 542plus Analog Board definition is in Boards\REF542plusAI.xml.
It is always possible to configure manually all the sensors by double-clicking on the

correspondent row in the table, or by pressing the SPACEBAR on the keyboard.
The sensor dialog box is displayed below.
Every time a new analog board is selected from the analog boards
dialog box, all the channel values (RPV, RSV, and so on) are
overwritten with the default values.
The analog board name (for example 750170/814) is substituted by the

Custom board name when the user makes changes to the analog input
channels type.
For more information about the analog input configuration, refer to the REF 542plus
Protection Manual.
4.2.5. Analog Input 20 mA
When selecting Main Menu > Configure > Terminals > Analog Inputs 20mA,
Analog Inputs 20mA dialog opens. See Fig. 4.2.5.-1. The analog inputs 20mA can
be configured and set for the connected sensors. Settings are particularly important
for safe and proper functioning of the unit.
The analog input 20 mA module in REF 542plus is designed to work with passive
sensors only. The passive sensors are supplied by the module directly. The output
supply voltage is about 15 VDC. The standard interface of the sensors shall be 2-
wire designed and loop-powered. The loop resistance must be set so that the power
consumption of the sensors requires a loop current of 4 mA. The current range
between 4 mA and 20 mA is dedicated for the intended measurement range.
78
Unit
A051054
Fig. 4.2.5.-1 Example of the configuration dialog for setting the analog inputs 20mA
The dialog box is initially identical for all Analog Inputs 20mA. For this reason only
one input and its configuration is described. Information on the setting ranges of the
filtering parameters can be found beside the input fields.
Sensor type
In the Sensor type drop-down menu the user can choose between four possible
sensor types: Not used, Trafag, Density 4-20 mA and General purpose 4-20 mA.
The Thermal Overload Environment Temperature is only available, when the sensor
type Gen.-Purpose 4-20 mA is selected.
Density unit
In the Density unit drop-down menu the user can choose the unit identifier for the
density measurement to be visualized on the HMI when sensor type is Trafag or
Density 4-20mA. There are three possible density units: Kpa, Kg/m3 and Psi.
Measure unit
In case of a general purpose sensor the unit name must be edited through the
Measure unit text box. The text box is disabled when sensor type is Unused, Trafag
or Density 4-20mA. The string can be seven characters long at the most.
79
Unit
Measure name
Measure name is the string descriptor of the measurement acquired by the sensor. It
is what the user sees on the HMI Measurement Table. The name can be 20
characters long at the most.
Temperature name
Temperature name is the descriptor of the temperature measurement acquired by the

Trafag sensor. It is what the user sees on the HMI Measurement Table. If the Sensor
type is not Trafag the text box is disabled. The name can be 22 characters long at the
most.
Data value at 4 mA and 20 mA
Data values at 4 mA and 20 mA are the engineering values corresponding to the

current levels of 4 mA and 20 mA. The text box for setting this parameter is enabled
only in case of Sensor type density 4-20 mA and Gen. Pur. 4-20 mA. If Sensor type
is Unused or Trafag then the parameters are not used and the corresponding text
boxes are disabled. The unit is the one set through the dedicated parameter. The
resolution displayed below the data values represents the resolution used by the
device to scale the parameters to 16 bits values. The resolution is calculated
automatically by the REF 542plus Configuration Tool and it is applied
automatically to the approximation to the data values when the edit box looses the
focus.
Averaging time
The Averaging time parameter sets the width of the time window used to calculate
the average value. The Averaging time is expressed in minutes.
Filtering time
When a digital signal is extracted from an analog signal a debouncing operation

must be performed. The Filtering time is expressed in milliseconds.
4.2.6. Analog outputs 20 mA
The REF542plus Analog Outputs dialog box is displayed in Main Menu >
Configure > Terminals > Analog Outputs where the analog outputs on the
REF 542plus analog output board can be configured.
80
Unit
A051684
Fig. 4.2.6.-1 Configuration dialog box for the analog outputs
Because all analog outputs are configured in the same way, only one output is
described here. All setting options for an analog output can be found on one index
card.
Select a REF 542plus measured or calculated value from the drop-down list by
clicking the arrow < >. The value is then generated at the corresponding analog
output.
The selection list always shows all possible measured and calculated
values. In fact only the following values can be output:
Measured values applied to the analog inputs and
Calculated values required by a configured protection function
0 mA = and 4 mA =
In the 0 mA = and 4 mA text boxes the user can specify what multiple of the rated
value of a measured or calculated value is mapped to the initial value of the analog
output board. The initial value of the output range of the analog output changes here
depending on the mode marked. If 0 mA or 4 mA can be tapped at the analog
output, the current measured or calculated value is [-4.000 … +4.000] multiplied by
its rated value.
Setting range: -0.0000 … +4.0000

Default: +0.0000 (increment: 0.0001)
20 mA =
In the 20 mA = text box the user can specify what multiple of the rated value of a
measured or calculated value is mapped to the final value of the analog output
board. If 20 mA is generated at the analog output, the current measured or calculated
value is [-4.000 … +4.000] multiplied by its rated value.
81
Unit
Setting range: -4.0000 … +4.0000

Default: +0.0000 (increment: 0.0001)
Mode
Select the output mode in the Mode area. This sets the output range to which the
input range set above is mapped. The option with zero signal current allows a
continuous current to flow through the line from the analog output board to the
display device. This enables an error message to be generated by the display device
if no signal is received over the line. However, this limits the output range.
OK
Cancel
If the powerfactor cos phi is selected for the output, the meaning of the
text boxes is different:
The configuration-value of the 0 mA (4 mA) nominal value becomes

the minimal capacitive cos φ
The configuration value of the 20 mA nominal value becomes the

maximal inductive cos φ.
If cos φ is outside of the configured range, the output is 24 mA.
If cos φ is not available (I,U < 1% of nominal value), the output is 0

mA (4 mA).
See the following Fig. 4.2.6.-2 and Fig. 4.2.6.-3.
82
Unit
A051685
Fig. 4.2.6.-2 Configuration dialog box for the analog output of powerfactor cos φ
A051686
Fig. 4.2.6.-3 Examples for analog output of powerfactor cos φ
4.2.7. Single line diagram
The REF 542plus Display dialog box in Section 4.2.7.1. User controls of the LCD
editor is available in Main Menu > Configure > HMI > Single Line Diagram.
This editor is used to configure the single-line diagram displayed on the LCD in
standard operation. The editor is also used to configure the connection between the
single-line diagram and the switching device.
83
Unit
4.2.7.1. User controls of the LCD editor
A051687
Fig. 4.2.7.1.-1 Editor for configuring the single-line diagram
The elements labeled in the figure above are described in the following paragraphs.
Drawing field
This area represents the area of the LCD of the HMI control unit REF 542plus
usable for the single-line diagram. The single-line diagram configured here always
fits between the measured value display and the status line on the LCD.
Coordinates of the cursor position
When cursor is in the drawing field, the location coordinates are shown in the form
x, y.
84
Unit
Buttons
Close
The Close button closes the editor. The single-line diagram is automatically saved
with the configuration. When the editor is closed the user is prompted to save the
single-line diagram.
Import and Export
The Import and Export buttons offer the option of reusing a previously configured
single-line diagram. Usually, the single-line diagram is saved in the *.ref file as the
rest of the configuration. However, it could be useful to import in the current
configuration a previously saved single-line diagram. To do this the single-line
diagram must first be exported. After clicking on the appropriate button, a standard
dialog box for saving the file to be exported is displayed. The file name has the
ending *.lcu. If the user wishes to reuse or change a previously configured single-
line diagram, click the Import button. A standard dialog box in which the file to be
imported can be selected is displayed. The file name must have the ending *.lcu.
Single-line diagrams that were not prepared with the editor described
above cannot be imported.
Clear All
When clicking the Clear All button, all elements on the drawing field are deleted. If
the configuration has been previously saved, the drawing as it stands at this point is
saved with it.
Tools
The four buttons set the mode in which work on the drawing field is conducted. The
appearance of the cursor also depends on the mode.
85
Unit
Edit
Elements can be selected, moved and deleted in the editing mode. The editing
mode is always activated again after using other modes.
Symbol
Any symbol can be added and configured on the drawing field in the Symbol
mode.
Thin Line
Use the Thin Line mode to draw thin lines in the drawing field.
Thick Line
Use the Thick Line mode to draw thick lines in the drawing field.
Text Field
Use the Text Field mode to write text.
The exact usage of the buttons is explained in more detail after the editor controls
have been explained.
Check boxes
Enable Sloping Lines
When the Enable Sloping Lines check box is selected, diagonal lines can be drawn
on the drawing field as well as perpendicular and horizontal lines.
Block Moving
Selecting the Block Moving check box prevents unwanted movement of elements
on the drawing field. To move an element, hold down the SHIFT key. This key must
also be used for extending, shortening or changing the direction of lines.
Selected element
A selected element is shown inverted. All operations can only be conducted on the
selected element. For this reason only one element can be selected at a time.
86
Unit
Free Resources
The Free Resources area displays information on the number of symbols and lines
(the possible elements) that can still be drawn.
Marked Element
The Marked Element area displays information on the element that is to be selected.
Lines: coordinates of the start and finish points, the line thickness (thin/thick) and
the line length in pixels.
Switching objects: coordinates of the lower left corner, Field bus address and
comment for the function block that is represented.
Other symbols: coordinates of the left lower corner.
Cursor appearance
The cursor can appear differently depending on the specific mode in the drawing
field.
Standard appearance is shown when the cursor is not on any element.
Movement cursor is shown when the cursor is on an element. Click the left
mouse button to select the element.
Drag cursor is shown when the cursor is on the end of a selected line. The line
can then be shortened or lengthened by dragging with the left mouse button held
down.
Symbol cursor is used in the Symbol mode. Click the mouse to open the
configuration dialog box for a new symbol.
Line cursor is used in the Line mode. Hold the left mouse button down and drag
to draw perpendicular, horizontal or diagonal (if enabled) lines.
4.2.7.2. Working with the LCD editor
Select an element/deselect selection
To select a symbol or a line, click the left mouse button when the cursor is on them.
The selected symbol is shown inverted: the sizing handles at the ends of the line are
emphasized.
To deactivate a selection, click the left mouse button when the cursor is not on an
element in the drawing field.
87
Unit
Select sizing handle

1. Select a line.
2. The sizing handles are shown.
3. Move the cursor to the sizing handle and hold the left mouse button down. Drag
the sizing handle with the mouse.
OR:
1. Mark one or the other sizing handle by using the key combination CTRL
+SPACEBAR several times.
2. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to make very precise movements of
the sizing handle.
Open context-dependent pop-up menus
In addition to the options for conducting various operations described above, the
editor for the LCD also has content-dependent pop-up menus. Open pop-up menus
by clicking the right mouse button. The contents depend on where the cursor is on
the drawing field at that time (pop-up menus can only be opened there). A menu
beside the cursor opens in which various editing options can be selected. This offers
faster access to the various functions. All functions offered there can also be
accessed as described above.
To display a specific contextual menu, click the right mouse button when the cursor
is on an element (line, symbol or text) in the drawing field. The menu items depend
on the selected element. All the elements have the following commands: delete, to
delete the element and edit, to configure the element.
Some elements, for example the switching objects, has in addition the State menu
which can set the status of the selected element (for example closed, opened, in error
or moving).
Click the right mouse button when the cursor is not on an element and a pop-up
menu is displayed. The menu contains the following commands: Insert symbol, line
and text, Import, Export, Clear All, and Copy. The last command copies the bitmap
in the Windows clipboard. The other commands are the same as the dialog box
buttons.
Move element
Select the element and drag the mouse with the element while holding the left
mouse button down.
OR:
After selecting the element move it with the arrow keys on the keyboard.
88
Unit
Insert symbol
1. Click the symbol button.
2. Move the cursor to the wanted position for the symbol in the drawing field.
3. Click the left mouse button to open the symbol configuration dialog box.
Configure existing symbol
Move the cursor over the symbol and double-click the left mouse button. The
configuration dialog box opens.
Insert line
1. Click the thin line or thick line button.
2. Move the cursor in the drawing field to the wanted position for the beginning of
the line.
3. Click the left mouse button and hold it down to set the beginning point of the
line.
4. Drag the mouse with the button held down to the end point of the line.
5. Release the mouse button.
Configure existing line
Move the cursor over the line and double-click the left mouse button. The
configuration dialog box opens.
Delete element
1. Select the element that is to be deleted.
2. Click Delete on the keyboard.
3. The user is prompted to confirm or cancel the deletion.
Change line size

1. Select sizing handle.
2. Drag the mouse with the sizing handle while holding the left mouse button
down.
OR:
After selecting the sizing handle move it with the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Change the appearance of a switching object
Click on the switching object symbol while holding the CTRL key down. Every
switching object has four different appearances, which represent its switching status.
OR:
89
Unit
Select the switching object and change its appearance with the key combination
CTRL+SPACEBAR.
Select elements one after the other

1. Select an element
2. Use the keys CTRL+right arrow or CTRL+up arrow to select the next or the
previous element according to an internal sorting process.
Use the keys CTRL+left arrow or CTRL+down arrow to select the next or the
previous element in the opposite direction to the internal sorting process.
Copy drawing field to the clipboard
Use the INSERT key on the keyboard to copy the entire drawing field to the
clipboard as a two-color bitmap graphic.
4.2.7.3. Configuration dialog box for symbols
The configuration dialog box Set Symbol is displayed when a new symbol is added
or if it is opened as described in the previous Section 4.2.7.2. Working with the
LCD editor. The type of shapes depends on the standard selection: IEC or ANSI.
A051698
Fig. 4.2.7.3.-1 Configuration dialog box for symbols in the editor for the LCD
Shape
Click the arrow < > to open the drop-down menu Shape that displays optional
appearances of the symbols. A description and the dimensions of the image (height,
width) are adjacent to the image. In the case of the switching objects, please note
that only one of four possible images is shown.
90
Unit
Field Bus Address
Set the connection between the element on the LCD and the function chart in the
Field Bus Address drop-down menu. The selected symbol represents the switching
object with the corresponding Field bus address on the LCD. After clicking the
arrow that opens the list < >, the selection of possible Field bus addresses that
have been used in the function chart for switching objects is displayed. The
comment that can be entered in the configuration dialog box of that switching object
is adjacent.
The drop-down menu Field Bus Address is opened automatically when a symbol in
the Symbol list has been selected.
Position
The x and y coordinates are displayed at the lower left corner of the symbol. Other
coordinates can be entered in the Position text box to move the symbol.
Single Object/Combined Object
To select whether the wanted switching object is represented by one or two symbols,
choose Single Object or Combined Object option button. The second symbol can be
selected with the option buttons Earth Switch and Isolator. Only these two options
are available for the second symbol.
Example:
A 3-position switch (with some exceptions) can be shown using a

combination consisting of an earthing switch and an isolator.
Selectability
Select under Selectability how the switching object can be directly selected locally.
privileged The first switching object that is selected.

selectable This switching object can be selected. The sequence in which the
switching objects are selected is set internally. Only the switching
object that is selected first can be set (see above).
not selectable This switching object cannot be selected locally on the REF
542plus. It can only be addressed from the station control system.
OK
Cancel
91
Unit
4.2.7.4. Configuration dialog box for lines
The configuration dialog box Edit Line for lines is opened as already described in
the previous Section 4.2.7.3. Configuration dialog box for symbols.
A051699
Fig. 4.2.7.4.-1 Configuration dialog box for lines in the editor for the LCD
Start Position
Enter the x and y coordinates of the starting point of the line into the two text boxes.
The current values are displayed there when the dialog box is opened.
End Position
Enter the x and y coordinates of the end point of the line into the two text boxes. The
current values are displayed there when the dialog box is opened.
Line Width
Select whether the selected line should be drawn thick or thin. The current values
are displayed there when the dialog box is opened.
OK
Cancel
4.2.8. Display language
Main Menu > Configure > HMI > Display Language displays the dialog box
below. Select the language file from which the texts that is displayed on the LCD
display screen is read.
92
Unit
A051700
Fig. 4.2.8.-1 Configuration dialog box for selecting the language of the texts on the
LCD
The first part of the dialog box shows the current display language stored into the
configuration and the charset codepage. Old configuration is refreshed by selecting
the new display language and the correspondent codepage. For example when the
English string file is loaded the codepage Latin is chosen. Instead, for Russian string
file the Cyrillic codepage is used.
Choose New Display Language
Click the arrow < > to open a list of files. The file is selected depending on the
wanted language and the configuration used. The language English and German are
provided as default. Translation into other languages can be done easily by editing
the related .stc file.
OK
Cancel
The standard language file provided is english.stc. To change to

another language, this file needs to be translated correspondingly.
93
Unit
4.2.9. Char maps (For operation with HMI V4)
Main Menu > Configure > HMI > Char Maps displays the dialog box below.
With the dialog box it is possible to download the “font” (also called char map) used
by the LCD to display the texts to the device.
A051701
Fig. 4.2.9.-1 Configuration dialog box to handle font bitmaps and character map files
The list on the left contains the char bitmaps folder installed in the PC. It is possible
to add new bitmaps folder (for example for new languages). The REF 542plus does
not uses directly such bitmaps, but a generated binary file, called *.rfn.
As shown in Fig. 4.2.9.-2, the installation provides two *.rfn binary files. They are
generated from the installed (if selected during installation) bitmap folders.
These files can be generated clicking the Generate File On Disk button. The
generated files have the same name of the folder.
A051702
Fig. 4.2.9.-2 Installed files
The list on the right contains the *.rfn file already installed in the PC. Selecting a
character map file it is possible to download this binary file to the device where it is
used by the HMI to display the text.
It is always possible to retrieve the font file *.rfn from a REF 542plus device, by
clicking the Upload File From Device button. Depending on the version and on the
character set, it can overwrite an existing *.rfn file.
The folder and file names follow this convention:
<Codepage name>-<codepage>-<internal use>-<version>
94
Unit
For example “Hebrew-1255-1000-003” is the third version of the Hebrew char map.
The version in the file names is important in order to keep also the previous char
maps on disk whenever changes are applied. Otherwise the last generated or
uploaded char map file overwrites the existing one.
A051703
Fig. 4.2.9.-3 Installed bitmap files for Latin char set
A bitmaps folder contains the chars from ASCII code 32 to 255. A bitmap char is
8x8 pixels black and white. The normal background is white and the char/symbol is
black. In order to display a readable char the following rule must be followed: the
bitmap must be edited with a char of 5x7 pixels. The rest of the pixels can be used
by the HMI for special effects (underline, and so on).
The char bitmap file name must follow this rule:
<string>_xyz.bmp
The <string> can be the charset name, and it must not contain “_”. The digits “xyz”
instead represent the ASCII code of the char (always between 032 and 255).
A051704
Fig. 4.2.9.-4 Example of bitmap (Latin_057)
If the HMI V5 is applied, the provided Unicode fonts must be downloaded and
used. The following screenshot shows how to find the Unicode fonts.
95
Unit
A060425
Fig. 4.2.9.-5 Menu for downloading Unicode fonts
4.2.10. LED Bars
Main Menu > Configure > HMI > LED Bars displays the dialog box LED Bars.
With the dialog box it is possible to configure the three LED (light emitting diode)
bars on the HMI. It is possible to assign a defined signal to a LED bar and the label
shown aside.
A051705
Fig. 4.2.10.-1 Configuration dialog box LED bars
96
Unit
4.3. Function and configuration of the function blocks
This section describes all function blocks that can be added to the FUPLA or that are
already present in the FUPLA. The structure is adapted to the menu structure of the
Add menu in the function chart editor. Every description has a similar structure.
Description of the function blocks
In the following descriptions of the function blocks, a diagram of a function block is

followed by an explanation of its function, its connections and, if applicable, a
typical application. This is followed by a screenshot of the configuration dialog box
associated with the function block if it is not an information dialog box, which only
has the OK or Cancel buttons.
Finally, the various elements of the configuration dialog boxes are explained. If
input parameters are involved, the input range and its optional increment and the
default value are also given. To ensure that every function block has a complete
description, elements that occur repeatedly are always described.
Description of the switching objects
Only the sections where the switching objects are described have a different
procedure. They are preceded by an additional section that describes a selected
switching object in detail. This includes information on the appearance of a
switching object in the function chart and its configuration dialog box. All
descriptions are somewhat shorter in the sections on every single switching object.
Object number
The number on the left side, above every function block is the sequential number
(object number), which is assigned by the configuration software. It may be
assigned several times in the images of the function blocks. Every object number is
only assigned once in a correct application.
4.3.1. Control panel on the HMI control unit
Following sections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available
in Drawing Menu > Insert > Control Panel.
97
Unit
4.3.1.1. Indication LED
A051706
Fig. 4.3.1.1.-1 Function block Indication LED
Function
The Indication LED function block represents the configurable indication LED’s
adjacent to the LCD on the HMI as local control unit. This function block can be
used to address the LED’s from the FUPLA and appropriate indication texts can be
added.
Connections
The LEDs can be in one of four states depending on the wiring of the two inputs:
off, green, red and orange (amber). The indicated text depends on the color
displayed by the LED. The following Table 4.3.1.1.-1shows the corresponding
combinations.
Table 4.3.1.1.-1 Connections on the function block Indication LED

Color Green Input Red Input
Off 0 0
Green 1 0
Red 0 1
Amber 1 1
Eight LEDs on each of the four pages (totally 32 LEDs) can be addressed.
Typical application
Use of the signaling LED to receive the status indication for temperature supervision
of a motor. A green LED stands for example "OK“, an amber LED stands for
"critical status“ (with the starting signal of a protection function) and a red LED
stands for "fault: motor too hot“ (with the trip signal of a protection function).
Configuration
The following section describes several tabs in the Indication configuration dialog
box. In all the tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
98
Unit
OK
Cancel
General
A051707
Fig. 4.3.1.1.-2 General tab, Indication LED function block
Page number
Input of the number of the LED page that is to be configured.

Default: [number of the next LED that is not configured]
LED number
In the LED number drop-down menu, select the number of the LED that is to be
configured. The number is also put in the function block.
99
Unit

Default: Number of the next LED that is not configured
Texts for the Display
OFF
In the OFF text box, write the text that is displayed in the LCD after the scan of the
LED message texts when the LED is off. In the FUPLA, the text is displayed above
the function block.

Default: [Empty]
Green
In the Green text box, write the text that is displayed in the LCD, when the condition
is fulfilled. In the FUPLA, the text is displayed above the function block.

Default: [Empty]
Amber
In the Amber text box, write the text that is displayed in the LCD, when the
condition is fulfilled. In the FUPLA, the text is displayed above the function block.

Default: [Empty]
Red
In the Red text box, write the text that is displayed in the LCD, when the condition
is fulfilled. In the FUPLA, the text is displayed above the function block.

Default: [Empty]
100
Unit
Parameter
A051708
Fig. 4.3.1.1.-3 Parameter tab, Indication LED function block
Latch signal
The Latch signal check box must be selected if an acknowledgement is required

after the LED status (off, red, green or amber) has changed. If the reason for the
change of the LED state is still in effect, the acknowledgement has no effect.
Setting range: Selected/Not selected

Default: Not selected
Send SMS on transition to RED
The Send SMS on transition to RED check box must be selected if an SMS message
should be sent by the Web server (if enabled) whenever the LED turns to red.
Setting range: Selected/Not selected

Default: Not selected
101
Unit
Pins
A051709
Fig. 4.3.1.1.-4 Pins tab, Indication LED function block
On the Pins tab, you can see a list of connections on the function block and
information about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information
whether the pin is an input or an output of the function block. The connection
numbers 1 (on one input) or 2 (on one output) are displayed if the function block
still has not made connections.
4.3.1.2. Alarm LED
A051710
Fig. 4.3.1.2.-1 Function block Alarm LED
Function
The Alarm LED function block represents the alarm LED on the HMI control unit.
This enables it to be controlled from the FUPLA.
Connections
The function block connections are not labeled on the function block. They are
described as the upper and lower connection.
102
Unit
There are two options for switching the alarm LED on and off:
1. The LED is switched on if the upper connection is at logical 1 and the LED is
switched off if the upper connection is at logical 0.
OR
2. The LED is switched on if the lower connection receives a logical 1 signal and
the LED is switched off if there is no longer a logical 1 signal at the lower
connection.
AND
If the alarm is acknowledged at the REF 542plus control panel.
Typical application
The alarm LED is on if a power circuit-breaker OFF command has been generated
by a protection function being addressed and the power circuit-breaker has been
tripped.
Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
are displayed in the configuration dialog box. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2 (on one output) are displayed if the
function block still has not made connections. These inputs are then confirmed with
the OK button.
4.3.1.3. Alarm Reset
A051711
Fig. 4.3.1.3.-1 Function block Alarm Reset
Function
The Alarm Reset function block provides return confirmations on the alarm and
where from the alarm was acknowledged in the function chart.
Connections
ALARM output: Logical 1 if the alarm is still active and the ALARM LED is on
(even after an attempted acknowledgement of the alarm)
103
Unit
REMOTE output: Logical 1 impulse if acknowledged from the station control

system.
LOCAL output: Logical 1 impulse if acknowledged "locally“.
Typical application
The signals received can be used to reset flip-flops if an alarm (for example power
circuit-breaker off) is acknowledged at the HMI control unit of REF 542plus.
Configuration
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) are displayed if the
function block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with
the OK button.
4.3.1.4. LR-Key
A051712
Fig. 4.3.1.4.-1 Function block LR-Key
Function
The LR-Key function block provides information on the position of the “local/
remote“ key switch on the REF 542plus control panel at both outputs.
104
Unit
Connections
Table 4.3.1.4.-1 Connection at the function block Local - Remote

Connection Local Remote
No control (OFF) 0 0
Remote 0 1
Local 1 0
Local & Remote 1 1
Typical application
A reconfirmation of the key switch setting that can also be forwarded to a substation
automation system is possible with the LR-Key function block. This enables
switching authorizations to be assigned, for example no switching operations
permitted at the HMI control unit.
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.1.5. Emergency Buttons
A051713
Fig. 4.3.1.5.-1 Function block Emergency Buttons
Function
The Emergency Buttons function block represents the two Emergency Switch Off
buttons on the HMI control unit. If a switch is actuated, a logical 1 is displayed at
the corresponding function block output.
Connections
LEFT output: Logical 1 is displayed if the left key on the HMI control unit is
actuated.
105
Unit
Both outputs: Logical 1 is displayed if the both keys on the HMI control unit are
actuated.
Typical application
A typical application for the emergency buttons is an actuation of the tripping of the
circuit-breaker with both emergency switches.
Configuration
are displayed in the configuration dialog box. Inputs are not possible. The
connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) are displayed if the
the OK button.
4.3.1.6. HMI Command
A051714
Fig. 4.3.1.6.-1 Function block HMI Command
Function
The HMI Command function block represents a command launched by the user via
the HMI control unit menu. When the user selects the command from the HMI
menu, then the output of the function block is set for one-FUPLA-cycle to logical 1.
The name of the HMI menu (visible in the HMI menu) is set into the configuration
dialog box of the function block.
Connections
Output: Logical 1 for a FUPLA cycle if the command is selected.
Configuration
The unique parameter is the command name.
106
Unit
A051715
Fig. 4.3.1.6.-2 Configuration dialog box of the function block HMI Command
4.3.1.7. Enable/Disable
A051716
Fig. 4.3.1.7.-1 Function block Enable/Disable
Function
The new constant block, also called Enable/Disable, produces a 0 or 1 depending on

the user’s settings. The user can change the constant value via LD HMI or via
communication board. It is possible to instantiate till 40 Enable/Disable function
blocks.
Connections
Output: Logical value of the constant.
107
Unit
Configuration
The configuration dialog box allows the user to choose the Field bus address (used
for the communication board), the name of the constant (used for the HMI), the
constant value, and the flag in order to enable the parameter on the HMI.
A051717
Fig. 4.3.1.7.-2 Configuration dialog box of the function block Enable/Disable
4.3.2. Binary IO (switching objects)
This section describes the function blocks that are available in Drawing Menu >
Insert > Binary IO.
The function blocks described here are switching objects. A switching object
represents one or more combined binary inputs and outputs in the function chart.
Instead of function chart the abbreviation FUPLA is used in the following. A
switching object enables signals at the binary inputs to be used in the FUPLA. For
example, the message from a sensor that monitors the spring of a circuit-breaker or
the position messages of a switching device.
A switching object also enables signals to be sent to the binary outputs from the
FUPLA. For example, a switching command can be sent to a switching device in
this way. Both power and signal outputs can be addressed in case of outputs.
All the switching objects described in the following sections have identically
structured FUPLA displays and configuration dialog boxes. To clarify the principle,
a switching object 2-1 is described below. However, all elements of the FUPLA
display and of the configuration dialog box are explained with the individual
switching objects. The explanation there is somewhat shorter.
108
Unit
The switching object labeling already shows the principal structure. An example of
a switching object 2-1 can be seen in the next figure. The above mentioned
switching object represents the logical combination of two binary outputs and one
binary input.
A051718
Fig. 4.3.2.-1 Example of a switching object in the function chart (Fupla symbol)
Number of the switching object
The sequential number is displayed in the upper left side of the function block in the
FUPLA. It is automatically assigned by the configuration software and updated
when function blocks are deleted or new ones are added. It is used to localize the
relevant function block in the event of error messages from the configuration
software. It is also required in the internal processing of the function blocks in
REF 542plus.
Connection comment/connection number
Every connection drawn in the function chart is assigned a connection number. A

comment is also attached to the connection. Comment and number are displayed
with every connection in the function chart and the connection number is also
displayed in the configuration dialog boxes of the connected function blocks.
Number and type of the physical input
Physical binary inputs from the primary system are always placed in the right half of
the FUPLA display of a switching object. Their connections are also on the right.
The signal that is displayed to the physical input can be tapped at the relevant
connection. The type (BI - binary input and so on) and the input number of the
physical input are also shown in the function chart display.
Number and type of the physical output
Physical binary outputs to the primary system are always placed in the left half of
the FUPLA display of a switching object. Their connections are also on the left. A
logical signal to the appropriate connection starts, if authorized, an output relay
switching operation. To enable this, a logical 1 must be at the IL input and a logical
109
Unit
0 at the BL input. Otherwise, the interlocking status LED turns to red or the
switching operation is suppressed. The type (OP - Open or CL - close and so on)
and the channel number of the physical input are also displayed in the FUPLA.
Pulse output
The connection pulse output is available only with switching objects that represent
at least one physical input and output. Because most switchgears can only switch
with short impulses, a closing time of 0 to 65000 ms is provided. This logical 1 is
canceled in case of switching objects with a limit stop if a return confirmation
regarding the successful switching operation has been transmitted over a binary
input of the switching object. Switching objects have a limit stop if they represent at
least one physical input and output.
Limit stop
If inputs and outputs are combined in one switching object and internally
interconnected, the function block includes a limit stop. A limit stop operates when
the wanted position of a switch is reached and the reconfirmation is received via a
binary input. The switching impulse (generated at P) is canceled, even if the
configured impulse length has not yet been reached.
The connection time monitor output Time> is available only with switching objects
that represent at least one physical input and output. A logical 1 is displayed at the
connection if the impulse time (at pulse output P) has expired and a reconfirmation
regarding the successful switching operation is not received by the binary input.
Interlocking input
The interlocking input (interlocking) connection is available only with switching

objects that represent at least one physical output. To enable a switching operation,
there must be a logical 1 at the connection IL. If a switching operation is started and
the interlocking input IL is at logical 0, an error message "interlocking violation“ is
generated and displayed at the REF 542plus control panel using the LED provided
for that purpose (interlocking status LED).
Blocking input
The connection blocking input (blocking) is available only with switching objects
that represent at least one physical output. If a logical 1 is applied to this connection,
a switching operation can be blocked. A logical 1 at the BL connection places the
function block out of service. If the interlocking input IL is set to logical 1, a
switching operation would be allowed. However, this can be blocked by a logical 1
signal at the connection BL. If a signal for the switching operation is given to the
connection of the physical output, no switching takes place and an "interlocking
violation" error message (interlocking status LED) is also generated.
110
Unit
Field bus address
The combined inputs can be addressed under a Field bus address as shown in the
figure below, in which a configuration dialog box is displayed after double clicking
the FUPLA symbol. The Field bus address is to be selected in the configuration
dialog box.
A051719
Fig. 4.3.2.-2 Example of the switching object configuration dialog box
Furthermore there are:
Number and type of the physical input
Enter a channel number for the physical binary inputs from the primary system.
Setting range: 0… [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Filtertime [ms]
Enter a period in ms during which an input signal at the binary input must be applied
to be detected as such. The function block-dependent filter time entered here is
added to the general filter time, which is specified in the configuration dialog box
REF 542plus Global Settings, and to the hardware filter time, which is set by the
design of the binary input/output board.
hardware filter time + general filter time = total filter time
111
Unit
Number and type of physical output
Enter a channel number for the physical binary outputs to the primary system.
Setting range: 0… [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Note the different relay types.
Imp.length [ms]
Because most switchgears can only switch with short impulses, a closing time of 0
to 65000 ms can be written in the configuration dialog box under impulse length,
which has exactly the same effect on the current output. This "extended“ switching
signal is generated as logical 1 at the pulse output P connection. This logical 1 is
canceled in the case of switching objects with a limit stop if a return confirmation
regarding the successful switching operation has been transmitted over a binary
input of the switching object. Switching objects have a limit stop if they represent at
least one physical input and output.
No. of cycles
Enter the value of the mechanical switching cycle counter at the circuit-breaker in
the No. of cycles text box. The value entered in the No. of cycles text box is the
starting value of the switching cycle counter in REF 542plus. When the
configuration is exported from REF 542plus to the PC, the current value of the
switching cycles is entered to this position.
In this program version the text box is only used by the Switching
Object 2-2 if a circuit-breaker is applied. It has no function with all
other switching objects.
Field bus address
The Field bus address is shown at the bottom left side of the FUPLA beside the
switching object: "Adr.: XX“. It is automatically assigned in the configuration
dialog box, so every Field bus address is only used once. Addresses that are freed
(when a function block is deleted) are assigned again by the configuration software.
As an alternative the Field bus address can also be assigned in the configuration
dialog box with the field bus selection list. The selection list is displayed by clicking
the < > button.
112
Unit
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)

Default: The next free Field bus address
Pins
Under Pins in the Switching Object dialog box is a list of connections on the
function block with adjacent connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) and 2 (on one output) are displayed if the function block still has no
connections made.
Setting for switching object-specific special function
Check boxes for activating or deactivating functions appear here. Further

information can be found in the switching object description.
Events
The Events button cannot be selected if the transmission of events is generally

suppressed in the REF 542plus Global Settings. Click the Events button to display a
dialog box where the events are released that are then sent to the station automation
system. The default is for all events to be released for sending.
An event that has been sent is a message to the station control system regarding a
change in status. Depending on the function block type, different events can be
generated and released. The input can be accepted or canceled in the dialog box with
the OK and Cancel buttons.
Comment
Enter comments regarding the switching object in the Comment text box. The
comment is also shown on the upper left side of the switching object in the function
chart.

Default: [Empty]
OK
Cancel
113
Unit
4.3.2.1. Switching Object 0-1
A051720
Fig. 4.3.2.1.-1 Function block Switching Object 0-1
Function
The signal of a physical binary input is made available in the Switching object 0-1
function block.
Connections
BI output: Connection at which the binary input signal of the represented physical
input can be tapped.
Table 4.3.2.1.-1 Connection labels switching object 0-1

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog box configuration dialog box
Bl Input Bl
Typical application
A typical application for the switching object 0-1 is a connection of a gas pressure
monitor that sends a logical 1 or 0 to the relevant binary input.
114
Unit
Configuration
A051721
Fig. 4.3.2.1.-2 Configuration dialog box Switching Object 0-1
Field bus address
The Field bus address is automatically assigned so that every Field bus address is
used only once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selected from the
list, which is displayed by clicking the < > button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 …127 (increment: 1)

Default: Next free Field bus address
Input No. [Name] (once per represented input)
In the Input No. [Name] text box enter the number of the physical input to be
represented. The assigned number, underlined in white, is also shown in the function
block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Filtertime [ms] (once per represented input)
In the Filtertime[ms] text box enter the time during which a signal must be applied
at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical signal. The input filter time is
added to the hardware and to the general filter time.
115
Unit
Comment
Enter comments (for example purpose) on the switching object in the Comment text
box. The text is also displayed in the FUPLA on the left side above the switching
object.

Default: [Empty]
Pins
Under Pins is a list of connections on the function block with adjacent connection
number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) are
displayed if the function block still has no connections made.
OK
Cancel
Events
Click the Events button to open a dialog box. Select (activate) the events that are
sent to the station control system over the field bus. The button is available only
when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.
A051722
116
Unit
Function
The signal of three physical binary inputs is made available in the Switching Object
0-3 function block. All connections are addressed over one Field bus address.
Connections
EARTH, OPEN and LINE outputs: Connections at which the binary input signals of
the various represented physical inputs can be tapped.

EARTH Input No. earth Bl earth
OPEN Input No. open Bl open
LINE Input No. line Bl line
Typical application
Position a confirmation signal from a manually operated switching device, for

example a 3-position isolator.
Configuration
A051723
117
Unit
Field bus address
only used once. As an alternative, the Field bus address can also be selected from
the list, which is displayed by clicking the < > button.

In the Input No. [Name] text box enter the number of the physical input that is to be
represented. The assigned number, underlined, underlined in white, is also shown in
the function block adjacent to the connection.

Default: 0
In the Filtertime [ms] text box enter the time during which a signal must be applied
Comment
In the Comment text box enter comments (for example purpose) on the switching
object. The text is also displayed in the FUPLA on the left side above the switching
object.

Default: [Empty]
Pins
OK
Cancel
118
Unit
Events
A051724
Function
Switching Object 1-0 actuates a physical binary output from the function chart.
Connections
IL input is an interlocking input. A switching operation can only be conducted if

there is a logical 1 signal.
BL input is a blocking input. If there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching

operations of the represented output are blocked.
PO input is a signaling input for a physical output. A logical 1 signal initiates, if

enabled, an output relay switching operation.
P output is a pulse output. A logical 1 can be tapped for the duration of the output
relay switching operation.

PO Output No. PO active
IL - IL
P - Pulse
BL - BL
Typical application
Use as output for the contact signaling of for example general start.
119
Unit
Configuration
A051725
Field bus address
only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selected from the
list which is displayed by clicking the < > button.

Output No. [Name] (once per represented output)
Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented in the Output No.
text box. The assigned number, underlined, underlined in white, is also shown in the
function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Imp.length [ms] (once per represented output)
Enter the maximum duration of the output relay switching operation in the Imp.
length [ms] text box. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation
ends before if necessary.
120
Unit
No. of cycles (once per represented output)
Not used.
Comment
object.

Default: [Empty]
Pins
Use Two Step Switch Command
If two-stage switching is activate, a switching object must be selected with a

command from the station control system and switched with a 2nd command. This
option does not refer to local switching.
OK
Cancel
Events
121
Unit
A051726
Function
Switching Object 1-1 function block actuates a physical binary output from the
function chart. The return confirmation is received via the physical binary input,
which can be tapped in the function chart.
Connections

there is a logical 1 signal here.

PO input is a signaling input for a physical output. A logical signal to this function
block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented
output relay.
BI output is a signal output at which the binary input signal of the represented
physical input can be tapped.
Time > output is a time monitor output. If a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of Connection label in the
the configuration dialog box configuration dialog box
IL - IL
BL - BL
PO Output No. PO Active
TIME> - Time>
BI Input No. Bl
P - Pulse
122
Unit
Typical application
A typical application for the Switching Object 1-1 is using the physical output to
actuate a tension motor for the spring of a power circuit-breaker. The return
confirmation over the physical input provides information on the spring status.
Configuration
A051727
Field bus address
The Field bus address is automatically assigned so that every Field bus is only used
once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selected from the list,
which is displayed by clicking the < > button.

Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented in the Output No.
text box. The assigned number, underlined, underlined in white, is also shown in the
123
Unit

Default: 0
length [ms] text box. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation
Not used.
Enter the number of the physical input that is to be represented in the Input No. text
box. The assigned number, underlined, underlined in white, is also shown in the

Default: 0
In the Filtertime [ms] text box enter the time during which a signal must be applied
Comment
Enter comments (for example purpose) on the switching object in the Comments
text box. The text is also displayed in the FUPLA on the left side above the
switching object.

Default: [Empty]
Pins
124
Unit
If two-stage switching is activated, a switching object must be selected with a

OK
Cancel
Events
A051728
Function
Switching Object 1-2 function block actuates a physical binary output from the
function chart. The return confirmation is received via two physical binary inputs,
Connections

there is a logical 1 here.

125
Unit
PO input is a signaling input for a physical output. A logical signal to this function
block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented
output relay.
OP, CL outputs are signal outputs at which the binary input signal of the represented

IL - IL
BL - BL
PO Output No. PO Active
TIME> - Time>
OP Input No. open BI open
CL Input No. closed BI closed
P - Pulse
126
Unit
Configuration
A051729
Field bus address

Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented to the Output No.
text box. The assigned number, underlined in white, is also shown in the function

Default: 0
length [ms] text box. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation is
ended before if necessary.
127
Unit
Not used.
box. The assigned number is also shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.

Default: 0
In the Filtertime [ms] textbox, enter the time during which a signal must be applied
Comment
box. The text is also displayed in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.

Default: [Empty]
Pins
Indicate Intermediate Position
If this check box is selected, an intermediate setting is displayed on the LCD screen
during the switching operation. This enables a visual confirmation of the switching
operation on the LCD. Otherwise only the initial and final positions are displayed
during a switching operation.

128
Unit
OK
Cancel
Events
A051730
Function
Switching Objects 2-1 function block actuates two physical binary outputs from the
function chart. The return confirmation is received via the physical binary input,
Connections

there is a logical 1 here.

OP, CL inputs are signaling inputs for one physical output each. A logical signal to
this function block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of
the represented output relay.
129
Unit
BI output is a signal output at which the binary input signal of the represented
P outputs are pulse outputs, one for each represented output. A logical 1 can be
tapped for the duration of the switching operation of the output relay.

IL - IL open
IL - IL closed
BL - BL
OP Output No. open PO open
CL Output No. close PO closed
TIME> - Time>
BI Input No. BI
P - Pulse open
P - Pulse close
Configuration
A051731
130
Unit
Field bus address

Setting range for physical Every text box exists once per represented output.
outputs:
Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented to the Output No.
text box. The assigned number, underlined in white, is also shown in the function

Default: 0
length [ms] text box. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation is
ended before if necessary.
Not used.
box. The assigned number is also shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.

Default: 0
In the Filtertime [ms] text box, enter the time during which a signal must be applied
Comment
box. The text is also displayed in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
131
Unit

Default: [Empty]
Pins

OK
Cancel
Events
A051732
132
Unit
Function
Switching Objects 2-2 function block actuates two physical binary outputs from the
FUPLA. The reconfirmation is received via two physical binary inputs, which can
be defined in the FUPLA. This switching object can also be used to actuate a circuit-
breaker.
Connections
IL inputs are interlocking inputs, one per represented output. A switching operation
can be conducted if a logical 1 is here.
BL input is a locking input. If there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching

OP, CL inputs (left) are FUPLA inputs for actuating each time the related physical
output. A logical signal to this function block input starts, if enabled, a
corresponding switching operation of the related output relay.
SYNCH. input is not a synchronized input. A closing operation is only allowed if a

logical 0 signal is present at the input.
RES. GRANT input is a reservation grant input. A switching operation is only

possible, if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in
connection with LON communication per LAG (LON Application Guide) version
1.4 as confirmation the reservation request.
OP, CL outputs (right): Channel definition of the signal outputs coming from the
status information of the primary switching device.
P outputs are pulse outputs, one per represented output. A logical 1 can be tapped
for the duration of the switching operation of the output relay
DEF OPEN output is a defined open output, which generates a logical 1 signal if the
switching device has reached the definitive open position.
DEF CLOSE output is a defined close output, which generates a logical 1 signal if
the switching device has reached the definitive close position.
DEF POS output is a defined Position output, which generates a logical 1 signal if
the switching device has reached the definitive open or closed position.
ERROR POS output is an error position output, which generates a logical 1 signal if
both open and close output has a logical 1 signal or if the switching operation is
interrupted by overreaching the time monitor.
133
Unit
RES. REQ output is a reservation request output, which is normally used in

connection with LON communication per LAG 1.4. Before starting the switching
operation, a reservation request must be done by generating a logical 1 signal at this
output.

IL - IL open
IL - IL closed
BL - BL
OP (left) Output No. open PO open
CL (left) Output No. close PO closed
SYNCH. - NOT Synchronized
RES. GRANT - Reservation Granted
TIME OUT - Time Limit Expired
OP (right) Input No. open -
CL (right) Input No. close -
BI Input No. BI
P - Pulse pin open
P - Pulse pin close
DEF. OPEN - Defined open
DEF. CLOSE - Defined Closed
DEF. POS - Def Position
ERROR POS - Error Position
TIMEOUT - Time Limit Expired
RES. REQ - Reservation Request
Typical application
A typical application is the use of the binary outputs to actuate a motor-driven

isolator. The position status confirmation signal is received via the two binary
inputs.
Configuration
The following section describes several tabs in the Switching Object 2-2
configuration dialog box. In all the tabs there are OK or Cancel buttons.
OK
134
Unit
Cancel
General
A051733
Fig. 4.3.2.7.-2 General tab, function block Switching Object 2-2
Field bus address

Comment
object.
135
Unit

Default: [Empty]
Kind of switching device
Select the check box corresponding to the switching device used.
Options
Under Options select the option required for displaying the switching operation on
the LCD:
Indicate intermediate position
If the Indicate intermediate position check box is selected, an intermediate setting is

displayed on the LCD screen during the switching operation. This enables a visual
return confirmation of the switching operation on the LCD. Otherwise only the
initial and final positions are displayed during a switching operation.
Enable two step command
If the Enable two step command check box is selected, two-stage switching is
activated. The switching object must be selected with a command from the station
automation system and switched with a 2nd command. This option does not refer to
local switching.
Invert inputs
If the Invert inputs check box is selected, the logical signal of the inputs are is
inverted.
Open/Close activated by
Select the signal used for the switching operation.
136
Unit
Outputs
A051734
Fig. 4.3.2.7.-3 Outputs tab, function block Switching Object 2-2
Output Open
Output
In the Output text box enter the number of the physical output that is to be
represented. The assigned number is also shown in the function block adjacent to
the connection.
Setting range: 0 … 27 [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Pulse length [ms]
In the Pulse length [ms] text box enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit interrupts the switching operation
if necessary.

Default: 100
137
Unit
Output Close
Output
In the Output text box enter the number of the physical output that is to be
the connection.
Setting range: 0 … 27 [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Pulse length [ms]
In the Pulse length [ms] text box enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit interrupts the switching operation
if necessary.

Default: 100
Switch cycles
In the Switch cycles text box enter the number of switching cycle during the
reconfiguration of the REF 542plus device.

Default: 0
138
Unit
Inputs
A051735
Fig. 4.3.2.7.-4 Inputs tab, function block Switching Object 2-2
Position Indication: Open
Input [Name]
In the Input text box enter the number of the physical input that is to be represented.
The assigned number is shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.

Default: 0
Filter time [ms]
In the Filter time text box enter the time during which a signal must be applied at the
physical binary input to be detected as a logical signal. The input filter time is added
to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Default: 100
Position Indication: Close
Input [Name]
In the Input text box enter the number of the physical input that is to be represented.
The assigned number is shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
139
Unit

Default: 0
Filter time [ms]
In the Filter time text box enter the time during which a signal must be applied at the

Default: 100
Response time
In the Response time text box enter the maximum duration of the time for the
granting the reservation.

Default: 100
Synchron time
In the Synchron time text box enter the maximum duration of the time for the
synchronization of the closing operation.

Default: 100
140
Unit
Events
A080364
Fig. 4.3.2.7.-5 Events tab, function block Switching Object 2-2
The main part in the tab is the list of events. The channel number over which the
events are sent is shown in the left column near to the check box. To enable the
individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block Power Factor Controller must also be enabled.
Mark the adjacent check box so the event is generated and sent as required.
Set All
Click the Set All button to select, generate and send all events as required.
Clear All
Click the Clear All button to clear the selection.
Set Default
Click the Set Default button to use the default configuration for events. The default
configuration for events for each function object is defined in the associated *.rce
file.
141
Unit
Save Default
Click the Save Default button to save the checked events in the associated *.rce file.
Event Masks E15 … E0 and E31 … E16
The selecting of events is also possible under Event Masks. The input must be in
hexadecimal code. Refer to the following Table 4.3.2.7.-2 for the events E0 to E15.
The input for the events from E16 to E31 is in principle similar. The events E28 to
E31 are not used in this function block. If you select the check boxes in the list you
can read the hexadecimal code in the text boxes.
Table 4.3.2.7.-2 shows an overview of the events of the function block Unbalanced
Load Protection.
Table 4.3.2.7.-2 Switching Object 2-2

10 E0 Moving E4 Error
10 E1 Input opened E2 Input closed
10 E5 Output opened E6 Output closed
10 E7 End position not reached started E8 End position not reached back
10 E9 Output 2 opened E10 Output 2 closed
10 E15 Blocked inactive E16 Blocked active
10 E17 Interloced inactive E18 Interloced active
10 E19 Synch. Bypass inactive E20 Synch. Bypass active
10 E21 Selected back E22 Selected started
10 E23 Bypass inactive E24 Bypass active
10 E26 Select confirmation positive E27 Select confirmation negative
10 E28 Execution confirmation positive E29 Execution confirmation negative
10 E30 Execution termination positive E31 Execution termination negative
142
Unit
Pins
A051737
Fig. 4.3.2.7.-6 Pins tab, function block Switching Object 2-2
In the Pins tab, the user can see a list of connections on the function block and
information about the wire number connected to the pin is available. There is also
information regarding whether the pin is an input or an output of the function block.
function block still has no connections made.
4.3.2.8. Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
A051742
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-1 Function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
This switching object can only be used with the input/output board
with solid state relays. One switching object 2-2 H-Bridge or 4-4 H-
Bridge can be used in the application per board.
143
Unit
Function
The Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge function block is used to actuate four binary
physical outputs, which are specially designed for the motor control unit. The
required return confirmations are received via the three physical binary inputs. Only
two of the four physical outputs in use can be actuated. The other two are used to
implement the wanted functions and are actuated internally.
Connections
can be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

LINE, EARTH inputs (left) are signaling inputs for one physical output each. A
logical signal to this function block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding
switching operation of the represented output relay. The unlabelled inputs cannot be
influenced; their function is implemented over the relay circuitry.
RES. GRANT inputs are reservation grant inputs. A switching operation is only
possible if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in
connection with LON communication per LAG 1.4 as confirmation of the
reservation request.
LINE, EARTH outputs (right) are signal outputs at which the binary input signal of
the represented physical input can be tapped.
PP outputs are pulse outputs, one per represented output. A logical 1 can be tapped
for the duration of the switching operation of the output relay.
RES. REQ output is a reservation request output, which is normally used in

output.
Table 4.3.2.8.-1 Connection labels Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge

IL (EARTH) - IL earth
IL (LINE) - IL line
EARTH (left) Earth Earth
LINE (left) Line Line
BL - BL
144
Unit

EARTH (right) Input No. earth BI earth
LINE (right) Input No. line BI line
RES. GRANT - Reservation granted
TIME > - Timeout
VALID - Valid Position
Typical application
This switching object can be used to control a motor-driven transfer switch without
an intermediate setting. This functions with special circuitry of two relays on the
binary input/output board with solid state relays.
Configuration
The following section describes several tabs in the Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
dialog box. In all tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
145
Unit
General
A051743
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-2 General tab , function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
Field bus address

Comment
switching object.

Default: [Empty]
Options
the LCD:
146
Unit

displayed on the LCD screen during the switching operation.
If the Enable two step command check box is selected, the two-stage switching is
activated and a switching object must be selected with a command from the station
local switching.
Invert inputs
If the Invert inputs check box is selected, the logical signal of the inputs is inverted.
Parameter
A051744
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-3 Parameters tab, function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
Brake Time
In the Brake Time text box enter a time in ms for which the motor windings are
short-circuited to brake the motor after reaching the end position.
147
Unit
Setting range: 0 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)

Default: 100
Waiting Time
In the Waiting Time text box enter a time in ms during which no switching
command can be sent to prevent overloading the transistors on the input/output
board and the motor.
Setting range: 2 000 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)

Default: 2 000
MaxTimeToGrant
In the MaxTimeToGrant text box enter a time in ms during which the reservation of
the switching operation in connection with the LON Communication per LAG 1.4 is
granted.
Outputs
A051745
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-4 Outputs tab, function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
No. of Cycles (available twice)
Not used.
148
Unit
Pulse Length
In the Pulse Length text box enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation
Inputs
A051746
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-5 Inputs tab, function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
Input Settings Line/Earth
The number of the represented physical output is a fixed assignment.

Default: 0
In the Input No. [Name] text box enter the number of the physical input to be
the connection.
149
Unit
Setting range: 0 …42 [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Filtertime [ms] (once per represented output)
In the Filtertime [ms] enter the time during which a signal must be applied at the
Events
A051747
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-6 Events tab, function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
Set All
Clear All
Click the All button to clear the selection.
Set Default
Click the Set Default button to use the default configuration for events. The events 0
... 7, 18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are selected.
150
Unit
hexadecimal code. Refer to the following table for the events E0 to E15. The input
for the events from E16 to E31 is in principle similar. The events E28 to E31 are not
used in this function block. If you select the check boxes in the list you can read the
hexadecimal code in the text boxes.
The following Table 4.3.2.8.-2 shows an overview of the events of the function
block Unbalanced Load Protection.
Table 4.3.2.8.-2 Switching Object 2-2

8 E0 Switch Position Intermediate E4 Switch Position Error
8 E1 Switch Position Open E2 Switch Position Closed
8 E9 Command timeout inactive E10 Command timeout active
8 E13 Interlocking error left E14 Interlocking error right
8 E15 Blocked inactive E16 Blocked active
8 E17 Interlocked inactive E18 Interlocked active
8 E21 Selected inactive E22 Selected active
8 E23 Interlocking bypass inactive E24 Interlocking bypass active
8 E26 Select confirmation positive E27 Select confirmation negative
8 E28 Execution confirmation positive E29 Execution confirmation negative
8 E30 Execution termination positive E31 Execution termination negative
Pins
A051748
Fig. 4.3.2.8.-7 Pins tab, function block Switching Object 2-2 H-Bridge
151
Unit
4.3.2.9. Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
A051749
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-1 Function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
This switching object can only be used with the binary input output
board with solid state relays. One switching object 2-2 H-Bridge or 4-4
H-Bridge can be used in the application per board.
Function
The function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge is used to actuate four binary
physical outputs, which are specially designed for the motor control unit. The
required return confirmations are received via the five physical binary inputs. The
function block itself assumes the subsequent sequential control.
The VALID signaling output signals a valid position of the 3-position switch:
* Earth switch closed
* Intermediate setting (earth switch and line open)
* Line opened.
The valid position is reached when the pulse outputs are logical 0 and the binary
inputs signal is in one of the three positions above.
The binary input SUP/earth switch supervision enables sensors that also supervise
the all-pole correct earthing to be connected. If this binary input is not used, the
connection pin on the function block must be set to logical 1 or connected with the
earth switch OFF connection pin.
152
Unit
Connections
can be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

BO: Earth switch ON/OFF, BO: Line ON/OFF inputs (left) are signaling inputs for
one physical output each. A logical signal to this function block input starts, if
enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output relay. The
unlabelled inputs cannot be influenced; their function is implemented over the relay
circuitry.
TIME> output is a time monitor output. If a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
RES. GRANT inputs are reservation grant inputs. A switching operation is only
possible if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in
connection with LON communication per LAG 1.4 as confirmation of the
reservation request.
BI: Earth switch ON/OFF, BI: Line ON/OFF outputs (right) are signal outputs at
which the binary input signal of the represented physical input can be tapped.
PP RIGHT/PP LEFT outputs are pulse outputs, one per represented output. A
logical 1 can be tapped for the duration of the switching operation of the output
relay PP RIGHT is the pulse output for the busbar−intermediate setting−earth
movement direction and PP LEFT is the pulse output for the earth−intermediate
setting−busbar movement direction.
VALID output is a signaling output. If a logical 1 can be tapped here, the 3-position
switch has reached a valid position.
SUP is a signaling output for a physical input. It is used for additional supervision of
the position earth switch all-pole closed.
RES. REQ outputs are reservation request outputs, which are normally used in
output.
153
Unit
Table 4.3.2.9.-1 Connection labels switching object 4-4 H-Bridge

BL - Block
IL - IL close Earth
IL - IL open earth
IL - IL close line
IL - IL open line
BO: Earthswitch ON Earth close Close earth
BO: Earthswitch OFF Earth open Open earth
BO: Line ON Line close Close line
BO: Line OFF Line open Open line
PP right - PP right
PP left - PP left
TIME > - Timeout
VALID - Valid Position
BI: Earth switch ON Earth closed BI Earth closed
BI: Earth switch OFF Earth opened BI Earth opened
BI: Line ON Line closed BI Line opened
BI Line OFF Line opened BI line closed
SUP Earth switch supervision Earth supervision
Typical application
The Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge function block enables a 3-position switch to be
actuated with a motor drive. Additional auxiliary relays for activating and
deactivating the motor are not required. Information on the switch status is received
via three freely configurable binary inputs. The switching object assumes the
subsequent control sequences:
* Checks the interlock conditions
* Switches on pole reversal relay, depending on selection
* Switches on motor relay
* Switches off motor relay after reaching the end position
* Brakes motor by short circuiting the motor windings
* Activates timing circuit for dead time
Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge functions with special circuitry of two relays on the
binary input/output board with conventional relays.
A 3-position isolator is represented by two separate objects (isolator and earth

switch) on the HMI LCD, which are then configured as a combined object.
154
Unit
Configuration
The following section describes several tabs in the Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
dialog box. In all tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
General
A051750
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-2 General tab, function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
Field bus address
155
Unit

Comment
switching object.

Default: [Empty]
Options
the LCD:

displayed on the LCD screen during the switching operation.
If the Enable two step command check box is selected, the two-stage switching is
activated and a switching object must be selected with a command from the station
local switching.
Invert inputs
If the Invert inputs check box is selected, the logical signal of the inputs is inverted.
156
Unit
Parameters
A051753
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-3 Parameters tab, function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
Brake Time
In the Brake Time text box enter a time in ms for which the motor windings are
short-circuited to brake the motor after reaching the end position.

Default: 100
Waiting time
In the Waiting Time text box enter a time in ms during which no switching
command can be sent to prevent overloading the transistors on the input/output
board and the motor.
Setting range: 2 000 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)

Default: 2 000
MaxTimeToGrant
In the MaxTimeToGrant text box enter a time in ms during which the reservation of
the switching operation in connection with the LON Communication per LAG 1.4 is
granted.
157
Unit
Outputs
A051754
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-4 Outputs tab, function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
Earth close/open, Line close/open
The number of the represented physical output is a fixed assignment.

Default: 0
No. of Cycles (once per represented output pair)
Not used.
Pulse Length (once per represented output pair)
Enter the maximum duration of the output relay switching operation in the Pulse
Length text box. In the function blocks with limit stops the switching operation ends
before if necessary.
158
Unit
Inputs
A051755
Earth/Line closed/opened input (once per represented input)
Enter the number of the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned
number, underlined in white, is also shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 42 [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)

Default: 0
Filter time [ms] (once per represented output)
In the Filter time [ms] enter the time during which a signal must be applied at the
159
Unit
Inputs
A051756
Input
Enter a 0 (zero) as number of the represented input so that the earth switch
supervision (SUP) binary input is not used.
Filter time [ms] (once per represented output)
In the Filter time [ms] enter the time during which a signal must be applied at the
160
Unit
Events
A080240
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-7 Events tab, function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
The main part in the Events tab is the list of events. The channel number over which
the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the check box. To enable the
Set All
Clear All
Set Default
configuration for events for each function object is defined in the associated *.rce
file.
161
Unit
Save Default
hexadecimal code. Refer to the following table for the events E0 to E15. The input
for the events from E16 to E31 is in principle similar. The events E28 to E31 are not
used in this function block. If you select the check boxes in the list you can read the
hexadecimal code in the text boxes.
The following Table 4.3.2.9.-2 shows an overview of the events of the

functionblock Unbalanced Load Protection.
Table 4.3.2.9.-2 Switching Object 4-4 H Bridge

Event Text Event Text
E0 Disc. Pos. Intermediate E16 Blocked active
E1 Disc. Pos. Closed E17 Disc. Interlocked inactive
E2 Disc. Pos. Opened E18 Disc. Interlocked active
E3 not selectable E19 Earth interlocked inactive
E4 Disc. Pos. Error E20 Earth interlocked active
E5 Earth Pos. Intermediate E21 Selected inactive
E6 Earth Pos. Closed E22 Selected active
E7 Earth Pos. Opened E23 Interlock bypass inactive
E8 Earth Pos. Error E24 Interlock bypass active
E9 Command timeout inactive E25 not selectable
E10 Command timeout active E26 Select confirmation positive
E11 not selectable E27 Select confirmation negative
E12 not selectable E28 Execution confirmation positive
E13 Interlocking error left E29 Execution confirmation negative
E14 Interlocking error right E30 Execution termination positive
E15 Blocked inactive E31 Execution termination negative
162
Unit
Pins
A051758
Fig. 4.3.2.9.-8 Pins tab, function block Switching Object 4-4 H-Bridge
4.3.2.10. Module for truck (withdrawal unit)
A051759
Fig. 4.3.2.10.-1 Function block Module for truck
Function
The Module for truck function block is used to move or hide switch symbols on the
LCD. Fixed symbols (transducers, motors, generators and so on) cannot be hidden
or moved because they do not have a unique Field bus address.
The switch symbol interconnections on the LCD screen with the switching objects
in the function chart are shown with the Field bus address. In the same way, the
function block module for thrust is linked to the switching symbol that is to be
moved or hidden with the Field bus address.
163
Unit
Connections
If the Jump (move) input is set to logical 1, a symbol on the LCD is moved 11 pixels
to the left. If the input is set to logical 0 again, the symbol on the LCD resumes its
initial position.
If the Disapp. input is set to logical 1 again, the symbol on the LCD is hidden. If the
input is set to logical 0 again, the symbol on the LCD becomes visible again.
Typical application
If the power circuit-breaker is on a trolley (thrust), it must also be possible to show

its end positions on the LCD. The power circuit breaker symbol must be correctly
displayed depending on the current position of the thrust (operating or test position).
In addition, if the power circuit-breaker is no longer connected with the other

secondary technology, this status must be shown on the LCD. For example, this
occurs when the symbol is hidden.
Configuration
A051760
Fig. 4.3.2.10.-2 Configuration dialog box function block Module for truck
Field bus address
Click the < > button to open a list of the Field bus addresses used in the function
chart. Select the Field bus address of the switching object whose symbol is to be
moved on the LCD screen.
Jump/Disappear
The connections of the function block with the connection number connected to it
are shown here. Inputs are not possible. If there are yet no connections on the
function block, connection number 1 is displayed. It indicates an input.
164
Unit
OK
Cancel
4.3.2.11. IO-Supervision
A051761
Fig. 4.3.2.11.-1 Function block IO-Supervision
Function
The IO-Supervision function block provides messages from the trip circuit
supervision to the function chart. The REF 542plus Global Settings referring to trip
circuit supervision and the FUPLA are linked in this way. The single messages can
be blocked independently of one another. In addition, the entire function block can
be blocked; a signal regarding that can be tapped at one of its outputs. The error
messages from the trip circuit supervision cannot be suppressed on the LCD screen.
Up to two output channels can be monitored for the first two binary input/output
boards (cards). The trip circuit supervision must be activated in the Global Settings
of the configuration software for every channel.
Connections
Because the labeling of the inputs and outputs is partly abbreviated in the function
block and in the configuration dialog box, the list below explains the abbreviation
further if necessary.
165
Unit
BCS11/BI.Ca.1 Co.1 Blocking Coil If a logical 1 is set on this channel, the

input Supervision 11/blocking output signal is blocked and the
board 1 coil 1 supervision function of this coil is
generated.
generated.
generated.
BCS22/BI.Ca.2.Co.2 Blocking Coil If a logical 1 is set on this channel, the
generated.
generated.
BCS32/BI.Ca.3.Co.2 Blocking Coil If a logical 1 is set on this channel, the
generated.
B.A.S./BI. active superv. Blocking Active If a logical 1 is applied to this connection,
input Supervision/blocking switch supervision is deactivated.
input switch supervision
Coil supervision Card1 Start board 1 coil 1 If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output,
Coil1/St. Ca.1 Co.1 the trip circuit supervision for the
output corresponding coil has detected an error.
Active Supervision/St. Start switch supervision If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output,
active superv. output the switch supervision is operating. If a
logical 0 can be tapped, the switch
supervision is not active because it has
been blocked via the B.A.S. input.
166
Unit
Typical application
The trip-circuit supervision can be used to detect defective trip solenoids on the
power circuit-breaker. For example, the return confirmation over the function block
trip-circuit supervision can be used to generate an event for a station control system.
Interlocking of the power circuit-breaker is also possible.
Configuration
are displayed in the configuration dialog box. Inputs are not possible. The names of
the connections in the configuration dialog box are German and in the FUPLA
display English. Both labels can be found in the connection description.
the OK button.
4.3.3. Digital logic 1
The following sections describe the function blocks that are available in Drawing
Menu > Insert > Digital Logic 1.
4.3.3.1. Inverter
A051762
Fig. 4.3.3.1.-1 Function block Inverter
Function
The Inverter function block inverts the input signal and sends it to its output.
Table 4.3.3.1.-1 Logic table

On Off
1 0
0 1
Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them are
displayed in the configuration dialog box. Inputs are not possible.
167
Unit
the OK button.
4.3.3.2. Constant 1/Constant 0
A051763
Fig. 4.3.3.2.-1 Function blocks Constant 1 and Constant 0
Function
The two function blocks continuously send a logical 0 and a logical 1 respectively to
their outputs.

Constant 0 Output Constant 1 Output
0 1
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.3.3. AND logic gate with inverting output
A051764
Fig. 4.3.3.3.-1 Function block AND logic gate with inverting output
Function
The AND logic gate inverts the output signal. Otherwise, the function is identical to
the standard AND logic gate.
168
Unit

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.3.4. AND logic gate with an inverting input
A051765
Fig. 4.3.3.4.-1 Function blocks AND logic gate with an inverting inputs
Function
AND logic gates have all an inverting input. Because only the inverted input is
changed, only one function block is described here.

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0
Configuration
the OK button.
169
Unit
4.3.3.5. AND logic gate
A051766
Fig. 4.3.3.5.-1 Function blocks AND logic gate with varying input number
Function
The AND logic gates execute a logical AND interconnection on their inputs (left on
the function block). The result of this logical operation is available on the output
(right on the function block). Therefore a logical 1 is displayed on the output when
all inputs are set to logical 1.
The AND logic gates above differ only in the number of inputs.

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
The logic Table 4.3.3.5.-1 shows as an example the function of the AND logic gate
with two inputs.
Configuration
the OK button.
170
Unit
4.3.3.6. OR logic gate
A060035
Fig. 4.3.3.6.-1 Function blocks OR logic gate with varying output numbers
Function
The OR logic gates execute a logical OR interconnection of their inputs (left on the
function block). The result of this logical operation is available on the output (right
on the function block).
Therefore a logical 1 is displayed on the output when one of the inputs is set to
logical 1.
The OR logic gates above differ only in the number of inputs.
Logic table
The following logic Table 4.3.3.6.-1 shows as an example the function of the OR
logic gate with two inputs.
Table 4.3.3.6.-1 Function of the OR logic gate

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Configuration
the OK button.
171
Unit
4.3.3.7. OR logic gate with inverting output
A060036
Fig. 4.3.3.7.-1 Function block OR logic gate with inverting output (NOR logic gate)
Function
This OR logic gate inverts the output signal. Otherwise, the function is identical to
the standard OR logic gate.
Table 4.3.3.7.-1 OR logic gate with inverting output

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.4. Digital logic 2
Menu/Insert/Digital Logic 2.
172
Unit
4.3.4.1. Exclusive OR logic gate
A060037
Fig. 4.3.4.1.-1 Function block exclusive OR logic gate with varying input number
Function
The exclusive OR logic gates execute a logical exclusive OR interconnection of

their inputs (left on the function block). The result of this logical operation is
available at the output (right on the function block).
Therefore a logical 1 is displayed at the output when at least one of the inputs is set
to logical 1. In contrast to the OR logic gate, a logical 0 is displayed on the output if
all inputs are set to logical 1. The exclusive OR logic gates shown in Fig. differ
only in the number of inputs.
Logic table
The following logic Table 4.3.4.1.-1 shows as an example the function of the
exclusive OR logic gate with two inputs.
Table 4.3.4.1.-1 Exclusive OR logic gate with two inputs

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Configuration
the OK button.
173
Unit
4.3.4.2. Exclusive OR logic gates with inverting output
A060038
Fig. 4.3.4.2.-1 Function block exclusive OR logic gate with inverting output and
varying number of inputs
Function
The exclusive OR logic gates with inverting output execute a logical exclusive OR
interconnection of their inputs (left on the function block). The result of this logical
operation is available in inverted form at the output (right on the function block).
Therefore, a logical 1 is displayed at the output if all inputs are set to logical 0 or
logical 1. In contrast to OR logic gates with inverting output, a logical 1 is displayed
at the output if all inputs are set to logical 1.
Logic table
The following logic table 4.3.4.2.-1 shows as an example the function of the
exclusive OR logic gate with two inputs.
Table 4.3.4.2.-1 Exclusive OR logic gate with two inputs

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5. Flip-Flops
Menu > Insert > Flip-Flops.
174
Unit
Flip-Flops are memory elements with two stable states. Switching between the
states is referred to as toggling. A suitable actuation (depending on the type of flip-
flop) switches it to the other state. Because this state remains effective at the outputs
of the flip-flop if there are no input signals, they are referred to as memory elements.
Some flip-flops are also actuated by a timing input.
To enable the time sequence to be taken into account in the logic tables as well, a
time before toggling the flip-flop (tn) and a time after toggling (tn+1) are defined.
Therefore, output signals before toggling are labeled Qn and Qn+1 after toggling.
If the flip-flop has also a timing input, the state before the timing input is labeled
index n and the state after the timing input as index n+1. The change of state at the
timing input from logical 0 to logical 1 or vice versa is decisive for the switching
process. It is referred to as the rising or falling slope.
4.3.5.1. R-S Flip-Flop
A060039
Function
A logical 1 at the S-input results in a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the R-

input results in a logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals remain active at the outputs. If
both inputs are at logical 1, the R-input is dominant. However, this state contradicts
the basic flip-flop principle of two stable states and must therefore be avoided.
175
Unit
Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the following Table 4.3.5.1.-1 because the state is always
opposite to Q.

R S Q
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5.2. R-S Flip-Flop with timing input (clock)
A060040
Fig. 4.3.5.2.-1 Function block RS Flip-Flop with timing input
Function
A logical 1 at the S-input combined with a rising slope at the timing input (C) results
in a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the R-input combined with a rising
slope at the timing input (C) results in a logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals on the outputs remain active if
there is no longer a rising slope at the timing input. With the rising slope the signals
at the inputs are input.
If both inputs are at logical 1, both outputs are at logical 1 with the rising slope at
the timing input. However, this state contradicts the basic flip-flop principle of two
stable states and therefore must be avoided.
176
Unit
Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the following Table 4.3.5.2.-1 because the state is always set
opposite to Q.
tn is the time before the rising slope at the timing input
tn+1 is the time after it.

tn tn+1
R S Q Remark
0 0 Qn
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 - Illegal state
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5.3. J-K Flip-Flop
A060041
Fig. 4.3.5.3.-1 Function block J-K Flip-Flop with timing input (clock)
Function
A logical 1 at the J-input (logical 0 at the K-input) combined with a falling slope at
the timing input (C) results in a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the K-input
(logical 0 at the J-input) combined with a falling slope at the timing input (C) results
in a logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals remain active at the outputs
regardless of the timing input.
If both inputs are at logical 1, the signals on the two outputs with the falling slope
are inverted at the timing input.
177
Unit
Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the following Table 4.3.5.3.-1 because the state is always set
opposite to Q.
tn is the time before the falling slope at the timing input.

tn tn+1
J K Q Remark
0 0 Qn The prior state
remains
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 Qn The prior state is
inverted
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5.4. D Flip-Flop
A060042
Fig. 4.3.5.4.-1 Function block D Flip-Flop
Function
The signal at the D-input of the flip-flop is transferred with the next positive slope of
the Q-output. The timing pulses (clock) cause a delayed output of the input signal on
the output.
178
Unit
Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the following table because the state is always set opposite to
Q.
tn is the time before the rising slope at the timing input and
tn tn+1
D Q
0 0
1 1
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5.5. T Flip-Flop
A060043
Fig. 4.3.5.5.-1 Function block T Flip-Flop
Function
The signals at the outputs are inverted with the positive slope at the timing input T.
Q is logical 0 as the output state, to ensure that there is a defined state during the
REF 542plus starting procedure. The signal at the output is always opposite to the
signal at the output Q.
This enables the T flip-flop to operate as a binary divider; the period duration of the
signals at the outputs is double the length of the clock at the T-input. A constant
frequency clock signal is required.
179
Unit
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.5.6. Monoflop retriggerable
A060044
Fig. 4.3.5.6.-1 Function block Monoflop retriggerable
Function
The logical value at the D-input is directly incorporated (in practice with its own
rising slope) on the Q-output. It remains there for the configurable time. Finally, the
output falls back to the only stable state of logical 0 again. The Q-output is set
immediately to logical 0 by a logical 1 on the reset input (RES or K). If a rising
slope occurs at the D-input again while the output is also still at logical 1, the timing
circuit is restarted.
The signal at the inverted is always opposite to the signal at the output Q.
Configuration
Time [ms]
Enter the time in ms in the Time text box for which the output signal should be kept
after a rising slope of the input signal.

Default: 15
Pins
180
Unit
OK
Cancel
4.3.5.7. Monoflop non-retriggerable
A060045
Fig. 4.3.5.7.-1 Function block Monoflop non-retriggerable
Function
The logical value at the D-input is directly incorporated (in practice with its own
rising slope) on to the Q-output. It remains there for the configurable time. Finally,
the output falls back to the only stable state of logical 0 again. The Q-output is set
immediately to logical 0 by a logical 1 on the reset input (RES or K). If a rising
slope occurs at the D-input again while the output is also still at logical 1, this signal
is ignored.
The signal at the inverted is always opposite to the signal at the output Q.
Configuration
Time [ms]
Enter the time in ms in the Time text box for which the output signal should be kept
after a rising slope of the input signal.
181
Unit

Default: 15
Pins
OK
Cancel
4.3.5.8. Drop Delay/Rise Delay (slope delay)
A060046
Fig. 4.3.5.8.-1 Function blocks slope delay: rising and falling
Function
Drop Delay and Rise Delay function blocks delay the falling and rising slope of a
logical signal at the input (left connection).
The delayed logical signal is then available at the output (right connection). The
delay period can be input in the configuration dialog box.
The following Fig. 4.3.5.8.-2 shows how the two function blocks operate.
182
Unit
A060047
Fig. 4.3.5.8.-2 Flow chart of the slope delay function blocks
A060048
Fig. 4.3.5.8.-3 Configuration dialog box slope delay rising (and falling)
The setting options are identical in both configuration dialog boxes. Only the name
of the function block in the window’s title bar is different.
Time [ms]
Enter the delay period in ms in the Time [ms] text box. The rising/falling slope of
the output signal is delayed for this period relative to the input signal. The input
period is also shown in the function chart below the FUPLA symbol.
183
Unit

Default: 15
Pins
OK
Cancel
4.3.5.9. Counter
A060049
Fig. 4.3.5.9.-1 Function block Counter
Function
The function block Counter puts a logical 1 on its output (right on the function
block) after a preset No. of cycles have been sent to its CLOCK input (timing input,
left on the function block). The output is set with the rising slope of the last required
input impulse.
If a logical 1 is set to the RESET input (left on the function block), the output is
reset to logical 0 or the counting process is stopped and the internal counter is set to
0.
184
Unit
A060050
Fig. 4.3.5.9.-2 Configuration dialog box Counter
Number
Enter the number of input impulses required to generate a logical 1 at the output of
the function block (right on the FUPLA symbol). The rising slopes of the input
signal are decisive for the function block. The number is also shown in the function
chart below the FUPLA symbol.

Default: 0
Pins
OK
Cancel
185
Unit
4.3.5.10. Pulse generator
A060051
Fig. 4.3.5.10.-1 Function block Pulse generator
Function
The function block Pulse generator sends a pulse sequence at its output (right on the
function block). Logical 1 and logical 0 values alternate in this process. Their
duration can be set in the configuration dialog box.
The following Fig. 4.3.5.10.-2 shows the setting options for the pulse generator.
A060052
Fig. 4.3.5.10.-2 Output signal of the Pulse generator
Output (right on the function block)
The generated pulse sequence can be tapped here.
186
Unit
Configuration
A060053
Fig. 4.3.5.10.-3 Configuration dialog box Pulse generator
High Time [ms]
The duration in ms of the logical 1 impulse (tON) is entered in the High Time [ms]
text box. The input period is also visible in the FUPLA below the function block.

Default: 15
Low time [ms]
The duration in ms of the logical 0 impulse (tOFF) is entered in the Low Time [ms]
text box. The input period is also visible in the FUPLA below the function block.

Default: 15
Pins
OK
Cancel
187
Unit
4.3.5.11. Digital Store object
A060054
Fig. 4.3.5.11.-1 Function block Digital Store object
Function
The digital store object continuously saves the current digital values at its input. If
the auxiliary supply voltage fails, the last saved values are kept. In this event they
are available at the appropriate outputs after REF 542plus has restarted. If the reset
or RESET input is at logical 1, the output signals are set to logical 0.
Typical application
The signals that, for example, have generated a switching authorization, are kept in
this way after a power failure. Otherwise the switching authorization would be lost,
because all outputs and inputs on the REF 542plus take a defined state.
Configuration
The connections of the function block are shown in the configuration dialog box
with the connection numbers to which they are connected. Inputs are not possible.
the OK button.
188
Unit
4.3.6. Analog Objects
The following sections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are
available in Drawing Menu > Insert > Analog Objects.
4.3.6.1. Analog Threshold
A060055
Fig. 4.3.6.1.-1 Function block Analog Threshold
Function
Each of the eight analog measuring inputs can be monitored to detect if it falls
below or exceeds a threshold value. If the measured value falls below or exceeds the
configurable trip threshold (threshold value), the supervision function is activated. If
the trip threshold exceeds or is below the threshold after a configurable period, a trip
signal is generated. The trip threshold and the period for exceeding or falling below
the measured value can be configured separately.
Connections
B> input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the trip signal for signaling that the
threshold value has been exceeded is suppressed.
B< input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the trip signal for signaling that the
threshold value has not been reached is suppressed.
S> output: The starting signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value
has been exceeded.
S< output: The starting signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value
has not been reached.
> output: The trip signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has
been exceeded.
< output: The trip signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has
not been reached.
Valid output: A logical 1 is set whenever the chosen analog signal is valid.
Not Valid output: A logical 1 is set whenever the chosen analog signal is not valid.
189
Unit
Typical application
The threshold values can be used to ascertain that a bay has no voltage. It is
recommended to generate various interlock conditions with this signal. Please
observe the restrictions regarding the threshold object:
* Maximum of 10 threshold objects per analog measuring input (= 80 per
configuration)
* Minimum reaction time around 50 to 100 ms
* The threshold objects cannot select a direct switching output
Configuration
OK
Cancel
General
A060056
Fig. 4.3.6.1.-2 General tab in the configuration dialog box Analog Objects
This is automatically assigned but can also be changed in the adjacent set limits. All
(max. 10) threshold objects that refer to a measuring input have the same Field bus
address. The Field bus address is used for addressing the function block in the event
of field bus commands. It is also shown in the function chart below the function
block.
190
Unit
Number
The sequential number of the threshold object is entered in the Number drop-down
menu. It is also shown in the function chart below the function block. It is also used
to distinguish a maximum of 10 threshold objects per analog measuring input.
Analog inputs
The measuring input that is to be monitored by the threshold object can be selected
from the Analog Inputs drop-down menu.
Setting range: All configured analog signals

Default: None
TR >
The trip threshold for exceeding the threshold is entered in the TR> text box in
multiples of the rated voltage or of the rated current.
Setting range: 0.1 … 10 (increment: 0.01)

Default: 1.00
Time (under TR>)
Enter the time in seconds in the Time text box for which the measured value must
exceed the threshold value before a trip signal is generated.
Setting range: 0.5 … 300 s (increment 0.01 s)

Default: 1.00
TR<
The trip threshold for falling below the threshold is entered in the TR< text box in
multiples of the rated voltage or of the rated current.

Default: 1.00
Time (under TR<)
Enter the time in seconds in the Time text box for which the measured value must
fall below the threshold value before a trip signal is generated.
191
Unit
Setting range: 0.5 … 300 s (increment 0.01 s)

Default: 1.00
Pins
A060057
Fig. 4.3.6.1.-3 Pins tab in Configuration box Analog objects
4.3.6.2. Measurement supervision NPS and PPS
REF 542plus provides two types of measurement supervision functions. Each of

them can be independently activated:
* Positive Phase Sequence (PPS)
* Negative Phase Sequence (NPS)
A050689
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-1 Measurement supervision
192
Unit
Input/output description
Table 4.3.6.2.-1 Input

Name Type Description
BS Digital signal (active high) Blocking signal
When the BS signal becomes active, the measurement supervision function is reset
no matter its state. This means that all the output pins go low generating the required
events (if any), and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection
function will then remain in idle state until the BS signal goes low.
Table 4.3.6.2.-2 Output

Warning Digital signal (active high) Warning signal
Failing Digital signal (active high) Failing signal
Warning is the start signal. Warning signal will be activated when the start
conditions are true. The negative phase sequence value exceeds the setting threshold
value for NPS , and the positive phase sequence value falls below the setting
threshold value for PPS.
Failing signal will be activated when the start conditions are true and the operating
time has elapsed.
Configuration
A050690
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-2 General
193
Unit
A050691
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-3 Sensors
The measurement supervision functions operate on all sensors in a triple. The analog
channels 1-3 or 4-6 can be used to supervize the phase currents, phase voltages or
line voltages.
A050692
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-4 Parameters
194
Unit
Start Value: Positive/Negative phase sequence threshold for Start condition detection.
Time: Time delay for Trip condition detection.
A080242
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-5 Events
A050694
Fig. 4.3.6.2.-6 Pins
195
Unit
Measurement mode
Measurement supervision functions evaluate the measured amount of positive and

negative phase sequence values at the fundamental frequency.
Operation criteria
If the negative phase sequence value exceeds the setting threshold value (Start
value) in the NPS based functions, or if the positive phase sequence value falls
below the setting threshold (Start value) the function enters the START status and
raises the warning. After the preset operating time (Time delay) has elapsed, the
failing signal is generated.
The measurement function will come back in passive status and the warning signal
will be cleared, if the negative phase sequence value falls below 0.95 the setting
threshold value for NPS , or if the positive phase sequence value exceed 1.05 the
setting threshold value for PPS.
The measurement function will exit the failing status and the failing signal will be
cleared when the negative phase sequence value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold
value for NPS, or if the positive phase sequence value exceed 1.05 the setting
Setting groups
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the measurement supervision
functions.
Parameters and events
Table 4.3.6.2.-3 Setting values

Parameter Values Unit Default Explanation
Start value (PPS) 0.30 ... 0.90 In or Un 0.85 PPS threshold to undergo.
Time delay 30 ... 30000 ms 1000 Time delay from start
condition (warning signal)
to failing signal.
Start value (NPS) 0.05 ... 0.40 In or Un 0.10 NPS threshold to be
exceeded.
Time delay 30 ... 30000 ms 1000 Time delay from start
condition to failing signal.
196
Unit
Table 4.3.6.2.-4 Events

Code Event reason
E0 Warning signal is active
E1 Warning signal cancelled
E6 Failing signal is active
E7 Failing signal is back to inactive state
E18 Function block signal is active
E19 Function block signal is back to inactive state
4.3.6.3. Analog Input 20mA object
A051055
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-1 Function block Analog Input 20mA
Function
Up to 48 Analog Input 20mA objects (instances) can be used. Each object can be
assigned to one of the six Analog Inputs 20mA of the REF 542plus. Depending on
the state of the measured value of the dedicated sensor, the analog input 20mA
object generates a valid/not valid signal. If the measured value of the dedicated
sensor exceeds or falls below the configured threshold, a warning signal is
generated.
Typical application
The threshold supervision of the Analog Input 20mA objects can, for example, be
used for supervision of gas density or temperature. Several thresholds can be
assigned to each sensor.
Connections
Valid output: The valid signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the dedicated sensor
is working properly.
Not valid output: The not valid signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the dedicated
sensor is not working properly.
197
Unit
Warning output: The warning signal (logical 1) can be tapped here.
Configuration
Start with theGeneral tab
A051056
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-2 Configuration dialog Analog Input 20mA object, tab “general”
The Instance number selection list: Select the desired instance number. It is
displayed under the FUPLA block through the string “Nr.:x”, where x is the instance
number. The selection list includes the numbers from 1 to 48 excluding the already
used ones.
The Name input field: Name of the warning that shall be displayed on the RHMI.
Max. number of characters: 20.
The Sensor number selection list. This list shows all configured sensors. Select a
sensor number to assign the Analog Input 20mA object to this sensor. Whenever the
sensor number is changed, all parameters will be set to their default values.
The Parameters configuration.
198
Unit
A051057
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-3 Configuration dialog Analog Input 20mA object, tab “Parameters”
The Direction selection list: The default-direction is Up. This means that the
warning signal is active when the measured value of the dedicated sensor exceeds
the configured threshold. The direction Down has to be selected when the warning
signal is active or should be active, that is, when the measured value falls below the
configured threshold.
The Threshold input field: The desired threshold-level can be entered here. If the
measured value of the dedicated sensor exceeds or falls below (according to the
configured direction) this threshold, the warning signal is activated.
The Hysteresis input field: The desired hysteresis can be entered here. See
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-4 and Fig. 4.3.6.3.-5 to view how the hysteresis works depending on
configured direction.
A051058
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-4 Hysteresis (Direction: Down)
199
Unit
A051059
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-5 Hysteresis (Direction: Up)
The Debounce time input field: The width of the debounce time window for
debouncing the warning can be entered here.
Setting range: 0..100ms (increment: 1ms)
The Override value selection list: The override value overrides the state of the
Warning output in case that the state of the dedicated sensor is invalid. The override-
value can be Inactive or Active. Default: Inactive.
The Apply button: All settings are saved in the configuration software.
The OK button: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.
The Cancel button: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.
Information about pins:
200
Unit
A051060
Fig. 4.3.6.3.-6 Information dialog pins
4.3.6.4. Energy management
A060063
Fig. 4.3.6.4.-1 Function block Energy management
Function
The Energy management function block is used to influence the internal energy
calculations in REF 542plus. On one hand the count process can be stopped and on
the other hand a return block can be activated. In this case the energy is not counted
backwards if the energy direction changes.
Depending on the hardware configuration the power is calculated from the current
and voltage values at the analog inputs. The internal REF 542plus time clock is then
used to calculate the energy. The energy values can be displayed on the LCD.
The internal energy calculation functions only with configured power

calculation.
201
Unit
Connections
COUNT/no count input: The count process is stopped if there is a logical 1 at this
input.
BACK/no back input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, backwards counting is

suppressed if the energy direction changes.
Typical application
The energy count provides an overview of the generated/consumed bay-specific

energy.
Configuration
the OK button.
4.3.6.5. Energy Counter
A060064
Function
The Energy Counter function block uses impulses to meter energy. Every impulse is
assigned to a configurable energy value. The energy metered here is then displayed
in the measured value display on the LCD of the REF 542plus HMI control unit.
Typical application
The Energy Counter function block is used if there is an energy measuring

instrument in the bay that is being configured. Its impulses can be sent to the energy
counter in the function chart over a binary input.
202
Unit
Configuration
A060065
Fig. 4.3.6.5.-1 Configuring Energy Counter
Field bus address
The permanently assigned Field bus address is displayed here. All energy counters
have the same address.
Number
Enter a number to distinguish several configured energy counters. The number is

also shown in the function chart above the function block.

Default: The next free energy counter number
Multiplication factor
The energy in kWh that represents an incoming impulse is entered in the

Multiplication factor text box. The multiplier is shown in the function chart in the
function block.

Default: 100
Display text (LCU)
Enter text in the Display text (LCU) that is to be displayed on the LCD to enable
several energy counters to be distinguished more easily.
203
Unit

Default: Default no. [Number of the energy counter]
BI
The number of the connection is shown here. If there is no connection yet, a 1 is

shown.
OK
Cancel
4.3.6.6. Energy Pulse Output
A060066
Fig. 4.3.6.6.-1 Function block Energy Pulse Output
Function
The Energy Pulse Output function block sends pulses that represent a specific
energy quantity to its output (energy). The pulses are generated based on the internal
energy calculations of REF 542plus.
The DSP calculates the energy and sends standardized energy packets to the
microcontroller. This receives a number of standardized energy packets about twice
a second and calculates the absolute energy amount from them.
The energy amount is then converted to the corresponding No. of cycles. If there is a
remainder after the conversion into pulses, it is included in the next conversion.
The energy pulse output can send up to 70 pulses after a calculation. Additional
pulses are ignored and the overflow output is then set to logical 1. If the number of
calculated pulses is reduced below 65 again, the overflow output is reset to logical 0.
204
Unit
To add the Energy Pulse Output function block, the power calculation
must be activated.
Use the Energy Pulse Output function block only with binary input/
output boards with solid state relays. The conventional relays are
limited in their number of switching cycles and therefore are not suited
for this.
Typical application
Use the Energy Pulse Output function block to control an external energy display
with the pulses from REF 542plus.
Example:
Application in a system with rated voltage Ur 11 kV and rated current Ir 300A

Under a rated load condition with cos phi = 0.9 and CT rated current 300A,
the active power is √3 x 11 kV x 300 A x 0.9 = 5144 kW. The energy portion
per second is 5144 kW x 1 h / 3600 sec = 1,43 kWh. In case that the setting
parameter Pulse per kWh = 0.7 is selected, the value of 1 Pulse is equal to 1
kWh / 0.7 = 1.43 kWh. As a consequence, a pulse is generated every second
at the ENERGY output. If the value of the setting parameter is enlarge, for
example from 0.7 to 2.1 , which means that the value of 1 Pulse is equal to
0.43 kWh, three pulses are generated each second.
Configuration
A060068
Fig. 4.3.6.6.-2 Configuration dialog box Energy Pulse Output
205
Unit
Energy
Select here whether the pulse should represent Active or Reactive energy.
Energy Flow
Select the direction of the energy flow. Only energy of this direction is converted to
the corresponding pulse.
Pins
Pulse per kWh
Enter the calculated energy amount that an pulse represents in kWh.

Default: 1.0
Pulse Lenght
The duration of the output pulse in ms can be varied in the Pulse Length text box to
ensure that the external energy display functions correctly.
Setting range: 50 … 150 ms (increment: 1 ms)

Default: 150
OK
Cancel
206
Unit
4.3.6.7. Power Factor Controller
A060069
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-1 Function block Power Factor Controller
Connections
BL (Blocking) input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the power factor
controller functions.
Disconnect input: A logical 1 signal at this input switches off all active capacitor
banks.
Reset input: A logical 1 signal at this input resets the General Alarm. If this alarm
status is not reset, the control function remains blocked.
Overtemp. input: A logical 1 signal at this input generates a General Alarm message
and immediately switches off all capacitor banks.
V MIN/MAX input: A logical 1 signal at this input generates a General Alarm

message and immediately switches off all capacitor banks.
V A MAX input: A logical 1 signal at this input results in a General Alarm message.
Mode: Man. input: A logical 1 signal on this input changes switches the operating
mode of the Power Factor Controller from automatic to manual.
Set Night input: A logical 1 signal on this input switches the parameter setting from
day to night.
Manual Control Bank 0 ... 3 input (once per capacitor bank): A logical 1 signal on
this input results in capacitor bank C0 ... capacitor bank C3 being switched on or off
depending on its switch status.
207
Unit
Checked Back Bank 0 ... 3 input: A logical 1 signal on this input indicates whether
capacitor bank C0 ... capacitor bank C3 is switched on.
Alarm Q output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if all capacitor banks in the
network are already switched on and the power factor for the reactive power control
still remains below the limit.
Alarm cos Φ output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if the set power factor cos
Φ for the alarm is instantaneously below the limit.
Alarm Operat. output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if the set maximum
number of switching cycles for one of the capacitor banks is exceeded.
Alarm General output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if a general alarm is
generated following relevant input information such as (OVERTEMP., V MIN/
MAX, VA MAX,DISCONNECT).
The function is blocked as long as the alarm is active. The Power Factor Controller
is only ready for operation again after the alarm has been acknowledged.
Switch On/Off Bank 0 ... 3 output (once per condensator bank): A logical 1 signal or
logical 0 signal can be tapped here if capacitor bank C0 ... C3 is to be switched on or
off.
Configuration
The following sections describe several tabs. In all tabs the OK and Cancel buttons
are available.
OK
Cancel
208
Unit
General
A060070
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-2 General tab, Function block Power Factor Controller
Field bus address
Set for every protection function and used to address the function block for field bus
commands.
Switching Sequence
In the Switching Sequence select how the capacitor banks should be switched on or
off when they are the same size:
Linear
It is switched on in ascending sequence and switched off in descending sequence.
Circular
It is switched on and off in ascending sequence.
Switching Hysteresis
Under Switching Hysteresis enter the settings for switching the capacitor banks on
or off for reactive power control:
209
Unit
Neutral zone (KOFF)
The threshold for switching off is calculated with the adjustable percentage factor,
which is based on the smallest installed capacitor output QC0 .
Setting range: 105 ... 200 % of Q C0 (increment: 1).

Default: 115
Pickup value (KON)
The threshold for switching on is calculated with the adjustable percentage factor,
which is based on the smallest installed capacitor output QC0.
Setting range: 0 ... 100 % of Q C0 (increment: 1).

Default: 0
Capacitor Banks
A060071
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-3 Capacitor Banks tab, function block Power Factor Controller
Reactive power of smallest bank QC0
The default of the smallest module of the set capacitor output in bank is 0.
210
Unit
Setting range: 1,000 ... 20,000 kVAr (increment: 1)

Default: 100,000
Configuration of banks
The default of the combinations of output units of the capacitor banks in the
sequence bank 0, bank 1, bank 2 and bank 3. Using less than 4 banks the figures
beginning from the right are ignored.
Setting range: 1:1:1:1; 1:1:2:2; 1:2:2:2; 1:2:4:4; 1:2:4:8

Default: 1:1:1:1
Number of banks
Setting the number of installed capacitor banks.
Setting range: 1 ... 4 (increment: 1)

Default: 1
Maximum switching cycles
An alarm message can be generated with this setting if the number of switching
cycles of one switching device of a capacitor bank is exceeded.

Default: 2500
Control Data
A060072
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-4 Control Data tab, function block Power Factor Controller
211
Unit
Setpoint cos phi, day (once per parameter set)
Enter the set point of the power factor cos phi for day control of the reactive power.
If the value drops below the set point, the control is activated.
Setting range: 0.70 ... 1.00 (increment: 0.01)

Default: 0,90
Setpoint cos phi, night (once per parameter set)
Enter the set point of the power factor cos phi for night control of the reactive
power. If the value drops below the set point, the control is activated.

Default: 0,90
Inductive/capacitive (under Setpoint cos phi)
Allows setting of the type of reactive power to be compensated.
Default: Inductive
Limiting value cos phi (Alarm) Day (once per parameter set)
Enter the limit value of the power factor cos phi for the alarm during day operation.
If the value falls below the limit value, an alarm message is generated.

Default: 0,00
Inductive/capacitive (under Limiting value cos phi (Alarm) Day)
Default: Inductive
Limiting value cos phi (Alarm) Night (once per parameter set):
Enter the limit value of the power factor cos phi for the alarm during night
operation. If the value falls below the limit value, an alarm message is generated.
Setting range: 0.00 ... 1.00 (increment: 1)

Default: 0,00
Inductive/capacitive (under Limiting value cos phi (Alarm) Night)
212
Unit
Default: Inductive
Method of operation (once per parameter set)
The criteria for controlling the reactive power can be determined directly from the
current values or after integration of averaging the values.
Setting range: Direct/integrating

Default: Direct
Time
A060073
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-5 Time tab, function block Power Factor Controller
Discharge blocking time (once per parameter set)
After a capacitor bank is switched off, it can only be switched on again after the
discharge period has expired.
Setting range: 1 ... 7200 s (increment: 1)

Default: 900
Dead time (once per parameter set)
After a capacitor bank is switched on, the control function is initially deactivated for
the period of the dead time. Setting range: 1 ... 120 s (increment: 1) Default: 10
213
Unit

Default: 10
Power on delay (once per parameter set)
After a complete switch off of all capacitor banks the reclosing is avoided for the
power on delay time.

Default: 900
Duration of integration (once per parameter set)
The reactive power or the power factor is determined after the values have been
averaged within the set integration period. The Duration of integration parameter is
used from the function block only if integration is used as a method of operation.

Default: 900
Events
A080244
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-6 Events tab, function block Power Factor Controller
214
Unit
The main part in the Events tab is the list of events. The channel number over which
the events are sent is shown in the left column near the check box. To enable the
Set All
Clear All
Set Default
configuration for events for each function object is defined in the associated file *.
rce.
Save Default
Event Masks E15 ... E0 and E31 ... E16
The selecting of events is also possible in the Event Masks text boxes. The input
must be in hexadecimal code (Refer to the following table for the events E0 to E15).
The input for the events E16 to E31 is in principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are
not used in this function block. If you select the check boxes in the list you can read
the hexadecimal code in the text boxes.
Table 4.3.6.7.-1 Power Factor Controller

97 E00 Bank 0 ON E04 Bank 0 OFF
97 E08 Overtemperature started E09 Overtemperature back
97 E10 Va max started E11 Va max back
97 E12 Vmin/max started E13 Vmin/max back
97 E14 Command DISCONNECT E15 Command DISCONNECT back
started
97 E16 Cos phi warning started E17 Cos phi warning back
97 E18 Alarm Q started E19 Alarm Q back
215
Unit
97 E20 Warning switching cycles E21 Alarm reset

97 E22 Block signal started E23 Block signal back
97 E24 Manual operating mode E25 Automatic operating mode
97 E26 Night mode E27 Day mode
Pins
A060075
Fig. 4.3.6.7.-7 Pins tab, function block Power Factor Controller
4.3.7. Communication objects
The sections below describe the function blocks that are available in Drawing
Menu > Insert > Communication Objects.
The following function block is used for vertical communication to the host with
LON per LAG 1.4. Also horizontal communication for interlocking between the
bays is possible.
216
Unit
4.3.7.1. Binary Write
A060076
Fig. 4.3.7.1.-1 Function block Binary Write
Function
The Binary Write function block is used for vertical communication in transmitting
the binary information to the host. This function block must be updated by the field
bus during the configured time. After a time out the output valid and the 16 data
outputs are reset with logical 0. After each new update the output valid is set back
again to logical 1. The default time is 1000 ms. If the time is set to 0, the time
controlling is not active, valid is permanently 1 and the output is never reset.
A maximum of 32 Binary Write function blocks can be entered.
Connection
Output 1: Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the substation control
system.
Output VALID: Logical signal 1 is present, if the binary information has a valid qualifier.
Configuration
The following describes two tabs in the Binary Write dialog box. In all the tabs the
OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
217
Unit
General
A060077
Fig. 4.3.7.1.-2 General tab, function block Binary Write
Field bus address
Set for every protection function and used to address the function block for field bus
commands.
Instance number
Select the number of the used function block in the Instance number drop-down
menu. In total 64 function blocks and respectively instance are available.
Setting range: 1 … 32 [instance number] (increment: 1)

Default: 1
Refresh timeout period
The time duration to be set for recognizing the information from the host.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms (increment: 1)

Default: 1000
218
Unit
Pins
A060078
Fig. 4.3.7.1.-3 Pins tab, function block Binary Write
219
Unit
4.3.7.2. 16-Bit Write
A060079
Fig. 4.3.7.2.-1 Function block 16-Bit Write
Function
The 16-Bit Write function block is dedicated as well for the vertical communication
to receive RESERVE requests and RESERVE confirmations as also for horizontal
communication to receive the interlocking information from other bays. Each
change of the inputs creates an event with the port number of the changed input as
its value information.
The function block must be updated by the field bus during the configured time.
After a time out the output valid and the 16-data outputs are reset to logical 0. After
each new update the output valid is set back again to logical 1. The default time is
1000 ms. If the time is set to 0, the time controlling is not active, valid is
permanently 1 and the output is never reset.
A maximum of 64 16-Bit Write function block can be entered.
220
Unit
Connection
Output 1 … 16: Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the substation control
system.
Output VALID: Logical signal 1 is present, if the binary information has a valid qualifier.
Configuration
The following describes two tabs in the 16-Bit Write dialog box. In all the tabs the
OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
General
A060080
Fig. 4.3.7.2.-2 General configuration dialog box, function block 16-Bit Write
Field bus address
The Field bus address is set for every protection function and used to address the
function block for field bus commands.
221
Unit
Instance number

Default: 1
Refresh timeout period
The time duration to be set for recognizing the information from the host.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms (increment: 1)

Default: 1000Pins
Pins
A060081
Fig. 4.3.7.2.-3 Pins tab, function block 16-Bit Write
222
Unit
4.3.7.3. Binary Read
A060081
Fig. 4.3.7.3.-1 Function block Binary Read
Function
The Binary Read function block is used as vertical communication to read binary
information transmitted by the host.
A maximum of 32 Binary Read function block can be entered.
Connection
Input 1: Connection of the logical signal that is to be read from the host within the
substation control system.
Configuration
The following sections describe two tabs in the Binary Read dialog box. In all tabs
the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
223
Unit
General
A060083
Fig. 4.3.7.3.-2 General tab, function block Binary Read
Field bus address
Instance number

Default: 1
Event: 0->1
The event number assigned to the event when sent. The event is generated if the
logical state at the input changes from 0 to 1 and is sent via the related channel with
the selected event number.
Event: 1->0
the selected event number.
224
Unit
Pins
A060084
Fig. 4.3.7.3.-3 Pins tab, function block Binary Read
225
Unit
4.3.7.4. 16-Bit Read
A060085
Fig. 4.3.7.4.-1 Function block 16-Bit Read
Function
The 16-Bit Read function block is used as well for vertical communication to
receive the RESERVE requests and RESERVE confirmations transmitted by the
host, as also for horizontal communication to receive the interlocking information
from other bays. All changes of the inputs create an event with the instance number
of the changed input as its value information.
A maximum of 32 binary read function block can be entered.
Connection
Input 1 … 16: Connection of the logical signal that is to be read from the host within
the substation control system.
Configuration
The following sections describe two tabs in the 16-Bit Read dialog box. In all tabs
the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
226
Unit
OK
Cancel
General
A060086
Fig. 4.3.7.4.-2 General tab, function block 16-Bit Read
Field bus address
Instance number
227
Unit

Default: 1
Delay time
Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms
Default: 0
Event
The number of the event being used by the function block.
Pins
A060087
228
Unit
4.3.7.5. Direct Read-Write
A060088
Fig. 4.3.7.5.-1 Function block Direct Read-Write
Function
The Direct Read-Write function block enables logical signals to be exported from
the function chart to a station control system. Logical signals can also be sent in the
reverse direction from the control system to the function chart.
A maximum of 100 Direct Read-Write commands can be entered.
Typical application
A typical application is implementing station-level interlocking over the field bus.
Connections
Input R: Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the station control system.
Output W: Signaling output of the logical signal that the station control system is send to
the function chart.
Configuration
The following sections describe two tabs in the Direct Read-Write dialog box. In
all tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
229
Unit
General
A060089
Fig. 4.3.7.5.-2 General tab, function block Direct read-write
Field bus address
Signal number
Select the signal number/event number over which a logical signal is sent or
received. Channel and signal/event number are also shown in the function chart
below the function block.

Default: Next free signal number
230
Unit
Pins
A060090
4.3.7.6. Event Generator
A060091
Fig. 4.3.7.6.-1 Function block Event Generator
Function
The Event Generator function block generates an event if the state at the input
changes from logical 0 to logical 1 or vice versa. This event can be processed by the
station control system.
A maximum of 63 events can be generated with event generators, with

every event generator being able to transmit 2 events.
231
Unit
Typical application
A typical application is generating a real-time event for the substation control

system, if a function block does not provide a corresponding event.
Connections
Input left: Every change of the logical state generates an event.
Configuration
The following section describes two tabs in the Event Generator dialog box. In all
the tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
General
A060092
Fig. 4.3.7.6.-2 General tab, function block Event generator
232
Unit
Field bus address
Event: 0->1
the selected event number. The event is generated if the logical state at the input
changes from 0 to 1 and is sent via channel 100 (default) with the selected event
number. The input "0“ prevents an event from being transmitted.

Default: 0
Event: 1->0
logical state at the input changes from 1 to 0 and is sent via channel 100 (default)
with the selected event number. The input "1“ prevents an event from being
transmitted.

Default: 1
Pins
A060093
Fig. 4.3.7.6.-3 Pins tab, function block Event generator
233
Unit
4.3.7.7. Bay Reserve
A060094
Fig. 4.3.7.7.-1 Function block Bay Reserve
Function
The function block Bay Reserve is used to handle the SELECT/RESERVE

mechanism and is needed once per bay. A maximum of 8 switching devices can be
served by this function block. As well as the internal bay RESERVE requests, the
RESERVE requests from other bays can be processed.
Reservation request
A switching device requires a reservation by putting a logical signal 1 on the related

input RES.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8). This request can be configured by the input INT.REQ.
i (i = 1 … 8) either only as an internal bay request or as a request, in which external
bays must also be taken into account.
234
Unit
Reservation confirmation
The reservation is granted if the following conditions are fulfilled:

* No switching devices have already asked for reservation.
* No reservation request is present.
In case of an external bay reservation, all bays have already confirmed the
reservation.
In case of granted reservation, the output RES.GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8) for the

switching device, which is requesting the reservation, changes to logical signal 1.
The same happens with the output RESERVED. The reservation is then granted
until the reservation is reset by the corresponding switching device.
If an external reservation is configured by INT.RES.i (i = 1 … 8) = 0, the request is

executed after the input GRANT FROM ANY is set to logical 0, which means that
all other bay reservations have been reset. Subsequently the output EXT.RES is set
to logical 1. This information must then be transmitted to the host of the substation
control system by the 16-Bit Read function block.
The Bay Reserve function block now waits for the logical signal 1 at the input
GRANT FROM ALL and the input GRANT VALID, which indicates the validity of
the information on the field bus.
Reservation request from other bays
A logical 1 signal at the input of EXT.RES.REQ. shows a reservation request from

another bay. The bay must confirm the reservation and cannot generate any bay
internal reservation any more. The bay confirms the reservation under the following
condition:
* The bay is not internally or externally reserved.
* The input EXT.REQ.VALID is set to a logical 1 signal and indicates the validity
of the reservation on the field bus.
The reservation is confirmed, if the related output RES-GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8)
becomes a logical 1 signal. This information must then be transmitted by the field
bus to the external bay, which is requesting the reservation.
Connections
Input RES.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8): If a reservation of the assigned switching device is

requested, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.
Input INT.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8): If an external reservation for the assigned switching

device is needed, the input is set with a logical 1 signal. If only internal reservation
for the assigned switching device is needed, the input is set with a logical 0 signal.
Input GRANT FROM ALL: If all other external bays have confirmed the
reservation, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.
235
Unit
Input GRANT FROM ANY: If at least one external bay still indicates a
confirmation of a previous reservation, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.
Input GRANT VALID: If all reservation confirmations are valid after cyclic
actuation by the field bus, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.
Input EXT:RES.REQ.: If a reservation request from an other bay is present, the

input is set with a logical 1 signal.
Input EXT.REQ.VALID: If the external request is valid, the input is set with a
logical 1 signal.
Input BLOCK: If all reservations, inclusive the ongoing reservation, is blocked, the
input is set with a logical 1 signal.
Input OVERRIDE: If the mechanism of the reservation is set out of order, the input
is set with a logical 1 signal. All reservation requests, internally and externally are
granted.
Output RES.GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8): If reservation of the assigned switching device is

granted, the output becomes logical 1.
Output EXT.RES.: If reservation of the assigned switching device is granted, the

output becomes logical 1.
Output EXT.GRANT.: To confirm the related external bays, that this bay is already
prepared for executing the reservation request, the output becomes logical 1.
Output RESERVED: To indicate the reservation status of this bay, the output
becomes logical 1.
Configuration
The following section describes two tabs in the Bay Reserve dialog box. In all the
tabs the OK and Cancel buttons are available.
OK
Cancel
236
Unit
General
A060095
Fig. 4.3.7.7.-2 General tab, function block Bay Reserve
No parameters can be set in the General tab of the Bay Reserve dialog box.
Pins
A060096
Fig. 4.3.7.7.-3 Pins tab, function block Bay Reserve
237
Unit
4.3.7.8. Switch Authority Allocation
A060097
Fig. 4.3.7.8.-1 Function block Switch Authority Allocation
Function
This function block is used to set and to verify the switch authority allocation of all
switching devices installed in the switchgear. Without this function block the status
of the electronic key on the HMI as Local Control Unit is taken as the control status
(NO CONTROL, LOCAL, REMOTE, LOCAL & REMOTE). This function block
can be applied to override the control status of the HMI electronic key or to extend
the REMOTE definition for the allocation of the switch authority. In this case, when
the control status evaluated by the function is REMOTE the switch authority
allocation can be assigned to the Station Control Unit or to the Remote Control
System.
Connection
Input VALID: Logical 1 signal makes the status of all inputs valid. Logical 0 causes
the reset of all the output signals, that is all the switching commands are rejected.
The output signals will be reset with a delay of 500 ms.
Input OFF: Logical 1 signal will set the control status as NO CONTROL. The OFF
output signal will be put at logical 1 and the LOCAL/REMOTE/STATION output
signals will be put at logical 0, i.e. all switching commands are rejected.
Input EXTERNAL: Logical 1 signal leads to an evaluation of the switch authority

allocation to the EXT.KEY LOCAL/REMOTE input signals. The HMI electronic
key state cannot be updated anymore. In case of logical 0, the function will evaluate
238
Unit
the switch authority allocation from the HMI electronic key. In this case the EXT.
KEY LOCAL/REMOTE input signals are ignored and the HMI electronic key state
can be updated.
Input EXT.KEY LOCAL: Logical 1 signal, together with EXTERNAL input at

logical 1, activates the LOCAL control status. Logical 0 signal deactivates the
LOCAL control status.
Input EXT.KEY REMOTE: Logical 1 signal, together with EXTERNAL input at

logical 1, activates the REMOTE control status. Logical 0 signal deactivates the
REMOTE control status.
Input STATION LOCAL: Logical 1 rising slope will enable the local control of the
station.
Input STATION REMOTE: Logical 1 rising slope will change the station control to
remote control.
Input STATION KEY LOCAL: Logical 1 rising slope advises that the station key is
set to local.
Input STATION KEY REMOTE: Logical 1 rising slope advises that the station key
is set to remote.
Input FORCE VALID: Logical 1 signal forces the control status as REMOTE.
Output VALID: Logical 1 signal is present if the input signal is valid.
Output OFF: Logical 1 signals NO CONTROL status, that is all switching

commands are rejected.
Output LOCAL: Logical 1 signals LOCAL control status, that is switching

commands from HMI Control Unit are accepted.
Output STATION: Logical 1 signals station control status, that is switching

commands from Station Control Unit are accepted. It is activated in REMOTE
control status when the local control of the station is enabled (input STATION
LOCAL) or the station key is set to local (input STATION KEY LOCAL).
Output REMOTE: Logical 1 signals remote control status, that is switching

command from Remote Control System are accepted. It is activated in REMOTE
control status when the remote control of the station is enabled (input STATION
REMOTE) and the station key is set to remote (input STATION KEY REMOTE)
239
Unit
General
A060098
Fig. 4.3.7.8.-2 General tab, function block Switch Authority Allocation
No parameters can be set in the General tab of the Switch Authority Allocation
dialog box.
Pins
A060099
Fig. 4.3.7.8.-3 Pins tab, function block Switch Authority Allocation
240
Unit
4.3.8. CAN Communication Objects
Applicable only for ABB the switchgear companies.
4.3.9. Miscellaneous objects
The following sections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are
available in Drawing Menu > Insert > Miscellaneous Objects.
4.3.9.1. Parameter Set Selector
A060100
Fig. 4.3.9.1.-1 Function block Parameter Set Selector
Function
The Parameter Set Selector function block can switch the parameters set of the
protections via FUPLA. The parameter set can be changed if the device is in “run
mode” and one of the activation inputs has a rising edge.
After a parameter set selection the outputs of the function block are updated,
showing which parameter set is active. Additionally the FUPLA signals show
command and storing feedback and status.
Connections
Input ACTIVATE SET1: If REF 542plus is in “run mode” and input shows a rising
edge, parameter set 1 is activated. Default: The input pin is bound to “LOW” (wire
num-ber 1 ;the wire # for open inputs).
241
Unit
Input ACTIVATE SET2: If REF 542plus is in “run mode” and input shows a rising
edge, parameter set 2 is activated. Default: The input pin is bound to “LOW” (wire
num-ber 1 ; the wire # for open inputs).
Input DISABLE COMMANDS: A logical 1 signal at this input disables changing of

the active parameter set when a command is detected. In this case, that is command
detected while SetCommandDisable input is at logical 1, the SetCommandFail
output is set to logical 1.
Input DISABLE STORING: A logical 1 signal at this input disables FLASH storing
of configuration at successful commands.
Output SET1 ACTIVE: High if Parameter Set 1 is active.
Output SET2 ACTIVE: High if Parameter Set 2 is active.
Output SET CMD ENABLED: A logical 1 at this output indicates that a set
command is enabled. The enable conditions are: Logical 0 at Disable Commands
input, Autoreclose is not active, and Alarm LED is not active.
Output SET CMD FAIL: A logical 1 at this output indicates that the last set
command has been detected but it has not been processed due to fail in the enable
conditions.
Output STORING: A logical 1 at this output indicates that a configuration storing is

active. Note that the configuration storing signaling is independent from the
parameter set selector command, that is it is at logical 1 also after a parameterization
(HMI, communication board and so on) or after a configuration download.
Output STORING FAIL: A logical 1 at this output indicates that the last
configuration storing has failed. Note that the configuration storing fail signaling is
independent from the parameter set selector command, that is it is at logical 1 also
when a parameterization (HMI, communication board and so on) or a configuration
download storing fails.
242
Unit
Configuration
A060101
Fig. 4.3.9.1.-2 General tab of configuration dialog box for Parameter Set Selector
Events
A080246
Fig. 4.3.9.1.-3 Events tab of configuration dialog box for Parameter Set Selector
243
Unit
Events description:
E0, E1: Disable commands started/back
E2, E3: Disable storing started/back
E4, E5: Set1 command started/back
E6, E7: Set2 command started/back
E16, E17: Storing started/back
E18, E19: Storing fail started/back
E20, E21: Set command enabled started/back
E22, E23: Set command fail started/back
E24, E25: Set1 active started/back
E26, E27: Set2 active started/backPins
Pins
A060103
Fig. 4.3.9.1.-4 Pins tab of configuration dialog box for Parameter Set Selector
244
Unit
4.3.9.2. Operating hours counter
A060104
Fig. 4.3.9.2.-1 Function block Operating hours counter
Function
The Operating hours counter function block counts the operating hours as long as
there is a logical 1 at its input. A number of operating hours can be set as the start
value.
If an Operating hours counter function block is implemented, the internal Operating

hours counter counts only the hours for which REF 542plus is connected to the
auxiliary voltage. The number of operating hours is shown on the HMI of the
REF 542plus LCD in the operational measured values ring menu. The count of the
internal counter or of the Operating hours counter function block, if activated, is
used.
Only one Operating hours counter function block can be used in the
application.
Typical application
A typical application is that the operating hours of any equipment can be recorded.
Connections
Input left: If this input is set with logical 1, the operating hours counting begins.
245
Unit
Configuration
A060105
Fig. 4.3.9.2.-2 Configuration dialog box of function block Operating hours counter
Operating hours
Input of the factor multiplied by 1000 that sets the initial value of the Operating
hours counter.
Setting range: 0…9 (increment: 0.001)

Default: 0.000
Pins
OK
Cancel
246
Unit
5. Terminology
Term Description
Configuration Tool Software program to configure the REF 542plus. This
program runs on a PC.
Ethernet Physical communication network to transfer Internet data of
the REF 542plus to the PC and back.
Modbus By extension, communication board implementing the
Modbus protocol for REF 542plus.
247
248
Unit
6. Abbreviations
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Auto reclosure
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASDU Application Service Data Unit (IEC 60870-5-103 commu-
nication protocol).
BI Binary input
CAN Controller area network
CB Circuit-breaker
FUPLA Function block programming language; Functional pro-
gramming language; Function plan; Function chart
GPS Global positioning system
ID Identifier; identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication and
modelling
IP Internet protocol
LAG Lon application guide
LD HMI Local detachable human-machine iInterface
LON Local operating network
MAC Media access control
MC Micro controller
MSI Microsoft installer technology
NPS Negative-phase-sequence
PC Personal computer
PLC Programmable logical controller
PO Power output, process object
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
XML Extensible markup language
249
1MRS755871 EN 12/2008
ABB Oy
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
+358 10 2211
+358 10 224 1080
www.abb.com/substationautomation
ProtectIT
Multifunction Protection and Switchbay Control Unit
Manual Part 4:
Communication to station control system
Level 0: Information
ABB
Multifunction Protection and Switchbay Control Unit REF542plus
Manual part 4: Communication to station control system
Table of Contents
1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 3
2 Abbreviations and definitions............................................................................. 5
2.1 Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Definitions ......................................................................................................... 5
3 SPABUS ................................................................................................................ 7
3.1 Structure and functions ..................................................................................... 7
3.2 Interface ............................................................................................................ 8
3.3 Configuration................................................................................................... 10
4 LON according to LAG 1.4 ................................................................................ 11

4.1 Structure and functions ................................................................................... 11
4.2 Interface .......................................................................................................... 12
4.3 Configuration................................................................................................... 13
5 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol .................................................................................. 15

5.1 Structure and functions ................................................................................... 15
5.2 Interface .......................................................................................................... 15
5.3 Protection functions supported ....................................................................... 16
6 MODBUS RTU ..................................................................................................... 18

6.1 Structure and operation principle .................................................................... 18
6.2 Interface .......................................................................................................... 19
6.3 Configuration................................................................................................... 21
6.4 Protocol ........................................................................................................... 22
6.5 Addressing ...................................................................................................... 23
7 Appendix A: Address list for the SPABUS communication board ............... 24

8 Appendix B: Address list for the COM_L communication board................105
9 Appendix C: Interoperability list to COM_I Communication Board ............106
10 Appendix D: Address list for the COM_I communication board.................111
11 Reference ..........................................................................................................112
1VTA100005en-01 PTMV, 10.02.02 Communication to control system 2 / 114

1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the communication interface of the REF542plus
switchbay protection and control unit to the upper level control system. The following
section and subsections contain information on the protocols used:
SPABUS interface
LON interface (per LAG 1.4)
IEC 60870-5-103 interface
MODBUS RTU interface
Interbay bus
HMI
Human Machine
Interface CP
Communication
Processor
Control unit
DSP MC
Analog Protection and Control and
Inputs Measurement Command
Processor Processor
Binary Binary Analog

Inputs Outputs Output
Central Unit
Figure 1: Block diagram of REF 542plus
All these protocols are implemented on dedicated communication boards, which can
be inserted into the REF542plus core unit. Only one protocol and thus only one com-
munication board can be selected.
REF542plus protection and control functionalities are completely independent by the
protocol choice and are not affected by the presence/absence of the communication
board.
REF542plus is a certified product for compliance to the IndustrialIT architecture con-

cept of ABB.
IndustrialIT products can be effectively combined together into value-added systems
and solutions in a “Plug & Produce” manner.
Compliance according to “Level 0: Information” ensures that all relevant product
documentation – including the operation manual, instructions for installation and
maintenance, electrical and mechanical drawings, test reports and specific order in-
formation -is online available, in electronic format, for access via software products
and systems based on the ABB Aspect Integrator Platform.

In this way, significant benefits are enabled to the final user for much easier and ef-
fective installation, configuration, operation and maintenance of the product in the
plant.
Detailed information on Industrial IT is available at <http://www.abb.com/industrialit>.

2 Abbreviations and definitions
2.1 Abbreviations
SPABUS Communication protocol for ABB automation and control system
LON Local Operating Network
LAG 1.4 LON Application Guide version 1.4
MODBUS RTU Communication protocol for industrial application.
IEC International Electro technical Commission
FUPLA FUnctional Programming LAnguage
VATS Very Accurate Time Synchronization
COMTRADE COMmon Format for TRAnsient Data Exchange
PC Personal Computer
HMI Human Machine Interface
LCU HMI as Local Control Unit
2.2 Definitions
There are notes and warnings on hazards at the beginning of every section and also
in the text. They are in a different font to distinguish them from normal text.
The safety warnings must be observed in all circumstances. If they are not observed,
no guarantee claims will be accepted.
Note
A note indicates items that are significant in the specific context. A note may contain
information on the interplay of various software components and appears as shown
below.
Example:
Note Please read this section completely for information on the various formats for safety
notes.

Hazard information level 1

Level 1 hazard information indicates hazards affecting substations and devices. It
should always be observed, because otherwise function interruptions or malfunctions
may occur. An example is shown below:
Caution Do not make any changes to the FUPLA unless you are familiar with the
REF542plus and the configuration software

Level 2 hazard information indicates hazards affecting life and limb. It must be ob-
served to avoid injury to the operator or other personnel.
Example:
Warning! Never attempt to remove the protection covers on the busbars by force.

3 SPABUS
The SPABUS defines an ABB-owned, terminal-oriented communication protocol that
enables efficient access to a register model which completely describes the informa-
tion content of a field device.
The implementation uses the SPABUS protocol definition V2.3 [SPA2.3]. The time
synchronization similar to SPABUS protocol definition V2.5 [SPA2.5] is possible since
release 1.2.
3.1 Structure and functions

The SPABUS is used as a plant-wide, non-redundant field-bus system. In most
cases, it consists of plastic or optical fiber cables. The use of fiber cable is recom-
mend in order to prevent disturbances caused by electromagnetic effects Due to the
more stable transmission performances it is recommend to use the optical fiber than
the plastic fiber cables.
Two different bus structures are supported:
Ring structure
Star structure
A star-type topology requires a star coupler that is able to interface more than one
field devices to a higher-level device. In case one field device fails or a related fiber
optic cable is defective, the higher-level device can continue to communicate with the
rest of the devices.
Figure 2: SPABUS in a star-type topology
For a ring bus, less equipment is required. The failure of any component in the ring,
however, causes an interruption of communication.

Figure 3: SPABUS in a ring-type topology
The SPABUS protocol operates on the master/slave principle. The higher-level sys-
tem interrogates the field devices connected. A spontaneous transmission of data
does not take place.
3.2 Interface
Three communication boards with different connections are available for operating
the REF542plus with a SPABUS interface. Optical standard interfaces are offered for
plastic or glass fiber optics. In exceptional cases as mentioned above, an electrically
isolated RS232 interface can be used.
Figure 4: REF542plus SPABUS board with optical interfaces

The following tables list some of the technical data of the three physical interfaces.
Table 1: Characteristic features of the optical interface for plastic fiber optics
Description Specification
Cable connector: HP HFBR 4503
Cable diameter: 1 mm
Max. cable length: 40 m
Wavelength: 660 nm
Transmitter power (typical): -13 dBm
Limit received power: -20 dBm
Idle condition: Light ON
Table 2: Characteristic features of the optical interface for glass fiber optics
Cable connector: F-SMA
Cable diameter: 62.5/125 µm
Wavelength: 820-900 nm
The RS232 interface does not use any handshake signals. Instead, a ±12V voltage
supply is available for coupling modules. The power consumption should not exceed
2W. The terminal assignments of the female SUB-D9 plug-type connector are:
Table 3: Characteristic features of the optical interface for glass fiber optics
Terminal Name
1 —
2 TxD: send data
3 RxD receive data
4 +12V voltage supply
5 Mass
(signaling and voltage supply)
6 —
7 —
8 —
9 -12V voltage supply

The parameters specified for the serial interface are listed in the table below:
Table 4: Interface parameters

Baud rate 9600
Data bits 7
Stop bits 1
Parity even
3.3 Configuration
In the configuration software, the SPABUS protocol can be selected in the menu
Main Menu/Configure/Hardware, group box field bus and the related
combo box. Using the button Parameters… the necessary parameter, the device
address and the bus structure, can be specified.
Appendix A contains a list of all the SPABUS registers as well as the associated
events. The registers are arranged by functions. Most of the registers can only be ac-
cessed successfully if the respective function has been released in the configuration
software, for instance, by inserting a function block into the flowchart, which is in the
following abbreviated as FUPLA. Furthermore, events are indicated only if the asso-
ciated register is accessible and the respective event message has been released. In
case a non-configured register is accessed, a negative check back signal (NACK:
negative acknowledgment) is transmitted.

4 LON according to LAG 1.4

Presently, the LON (Local Operating Network) is the standard bus system used in
substation control by ABB. It is a standardized and commonly used communication
bus with a data transfer rate of up to 1.25 Mbits/sec. In order to meet the high re-
quirements on substation control with regard to safety, throughput and accuracy, ABB
uses, to some extent, proprietary mechanisms.

A LON network does not need a dedicated master. Messages or specified structures,
e.g. network variables, can be sent from any data source to one or several informa-
tion sinks. A control system, however, will distinguish between field devices and
higher-level devices. One speaks of horizontal communication if devices of the same
level communicate with each other, otherwise of vertical communication.
Figure 5: Horizontal and vertical communication
For horizontal communication between field equipment — as it is used, for instance,

for interlocking purposes — exclusively standard network variables of the nv_status
type are being used. A higher-level system is not necessary in this case.
ABB bases its vertical communication features on the use of explicit messages in ac-
cordance with the specifications in [LAG1.4]. Two important issues need to be taken
into consideration:
Firstly, a sliding window protocol is used in order to avoid a potential bus overload
and to achieve a good throughput rate without any loss of telegrams. This way, it
is possible to transfer approximately 30 messages per second to an individual,
higher-level system, while a total of 40 messages per second can be transmitted
to four higher-order systems.

Secondly, the quality attributes known from the international standard IEC 60870-
5-101 are used on the LON as well. This makes it possible to make statements
regarding the reliability of data.
A typical higher-level system which fully supports [LAG1.4] is ABB's MicroSCADA
SYS500.
4.2 Interface
For interfacing the REF542plus with the ABB Substation Automation System, a
COM_L communication board has to be used.
Figure 6: REF542plus COM_L board with optical interfaces (ST connectors)
The REF542plus is connected to the process control system by means of glass fiber
optic cables using an ST plug:
Table 5: Characteristic features of the optical interface for glass fiber optic cables
Connector: ST
Cable diameter: 62.5/125 um
Limit received power -24 dBm

4.3 Configuration
The COM_L communication board is self-configuring. This means, it is only neces-
sary to set the device address in the configuration software. What information can be
made available in the network will be determined automatically when starting. For this
purpose, the system identifies, internally, which SPABUS registers are accessible.
Most of the registers are linked to predefined LON addresses. Appendix B contains a
complete list of this address mapping.
By means of a mechanism called Transparent SPABUS Messages and based on
message code 65 it is possible to access any information of the register model.
For the purpose of time synchronization, the REF542plus supports two different pro-
cedures:
A vendor-independent synchronization of a mean accuracy (approximately 10
msec) using network variables nv_clock_warning and nv_clock, cf. [LAG1.4], and
an ABB specific synchronization of a high accuracy (approximately 1msec) in ac-
cordance with VATS (Very Accurate Time Synchronization) with bit pattern detec-
tion, for example, supported by ABB subassembly SLCM (Serial LON Clock Mas-
ter) of star coupler ABB RER111 [SLCM].
The COM_L board automatically recognizes which procedure is being used and ad-
justs to it accordingly.
In the flowchart (FUPLA), the REF542plus provides 64 16-bit-write and 16-bit-read
objects. The associated standard network variables of type nv_status of 64 16-bit-
write and 58 16-bit-read objects can be used for horizontal communication. Linking
the data sources to the data sinks, referred to as binding, must be done using a suit-
able add-on program, such as the LON Network Tool [LNT505] by ABB. For this pur-
pose, the field device has to be first assigned a subnet/node address, which, in turn,
requires that the 48-bit Neuron ID of the built-in communication processors is used.
This ID is transmitted with the service pin message generated by the REF542plus as
soon as the Local/Remote switch is turned into the "Remote" position and the associ-
ated SPABUS event has been released.
For vertical communication, up to 4 higher-order systems are supported in the
REF542plus. Implementation of quality attributes for signals in accordance with IEC
60870-5-101 is subject to some restrictions in the case of the REF542plus. These are
listed in the table below.
Table 6: Support of the IEC 870-5-101 quality attributes

Attributes Use in the REF542plus
Invalid IV Hardware malfunction detected in the process signaling circuit. In
the REF542plus, this may be an input signal indicating a distur-
bance within the signaling circuit (e.g. signaling voltage failed).
The IV attribute is generated in the flowchart (FUPLA) of the
REF542plus by the following objects
- Signaling Circuit Supervision for Binary Inputs and
- Signaling Circuit Supervision for Analog Inputs
and generally applies to all the signals concerned.
Blocked BL Signaling suppression; the acquisition of the signal is inhibited. The
signal status is assigned the value collected last until the blocking
is canceled.
The BL attribute is generated in the flowchart of the REF542plus by
the following object:
- Signaling Suppression Binary and/or Analog Inputs

Attributes Use in the REF542plus

Substituted SB Not supported by the REF542plus
Not Topical NT Not supported by the REF542plus
Overflow OV Overflow; occurring only with measured values. Is set when leaving
the permissible measuring range or when the value can no longer
be transferred in the specified data format.
Generated on COM-L.
Time Invalid TV COM-L receives no time synchronization. This bit does not affect
the signal status.
Generated on COM-L.
The MicroSCADA SYS500 system by ABB uses the LIB542plus function library which
contains all the LON-specific functions of the REF542plus within the SYS500 envi-
ronment. [LIB542]

5 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

The interface in accordance with the international standard IEC 60870-5-103 [IEC-
103] is a vendor-independent communication interface for the REF542plus.

The protocol to IEC 60870-5-103 operates on the master/slave principle. The higher-
level system interrogates the field devices connected. A spontaneous transmission of
data does not take place.
5.2 Interface
In order to be able to provide for a IEC 60870-5-103 interface in the REF542plus, a
COM_I communication board is needed.
Figure 7: REF542plus COM_I board with optical interfaces
Connecting the REF542plus to the higher-level system is done by means of glass fi-
ber optic cables using ST plugs:

Table 7: Characteristic features of the optical interface

Cable connector: ST
Cable diameter: 62.5/125 µm
The parameters needed for the serial interface are:
Table 8: Interface parameters

Baud rate 9600
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Parity even
5.3 Protection functions supported

In addition to general functions, the REF542plus supports three main functions on its
IEC 60870-5-103 interface:
Distance protection t(z): FUN=128,
Overcurrent definite time protection I>>: FUN=160, and
Transformer differential protection ∆IT: FUN=176.
Generic services and fault log disposal have not been implemented to date. Further-
more, the REF542plus does not deliver certain information, namely:
Regarding distance protection
INF 25 and INF 26 (characteristic 3 or 4) in command and monitoring direction.
Only two sets of parameters are available with this protection function.
INF 35 (phase sequence supervision)
A faulty phase sequence is not indicated with this protection function.
INF 69, 70, 71 (trip L1, trip L2, trip L3)
A trip is not indicated separately for each phase with this protection function.
INF 144, 145, 146, 147
Measured values are signaled by the ASDU only.

Regarding overcurrent definite time protection

INF 35 (phase sequence supervision)
A faulty phase sequence is not indicated with this protection function.
INF 144, 145, 147
Regarding transformer differential protection
INF 144, 145, 147
The scope of functions described above is specified in compact form in the interop-
erability list in Appendix C.
For combined units, such as the REF542plus, where protection and binary control
functions are integrated within one device, additional information about the 'private'
area of the common communication interface has to be transferred that is not in-
cluded by the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. Therefore, some of the control and measur-
ing functions available in the REF542plus are made available, based on the specifica-
tions in "Ergänzende Empfehlungen zur Anwendung in Verteilnetzen“ by VDEW
[VDEW]. For more details, please refer to Appendix D.
The main function of overcurrent definite time protection has already been tested for
the purpose of verifying interoperability and has been certified [FGH_UMZ].
There are two special aspects of the implementation discussed here which need to be
taken into consideration:
1. The COM_I communication board does not provide for permanent storage of
events. The consequence is that, when the device is being reset, events may be
lost which have not yet been transferred to the higher-level system.
2. The commands
INF 16 (auto-reclose ON/OFF)
INF 17 (teleprotection ON/OFF)
INF 18 (protection ON/OFF)
are executed and the current status is indicated. For disconnecting, for in-
stance, the Auto-reclose ON command is specified. This will prompt a posi-
tive acknowledgment by status ON. Then, the status switches over to OFF.
In the configuration software, the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is selected in the main
menu under Settings / Device Configuration in the field bus section. The only parame-
ter that needs to be specified is a device address.

6 MODBUS RTU
All data listed in the SPABUS table for the REF 542plus can be processed by the
MODBUS RTU card.
The event chronology is codified in the SPABUS table. The buffer is in position to re-
cord the last 100 events. As the master unit sends out a request, the REF 542 plus
transmits the stored events, marked by the absolute time (year-month-day-hour-
second-millisecond). REF 542 plus shows the number of stored events in a dedicated
location so that the master unit can read the event table (polling).
The unit type REF542 plus can record and encode as a wave form all the analog
channels as well as the status of 32 digital channels and transmit them on request to
the master unit. The master unit translates the file in “COMTRADE” format (by
means of a *.ddl file). The unit feeds a buffer of 5 sec and a maximum number of 5
records (of 1 sec each). REF 542 plus is equipped with a dedicated memory to store
the number of recorded events so that the master unit can read the records (polling).
6.1 Structure and operation principle

The communication between REF542 plus and the upper system level is based on
master-slave procedures; the card does not generate data of any kind and cannot
perform polling activities.
All the reading and writing activities carried out by REF 542 plus and the communica-
tion systems are based on a memory map located in the communication card. A dedi-
cated PC-operated configuration tool defines this map; the card is configured by con-
necting the communication gate with the serial gate of the PC. The configuration tool
is set up so as to program all the units connected to the same communication bus as
well as to work on a single map.
The different possible architecture can be seen from the following figures.
Master
REF542 plus REF542 plus REF542 plus
Figure 8: Single communication channel

Master
Figure 9: Double communication channel on redundant bus and master units
Master Master
Figure 10: Double communication channel on redundant bus and master units
6.2 Interface
The communication card is available in two hardware versions: the first one with two
serial communication gate having the same characteristics according to standard
RS485 on twisted shielded pair. The second one also similar to the first one with two
gates, but with glass fiber optic. The connector type is ST (up to two pairs of drivers
Tx and Rx).
In the RS-485 version, the communication is half duplex for each channel and a gen-
eral purpose I/O pin is used to enable/disable the transmitter/receiver. In the fibre op-
tic version, the communication is full duplex. A general purpose I/O pin is used to en-
able/disable the re-circulation from Rx to Tx in case of ring topology of the fibre optic
network.

In the next figure the MODBUS RTU board with 2 RS485 can be seen.
Figure 11: MODBUS RTU communication board with 2 RS485 connectors
The two gates work simultaneously and operate separately. In order to guarantee a
high level of safety, the data are processed as per the following table:
R/W Access Mode

Data read- Always active on Simultaneous readout.
out both gates.
Events Always active on Simultaneous readout.
readout both gates.
Fault re- Always active on Simultaneous readout.
cording both gates.
readout
Control writ- Active on a single After one of the two gates get the input to open a con-
ing gate after the open- trol session, the same operation cannot be performed
ing of a control ses- on the other gate.
sion.
A further control session is made possible only after
the conclusion of the previous session.
Parameter Active on a single After one of the two gates get the input to open a pa-
writing gate after the open- rameter session, the same operation cannot be per-
ing of a parameter formed on the other gate.
session.
A further parameter session is made possible only af-
ter the conclusion of the previous session.
Both the control and the parameter session can work independently; they can be acti-
vated simultaneously either on the same gate or separately on the two gates. As to
the single gate card, the controls and the parameters can be accessed only after the
opening of the relevant sessions. The sessions can be closed in two different ways:
on request or automatically, should the opening time exceed the maximum pre-set

time. The session opening does not affect the local or remote functionality of
REF542plus.
Table 9: Main features of the REF 542 plus communication function using MODBUS RTU:
Description Features
Type of transmission Serial Asynchronous
Protocol MODBUS RTU slave
Baud Rate 300, 600, 1.200, 2.400, 4.800, 9.600, 19.200,
38.400, 76.800 bauds
Data bits 11 (including start, stop, parity)
Parity check None, even, odd
First communication mode
Data flow Half duplex
Connections EIA RS485
Connectors 2 wires terminal block
Maximum distance 1300 m
Second communication mode
Data flow Full duplex
Connections Glass fiber optic
Connector Standard ST
Maximum distance 2000 m
Number of gates Up to two for each communication mode

Number of units to be connected on Up to 32
the same bus
6.3 Configuration
The two gates communication cards can be configured independently on both sides:
Table 10: Configuration of the two gate cards

R/W Access Mode
Configuration Active on a single After one of the two gates get the input to open a
writing gate after the open- configuration session, the same operation cannot be
ing of a configuration performed on the other gate.
session.
A further configuration session is made possible only
after the conclusion of the previous session.

6.4 Protocol
The MODBUS specification is implemented according to the following restrictions:
Only the RTU mode is implemented (ASCII mode is not implemented).
MODBUS function are handled according to the following table:
Function Meaning Implementation Notes

1 Read coil status full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
2 Read input status full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
3 Read holding registers full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
4 Read input registers full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
5 Force single coil full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
6 Preset single register full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
7 Read exception status full compliant on static custom data
8 Loopback diagnostic compliant on static custom data
test
9 Program – 1 not implemented
10 Poll program complete not implemented
-1
11 Fetch event counter not implemented
communications
12 Fetch communications not implemented
event log
14 Poll program complete not implemented
-2
15 Force multiple coils full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
16 Preset multiple regis- full compliant based on dynamic DDefs
ters
17 Report slave Id compliant on static custom data
19 Reset communications not implemented
link
20 Read general reference compliant on custom on 4 custom files
data
21 Write general reference compliant on custom on 4 custom files
data
22..64 Reserved for expanded not implemented
functions
Note Each CommBoard serial channel may have a different MODBUS Slave Address.
These addresses are supplied to the CommBoard following the steps described in the
paragraph “Configuration” in the next chapter.

6.5 Addressing
The MODBUS protocol allows to read/write data by means of their addresses in the
MODBUS virtual address space.
Such an address space is partitioned according to the following data types:
Table 11: MODBUS address space

Range Length Type Access functions
1..10000 1 bit data COILS 1 (read) , 5 (write), 15 (mul-
tiple write)
10001..20000 1 bit data INPUT STATES 2 (read)
20001..30000 unused
30001..40000 16 bits (word) INPUT REGISTERS1 4 (read)
40001..50000 16 bits (word) REGISTRI OUTPUT2 3 (read) , 6 (write), 16 (mul-
tiple write)
Note In order to allow a faster transmission of disturbance records, the Comm Board Mod-
bus protocol reserves the Modbus range 39900 .. 39931 to the REF542 variable M31.
1 Device’s variables that the Control system can read but not modify.
2 Device’s variables that the Control system can read and modify.

7 Appendix A: Address list

for the SPABUS communication board
The address list starts with a table of contents providing an overview of the functions
listed below. Then, the registers are listed, sorted by functions.
A register address is specified by a channel and a code. The channel generally refers
to the higher-level function, however, does not have to be unambiguous. The code
describes the register type and contains an index. The register types mostly used are:
I (input) for information on physical inputs,
O (output) for information on physical outputs,
S (setting) for parameters, and
V (variable) for other variables.
A complete and correct register address, for instance, is 10I4

with channel 10, register type I and index 4. It reflects the status of a binary input.
This status is assigned the events 10E0, indicating a changeover to status 1 (ON),
and 10E1, occurring in case of change to status 0 (OFF).
Compared to the address list of the REF542, the following changes are to be noted:
System parameters (channel 0)
In order to support the 8th analog input, two new registers have been introduced and
others postponed. Now, the following applies:
Sensor configuration:
Sensor 1 R-0-V-30
Sensor 2 R-0-V-31
Sensor 3 R-0-V-32
Sensor 4 R-0-V-33
Sensor 5 R-0-V-34
Sensor 6 R-0-V-35
Sensor 7 R-0-V-36
Sensor 8 R-0-V-37
and
Nominal grid values:

Sensor 1 R-0-V-40
Sensor 2 R-0-V-41
Sensor 3 R-0-V-42
Sensor 4 R-0-V-43
Sensor 5 R-0-V-44
Sensor 6 R-0-V-45
Sensor 7 R-0-V-46
Sensor 8 R-0-V-47
Measured values (channel 1)
In order to support the 8th analog input, registers
R-1-I-22, R-I-I-62, R-1-I-99, R-1-I-100, R-1-I-125, R-1-I-126
have been added.

Display unit (channel 4)

When introducing the new, projecting display unit, registers R-4-I-3 and R-4-I-4 were
modified and registers R-4-I-11/42 added.

SPABUS List Release 4C01

Data Events Channel Code R/W Save Min Max Step Unit Single Value Type Fator
Protection function parameter
Inrush blocking 50
Overcurrent instantaneous 51
Overcurrent definite time, high set 52
Overcurrent definite time, low set 53
Overcurrent directional, high set 54
Overcurrent directional, low set 55
Overcurrent IDMT normally inverse 56
Overcurrent IDMT very inverse 57
Overcurrent IDMT extremely inverse 58
Overcurrent IDMT long-time inverse 59
Earthfault non-directional, high set 66
Earthfault non-directional, low set 67
Earthfault IDMT normal inverse 68
Earthfault IDMT very inverse 69
Earthfault IDMT extremely inverse 70
Earthfault IDMT long time inverse 71
Earthfault directional, high set 72
Earthfault directional, low set 73
Sensitive Earthfault directional 88

Overvoltage instantaneous 60
Overvoltage definite time, high set 61
Overvoltage definite time, low set 62

Undervoltage instantaneous 63
Undervoltage definite time, high set 64
Undervoltage definite time, low set 65
Residual overvoltage definite time 82
high
Residual overvoltage definite time low 83
Motor protection functions

Thermal Overload 74
Motorstart protection 80
Blocked rotor protection 86
Number of starts 87
Distance protection functions

Distance protection function 81
Differential protection func-

tions
Differential protection function 79
Other protection functions

Unsymetrical load 75
(Unbalanced load I)
Unbalanced load II 75
Directional power protection 76
Low load protection 77
Thermal supervision 78
Frequency supervision 84
Synchro Check 85
Event list
Monitoring values 0
SCU Status 0

Monitoring special status 3
IEC 60870-5-103
System Errors
operating system definition of errors 0
driver EEPROM definition of errors 0
HOST INTERFACE: definition errors 0
COMMUNICATION: PC<->SCU de- 0
fine. Errors
PROTECTION FUNCTION: define. 0
Errors
CONFIGURATION errors 0
LON: definition of errors 0
Version and project in-

formation
Module type designation 0 F1 R y "ISM SCU" ST
Software version of controller 0 F2 R y ST
Software version of DSP 0 F3 R y ST
Software version of field bus interface 0 F4 R y ST
Hardware version 0 F5 R y ST
Software version of config software 0 F6 R y ST
Project name 0 F7 R y ST
Date of configuration of protection 0 F8 R y ST
functions
Time of configuration of protection 0 F9 R y ST
functions
Date of configuration of FUPLA 0 F10 R y ST
Time of configuration of FUPLA 0 F11 R y ST
Name of project manager 0 F12 R y ST

Measurement values
Sensors 1,2,3
Actual Current L1 1 I1 R n A SL /1000
Actual Voltage U1_2 1 I8 R n V SL /1000
Actual Voltage U1_N 1 I11 R n V SL /1000
Current L1, % of Inom 1 I41 R n % SL /1000
Voltage U1_2, % of Unom 1 I48 R n % SL /1000
Voltage U1_N, % of Unom 1 I51 R n % SL /1000
Sensors 4,5,6
Sensor 7, 8
Actual Current Io/ Voltage Uo (analog 1 I7 R n V/A SL /1000
channel 7)
Actual Current Io/ Voltage Uo (analog 1 I22 R n V/A SL /1000
channel 8)
Actual Value Io_Uo, calculated, Set 1 1 I14 R n V/A SL /1000
Actual Value Io_Uo, calculated, Set 2 1 I21 R n V/A SL /1000
Value Uo_Io , % of Io / Uo nom (ana- 1 I47 R n % SL /1000
log channel 7)
Value Uo_Io , % of Io / Uo nom (ana- 1 I62 R n % SL /1000
log channel 8)
Value Uo_Io, % of nom Set 1 1 I54 R n % SL /1000
Value Uo_Io, % of nom Set 2 1 I61 R n % SL /1000
Calculated values
Frequency 1 I81 R n Hz SL /1000
Power factor cos(phi) 1 I82 R n SL /1000
Active power 1 I83 R n kW SL /1000
Reactive power 1 I84 R n kvar SL /1000
Apparent power 1 I85 R n kVA SL /1000
Io * sin (phi) or Io * cos(phi) 1 I86 R n A SL /1000
Real Energy 1 I87 R PD MWh SL /1000
Reactive Energy 1 I88 R PD Mvarh SL /1000
Maximum measured values
Demand current L1 1 I89 R n A SL /1000
Maximal demand current L1 1 I92 R PD A SL /1000
Synchrocheck dependent values
Delta Phase 1 I95 R n ° SL /1000
Delta Voltage 1 I96 R n V SL /1000
Actual Voltage between Sensor 3 and 1 I97 R n V SL /1000
Sensor 7
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 8
Delta Voltage in % of Unom 1 I122 R n % SL /1000
Actual Voltage between Sen. 3 and 1 I123 R n % SL /1000
Sen. 7 in % of Unom
Sen. 7 in % of Unom
Sen. 8 in % of Unom
Sen. 8 in % of Unom
Voltage Monitoring

U1max L1-L2 1 I101 R n V SL /1000
U1max L2-L3 1 I102 R n V SL /1000
U1max L3-L1 1 I103 R n V SL /1000
U1min L1-L2 1 I104 R n V SL /1000
U1min L2-L3 1 I105 R n V SL /1000
U1min L3-L1 1 I106 R n V SL /1000
U2max L1-L2 1 I107 R n V SL /1000
U2max L2-L3 1 I108 R n V SL /1000
U2max L3-L1 1 I109 R n V SL /1000
U2min L1-L2 1 I110 R n V SL /1000
U2min L2-L3 1 I111 R n V SL /1000
U2min L3-L1 1 I112 R n V SL /1000
Energy pulse counter
Actual value 110 V1..10 R/W PD MWh SL /1000
Energy per pulse 110 S1..10 R/W y kWh SL /1000
Counter object #: instance number 1..8
Number of fractional digits 96 V#1 R/W y 0 3 1 US 1
Counter value 96 V#2 R/W y +/-2e9 acc. V1 SL 1/1000
Reset counter 1: E[7 * (# - 1)] 96 V#3 W n 1 1 0 US 1
Reset value 96 V#4 R/W y +/-2e9 acc. V1 SL 1/1000
Warning threshold 96 V#5 R/W y +/-2e9 acc. V1 SL 1/1000
Alarm threshold 96 V#6 R/W y +/-2e9 acc. V1 SL 1/1000
Scale factor 96 V#7 R/W y 1e8 acc. V1 UL 1/1000
Exponent 96 V#8 R/W y +/-2e9 1 SL 1/1000
Warning output state 1: E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 1], 0: 96 O#1 R n 0 1 1 US 1
E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 2]
Alarm output state 1: E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 3], 0: 96 O#2 R n 0 1 1 US 1
E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 4]
Overflow output state 1: E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 5](pos.) 96 O#3 R n 0 1 1 US 1
0: E[(7 * (# - 1)) + 6](neg.)
Powerfactor controller
Digital Inputs
Block input 1=E22;0=E23 97 I1 R n 0 1 1 0=blocking disabled; 1=blocking enabled US
Disconnect 1=E14;0=E15 97 I2 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
Reset 1=E21 97 I3 R n 0 1 1 1=signal on US
Mode: Manual 1=E24;0=E25 97 I4 R n 0 1 1 0=automatic; 1=manual US
Set Night 1=E26;0E27 97 I5 R n 0 1 1 0=day; 1=night US
Overtemp 1=E8;0=E9 97 I6 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
V Min / V Max 1=E12;0=E13 97 I7 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
Va Max 1=E10;0=E11 97 I8 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
Manual Control 0..3 97 I9..12 R n 0 1 1 0=disconnect bank; 1=connect bank US
Checked Back 0..3 97 I13..16 R n 0 1 1 0=bank not connected;1=bank connected US
Digital Outputs
Q Alarm (more reactive power 1=E18;0=E19 97 O1 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
needed)
cos phi Alarm (threshold value 1=E16;0=E17 97 O2 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
reached)
Operations Alarm (max allowed op- 1=E20 97 O3 R n 0 1 1 0=signal off; 1=signal on US
erations reached)
General alarm (e.g VaMax, Overtemp 97 O4 R n 0 1 1 1=signal on US
...)
Switch On/Off 0..3 (which banks to Bank On=E0..E3; Bank 97 O5..8 R n 0 1 1 0=disconnect bank; 1=connect bank US
connect) Off=E4..E7
Parameters
Number of Capacitor Banks 97 S1 R n 1 4 1 number of available capacitor banks US
Reactive Power of smallest Bank, Qc0 97 S2 R n 1 20000 1 KVAr capacity of the smallest bank UL
Switching sequence (linear, circular) 97 S3 R n 0 1 1 0=linear; 1=circular US

Configuration of Banks 97 S4 R n 0 65535 1 Units of Units of Qc0 of the Banks: 4 Bit per Bank: US
Qc0 Value=0..15 / Bit 0..3=Bank 4, Bit 4..7=Bank
3,Bit 8..11=Bank2, Bit 12..15=Bank1
Max Operations 97 S5 R n 1 10000 1 maximal operations for each bank US
Neutral Zone (Switching hysteresis) 97 S6 R/W y 105 200 1 % Neutral Zone for switching of a bank (in % of US
Qc0)
Pickup Value (Switching hysteresis) 97 S7 R/W y 0 100 1 % Pickup Value for switching of a Bank (in % of US
Qc0)
Parameter Set 1
Operation Method (direct/integral) 97 S9 R n 0 1 1 0=direct; 1=integral US
Discharge blocking time 97 S10 R/W y 1 7200 1 s UL
Dead time 97 S11 R/W y 1 120 1 s UL
Poweron delay 97 S12 R/W y 1 7200 1 s UL
Integration time 97 S14 R/W y 1 7200 1 s duration of integration UL
Day / Night
cos phi setpoint 97 S15/20 R/W y 0,7 1 0,01 cos phi setpoint SL
setpoint cos phi = capacitiv or inductiv 97 S16/21 R/W y 0 1 1 0=capacitiv; 1=inductiv US
cos phi Limit 97 S17/22 R/W y 0 1 0,01 alarm threshold for cos phi SL
Limit cos phi = capacitiv or inductiv 97 S18/23 R/W y 0 1 1 0=capacitiv; 1=inductiv US
Parameter Set 2
Operation Method (direct/integral) 97 S25 R n 0 1 1 0=direct; 1=integral US
Discharge blocking time 97 S26 R/W y 0 7200 1 s UL
Dead time 97 S27 R/W y 0 120 1 s UL
Poweron delay 97 S28 R/W y 0 7200 1 s UL
Integration time 97 S30 R/W y 0 7200 1 s UL
Day / Night
cos phi setpoint 97 S31/36 R/W y 0,7 1 0,01 cos phi setpoint SL
setpoint cos phi = capacitiv or inductiv 97 S32/37 R/W y 0 1 1 0=capacitiv; 1=inductiv US
cos phi Limit 97 S33/38 R/W y 0 1 0,01 alarm threshold for cos phi SL
Limit cos phi = capacitiv or inductiv 97 S34/39 R/W y 0 1 1 0=capacitiv; 1=inductiv US
Monitoring values
Circuit breaker contact wear CB 90 V100 R/W PD 0=Reset UL /1000
Operating hours 90 V101 R PD h UL /1000
Added switched current of CB 90 V102 R/W PD A UL /1000
Coil continuity output 1, I/O card 1 90 V103 R n 0 1 1 0=continuity; 1=no continuity alarm US
LCU
Status LED 1( ALARM ) 0=E7,1=E6 4 I1 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 1=red US
Status LED 2 (interlocking) All with channel 0: 4 I2 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 1=red; 2=green US
2=E9,1=E8
Status LED: READY 4 I3 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 2=green US

Status LED: network communica- 4 I4 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 1=red; 2=green US
tion
Status LED 10 (protection function) All wich channel 0: 4 I10 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 1=red; 2=green; 3=amber US
E10=ready started (black-
grn)
E11=start started(grn-
amb)
E12=trip started(amb-red)
E13=trip back(red-amb)
E14=start back(amb-grn)
E15=ready back(grn-
black)
grn-red: see trip events
start
red-grn: see trip events
back
Status LED: config. 1..32 4 I11/42 R n 0 3 1 0=black; 1=red; 2=green; 3=amber US

Status of local/remote key switch 0=E29,1=E28 0 V6 R n 0 1 1 0=local; 1=remote US
Status of operational/set key switch 0=E27,1=E26 0 V7 R n 0 1 1 0=operational; 1=set US
Binary inputs
Card 1
Binary input status, 1 to 14, I/O card 1 2 I1/14 R n 0 9 1 0=open status; 1=closed status; 9=not in US
use
Card 2
Binary input status, 15 to 28, I/O card 3 I1/14 R n 0 9 1 0=open status; 1=closed status; 9=not in US
2 use
Switch objects
Status input
Status "1 input"
Status of an object, "1 input" 0=E1;1=E0 5..49,111. I4 R n 0 1 1 0=false; 1=true US
..127
Status "2 input"
Status of an object, "2 inputs" 0=E0 ; 1=E2 ; 2=E1 ; 5..49,111. I1 R n 0 3 1 0=moving; 1=closed; 2=open; 3=error US
3=E4 ..127
Closed status of an object "2 inputs" 5..49,111. I2 R n 0 1 1 0=not closed; 1=closed US
..127
Open status of an object, "2 inputs" 5..49,111. I3 R n 0 1 1 0=not open; 1=open US
..127
Status "3 input"
Status of an object, "3 inputs" 0=E0;3=E1;2=E2;1=E3;4= 5..49,111. I5 R n 0 4 1 0=moving;1=on line;2=isolated;3=on US
E4 ..127 earth;4=error
Line status of an object, "3 inputs" 5..49,111. I6 R n 0 1 1 0=not on line; 1=on line US
..127
Isolation/open status of an object, "3 5..49,111. I7 R n 0 1 1 0=not isolated; 1=isolated US
inputs" ..127
Earth status of an object, "3 inputs" 5..49,111. I8 R n 0 1 1 0=not on earth; 1=on earth US
..127
End not reached 1=E7 ; 0=E8 5..49,111. I9 R n 0 1 1 0=nothing detected; 1=end not reached US
..127

Status output
Trip/Signal output status, output 1 of 5..49,111. I51 R n 0 9 1 0=open status;1=closed status; 9=not in use US
switching object ..127
Trip/Signal output status, output 2 of 5..49,111. I52 R n 0 9 1 0=open status;1=closed status; 9=not in use US
Direct output write - station

Write to one output object 0=E5;1=E6 5..49,111. O1 W n 0 1 1 0=open it; 1=close it US
..127
Write to two outputs object 0=E9;1=E10 5..49,111. O1 W n 0 1 1 0=open it; 1=close it US
..127
Write 4/3 or 6/5 outputs object Isolator 5..49,111. O2 W n 0 1 1 0=goto earth; 1=goto line US
..127
Write 4/3 or 6/5 outputs object 5..49,111. O3 W n 0 1 1 0=goto line; 1=goto earth US
Earthing switch ..127
Direct signal output write 1 to 2 5..49,111. O1 W n 0 1 1 0=not active; 1=active US
..127
..127
Direct output write - remote

Write to one output object 0=E5;1=E6 5..49,111. O4 W n 0 1 1 0=open it; 1=close it US
..127
Write to two outputs object 0=E9;1=E10 5..49,111. O4 W n 0 1 1 0=open it; 1=close it US
..127
Write 4/3 or 6/5 outputs object Isolator 5..49,111. O5 W n 0 1 1 0=goto earth; 1=goto line US
..127
Write 4/3 or 6/5 outputs object 5..49,111. O6 W n 0 1 1 0=goto line; 1=goto earth US
Earthing switch ..127
..127
..127
Double command state read

Selection E21: not selected; E22: 5..49,111. V1 R n 0 1 1 0: not selected; 1; selected US
selected ..127

Interlocking bypass E23: not active; E24: ac- 5..49,111. V7 R n 0 1 1 7 US
tive ..127
Double command output write -

station
Select E21: not selected; E22: 5..49,111. V1 R/W n 0 1 1 0: not selected, 1: selected / select US
selected ..127
Write to one output object 1=E5 5..49,111. V2 W n 1 1 1 1=switch it ON US
..127
Write to one output object 1=E6 5..49,111. V3 W n 1 1 1 1=switch it OFF US
..127
Write to two output object 0=E9;1=E10 5..49,111. V2 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Write to two output object 0=E5;1=E6 5..49,111. V3 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Two output object: Select open 0=E21;1=E22 5..49,111. V5 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Two output object: Select close 0=E21;1=E22 5..49,111. V6 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127
Cancel select 5..49,111. V4 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Interlocking bypass (ATTENTION! use E23: not active; E24: ac- 5..49,111. V7 R/W n 0 1 1 0: not active, 1: active / activate US
it with great care!) tive ..127
Synchrocheck bypass (new 22-SO E23: not active; E24: ac- 5..49,111. V8 R/W n 0 1 1 0: not active, 1: active / activate US
only) tive ..127
Double command output write -

remote
Select E21: not selected; E22: 5..49,111. V9 W n 1 1 1 1: select US
selected ..127
Write to one output object 1=E5 5..49,111. V10 W n 1 1 1 1=switch it ON US
..127
Write to one output object 1=E6 5..49,111. V11 W n 1 1 1 1=switch it OFF US
..127
Write to two output object 0=E9;1=E10 5..49,111. V10 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127

Write to two output object 0=E5;1=E6 5..49,111. V11 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Two output object: Select open 0=E21;1=E22 5..49,111. V13 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Two output object: Select close 0=E21;1=E22 5..49,111. V14 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127
Cancel select 5..49,111. V12 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Interlocking bypass (ATTENTION! use E23: not active; E24: ac- 5..49,111. V15 W n 1 1 1 1: activate US
it with great care!) tive ..127
Synchrocheck bypass (new 22-SO E23: not active; E24: ac- 5..49,111. V16 W n 1 1 1 1: activate US
only) tive ..127
Supervision
Number of cycles of switching object, 5..49,111. V100 R/W n US
SO22, CB ..127
Trip relays supervision, output 1 of 5..49,111. V102 R n 0 1 1 1=ok; 0=relay blocked alarm US
Trip relays supervision, output 2 of 5..49,111. V103 R n 0 1 1 1=ok; 0=relay blocked alarm US
Nr. of cycles isolator (SO43, SO65) 5..49,111. V104 R/W PD US
..127
Nr. of cycles earthing switch (SO43, 5..49,111. V105 R/W PD US
SO65) ..127
Event mask
Event 1 to 16 5..49,111. V21 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
..127
Event 17 to 32 5..49,111. V22 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
..127
22-switch object II
Additional events
Select confirmation positive E26 5..49,111.
..127
Select confirmation negative E27 incl. error code as 5..49,111.
analogue parameter ..127
Execution confirmation positive E28 5..49,111.
..127
Execution confirmation negative E29 incl. error code as 5..49,111.
Execution termination positive E30 5..49,111.
..127
Execution termination negative E31 incl. error code as 5..49,111.
Status Indication
Device Operation Blocked 0=E15; 1=E16 5..49,111. I14 R n 0 4 1 0=passive; 1=active
..127
Disc. Interlocked 0=E17, 1=E18 5..49,111. I15 R n 0 4 1 0=passive; 1=active
..127
Additional: Error codes

No error (no event) 0 5..49,111.
..127
Target position already present 1 5..49,111.
..127
Switch authority (allocation) not 2 5..49,111.
granted ..127
Switch object not selected 3 5..49,111.
..127
Switch object blocked 4 5..49,111.
..127
Requested channel interlocked 5 5..49,111.
..127
Grant signal timeout 6 5..49,111.
..127
2-2 H-Bridge Switch ob-

ject II
Position Indication
Position Indication 0=E0; 1=E2; 2=E1; 3=E4 5..49,111. I11 R n 0 4 1 0=moving; 1= disc.closed; 2=disc. open; US
..127 3=error

Status Indication
Command Timeout (End position not 0=E9; 1=E10 5..49,111. I9 R n 0 4 1 0=passive; 1=active US
reached) ..127
..127
..127
Selected 0=E21, 1=E22 5..49,111. V1 R n 0 1 1 0=passive; 1=active
..129
Interlocking Bypassed 0=E23, 1=E24 5..49,111. V7 R n 0 1 1 0=passive; 1=active
..130
Single Commands Station

Open / Close 5..49,111. O2 W n 0 1 1 0=open line; 1=close line US
..127
Single Commands Remote

Disc. Open / Close 5..49,111. O22 W n 0 1 1 0=open line; 1=close line US
..127
Double Commands Station

Select Open 5..49,111. V5 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Close 5..49,111. V2 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Open 5..49,111. V3 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Cancel Select 5..49,111. V4 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V7 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127
Double Commands Remote

Select Open 5..49,111. V25 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Close 5..49,111. V22 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127

Open 5..49,111. V23 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Cancel Select 5..49,111. V24 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V27 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127
Supervision
Nr. of cycles Line 5..49,111. V104 R/W n 0 65535 1 US
..127
Nr. of cycles Earth 5..49,111. V105 R/W n 0 65535 1 US
..127
Additional events
..127
..127
..127
Event mask
Event 1 to 16 5..49,111. V21 R y 0 65535 1 UL
..127
Event 17 to 32 5..49,111. V22 R y 0 65535 1 UL
..127

ject II
Position Indication

Disconnector Position Indication 0=E0; 1=E1; 2=E2; 3=E4 5..49,111. I11 R n 0 4 1 0=moving; 1= disc.closed; 2=disc. open; US
..127 3=error
Earth Position Indication 0=E5; 1=E6; 2=E7; 3=E8 5..49,111. I12 R n 0 4 1 0=moving; 1= earth closed; 2= earth open; US
..127 3=error
Status Indication
Command Timeout (End position not 0=E9; 1=E10 5..49,111. I9 R n 0 4 1 0=passive; 1=active US
reached) ..127
..127
..127
Earth Interlocked 0=E19, 1=E20 5..49,111. I16 R n 0 4 1 0=passive; 1=active
..128
Selected 0=E21, 1=E22 5..49,111. V1 R n 0 1 1 0=passive; 1=active
..129
Interlocking Bypassed 0=E23, 1=E24 5..49,111. V7 R n 0 1 1 0=passive; 1=active
..130
Single Commands Station

..127
Earth Open / Close 5..49,111. O3 W n 0 1 1 0=open earth; 1=close earth US
..127
Single Commands Remote

..127
Earth Open / Close 5..49,111. O23 W n 0 1 1 0=open earth; 1=close earth US
..127
Double Commands Station

Disc. Select Open 5..49,111. V5 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Disc. Select Close 5..49,111. V6 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127

Disc. Close 5..49,111. V2 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Disc. Open 5..49,111. V3 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Disc. Cancel Select 5..49,111. V4 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Disc. Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V7 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127
Earth Select Open 5..49,111. V15 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US

..127
Earth Select Close 5..49,111. V16 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127
Earth Close 5..49,111. V12 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Earth Open 5..49,111. V13 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Earth Cancel Select 5..49,111. V14 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Earth Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V17 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127
Double Commands Remote

Disc. Select Open 5..49,111. V25 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US
..127
Disc. Select Close 5..49,111. V26 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127
Disc. Close 5..49,111. V22 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Disc. Open 5..49,111. V23 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Disc. Cancel Select 5..49,111. V24 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Disc. Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V27 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127

Earth Select Open 5..49,111. V35 W n 1 1 1 1=select open US

..127
Earth Select Close 5..49,111. V36 W n 1 1 1 1=select close US
..127
Earth Close 5..49,111. V32 W n 1 1 1 1=close it US
..127
Earth Open 5..49,111. V33 W n 1 1 1 1=open it US
..127
Earth Cancel Select 5..49,111. V34 W n 1 1 1 1=cancel select US
..127
Earth Interlocking bypass 5..49,111. V37 W n 0 1 1 0= bypass passive; 1= bypass active US
..127
Additional events
..127
..127
..127
Supervision
Nr. of cycles Line 5..49,111. V104 R/W n 0 65535 1 US
..127
Nr. of cycles Earth 5..49,111. V105 R/W n 0 65535 1 US
..127
Event mask
Event 1 to 16 5..49,111. V21 R y 0 65535 1 UL
..127

Event 17 to 32 5..49,111. V22 R y 0 65535 1 UL
..127

ject I (old)
Status input
Status of an object, "4 inputs" 5..49,111. I10 R n 0 4 1 0=moving;1=line closed;2=line open and US
..127 earth open;3=earth closed;4=error
Line status of an object, "4 inputs" 0=E0;1=E1;2=E2;3=E4 5..49,111. I11 R n 0 4 1 0=moving; 1= line closed; 2= line open; US
..127 3=error
Earth status of an object, "4 inputs" 0=E5;1=E6;2=E7;3=E8 5..49,111. I12 R n 0 4 1 0=moving; 1= earth closed; 2= earth open; US
..127 3=error
Status output
Read Puls Pin Status 5..49,111. O4 R n 0 4 1 0: both passive; 1: right active; 2: left active; US
..127 3: error
Puls pin left 1->0 E9 5..49,111.
..127
Puls pin left 0->1 E10 5..49,111.
..127
Interlocking left E11 5..49,111.
..127
Blocking error left E12 5..49,111.
..127
Puls pin right 1->0 E13 5..49,111.
..127
Puls pin right 0->1 E14 5..49,111.
..127
Interlocking right E15 5..49,111.
..127
Blocking error right E16 5..49,111.
..127
Timeout reset E21 5..49,111.
..127
Timeout detected E22 5..49,111.
..127

Direct output write
Write 4 outputs object Line 5..49,111. O2 W n 0 1 1 0=open line; 1=close line US
..127
Write 4 outputs object Earth 5..49,111. O3 W n 0 1 1 0=open earth; 1=close earth US
..127
Supervision
Nr. of cycles Line 5..49,111. V104 R/W n US
..127
Nr. of cycles Earth 5..49,111. V105 R/W n US
..127
Event mask
Event 1 to 16 5..49,111. V21 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
..127
Event 17 to 32 5..49,111. V22 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
..127
Horizontal communica-
tion
1bit read-write
Direct write from SPABUS to FUPLA 101 O0..99 W n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Status from FUPLA 101 I1..99 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Multiple write to status object 101 V0..83 W n 0 65535 1 US
1bit read
Read input state rise: E(2*(instance-1)), 98 I1-32 R n 0 1 1 US
fall: E(2*(instance-1)+1)
16bit read
Read input state any change: E(Instance) 99 I1-64 R n 0 65535 1 US
If LON: incl. input bit pat-
tern
1bit write
Write output state no events 98 O1-32 W n 0 1 1 US

Valid output state 98 V1-32 R n 0 1 1 US
16bit write
Write output state no events 99 O1-64 W n 0 65536 1 US
Valid output state 99 V1-64 R n 0 1 1 US
Resets
Reset alarm 101 O100 W n 1 1 0 1=reset alarm US
Reset maximum bar 101 O102 W n 1 1 0 1=reset maximum bar US
Reset energy 101 O103 W n 1 1 0 1=reset energy US
Reset switch cycles and added switch 101 O104 W n 1 1 0 1=reset CB values US
current CB
Analog objects
Over threshold
Threshold value 103..109 Sx1 R/W y In/Un SL /1000
Operational time 103..109 Sx2 R/W y s SL /1000
Block input 103..109 Ix1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Start output 103..109 Ox1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Trip output 103..109 Ox2 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Under threshold
Threshold value 103..109 Sx3 R/W y In/Un SL /1000
Operational time 103..109 Sx4 R/W y s SL /1000
Block input 103..109 Ix2 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Start output 103..109 Ox3 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Trip output 103..109 Ox4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
x : is the number of the analog object
minus 1
System parameters
Test mode
Status of test mode 0=E25;1=E24 0 V8 R n 0 1 1 0=not in test mode; 1=in test mode US

Interlocking
Interlocking status 0 V9 R n 0 1 1 0=ok; 1=interlocking error US
Sensor configuration
Sensor 1 0 V30 R y 0 4 1 0=not US
used;1=Volt.Trans;2=Cur.Trans;3=Cur.Rogo
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
;4=Volt.Sen
Net nominal values
Sensor 1 0 V40 R y 1 / 10 300k 1 / 10 A/V not configured is replied with 0 SL

Frequency 0 V25 R y 50 60 10 Hz SL
System event mask
Event 0 to 15 0 V21 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
Event 16 to 31 0 V22 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
Event 32 to 47 0 V23 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
Event 48 to 63 0 V24 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
Data communication
Data communication address 0 V200 R/W y 0 999 1 99=default US
Data transfer rate 0 V201 R y 9600 9600 0 9600=fixed UL /1000
Events
Reading of event registers 0 L R n
Re-reading of event registers 0 B R n
Event generation on/off 0=E1;1=E0 0 V52 R/W y 0 1 1 0 = Event generation disable, 1 = Event US
gener. enable
SCU mode
Programm/run mode 0=E30;1=E31 0 S198 R/W y 0 1 1 0=program mode; 1=run mode US
Data store into EEPROM 1=E32 0 V151 W n 1 1 0 1=store and change to run mode US
Faultrecorder
Start / end a session 0 V20 W 0 2 1 0=end session, 1=transfer uncompressed,
2=transfer Compressed
Read number of stored records 0 V20 R 0 9 1 US
Select a specific record 0 M28 W 1 9 1 US
Read directory info of selected record 0 M28 R 0 999 1
Read number of lines (each 64 Bytes) 0 M29 R 0 1023 1 US
of selected record
Read/Set line pointer of/to specific line 0 M30 R/W 0 1023 1 US
to be tranferred next
Read one line of selected data 0 M31 R 0 1023 1 line pointer will be incremented automatically US
Delete oldest record 0 V16 W 0 1 1 a sequence of 0 -> 1 is required to delete US
Read recorder status 0 V16 R 0 2 1 0=recorder memory not full, ready to transfer US
data (if any present), 1=recorder memory
full, ready to tranfer data, 2=recorder busy,
rearranging data after delete.
Read/Set compression factor 0 V17 R/W 0 5 1 % 0=no compression, 1=1% compression, ... US
New Record available 0=E41
Number of last stored record 0 V19 R 0 65535 1 0 = no record available
1..65535 = Number of last stored record
Protection function pa-

rameter
General protection parameter
Active parameter set 0=E3;1=E2 0 V150 R/W y 0 1 1 0 = Set 1, 1 = Set 2 US
AR general on/off 0=E5;1=E4 0 V51 R/W y 0 1 1 0 = AR off, 1 = AR on US

Inrush blocking
Parameter
Max. current value n 50 S1 R/W y 2 8 0.001 UL /1000
Starting time 50 S2 R/W y 0.22 100 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
Activate value m 50 S3 R/W y 3 4 0.001 UL /1000
Measurments
Value at tripping of function 50 V1 R n UL /1000
Max. measured value 50 V2 R n UL /1000
Number of trips 50 V3 R/W n UL /1000
Number of starts phase L1 50 V4 R/W n UL /1000
Duration of the latest start situation 50 V7 R n ms UL /1000
phase L1

phase L2
phase L3
Phases and event masks
Phases used 50 V10 R y US
Eventmask : Event 1 to 16 50 V11 R y 0 65535 1 UL /1000
Input/Output status
Start output L1 0=E1;1=E0 50 O1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Trip output 0=E7;1=E6 50 O4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Blocked Trip 0=E13;1=E12 50 O5 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block input 0=E19;1=E18 50 I1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Overcurrent instantaneous
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Overcurrent value Set 1 51 S1 R/W y 0.1 40 0.001 In UL /1000
Overcurrent op. time Set 1 51 S2 R/W y 0.02 30 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
AR parameter set 1
Number of AR shots Set 1 1=E11;2=E10 51 S3 R/W y 0 2 1 0=no shot;1=one shot;2=two shots US
Max. AR activate current Set 1 Set 1 51 S4 R/W y 0.1 40 0.001 In UL /1000
AR shot starting time 1, Set 1 51 S5 R/W y 0.02 30 0.001 s UL /1000
AR shot dead time 1, Set 1 51 S6 R/W y 0.2 300 0.001 s UL /1000
AR reclaim time Set 1 51 S9 R/W y 0.2 300 0.001 s UL /1000
Parameter set 2
AR parameter set 2
Max. AR activate current Set 2 51 S24 R/W y 0.1 40 0.001 In UL /1000
Measurements
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Block AR input 0=E21;1=E20 51 I4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
AR active 0=E9;1=E8 51 O10 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Overcurrent definite time, high

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Overcurrent op. time Set 1 52 S2 R/W y 0.2 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
AR Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
AR Parameter set 2

Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Block Out 0=E17;1=E16 52 O9 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US

Overcurrent definite time, low

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Overcurrent directional, high

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
AR Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Direction Set 1 54 S10 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind UL /1000
Direction Set 2 54 S30 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind UL /1000
AR Parameter set 2

Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Overcurrent directional, low set

Parameter
Parameter set 1
Direction Set 1 55 S3 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind US
Parameter set 2
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3

Input/Output status
Overcurrent IDMT normally in-

verse
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Time multiplier Set 1 56 S2 R/W y 0.05 1 0.001 s UL /1000
Parameter set 1
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2

phase L3
Input/Output status
Overcurrent IDMT Very inverse

Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments

phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Overcurrent IDMT Extremly in-

verse
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments

phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Overcurrent IDMT Long-time

inverse
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2

Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Earthfault non-directional, high

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1

Earthfault current value Set 1 66 S1 R/W y 0.05 40 0.001 In UL /1000
Earthfault op. time Set 1 66 S2 R/W y 0.07 100 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
AR Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
AR Parameter set 2
Measurments
Number of starts 66 V4 R/W n UL /1000

Input/Output status
Start output 0=E1;1=E0 66 O1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Earthfault non-directional, low

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments

Input/Output status
Earthfault IDMT Normal Inverse

Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status

Earthfault IDMT Very Inverse

Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status
Earthfault IDMT Extremly In-

verse
Parameter
Parameter set 1

Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status
Earthfault IDMT Long time In-

verse
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2

Measurments
Input/Output status
Earthfault directional, high set

Parameter
general Parameter
Net-earthtype 72 S11 R/W y 0 1 1 0=sin phi (isolated); 1=cos phi (earthed) US
Parameter set 1
AR Parameter set 1

Parameter set 2
AR Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status

Earthfault directional, low set

Parameter
Parameter set 1
Direction Set 1 73 S3 R/W y 0 1 1 0=sin phi (isolated); 1=cos phi (earthed) US
Net-earthtype Set 1 73 S4 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind US
Parameter set 2
Direction Set 2 73 S23 R/W y 0 1 1 0=sin phi (isolated); 1=cos phi (earthed) US
Net-earthtype Set 2 73 S24 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind US
Measurments

Input/Output status
Sensitive Earthfault directional
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Earthfault current value Set 1 88 S1 R/W y 0.05 2 0.001 In0 UL /1000
Opening angle alpha 88 S3 R/W y 0 20 0.001 ° UL /1000
Residual Voltage 88 S4 R/W y 0.1 0.7 0.001 Un UL /1000
Nettype/Direction/Phasecorrection 88 S5 R/W y -180 180 0.01 ° SL /1000
Parameter set 88
Earthfault current value Set 2 88 S21 R/W y 0.05 2 0.001 In0 UL /1000
Opening angle alpha 88 S23 R/W y 0 20 0.001 ° UL /1000
Residual Voltage 88 S24 R/W y 0.1 0.7 0.001 Un UL /1000
Nettype/Direction/Phasecorrection 88 S25 R/W y -180 180 0.01 ° SL /1000
Parameter set 2 88
Value at tripping of function 88 V1 R n In0 UL /1000
Max. measured value 88 V2 R n In0 UL /1000
Phases and event masks 88

Input/Output status 88

Overvoltage instantaneous
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Overvoltage value Set 1 60 S1 R/W y 0.8 2 0.001 Un UL /1000
Overvoltage op. time Set 1 60 S2 R/W y 0.02 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
AR Parameter set 1
Max. AR activate current Set 1 60 S4 R/W y 0.8 2 0.001 Un UL /1000
Parameter set 2
AR Parameter set 2

Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Overvoltage definite time, high set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
AR Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
AR Parameter set 2
Measurments

phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Overvoltage definite time, low set
Parameter
Parameter set 1

Parameter set 2
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Undervoltage instantaneous
Parameter

Parameter set 1
Undervoltage value Set 1 63 S1 R/W y 0.2 1.2 0.001 Un UL /1000
Undervoltage op. time Set 1 63 S2 R/W y 0.05 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Undervoltage definite time,

high set
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Undervoltage op. time Set 1 64 S2 R/W y 0.07 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
AR Parameter set 1
Max. AR activate current Set 1 64 S4 R/W y 0.4 1.2 0.001 Un UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Undervoltage op. time Set 2 64 S22 R/W y 0.07 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
AR Parameter set 2
Max. AR activate current Set 2 64 S24 R/W y 0.4 1.2 0.001 Un UL /1000
Measurments

phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Undervoltage definite time, low

set
Parameter
Parameter set 1

Parameter set 2
Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status

Residual overvoltage definite
time high
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Voltage Set 1 82 S1 R/W y 0.05 3 0.001 Un UL /1000
Time Set 1 82 S2 R/W y 0.04 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relai UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status
Residual overvoltage definite

time low
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments
Input/Output status
Motor protection function

Thermal Overload
Parameter
Maximum temperature 74 S1 R/W y 20 400 0.001 C UL /1000
Operating time 74 S2 R/W y 1.02 1000 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Nominal temperature 74 S3 R/W y 50 400 0.001 C UL /1000
Nominal current 74 S4 R/W y 1 10000 0.001 A UL /1000
Initial temperature 74 S5 R/W y 50 120 0.001 % UL /1000

Fundamental time constant for motor 74 S6 R/W y 10 5000 0.001 s UL /1000
OFF
Fundamental time constant for normal 74 S7 R/W y 10 5000 0.001 s UL /1000
work
Fundamental time constant for fault 74 S8 R/W y 10 5000 0.001 s UL /1000
Warning temperature 74 S9 R/W y 20 400 0.001 C UL /1000
Measurments
Actual temperature 74 V8 R n C SL /1000
Time to start 74 V9 R n min UL /1000
Input/Output status
Warning 0=E15;1=E14 74 O6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Motorstart protection
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Starting current value Set 1 80 S1 R/W y 1 20 0.001 In UL /1000
Starting current op. time Set 1 80 S2 R/W y 0.07 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Start Threshold Set 1 80 S3 R/W y 0.3 1.2 0.001 In UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Starting current value Set 2 80 S21 R/W y 1 20 0.001 In UL /1000
Starting current op. time Set 2 80 S22 R/W y 0.07 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Start Threshold Set 2 80 S23 R/W y 0.3 1.2 0.001 In UL /1000
Measurments
Input/Output status
Blocked rotor protection
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Overcurrent value Set 1 86 S1 R/W y 1 20 0.001 In UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Overcurrent value Set 2 86 S21 R/W y 1 20 0.001 In UL /1000

Measurments
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Input/Output status
Number of Starts
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Counter warm Set 1 87 S1 R/W y 1 10 1 UL /1000

Counter cold Set 1 87 S2 R/W y 1 10 1 UL /1000
Operating time Set 1 87 S3 R/W y 1.02 7200 1 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Temperatur threshold cold->warm Set 87 S4 R/W y 20 400 0.001 C UL /1000
1
Parameter set 2
Counter warm Set 2 87 S21 R/W y 1 10 1 UL /1000
Counter cold Set 2 87 S22 R/W y 1 10 1 UL /1000
Operating time Set 2 87 S23 R/W y 1.02 7200 1 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Temperatur threshold cold->warm Set 87 S24 R/W y 20 400 0.001 C UL /1000
2
Measurments
Number of warnings 87 V2 R/W n UL /1000
Number of cold starts 87 V4 R n UL /1000
Number of warm starts 87 V5 R n UL /1000
Time to start motor 87 V6 R n 0 0.001 min
Input/Output status
Warning output 0=E15;1=E14 87 O6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block input 87 I1 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Start motor input 87 I3 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Distance protection
Distance protection
Parameter
Net Type 81 S9 R/W y 0 1 1 0=HighOhmic;1=LowOhmic US
E-Start or G-Start 81 S10 R/W y 0 1 1 0=GStartOrEStart;1=GStart US
Transfer Ground Side 81 S11 R/W y 0 1 1 0=Lineside;1=Busbarside US
Switch On Fault 81 S12 R/W y 0 2 1 0=normal;1=Overreach;2=TripAfterGStart US
Mixed Cable/Cverhead 81 S13 R/W y 0 1 1 0=mixed; 1=homogenous US
Cable before Overhead 81 S14 R/W y 0 1 1 0=OverheadFirst;1=CableFirst US
Z boarder Cable/Overhead Zb 81 S15 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm SL /1000
Cable impedance Zc 81 S16 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm 0=NoCable SL /1000
Overhead impedance Zo 81 S17 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm 0=NoOverhead SL /1000
Parameter set 1
Current threshold I> 81 S1 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Earth current threshold Io> 81 S2 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Current fault threshold If> 81 S3 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Undervoltage threshold Uf< 81 S4 R/W y 0.05 0.9 0.01 Un UL /1000
Phase selection 81 S5 R/W y 0 3 1 0=NAc312;1=NAc1231;2=IAc132;3=IAc1231 US
Earthfactor Real 81 S6 R/W y SL /1000
Earthfactor Imag 81 S7 R/W y SL /1000
Signal Comparison Time* 81 S8 R/W y 0.02 30 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Current threshold I> 81 S21 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Earth current threshold Io> 81 S22 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Current fault threshold If> 81 S23 R/W y 0.05 4 0.01 In UL /1000
Undervoltage threshold Uf< 81 S24 R/W y 0.05 0.9 0.01 Un UL /1000
Phase selection 81 S25 R/W y 0 3 1 0=NAc312;1=NAc1231;2=IAc132;3=IAc1231 US
Earthfactor Real 81 S26 R/W y SL /1000
Earthfactor Imag 81 S27 R/W y SL /1000
Signal Comparison Time 81 S28 R/W y 0.02 30 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000

Zone 1
Parameter set 1
R 81 S41 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S42 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Delta1 81 S43 R/W y -45 0 1 Grad SL /1000
Delta2 81 S44 R/W y 90 135 1 Grad SL /1000
Time 81 S45 R/W y 0.02 30 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Direction 81 S46 R/W y 0 1 1 0=InFront;1=Behind US
Parameter set 2
R 81 S51 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S52 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Overreach Zone
Parameter set 1
R 81 S61 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S62 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Parameter set 2
R 81 S71 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S72 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000

Block AR Zone
Parameter set 1
R 81 S81 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S82 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Parameter set 2
R 81 S91 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S92 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Zone 2
Parameter set 1
R 81 S101 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S102 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Parameter set 2
R 81 S111 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S112 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000

Zone 3
Parameter set 1
R 81 S121 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S122 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Parameter set 2
R 81 S131 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
X 81 S132 R/W y 0.05 120 0.01 Ohm UL /1000
Directional Backup
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2

Non Directional Bachup
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Measurments
E-Start duration 81 V1 R n ms UL /1000
G-Start duration 81 V2 R n ms UL /1000
Number of starts L1 81 V4 R/W n UL /1000
phase L1
phase L2
phase L3
Number of starts earth fault 81 V13 R/W n UL /1000
Number of starts general start 81 V14 R/W n UL /1000
Number of starts of <Z1 81 V15 R/W n UL /1000
Impedance |Z| 81 V16 R n Ohm SL /1000
Angle phi(Z) 81 V17 R n Grad SL /1000
Resistance R 81 V18 R n Ohm SL /1000
Reactance X 81 V19 R n Ohm SL /1000
Zone 81 V20 R n SL /1000
Distance of the fault 81 V21 R n km SL /1000
Duration of the latest start of <Z1 81 V22 R n ms UL /1000

Input/Output status
Earth Start 0=E25;1=E24 81 O6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
General Start 0=E23;1=E22 81 O7 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Overreach Zone AR 81 O8 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Overreach Zone Switch on Fault 81 O9 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
<Z1 0=E17;1=E16 81 O11 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
1. AR shot 0=E11;1=E10 81 O12 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
2.AR shot 0=E15;1=E14 81 O13 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block AR 0=E21;1=E20 81 I4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
CB OK 0=E27;1=E26 81 I5 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Signal Comp. 0=E29;1=E28 81 I6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block AR from DSP 0=E31;1=E30 81 I7 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Differential protection function

Differential protection
Parameter
Parameter set 1
Primary Winding Nominal Current 79 S1 R/W y 0 100 0.1 A UL /1000

Secondary Winding Nominal Current 79 S2 R/W y 0 100 0.2 A UL /1000
Transformer Group 79 S3 R/W y 0 11 1 UL /1000
Primary side earthing 79 S4 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Secondary side earthing 79 S5 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Primary current triplet 79 S6 R 0 1 1 0=(1,2,3); 1=(4,5,6) UL /1000
Threshold current 79 S7 R/W y 0.1 0.5 0.01 In UL /1000
Unbiased region limit 79 S8 R/W y 0.5 5 0.01 In UL /1000
Slightly biased region threshold 79 S9 R/W y 0.2 2 0.01 In UL /1000
Slightly biased region limit 79 S10 R/W y 1 10 0.01 In UL /1000
Heavily biased behaviour slope 79 S11 R/W y 0.4 1.0 0.01 UL /1000
Second harmonic threshold vs. Idiff 79 S12 R/W y 0.1 0.3 0.01 UL /1000
Fifth harmonic threshold vs. Idiff 79 S14 R/W y 0.1 0.3 0.01 UL /1000
Second harmonic block enable 79 S15 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Fifth harmonic block enable 79 S17 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
CTs' saturation current limit for 3rd 79 S19 R/W y 5 40 0.01 In UL /1000
harmonic block
Operating time 79 S20 R 0.030 0.030 s UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Primary Winding Nominal Current 79 S21 R/W y 0 100 0.1 A UL /1000
Secondary Winding Nominal Current 79 S22 R/W y 0 100 0.2 A UL /1000
Transformer Group 79 S23 R/W y 0 11 1 UL /1000
Primary side earthing 79 S24 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Secondary side earthing 79 S25 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Primary current triplet 79 S26 R 0 1 1 0=(1,2,3); 1=(4,5,6) UL /1000
Threshold current 79 S27 R/W y 0.1 0.5 0.01 In UL /1000
Unbiased region limit 79 S28 R/W y 0.5 5 0.01 In UL /1000
Slightly biased region threshold 79 S29 R/W y 0.2 2 0.01 In UL /1000
Slightly biased region limit 79 S30 R/W y 1 10 0.01 In UL /1000

Heavily biased behaviour slope 79 S31 R/W y 0.4 1.0 0.01 UL /1000
Second harmonic threshold vs. Idiff 79 S32 R/W y 0.1 0.3 0.01 UL /1000
Fifth harmonic threshold vs. Idiff 79 S34 R/W y 0.1 0.3 0.01 UL /1000
Second harmonic block enable 79 S35 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
Fifth harmonic block enable 79 S37 R/W y 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE UL /1000
CTs' saturation current limit for 3rd 79 S39 R/W y 5 40 0.01 In UL /1000
harmonic block
Operating time 79 S40 R 0.030 0.030 s UL /1000
Measurments
phase
Input/Output status
Trip output 0=E7;1=E6 79 O4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US /1000
Block 2nd Harmonic 0=E21;1=E20 79 O6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block 3rd Harmonic 0=E23;1=E22 79 O7 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Block 5th Harmonic 0=E25;1=E24 79 O8 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
General Block 0=E27;1=E26 79 O9 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Other protection function

Unsymetrical load
(Unbalanced load I)
Parameter
Minimum active current 75 S1 R/W y 5 100 0.001 % UL /1000
Maximum unbalanced 75 S3 R/W y 5 80 0.001 % UL /1000
Measurments
Value at tripping of function 75 V1 R/W n Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
Max. measured value 75 V2 R/W n Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
Duration of the latest start situation 75 V7 R/W n ms Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
Input/Output status
Unbalanced load II
Parameter
Sensor 75 S1 R n 0 1 1 0=1,2,3 1=4,5,6 US
Output channel 75 S2 R n 0 16 1 US
Parameter Set 1
Is Set 1 75 V22 R/W y 50 300 1 In UL /1000
K Set 1 75 V23 R/W y 2000 30000 100 UL /1000
Reset time Set 1 75 V24 R/W y 0 2000 1 s UL
Timer decreasing rate Set 1 75 V25 R/W y 0 100 1 % UL
Parameter Set 2
Is Set 2 75 V32 R/W y 50 300 1 In UL /1000
K Set 2 75 V33 R/W y 2000 30000 100 UL /1000
Reset time Set 2 75 V34 R/W y 0 2000 1 s UL

Timer decreasing rate Set 2 75 V35 R/W y 0 100 1 % UL
Measurments
Value at tripping of function 75 V1 R/W n A Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
Max. measured value 75 V2 R/W n A Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
Duration of the latest start situation 75 V7 R/W n ms Write: set the value to 0 UL /1000
I2 75 V8 R n A UL /1000
Eventmask : Event 1 to 16 75 V11 R y 0 65535 1 UL
Eventmask : Event 17 to 32 75 V12 R y 0 65535 1 UL
Input/Output status
Reset input 0=E21;1=E20 75 I2 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Directional power protection

Parameter
Maximum reverse load 76 S1 R/W y 1 50 0.001 % UL /1000
Nominal real power 76 S3 R/W y 0.05 1000 0.001 MW UL /1000
Direction 76 S4 R/W y 0 1 1 0=in front; 1=behind US
Measurments
Value at tripping of function 76 V1 R/W n Write: allways set to 0 UL /1000
Max. measured value 76 V2 R/W n Write: allways set to 0 UL /1000

Duration of the latest start situation 76 V7 R/W n ms Write: allways set to 0 UL /1000
Input/Output status
Low load protection

Parameter
Minimum load 77 S1 R/W y 5 100 0.001 % UL /1000
Nominal real power 77 S3 R/W y 0.05 1000 0.001 MW UL /1000
Minimum operating current 77 S4 R/W y 2 20 0.001 % UL /1000
Measurments
Input/Output status

Thermal supervision
Parameter
Maximum temperature 78 S1 R/W y 50 400 0.001 C UL /1000
Warning temperature 78 S3 R/W y 50 400 0.001 C UL /1000
Measurments
Input/Output status
Warning 0=E15;1=E14 78 O6 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Frequency supervision
Parameter
Parameter set 1

Frequency Set 1 84 S1 R/W y 0.0 0.5 0.001 fn UL /1000
Time Set 1 84 S2 R/W y 1.02 300 0.001 s same for solid state and conventional relais UL /1000
Parameter set 2
Frequency Set 2 84 S21 R/W y 0.0 0.5 0.001 fn UL /1000
Measurments
Input/Output status
Synchro Check
Parameter
Delta Voltage Set 1 85 S1 R/W y 0.02 0.4 0.001 Un UL /1000
Delta Phase Set 1 85 S3 R/W y 0.005 0.05 0.001 ° UL /1000
Delta Voltage Set 2 85 S21 R/W y 0.02 0.4 0.001 Un UL /1000
Delta Phase Set 2 85 S23 R/W y 0.005 0.05 0.001 ° UL /1000

Input/Output status
Synchronous 0=E7;1=E6 85 O4 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
Blocked synchronous 0=E13;1=E12 85 O5 R n 0 1 1 0=FALSE; 1=TRUE US
R : read
W : write
PD : saved during power down
y : saved after download or leaving
progrqam mode with saving data
n : not saved
US : unsigned short X{X{X{X}}}
UL : unsigned long
X{X{X{X}}}.X{X{X}}
SL : signed long {+}|-
X{X{X{X}}}.X{X{X}}
ST : string of maximal 21 characters
Event list
Monitoring values
Coil continuity output 1, I/O card 1 0=E17;1=E16 0
SCU status
Down load PC -> SCU 1=E33 0
Up load PC <- SCU 1=E34 0
Power down 1=E35 0
Power up (controller resetted) 1=E36 0
Watchdog 1=E37 0
DSP reset 1=E38 0
Acknowledge Display 1=E39 0
Energy Owerflow 1=E40 0
SCU restarting 1=E50 0
Overflow of event register 1=E51 0
Temporary disturbance in data com- 1=E52 0 not in the SCU generated (MSU, SRIO ..)
munication
No response from the SCU 1=E53 0 not in the SCU generated (MSU, SRIO ..)
The SCU responds again 1=E54 0 not in the SCU generated (MSU, SRIO ..)
Monitoring special status

IEC 60870-5-103
Monitor direction blocked 0=E18;1=E19 3 V13 R N 0 1 1 1=blocked, 0=not blocked 1
Test Mode enabled 0=E20;1=E21 3 V14 R N 0 1 1 1=enabled, 0=disabled 1
Systemerrors
operating system definition of
errors
ENQ_ERROR 1=E0 102
driver EEPROM definition of er-

rors
MemFullError 1=E1 102
ReadyError 1=E2 102
WritingByteError 1=E3 102
VppLowError 1=E4 102
BlockError 1=E5 102
SuspendedError 1=E6 102
StatusRegError 1=E7 102
EraseAdrBlockError 1=E8 102
NOT_IDENT_EEPROMDATA 1=E9 102
EEPROM_DATA_DISRUPTED 1=E10 102
WRONG_BLOCK 1=E11 102
HOST INTERFACE: definition

errors
WRITE_HOST_ERROR 1=E20 102
CONFIG_DSP_ERROR 1=E21 102
CALIBRATION_DSP_FAULT 1=E22 102
COMMUNICATION: PC<->SCU
defin. Err
TIMEOUT_ERROR 1=E30 102
PROTECTION FUNCTION: de-

fin. Err.
AUTORECL_ERROR 1=E40 102
CONFIG_ERROR 1=E41 102
UNDEFINED_PROT_ERROR 1=E42 102
CONFIGURATION errors:
WRONG_CONFIGURATION 1=E43 102
LON: definition of errors

CONFIG_LON_ERROR 1=E48 102

PYRAMID:
8 Appendix B: Address list

for the COM_L communication board
The address list contains the available LON addresses, sorted by functions, and
maps these onto the underlying SPABUS registers. Not all of the SPABUS registers
are available in the LON.
The following worksheets have been defined:

"NV Table“
Describes the network variables defined on the COM_L board that are used for
horizontal communication and time synchronization.
"Object Id Table”
Lists the addresses for vertical communication.
The list contains all of the information defined. The quantity of information contained
in a concrete application depends on the functions used therein.
Please consider that the associated events of the underlying SPABUS register model
have to be in a released status.
&E
1HDE001139RxxxxAen ACE/ALxx-xx, 06.03.98 Titel 105 / 114
PYRAMID:
9 Appendix C: Interoperability list

to COM_I Communication Board
1. Physical layer
1.1 Electrical interface
EIA RS-485
Number of loads
1.2 Optical interface

Glass fibre
Plastic fibre
F-SMA type connector
BFOC/2,5 type connector
1.3 Transmission speed

9600 bit/s
19200 bit/s
2. Link layer
There are no choices for the link layer.
3. Application layer
3.1 Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4.
3.2 Common address of ASDU

One common address of ASDU (identical with station address)
More than one common address of ASDU
3.3 Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
3.3.1 System functions in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<0> End of general interrogation

<0> Time Synchronization
<2> Reset FCB
<3> Reset CU
<4> Start / restart
<5> Power on
3.3.2 Status indication in monitor direction

INF Semantics
&E
PYRAMID:
<16> Auto-recloser active

<17> Teleprotection active
<18> Protection active
<19> LED reset
<20> Monitor direction blocked
<21> Test mode
<22 > Local parameter setting
<23> Characteristic 1
<27> Auxiliary input 1
3.3.3 Supervision indications in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<32> Measurand supervision I

<33> Measurand supervision U
<35> Phase sequence supervision
<36> Trip circuit supervision
<37> I>> back-up operation
<38> VT fuse failure
<39> Teleprotection disturbed
<46> Group warning
<47> Group alarm
3.3.4 Earth fault indications in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<48> Earth fault L1

<49> Earth fault L2
<50> Earth fault L3
<51> Earth fault forward i.e. line
<52> Earth fault reverse i.e. busbar
3.3.5 Fault indications in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<64> Start / pick-up L1

&E
PYRAMID:
<67> Start / pick-up N

<68> General trip
<69> Trip L1
<70> Trip L2
<71> Trip L3
<72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
<73> Fault location X in Ohm
<74> Fault forward / line
<75> Fault reverse / busbar
<76> Teleprotection signal transmitted
<77> Teleprotection signal received
<78> Zone 1
<79> Zone 2
<80> Zone 3
<81> Zone 4
<82> Zone 5
<83> Zone 6
<84> General start / pick-up
<85> Breaker failure
<86> Trip measuring system L1
<89> Trip measuring system E
<90> Trip I>
<91> Trip I>>
<92> Trip IN>
<93> Trip IN>>
3.3.3 Auto-recloser indications in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<128> CB ‘on’ by AR
<129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
<130> AR blocked
3.3.4 Measurands in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<144> Measurand I
<145> Measurands I,V
<146> Measurand I,V,P,Q
<147> Measurands IN,VEN
&E
PYRAMID:
<148> Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
3.3.5 Generic functions in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups

<241> Read values of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value of a single entry
<245> End of general interrogation generic data
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry aborted
3.4 Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
3.4.1 System functions in control direction

INF Semantics
<16> Auto-recloser on / off

<17> Teleprotection on / off
<18> Protection on / off
<19> LED reset
<23> Activate characteristic 1
3.4.2 General commands in control direction

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups

<241> Read values of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<248> Write entry
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
3.5 Basic application functions

Test mode
Blocking of monitor direction
Disturbance data
&E
PYRAMID:
Generic services
Private data
3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurand Max. MVAL = rated value times
1.2 2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
Voltage L1- L2
3.7 Private data

Information numbers in monitor direction: 160-168, 180-190, 200
Information numbers in control direction: 160-168
&E
PYRAMID:
10 Appendix D: Address list

for the COM_I communication board
The description of the IEC60870-5-103 interface, including the address list for map-
ping the IEC 60870-5-103 information onto the register model of the REF542plus, in
accordance with SPABUS, is given for version V 0.19. For this purpose, a list indi-
cates all of the IEC 60870-5-103 information, based on attributes FUN (function type)
and INF (information number), and is linked with the underlying SPABUS registers
and associated events.
Attention: Extract from "REF542 IEC 60870-5-103 Mapping V0.19.XLS“

The following worksheets are defined:
GLB
Defines the global functions
t(z)
Describes the mappings of the distance protection, including the so called emer-
gency overcurrent definite timeprotection.
I>>
Defines the mappings of the overcurrent protection.
∆IT
Reflects the mappings of the transformer differential protection.
ZX/ZS Control (VDEW)
Contains the definitions of the private area supplementing the control information.
Flowchart (FUPLA)
Defines registers for binary read and write objects in the flowchart (FUPLA) that
enable access to a great number of information assigned to the main functions.
Since the REF542plus is not a protection device with an invariable functionality, but
an integrated field control and protection device whose specific function is defined by
an application, on the basis of a flowchart, it is necessary to include certain basic
functions for each one of the main functions in an application, in accordance with the
address list. To simplify matters, appropriate sample applications are available.
Please consider that the associated events of the underlying SPABUS register mod-
els have to be in a released status.
&E
PYRAMID:
11 Reference
[SPA2.3] SPA-bus Communication Protocol, Version 2.3,
ABB Relays and Network Control, 1991.
[SPA2.5] SPA-bus Communication Protocol, Version 2.5,
ABB Relays and Network Control, 1996.
[LAG1.4] LON Application Guidelines for Substation Automation, LAG 1.4,
ABB, Aug.1998.
[SLCM] SLCM LON Clock Master, Technical reference manual,
ABB Network Partner, Dokument 1MRS 750985-MUM EN, 1998.
[LNT505] LNT 505 LON Network Tool, Operator Manual,
ABB Network Partner, Dokument 1MRS 750831-RUM, 1998.
[LIB542] REF542plus LIB542 4.0.3 Main,
User Manual, 1VTA100090, 2001
[IEC103] IEC 60870-5-103
Telecontrol equipment and systems, Part 5-103: Transmission
protocols – Companion standard for the informative interface of protec-
tion equipment, International Standard IEC 60870-5-103,
First Edition, 1997–12.
[VDEW] Digitale Stationsleittechnik,
Ergänzende Empfehlungen zur Anwendung in Verteilnetzen,
VDEW e.V., 1. Ausgabe 1998.
[FGH_UMZ] Testbericht Überstromzeitschutz:
Forschungsgemeinschaft für Hochspannungs- und Hochstromtechnik
e.V., Test Report No. LK 00002, Mannheim, 2000-06.
&E
PYRAMID:
Product Information
ABB Transmission and Distribution Limited ABB Secheron SA
Indoor Switchgear Medium Voltage
Bapaume Road Rue des Sablieres 4-6
Moorebank NSW CH – 1217 Meyrin
Australia Switzerland
Phone: +61 2 9821 0007 Phone: +41 22 306 2646
Fax: +61 2 9602 2454 Fax: +41 22 306 2682
E-mail: elton.judd@au.abb.com E-mail: info.secheron@ch.abb.com
Internet:: http://www.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.ch
ABB Xiamen Switchgear Co. Ltd ABB High Voltage Switchgear Co. Ltd.
Engineering MV Technical
ABB Industrial Park, Torch Hi-Tech Indus- No. 7 Shiliuzhuang Nanli, Nanding Road,
trial Development Zone, Xiao Dong Shan Yongdingmen Wei, Fengtai District
Xiamen S.E.Z., Fujian 361006 Beijing 100075
P.R. China P.R. China
Phone: +86 592 6026-033 Ext. 4061 Phone: +86 10 6764-0055
Fax: +86 592 603-0525 Fax: +86 10 6766-3121
E-mail: david-xiangdong.xu@cn.abb.com E-mail: guoqing.pei@cn.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.com
ABB s.r.o. ABB Arab

MV Switchgear Technical Marketing
Videnska 117 Industrial Zone – B1
th
61900 Brno 10 of Ramadan City
Czech Republic Egypt
Phone: +420 5 4715 2413 Phone: +2 15 36 1288
Fax: +420 5 4715 2190 Fax: +2 15 36 1642
E-mail: info.ejf@cz.abb.com E-mail:
Internet: http://www.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.com/eg
ABB Calor Emag Hochspannung GmbH ABB Calor Emag Mittelspannung GmbH
High Voltage Switchgear Product Management
Käfertalerstr. 250-256 Oberhausener Straße. 33
68167 Mannheim 40472 Ratingen
Germany Germany
Phone: +49 621 386 2938 Phone: +49 2102 12 1901
Fax: +49 621 386 2909 Fax: +49 2102 12 1808 1901
E-mail: thomas.haas@de.abb.com E-mail: calor.info@de.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com/de Internet: http://www.abb.de/calor
ABB Ltd Nashik India PT. ABB Transmission and Distribution

Design & Engineering Marketing
Plot – 79, street – 17, MIDC SATPUR Jl. Gajah Tunggal Im 1, Jatiuwung
Nashik – PIN - 422007 Tangerang 15135
India Indonesia
Phone: +91 0253 351095 Phone: +62 21 590 9955 x2551
Fax: +91 0253 350644 Fax: +62 21 590 0116
E-mail: sanjib.mitra@in.abb.com E-mail: martha.bachtiar@id.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.com
&E
PYRAMID:
Product Information
ABB T&D S.p.A, Unita’ Operativa ABB Ltd.
SACE T.M.S. Power Technology Medium Voltage
Product Management
513 Sungsung-dong (Chonan Foreign In-
Via Friuli 4 vested-Enterprises Industrial Park)
I-24044 Dalmine (BG) Chonan, Chungchong-namdo, Post 330-300
Italy Korea
Phone: +39 035 395 710 Phone: +82 41 529 2458
Fax: +39 035 395874 Fax: +82 41 529 2500
E-mail: sacetms.tipm@it.abb.com E-mail: swgr.info@kr.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.com.kr
ABB Transmission & Distribution Sdn. Bhd. ABB b.v.

Manufacturing Power Distribution
Lot 608, Jalan SS 13/1K Marten Meesweg 5
47500 Subang Jaya, Petaling Jaya 3068 AV Rotterdam
Selanggor Darul Ehsan Netherland
Malaysia
Phone: +31 1 4078149
Phone: +603 5628 4888 Fax: +31 10 4078576
Fax: E-mail: bert.engbers@nl.abb.com
E-mail: chun-siaw.ng@my.abb.com Internet: http://www.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com
ABB Elektrik Sanayi. A.S.

Design & Engineering
Organize Sanayi Bölgesi 2 Cadde: No. 16
Yukar Dudullu
81260 Istanbul
Turkey
Phone: +90 216 365 2900
Fax: +90 216 365 2943
E-mail: muharrem.pektas@tr.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.com
ABB Utilities GmbH ABB Oy Substation Automation

Product Management Protection Substation Automation Products
Kallstadter Straße 1 Muottitie 2A (P.O. Box 699)
68309 Mannheim 65101 Vaasa
Germany Finnland
Phone: +49 621 381 8965 Phone: +358 10 22 4000
Fax: +49 621 381 8625 Fax: +358 10 22 41094
E-mail: christoph.gatzen@de.abb.com E-mail: jarkko.makela@fi.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.de Internet: http://www.abb.com
&E
REF542plus
Manual Part 3:
Installation and Commissioning
ABB Power Distribution

REF 542plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual Part 3: Installation and Commissioning
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A
PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS
REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DIS-
SEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. IF THE USER NEVER-
THELESS DETECTS ANY ERRORS, HE IS ASKED TO NOTIFY US AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT
OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS,
WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED
TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS.
AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BE-
TWEEN THE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION
PRODUCT.
1VTA100004-en DMS,2001-10-04 REF542plus: Installation and Commissioning 2 / 80

Table of Contents
1 Introduction..............................................................................................................6
2 Abbreviations and Definitions................................................................................7

2.1 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................7
2.2 Definitions ..................................................................................................................7
3 Operation of the REF542plus .................................................................................9

3.1 Operator's responsibilities .........................................................................................9
3.2 Guarantee Provisions ................................................................................................9
3.3 Safety Regulations...................................................................................................10
3.3.1 General safety notes .....................................................................10
3.3.2 Specific safety information ............................................................11
4 Mounting and Installation .....................................................................................12

4.1 Unpacking ................................................................................................................12
4.2 Mounting ..................................................................................................................12
4.2.1 Set-up Area and Required Environmental Conditions ..................14
4.2.2 Installation in LV panels ................................................................15
4.2.3 Connection diagrams ....................................................................16
4.2.4 Wiring the REF542plus .................................................................20
4.2.4.1 Checking the current transformer circuits .....................................20
4.2.4.2 Check the voltage transformer circuits .........................................21
4.2.4.3 Checking the auxiliary voltage ......................................................21
4.2.4.4 Check the tripping and signaling contacts ....................................21
4.2.4.5 Check the binary inputs ................................................................21
4.2.5 Grounding of the REF542plus ......................................................21
4.2.6 Typical examples of analog and binary connections ....................23
4.2.7 Connection Example of the REF542plus Analog Inputs...............24
5 Commissioning ......................................................................................................34
5.1 Safety Information....................................................................................................34
5.2 Switching on the feeder ...........................................................................................34
5.3 Test Equipment........................................................................................................34
5.4 Testing the interlock conditions, ..............................................................................34
5.5 Determining the transformer direction .....................................................................35
5.5.1 Current transformer.......................................................................35
5.5.2 Voltage transformer ......................................................................36
5.5.3 Current sensor ..............................................................................36
5.5.4 Voltage sensor ..............................................................................37
5.6 Testing the measured value recording ....................................................................37
5.7 Testing the protective functions ...............................................................................38
6 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................39
6.1 Safety Information....................................................................................................39

6.2 Required devices and facilities ................................................................................39
6.2.1 Sinusoidal generator .....................................................................39
6.2.2 Adjustable power supply ...............................................................39
6.2.3 Personal computer ........................................................................39
6.2.4 Tera Term Pro...............................................................................39
6.2.5 Connection cables ........................................................................40
6.2.5.1 RS232 cable..................................................................................41
6.2.5.2 REF542plus optical cable. ............................................................41
6.2.5.3 RS 485 Cable................................................................................41
6.3 Self test of the Central Unit......................................................................................41
6.3.1 Behavior after cold start ................................................................42
6.3.2 Enter REF542plus self test ...........................................................43
6.3.2.1 RAM test .......................................................................................44
6.3.2.2 Program flash memory test...........................................................44
6.3.2.3 Configuration flash memory test ...................................................44
6.3.3 Calibration of the Analog Input......................................................44
6.3.3.1 Transformer Input Board...............................................................45
6.3.3.2 Sensor Input Board .......................................................................45
6.3.3.3 Mixed Input Board .........................................................................46
6.3.3.4 Calibration procedure....................................................................46
6.4 Remote HMI self test ...............................................................................................47
6.4.1 LCD test ........................................................................................49
6.4.1.1 Texts writing test ...........................................................................49
6.4.1.2 Graphic writing test .......................................................................49
6.4.1.3 Back-light test................................................................................50
6.4.1.4 LCD contrast test ..........................................................................51
6.4.2 LEDs test.......................................................................................52
6.4.3 Keyboard test ................................................................................52
6.4.4 E-Key test......................................................................................53
6.4.5 Serial ports test .............................................................................53
7 Firmware upgrade..................................................................................................56
7.1 Upgrade the Firmware of the Central Unit...............................................................56
7.2 RHMI firmware upgrade...........................................................................................56
8 Decommissioning and Storage............................................................................57

8.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................................57
8.2 Storage ....................................................................................................................57
9 Technical data........................................................................................................58
9.1 Analog input channels .............................................................................................58
9.1.1 With current and voltage transformer: ..........................................58
9.1.2 With current and voltage sensor ...................................................58
9.2 Binary inputs and outputs ........................................................................................59
9.2.1 With mechanical relays (1 BIO version 3).....................................59
9.2.2 With static outputs (1 BIO version static)......................................59
9.3 Interface ...................................................................................................................60

9.3.1 HMI Control Unit: ..........................................................................60
9.3.2 Central Unit: ..................................................................................60
9.4 Analog output board (optional) ................................................................................60
9.5 Communication (optional)........................................................................................60
9.6 Power supply ...........................................................................................................60
9.6.1 Central Unit ...................................................................................60
9.6.2 RHMI Control Unit .........................................................................60
9.7 Temperature range ..................................................................................................61
9.8 Degree of protection ................................................................................................61
9.8.1 Central Unit ...................................................................................61
9.8.2 RHMI Control Unit .........................................................................61
10 Type Test ................................................................................................................62

10.1 Protection Function..................................................................................................62
10.2 Electro Magnetic Compatibility ................................................................................66
10.2.1 Emission test.................................................................................66
10.2.2 Immunity tests - enclosure port.....................................................67
10.2.3 Immunity tests - power supply port ...............................................68
10.2.4 Immunity tests - communication ports ..........................................69
10.2.4.1 Immunity tests - input and output ports.........................................70
10.2.5 Immunity tests - functional earth port............................................71
10.3 Insulation Resistance...............................................................................................72
10.4 Mechanical Robustness...........................................................................................72
10.5 Climatic Conditions ..................................................................................................72
11 Connection Diagram..............................................................................................73
11.1 REF542plus with mechanical binary I/O..................................................................73
11.2 REF542plus with solid state binary I/O....................................................................77

1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the installation and commissioning of the
REF542plus switchbay protection and control unit. The following section and its sub-
sections contain information on:
Mounting and installation instructions
Commissioning
Decommissioning and storage

2 Abbreviations and Definitions

In the following abbreviations and definitions used in this manual are listed together.
2.1 Abbreviations
AIS Air Isolated Switchgear
AR Auto Reclosure
CT Current Transformer
DFT Discrete Fourier Transformation
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
FUPLA FUnktionblock Programming LAnguage also used as abbreviation for
function plan or chart
GIS Gas Isolated Switchgear
HMI Human Machine Interface as control unit
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LAG Lon Application Guide
LV Low Voltage
MC Micro Controller
PC Personal Computer
RHMI Remote Human Machine Interface, the same meaning as HMI
VDEW Association of German Utilities
2.2 Definitions
Notes and warnings on hazards are at the beginning of every section and also in the
text. They are in a different font to distinguish them from normal text.
The safety warnings must be observed in all circumstances. If they are not observed,
no guarantee claims will be accepted.
Note
A note indicates items that are significant in the specific context. A note may contain
information on the interplay of various software components and appears as shown
below.
Example:
Note Please read this section completely for information on the various formats for safety
notes.

Level 1 hazard information indicates hazards affecting substations and devices. It

should always be observed, because otherwise function interruptions or malfunctions
may occur. An example is shown below:
Caution Do not make any changes to the FUPLA unless you are familiar with the
REF542plus and the configuration software
Level 2 hazard information indicates hazards affecting life and limb. It must be ob-
served to avoid injury to the operator or other personnel.
Example:
Warning! Never attempt to remove the protection covers on the busbars by force.

3 Operation of the REF542plus

In this chapter you will find the following information:
Operator’s responsibilities
Guarantee provisions
General safety notes
Special safety warnings that must always be observed when working with the
REF542plus.
3.1 Operator's responsibilities

Please observe the following information for the operator:
The operating personnel for the REF542plus must have the appropriate qualifications
for work on the unit.
Your operating personnel must be authorized to work with or on REF542plus. (E.g.
switching authorization in substations)
Changes to the application as delivered may be made only by ABB personnel
For guarantee reasons, changes to the application as delivered made by the cus-
tomer must always be approved by the appropriate ABB sales department
We recommend that only ABB personnel make adjustments to the unit. Once the
guarantee has expired, the unit is opened at your own risk and is permitted after con-
sultation with the ABB office that sold the unit.
3.2 Guarantee Provisions

The data provided in this documentation is intended solely to describe the product
and must not be considered as assured properties. In the interest of users, we are
continually striving to bring our products up to the latest state of the art in technology.
For this reason there may be differences between the product and the product de-
scription and the manual.
If the instructions and recommendations of our documentation are observed, then,
according to our experience, the best possible operational reliability of our products is
guaranteed.
It is virtually impossible for comprehensive documentation to cover every possible
event that may possibly occur when using technical devices and apparatus. We
therefore request that our representatives or we be consulted in the event of any un-
usual incidents and in cases for which this Manual do not provide comprehensive in-
formation.
We explicitly refuse to accept any responsibility for all direct damages that occur as a
result of erroneous usage of our devices, even if no special instructions on this are in-
cluded in the manual.
The documentation has been carefully checked. If the user should find any defects in
spite of this, we request that you inform us as quickly as possible.
We provide a 1 year guarantee for the functioning of the REF542plus.
The guarantee provisions are a component of the related contract documents.

Special arrangements may be made in consultation with the operator and will be
specified in the contract documentation.
In general, all agreements, assurances, legal relationships and all ABB obligations
arise from the current valid contract documentation, including any reference to the
warranty provisions, which are not influenced by the content of this documentation.
ABB assumes no responsibility for damages resulting from improper use of
REF542plus.
In the event of a guarantee claim, please contact the ABB office that sold the unit.
3.3 Safety Regulations

The safety notes in the following chapters represent only a general selection of the
points that must be observed. Additional safety notes applicable to the actual content
of the chapter can be found in the other specific parts of the manual.
Safety notes are either at the beginning of the section or directly at the relevant posi-
tion in the text.
3.3.1 General safety notes

Documentation
Note The content of the documentation supplied with the device must be followed in all cir-
cumstances when the device is in operation.
Operating an electrical device
Warning! When any electrical device is being operated, specific parts of the device are
subject to voltage. If safety warnings are not followed, hazards to personnel
and property will result. Personal injury and damage to property may also oc-
cur.
Safe Operation
Note The device must be properly transported and stored to ensure fault-free and safe op-
eration. In addition, commissioning, control, service and maintenance must be prop-
erly and thoroughly conducted.

3.3.2 Specific safety information

Five safety rules
Warning! The five safety rules according the so called "VBG4 Electrical Substations and
Equipment“ must be observed in all circumstances for personal safety:
1. Isolate the system before beginning work.
2. Secure against reactivation.
3. Ensure that there is no voltage.
4. Ground and short circuit.
5. Cover or shut out neighboring parts under power.
Additional safety standards
Warning! The following safety standards must be observed in all circumstances:

1. IEC 60255 for protection relays in high-voltage substations
2. DIN 57627 plug connections
Working on and operating the device
Note Only qualified personnel may work on and operate the device.
Qualified personnel are:

Entrusted with the setup, installation, commissioning and operation of the device and
the system in which it is installed.
Qualified and authorized to conduct switching operations in accordance with the
standards of safety engineering. This specifically includes switching on and off, isolat-
ing, grounding and signage.
Trained in safety engineering standards and are familiar with the maintenance and
use of safety equipment.
Trained in first aid.

4 Mounting and Installation

In this chapter you will find information:
on what to do first on delivery of the REF542plus
the requirements for the installation location and the environmental conditions,
how to set up the REF542plus and integrate it into the bay and
how to check the wiring to run the commissioning process.
4.1 Unpacking
The REF542 bay control and protection unit does not require special shipping protec-
tion. The packaging is adapted for the shipping type and destination. Please proceed
as follows:
Visually inspect the unit and the packaging when unpacking it.
Any shipping damage found in the packaging or the unit should be reported immedi-
ately to the last shipper, who should be informed in writing of liability for the damage.
Check the delivery for completeness using the order documentation.
If there is anything missing or any discrepancies with the order documentation, con-
tact the ABB sales office immediately.
Mount the unit as described in the following section. If the unit is not for immediate
use, store it in a suitable place in its original packaging.
4.2 Mounting
The REF542 plus consists of two parts, a Central Unit and a separate Human Ma-
chine Interface (HMI) as the Control Unit. The Central Unit contains the power supply,
processor and analog and binary Input and Output (I/O) modules, as well as optional
modules for supplementary functions. The HMI Control Unit is a stand-alone unit with
its own power supply. It can be installed on the Low Voltage (LV) compartment door
or in a dedicated compartment close to the Central Unit. The HMI is normally used to
set the protection parameters and to locally operate the switching devices in the
switchbay. An isolated and shielded twisted pair according to the RS485 standard in-
terface shall be used for the connection of the HMI as the Control unit to the Central
Unit.

The figures below show the dimensions of the HMI Control Unit and Central Unit.
64 mm
215 mm
44 mm
204mm
130 mm
119 mm
Figure 1: Dimension of the HMI Control Unit

238 mm
m
5m
1,
26
179 mm
Figure 2: Dimension of the Central Unit case, standard version

238 mm
m
5m
1,
26
223 mm
Figure 3: Dimension of the Central Unit case, wide version

The following table shows the data relevant for mounting.
Table 1: Relevant data for mounting

Design
Weight Standard version: … kg depending on equipment
Wide version: … kg depending on equipment
Installation type HMI: semiflush on the LV door
Central unit: in the LV compartment
Dimensions 185 x 244.8 x 261.5 mm (W x H x D) Standard version
229 x 244.8 x 261.5 mm (W x H x D) Wide version
Panel cutout 206 x 121 mm (W x H)
4.2.1 Set-up Area and Required Environmental Conditions

Please note the following information regarding the set-up area:
Allow sufficient space for access to the. The connections must be easily accessible.
Access to the Central Unit in the LV compartment must be easy for the following rea-
sons:
to replace the unit,
to expand the unit,
to replace specific electronic equipment boards and
to replace specific modules if necessary.
Because the unit is sensitive to non-permitted severe environmental conditions,
please observe the following:
The set-up area must be free of excessive air contamination (dust, aggressive sub-
stances…).
The natural air circulation around the unit must be free.
The set-up area must maintain the specified environmental conditions

4.2.2 Installation in LV panels
Figure 4: REF542plus installed in gas-insulated switchgears (GIS)
Figure 5: REF542plus installed in air-insulated switchgears (AIS)

Figure 6: Example of mounting of the Central Unit in the LV compartment and the
HMI on the door
4.2.3 Connection diagrams

Connector Plate
Figure 1: REF542plus connector plate for the wide case mixed analog input version

Figure 2: REF542plus connector plate for the short case mixed analog input version
Figure 3: REF542plus connector plate for analog input with transformers or with sensors

Table 2: Connectors on Central Unit

Connector Descriptions Type of connector plug
X10 Auxiliary voltage for power supply 3 pin Weidmueller female BLAT3BSNOR
+ fixing set SLABB2RORSET
st
X20 Binary Inputs of the 1 BIO Harting 09 06 000 9474, DIN 41612
st
X21 Binary outputs of the 1 BIO Harting 09 06 000 9474, DIN 41612
nd
nd
rd
rd
X50 Analog output Harting 09 06 000 9474, DIN 41612
X70 Ethernet interface (full version) Not available yet
X71 CAN interface (full version) Not available yet
X72 RS232 interface 9 pin D-sub connector male
X73 RS485 interface 9 pin D-sub connector male
X74 IRIG-B interface (full version) Not available yet
X75 Fast I/O inputs (full version) Not available yet
X76 Fast I/O outputs (full version) Not available yet
X77 Fast I/O inputs (full version) Not available yet
X80 Analog inputs (from CT and/or VT) Connector kit Compel c/w 24 contacts
- Short version code 350.040.902
- Long version code 350.040.903
Crimp any single contact with hand tool
No 350.048.011
X81..88 Analog input (sensor channel 1..8) BNC Twin Cam CPE 23.717.140-0333
Table 3: Connectors on Central Unit for SPABUS connection, electrical RS232 (modified)
X60 RS232 (modified) 9 pin D-sub connector male (z-modem)
Note The RS232 connector, modified and galvanic isolated, can be applied to connect to a
LON/SPA gateway.
Table 4: Connectors on Central Unit for SPABUS connection, plastic fiber optical cable
X60 TX (optical interface) Snap in HP HFBR 4501 (gray)
X61 RX (optical interface) Snap in HP HFBR 4511 (blue)
Caution The cable length for SPABUS connection with plastic fiber optical cable should
not exceed 30 m

Table 5: Connectors on Central Unit for SPABUS connection, glass fiber optical cable
X60 TX (optical interface) ST plug HITRONIC ST-125
X61 RX (optical interface) ST plug HITRONIC ST-125
Caution The cable length for SPABUS connection with glass fiber optical cable should
not exceed 1000 m
Table 6: Connectors on Central Unit for LON per LAG 1.4 respectively IEC 60870-5-103
X60 TX (optical interface) ST plug HITRONIC ST-125
X61 RX (optical interface) ST plug HITRONIC ST-125
Caution The cable length for LON (per LAG 1.4) connection with glass fiber optical ca-
ble should not exceed 2000 m
Table 7: Connectors on Central Unit for MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485

X60 RS485 channel 1 2pin Weidmueller BLAT2BSNOR
X61 RS485 channel 2 2pin Weidmueller BLAT2BSNOR
Caution To connect to the upper level automation system with MODBUS RTU a twisted
pair cable shall be used. If the cable is shielded, connect only one side of the
shield to the earth screw of the housing. The maximum baud rate is 115000
bit/s. The cable length should not exceed 130 m
Table 8: Connectors on Central Unit for MODBUS, glass fiber optical cable
X62 RX channel 1 (optical interface) ST plug HP type HFBR *XS*
X63 TX channel 1 (optical interface) ST plug HP type HFBR *XS*
X64 RX channel 2 (optical interface) ST plug HP type HFBR *XS*
X65 TX channel 2 (optical interface) ST plug HP type HFBR *XS*
Caution The maximum baud rate is 115000 bit/s with glass fiber optical cable. Its length
should not exceed 2000 m

Figure 7: Power Supply and communication connection for HMI Control Unit
Table 9: Connectors on HMI Control Unit

Connector Descriptions Type
X10 Auxiliary voltage for power supply 2 pin Weidmueller BLAT2BSNOR
X20 RS485 interface to Central Unit 9 pin male D-sub connector
4.2.4 Wiring the REF542plus

Follow the bay documentation supplied for the wiring.
In conclusion, the checks described in the following paragraphs can be done to en-
sure that the wiring is correctly installed.
4.2.4.1 Checking the current transformer circuits

To check that the current transformer and the current transformer circuits are wired
correctly, run the following checks:
Polarity check
The polarity check (as close as possible to the REF542plus) is used to check the cur-
rent circuit and also the installation position and the polarity of the transducer. The po-
larity of the transducers to one another can also be checked with load current.
Current feed with heavy current source (primary test instrument).
The current feed provides information on the transducer transformation and the cor-
rect wiring to the REF542plus. The power supply should be per conductor and run
from conductor to conductor in each case. All line currents and the residual current
should be checked here.
The transducer transformation can also be checked with load current.
Recording the magnetizing characteristic
Recording the magnetizing characteristic ensures that the REF542plus is connected
to a protective core and not to a measuring core.
Checking the transducer circuit ground
Every independent current circuit may be grounded at only one point to prevent bal-
ancing currents resulting from potential differences.
Check the grounding of the cable current transformer (when used)
If the neutral current is measured by a cable current transformer, the cable shielding
should first be returned through the cable current transformer before connecting it to
the ground.
This enables weak ground faults currents that flow along the cable sheath to dissi-
pate. In this way, they will not be incorrectly measured at their own relay feeder. The
following shows another view of the cable current transformer grounding.

Cable current transformer
Out-feed
Shielding
Secondary measurement line
Figure 8: Grounding of a cable current transformer
4.2.4.2 Check the voltage transformer circuits

To check that the voltage transformer and the voltage transformer circuits are wired
correctly, run the following checks:
Polarity check
Wiring check
Check the transformer circuit grounding
Check the voltage transformer for neutral point-ground voltage (when used).
To measure ground faults please proceed as follows: The voltage is referred to as
neutral point-ground voltage of a ground fault measurement when it occurs with a me-
tallic ground fault in the network between terminals "e“ and "n“ of the open delta wind-
ing.
In the event of a metallic ground fault in phase L1, the external phase-to-neutral volt-
ages occur in phases L2 and L3 instead of the conductor-ground voltages. They are
added geometrically and yield three times the amplitude between terminals "e“ and
"n“.
4.2.4.3 Checking the auxiliary voltage

The auxiliary voltage must be in the tolerance range of the power supply module and
have the proper polarity under all operating conditions.
4.2.4.4 Check the tripping and signaling contacts

Conduct this check as shown in the bay documentation.
4.2.4.5 Check the binary inputs

Check the polarity and the voltage value of the binary inputs on the REF542 in accor-
dance with the technical data of the binary inputs.
4.2.5 Grounding of the REF542plus

As can be seen in the following figure, the power supply board at connector X10 must
be grounded to the housing. Therefore the middle pin must be connected to the
grounding point in the LV compartment. Beside that, the shielding of the cable con-
nection to the HMI control unit must also be connected to ground respectively to the
housing.

Figure 4: Grounding of the REF542plus Central Unit housing
To ensure the EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) the housing must be grounded
by a low impedance galvanic connection to the grounding system. As it is shown in
the figure, an appropriate cable connection, which is fixed from a specific screw on
the housing to the grounding system in the LV compartment, must be foreseen. That
is why an interweaving cable is used for the grounding connection. If, due to the in-
stallation construction, the low impedance connection from the housing to the ground-
ing system is already given, the additional grounding connection by the interweaving
cable can be abstain from.
The housing of the HMI Local Control Unit must also be grounded too. As can be
seen in the next figure, a specific grounding cable is to be connected from the hous-
ing of the HMI Local Control Unit to the grounding system in the LV compartmen.

Figure 5: Grounding of the REF542plus HMI Local Control Unit
4.2.6 Typical examples of analog and binary connections

The following pages show examples for wiring analog inputs (measuring inputs) on
the REF542plus with sensors or transducers, binary I/Os and analog output boards.
Typical examples of usage in practice will be shown here. The following symbols are
used in the circuit diagrams:
Table 10: Graphical symbols for electric diagram (IEC 60617)

Symbol Legend Symbol Legend
Energy flow from the bus bar Ring core current transformer
Energy flow towards the bus Make contact

bar
Mechanical, pneumatic or hy- Break contact

draulic connection (link)
Earth, ground Change-over break before

make contact
Conductors in a screened ca- Position switch, break contact

ble
Twisted conductors Circuit breaker
Connection of conductors Disconnector
Plug and socket male and Operating device

female)

Symbol Legend Symbol Legend

Resistor with one fixed tap- Fuse
ping
Current transformer Sensing element
Three-phase transformer Current sensing element
Voltage transformer Optical fibre cable
4.2.7 Connection Example of the REF542plus Analog Inputs
Figure 6: Example of connection diagram for incoming or outgoing bays with transformers

Figure 7: Example of connection diagram for incoming or outgoing bays with sensors

Figure 8: Example of connection diagram for bus-tie and measuring bays with transformers

Figure 9: Example of connection diagram for bus-tie and measuring bays with sensors
Caution Due to accuracy requirements the length of the cable connection to the sen-
sors in other bay respectively panels should be less than 7 m

Figure 10: Example of connection diagram for the transformer differential protection with transformers

Figure 11: Example of connection diagram for the transformer differential protection with sensors

Figure 12: Example of connection diagram for the synchronism check with transformers

Figure 13: Example of connection diagram for the synchronism check with sensors

Figure 14: Example of connection diagram for the synchronism check with transformers

Figure 15: Example of connection diagram for the synchronism check with sensors

5 Commissioning
The following sections with their subsections contain information on:
The devices and facilities required for the commissioning inspection.
The required procedure for the commissioning inspection; For example, depend-
ing on the components to be tested: Protection, interlock conditions, communica-
tions, measured value recording and determining the direction.
5.1 Safety Information

The devices, adapters and procedures described are only examples. Experience and
safety in handling the various devices is a requirement.
5.2 Switching on the feeder
Caution Before switching on the feeder check that the REF542plus is fully functional in
the corresponding bay. Pay particular attention to the protective functions and
the interlocking!
5.3 Test Equipment

The most important device for the commissioning of the REF542plus is an appropri-
ate relay test equipment. The test equipment should have a three phase current and
voltage system. Also the simulation of current and voltage sensors by the test equip-
ment shall also be possible. For example a test equipment manufactured by KOCOS
in Korbach/Germany can be used.
5.4 Testing the interlock conditions,

This test is intended to check the interlocking of the switchgear that the user wants
and is required. The two types of interlocking must be taken into account here:
Bay-level interlocking of specific switchgear and
Station-level interlocking of the bay versus other bays.
The interlock conditions for the bay under test can be found in the order documenta-
tion. The interlock conditions specified by the user can be found there.
All possible circumstances must be checked.

5.5 Determining the transformer direction

The connection of the measuring inputs and the correct polarity of the current and
voltage transformers or sensors is very important for distance, comparison and direc-
tional functions.
In addition to testing the polarity, the transformation ratio and the magnetizing charac-
teristic, the wiring of the transformers/sensors must also be checked during these
test.
5.5.1 Current transformer

The transformers must have a positive winding.
This can be easily checked with a 9 V battery and an analog DC voltmeter. If the pri-
mary coil of the current transformer is connected to the battery, the analog voltmeter
connected on the secondary side must show positive. When the battery is discon-
nected, the voltmeter must measure a negative impulse.
The positive terminal of the battery must be connected to P1 of the primary coil and
the positive input of the voltmeter to s1 for this test. The same applies for the negative
terminal at P2 of the primary coil and the voltmeter negative input at s2 of the secon-
dary coil.
The test setup for checking the direction of a core is shown in the following figure.
P1 1s1
1s2
2s1 +
+ V
2s2
– 3s1 –
P2 3s2
Figure 16: Setup for the polarity test of current transformers
This polarity check, also referred to as patch test, must be run for every core. To
guarantee correct operation even with a multi core current transformer with different
cores such as protection and measuring cores, it is recommended that the magnetiz-
ing characteristic (hysteresis) be recorded. A Variac with appropriately high voltage is
connected to the secondary terminals. The flowing current is measured while the out-
put voltage is rising. The characteristic of the measured values, voltage over current,
yields the magnetizing characteristic of the core, which can then be compared with
the manufacturer's data.
The transformation ratio of the current transformer cores is checked with a special
primary current feed device. The feed device is primarily connected to the current
transformer and the secondary value is measured at the secondary terminals of the
transformer or at the protective cabinet with an ampere meter.

5.5.2 Voltage transformer

The same polarity test or patch test is run with voltage transformers. The difference is
that the battery is connected to the secondary side and the analog DC test instrument
to the primary coil of the voltage transformer.
The test setup for checking a core is shown in the following figure.
A a
+ n +
V e
–
–
N n
Figure 17: Polarity test of voltage transformers
Every core must be tested here.

If the Variac described in the current transformer section for recording the magnetiz-
ing characteristic has a sufficiently high output voltage (e.g. 500 V), it can also be
used to run a qualitative test of the voltage transformer transformation ratio. The
Variac voltage is applied to the primary side of the voltage transformer and a voltme-
ter is used to measure the secondary voltage at the corresponding transformer or pro-
tective cabinet terminals.
5.5.3 Current sensor

Because the current sensor, the Rogowski coil, is an air-core coil, it must be sub-
jected to the same polarity test as the current transformers.
The test design is shown in the following diagram. A higher voltage value may be re-
quired for the battery.
P1 S1
+
+
V
– –
P2 S2
Figure 18: Polarity test of current sensors (Rogowski coil)
The transformation ratio is tested exactly as with a current transformer. The display in
the REF542 protection and control unit can also be checked at the same time. It is not
necessary to record a magnetizing characteristic with the Rogowski coil, because it is
an air-core coil with no saturation characteristics.

5.5.4 Voltage sensor

The polarity of the voltage sensor, which is a resistive precision voltage divider, is
checked as shown in the following diagram. The correct polarity of the voltage is
measured by applying an appropriate DC voltage (e.g. 24V/DC) to the secondary
terminals. The auxiliary voltage source can also be used if the transformation ratio is
very high. The transformation ratio of the resistive divider is checked at the same
time.
A
+
+
a V
– –
N n
Figure 19: Polarity test of voltage sensors (resistive splitter)
5.6 Testing the measured value recording

Proper functioning of the transformers and sensors is important for proper functioning
of the REF542plus. The measured-value processing of the unit and the set rated val-
ues must be tested for this reason.
The phase currents and phase voltages must be taken as measured input quantities.
All other measured values are quantities derived from them.
Test as follows:
Check whether the set rated values match the rated values required by the user (in
the order documentation).
If necessary, load the application into the PC from the REF542plus.
Select the menu item Main Menu/Settings/Connections/Analog Inputs in

the configuration program. The rated values are shown in the dialog window that ap-
pears and, if necessary, changed.
Test the wiring of the transformers or sensors
Disconnect the transducers or sensors from the REF542plus.
The current transformers must be short-circuited, combination sensors disconnected.
Connect the test set to the REF542plus. The relevant current and voltage signals are
applied to the analog inputs.
Set the required rated values on the test set
Table 11: Rated values of the current and voltage signals

Transducer/sensor Rated value
Current transformer 1A or 5A
Voltage Transformer 100V
Rogowski coil 150 mV
Voltage sensor 2V

To test the phase sequence, set every phase separately to the rated value and then
check the value on the LC display screen. At the end reset the phase to zero.
Generate one symmetrical system each for current and voltage with the rated values.
Check the calculated values. A three-phase current and voltage tester is recom-
mended to test the power. By changing the phase angle between the current and the
voltage system the calculation of reactive and effective values and of cos ϕ can be
checked.
5.7 Testing the protective functions

To ensure that no damage has been caused by transport or setup and installation of
the protection equipment and systems, secondary tests are run on the REF542plus
protection and control unit with the configured protective functions.
Warning! Always observe the applicable safety regulations when conducting the secon-
dary test with an appropriate test set.
Caution When testing ensure that the limit values of the measuring inputs and the auxil-
iary voltage supply are not exceeded.
Secondary function tests are recommended during commissioning of the protective

functions.
The activated and configured automatic auto reclosure and also other functions of the
complete system and the power circuit-breaker should be tested to ensure safe op-
eration of these functions.
The following points are particularly important for protective functions that must work
in connection with a set direction or energy flow quantity.
Checking the sensor and transformer connections and wiring check of the station cir-
cuit diagram
Determining the transformer direction
Connection and documentation of the test set
Testing and documentation of the measured value recording
Setting parameters for the protective functions
Recording the test settings
To monitor the test of the correct direction of the specific protective functions in com-
parison with the measured power and power factors in the event of a later primary
test, the following information should be documented in the secondary tests:
Directional setting of the test set
Measurement of the effective and reactive power and of the cos ϕ factor
Directional setting of the measurement and protective functions

6 Troubleshooting
In this chapter you will find information on
Self test of the Central unit
Self test of the HMI
By means of the self test the proper function of the REF542plus can be checked. It is
to be recommended that the self test is done in uninstall condition of the REF542plus.
At least no connection to the primary system should be left. Beside that, the upgrade
the firmware will also be described.
6.1 Safety Information

If there is any doubt regarding the treatment of a message, please check with our
service representative.
6.2 Required devices and facilities

6.2.1 Sinusoidal generator
The generator must have the following features in case of using the analog inputs of
the REF542plus with current and voltage transformers:
Accuracy class: 0.5
Current output : 1 respective 5 A 50 Hz AC minimum
Voltage output: 100 V 50 Hz AC minimum
Voltage output: 2 VRMS 50 Hz AC
The generator must have the following features in case of using the analog inputs of
the REF542plus with current and voltage sensors:
Accuracy class: 0.5
Current output : 150 mV 50 Hz AC minimum
Voltage output: 2 VRMS 50 Hz AC minimum
6.2.2 Adjustable power supply

with the following features:
Voltage output: 30 – 240 V DC
Power : 500 VA
Accuracy class: 5, <12% ripple
6.2.3 Personal computer

The PC (usually laptop) must be provided with at least one RS232 port for serial
communication respectively data transfer. Two RS232 ports will give better operation
condition. Thereby, the following software must be installed:
• REF542plus official released configuration software (example V4B01)
• Tera Term Pro software
6.2.4 Tera Term Pro

Tera Term Pro is a freeware terminal program for communication between the PC
and the hardware of the REF542plus, the Central Unit or the HMI Local Control Unit,
The setting for the communication with the Central Unit can be seen in the next fig-
ure, which can be stored e.g. using the file name MCTERM:INI: This setting file can
be used later, if a communication with the Central Unit is necessary.
Figure 20: Setting of the communication to the Central Unit
Figure 21: Setting of the communication to the HMI
The above figure shows the setting for the communication to the HMI Local Control
Unit and can be stored e.g. as RHMITERM.INI.
6.2.5 Connection cables

The next figure show the set up for trouble shooting. There are several cables needed
to link the PC and the REF542plus:

HMI CENTRAL Unit
RS485cable
ABB
RS232-optical
cable
RS232 cable
COM1
COM2
Figure 9: Test configuration of the REF542plus
6.2.5.1 RS232 cable

This standard serial communication cable is needed for the communication between
the PC and the Central Unit. The connector on the central unit for this purpose is X72.
6.2.5.2 REF542plus optical cable.

The HMI must be interfaced to a PC through the ABB RS232 optical cable. The opti-
cal converter must be plugged in the connector situated on the front side of the HMI.
By using this interface the configuration file can be downloaded or uploaded from the
local PC, which hosts the configuration tool, to the REF542plus central unit. Besides
that, protection and operation events and the value of the measurement quantities
stored in the REF542plus can be uploaded from the local PC for monitoring purpose.
Opto converter
D-sub
Figure 22: ABB RS232 - optical cable for the connection to the HMI
6.2.5.3 RS 485 Cable

This cable is normally used for the connection between the HMI as Local Control Unit
and the Central Unit in the LV compartment. This cable is connected to the connector
X73 on the Central Unit.
6.3 Self test of the Central Unit

By means of the self test the functionality of the REF542plus Central unit can be
proved.

6.3.1 Behavior after cold start

To see the behavior after cold start the following condition is to be prepared:
The PC must be connected via the serial interface RS232 to the connector X72.
The Tera Term Pro software is running and configured with the setting file
MCTERM.INI.
The related power supply voltage must be connected to connector -X10.
The HMI Local Control Unit must not be connected to the Central Unit.
After the central unit starts up, the software Tera Term Pro shows messages as dis-
played in the following figure.
Figure 10: Correct start up sequence of Central Unit displayed by Tera Term Pro
software
The REF542plus is after the indication “system running” in operation again. If the HMI
Local Control Unit is connected, then on the LCD screen the single line diagram and
the menu will be displayed.

6.3.2 Enter REF542plus self test

If a self test should be performed, press a key on the PC keyboard within a couple of
seconds after the Central Unit is powered on again. The TeraTerm Pro software will
display the following messages on the PC:
Figure 23: Tera Term Pro display for entering the self test of the Central Unit
Type the proper password and press ‘enter’. Ask for the password from the author-
ized personnel in your local ABB representative. After typing the correct password,
the following sub-menu will be shown:
Figure 24: Display on Tera Term Pro Window after entering the right password
To verify the functionality the following test can be performed:

6.3.2.1 RAM test

Press “r”
2 Mbyte RAM is being tested
Test result is shown on the terminal
Figure 11: Display of the result after RAM test
6.3.2.2 Program flash memory test

Press “p”
16 Mbit flash is being tested. This test will destroy the actual application firmware on
the program flash. Application firmware must be downloaded afterwards by “d” com-
mand.
Test result is shown on the terminal.
6.3.2.3 Configuration flash memory test

Press “c”
16 Mbit flash is being tested. This test will destroy the actual configuration (if any) on
the data flash.
Test result is shown on the terminal
6.3.3 Calibration of the Analog Input

The calibration of the REF542plus is normally not necessary, because the related
calibration data are stored in the memory of the analog input board itself. But if e.g.
one of the CT or VT on the analog input board is removed or substituted, a re-
calibration has to be done. For this reason the so called factory test mode must be
entered by typing f after entering the self test mode. After some seconds, a menu
with possible operations is shown on the PC terminal.The following commands are
available:

Table 12: All available commands on the factory test mode

Command Description
s set time to RTC
a set A/D calibration parameter
p display A/D calibration parameter
w test DSP watchdog
f test fast I/O and DSP trip interrupt
g GPS IRIG-B test
b test binary I/O board
k enter DSP calibration mode
r read communication board version
u show DSP RAM test result
h show help (e.g. the present table)
As can be seen from the table the calibration mode can be entered by selecting the
command k. In this mode the offset errors of the signal conditioning chain for the fur-
ther processing of the analog input signals in the REF542plus unit can be compen-
sated. Moreover the connections to the connector X80 can be defined. Afterwards the
calibration data are stored on the EEPROM on the Analog Input Board.
The calibration procedure needs the following preparation:
Sinusoidal generator as already mentioned in chapter 6.2.1.
Put in the jumper X12, which is located near to the back plane connector.
6.3.3.1 Transformer Input Board

The board must be supplied at X80 connector with:
1A, 50 Hz with accuracy class 0.5 at the 1A current inputs pins
0,2A, 50 Hz with accuracy class 0.5 at the 0,2A current inputs pins, normally on
input channel 7 and/or 8
100 V RMS, 50 Hz. with accuracy class 0.5 at the voltage inputs
Note During the calibration procedure all signals used calibration must be in phase!
6.3.3.2 Sensor Input Board

The board must be supplied at the X81…X88 connectors at the same time with sig-
nals of 2V, 50 Hz with an accuracy class 0.5

6.3.3.3 Mixed Input Board

In this case the board must be supplied at
X80 current inputs with 1A, 50 Hz with accuracy class 0.5
X80 voltage inputs with 100V, 50 Hz. with accuracy class 0.5
X81..X86 with 2 V, 50 Hz accuracy class 0.5
6.3.3.4 Calibration procedure

Before starting the calibration procedure, the protection unit housing must be
grounded. Beside that, the shielding screw on the analog input board must also be in.
Caution Before starting the calibration procedure, the jumper X12 must be put in
After switching on all the input signals for running the calibration procedure can be
started. For each possible analog input channel (from 1 to 8) the following selection
must be done:
c, if the input is a current transformer (1A).
v, if the input is a voltage transformer (100V).
s, if the input is a sensor (2V)
x, if you like to skip the calibration for the channel.
th
After entered 8 channel input settings the calibration procedure starts automatically
the calculation of calibration factors and after some seconds, it ends. The report
shows at the corresponding input lines the calibration result with channel accuracy. In
case of wrong connections to the input a phase error will be reported. The following
figure shows the returned messages of the calibration procedure in case of phase er-
ror.

Figure 25: Calibration of channel 4 with wrong connections phases to X80
At the end of the calibration procedure it must be verified that all the configured chan-
nels has been configured and the phase error check reports no errors.
Caution At the end of the calibration phases the Jumper X12 must be removed.
6.4 Remote HMI self test

The following test procedure is applicable since the implementation of the software
version 4B 01. To carry out the test the following steps must be done:
Connect the power supply to the connector X10. Take care of the voltage level of the
HMI.
Switch on the power supply of the HMI Local Control Unit.
The connection to the Central Unit shall be removed.

When the RHMI is not connected to the protection unit shows the following screen:
RHMI software version:
V4B.01
PROTECTION UNIT NOT RESPONDING
OR COMMUNICATION CORRUPTED
<-' to test RHMI
Figure 26: Display on the LCD screen after switching on the power supply
By pressing the return key a “Stand alone” mode on the LCD display is shown. The
test can be run individually or all together in sequence by selecting the corresponding
menu line. In this case the e-key with the ABB code must be inserted in its plug and
loop back cable must be inserted in X20 and in the optical interface in advance.
Men ↵
RHMI Tests
- Test LCD DONE

- Test LEDs
- Test keyboard FAIL
- Test E-key
- Test serial OK
- Run all tests
Select row
<-' to exec
menu to restart
To selected test page
Figure 12: “Stand alone” Test Page

At the end of each test display line a place is left for the test result. The test result can
be:
DONE (for LCD and LEDs tests)
FAIL or OK (for Keyboard, E-Key and Serials tests)
Each time the HMI Test Page (each of the two type) is accessed the place for the re-
sult is set to blank. After a test is run the corresponding result is shown. If the menu
option “Run all tests” is selected, all tests results will be displayed.
The following paragraphs describe the performing of single test.
6.4.1 LCD test

This test consists in the following four parts. Each part has a corresponding page and
there is a 2 seconds delay between one test and the following one.
A manual verification by the test operator is needed to check the test result.
6.4.1.1 Texts writing test

LCD page is displayed
1 second delay
The LCD page is cleared
The test is carried out. It writes the text as shown in the next figure
To Graphic
↵ Test Page
2 sec
after
t t
……………TEXT WRITING TEST
Figure 27: LCD Display during Text Writing test
2 seconds delay. After the delay time is expired the following next test will be started
automatically:
6.4.1.2 Graphic writing test

The LCD page is displayed
1 second delay
The LCD page is cleared

Test carried out. It writes the text as shown in the next figure
From Text To Backlight

Test Page Test Page
2 sec
after
GRAPHIC WRITING TEST
Figure 28: LCD display during Graphic Writing test.
automatically:
6.4.1.3 Back-light test

The LCD Page is displayed
From Graphic To Contrast

Test Page Test Page
2 sec
after
t t
BACKLIGHT TEST
The LCD backlight will be turned OFF

and then ON again

Figure 13: Back-light Test Page
2 seconds delay
Back light off
1 second delay
Back light on
automatically:
6.4.1.4 LCD contrast test

The following LCD page is shown
From Backlight To HMI Tests

Test Page Page
2 sec
after
t t
LCD CONTRAST TEST
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Figure 14: LCD Contrast Test Page
2 seconds delay
Contrast varied from minimum to maximum (in a total time of 2 seconds) and then re-
stored to previous value
2 seconds delay. After the delay time is expired the HMI Test menu will be displayed
automatically:

6.4.2 LEDs test

This test consists of the following steps:
The LCD page for for the LED Test is displayed
1 second delay
Then the test carried out, in which the LED’s will be switched on and the colors will be
cyclic changed
After finishing the test, the HMI test page will be displayed again automatically.
6.4.3 Keyboard test

The keyboard test page is displayed on the LCD
From RHMI To RHMI

↵
test page test page
KEYBOARD TEST
Press separately
each keyboard button
within 15 sec
- Emergency PRESSED
- Open
- Close
- Select PRESSED
- Menu
- Enter PRESSED
- UP PRESSED
- DOWN
↵ ...
Figure 15: Keyboard Test Page
Each keyboard buttons has to be pressed one by one, no matter the order. When a
button is pressed the “PRESSED” string is displayed in the corresponding page line.
When all buttons have been pressed, after 1-second delay, the test ends with OK re-
sult.
If after 15 seconds not all buttons have been pressed, the test ends with FAIL result.

6.4.4 E-Key test

The LCD display for the E-Key Test Page is shown in the following figure:
From RHMI To RHMI

↵
test page test page
ELECTRONIC KEY TEST
Insert the ABB Key

within 5 sec
Figure 16: E-Key Test Page
The so called ABB-key must be inserted within 5 seconds. Afterwards the test will end
with OK result. Otherwise, the result is FAIL.
6.4.5 Serial ports test

This test is performed by connecting the loop-back cable, cable that is normally used
for the connection between PC and HMI Local Control Unit, between the port X20 and
the optical connector on the HMI front panel.
??? REF542 plus

Ready NetworkCommunication Alarm Interlocking
M2 V M1
SERIAL PORTS TEST

0 100%
M2
Open Please, be sure that
CB the two serial ports are
connected with the 0 100%
loopback cable M3
0 100%
Menu
↵
Optical RS 232 to
half duplex RS 485
converter
Figure 17: RHMI serial ports test

Figure 18: Loop-back cable for the RHMI serial ports test
The test will consist in the following steps:

The LCD page for the serial ports test is displayed according to next figure:
From RHMI test page ↵ To RHMI

test page
2 sec
after test
end
SERIAL PORTS TEST
Please, be sure that the two serial
ports are connected with the
loopback cable
TEST OK
Shown after test end
Figure 19: Serial Ports Test Page
RS485 to RS232 communication test

10 telegrams will be sent to the optical port.

RS232 to RS485 communication test

10 messages are sent to the RS 485 port.
Test result shown in the page (“TEST OK” or “TEST FAIL”)
2 seconds delay.

7 Firmware upgrade
In the following the upgrade of the firmware is described. The possibility of upgrading
the firmware is to be asked to the authorized personnel to your local ABB representa-
tive.
7.1 Upgrade the Firmware of the Central Unit

Use the RS232 port X72 on the Central Unit of the REF542plus.
Connect to the serial RS232 port on the PC with the TeraTerm Pro software with the
set up file MCTERM.INI.
Turn on the power supply for the Central Unit and press a key on the PC keyboard
within a couple of seconds
Type the proper password and press ‘enter’
Type “d” and at prompt answer yes by pressing “y”
From the menu File in Tera Term Pro select “send file”
Select the new main-board firmware to download and click “Open“
After the download is completed, the Central Unit should reset itself and run the new
firmware.
7.2 RHMI firmware upgrade

Set Tera Term Pro software with the set up file RHMITERM.INI.
Connect the RHMI to a PC through the optical cable
Turn ON the power supply for the HMI Local Control Unit and press “enter button” on
the PC within a couple of seconds (if not, the RHMI application starts normally)
Select the "Send File..." item on TeraTerm "File" menu
Choose the firmware file. "Binary" option should be DISABLED
Wait until the file has been uploaded to HMI (one or two minutes)
At the end of the upload, the newly uploaded firmware version starts
Note Only HMI with software version 4B01 can be uploaded with this boot loader

8 Decommissioning and Storage

In this chapter you will find information
On decommissioning the unit
Storing the REF542plus after decommissioning or before commissioning.
8.1 Decommissioning
Please observe the following directions when decommissioning the unit:
Isolate the bay
Transfer the configuration from the REF542plus to the PC and save it on data media
Switch off the REF542plus auxiliary supply voltage
Switch off the remaining miniature circuit breakers as well
If applicable, isolate all current transformers
Disconnect the REF542plus from the measuring circuits
Remove all plug connectors

Remove the unit
Check the unit for damage.
Pack the REF542plus properly; preferably in the original packaging
Store the unit on its side beforehand as specified.
It is not necessary to decommission the configuration program. If you wish to uninstall
the configuration program, follow the relevant directions.
8.2 Storage
Please observe the following minimum requirements for optimum storage:
Units with standard packaging or without packaging
Dry and well ventilated storage space, conditions in accordance with DIN VDE 0670
Part 1000/IEC 60694,
If packaging is used, it must be undamaged or
units without packaging must be well covered with protective sheets; however, ensure
sufficient air circulation to prevent corrosion.
Check the unit regularly for condensation.

9 Technical data
9.1 Analog input channels
Accuracy for measurement including the current/voltage sensors class 1.
Accuracy for protection class 3
9.1.1 With current and voltage transformer:

Rated current In 1A or 5A
Rated voltage Un: 100V (also suitable for 110V)
Rated frequency fn: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Thermal load capacity

Current path 250 In (peak value) dynamic,
100 In for 1s,
4 In continuous,
Voltage path 2 Un /√3 continuous.
Consumption
Current path ≤ 0.1 VA with In
Voltage path ≤ 0.25 VA with Un
9.1.2 With current and voltage sensor

Rated current In 150 mV (rms)
Rated voltage Un: 2V (rms)
Rated frequency fn: 50 Hz / 60 Hz

9.2 Binary inputs and outputs

Each binary I/O board has the following number of inputs and outputs:
9.2.1 With mechanical relays (1 BIO version 3)

14 inputs (BI 1 to 14) For auxiliary voltage range:
20 to 90 V DC (threshold 14 V DC) or
for auxiliary voltage range:
80 to 250 V DC (threshold 50 V DC)
Each input has a fixed filter time of 1 ms.

Extension can be freely programmed.
5 power outputs (BO 1,2,3,4 and 5) respectively Maximal Operation voltage 250V AC/DC
6 (Relay contact of BO6 is link together with re-
Make current 20 A
lay contact of BO5)
Load current 12 A
Breaking capacity 300 W at L/R = 15 ms
Operation time 9 ms
2 signal outputs (BO7 and 8) and 1 Watchdog Operation voltage 250 V AC/DC
output (WD)
Load current 2 A
Operation time 5 ms
1 Static output (optionally BO7) Maximal Operation voltage 250 VDC
Operation time 1 ms
1 coil supervision circuit (BO2)
9.2.2 With static outputs (1 BIO version static)

14 inputs (BI 1-14) for auxiliary voltage range
48 to 265 VDC (Threshold 35 VDC)
Each input has a fixed filter time of 1 ms.

Extension can be freely programmed.
3 power outputs (BO1,2 and 7) Operation voltage 48 to 265 VDC
Make current 70 A for t ≤ 10 ms
Load current 12 A for t ≤ 30 s
Operation time 1 ms
4 power outputs (BO3 to 6) Operation voltage 48 to 265 V DC
Make current 16 A for t ≤ 10 ms
Load current 10 A for t ≤ 30 s
Operation time 1 ms
2 Signal outputs and 1 Watchdog output Operation voltage 48 to 265 V DC
Make current 0.3 A
Operation time 1 ms
2 coil supervision circuit (BO1 and 2)

9.3 Interface
9.3.1 HMI Control Unit:
Optical/electrical standard interface RS 232 to the Notebook PC (at the front)
Electrical isolated standard interface RS 485 to the Central Unit (at the rear)
9.3.2 Central Unit:

Electrical isolated standard interface RS 485 to the HMI
Electrical standard interface RS 232 for updating the firmware
9.4 Analog output board (optional)

Four channel 0 to 20 mA respectively 4 to 20 mA
9.5 Communication (optional)

SPABUS, electrical interface with standard RS232 or optical interface with snap-in
type connector for plastic fiber respectively standard FMA connector for glass fiber
(multi mode)
LON (according to LAG1.4), optical interface with standard ST connector for glass fi-
ber (multi mode)
IEC 60870-5-103 with extension according to VDEW guidelines for controlling, optical
interface with standard ST connector for glass fiber (multi mode)
MODBUS RTU, electrical interface with two standard RS485 or optical interface with
two standard ST connector for glass fiber (multi mode)
9.6 Power supply

9.6.1 Central Unit
Rated voltage 110 VDC (-15%, +10%),
220 VDC (-15%, +10%) or
48 to 220 VDC (-15%, +10%)
Power consumption ≤ 18 W (base version with 1 BIO)
Inrush current ≤ 10 A peak value
9.6.2 RHMI Control Unit

Rated voltage: For auxiliary voltage in the range of:
48 … 110 VDC (-15%, +10%) or
110 … 220 VDC (-15%, +10%)
Power consumption ≤6W

9.7 Temperature range

Operation -5 ..+ 55°C
Transport and storing -20..+70°C
9.8 Degree of protection

9.8.1 Central Unit
Housing IP20
9.8.2 RHMI Control Unit

Front IP 54
Rear IP 22

10 Type Test
10.1 Protection Function
All relevant tests according to the standard IEC 60255.
ANSI Code Protection Function and the Setting Parameters Test Procedure
68 Inrush stabilization (Only in connection with I>> and I>) IEC 60255-3
N = 2.0 … 8.0
M = 3.0 … 4.0
Time = 220 … 100.000 ms
67 Overcurrent directional high IEC 60255-12
I>> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
67 Overcurrent directional low IEC 60255-12
I > = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 220 ... 300.000 ms
50 Overcurrent instantaneous IEC 60255-3
I>>> = 0,10 ... 40 In
t = 15 ... 300.000 ms
51 Overcurrent high IEC 60255-3
I>> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 40 ... 300.000 ms
51 Overcurrent low IEC 60255-3
I > = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 40 ... 300.000 ms
51 IDMT IEC 60255-3
Normal-, Very-, Extremely- or Longtime- inverse time
characteristic
Ie = 0,05 ... 40 In
K = 0,05 ... 1,5
51N Earth fault high IEC 60255-3
IE>> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 70 ... 100.000 ms
51N Earth fault low IEC 60255-3
IE> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 70 ... 100.000 ms
67N Earth fault directional high IEC 60255-12
IE>> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 40 ... 100.000 ms
forward- / backward direction
isolated (sin ϕ) and earthed (cos ϕ)
67N Earth fault directional low IEC 60255-12
IE> = 0,05 ... 40 In
t = 40 ... 300.000 ms
forward- / backward direction
isolated (sin ϕ) and earthed (cos ϕ)

67N Earth fault directional sensitive IEC 60255-12
IE> = 0,05 ... 2 In
t = 120 ... 100.000 ms, for- / backward
Slope angle α = 0 ... 20°,
Slope angle δ = - 180 ... 180°
UNE> = 0,05 ...0,7 Un
51N Earth fault IDMT IEC 60255-3
Standard, very, extremely or long time inverse time
characteristic,
Ie = 0,05 ... 40 In
k = 0,05 ... 1,5
59 Overvoltage instantaneous IEC 60255-3
U>>> = 0,10 ... 3 Un
t = 20 ... 300.000 ms
59 Overvoltage high IEC 60255-3
U>> = 0,10 ... 3 Un
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
59 Overvoltage low IEC 60255-3
U> = 0,10 ... 3 Un
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
27 Undervoltage instantaneous IEC 60255-3
U<<< = 0,10 ... 1,2 Un
t = 50 ... 300.000 ms
27 Undervoltage high IEC 60255-3
U<< = 0,1 ... 1,2 Un
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
27 Undervoltage low IEC 60255-3
U< = 0,1 ... 1,2 Un
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
59N Residual overvoltage high IEC 60255-3
UNE>> = 0,05 ... 3 Un
t = 40 ... 300.000 ms
59N Residual overvoltage low IEC 60255-3
UNE> = 0,05 ... 3 Un
t = 40 ... 300.000 ms
st
49 Thermal overload protection (thermal equation 1 or- IEC 60255-8
der with complete memory function)
Tn = 50 ... 400 °C (nominal temperature at In)
In (Mot) = 1 ... 10000 A (primary value of the nominal
motorcurrent)
Tini = 50 ... 120 % Tn (initial temperature at power on)
τcool = 10 ... 20.000 s (time constant at I< 0.1 In and n
= 0)
τwarm = 10 ... 20.000 s (time constant normal)
τwarm = 10 ... 20.000 s (time constant at I > 2 In)
Tmax = 20 ... 400 °C (maximal temperature)
Twarn = 20 ... 400 °C (warn temperature)
Tenvi = 50 ... Tini (environment temperature)

51 Motor start protection (adiabatic characteristic) IEC 60255-3
Ie = 0,3 ... 1,2 In (motor current)
Is = 1,00 ... 20 Ie (start value)
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
I> = 0,6 ... 0,8 Is (motor start)
51LR Blocking rotor (definite time characteristic) IEC 60255-3
Ie = 0,3 ... 1,2 In (motor current)
Is = 1,00 ... 20 Ie (start value)
t = 70 ... 300.000 ms
66 Number of starts
n(warm) = 1 ...10 (number of warm starts)
n(cold) = 1 ...10 (number of cold starts)
t = 1.02 .. 7200 s
T (warm) = 20 ... 200 °C (temperature limit warm start)
21+79 Distance protection with autoreclosing IEC 60255-16
System earthing = high/low ohmic
ct – grounding = line side, bus bar side
with/without earth start
switching onto faults = normal, overreach zone, trip af-
ter start
Signal comparison overreach scheme time set = 30 ….
300.000 ms
U / I- Start characteristic:
I>, IE> and IF> = 0,05 ... 4 In
UF< = 0,05 ... 0,9 Un
Phase selection = cyclic/acyclic
Earth factor:
k = 0,00 ... 10,00
ϕ (k) = -60 ... 60°
3 Impedance- and 1 overreachstage:
R = 0,05 ... 120 Ω (secondary values)
X = 0,05 ... 120 Ω (secondary values)
t = 20 ... 10.000 ms
1 directional stage
Direction 0 ... 90 bzw.-45 ... 135°
t = 25 ... 10.000 ms
1 non directional stage
t = 25 ... 10.000 ms
2 shots AR with short/long time reclosing
87 Differential protection IEC 60255-13
Transformer group = 0 ... 11
Transformer earthing = primary and or secondary side
Nom. current In on the primary/secondary side of the
transformer = 0.00 ... 100.000A (prim value)
Threshold current = 0,10 ... 0,50 In
Unbiased region limit = 0.50 … 5 In
Slightly biased region threshold = 0,20 ... 2 In
Slightly biased region limit = 1,00 ... 10,0 In
Slope = 0,40 ... 1,00
Trip with Id> = 5,00 ... 40 In
nd
Blocking by 2 harmonic = 0.10 … 0.30 In
th
Blocking by 5 harmonic = 0.10 … 0.30 In

46 Unbalance load IEC 60255-3
Is = 0,05 ... 0,3 In (start value of the negative phase
sequence)
K = 2 ... 30
tReset = 0 ... 200 s
Timer decreasing rate = 0 … 100%
32 Directional power IEC 60255-12
Nominal real power Pn = 1 ... 1000.000 kW (primary
values)
Max.reverse load P> = 1 ... 50 % Pn
t = 1,02 ... 1000 s
37 Low load IEC 60255-12
Nominal real power Pn = 50 ... 1000.000 kW (primary
values)
Minimal load P< = 5 ... 100% Pn
Minimal current I< = 2 ... 20 % In
t = 1 ... 1000 s
81 Frequency monitoring IEC 60255-3
Start at ∆f = 0,04 ... 5 Hz
t = 1,02 ... 300 s
25 Synchronism check IEC 60255-12
∆ U = 0,02 ... 0,4 Un
t = 0,52 ... 1000 s
∆ ϕ = 5 ... 50°
Fault recorder IEC 60255-24
Recording time = 1000 ... 5000 ms
Pre fault time: = 100 ... 2000 ms
Post fault setting = 100 ... 4900 ms
Max. 5 records
55 Power factor controller IEC 60255-12
Power factor = 0,70 ... 1,00
QC0 = 1,000 ... 20000,000 kVAr
Series of banks = 1:1:1:1 ... 1:2:4:8
Number of banks : 1 ... 4
Insensitivity = 105 ... 200 % QC0
Threshold = 0 ... 100 % QC0
Switching program = sequential/circuit switching

10.2 Electro Magnetic Compatibility

All relevant tests according to the standard IEC 60255, EN 61000 respectively to the
new product standard EN 50263
10.2.1 Emission test
Port Frequency range Limits Basic Test proce- Remarks

standard dure
Enclosure 30 - 230 MHz 40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak, EN 55022 EN 55022 See note 2
measured at 10 m dis- See note 1
tance
230 - 1000 MHz 47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m dis-
tance
Power Supply 0.15 - 0,50 MHz 79 dB(µV) quasi peak, EN 55022 EN 55022
66 dB(µV) average See note 1
0.5 - 5 MHz 73 dB(µV) quasi peak,
60 dB(µV) average
5 MHz - 30 MHz 73 dB(µV) quasi peak,
60 dB(µV) average
NOTE 1 The test procedure given in EN 55022 will be superseded by that given in EN 60255-25 when
it is published.
NOTE 2 May be measured at other distances. When this is done the test report should record the dis-
tance and the circumstances of the measurement. For test site measurements, an inverse proportionality
factor of 20 dB per decade should be used to normalise the measured data to the specified distance for
determining compliance.

10.2.2 Immunity tests - enclosure port
Environmental Test Units Basic Test pro- Acceptance Remarks

phenomena specification standard cedure criteria
Radiated radio 80 – 1000 MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 2
frequency elec- 10 V/m (unmod, rms) 4-3 4-3 and note 1
tromagnetic field, % AM (1 kHz) See note 1
Amplitude modu- 80
lated
Radiated elec- 900 ± 5, MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2
tromagnetic field additional 4-3 4-3 and note 1
from digital radio 1890 ± 5 MHz See note 1
telephones, 10 V/m (unmod., rms)
Pulse modulated 50 Duty cycle %
200 Rep. Frequency Hz
Electrostatic dis- 6 kV (charge volt- EN 61000- EN 60255- EN 60255-22- See EN
charge (Cont. dis- age) 4-2 22-2 2 60255-22-2,
charge) applicability of
contact and
air discharge
test.
8 (Air dis- kV (charge volt-
charge) age)
Power frequency 50 Hz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 3
magnetic field 30 A(rms)/m (continu- 4-8 4-8
ous)
300 A(rms)/m
(1 to 3 sec)
additional
500 A(rms)/m
continuous
NOTE 1 The test procedure given in EN 61000-4-3 and the acceptance criteria given in 7.2 will be su-
perseded by that given in EN 60255-22-3 when it is published.
NOTE 2 Except for the ITU broadcast frequency bands: 87 MHz - 108 MHz, 174 MHz - 230 MHz, and
470 MHz – 790 MHz where the level is 3 V.
NOTE 3 Applicable only to apparatus containing devices susceptible to magnetic fields, e.g. Hall ele-
ments, magnetic field sensors, etc.

10.2.3 Immunity tests - power supply port

Conducted dis- 0,15 – 80 MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 2
turbance induced 10 V (unmod., rms) 4-6 4-6 and note 1
by radio- See note 1
frequency fields, 80 % AM (1 kHz)
amplitude modu- 150 ohms Source im-
lated pedance
Fast transients 5/50 Tr/Th ns EN 61000- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-
5 kHz repetition fre- 4-4 22-4 22-4
quency
2 kV (peak)
2/2.5 kV/kHz
1 MHz burst 1 MHz frequency IEC 60255- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-
75 Tr ns 22-1 22-1 22-1
400 Hz repetition fre-
quency
200 ohms Source im-
pedance
Differential mode 1 kV (peak)
Common mode 2,5 kV (peak)
Surge 1,2/50 (8/20) Tr/Th ms EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 3
Differential mode 1 kV charge voltage 4-5 4-5
Common mode 2 kV charge voltage

source
12 ohms Source im-
pedance
Voltage Interrup- 100 % reduction IEC 60255- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-11 See note 4
tion 11 11
5, 10, 20, 50, ms interruption
100 and 200 time
Damped oscilla- 0.1/1/10/50 MHz IEC 61000- IEC 61000- See 15.2 See note 4
tory wave 4-12 4-12
Differential mode 1 kV
Common mode 2.5 kV
Insulation 2 or kV/AC 1 Minute IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5
3 kV/DC 1 Minute
5 kV impulse
1,2/50us; 0.5J
NOTE 2 Except for the ITU broadcast frequency band: 47 MHz - 68 MHz where the level is 3 V.
NOTE 3 Applicable only to ports interfacing with cables, the total length of which according to the
manufacturer's functional specification may exceed 10 m.
NOTE 4 10 and 50 MHz is for GIS applications relevant
NOTE 5 The guaranteed interruption time must be mentioned in the data sheet (REF542plus 50ms)

10.2.4 Immunity tests - communication ports

Conducted dis- 0,15 – 80 MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 2
turbance induced 10 V (unmod., rms) 4-6 4-6 and note 1 &3
by radio- 80 % AM (1 kHz) See note 1
frequency fields, 150 ohms Source im-
amplitude modu- pedance
lated
Fast transients 5/50 Tr/Th ns EN 61000- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-22-4 See note 3
5 kHz repetition fre- 4-4 22-4
quency
12 kV (peak)
1 MHz burst 1 MHz frequency IEC 60255- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-22-1 See note 3
75 Tr ns 22-1 22-1
quency
200 ohms Source im-
pedance
Common mode 1 kV (peak)
Insulation 0.5 kV/DC 1Minute IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5
additional
2 kV/AC 1 Minute
Damped oscilla- 0.1/1/10/ 50 MHz IEC 61000- IEC 61000- See 15.2 See note 4
tory wave 4-12 4-12
Differential mode 0.5 kV
Common mode 1 kV

10.2.4.1 Immunity tests - input and output ports

Conducted distur- 0.15 – 80 MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 2
bance induced by 10 V (unmod, rms) 4-6 4-6 and note 1
radio-frequency % AM (1 kHz) See note 1
fields 80 ohms Source im-
Amplitude modu- 50 pedance
lated
Fast transients 5/50 Tr/Th ns EN 61000- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-22-4
quency
2 kV (peak)
2/2.5 kV/kHz
1 MHz burst 1 MHz frequency IEC 60255- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-22-1
75 Tr ns 22-1 22-1
quency
200 ohms Source im-
pedance
Common mode 2,5 kV (peak)
Surge 1,2/50 (8/20) Tr/Th ms EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 3
Differential mode 1 kV charge voltage 4-5 4-5
Common mode 2 kV charge voltage
42 ohms Source im-
pedance
Insulation 2 kV/DC 1 Minute IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5 IEC60255-5
5 kV impulse
1,2/50us; 0.5J
Damped oscilla- 0.1/1/10/50 MHz IEC 61000- IEC 61000- See 15.2 See note 4
tory wave 4-12 4-12
Differential mode 1 kV
Common mode 2.5 kV

10.2.5 Immunity tests - functional earth port

Conducted distur- 0,15 – 80 MHz EN 61000- EN 61000- See 15.2 See note 2
bance induced by 10 V (unmod., rms) 4-6 4-6 and note 1 &3
radio-frequency % AM (1 kHz) See note 1
fields 80 ohms Source im-
Amplitude modu- 150 pedance
lated
Fast transients 5/50 Tr/Th ns EN 61000- IEC 60255- IEC 60255-22-4 See note 3
quency
2 kV (peak)

10.3 Insulation Resistance

Insulation resistance >100MOhm 500V DC
10.4 Mechanical Robustness

Vibration test per IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response and withstand test per IEC 60068-2-2
Seismic test per IEC 60068-2-30
10.5 Climatic Conditions

Cold test per IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test per IEC 60068-2-2
Damp Heat and Cycling test per IEC 60068-2-30

11 Connection Diagram
11.1 REF542plus with mechanical binary I/O
Example of REF542plus base version with one mechanical binary I/O version 3.
Extension up to two additional mechanical binary I/O version 3 possible. Other
configurations of the analog input board available, e.g mixed configuration for
transformer and sensor connection.

Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO02.
-X10: 1 2 3
-X80:
5A + -
14
1A
15 T1
AI 01 DC
13
5A
11 DC
1A
12 T2
AI 02
10
5A
08
1A
09 T3 REF542plus
AI 03
07 Base version with
100/110V
24 binary I/O version 3
AI 04 T4
23
100/110V
20
AI 05 T5
19
100/110V
18
AI 06 T6
17
5A
05
1A
06 T7
AI 07
04
-X21:
-X20:
+ +
d02 z02
- BI01 BO01
z02 z04
+ d02
d04 -
- BI02 d04
z04
+
+ z06
d06 BO02
- BI03 z08
z06 -
+ d06
d08 d08
- BI04
z08 d10
+ BO03
d10 d12
- BI05
z10 z10
+ z12
d12
- BI06 d14
z12
BO04
+ d16
d14
- BI07 z14
z14
+ z16
d16
- BI08 d18
z16 BO05
d20
+
d18 d22
- BI09 BO06
z18 z18
+
d20 z20
- BI10
z20 z22
+ d24
d22
- BI11 z24
z22
BO07
+ z26
d24
- BI12 z28
z24
+ d26
d26 BO08
- BI13 d28
z26
+ d30
d28
- BI14 WD1 z30
z28
z32

Extension with second additional mechanical binary I/O version 3
Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO 10

-X30: -X31:
+
d02
- BI15 z02
z02 BO09
+ z04
d04 d02
- BI16
z04 d04
+ +
d06 z06
- BI17 BO10
z06 z08
+ -
d08 d06
- BI18
z08 d08
+ d10
d10 BO11
- BI19 d12
z10
+ z10
d12
- BI20 z12
z12
d14
d14 + BO12
BI21 d16
-
z14 z14
+
d16 z16
- BI22
z16 d18
+ BO13
d18 d20
- BI23 d22
z18
BO14
+ z18
d20
- BI24 z20
z20
+ z22
d22
- BI25 d24
z22
z24
+ BO15
d24 z26
- BI26
z24
z28
+
d26 d26
- BI27 BO16
z26 d28
+
d28 d30
- BI28
z28 WD2 z30
z32

Extension with third additional mechanical binary I/O version 3
Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO 18

-X40: -X41:
+
d02
- BI29 z02
z02 BO17
+ z04
d04 d02
- BI30
z04 d04
+ +
d06 z06
- BI31 BO18
z06 z08
+ -
d08 d06
- BI32
z08 d08
+ d10
d10 BO19
- BI33 d12
z10
+ z10
d12
- BI34 z12
z12
d14
d14 + BO20
BI35 d16
-
z14 z14
+
d16 z16
- BI36
z16 d18
+ BO21
d18 d20
- BI37 d22
z18
BO22
+ z18
d20
- BI38 z20
z20
+ z22
d22
- BI39 d24
z22
z24
+ BO23
d24 z26
- BI40
z24
z28
+
d26 d26
- BI41 BO24
z26 d28
+
d28 d30
- BI42
z28 WD3 z30
z32

11.2 REF542plus with solid state binary I/O

Example of REF542plus base version for sensor connection with one solid state
binary I/O version 3. Extension up to two additional solid state binary I/O possible.
Other configuration of the analog input board available, e.g mixed configuration for
transformers and sensors connection.
Note: Please connect the right polarity
-X10: 1 2 3
+ -
A
-X81: D Sensor 1
DC
A Sensor 2
-X82: D
DC
A Sensor 3
-X83: D
A Sensor 4
-X84: D REF542plus
A Base version with
-X85: D Sensor 5
sensor and
A Sensor 6 solid state binary I/O
-X86: D
A Sensor 7
-X87: D
A Sensor 8
-X88: D
-X20: -X21:
+
d02
- BI01
z02
+
d04
- BI02 +
z04 d02
+ BO01
d06 d04
- BI03
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI04
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI05 +
z10 d06
+ BO02
d12 d08
- BI06
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI07 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI08 BO07
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI09 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI10 BO03
z20 d20
BO05
+ d22
d22 BO04 +
- BI11 z20
z22 BO06 +
+ z22
d24
- BI12 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO08
d26 z26
- BI13 +
z26 z28
+ BO09
d28 d28
- BI14 +
z28 d30
WD1
z32

Extension with secondsolid state binary I/O.

-X30: -X31:
+
d02
- BI15
z02
+
d04
- BI16 +
z04 d02
+ BO10
d06 d04
- BI17
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI18
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI19 +
z10 d06
+ BO11
d12 d08
- BI20
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI21 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI22 BO16
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI23 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI24 BO12
z20 d20
BO14
+ d22
d22 BO13 +
- BI25 z20
z22 BO20 +
+ z22
d24
- BI26 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO17
d26 z26
- BI27 +
z26 z28
+ BO18
d28 d28
- BI28 +
z28 d30
WD2
z32

Extension with third additional solid state binary I/O

-X40: -X41:
+
d02
- BI29
z02
+
d04
- BI30 +
z04 d02
+ BO20
d06 d04
- BI31
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI32
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI33 +
z10 d06
+ BO20
d12 d08
- BI34
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI35 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI36 BO25
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI37 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI38 BO21
z20 d20
BO23
+ d22
d22 BO22 +
- BI39 z20
z22 BO24 +
+ z22
d24
- BI40 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO26
d26 z26
- BI41 +
z26 z28
+ BO27
d28 d28
- BI42 +
z28 d30
WD3
z32

Product information:
Technical Marketing
ABB Calor Emag Mittelspannung GmbH
Oberhausener Str. 33
D-40472 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0) 2102 12 1046
Fax: +49 (0) 2102 12 1808 1046
E-mail: hendro.rijanto@de.abb.com
Internet: http://www.abb.de/calor

REF 542plus
Protection Functions: Configuration and Settings
Protection manual
1MRS755860 Multifunction Protection and Switchgear Control REF 542plus
Unit
Issued: 15.07.2003 Protection Functions: Configuration and Settings
Version: D/19.12.2008 Protection manual
Contents
Copyrights ................................................................................ 11
1. Introduction............................................................ 13
1.1. This manual............................................................ 13
1.2. Use of symbols ....................................................... 13
1.3. Intended audience ................................................... 13
1.5. Document revisions.................................................. 14
2. Safety Information................................................... 15
3. Analog measurement .............................................. 17
4. Analog Inputs ......................................................... 19
4.1. Analog Inputs.......................................................... 19
4.1.1. Analog board selection ................................. 20
4.1.2. Current transformer ...................................... 21
4.1.3. Current Rogowski ........................................ 22
4.1.4. Voltage transformer ...................................... 23
4.2. General constraints .................................................. 26
4.3. Network characteristics ............................................. 26
4.4. Calculated values .................................................... 26
5. Control and monitoring ........................................... 31
5.1. Measurement supervision NPS and PPS ..................... 31
5.1.1. Input/output description ................................. 31
5.1.2. Configuration............................................... 32
5.1.3. Measurement mode ..................................... 34
5.1.4. Operation criteria ......................................... 34
5.1.5. Setting groups............................................. 34
5.1.6. Parameters and events................................. 35
5.2. Power factor controller .............................................. 35
5.2.1. Input/output description ................................. 36
5.2.2. Configuration............................................... 37
5.3. Circuit breaker monitoring ......................................... 41
5.3.1. Configuration............................................... 41
5.3.3. Operation criteria ......................................... 43
5.3.5. Data reading ............................................... 44
6. Protection functions................................................ 49
6.1. Current protection functions ....................................... 49
6.1.1. Inrush blocking ............................................ 49
3
REF 542plus Multifunction Protection and Switchgear Control 1MRS755860
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.1.1. Input/output description .................. 49

6.1.1.2. Configuration ................................ 50
6.1.1.3. Measurement mode ....................... 52
6.1.1.4. Operation criteria........................... 53
6.1.1.5. Setting groups .............................. 55
6.1.1.6. Parameters and events .................. 55
6.1.2. Inrush harmonic........................................... 56
6.1.2.2. Configuration ................................ 57
6.1.2.5. Steady-state detection.................... 61
6.1.2.6. Setting groups .............................. 61
6.1.3. Non-directional overcurrent protection ............. 61
6.1.3.2. Configuration ................................ 63
6.1.3.5. Setting groups .............................. 70
6.1.4. Directional overcurrent protection.................... 71
6.1.4.2. Configuration ................................ 72
6.1.4.5. Current direction............................ 79
6.1.4.6. Voltage memory ............................ 80
6.1.4.7. Setting groups .............................. 80
6.1.5. Overcurrent protection (single stage)............... 82
6.1.5.2. Configuration ................................ 83
6.1.5.5. Setting groups .............................. 87
6.1.6. Directional overcurrent protection (single
stage) ........................................................ 87
6.1.6.2. Configuration ................................ 89
6.1.6.5. Current direction............................ 92
4
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.6.6. Voltage memory ............................ 93

6.1.6.7. Setting groups .............................. 93
6.1.7. Overcurrent IDMT (single stage)..................... 94
6.1.7.2. Configuration ................................ 95
6.1.7.5. Setting groups .............................. 98
6.1.8. Non-directional earth fault protection ............... 99
6.1.8.1. Input/output description .................100
6.1.8.2. Configuration ...............................101
6.1.8.3. Measurement mode ......................105
6.1.8.4. Operation criteria..........................105
6.1.8.5. Setting groups .............................107
6.1.8.6. Parameters and events .................107
6.1.9. Directional earth-fault protection ....................108
6.1.9.2. Configuration ...............................109
6.1.9.3. Measurement mode ...................... 114
6.1.9.4. Operation criteria.......................... 114
6.1.9.5. Setting groups ............................. 117
6.1.9.6. Parameters and events ................. 118
6.1.10. Earth fault protection (single stage)................ 119
6.1.10.1. Input/output description ................. 119
6.1.10.2. Configuration ...............................120
6.1.10.5. Setting groups .............................122
6.1.11. Directional earth-fault protection (single stage)..123
6.1.11.2. Configuration ...............................124
6.1.11.5. Setting groups .............................129
6.1.12. Earth fault IDMT (single stage)......................130
6.1.12.2. Configuration ...............................131
5
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.12.5. Setting groups .............................134

6.1.13. Sensitive directional earth fault protection .......135
6.1.13.2. Configuration ...............................136
6.1.13.5. Setting groups .............................141
6.1.14. Sector directional earth fault protection ...........142
6.1.14.2. Configuration ...............................144
6.1.14.5. Trip and Block areas .....................150
6.1.14.6. Start drop-off delay function ...........152
6.1.14.7. Setting groups .............................153
6.2. Voltage protection ...................................................153
6.2.1. Overvoltage protection .................................153
6.2.1.2. Configuration ...............................155
6.2.1.5. Setting groups .............................158
6.2.2. Undervoltage protection ...............................159
6.2.2.2. Configuration ...............................160
6.2.2.5. Behavior at low voltage values .......164
6.2.2.6. Setting groups .............................165
6.2.3. Residual overvoltage protection.....................165
6.2.3.2. Configuration ...............................167
6.2.3.5. Setting groups .............................169
6.3. Motor protection .....................................................170
6.3.1. Thermal overload protection .........................170
6
Unit
Protection manual
6.3.1.2. Configuration ...............................172

6.3.1.5. Thermal memory at power-down .....176
6.3.1.6. Setting groups .............................176
6.3.2. Motor start protection...................................177
6.3.2.2. Configuration ...............................178
6.3.2.5. Setting groups .............................182
6.3.3. Blocking rotor .............................................182
6.3.3.2. Configuration ...............................183
6.3.3.5. Setting groups .............................186
6.3.4. Number of starts.........................................187
6.3.4.2. Configuration ...............................188
6.3.4.5. Setting groups .............................191
6.4. Distance protection .................................................192
6.4.1. Input/output description ................................193
6.4.2. Configuration..............................................194
6.4.3. Operation mode..........................................200
6.4.4. Setting groups............................................202
6.4.5. Parameters and events................................202
6.5. Differential protection...............................................204
6.5.1. Transformer Differential Protection .................204
6.5.1.2. Configuration ...............................205
6.5.1.5. Tripping characteristic ................... 211
6.5.1.6. Inrush stabilization ........................212
6.5.1.7. Setting groups .............................213
6.5.2. Restricted differential protection.....................214
7
Unit
Protection manual

6.5.2.2. Configuration ...............................215
6.5.2.5. Tripping characteristic ...................219
6.5.2.6. Directional criterion for stabilization
against CT saturation ....................220
6.5.2.7. Setting groups .............................222
6.6. Other protections ....................................................223
6.6.1. Unbalanced load protection ..........................223
6.6.1.2. Configuration ...............................224
6.6.1.5. Setting groups .............................228
6.6.2. Directional power protection..........................229
6.6.2.2. Configuration ...............................230
6.6.2.5. Setting groups .............................233
6.6.3. Low load protection .....................................233
6.6.3.2. Configuration ...............................234
6.6.3.5. Setting groups .............................237
6.6.4. Frequency supervision.................................238
6.6.4.2. Configuration ...............................239
6.6.4.5. Setting groups .............................242
6.6.5. Synchronism check .....................................242
6.6.5.2. Configuration ...............................243
8
Unit
Protection manual
6.6.5.5. Setting groups .............................248

6.6.6. Switching resonance protection .....................249
6.6.6.2. Configuration ...............................251
6.6.6.5. Setting groups .............................254
6.6.7. High harmonic protection .............................255
6.6.7.2. Configuration ...............................256
6.6.7.5. Setting groups .............................259
6.6.8. Frequency protection ...................................259
6.6.8.2. Configuration ...............................261
6.6.8.5. Setting groups .............................265
6.6.9. Circuit-breaker failure protection ....................266
6.6.9.2. Configuration ...............................267
6.6.9.5. Setting groups .............................273
6.7. Trip conditioning .....................................................274
6.7.2. Configuration..............................................276
6.7.3. Conditioned trip events ................................280
6.7.4. Multiple use of output channel ......................280
6.7.5. Different output channel ...............................280
6.7.6. PTRC general in context wiht IEC-61850 ........281
6.7.7. Events ......................................................281
6.8. Autoreclose ...........................................................281
6.8.2. Configuration..............................................283
6.8.3. Operation mode..........................................285
9
Unit
Protection manual
6.8.4. Setting groups............................................286

6.9. Fault recorder.........................................................288
6.9.2. Configuration..............................................289
6.9.3. Operation ..................................................290
6.10. High speed transfer system ......................................292
6.10.1. Fast directional indication .............................293
6.10.1.2. Configuration ...............................294
6.10.1.5. Setting groups .............................298
6.10.2. Voltage supervision .....................................298
6.10.2.2. Configuration ...............................300
6.10.2.5. Setting groups .............................304
7. Abbreviations ....................................................... 305
10
Unit
Protection manual
Copyrights


license.
Trademarks
respective holders.
Guarantee
11
12
Unit
Protection manual
1. Introduction
1.1. This manual
This manual describes how to use the protection functions available in

REF 542plus.
This manual is addressed to engineering personnel and to anyone who needs to

configure REF 542plus.
1.2. Use of symbols
in personal injury.


This manual is intended for operators, supervisors and administrators to support

normal use of the product.
13
Unit
Protection manual

Testing (PIXIT)

Version IED Revision Date History
number
1VTA0002 15.07.2003 1st release, valid since SW V4C01
1VTA10002 Rev02 10.12.2003 2nd release, valid since SW V4D02
1VTA10002 Rev03 01.05.2004 3rd release, valid since SW V4D02e
A 28.02.2006 Document updated
* language
* layout
B 2.5 30.9.2006 Updated to software version V4E03x

C 2.5 SP1 30.04.2007 Updated to software version V4E04x
D 2.6 19.12.2008 Updated to software version V4E06x
Applicability
This manual is applicable to REF 542plus Release 2.6 software version V4E06x and
subsequent.
14
Unit
Protection manual
2. Safety Information
The safety warnings should always be observed. Non-observance can result in
death, personal injury or substantial damages to property. Guarantee claims might
not be accepted when safety warnings are not respected.
Do not make any changes to the REF 542plus configuration unless you
are familiar with the REF 542plus and its Operating Tool. This might
result in disoperation and loss of warranty.
15
16
Unit
Protection manual
3. Analog measurement
The 8 available Analog Input channel measures are acquired and processed
according to the following flowchart.
A050604
Fig. 3.-1 Analog measurement
The analog signal entering the Analog Input board goes through two hardware
filters to reduce noise. It is then sampled and converted to digital information by a
sigma-delta Analog/Digital converter with an acquisition rate of 19.2kHz.
The acquisition is performed in parallel on all 8 analogue channels, and therefore the
data samples of the network currents and voltages are contemporary, that is, no
phase shift/time delay is introduced between the network quantities.
The digital data is then processed by a digital filter LP1 to reduce the information
bandwidth to 1,5 kHz.
This information is then provided directly to the DFT/ RMS and Math block,
performing the Discrete Fourier Transformation and RMS value analysis for the
protection working on the full RMS harmonic content up to the 25th harmonic
(switching resonance, high harmonic) and to the frequency protection for higher
discrimination of zero crossing.
For all the other protection functions, the digital data is down sampled, that is, one
sample each 4 is used to 4800 samples/s , maintaining the same information
bandwidth.
Furthermore, the signal is digitally filtered by LP2 and LP3 (HSTS function
analogue quantities only) and provided to the DFT/ RMS and math block,
performing the discrete fourier transformation and RMS value analysis.
17
Unit
Protection manual
Almost all protection functions are based on the DFT (Discrete Fourier
Transformation) calculation for the selected network rated frequency. Only the
thermal overload protection performs the temperature calculation by applying the
RMS current values, in which all harmonics are considered.
In addition the following functions use:

* Overcurrent instantaneous
To function the peak value of the measured current under transient condition for a
faster response. This is when the instantaneous peak value is over three times higher.
SQRT (2) the RMS value:
I x _ peak 2 > 3 ⋅ I x _ RMS (1)
* Inrush harmonic
The function evaluates the ratio between the current values at 2nd harmonic and at
fundamental frequency.
* Differential protection
The function evaluates the measured amount of differential current at the

fundamental, 2nd and 5th harmonic frequencies.
18
Unit
Protection manual
4. Analog Inputs
The Analog Inputs dialog allows the user to configure:
* Analog input channels
* Network characteristics (REF 542plus can handle currents or voltages from two
different networks)
* Calculated values (power, THD, mean and maximum current values over the
desired time interval)
4.1. Analog Inputs
A050606
Fig. 4.1.-1 Analog Inputs
To ease the input of analog input channels, the user can push the Get group data
button in the Inputs tab of Analog Inputs dialog and then select the used board from
the list. This automatically configures the used analog input channels to the proper
sensor type and sets default values for each sensor type.
19
Unit
Protection manual
4.1.1. Analog board selection
A050695
Fig. 4.1.1.-1 Analog board selection
To complete the configuration of each analog input channel, that is, to set the
appropriate Rated Primary and Secondary Values, the user must double-click the
line in the Inputs tab of Analog Inputs dialog.
20
Unit
Protection manual
4.1.2. Current transformer
A050607
Fig. 4.1.2.-1 Current transformer
Board Input Rated Value (IRV) at present can be 0.2, 1 or 5 A only depending on the
type of CT mounted on Analog Input board.
In case of a mismatch between Rated Secondary Value (RSV) and Board Input
Rated Value, REF 542plus automatically compensates the protection function
thresholds.
Default direction of the polarity for the CT is Line. If Bus is selected, the polarity of
analog signal will be inverted to preserve directions in directional protections. The
amplitude and phase corrections can be introduced.
21
Unit
Protection manual
4.1.3. Current Rogowski
A050608
Fig. 4.1.3.-1 Current Rogowski
The current sensors usually cover a rated primary current range, for example the
type KEVCD 24 A covers the primary current range 80 – 1250A.
One value should be chosen as Rated Primary Value (RPV), usually the value
matching through the current sensor rated transformation ratio the Rated Secondary
Value (RSV) and Board Input Rated Value (IRV). For example, with a
transformation ratio 80 A/0.150 V and RSV, IRV value of 0.150 V a RPV of 80 A
can be chosen. The RPV value introduced will be used as the rated current in
The rated transformation ratio of current sensors, typically 80 A/0.150

V, shall always be correctly introduced to avoid incorrect
measurements. Such ratio shall equal the ratio of RPV over RSV.
IRV at present can be only 0.150 V depending on the Rogowski sensor input on
Analog Input board. In case of a mismatch between RSV and IRV, REF 542plus
automatically compensates the protection function thresholds.
Default direction for the polarity of the Rogowski current sensors is Line. If Bus is
selected, the polarity of analog signal will be inverted to preserve directions in
directional protections. The amplitude and phase corrections can be introduced.
22
Unit
Protection manual
4.1.4. Voltage transformer
Voltage transformers can be phase, line or residual (open delta) voltage

transformers.
Phase-voltage transformer
A050609
Fig. 4.1.4.-1 Phase-voltage transformer
Phase-voltage transformers normally refer the rated phase-voltage at primary side

with rated phase voltage on the secondary side, for example:
20kV 100V
: (2)
3 3
This is shown below RSV line in the Transformer ratio dialog. When
entering the VT rated voltage data, it is not necessary to perform division by:
3 (3)
IRV at present can be 100 V only depending on the input transformer mounted on
Analog Input Board.
23
Unit
Protection manual
In case of a mismatch between RSV and IRV, REF 542plus automatically

compensates protection function thresholds. If Invert phase is selected, the polarity
of analog signal will be inverted. The amplitude and phase corrections can be
introduced.
Line voltage transformer
A050612
Fig. 4.1.4.-2 Line voltage transformer
Line voltage transformers normally refer rated line voltage at primary side with
rated voltage on secondary side, for example 20 kV:100 V. This is shown below the
RSV line in Transformer ratio dialog.
Analog Input Board.

compensates protection function thresholds. If Invert phase is selected, the polarity
of analog signal will be inverted. The amplitude and phase corrections can be
introduced.
24
Unit
Protection manual
Residual voltage transformer (open delta)
A050683
Fig. 4.1.4.-3 Residual voltage transformer (open delta)
Residual voltage transformers normally refer rated phase-voltage at the primary side
with secondary side rated voltage of each winding in the open delta, for example:
20kV 100
: (4)
3 3
This is shown below RSV line in Transform ratio dialog.
When entering VT rated voltage data, it is not necessary for the user to perform any
division. The user must simply select in the VT type dialog the corresponding
secondary winding denominator.
Analog Input Board.

compensates the protection function thresholds. If Invert phase is selected, the
polarity of analog signal will be inverted. The amplitude and phase corrections can
be introduced.
25
Unit
Protection manual
4.2. General constraints

* Channels 1... 6 can be used only for phase currents, phase voltages or line
voltages
* Channels 7 and 8 can be used also either for neutral current, residual voltage or
line voltage for synchronism check function.
* Current and voltage sensors inside the triples 1 ... 3 and 4 ... 6 must have the
same characteristics (RPV, RSV and IRV)
4.3. Network characteristics
A050687
Fig. 4.3.-1 Networks tab
REF 542plus can handle two different networks or network parts having the same
frequency. By default only one network is used.
If the second network is needed, it must be enabled in the Networks tab of Analog
Inputs dialog.
For each network the rated nominal voltage and current can be configured. These
values are used by HMI led bars to scale the displayed quantities.
All the protection functions refer to Analog Input RPV as In, Un to

scale Start values.
4.4. Calculated values
The three-phase power or the Aaron power calculation scheme can be applied for
the power calculation. Also active and reactive energies are calculated. Thereby, the
preferred reference system for the calculation can either be load or generator.
26
Unit
Protection manual
A080144
Fig. 4.4.-1 Calculated values
For monitoring purposes, the following values are calculated:

* Demand and maximal demand current
The demand current is calculated as the mean value within a certain demand
value period up to 30 min. The maximal demand current is the maximal of the
demand currents from the last reset command.
The equation used to calculate the demand current is (IIR filter):
I value (t ) + (4095 × I mean (t −1) )

I mean (t ) = (5)
4096
The calculation period is 2.5 ms and the refresh time is 1 min.

* Demand and maximal demand active and reactive power
The demand power is calculated as the mean value within a certain demand
values period up to 30 min. The maximal demand power is the maximal of the
demand powers from the last reset command.
The equation used to calculate the demand power is (IIR filter):
Pvalue (t ) + (4095 × Pmean (t −1) )

Pmean (t ) = (6)
4096
The calculation period is 2.5 ms and the refresh time is 1 min.

* Minimum/maximum voltage calculation
27
Unit
Protection manual
Minimum/maximum voltages are the minimum/maximum of the measured line

voltages (RMS on fundamental component) from the last reset command.
* Maximum current calculation
Maximum current is the maximum of the measured phase currents (RMS on
fundamental component) belonging to a network from the last reset command.
* Maximum active and reactive power calculation
Maximum active and reactive power is the maximum measured active and
reactive power (negative, positive and absolute values) from the last reset
command.
The following calculated values are shown on the HMI and available for
transmission to remote control center:
* Demand and maximal demand current
* Demand and maximal demand active and reactive power
The reset of the maximal demand values can be done by the related command from
the HMI or from the remote control center. The following calculated values are not
shown on the HMI and they are available only for transmission to the remote control
center:
* Minimum/maximum voltage
* Maximum current
* Maximum active and reactive power
The reset of the remote calculated values is selectable:

* After reading
The measurements are reset automatically by REF 542plus after the values are
read out. This mode is used when the measurement values are read only by the
remote control center and not polled for periodic reading by the communication
module.
* By command
The measurements are reset by the related reset command. This mode is used
when the measurement values are polled for periodic reading by the
communication module. This mode is mandatory when selecting the IEC61850
protocol.
The following calculated values are saved at power-down:

* Maximal demand current
* Maximal demand active and reactive power
* Minimum/maximum voltage
* Maximum current
* Maximum active and reactive power
The THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) is calculated, only on voltages, as percentage

of the RMS voltage of the harmonics excluding the fundamental component:
28
Unit
Protection manual
2
VRMS − VFUND
2
THD(%) = 100 × (7)

VRMS
29
30
Unit
Protection manual
5. Control and monitoring

5.1. Measurement supervision NPS and PPS
REF 542plus provides two types of measurement supervision functions. Each of

them can be independently activated:
* Positive Phase Sequence (PPS)
* Negative Phase Sequence (NPS)
A050689
Fig. 5.1.-1 Measurement supervision
5.1.1. Input/output description
Table 5.1.1.-1 Input

When the BS signal becomes active, the measurement supervision function is reset
no matter its state. This means that all the output pins go low generating the required
events (if any), and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection
function will then remain in idle state until the BS signal goes low.
Table 5.1.1.-2 Output

Warning Digital signal (active high) Warning signal
Failing Digital signal (active high) Failing signal
Warning is the start signal. Warning signal will be activated when the start
conditions are true. The negative phase sequence value exceeds the setting threshold
value for NPS , and the positive phase sequence value falls below the setting
Failing signal will be activated when the start conditions are true and the operating
time has elapsed.
31
Unit
Protection manual
5.1.2. Configuration
A050690
Fig. 5.1.2.-1 General
A050691
Fig. 5.1.2.-2 Sensors
The measurement supervision functions operate on all sensors in a triple. The analog
channels 1-3 or 4-6 can be used to supervize the phase currents, phase voltages or
line voltages.
32
Unit
Protection manual
A050692
Fig. 5.1.2.-3 Parameters

Start Value: Positive/Negative phase sequence threshold for Start condition detection.
Time: Time delay for Trip condition detection.
A050693
Fig. 5.1.2.-4 Events
33
Unit
Protection manual
A050694
Fig. 5.1.2.-5 Pins
5.1.3. Measurement mode
Measurement supervision functions evaluate the measured amount of positive and

negative phase sequence values at the fundamental frequency.
5.1.4. Operation criteria
If the negative phase sequence value exceeds the setting threshold value (Start
value) in the NPS based functions, or if the positive phase sequence value falls
below the setting threshold (Start value) the function enters the START status and
raises the warning. After the preset operating time (Time delay) has elapsed, the
failing signal is generated.
The measurement function will come back in passive status and the warning signal
will be cleared, if the negative phase sequence value falls below 0.95 the setting
threshold value for NPS , or if the positive phase sequence value exceed 1.05 the
setting threshold value for PPS.
The measurement function will exit the failing status and the failing signal will be
cleared when the negative phase sequence value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold
value for NPS, or if the positive phase sequence value exceed 1.05 the setting
5.1.5. Setting groups
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the measurement supervision
functions.
34
Unit
Protection manual
5.1.6. Parameters and events
Table 5.1.6.-1 Setting values

Start value 0.30 ... 0.90 In or Un 0.85 PPS threshold to undergo.
(PPS)
Time delay 30 ... 30000 ms 1000 Time delay from start condition
(warning signal) to failing
signal.
Start value 0.05 ... 0.40 In or Un 0.10 NPS threshold to be exceeded.
(NPS)
Time delay 30 ... 30000 ms 1000 Time delay from start condition
to failing signal.
Table 5.1.6.-2 Events

Code Event reason
E1 Warning signal cancelled
E6 Failing signal is active
E7 Failing signal is back to inactive state
E18 Function block signal is active
E19 Function block signal is back to inactive state
By default all events are disabled.
5.2. Power factor controller
The power factor controller is designed to control reactive power compensation in

power systems. The magnitude of the reactive power in the network is derived from
the measured power factor. Consequently, the power factor controller permanently
monitors the power factor, which is defined as the ratio of the effective power to the
active power. The PFC then controls the switching ON/OFF the available capacitors
banks to reach the set power factor target.
A050697
Fig. 5.2.-1 Power factor controller
35
Unit
Protection manual

BL Digital signal (active high) Blocking signal
DISCONNECT Digital signal (active high) Disconnect all capacitor
banks
RESET Digital signal (active high) Reset the function
OVERTEMP. Digital signal (active high) Overtemperature
VMIN / VMAX Digital signal (active high) Voltage out of range
VA MAX Digital signal (active high) Overload due to overvoltage
MODE: MAN. Digital signal (active high) Mode manual
SET NIGHT Digital signal (active high) Set night parameter
MANUAL CONTROL BANK 0 Digital signal (active high) Switch bank 0 manually
CHECKED BACK BANK 0 Digital signal (active high) Status on indication bank 0
When the BS signal becomes active, the protection function is reset no matter its
state. This means that all the output pins go low generating the required events (if
any), and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function
will then remain in idle state until BS signal goes low.

Q ALARM Digital signal (active high) Alarm indication Q
COS ФALARM Digital signal (active high) Alarm indication cos Ф
OPERAT. ALARM Digital signal (active high) Operation Alarm (reset only
by power off)
GENERAL ALARM Digital signal (active high) General alarm
SWITCH ON/OFF BANK 0 Digital signal (active high) Bank 0 on (high), off (low)
36
Unit
Protection manual
A050698
A050699
Fig. 5.2.2.-2 Capacitor banks
37
Unit
Protection manual
A050700
Fig. 5.2.2.-3 Control data
A050701
Fig. 5.2.2.-4 Time
38
Unit
Protection manual
A050702
A050750
Fig. 5.2.2.-6 Pins
When a reactive power consumer is switched into the network, the current variable
increases. Simultaneously, the phase displacement increases in relation to the related
voltage quantity. As a result, the reactive power increases and the power factor is
reduced correspondingly. Because of the increase in the current measured quantity
39
Unit
Protection manual
and the angle of the phase displacement, an increased voltage drop in the power
system must be taken into account. For more detailed information please refer to the
corresponding application notes.

Neutral zone 105 … 200 % QCO 115
Pickup zone 0 … 100 % QCO 0
Reactive power of 1 … 20000 kVA 100
smallest QCO
Number of banks 1…4 1
Maximum switching 1 … 10000 2500
cycles
Set point cos phi 0.7 ... 1.0 Ind/cap 0.9 ind
Limiting value cos phi 0…1 Ind/cap 0
Discharge blocking 1 … 7200 s 900
time
Dead Time 1 … 120 s 10
Power on delay 1 … 7200 s 900
Duration of 1 … 7200 s 900
integration

Code Event reason
E0 Bank 0 on
E1 Bank 1 on
E2 Bank 2 on
E3 Bank 3 on
E4 Bank 0 off
E5 Bank 1 off
E6 Bank 2 off
E7 Bank 3 off
E8 Overtemperature started
E9 Overtemperature back
E10 Va max started
E11 Va max back
E12 Vmin/Vmax started
E13 Vmin/Vmax back
E14 Command DISCONNECT started
E15 Command DISCONNECT back
E16 Cos phi warning started
E17 Cos phi warning back
E18 Alarm Q started
E19 Alarm Q back
40
Unit
Protection manual
Code Event reason

E20 Warning switching cycle
E21 Alarm reset
E22 Block signal started
E23 Block signal back
E24 Manual operating mode
E25 Automatic operating mode
E26 Night mode
E27 Day mode
5.3. Circuit breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker monitoring can be used to supervise the contact wear condition by
calculating the switched current and to help to analyze faults by storing all
configured measurements in case of a CB trip.
A080170
Fig. 5.3.1.-1 Currents
Current sensors used for CB Switched Currents calculation.
41
Unit
Protection manual
A080172
Fig. 5.3.1.-2 Settings

Circuit Breaker
CB Open channel: Number of the output channel used to open
the circuit breaker. In case a Switching
Object 2-2 configured as CB or the PTRC
General are installed, the REF 542plus
Configuration Tool will take automatically
the configured CB open channel and
disable the edited channel of this setting.
CB Switched Currents
Enable Switched Currents recording: If enabled, the values of the last six CB
Switched Currents are stored in the non-
volatile memory with the date and time of
switching.
Switched Currents break time: Switched Currents break time is the time
between the start of the switching and the
breaking of the circuit breaker main contact
for recording the switched current.
CB Contact Wear
Parameters (A, B, C, K): These parameters are used for the internal
Contact Wear calculation done with the
equation presented in the dialog box.
CB Trip Context
Enable Trip Context recording: If enabled, the values of the last six CB Trip
Contexts are stored in the non-volatile
memory with the date and time of tripping.
42
Unit
Protection manual
A080174
The switched current is calculated as the maximum RMS value at the fundamental
frequency until the moment of contact separation.
The trip context is represented by all the configured measurements at the instant of
CB Trip. Maximum six switched current/trip context values are stored in order to
cover system operation using auto-reclose with up to five multi-shots.
5.3.3. Operation criteria
The switched currents are recorded each time the circuit breaker is opened. The trip
context is recorded each time the circuit breaker is opened due to a protection trip.
43
Unit
Protection manual

Values Unit Default Explanation
CB Switched Currents Disabled Enable/Disable CB Switched Currents
recording recording
0 … 500 ms 30 CB contact separation time
1.0 … 1.6 1.0 Parameter for contact wear calculation
0… 65000 10000 Parameter for contact wear calculation
CB Trip Context recording Enabled Enable/Disable CB Trip Context recording

Code Event reason
E1 CB switched currents record 1 available
E10 CB switched currents recorded data reset
E11 CB switched currents recorded data store fail
E12 CB switched currents recorded data store okay
E17 Trip context record 1 available
E26 Trip context recorded data reset
E27 Trip context recorded data store fail
E28 Trip context recorded data store okay
5.3.5. Data reading
The function for reading of the circuit breaker monitoring data can be used for:
* Uploading data from the connected REF 542plus
* Reset data in the connected REF 542plus
* Save uploaded data to a recorded file (text format)
* Uploading data from the recorded file
44
Unit
Protection manual
A080146
Click the Settings tab to select the location of the CB Monitoring recording files and
file prefixes. The recording file name is automatically composed by the REF
542plus Configuration Tool with the following items:
* User editable prefix
* Feeder name
* Device communication address
An example of a CB Switched Currents recording file name:
SC_Feeder_98.txt
Where:
SC The prefix of the recorded file

Feeder The feeder name from the device configuration. In case the feeder name is
empty, the default (Feeder) is used.
98 The device communication address (SPA, IEC103, LON, and so on) read from
the device configuration. In case the address is an IP address (ETHERNET
board), the standard dot separator is replaced by dash to avoid confusion on
file extension (for example 198-162-2-112).
The file name is unique in a project, because two devices cannot have
the same feeder name and communication address.
45
Unit
Protection manual
Click the CB Switched Currents or the CB Trip Context tab to upload the
information relating to the circuit breaker switched currents or circuit breaker trip
context from file or from REF 542plus.
A080148
Fig. 5.3.5.-2 CB Switched Currents
A080150
Fig. 5.3.5.-3 CB Trip Context
46
Unit
Protection manual
A080152
Fig. 5.3.5.-4 Upload from file
A080154
Fig. 5.3.5.-5 Upload from REF 542plus

* Device information
Device information displays data regarding REF 542plus and its configuration.
* File information
When uploading from REF 542plus, File information displays the location and
the file name where the data is saved when clicking Save To File. When
uploading from file, it displays the location and the file name of the uploaded
file.
47
Unit
Protection manual
The data table displays the CB Monitoring data type (CB Switched Currents or
CB Trip Context) and the upload source (device/file). The information is
presented in a table where each row contains the data relevant to one record.
The time stamp contains also its quality. It is set to "Good” in case the
record has been time-stamped when the device time was synchronized;
otherwise it is set to “Bad”.
* Save To File
You can use Save To File after a successful upload from REF 542plus. In case
the file does not exist, the file is created. Otherwise the file is saved into a backup
file (*.bak) and the new uploaded records are appended to the file. In order to
save the file, the uploaded and the saved file has to be compatible. The files are
compatible when they have the same device information and the same record
format (number of data and measurements name). In case the files are not
compatible the existing file is replaced by the uploaded one. In case a new
configuration has been downloaded to REF 542plus, the user can choose to
append the new records to the saved file or to save only the new ones.
* Reset Device Data
You can use Reset Device Data after a successful upload from REF 542plus.
After a requested confirmation, the CB Monitoring data stored in REF 542plus is
reset.
48
Unit
Protection manual
6. Protection functions
6.1. Current protection functions
6.1.1. Inrush blocking
REF 542plus has one inrush blocking protection function. This function is replaced
from the inrush harmonic function and it has to be preferred when a very fast
response time is required only.
The following current protection functions are blocked by the inrush blocking
protection function without the need of additional wiring in the FUPLA (that is, the
block to the protection functions is implicit).
* Overcurrent high
* Overcurrent low
* Directional overcurrent high
* Directional overcurrent low
* IDMT
* Earthfault IDMT
A050769
Fig. 6.1.1.-1 Inrush blocking
6.1.1.1. Input/output description

When the BS signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its
state). This means that all the output pins go low generating the required events (if
any) and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function will
then remain in idle state until the BS signal goes low.
49
Unit
Protection manual

S L1 Digital signal (active high) Start signal of IL1
TRIP Digital signal (active high) Trip signal
S L1-3 are the start signals phase selective. The phase starting signal will be
activated when the respective phase current start conditions are true and the
overcurrent protection will be implicitly blocked until the operating time (Time)
has elapsed.
The TRIP signal will be activated when the start conditions are true (inrush
detection), the maximum measured current exceeds the threshold (limit N•I>>) and
the relevant overcurrent protection operating time has elapsed.
6.1.1.2. Configuration
A050770
Output Channel different from 0 means direct execution of the trip command, that
is, skipping FUPLA cyclic evaluation.
50
Unit
Protection manual
A050811
The protection function operates on any combination of current phases in a triple,

for example, it can operate as single phase, double phase or three-phase protection
on phase currents belonging to the same system.
A050812
51
Unit
Protection manual
N: Threshold I>> multiplier for fault detection and inrush protection trip
M: Threshold I> multiplier for inrush detection
Time: Overcurrent protection blocking Time at inrush detection
A050813
A050814
Fig. 6.1.1.2.-5 Pins
6.1.1.3. Measurement mode
Inrush blocking function evaluates the current at the fundamental frequency.
52
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.1.4. Operation criteria
An inrush is detected if the maximum measured current exceeds the threshold M•I>
within 60 ms after it exceeded 10% of current threshold I>.
Here I> is the threshold (Start value I>) of the overcurrent low protection
function. If this protection function is not installed, the threshold of IDMT
protection function (Base current Ieb:, if installed) is used or a standard value
of 0.05•IN (if IDMT also is not installed).
If an inrush is detected, the above-listed protection functions are blocked until the
end of inrush has been detected or the maximum preset inrush duration (that is,
Time) has elapsed.
The end of inrush condition is detected when the maximum measured current falls
below M•0.65•I>. A counter is then started and 100 ms later the end of inrush is
assumed. The current protection functions are then released from the block.
At feeder start-up, with current zero, the implicit block of the

overcurrent protection function is already active. Only as the current
increases, the inrush condition is evaluated and the block can be
released if an inrush is not present.
The inrush blocking itself becomes a protection function, if the maximum measured
current exceeds the limit N•I>> after the inrush detection. The operating time is that
of the overcurrent instantaneous (if installed) or 80 ms.
Here I>> is the threshold (Start value I>>) of the overcurrent high protection
function. If this protection function is not installed, the threshold of overcurrent
instantaneous protection function (if installed) is used or a standard value of 0.10•IN
(if overcurrent instantaneous also is not installed).
The following three diagrams are not scaled, but they are provided solely for a better
understanding of the explanations of how the inrush blocking works.
Tesb is the operation counter that is compared to the set overcurrent protection
blocking time (that is, Time).
In Fig. 6.1.1.4.-1 inrush is detected within the 60 ms window. Then the end of
inrush condition is detected and the block released before protection-blocking time
expires.
53
Unit
Protection manual
A050815
Fig. 6.1.1.4.-1 Current-time characteristic of the detected inrush process
In Fig. 6.1.1.4.-2 inrush is detected within the 60 ms window. Then the end of
inrush condition is detected and the block released before protection-blocking time
expires. The current value is over the I> threshold and that protection function will
start timing and trip in due time.
A050816
Fig. 6.1.1.4.-2 Current-time characteristic of the detected overload
54
Unit
Protection manual
In Fig. 6.1.1.4.-3 inrush is detected within the 60 ms window, no end of inrush

condition is detected and the protection-blocking time expires. The current value is
over the I>> threshold and that protection function will start timing and trip in due
time.
A050817
Fig. 6.1.1.4.-3 Current-time characteristic when no inrush condition is detected
6.1.1.5. Setting groups
Two parameter sets can be configured for the inrush blocking protection function.
6.1.1.6. Parameters and events

N 2.0 ... 8.0 2.0 Threshold I>> multiplier for fault
detection and trip
M 3.0 ... 4.0 3.0 Threshold I> multiplier for inrush
detection
Time 200 ... 100000 ms 250 overcurrent protection blocking
Time after inrush detection
55
Unit
Protection manual

Code Event reason
E0 Start L1 started
E1 Start L1 back
E2 Start L2 started
E3 Start L2 back
E4 Start L3 started
E5 Start L3 back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
E18 Protection block started
E19 Protection block back
6.1.2. Inrush harmonic
REF 542plus has an inrush harmonic function, which can be used to temporarily
block other protection functions.
The following current protection functions are blocked by the inrush harmonic
protection function without the need of additional wiring in the FUPLA, that is, the
block to the protection functions is implicit.
* Overcurrent high
* Overcurrent low
* Directional overcurrent high
* Directional overcurrent low
* IDMT
* Earthfault IDMT
A050818
Fig. 6.1.2.-1 Inrush harmonic
56
Unit
Protection manual

any) and all internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function will

Start Digital signal (active high) Start signal
Start signal can be wired in FUPLA to signal inrush condition status or to the
protection functions BS input pins (different from those listed above and implicitly
blocked) to temporarily block during an inrush transient. This means that the block
to the protection functions is explicit.
A050819
57
Unit
Protection manual
A050820
The protection function operates on any set of phase currents in a triple.
A050821
58
Unit
Protection manual
Minimum current threshold: Current threshold for inrush detection.

Fault current threshold: Current threshold for fault detection.
Harmonic ratio threshold: 2nd/fundamental current ratio threshold for inrush
detection.
A050822
A050823
Fig. 6.1.2.2.-5 Pins
59
Unit
Protection manual
Inrush harmonic protection function evaluates the ratio between current values at
2nd harmonic and at fundamental frequency.
If for at least one phase current:
the current is not in steady-state condition,
AND the current value at fundamental frequency is above the preset minimum
current threshold (that is, Min current threshold),
AND the current value is below the preset maximum current threshold (that is,
Fault current threshold),
AND the harmonic ratio between the current values at 2nd harmonic and at
fundamental frequency exceeds the preset threshold (that is, Harmonic ratio
threshold)
then the protection function is started and the start signal will be activated.
The start criteria is illustrated in the following flowchart:
A050824
The protection function will remain in START status until at least for one phase the
above conditions (steady state excluded) are true. It will come back in passive status
with a 10ms delay when:
60
Unit
Protection manual
for all the phases at least one condition falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value
(that is, Min Current threshold or Harmonic ratio threshold
respectively),
OR at least for one phase the current value exceeds the preset maximum current
threshold (that is, Fault current threshold).
6.1.2.5. Steady-state detection
Steady-state condition is detected if:
the current value at fundamental frequency falls below the preset minimum current
threshold (that is, Min current threshold) for at least 10 ms,
OR the current value at fundamental frequency is between 95% and 105% of the
previous period for at least one period.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the harmonic inrush protection function.

Minimum current 0.05 ... 40.00 ln 0.5 Current threshold for inrush
threshold detection, if exceeded the inrush
conditions are evaluated.
Fault current 0.05 ... 40.00 ln 2 Current threshold for fault
threshold detection, if exceeded the inrush
start is set to low.
Harmonic ratio 5 ... 50 % 10 2nd/fundamental current ratio
threshold threshold for in-rush detection.

Code Event reason
E0 Protection has started
E1 Start is cancelled
E18 Protection block signal is active started
E19 Protection block signal is back to inactive state
6.1.3. Non-directional overcurrent protection
In the non-directional overcurrent protection can up to eight instances be applied.
61
Unit
Protection manual
A080156
Fig. 6.1.3.-1 Non-directional overcurrent protection

any) and all internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function
remains in idle state until the BS signal goes low.
Table 6.1.3.1.-2 Outputs

START L1 Digital signal (active high) Start signal of IL1
GEN.START Digital signal (active high) General start signal (logical OR combination
of all start signal inclusive reset time)
The START signal is activated when the respective phase current start conditions are
true. START L1 – L3 are the phase selective start signals. The GEN. START is a
logical OR combination of the start signal START L1 – L3 and remains active until
the reset time, if used, is expired. The TRIP signal is activated when the start
conditions are true and the operating time has elapsed at least for one phase current.
62
Unit
Protection manual
A080158
63
Unit
Protection manual
A080160
The protection function operates on any combination of the phase current in a triple,
for example, it can operate as single-phase, double-phase or three-phase protection
on the phase currents belonging to the same network.
64
Unit
Protection manual
A080162
Fig. 6.1.3.2.-3 Mode

Status: Mode of the operating status on or off
Mode: Mode for the overcurrent, instantaneous,
definite or inverse time
IDMT (IEEE): Free programmable inverse time curve
according to equation
A,P,B, Td: Parameter for the free programmable
inverse time curve
t-I Diagram: Diagram of the inverse time operation
characteristic
Reset type: Mode of the reset time
Reset time: Timer resets after start current condition is
not valid anymore
65
Unit
Protection manual
A080164
Fig. 6.1.3.2.-4 Parameter

Start Value: Current threshold for start
Def. operate time: Operation time in mode definite time
66
Unit
Protection manual
A080166
67
Unit
Protection manual
A080168
Fig. 6.1.3.2.-6 Pins
All overcurrent functions evaluate the current RMS value at the fundamental
frequency. In case of the overcurrent definite time instantaneous, the peak value of
the measured current is also used under transient condition for a faster response.
When the instantaneous peak value is higher than three times the peak value, in
relation to the RMS value, a trip is generated.
If the measured current exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value), the
overcurrent protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective, that is,
when at least a value of one phase current is above the setting threshold value the
relevant start signal is activated. The protection function remains in START status
until there is at least one phase started. It returns to passive status and the start signal
is cleared if for all the phases the current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value.
After the protection has entered the start status and the preset operating time (Time)
has elapsed, function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated. The
protection function exits the TRIP status and the trip signal is cleared when the
measured current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value. The tripping can
be applied according to definite time or inverse time characteristic, which is defined
according to an equation.
68
Unit
Protection manual
⎛ A ⎞
t =⎜ P + B ⎟ td (8)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:
t: Operation time to trip

A: Curve parameter for the time value (according to IEC 60255-3)
P: Value for the exponent
M: Ratio of actual current to the pickup current I/In
B: Additional offset time
td: Time-dial to adapt the operation time
The inverse time characteristic (IDMT) is applied after the condition M > 1 is valid.
The operation range is, as defined in the IEC 60255-3 standard, from 1.2 to 20 In.
Each time the protection is started due to a system fault condition (M>1.2), the
IDMT operating counter is incremented according to the equation. When it reaches
the operation time to trip the function operates activating the trip output signal. If
required, a reset type with Inverse time characteristic can be set according to an
equation.
⎛ tr ⎞
t = ⎜ P ⎟ td (9)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:
t: Operation time to reset

tr: Reset time (for M = 0)
td: Time-dial to adapt the operation time additionally
The reset type inverse time characteristic is valid for 0 < M < 1. In this case the
inverse-time overcurrent protection enters the reset state and decrements the
operating counter according to equation above. If the condition is 1 ≤ M < 1.2, the
counter remains unchanged.
Instead of inverse time reset type a definite time can also be selected. The purpose of
the definite reset time is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults, for example
self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults, which may produce high
asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It is
typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off
periods during which the fault current falls below the set start current including
hysteresis. Without the reset time function, the operating counter would be stopped,
when the current has dropped off. In the same way, an apparent drop-off period of
the secondary current of the saturated current transformer might also reset the
operating counter.
The reset type inverse time can only be applied in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. For definite time overcurrent
protection only reset type definite time may be used.
69
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the non-directional overcurrent protection.
A switch over between the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of the
network configuration. If this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized
identically to avoid wrong setting if switch over of parameters has happened
accidentally.

Status On/Off On Operating status
Mode Instantaneous/ Instantaneous Operation
IDMT characteristic
A (ratio multiplier) 0.005 … 200.000 13.500 Parameter for
operation
characteristic
P (ratio 0.005 … 3.000 1.000 Parameter for
exponent) operation
characteristic
B (offset time) 0.000 … 50.000 s 0.000 Parameter for
operation
characteristic
Td (time dial) 0.050 … 5.000 s 0.5000 Parameter for
operation
characteristic
Reset type Not used/Definite Not used Reset Characteristic
time/Inverse time
Reset time (Tr) 0.020 … 100.000 s 1.000 Parameter for reset
characteristic
Start Value 0.050 … 40.000 In 0.5000 Current threshold for
start condition
Def. operate time 0.015 … 300.000 s 0.080 Time delay for trip
condition

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start on phase L1
E1 Start on phase L1 cancelled
E6 Trip signal is active
E7 Trip signal is back to inactive state
E8 Protection general start (logical OR combination of all start signal)
70
Unit
Protection manual
Code Event reason

E9 General start is cancelled (after expiration of the reset time)
E18 Protection block signal is active
E19 Protection block signal is back to inactive status
6.1.4. Directional overcurrent protection
In the directional overcurrent protection can up to eight instances be applied.
A080176
Fig. 6.1.4.-1 Directional overcurrent protection


START L1 Digital signal (active high) Start signal of IL1 (fault in set direction)
GEN.START Digital signal (active high) General start signal (logical OR combination
of all starts including reset time)
BO Digital signal (active high) Block output signal (fault in opposite direction)
START L1 to L3 are the phase selective start signals. The phase starting signal is
activated when respective phase current start conditions are true (current exceeds the
setting threshold value and the fault is in the specified direction).
GEN. START is a logical OR combination of the start signal START L1 to L3 and

remains active until the reset time, if used, has expired.
71
Unit
Protection manual
The TRIP signal is activated when at least for a phase current the start conditions are
true and the operating time has elapsed.
Block Output (BO) signal becomes active when the protection function detects a
current exceeding the preset value and the fault direction opposite to the specified
direction.
A080178
72
Unit
Protection manual
A080180

on the phase currents belonging to the same network. The faulty phase current is
combined with the voltage of the corresponding sound phases. The required voltage
measure is automatically selected and displayed in the General dialog box.
73
Unit
Protection manual
A080182
Fig. 6.1.4.2.-3 Mode

Mode: Mode for the directional overcurrent, definite or inverse time
IDMT (IEEE): Free programmable inverse-time curve according to equation
A,P,B, Td: Parameter for the free programmable inverse-time curve
t-I Diagram: Diagram of the inverse time operation characteristic
Reset time: Timer resets after the start current condition not valid any more
74
Unit
Protection manual
A080184

Direction: Directional criteria to be accessed together to overcurrent
condition for the start detection
75
Unit
Protection manual
A080186
76
Unit
Protection manual
A080188
Fig. 6.1.4.2.-6 Pins
All overcurrent directional protection functions evaluate the current RMS value at
the fundamental frequency.
overcurrent directional protection function is started, if at least the value of one
phase current is above the setting threshold value. At the same time the general start
signal is activated.
If the general start condition exists and the fault is in a specified direction
(backward/forward), the timer for the operation time is started. The start signal
is phase selective. In case of fault in the opposite direction to the specified one, the
Block Output signal becomes active. The protection function remains in START
status if there is at least one phase started. It comes back in passive status and the
start signal is cleared if for all the phases the current falls below 0.95 the setting
threshold value (or the fault current changes direction).
77
Unit
Protection manual
When the protection has entered the start status and the preset operating time
(Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is
generated. The protection function exits the TRIP status and the trip signal is cleared
when the measured current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value.
To determine the fault direction, REF 542plus must be connected to the three-phase
voltages. The protection function has a voltage memory, which allows a directional
decision to be produced even if a fault occurs in the close-up area of the voltage
transformer/sensor (when the voltage falls below 0.1 Un).
The inverse time tripping characteristic is defined according to an equation.
⎛ A ⎞
t =⎜ P + B ⎟ td (10)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:

P: Value for the exponent
td: Time dial to adapt the operation time
Each time the protection function is started due to a system fault condition (M>1.2)
the IDMT operating counter is incremented according to the equation (1). When it
reaches the operation time to trip, the function will operate activating the trip output
signal.
If required, a reset type with Inverse time characteristic can be set according to an
equation.
⎛ tr ⎞
t = ⎜ P ⎟ td (11)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:

tr: Reset time
td: Time dial to adapt the reset time
inverse time overcurrent protection enters the reset state and decrements the
operating counter according to above equation. If the condition is 1 ≤ M < 1.2, the
counter remains unchanged.
78
Unit
Protection manual
operating counter.
6.1.4.5. Current direction
Detection of the current direction is obtained by calculating the reactive power,

which is computed combining the faulty phase current with the voltage of the
corresponding sound phases. The reactive power calculation uses voltage and
current measurements at the fundamental frequency. Before the calculations, the
voltages are shifted to a lagging angle of 45°.
(12)
Q = ( I L1 × U 23 × sin ϕ 1 ) + ( I L 2 × U 31 × sin ϕ 2 ) ( I L 3 × U12 × sin ϕ 3 )
Where:
Q Reactive power
IL1,2,3 Current of phase 1, 2 and 3
U12,23,31 Line voltages between phases 1-2, 2-3 and 3-1 after shifting -45°
φ1,2,3 Angles between the currents and the corresponding voltages
Only the phases in which the current exceeds preset threshold are used in the
calculation. If the result of the calculation leads to a negative reactive power, which
is greater than 5% of the nominal apparent power, the fault is in forward direction.
Otherwise, the fault is in backward direction.
A directional signal can be sent to the opposite station using the output (trip) and/or
the Block Output (BO) signal. The content of a directional signal from the opposite
station (BO output) can be used to release tripping of its own directional protective
function. This enables a directional comparison protection to be established.
79
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.1.4.5.-1 Forward and backward direction in the impedance plane in case of a
balanced three-phase fault
Because the application of the fault current is in combination with the sound
voltages, the directional decision area can change. This change depends on the
power system parameters in case of nonsymmetrical fault condition. The criteria for
forward and backward direction are derived from the calculated reactive power.
6.1.4.6. Voltage memory
The directional overcurrent protection function includes a voltage memory feature.

This allows a directional decision to be produced even if a fault occurs in the close-
up area of the voltage transformer/sensor. At a sudden loss of voltage, a fictive
voltage is used for direction detection. The fictive voltage is the voltage measured
before the fault has occurred, assuming that the voltage is not affected by the fault.
The memory function enables the function block to operate up to 300 seconds after
a total loss of voltage.
When the voltage falls below 0.1 x Un, the fictive voltage is used. The actual
voltage is applied again as soon as the voltage rises above 0.1 x Un for at least 100
ms. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the measured voltage stays below 0.1 x
Un for more than 300 seconds.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the directional overcurrent protection
function. Switchover between the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of
the network configuration. If this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be
parameterized identically to avoid wrong setting if switchover of parameters has
happened accidentally.
80
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.1.4.8.-1 Parameters

Mode Definite time/ Definite time Operation characteristic
IDMT
A (ratio multiplier) 0.005 … 200.000 13.500 Parameter for operation
characteristic
P (ratio 0.005 … 3.000 1.000 Parameter for operation
exponent) characteristic
B (offset time) 0.000 … 50.000 s 0.000 Parameter for operation
characteristic
Td (time dial) 0.050 … 5.000 s 0.5000 Parameter for operation
characteristic
time/Inverse time
Reset time (Tr) 0.020 … 100.000 s 1.000 Parameter for reset
characteristic
Direction Forward/ backward Setting for fault direction
backward
Start Value 0.050 … 40.000 In 0.5000 Current threshold for start
condition
Def. operate time 0.015 … 300.000 s 0.080 Time delay for trip condition

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start on phase L1 (fault in set direction)
E8 Protection general start (logical OR combination of starts)
E9 General start is cancelled (after expiration of reset time)
E16 Block signal is active
E17 Block signal is back to inactive status
E20 Protection operationa)on phase L1
E21 Operation on phase L1 cancelled
E22 Protection operation on phase L2
E24 Protection operation on phase L3
E26 Protection general operation (logical OR combination of all faults)
81
Unit
Protection manual
Code Event reason

E27 General operation cancelled (after expiration of reset time)
E28 Operation on fault direction forward
E29 Operation on fault direction backward
E30 Operation on fault direction unknown
a)
Protection operation is the start of protection on faults independent on direction
6.1.5. Overcurrent protection (single stage)
REF 542plus provides three overcurrent definite time protection functions, see the
following figures. Each of them can be independently activated.
A050873
Fig. 6.1.5.-1 Overcurrent definite time instantaneous (I>>>)
A050874
Fig. 6.1.5.-2 Overcurrent definite time high set (I>>)
A050875
Fig. 6.1.5.-3 Overcurrent definite time low set (I>)
82
Unit
Protection manual

then remain in idle state until BS signal goes low.

activated when the respective phase current start conditions are true.
The TRIP signal will be activated when at least for a phase current the start
conditions are true and the operating time has elapsed.
A050876
83
Unit
Protection manual
A050877
The protection functions operate on any combination of phase currents in a triple,

on the phase currents belonging to the same system.
A050878
84
Unit
Protection manual
Start Value: Current threshold for overcurrent condition detection.

Time: Time delay for overcurrent Trip condition detection.
A050879
A050880
Fig. 6.1.5.2.-5 Pins
85
Unit
Protection manual
All overcurrent definite time functions evaluate the current RMS value at the
fundamental frequency. In case of the overcurrent definite time instantaneous, the
peak value of the measured current is also used under transient condition for a faster
response. When the instantaneous peak value is higher than three times SQRT (2)
the RMS value:
I x _ peak 2 > 3 ⋅ I x _ RMS (13)
overcurrent protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective, that is,
when at least the value of one phase current is above the setting threshold value the
relevant start signal will be activated.
The protection function will remain in START status until there is at least one phase
started. It will come back in passive status and the start signal will be cleared, if for
all the phases the current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value. After the
protection has entered the start status and the preset operating time (Time) has
elapsed, function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated.
The protection function will exit the TRIP status and the trip signal will be cleared
All overcurrent definite time functions can be used in parallel to generate a current
time-step characteristic, as shown in the following figure.
A050882
Fig. 6.1.5.4.-1 Current time-step characteristic
86
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the overcurrent definite time

Start Value I>, 0.05 ... 40.00 In 0.50 Current threshold for
I>> overcurrent condition
detection.
Time 20 ... 300000 ms 80 Time delay for overcurrent
Trip condition.
Start Value I>>> 0.1 ... 40.00 In 0.50 Current threshold for
overcurrent condition
detection.
Time 15 ... 30000 ms 80 Time delay for overcurrent
Trip condition.

Code Event reason
6.1.6. Directional overcurrent protection (single stage)
REF 542plus has two directional definite time functions, each of which can be
independently activated:
A050825
Fig. 6.1.6.-1 Overcurrent directional high set (I>>>)
87
Unit
Protection manual
A050826
Fig. 6.1.6.-2 Overcurrent directional low set (I>>)


BO Digital signal (active high) Block output signal
The Block Output (BO) signal becomes active when the protection function detects
a current exceeding the preset value and the fault direction opposite to the specified
direction.
88
Unit
Protection manual
A050827
A050828

on the phase currents belonging to the same system.
89
Unit
Protection manual
The faulty phase current is combined with the voltage of the corresponding sound
phases. The required voltage measure is automatically selected and displayed in the
General dialog.
A050829

Direction: Directional criteria to be assessed together to overcurrent
condition for the START detection.
Start Value: Current threshold for overcurrent condition detection.
Time: Time delay for overcurrent trip condition detection.
A050830
90
Unit
Protection manual
A050871
Fig. 6.1.6.2.-5 Pins
The directional overcurrent protection function evaluates the current and voltage at
If the measured current exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value), and
the fault is in the specified direction (backward/forward), the protection
function is started. The start signal is phase selective. It means that when at least for
one phase current the above conditions are true, the relevant start signal will be
activated.
If the preset threshold value (Start Value) is exceeded and the fault is in the
opposite direction to the specified one, the Block Output signal becomes active. The
protection function will remain in START status until there is at least one phase
started. It will come back in passive status and the start signal will be cleared if for
all the phases the current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value (or the fault
current changes direction).
generated.
91
Unit
Protection manual
To determine the fault direction REF 542plus must be connected to the three-phase
voltages. The protection function has a voltage memory, which allows a directional
decision to be produced even if a fault occurs in the close up area of the voltage
transformer/sensor (when the voltage falls below 0.1 x Un).
6.1.6.5. Current direction
Detection of the current direction is obtained by calculating the reactive power,

which is computed combining the faulty phase current with the voltage of the
corresponding sound phases. The reactive power calculation uses voltage and
current measurements at the fundamental frequency. Before the calculations, the
voltages are shifted to a lagging angle of 45°.
The reactive power is calculated like the following:
Q = ( I L1 × U 23 × sin ϕ1 ) +
(14)
( I L2 × U 31 × sin ϕ2 ) + ( I L3 × U12 × sin ϕ3 )
Where is:
Q Reactive power
IL1,2,3 Current of phase 1, 2 and 3
U12,23,31 Line voltages between phases 1-2, 2-3 and 3-1 after shifting -45°
φ1,2,3 Angles between the currents and the corresponding voltages
Only the phases whose current exceeds preset threshold are used in the calculation.
If the result of the calculation leads to a negative reactive power, which is greater
than 5% of the nominal apparent power, the fault is in forward direction. Otherwise,
the fault is in backward direction.
A directional signal can be sent to the opposite station using the output (trip) and/or
the Block Output (BO) signal. The content of a directional signal from the opposite
station (BO output) can be used to release tripping of its own directional protective
function. This enables a directional comparison protection to be established.
Fig. 6.1.6.5.-1 shows the forward and backward direction in the impedance plane in
case of a balanced three-phase fault.
92
Unit
Protection manual
A052091
Fig. 6.1.6.5.-1 Diagram of the directional overcurrent protection in case of balanced

three-phase faults
Because the application of the fault-current is in combination with the sound

voltages, the directional decision area can change. This change depends on the
power system parameters in case of nonsymmetrical fault condition. The criteria for
forward and backward direction is derived from the calculated reactive power.
6.1.6.6. Voltage memory
The directional overcurrent protection function includes a voltage memory feature.

This allows a directional decision to be produced even if a fault occurs in the close
up area of the voltage transformer/sensor.
At a sudden loss of voltage, a fictive voltage is used for direction detection. The
fictive voltage is the voltage measured before the fault has occurred, assuming that
the voltage is not affected by the fault. The memory function enables the function
block to operate up to 300 seconds after a total loss of voltage.
When the voltage falls below 0.1 x Un, the fictive voltage is used. The actual
voltage is applied again as soon as the voltage rises above 0.1 x Un for at least 100
ms. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the measured voltage stays below 0.1 x
Un for more than 300 seconds.
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the overcurrent directional definite
time protection functions.
93
Unit
Protection manual

Start Value 0.05 ... 40 In 0.2 Current threshold for fault
detection.
Time 40 ... 30000 ms 80 Operating Time between start
and trip.
Direction forward/ - backward Direction criteria.
backward

Code Event reason
E17 Block signal is back
6.1.7. Overcurrent IDMT (single stage)
REF 542plus makes available an IDMT function in which one at the time of the four
current-time characteristics can be activated:
* Normal inverse
* Very inverse
* Extremely inverse
* Long-term inverse
A050883
Fig. 6.1.7.-1 Overcurrent IDMT
94
Unit
Protection manual


activated when the respective phase current start conditions are true (the phase
current value is above 1.2 times the setting threshold value).
conditions are true and the calculated operating time has elapsed.
A050884
95
Unit
Protection manual
A050885
Fig. 6.1.7.2.-2 IDMT type
A050886

96
Unit
Protection manual
A050887

Base current (Ieb): Current threshold for overcurrent condition detection.
Time multiplier (k): Parameter to vary time delay for Trip condition
The trip time is calculated according to the British Standard (BS 142) when the time
multiplier k is used; when the time multiplier k is set to one (k=1) the IDMT curve is
in accordance to the IEC 60255-3.
A050888
97
Unit
Protection manual
A050889
Fig. 6.1.7.2.-6 Pins
IDMT protection function evaluates the RMS value of phase currents at the
If the measured current exceeds the setting threshold value (Base current Ieb)
by a factor 1.2 the protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective,
that is, when at least one phase current is above 1.2 times the setting threshold value,
the relevant start signal will be activated.
all the phases the current falls below 1.15 the setting threshold value. When the
protection enters the start status the operating time is continuously recalculated
according to the set parameters and measured current value. If the calculated
operating time is exceeded, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal
becomes active.
The operating time depends on the measured current and the selected current-time
characteristic. The protection function will exit the TRIP status and the trip signal
will be cleared when the measured current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold
value.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the IDMT protection function.
98
Unit
Protection manual

Type NI/VI/EI/LTI - NI Tripping characteristic according
to the IEC 60255-3 curve
definition.
Base current 0.05 ... 40 In 0.5 Fault current factor threshold for
(Ieb) start condition detection.
Time multiplier (k) 0.05 ... 1.50 - 0.50 Time multiplier to vary time delay
for Trip condition according to
BS 142.

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start on phase L1.
E1 Start on phase L1 cancelled.
E6 Trip signal is active.
E7 Trip signal is back to inactive state.
E18 Protection block signal is active.
E19 Protection block signal is back to inactive state.
6.1.8. Non-directional earth fault protection
In the non-directional earth fault protection can up to eight instances be applied.
Fig. 6.1.8.-1 Non-directional earth fault protection
99
Unit
Protection manual

BS Digital signal (active Blocking signal
high)

START Digital signal (active Start signal
high)
GEN.START Digital signal (active General start signal (including reset time)
high)
TRIP Digital signal (active Trip signal
high)
START signal is activated when earth fault protection start condition is true. The
GEN. START includes the expiration of the reset time. The TRIP signal is activated
when the start condition is true and the operating time has elapsed.
100
Unit
Protection manual
101
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function can operate on measured or calculated (on any set of phase
current in a triple) neutral current.

Mode: Mode for the earth fault, instantaneous, definite or inverse time
IDMT (IEEE): Free programmable inverse time curve according to equation
A,P,B, Td: Parameter for the free programmable inverse time curve
Reset time: Timer to reset start current condition disappeared
102
Unit
Protection manual

103
Unit
Protection manual
104
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.1.8.2.-5 Pins
All earth fault protection functions evaluate the RMS value of the measured residual
current or the calculated neutral current at the fundamental frequency.
earth fault protection function is started.
The protection function remains in START status and comes back in passive status
and the start signal is cleared, if the residual current falls below 0.95 the setting
threshold value. After the protection has entered the start status and the preset
operating time (Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip
signal is generated.
105
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function exits the TRIP status and the trip signal is cleared when the
residual current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value. The inverse time
tripping characteristic is defined according to an equation.
⎛ A ⎞
t =⎜ P + B ⎟ td (15)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:

Each time the protection is started due to a system fault condition (M > 1.2) the
equation.
⎛ tr ⎞
t = ⎜ P ⎟ td (16)
⎝ M −1 ⎠

inverse time earth-fault protection enters the reset state and decrements the operating
counter according to above equation. If the condition is 1 ≤ M < 1.2, the counter
remains unchanged.
operating counter.
106
Unit
Protection manual
inverse time earth-fault protection. For definite time earth-fault
Two parameter sets can be configured for the earth fault protection. Switch-over
between the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of the network
configuration. If this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized identically
to avoid wrong setting if switch-over of parameters has happened accidentally.
Table 6.1.8.6.-1 Settings values

Mode Instantaneous/ Instanta- Operation characteristic
IDMT neous
A (ratio 0.005 … 200.000 13.500 Parameter for operation
multiplier) characteristic
B (offset 0.000 … 50.000 s 0.000 Parameter for operation
time) characteristic
characteristic
time/Inverse time
Reset time 0.020 … 100.000 s 1.000 Parameter for reset characteristic
(Tr)
Start Value 0.050 … 40.000 In 0.5000 Current threshold for start condition
Def. operate 0.015 … 300.000 s 0.080 Time delay for trip condition
time

Code Event reason
E1 Start cancelled
E8 Protection general start
E9 General start is cancelled (after expiration of the reset time)
107
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.9. Directional earth-fault protection
In the directional earth-fault protection up to 8 instances can be applied.
Fig. 6.1.9.-1 Directional earth-fault protection

high)

START Digital signal (active Start signal (fault in set direction)
high)
GEN.START Digital signal (active General start signal (logical OR combination of all
high) starts including reset time)
TRIP Digital signal (active Trip signal
high)
BO Digital signal (active Block output signal (fault in opposite direction)
high)
The START signal is activated when the measured or calculated neutral current
exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value) and the fault is in the specified
direction.
GEN. START remains active as long as the start signal is high until the reset time, if
used, has expired.
TRIP signal is activated when the start conditions are true and the operating time has
elapsed.
Block Output (BO) signal becomes active when the protection function detects a
current exceeding the preset value and the fault direction opposite to the specified
direction.
108
Unit
Protection manual
109
Unit
Protection manual
The protection functions can operate on neutral current and residual voltage
quantities measured through dedicated sensor(s) or calculated from the current and
voltage phase components in a triple.
110
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.1.9.2.-3 Mode

Mode: Mode for the earth fault definite or inverse time
IDMT (IEEE): Free programmable inverse time curve according to equation
A,P,B, Td: Parameter for the free programmable inverse time curve
Reset time: Timer is reset after the start current condition is not valid any more
111
Unit
Protection manual

Nettype: Parameter defining the connection to ground network topology
Direction: Directional criteria to be assesses together to earth fault condition for
start detection
Def. operate Operation time in mode definite time
time:
Voltage Uo Voltage threshold for start
112
Unit
Protection manual
113
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.1.9.2.-6 Pins
All directional earth-fault protection functions evaluate the current RMS value at the
The directional earth-fault protection functions evaluate the measured or calculated

amount of neutral current Io and voltage Uo at the fundamental frequency. If the
residual current and simultaneously the residual voltage exceed the related setting
threshold value (Start Value and Uo) the directional earth-fault protection
function is started. At the same time the general start signal is activated.
If the general start condition exists and the fault is in the specified direction
(backward/forward), the timer for the operation time is started. The way the
direction is determined depends on the selected network type (isolated/
earthed).
114
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function remains in START status and comes back in passive status
by clearing the start signal if the current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value
(or the fault current changes direction).
generated. The protection function exits the TRIP status and the trip signal is cleared
The direction can be determined only if the neutral voltage is above the preset
threshold (that is, Voltage Uo).
If parameter Net type is set to isolated, then the neutral current is of capacitive
type. Then its main component is on an orthogonal projection with respect to the
neutral or residual voltage.
Fig. 6.1.9.4.-1 Operating characteristic of the directional earth-fault protection

(isolated network sin φ)
If parameter Net type is set to earthed, then the neutral current is of resistive type.
Then its main component is on a projection parallel to the neutral voltage.
115
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.1.9.4.-2 Operating characteristic of the directional earth-fault protection

(earthed network cos φ)
The protection function is started, if the following conditions are true:

* Neutral voltage value is above the preset threshold (that is, Voltage Uo)
* AND the significant component of neutral current value exceeds the setting
threshold value (Start Value)
* AND the direction is as selected (that is, backward/forward)
When the preset threshold values (Start Value and Uo) are exceeded and the
first two conditions are true but the fault is in the opposite direction to the specified
one, the Block Output signal becomes active. The tripping can be selected as
definite time or as inverse time characteristic. The inverse time characteristic is
defined according to an equation.
⎛ A ⎞
t =⎜ P + B ⎟ td (17)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:

116
Unit
Protection manual
Each time the protection is started due to a system fault condition (M > 1.2) the
equation.
⎛ tr ⎞
t = ⎜ P ⎟ td (18)
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where:

inverse time directional earth-fault protection enters the reset state and decrements
the operating counter according to above equation. If the condition is 1 ≤ M < 1.2,
the counter remains unchanged.
operating counter.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the directional earth-fault protection.
Switch-over between the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of the
network configuration. If this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized
identically to avoid wrong setting if switch-over of parameters has happened
accidentally.
117
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.1.9.6.-1 Parameters

Mode Definite time/ Definite time Operation characteristic
IDMT
A (ratio 0.005 … 200.000 13.500 Parameter for operation
multiplier) characteristic
B (offset 0.000 … 50.000 s 0.000 Parameter for operation
time) characteristic
characteristic
time/Inverse time
Reset time 0.020 … 100.000 s 1.000 Parameter for reset characteristic
(Tr)
Net type isolated (sin phi) / Setting for network earthing
earthed (cos Phi)
Direction Forward/ backward Setting for fault direction
backward
Start Value 0.050 … 40.000 In 0.5000 Current threshold for start condition
Def. operate 0.015 … 300.000 s 0.080 Time delay for trip condition
time

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start on earth fault (fault in set direction)
E1 Start on earth fault cancelled
E8 Protection general start
E17 Block signal is back to inactive status
E20 Protection operationa)
E21 Operation cancelled
E26 Protection general operation
E28 Operation on fault direction forward
118
Unit
Protection manual
Table footnotes from previous page

a)
Protection operation is the start of protection on faults independent on direction
6.1.10. Earth fault protection (single stage)
REF 542plus has two earth fault definite time protection functions, which can be
activated and the parameters set independently of each other, see the following
figures.
A050890
Fig. 6.1.10.-1 Earth fault high
A050891
Fig. 6.1.10.-2 Earth fault low


The Start signal will be activated when the measured or calculated neutral current
exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value).
The TRIP signal will be activated when the start conditions are true and the
operating time (Time) has elapsed.
119
Unit
Protection manual
A050892
A050893
The protection functions can operate on measured or calculated (on any set of phase
currents in a triple) neutral current.
120
Unit
Protection manual
A050894

Start Value: Current threshold for earth fault condition detection.
Time: Time delay for earth fault Trip condition detection.
A050895
Fig. 6.1.10.2.-4 Events
121
Unit
Protection manual
A050896
Fig. 6.1.10.2.-5 Pins
All earth fault definite time protection functions evaluate the measured residual
current or the calculated neutral current at the fundamental frequency.
If the measured or calculated neutral current exceeds the setting threshold value
(Start Value), the earth fault protection function is started.
The protection function will come back in passive status and the start signal will be
cleared if the neutral current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value.
has elapsed, function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated.
when the neutral current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value.
Two parameter sets can be configured for each earth fault protection function.
122
Unit
Protection manual

Start value 0.05 ... 40.00 In 0.10 Current threshold for earth fault
condition detection.
Time 40 ... 30000 ms 200 Time delay for earth fault Trip

Code Event reason
E0 Start started
E1 Start back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
6.1.11. Directional earth-fault protection (single stage)
REF 542plus has two directional earth-fault protection functions, each of which can
be independently activated and configured, see the following figures.
A050897
Fig. 6.1.11.-1 Directional earth fault low
A050898
Fig. 6.1.11.-2 Directional earth fault high
123
Unit
Protection manual

state), this means that all the output pins go low generating the required events (if

exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value) and the fault is in the specified
direction.
a current exceeds the preset value and the fault direction opposite to the speccified
direction.
A050899
124
Unit
Protection manual
A050900
quantities measured through dedicated sensor(s) or calculated from the current and
voltage phase components in a triple.
A050971
125
Unit
Protection manual
Net Type: Parameter defining the connection to ground network typology.

Direction: Directional criteria to be assessed together to earth fault condition
for START detection.
Start Value: Current threshold for earth fault condition detection.
Time: Time delay for earth fault Trip condition detection.
Voltage U0: Residual or neutral voltage threshold.
(The convention used to define Trip or Block area with respect to residual voltage
U0 vector is described in the following, based on the typical connection diagram of
current and voltage transformers for a generic feeder provided in the Section ).
A050972
Fig. 6.1.11.2.-4 Events
126
Unit
Protection manual
A050973
Fig. 6.1.11.2.-5 Pins
All directional earth fault definite time protection functions evaluate the measured or
calculated amount of neutral current I0 and voltage U0 at the fundamental
frequency.
The direction is determined (hence the protection function is active) only if the
neutral voltage is above the preset threshold (that is, Voltage U0).
The way the direction is determined depends on the selected network type
(isolated/earthed).
If parameter Net type is set to isolated, then the neutral current is of capacitive type.
Then its main component is on an orthogonal projection with respect to the neutral
voltage.
127
Unit
Protection manual
A050974
Fig. 6.1.11.4.-1 Operating characteristic of the earth fault directional protection

(isolated network sin φ)
If parameter Net type is set to earthed, then the neutral current is of resistive type.
Then its main component is on a projection parallel to the neutral voltage.
A050975
Fig. 6.1.11.4.-2 Operating characteristic of the earth fault directional protection

(earthed network cos φ)
If the following conditions are true:
128
Unit
Protection manual
* Neutral voltage value is above the preset threshold (that is, Voltage U0)
* AND “significant” component of neutral current value exceeds the setting
threshold value (Start Value)
* AND the direction is as selected (that is, backward/forward),
then the protection function is started.
When the preset threshold values (Start Value and Uo) are exceeded and the
first two conditions are true but the fault is in the opposite direction to the specified
one, the Block Output signal becomes active.
cleared if the neutral current “significant” component value falls below 0.95 the
setting threshold value OR if the conditions on Neutral voltage value OR direction
are not true.
when the neutral current “significant” component value falls below 0.4 the setting
threshold value.
Two parameter sets can be configured for each directional earthfault protection
function.

Net type Isolated/ - Isolated Network grounding typology.
earthed
Direction Forward/ - Backward Directional criteria.
backward
Start value 0.05 ... 40.00 In 0.10 “Significant” component
threshold
and trip.
Voltage U0 0.02 ... 0.70 Un 0.10 Neutral or residual voltage
threshold.
129
Unit
Protection manual

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E7 Trip signal is back to inactive
E16 Block output signal is active
E17 Block output signal is back to inactive
6.1.12. Earth fault IDMT (single stage)
The dependent earth-fault current timer protection, like IDMT, is a time-delay

function with a set of hyperbolic current-time characteristics. An earth-fault IDMT
function, in which four current-time characteristics may be selected, can be activated
in REF542:
* Normal inverse
* Very inverse
* Extremely inverse and
* Long-term inverse
A050999
Fig. 6.1.12.-1 Earth fault IDMT
130
Unit
Protection manual


exceeds the setting threshold value (Base current Ieb) by a factor 1.2. The
TRIP signal will be activated when the start conditions are true and the calculated
operating time has elapsed.
A051000
From 0 means direct execution of the trip command, that is, skipping FUPLA cyclic
evaluation.
131
Unit
Protection manual
A051003
Fig. 6.1.12.2.-2 IDMT Type
A051004
The protection function can operate on measured or calculated (on any set of phase
currents in a triple) neutral currents.
132
Unit
Protection manual
A051005

Base current (Ieb): Current threshold for overcurrent condition detection
Time multiplier (k): Parameter to vary time delay for Trip condition
The trip time is calculated according to British Standard (BS 142) when the time
multiplier k is used. When the time multiplier k is set to one (k=1) the IDMT curve
is in accordance to IEC 60255-3.
A051006
Fig. 6.1.12.2.-5 Events
133
Unit
Protection manual
A051007
Fig. 6.1.12.2.-6 Pins
Earth fault IDMT function evaluates the measured amount of residual current at the
If the measured or calculated neutral current exceeds the setting threshold value
(Base current Ieb) by a factor 1.2, the protection function is started.
cleared if the neutral current falls below 1.15 the setting threshold value.
When the protection enters the start status, the operating time is continuously
recalculated according to the set parameters and measured current value. If the
calculated operating time is exceeded, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip
signal becomes active.
The operating time depends on the measured current and the selected current-time
characteristic.
when the measured or calculated neutral current value falls below 0.4 the setting
threshold value.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the earth-fault IDMT protection function.
134
Unit
Protection manual

Type NI/VI/EI/LTI - NI Tripping characteristic according
to the IEC 60255-3 curve
definition.
Base current 0.05 ... 40 - 0.5 Fault current factor threshold for
(Ieb) start condition detection.
Time multiplier 0.05 ... 1.50 - 0.50 Time multiplier to vary time delay
(k) for Trip condition according to
BS 142.

Code Event reason
E0 Protection is start
E18 Protection block is active
E19 Protection block is back to inactive
6.1.13. Sensitive directional earth fault protection
REF 542plus has one sensitive directional earth fault protection function (67N
Sensitive).
With respect to the two directional earth fault protection functions (67N), the 67N
sensitive protection can be configured to set the maximum sensitivity direction at a
user defined angle (Angle delta). The only additional requirement is to acquire
the neutral current I0 through a dedicated earth transformer in order to have the
proper precision.
A050976
Fig. 6.1.13.-1 Sensitive directional earth fault protection
135
Unit
Protection manual


The Start signal will be activated when the measured residual voltage exceeds the
setting threshold value (Voltage Uo) and the neutral current is in the specified
Trip area.
residual voltage and neutral current exceeds the preset values, but the fault (neutral
current) is in the block area (opposite to the specified direction, Angle delta).
A050977
136
Unit
Protection manual
A050978
quantities.
The neutral current I0 is acquired through the dedicated transformer in order to have
the proper precision. The residual voltage U0 can be either measured through a
dedicated sensor or calculated from the voltage phase components in a triple.
137
Unit
Protection manual
A050979

Current I0: Current threshold for dir. earth fault condition detection
Time: Time delay for dir. earth fault Trip condition detection
Angle alpha: Parameter to improve the discrimination of the directional decision
Angle delta: Angle between U0 vector and the direction of maximum sensitivity
Voltage U0: Residual or neutral voltage threshold
The convention used to define Trip or Block area with respect to residual voltage U0
vector is described in the following, based on the typical connection diagram of
current and voltage transformers for a generic feeder.
A050980
Fig. 6.1.13.2.-4 Events
138
Unit
Protection manual
A050981
Fig. 6.1.13.2.-5 Pins
Sensitive earth fault direction protection function evaluates the amount of residual
current I0 and voltage U0 at the fundamental frequency. All sub harmonic disturbing
signals down to 1/3 of the fundamental frequency is completely filtered out.

* Residual voltage value is above the preset threshold (voltage U0)
* AND Neutral current value is in the trip area of the protection function, then the
protection function is started.
If the condition of the voltage U0 is true, but the neutral current value is in the block
area, the protection function remains idle and the Block Output signal becomes
active. When the neutral current value is in the passive area both the Start and Block
signals are inactive.
cleared if the neutral current OR residual voltage value fall below 0.95 the setting
threshold value.
when the neutral current OR residual voltage value fall below 0.4 the setting
threshold value. To ensure the required sensitivity and discrimination for the earth
139
Unit
Protection manual
fault detection, in its implementation in REF 542plus the operating characteristic is

formed with additional adjustability. The following diagram shows the shape of the
operating characteristic.
A050982
Fig. 6.1.13.4.-1 Operating characteristic of the earth fault directional sensitive

protection for isolated network (φ = 90°)
A060411
Fig. 6.1.13.4.-2 Operating characteristic of the earth fault directional sensitive

protection for earthed network (φ = 180°)
140
Unit
Protection manual
The value of δ (that is Angle delta between U0 vector and the direction of maximum
sensitivity) can be configured in the range from –180° to 180°. This provides the
option of using the earth fault directional sensitive protection for every type of
network grounding situation. Assuming that the connection is done according to the
recommended connection diagram, the setting can be selected as follows:
* δ = 90° for isolated network
* δ = 180° for earth fault compensated or resistance earthed network.
The “significant” component of neutral current is its projection on the direction of

maximum sensitivity. Neutral current value is in the trip or block area when the
“significant” component exceeds the setting threshold value (Current I0).
The other parameter α (that is, Angle alpha) is used to improve the discrimination of
the directional decision.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the sensitive directional earth-fault
protection function.

Current I0 0.05 ... 2.00 In 1.00 Earth fault current threshold.
and trip.
Angle alpha 0.0 ... 20.0 ° 20.0 Discrimination of the
directional decision.
Angle delta -180.0 ... 180.0 ° 0.0 Angle between U0 and
maximum sensitivity direction.
Voltage U0 0.05 ... 0.70 Un 0.50 Neutral or residual voltage
threshold.

Code Event reason
E16 Block output is active
E17 Block output is back to inactive
141
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.14. Sector directional earth fault protection
REF 542plus can install up to 10 sector directional earth fault protection functions
(67N Sector). The value of Sector Angular Width (that is Angle Δφ between
U0 vector and the direction of maximum sensitivity) can be configured in the range
from –180° to 180°. This provides the option of using the sector directional earth
fault protection for every type of network grounding situation (isolated, earthed or
compensated).
With respect to the sensitive directional earth fault protection function (67N
Sensitive), the 67N Sector protection enables:
* Multiple instances (1 … 10 different stages)
* Fully configurable sensor interface, enabling I0 and U0 quantities to be directly
acquired through dedicated transformers or calculated from the current/voltage
phase components
* Direction enable/disable configuration, it can be used as earth fault (non-
directional) protection
* Start criteria based on neutral current Magnitude or Basic Angle to set the
maximum sensitivity direction at a user defined angle Sector Basic Angle.
* Angular sector Trip area configurable by a user defined angle. Sector
Angular Width.
* Neutral current and residual voltage configurable Start Drop-off delays
to enable stable protection operation during transients, as in the presence of
intermittent arcing phenomena.
A050983
Fig. 6.1.14.-1 Sector directional earth fault protection
142
Unit
Protection manual

When theBS signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its
state), This means that all the output pins go low generating the required events (if

The Start signal will be activated when the measured residual voltage exceeds the
setting threshold value (Voltage Uo) and the neutral current is in the specified
Trip sector.
residual voltage and neutral current exceeding the preset values, but the fault
(neutral current) is in the block area (opposite to the specified direction, Sector
Basic Angle).
143
Unit
Protection manual
A050984
Output channel different from 0 means direct execution of the trip command, that is,
skipping FUPLA cyclic evaluation.
Stage order can be reassigned by the selection Stage window in the General dialog.
A050985
144
Unit
Protection manual
quantities.
The neutral current I0 and the residual voltage U0 can be either measured through a
dedicated sensor or calculated from the current and voltage phase components in a
triple.
In order to assure the proper precision the Start values settings are
evaluated in the in the Parameters dialog taking into account the whole
analog input acquisition chain. A warning is issued if the preset
threshold does not satisfy this check.
A050986
Fig. 6.1.14.2.-3 Settings
The Settings configuration dialog window provides the main options for the
operation of the protection:
The Direction Enable checkbox provides the option of deactivating the directional
criteria. When it is not checked, the protection behaves as earth fault (non-
directional) protection and all the parameters relevant to the sector are disabled.
Only the Current Start Drop-off option is still available.
145
Unit
Protection manual
A050987
The Start Criteria options enable to select between two different criterion on
how to monitor the neutral current I0. The diagrams below show how this feature
works:
* Neutral Current magnitude, when selected, the measured magnitude of
the neutral current phasor is compared to the preset threshold I0s (Neutral
Current Start Value).
* Neutral Current Basic Angle, when selected, the component I0b of the
measured neutral current phasor in the direction of the Basic Angle φb (direction
of maximum sensitivity ) is compared to the preset threshold I0s (Neutral
146
Unit
Protection manual
A050988
Fig. 6.1.14.2.-5 Neutral Current Magnitude
A050989
Fig. 6.1.14.2.-6 Neutral Current Basic Angle behavior
147
Unit
Protection manual
The “significant” component of neutral current is its projection I0b on the direction
of maximum sensitivity φb. Neutral current value may enter the trip or block area
when the “significant” component exceeds the setting threshold value (Neutral
A050990

Neutral Current Start Value (I0): Current threshold for directional earth-fault
Residual Voltage Start Value (U0): Voltage threshold for directional earth-fault
Operating Time (t): Time delay for dir. earth-fault Trip condition
detection.
Sector Basic Angle: Angle φb between U0 vector and the
bisector (direction of maximum sensitivity)
Sector Angular Width: Angle defining the angular Trip area
(sector)
Current Start Drop-off delay: Delay to the reset of Start condition with
intermittent earth-fault current.
Voltage Start Drop-off delay: Delay to the reset of Start condition with
intermittent residual voltage.
Angles are referenced to the voltage phasor U0 in a clockwise convention.
The convention used to define Trip or Block area with respect to residual voltage U0
vector is described in the following, based on the typical connection diagram of
current and voltage transformers for a generic feeder.
148
Unit
Protection manual
A050991
Fig. 6.1.14.2.-8 Events
A050992
Fig. 6.1.14.2.-9 Pins
Sector directional earth fault protection function evaluates the amount of residual
current I0 and voltage U0 at the fundamental frequency.
149
Unit
Protection manual
When the directional criteria is not active (Direction Enable; checkbox NOT
checked) in the following description only the condition on neutral current value
magnitude is evaluated (that is, compared with setting threshold value Neutral

* Residual voltage value is above the preset threshold (that is, Residual Voltage
Start Value U0)
* AND Neutral current phasor is in the trip area (sector) of the protection function,
then the protection function is started.
If the condition of the voltage U0 is true but the neutral current phasor is in the
block area, the protection function remains idle and the Block Output signal
becomes active. When the neutral current phasor is in the passive area both the Start
and Block signals are inactive.
cleared (when both Current Start Drop-off time and Voltage Start Drop-off time are
zero and therefore inactive) if the neutral current or residual voltage value fall below
0.95 the setting threshold value or the neutral current phasor exits the activation area
(Trip or Block area).
when the neutral current or residual voltage value fall below 0.4 the setting
threshold value or the Neutral current phasor exits the activation area.
6.1.14.5. Trip and Block areas
To ensure the required sensitivity and discrimination for the earth fault detection, in
its implementation in REF 542plus the operating characteristic is formed with
additional adjustability.
The following diagrams show the shape of the operating characteristic. The
protection behaves differently depending on the Neutral Current Start Criteria
selected.
If Neutral Current magnitude Start Criteria is selected, the trip area

and the block area are 360° complementary, the passive area is the circle of preset
threshold radius (that is, Neutral Current Start Value).
150
Unit
Protection manual
A050993
Fig. 6.1.14.5.-1 Operating characteristic of the sector directional earth fault protection
function, Neutral Current Magnitude
If Neutral Current Basic Angle Start Criteria is selected, the

behavior is dependent on the angle Δφ defining the angular Trip area (Sector
Angular Width).
* Δφ < 180°, the block area corresponds to the semiplane opposite to the trip area.
* Δφ < 180°, the trip area is limited to 180°, the block area is 360° complementary
to the preset Sector Angular Width Δφ, the passive area around includes parts of
the Sector Angular Width in the plane opposite to the trip area.
Due to directionality of the criterion, no Neutral current phasor even if exceeding

preset threshold value with component I0b , “significant” component of neutral
current projected on the direction of maximum sensitivity φb, opposite to φb can
start the protection function.
A050995
Fig. 6.1.14.5.-2 Operating characteristic of the sector directional earth fault protection
function, Neutral Current Basic Angle.
The start criteria (Magnitude Vs. Basic Angle) changes significantly

the shape of passive, block and trip areas.
151
Unit
Protection manual
6.1.14.6. Start drop-off delay function
To ensure the required sensitivity and discrimination for the earth fault in order to
avoid flickering of the Start signal in case of intermittent currents and voltages two
drop-off delay timers have been provided to delay the reset of the start status.
If the drop-off delay timer is active (t>0), the protection function will not come back
in passive status and the start signal will not be cleared when the relevant Start
condition falls below 0.95 the setting threshold.
Thus, after the protection has entered the start status the start status is sustained.
After the preset operating time (Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status
and the trip signal is generated if the start status is still sustained and the start
conditions are again verified.
If the voltage Start drop-off time is set to a value different from zero when the
residual voltage drops-off (Uo falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value) the start
status will be reset after the voltage start drop-off time is elapsed. If voltage is
lacking for a time interval shorter than voltage start drop-off time the start output
will not be affected by the voltage shortage.
A050997
Fig. 6.1.14.6.-1 Voltage Delayed Start Drop-Off
Similarly, if the current start drop-off time is set to a value different from zero when
the neutral current phasor drops-off (exit the trip area) the start status will be reset
after the current start drop-off time is elapsed. If the neutral current phasor stays out
of the activation area for a time shorter than current start drop-off time the Start
output won’t be affected.
A050998
Fig. 6.1.14.6.-2 Current delayed start drop-off
152
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the sector directional earth fault protection
function.

Neutral current 0.002 ... 8.00 In 1.000 Earth fault current threshold.
start value I0
Residual voltage 0.004 ... 0.700 Un 0.500 Residual voltage threshold.
start value U0
Operating time t 30 ... 60000 ms 500 Operating time between start
and trip.
Sector basic -180.0 ... 180.0 ° 0.0 Angle between U0 and
angle maximum sensitivity
direction.
Sector angular 0.0 ... 360.0 ° 360.0 Angle defining the angular
width Trip area.
Current start 0 … 1000 ms 0 Start reset delay for
drop/off delay intermittent current I0.
Voltage start 0 … 1000 ms 0 Start reset delay for
drop/off delay intermittent voltage U0.

Code Event reason
E16 Block output is active
E17 Block output is back to inactive
6.2. Voltage protection
6.2.1. Overvoltage protection
There are three overvoltage definite time protection functions in REF 542plus,
which can be independently activated and parameterized. See the following figures.
153
Unit
Protection manual
A051008
Fig. 6.2.1.-1 Overvoltage instantaneous
A051009
Fig. 6.2.1.-2 Overvoltage high
A051010
Fig. 6.2.1.-3 Overvoltage low


activated when the respective phase (line) voltage start conditions are true (voltage
exceeds the setting threshold value).
The TRIP signal will be activated when at least for a phase voltage the start
154
Unit
Protection manual
A051011
A051012
The protection functions can operate on any combination of phase (or line) voltages
in a triple, for example, it can operate as single phase or double phase, three-phase
protection on voltages belonging to the same system.
155
Unit
Protection manual
A051013

Start Value: Voltage threshold for overvoltage condition detection
Time: Time delay for overvoltage Trip condition detection
A051014
156
Unit
Protection manual
A051015
Fig. 6.2.1.2.-5 Pins
Overvoltage protection functions evaluate the phase or line voltage RMS value at
If the measured voltage exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value), the
overvoltage protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective. It
means that when at least the value of one phase voltage is above the setting
threshold value the relevant start signal will be activated.
all the phases the voltage falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value. After the
elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated.
when the measured voltage value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value.
The overvoltage protective functions, like the overcurrent protective functions, are
used in a time graded coordination. An example of grading is shown in the
following diagram.
157
Unit
Protection manual
A051016
Fig. 6.2.1.4.-1 Overvoltage response grading.
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the overvoltage protection
functions.

Start Value U>, 0.1 ... 3.00 Un 0.50 Voltage threshold for Start
U>> condition detection.
Time 40 ... 30000 ms 80 Time delay for Trip condition.
Start Value U>>> 0.1 ... 3.00 Un 0.50 Voltage threshold for Start

Code Event reason
E2 Protection starton phase L2
E19 Block signal is back to inactive state
158
Unit
Protection manual
6.2.2. Undervoltage protection
There are three undervoltage protection functions in REF 542plus, which can be
activated and parameters set independently of one another. See the following
figures.
A051017
Fig. 6.2.2.-1 Undervoltage instantaneous
A051018
Fig. 6.2.2.-2 Undervoltage high
A051019
Fig. 6.2.2.-3 Undervoltage low

state). It means that all the output pins go low generating the required events (if any)
and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function will then
remain in idle state until the BS signal goes low.
159
Unit
Protection manual

activated when respective phase (line) voltage start conditions are true (voltage falls
below the setting threshold value).
The TRIP signal will be activated when at least for a phase voltage the start
A051020
160
Unit
Protection manual
A051021
The protection functions can operate on any combination of phase (or line) voltages
in a triple, for example, it can operate as single phase, double phase or three-phase
A051022
161
Unit
Protection manual
Start Value: Voltage threshold for undervoltage condition detection.

Time: Time delay for undervoltage Trip condition detection.
A051023
A051024
Fig. 6.2.2.2.-5 Pins
Undervoltage protection functions evaluate the phase or line voltage RMS value at
162
Unit
Protection manual
If the measured voltage falls below the setting threshold value (Start Value), the
undervoltage protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective. It
means that when at least the value of one phase voltage is below the setting
threshold value the relevant start signal will be activated.
all the phases the voltage raises above 1.05 the setting threshold value. After the
The undervoltage protection functions are used in a graded coordination. An

example of staging is shown in the following diagram.
A051025
Fig. 6.2.2.4.-1 Undervoltage protection response stages
163
Unit
Protection manual
6.2.2.5. Behavior at low voltage values
A051026
Fig. 6.2.2.5.-1 Under Voltage
Because a de-energized feeder has no voltage, an undervoltage protection function

remains activated. It is not be possible then to switch the feeder on again.
Therefore, the Under Voltage configuration dialog provides the option of

deactivating the undervoltage protection functions when the voltage is in the range 0
to 40% of the setting voltage threshold (Start Value).
The diagrams below shows how this feature works when the “lowest voltage = 0”
flag is checked:
A051027
Fig. 6.2.2.5.-2 Configuration of the undervoltage limit = 0
If 40% is considered too high, the undervoltage function can also be blocked, for
example, through the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact by connecting a signal (high
at CB open) to the BS input pin inside FUPLA.
164
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the undervoltage protection
functions.

lowest voltage = used/not - not used When “used” the U< functions
0 used used are active below the 0.4 Start
Value
Start Value U<, 0.1 ... 1.20 Un 0.50 Voltage threshold for Start
U<< condition detection.
Start Value U<<< 0.1 ... 1.20 Un 0.50 Voltage threshold for Start

Code Event reason
E18 Protection block signal is active state
6.2.3. Residual overvoltage protection
There are two residual overvoltage protection functions in REF 542plus, which can
be independently activated and parameterized. See the following figures.
A051029
Fig. 6.2.3.-1 Residual overvoltage high
165
Unit
Protection manual
A051030
Fig. 6.2.3.-2 Residual overvoltage low

state). This means that, all the output pins go low generating the required events (if

The Start signal will be activated when the measured or calculated residual voltage
exceeds the setting threshold value (Start Value).
The TRIP signal will be activated when the start condition is true and the operating
time (Time) has elapsed.
166
Unit
Protection manual
A051031
A051032
The protection functions can operate on residual voltage measured through a

dedicated sensor (for example, open delta connected voltage transformers) or
calculated from the voltage phase (line) components in a triple.
167
Unit
Protection manual
A051033

UNe Voltage threshold for residual overvoltage condition detection
Time: Time delay for residual overvoltage Trip condition detection
A051034
168
Unit
Protection manual
A051035
Fig. 6.2.3.2.-5 Pins
Residual overvoltage protection functions evaluate the residual voltage at the

If the measured voltage exceeds the setting threshold value (UNe), the residual
overvoltage protection function is started.
cleared if the voltage falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value.
has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated.
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the residual overvoltage protection
functions.
169
Unit
Protection manual

UNe 0.10 ... 3.00 Un 0.50 Voltage threshold for Start

Code Event reason
E0 Start started
E1 Start back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
6.3. Motor protection
The protection functions described in the following subsections are provided for
protection of the motor from overloads and faults.
6.3.1. Thermal overload protection
REF 542plus has one thermal overload protection function.
A050780
Fig. 6.3.1.-1 Thermal overload protection
170
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.3.1.1.-1 Inputs

RST Trigger signal (active low-to-high) Reset signal
When the reset input pin (RST) is triggered, the estimated motor temperature is set
to the parameter value Trst (Reset Temperature Trst).

Warn Digital signal (active high) Warning signal
Overheat Digital signal (active high) Overheat signal
Sensor Error Digital signal (active high) Error on RTD (used with 0 ... 20ma
input)
The Warn signal will be activated when the calculated temperature exceeds the
setting threshold value (Twarn).
The Trip signal will be activated when the calculated temperature exceeds the
setting threshold value (Ttrip).
The Overheat signal will be activated when the calculated temperature exceeds the
setting threshold value Nominal Motor Temperature (TMn).
The Sensor Error signal will be activated when the external environment
temperature (Tenv) sensor use is set and its failure is detected.
171
Unit
Protection manual
A050781
A050782
The protection function operates on any combination of phase currents in a triple,

172
Unit
Protection manual
An external sensor connected to the 4-20 mA Analog Input can directly measure the
environment temperature. When it is used, it is automatically selected and displayed
in the General dialog.
A050783

Nominal Motor Temperature (TMn): Nominal Motor Temperature,
asymptotically reached at IMn with
environment temperature Tenv
Nominal Motor Current (IMn): Nominal Motor current for operational
condition detection
Initial Temperature (Tini): Initial motor temperature at protection
initialasing
Time Constant Off: Time constant for cooling down
Time Constant Normal: Time constant for motor operational
condition
Time Constant Overheat: Time constant for overload condition
173
Unit
Protection manual
A050784

Trip Temperature (Ttrip): Temperature threshold for trip condition
Warning Temperature (Twarn): Temperature threshold for warning
condition
Environment Temperature (Tenv): Ambient temperature
Reset Temperature (Trst): Initial (i.e. after reset by RST input PIN)
motor temperature
A050785
174
Unit
Protection manual
A050786
Fig. 6.3.1.2.-6 Pins
Thermal overload protection function evaluates the square average of phase currents
at the fundamental frequency. The instantaneous temperature estimation is based on
the average of the phase currents monitored.
The environment temperature can either be set in the Parameter dialog (Tenv) or
measured through as external sensor and a 4-20 mA Analog Input. In case of an
external measure failure the set parameter Tenv is used as backup.
The thermal overload protection function estimates the instantaneous value of motor
temperature.
If the estimated instantaneous temperature exceeds the first setting threshold value
(Twarn), the protection function enters the START status and generates a
WARNING signal.
If the estimated instantaneous temperature exceeds the second setting threshold

value, the protection function generates a TRIP signal.
If the estimated instantaneous temperature exceeds the setting threshold value

(Nominal Motor Temperature TMn), the protection function generates an
overheat signal.
The protection function will exit the START status and come back in passive status.
The start signal will be cleared if the estimated temperature falls below the setting
threshold value Twarn.
175
Unit
Protection manual
when the estimated temperature falls below the setting threshold value Ttrip.
The protection function avoids also reconnection after a trip of overheated machines
until the estimated motor temperature falls below the warning temperature Twarn
(according to calculated motor cooling process, based on Time Constant OFF).
When the thermal overload protection is instantiated the motor temperature can be
estimated. Therefore, after a trip for maximum number of starts, an overheated
motor cannot be reconnected until its temperature has fallen below the warning
temperature (Twarn). Therefore, the time to decrement the number of start counters
will be the maximum between the setting time interval (Reset Time, t rst) and
the motor cooling-down time estimation.
If the protection function is reset by means of the reset input pin (RST), the
estimated motor temperature will be set to value Trst (Reset Temperature).
6.3.1.5. Thermal memory at power-down
At power-down, REF 542plus saves the estimated motor temperature (T) and at
subsequent power-up is able to estimate the new motor temperature, under the
hypothesis that the motor was cooling in the meantime (that is the timeconstant OFF
is used).
Two parameter sets can be configured for the thermal overload protection function.

Nominal Motor 50 ... 400 °C 100 Motor temperature at rated
Temperature (TMn) condition
Nominal Motor Current 0.1 ... 5.0 In 1.0 Current for operational mode (τ)
(IMn) detection
Initial Temperature 10 ... 400 °C 50 Initial temperature after Reset
(Tini) Signal at BS
Constant Off 10 ... 100000 s 500 Cooling time constant
(I < 0.1 x IMn)
Time Constant Normal 10 ... 20000 s 500 Time constant under normal load
condition
Time Constant 10 ... 20000 s 500 Time constant under overload
Overheat (I > 2 x IMn) condition
Trip Temperature 50 ... 400 °C 100 Temperature threshold for Trip
(Ttrip) condition
176
Unit
Protection manual

Warning Temperature 50 ... 400 °C 100 Temperature threshold for warn
(Twarn) condition
Environment 10 ... 50 °C 20 Ambient Temperature
Temperature (Tenv)
Reset Temperature 10 ... 400 °C 100 Initial (after reset by RST PIN)
(Trst) motor temperature

Code Event reason
E1 Warning signal is back to inactive state
E16 Overheat signal is active
E17 Overheat signal is back to inactive state
E20 Reset input signal is active
E21 Reset input signal is back to inactive state
E22 Sensor error is active
E23 Sensor error is back to inactive state
6.3.2. Motor start protection
REF 542plus has one motor start protection function.
A050787
Fig. 6.3.2.-1 Motor start protection
177
Unit
Protection manual


The Start signal will be activated when the current exceeds 10% motor nominal
current value IMn and within 100 ms the setting threshold value (Motor Start
IMs).
calculated current-time integration (Is2 x Time) is exceed.
The Block Output (BO) signal becomes active at protection initialization until when
the current exceeds 10% motor nominal current value IMn.
A050788
178
Unit
Protection manual
Output Channel different from 0 means direct execution of the trip command, that is
A050789
A050790
179
Unit
Protection manual
Nominal Motor Current (IMn): Nominal Motor current for operational condition
detection
Start Value (Is): Motor start current for Trip condition detection (start
energy integral I2t)
Time: Time for Trip condition detection
Motor Start (IMs): Current threshold for motor start condition detection
A050791
A050792
Fig. 6.3.2.2.-5 Pins
180
Unit
Protection manual
Motor start protection function evaluates the current at the fundamental frequency.
The maximum measured motor current IRMS_max is used to detect Start and Trip
conditions.
The motor start behavior depends on the switching torque of the specific machine
load. The manufacturer assigns an allowable current-time start integral I2t for motors
or, as an alternative, information on the maximum allowable start current and the
maximum allowable start time is provided.
A motor start is detected if:

* The maximum measured motor current exceeds 0.10 the setting threshold value
nominal motor current (Nominal Motor Current IMn)
* Within 100 ms later the measured motor current exceeds the setting motor start
detection (Motor Start IMs).When a motor start is detected the protection is
started, the start signal is activated and the current-time integral
∫ i(t ) dt
2
(19)
is calculated.
cleared if the maximum motor current falls below 0.95 the setting motor start
detection threshold value (IMs). At that time, calculation of current-time integral is
stopped.
After the protection has entered the start status and the calculated current-time
integration exceeds the default
I s2 ⋅ T (20)
value, where:
* Is is Start current parameter (Start Value Is)
* T is Time parameter (Time)
the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated.
when the measured current value falls below 0.95 the setting motor start detection
threshold value (IMs).
181
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the motor start protection function.

Nominal Motor 0.20 ... 2.00 In 1.00 Motor nominal current for Start
Current (IMn) condition
Start Value (Is) 1.00 ... 20.00 IMn 1.00 Trip condition detection (integral I2t)
Time 40 ... 300000 ms 10000 Time for integral Trip condition
Motor Start (IMs) 0.20 ... 0.80 Is 0.70 Current threshold for Start condition

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
6.3.3. Blocking rotor
A050793
Fig. 6.3.3.-1 Blocking rotor
182
Unit
Protection manual

then remain in idle state until the BS signal goes low. This input can be assigned to
the speed indicator signal (tachometer generator or a speed switch).

activated when respective phase current start conditions are true (one phase current
exceeds Start Value Is).
A050794
183
Unit
Protection manual
A050795
The protection function operates on any combination of phase currents in a triple,

A050796
184
Unit
Protection manual
Nominal Motor Current (IMn): Nominal Motor current

Start Value (Is): Current threshold for motor start condition
detection
Time: Time delay for Trip condition detection
A050797
A050798
Fig. 6.3.3.2.-5 Pins
185
Unit
Protection manual
Blocking rotor protection function evaluates the current at the fundamental

frequency. It operates like an overcurrent protection function.
The blocking rotor protective function is used to detect a locked rotor condition by
sensing the current increase arising from the loss of synchronism between the rotor
revolving and phase voltages.
It can be used to monitor the starting characteristics of three-phase asynchronous

motors to check whether the rotor braking is on and other conditions preventing the
motor to speed up. If this malfunction occurs, the starting current would flow
permanently and the motor would be thermally overloaded.
The blocking rotor protection function can be blocked on the BS input. The
blocking input can be provided by a speed switch or by the start signal output from
the motor start protection function.
A tachometer generator or a speed switch is used to send a defined signal at a

specified speed. If the rotor of the monitored motor is locked, the missing speed
signal will ensure that the overcurrent function in the protective function will
continue to remain active.
The protection function can also be used without a speed signal by using the start
signal output from the motor start protection function to block it during the motor
starting phase. When the motor start condition is detected the blocking rotor
function is blocked by the BS input.
If the measured current exceeds the setting motor starting threshold value (Start
Value, Is), the protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective It
means that when at least the value of one phase current is above the setting threshold
value the relevant start signal will be activated (SL 1-3).
all the phases the current falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value. After the
Two parameter sets can be configured for the blocking rotor protection functions.
186
Unit
Protection manual

Nominal Motor 0.20 ... 2.00 In 1.00 Nominal Motor current
Current IMn
Start Value Is 1.00 ... 20.00 Imn 1.00 Current threshold for motor start
condition detection
Time 40 ... 30000 ms 10000 Time delay for Trip condition detection

Code Event reason
6.3.4. Number of starts
REF 542plus has an additional motor protection function that supervizes the number
of motor starts. It distinguishes between the cold and warm starts, the allowable
number which is generally provided by the motor manufacturer. The starting signal
(Start output) of the motor start protection function is used to count the starts.
A050799
Fig. 6.3.4.-1 Number of starts
187
Unit
Protection manual

SI Trigger signal (active high) Motor start signal
The SI signal is used to provide to the number of start function the start signal
output from the motor start protection function by wiring the connection in FUPLA.
It is used to count the motor number of starts.

Warn Digital signal (active high) Warning signal
The Warn signal will be activated when the cold (or warm) starts counter reaches the
setting threshold value maximum number of starts (Ncs and Nws respectively).
The TRIP signal will be activated when the cold (or warm) starts counter exceeds
the setting threshold value maximum number of starts (Ncs and Nws respectively).
A050800
188
Unit
Protection manual
A050801

Max Num. of Warm Starts (Nws): Motor manufacturer declared N° of starts above
temperature threshold Tws
Max Num. of Cold Starts (Ncs): Motor manufacturer declared N° of starts below
temperature threshold Tws
Reset Time (t rst): Cooling down motor time; time to dissipate the
heat of a motor start
Warm Start Temp. Threshold (Tws): Above Tws temperature thereshold a start is
assumed to be warm
189
Unit
Protection manual
A050802
A050803
Fig. 6.3.4.2.-4 Pins
Number of starts protection function supervizes the motor number of starts. The
starting signal of motor start protection function is used to count starts.
It is also important to distinguish between the cold and warm starts, the allowable
number of which is generally provided by the motor manufacturer.
190
Unit
Protection manual
Motor temperature estimated by the thermal overload function is used to determine

whether a start is cold or a warm. When the thermal overload function is not
instantiated, a cold start is assumed.
If thermal overload protection is not enabled, the estimated machine temperature is

not available and the warm counter is not increased (the warm counter is frozen to
zero). In this case, all the counted starts are classified as cold.
When the thermal overload protection is enabled the estimated motor temperature is
compared with the setting temperature threshold (Warm Start Temp.
Threshold Tws). Above Tws temperature thereshold a start is assumed to be
warm, below it is assumed to be a cold start.
At every motor start (detected by the motor start protection function), depending on
the type of start (warm or cold start) the related counter is incremented by one unit.
At every warm start, both the warm counter and the cold counter are incremented.
Cold starts to increment only the cold counter.
If no start has occurred after the setting time interval (Reset Time, t rst) it is
assumed that the motor had time to cool down and both the cold and warm start
counters are decremented by one unit.
If the preset number of warm (Max Num. of Warm Starts, Nws) or respectively
of cold starts (Max Num. of Cold Starts, Ncs) is reached, the protection
function is started and the relevant warning signal will be activated. If there is
another start, the protection function will enter the TRIP status and the trip signal
will be activated.
If the protection function is in TRIP status and the above condition is satisfied, the
protection function will exit the trip status and the trip signal will be cleared. The
protection function is in TRIP status and the trip signal remains active until the reset
period t rst has expired. Then both cold and warm start counters are decremented
and the trip signal will be cleared.
The protection function will exit START status, come back in passive status and the
start signal will be cleared, if the cold and warm counters fall below the respective
maximum setting values Ncs and Nws, that is after the reset period t rst has expired.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the number of starts protection functions.
191
Unit
Protection manual

Max num. of warm 1 ... 10 - 1 Number of starts above Tws
starts (Nws)
Max num. of cold 1 ... 10 - 1 Number of starts below Tws
starts (Ncs)
Reset time (t rst) 1.00 ... s 30.00 Time to cool down after a start
7200.00
Warm start temp. 20 ... 200 °C 80 Temperature threshold to define a
threshold (Tws) warm start

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
E15 Warning signal is back to inactive state
6.4. Distance protection
The distance protection is dedicated to protect a meshed medium-voltage system or

a simple high-voltage system.
A050804
Fig. 6.4.-1 Distance protection
192
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.4.1.-1 Inputs

SIGNAL COMP Digital signal (active high) Signal comparison scheme
When the BL signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its
then remain in idle state until the BL signal goes low.
Table 6.4.1.-2 Outputs

< Z1 Digital signal (active high) Z1 signal used for signal
comparison
START L1 Digital signal (active high) Start signal in L1
EARTH START Digital signal (active high) Start Earth signal
GENERAL START Digital signal (active high) General start signal
193
Unit
Protection manual
A050805
skipping FUPLA cycle evaluation.
194
Unit
Protection manual
A050806
Fig. 6.4.2.-2 Start values
A050807
Fig. 6.4.2.-3 Zones
195
Unit
Protection manual
A050808
Fig. 6.4.2.-4 Zone 1
A050809
Fig. 6.4.2.-5 Zone 2
196
Unit
Protection manual
A050831
Fig. 6.4.2.-6 Zone 3
A050832
Fig. 6.4.2.-7 Zone overreach
197
Unit
Protection manual
A050833
Fig. 6.4.2.-8 Zone autoreclose (control)
A050834
Fig. 6.4.2.-9 Directional backup
198
Unit
Protection manual
A050835
Fig. 6.4.2.-10 Non-directional backup
A050836
Fig. 6.4.2.-11 Phase selection
199
Unit
Protection manual
A050837
Fig. 6.4.2.-12 Parameters earth factors
A050838
6.4.3. Operation mode
The distance protection comprises the following subordinate functions:

* Start
* Impedance determination
* Directional memory
* Tripping logic
200
Unit
Protection manual
To run the protection function, the phase currents and the phase voltages
measurement quantities are required. The phase currents and the phase voltages are
arranged in consecutive groups of three. The following combinations can be
configured:
* Measuring input 1,2,3: current signals; measuring input 4,5,6: voltage signals in
phase L1, L2, L3
* Measuring input 1,2,3: voltage signals; measuring input 4,5,6: current signals in
phase L1, L2, L3
The start function is intended to check for the presence of a system failure and to
detect the type of the fault. The appropriate measured quantities for determining the
impedance and the directional decision are selected depending on the type of system
fault. Once the direction and the zone of the system fault have been determined, the
tripping logic is used to determine the trip time in accordance with the set
impedance time characteristic.
A signal comparison protection scheme, which enables to protect a very short line
selectively, is also integrated. This requires pilot wires for signal exchange.
For the network operation, it is important to localize the fault as soon as possible
after the system fault has been switched off in order to repair the damage. Because
the medium-voltage networks are usually spread over wide areas, fault-tracking
information in km or in reactive ohm is desirable for network operation after the
system fault has been tripped. For this reason, the fault locator, which can derive the
fault distance from the measured fault impedance, is also implemented in the
distance protection. It calculates the distance in km to the fault from the nominal
value of the cable reactance.
The requirement of current transformers for distance protection must

be fulfilled. Otherwise the proper function behavior can not be assure.
Besides, the fault locator would not be in position to display the correct
value.
Once the system fault has been switched off, it may also be of interest for the system
operator to carry out a fault analysis from a disturbance recorder and the sequences
of the appearance of the signaling events. The fault recorder function can be started
either by an external signal (via a binary input) or by a signal from the distance
protection. The general start or the trip signal can be used for this purpose.
If the fault recorder is started by the general start signal, the system quantities will be
recorded. However, a correct fault reactance can only be detected if the fault is in the
first protection zone. Therefore, it is recommended to start the fault recorder by a
trip signal.
The option of switching the distance protection over to the overcurrent protection
shall normally be provided. This procedure is generally referred to the so-called
emergency overcurrent protection and is required if the voltage measurement
201
Unit
Protection manual
quantities do not exist anymore, for example due to an MCB failure. Detailed
information regarding to the operation principle and the calculation of the setting
parameter can be found in the related application note.
Table 6.4.5.-1 General parameter

Net type: high ohmic, low ohmic
Used sensors: I: 1-3; U: 4-6 or I: 4-6; U: 1-3
Earth start: IE> used or IE> unused (residual current)
Switching onto normal behavior, overreach zone used or trip after occurrence of
faults: general start signal
Signal Comp. 30 … 30,000 ms (set 1/set 2), default 30 ms
Time:
Table 6.4.5.-2 Start values

I> 0.05 ... 4.00 In 1.00 Phase current high set
IN> 0.05 ... 4.00 In 0.20 Residual current
UF 0.05 ... 0.90 Un 0.50 Phase or line voltage (net
type)
IF> 0.05 ... 4 In 0.50 Phase current low set
Table 6.4.5.-3 Choose zone

Cable reactance 0.05 ... 120 Ohm/ 1
km
OH line reactance 0.05 ... 120 Ohm/ 1
km
Border OH/cable 0.05 ... 120 Ohm 1
Type of transmission line only cable, only OH line, OH line before cable or cable
before OH line
Table 6.4.5.-4 Zone 1, 2, 3, Zone Overreach, Autoreclose (border)

Resistance R 0.05 ... 120 Ohm 1
Reactance X 0.05 ... 120 Ohm 1
Angle delta 1 -45 ... 0 ° 0
Angle delta 2 90 ... 135 ° 90
Time 20 ... 10000 ms 20
Direction forward, - zone un-used
backward or zone
unused
202
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.4.5.-5 Directional backup

Angle delta 1 -45 ... 0 ° 0
Angle delta 2 90 ... 135 ° 90
Time 20 ... 10000 ms 20
Direction forward, - zone un-used
backward or zone
unused
Table 6.4.5.-6 Non-directional backup

Time 20 ... 10000 ms 20
Table 6.4.5.-7 Phase selection

Parameter Trip Selection
Normal acycle L3 - L1 - L2
Normal cycle L3 - L1 - L2 - L3
Inverse acycle L1 - L3 - L2
Inverse cycle L3 - L2 - L1 - L3
Table 6.4.5.-8 Earth factor

Factor k 0 ... 10
Angle k -60 ... 60 °

Code Event reason
E0 Start L1 started
E1 Start L1 back
E2 Start L2 started
E3 Start L2 back
E4 Start L3 started
E5 Start L3 back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
E16 Z1< started
E17 Z1< back
E22 General start started
E23 General start back
E24 Earth start started
E25 Earth start back
E28 Signal comparison started
E29 Signal comparison back
203
Unit
Protection manual
6.5. Differential protection
6.5.1. Transformer Differential Protection
Differential protection can be used to protect power transformers, motors and

generators. The protection function has the following properties:
* Differential protection of two windings power transformer
* Amplitude and vector group adaptation
* Zero sequence current compensation
* Three-fold tripping characteristic
* Inrush stabilization by 2nd and 5th harmonics
* Stabilization during through-faults also in case of current transformers (CT)
saturation
A050849
Fig. 6.5.1.-1 Transformer Differential Protection

When BS signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its state),
i.e. all output pins go low generating the required events (if any) and all internal
registers and timers are cleared. The protection function will then remain in idle
state until BS signal goes low.

BH2 Digital signal (active high) Block by 2nd harmonic signal
BH5 Digital signal (active high) Block by 5th harmonic signal
GB Digital signal (active high) General Block output signal
The TRIP signal will be activated when at least one of the calculated differential
currents Id exceeds the bias-dependent setting threshold value AND if the harmonic
stabilization is enabled, the harmonic content of differential current is below the set
thresholds (2nd ,5thThreshold).
204
Unit
Protection manual
When the harmonic stabilization is enabled, the Block Output (BH2, BH5) signals
become active if the protection function detects a differential current exceeding the
preset threshold and the harmonic content of differential current is above the set
thresholds (2nd ,5thThreshold).
A050850
Output Channel different from 0 means direct execution of the trip command (that is
skipping FUPLA cyclic evaluation).
205
Unit
Protection manual
A050851
Transformer differential protection requires 6 current sensors; it operates on two sets

of phase currents in a triple on primary and secondary side of the transformer.
A050852
Fig. 6.5.1.2.-3 Transformer
206
Unit
Protection manual
A050853
Fig. 6.5.1.2.-4 Current

Primary nominal current: Nominal transformer current on primary
side.
Secondary nominal current: Nominal transformer current on secondary
side, to be used for power transformer ratio
compensation.
All the Differential protection thresholds are referred the Rated power
transformer current Ir (p.u) in per unit; i.e. normalized on the primary
or secondary nominal power transformer current (Primary,
Secondary nominal current). In this way all differences due to
CT ratios and board transformer analog input are automatically
normalized.
Threshold current: First region Id threshold.

Unbiased region limit: First region Ib threshold.
Slightly biased region threshold: Second region Id threshold.
Slightly biased region limit: Second region Ib threshold.
Heavily biased slope: Third region slope.
Trip by Id>: Upper Id threshold for Trip condition
detection.
207
Unit
Protection manual
A050854
Fig. 6.5.1.2.-5 Harmonics
2nd, 5th Harmonic
Threshold: Threshold value for 2nd, 5th harmonic content detection.

Block: Flag enabling the harmonic content detection. When threshold
value is exceeded it blocks the protection function and
generates a blocking signal.
A050855
208
Unit
Protection manual
A050856
Fig. 6.5.1.2.-7 Pins
Differential protection function evaluates the measured amount of differential

current at the fundamental, 2nd and 5th harmonic frequencies.
Transformer differential protection is a current comparison scheme for the

protection of a component with two sides, like for example two windings power
transformer, therefore the incoming and outgoing currents through the component to
be protected are compared with each other.
If no fault exists in the protection zone, the incoming current and the outgoing
current are identical.
Therefore the difference between those currents, the differential current Id, is used
as criteria for fault detection. The protection zone of transformer differential
protection is limited by the place where the current transformers or current sensors
are installed.
The signals path and the measurement processing to obtain the differential current Id
sed as criteria for fault detection are described in the following flowchart:
209
Unit
Protection manual
A050857
Fig. 6.5.1.4.-1 The signals path and the measurement processing
After transformer ratio compensation and vector group adaptation the bias and
differential currents are calculated on the three phases.
If harmonic stabilization is enabled (in “Harmonic” dialog window), 2nd and/or 5th
harmonic contents of differential currents are calculated.
210
Unit
Protection manual
If at least one of the calculated differential currents Id is above the bias (of the
considered phase) dependent setting threshold (given by the tripping characteristic,
Threshold current, Slightly biased region threshold,
Heavily biased slope or Trip by Id>), then (if required) the check for
harmonic stabilization is performed.
If harmonic content of differential current Id is above the set threshold (2nd

,5thThreshold), then the protection function will be blocked and the relevant
Block signal will be activated, else it goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is
generated. The Block of the protection function with the corresponding signal
generation will appear, if the Id harmonic content exceeds the setting threshold
value for the 2nd and the 5th. harmonics.
The protection function will remain in TRIP status if there is at least one differential
current above the threshold. It will come back in passive status and the Trip signal
will be cleared if for all the phases the differential current falls below 0.4 the setting
threshold value. To perform the current comparison, it is necessary to correct the
amplitude of the currents to compensate the transformer ratio. The amplitude
correction is done by software. In the case of power transformer protection for
example, the current measurement quantities on the primary and the secondary side
are corrected by taking into account the different nominal values of the sensors and
primary/secondary nominal current parameters.
6.5.1.5. Tripping characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the transformer differential protection function is a

three-fold characteristic. In the following figure the characteristic is shown.
A050858
Fig. 6.5.1.5.-1 Tripping characteristic of the transformer differential protection

function
211
Unit
Protection manual
The tripping characteristic is drawn on p.u. basis after normalization of I1 and I2

currents on on the primary or secondary nominal power transformer current
(Primary, Secondary nominal current). Therefore Id and Ib currents are
expressed in p.u. as multiples of the Rated power transformer current Ir (p.u).
The bias currents are defined as the average values (in p.u.) between primary and
secondary currents obtained after transformation ratio compensation and vector
group adaptation.
Due to the measurement error of the current quantities on both sides of the object to
be protected, a small differential current Id will occur during normal operation
condition.
The first fold of the characteristic curve is given by the settable threshold value of
the differential current (Threshold current) and the bias current limit
(Unbiased region limit).
The second fold of the characteristic curve is defined by the threshold value of the
differential current (Slightly biased region threshold) and the bias
current limit (Slightly biased region limit).
Afterwards a line with a selectable slope (Heavily biased slope) continues

the characteristic.
In case of the occurrence of a high differential current, a direct tripping can also be
generated by the threshold value (Trip by Id>) as the third fold of the tripping
characteristic. The setting value should be selected in such a way, that no tripping
could happen during the energizing of the power transformer.
6.5.1.6. Inrush stabilization
When switching on a power transformer without the connected loads, a high inrush
current might occur. As consequence, there could be some unwanted tripping
To stabilize this condition of the power transformer the presence of the 2nd harmonic
in the differential current can be used as criteria. Therefore the ratio of the 2nd
harmonic current to the current at fundamental frequency is important. As soon as
the threshold value (threshold) is exceeded, the protection function is blocked
and a blocking signal is activated.
In case of switching on a power transformer in parallel without the connected loads,

the inrush current can also be generated in the transformer which is already in
operation. In this case, it is necessary to detect the 5th harmonic in the differential
current to avoid the undesired tripping.
For that reason, the differential protection in REF 542plus is foreseen with the 2nd
and the 5th harmonic blocking possibilities, which can be set separately from each
other.
212
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the transformer differential protection
function.

Transformer group 0 ... 11 - 0 Parameters for vector group
Transformer adaptation and transformation
earthing: ratio compensation between
primary - secondary currents.
Primary side Yes/No - No
Secondary side Yes/No - No
Primary nominal 10 ... 100000 A 100
current
Secondary nominal 10 ... 100000 A 100
current
Threshold current 0.10 ... 0.50 Ir (p.u.) 0.20 First region Id threshold.
Unbiased region 0.50 ... 5.00 Ir (p.u.) 0.50 First region Ib threshold.
limit
Slightly biased 0.20 ... 2.00 Ir (p.u.) 0.20 Second region Id threshold.
region threshold
Slightly biased 1.00 ... 10.00 Ir (p.u.) 3.00 Second region Ib threshold.
region limit
Heavily biased 0.40 ... 1.00 - 0.40 Third region slope.
region slope
Trip by Id> 5.00 ... 40.00 Ir (p.u.) 6.00 Upper Id threshold for Trip.
Second harmonic:
Threshold 0.10 ... 0.30 Id 0.30 Stabilization against no load
block Enabled/ - Enabled transformer inrush current
Disabled
Fifth harmonic:
Threshold 0.10 ... 0.30 Id 0.30 Stabilization against
block Enabled/ - Enabled transformer overexitation
Disabled current

Code Event reason
E18 Protection block signal is in active state
E19 Protection block signal is back to inactive
E20 Block signal due to the 2nd harmonic is active
E21 Block signal due to the 2nd harmonic back to inactive
E24 Block signal due to the 5th harmonic is active
E25 Block signal due to the 5th harmonic is back to inactive
E26 General block harmonic start
E27 General block harmonic back
213
Unit
Protection manual
6.5.2. Restricted differential protection
Restricted differential protection can be used as restricted earth fault protection to

detect and disconnect a fault in the grounding system of the transformer.
A050859
Fig. 6.5.2.-1 Restricted differential protection


The Start signal will be activated when the differential current Id exceeds the setting
threshold value.
The TRIP signal will be activated when the start and trip conditions are true and the
214
Unit
Protection manual
A050860
A050861
215
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function operates on the comparison of two neutral currents; the
zero-sequence current calculated by means of current measures acquired from the
lines (on any set of phase currents in a triple), and the measured earth-fault current
flowing through the neutral conductor towards the ground. The protection is used in
case of star windings with earthed neutral transformers.
A050862
A050864
216
Unit
Protection manual
Rated current: Rated current for CT ratio compensation

and currents normalization
Unbiased region threshold: First region Id threshold
Unbiased region limit: First region Ib threshold
Slightly biased region threshold: Second region Id threshold
Slightly biased region limit: Second region Ib threshold
Heavily biased slope: Third region slope
Relay Operate Angle: Directional criteria
Time: Time delay for trip condition detection
A050865
217
Unit
Protection manual
A050866
Fig. 6.5.2.2.-6 Pins
The restricted differential protection function evaluates the differential current

between two neutral currents at the fundamental frequency.
The two currents can be the calculated or measured residual current I0 from the
phase currents compared with the neutral current IG in the transformer restricted
earth-fault application, in case of line differential protection, the neutral currents of
each end of the line (I1.and I2).
The restricted differential protection is a current comparison scheme. Therefore, the

incoming and outgoing currents, through the object to be protected, are compared
with each other. If no fault exists in the protection zone, the incoming current and
the outgoing current are identical. That is why the difference between those currents,
the differential current Id = I0 - IG = I2 - I1, is used as criteria for fault detection.
The protection zone of the restricted differential protection is limited by the place
where the current transformers or current sensors are installed.
If the calculated differential current Id is above the bias-dependent setting threshold

(given by the tripping characteristic, Unbiased region threshold,
Slightly biased region threshold or Heavily biased slope),
protection function is started and the Start signal will be activated.
cleared, if the differential current Id falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value.
218
Unit
Protection manual
If the start conditions are true then the following conditions are checked:
Direction. The directional check is made only if I0 is more than 3% of the rated
current (Rated current Ir). If the result of the check means “external fault”, the
trip is not issued. If the directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no
longer a condition for a trip.
External fault. For as long as the external fault persists (flag enabled in passive
condition only, for Id< 0.5 the lower setting threshold and IG> 0.5 the Rated
current Ir), an additional temporary condition is introduced, which requires that
IG has to be higher than 0.5 Ir for protection temporarily desensitization.
Bias. The bias current Ib is above 0.5 the maximum bias current calculated during
the start condition period. Ibtrip > 0.5 Ibmax (start period).
(Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is generated
if all the above conditions are true.
The protection function will exit TRIP status to come back in passive status and the
Trip signal will be cleared, if the differential current Id falls below 0.4 the setting
threshold value.
6.5.2.5. Tripping characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the restricted differential protection function is a three-

fold characteristic. In Fig. 6.5.2.5.-1 the characteristic is shown.
A050867
Fig. 6.5.2.5.-1 Tripping characteristic
The tripping characteristic is drawn on p.u. basis after normalization of I1 and I2

currents on power transformer rated current (Rated current Ir).
219
Unit
Protection manual
The bias current is per definition always the one with the higher magnitude, Ib =
max (IG, I0) or Ib = max (I1, I2).
After the compensation of different sensor nominal values, the differential current Id
and the bias current Ib are calculated.
The first fold of the characteristic curve is given by the settable threshold value of
the differential current (Unbiased region threshold) and the bias current
limit (Unbiased region limit).
The second fold of the characteristic curve is defined by the threshold value of the
differential current (Slightly biased region threshold) and the bias
current limit (Slightly biased region limit).
Afterwards a line with a selectable slope (Heavily biased slope) continues the
characteristic.
In case of an external fault characterized from a high fault current, it could happen
that the different CTs do not transform the primary current the same way (even if
they have the same characteristics), allowing the circulation of a differential current
through the protection.
The tripping characteristic allows facing CT introduced error (for example due to
phase and ratio error, different CT load or magnetic properties), without decreasing
the sensitivity of the differential protection. In fact, in case of high line currents and
high ground current, the higher differential current threshold compensates such an
error even if there are differences about the I0 and IG transformation.
6.5.2.6. Directional criterion for stabilization against CT saturation
Earth faults on lines connecting the power transformer occur much more often than
earth faults on a power transformer winding. It is important therefore that the
restricted earth fault protection should remain secure during an external fault and
immediately after the fault has been cleared by some other protection.
The directional criterion is applied in order to distinguish between internal and

external earth faults in case of CT saturation, to prevent misoperations at heavy
external earth faults. This criterion is applicable is the residual current I0 is at least
3% Ir.
For an external earth fault with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines I0
and the neutral current IG are equal in magnitude and phase. The current in the
neutral IG is used as directional reference because it flows for all earth faults in the
same direction.
To stabilize the behavior against CT saturation, a phase comparison scheme is

introduced. In case of a heavy current fault with saturation of one or more CT, the
measured currents IG and I0 may no more be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be the same, and a certain value of false differential current Id can
appear.
220
Unit
Protection manual
If the fault is inside of the protection zone, the currents to be compared must have a
phase shift to each other. That is why a so-called relay operate angle ROA (Relay
Operating Angle) is introduced, like shown in Fig. 6.5.2.6.-1. The direction of
neutral current is inside the ROA, if it is an internal fault. The direction of both
current is outside the ROA for external faults.
A050868
Fig. 6.5.2.6.-1 Currents at an external earth fault with CTs saturation
In case of an internal fault, the I0 lies into the operate area for internal fault and the
protection is allowed to operate, see Fig. 6.5.2.6.-2.
A050869
Fig. 6.5.2.6.-2 Currents at an internal earth fault
221
Unit
Protection manual
ROA can be taken out of operation by setting it to 180°, if no CT saturation has to

be considered.
In case the restricted differential is used for the line application, the same
considerations apply by using I1 and I2 neutral currents.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the restricted differential protection
function.

Reference 1 ... 100000 A 100 Reference current for CT ratio
nominal current compensation/ currents normalization.
Unbiased region 0.05 ... 0.50 Ir 0.30 First region Id threshold.
threshold
Unbiased region 0.01 ... 1.00 Ir 0.50 First region Ib threshold.
limit
Slightly biased 0.01 ... 2.00 - 0.70 Second region Id threshold.
region slope
Slightly biased 0.01 ... 2.00 Ir 1.25 Second region Ib threshold.
region limit
Heavily biased 0.10 ... 1.00 - 1.00 Third region slope.
region slope
Relay operate 60 ... 180 ° 75 Directional criteria.
angle
Time 0.04 ... s 0.05 Time delay for trip condition detection.
100.00

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
E16 Block signal is active state
222
Unit
Protection manual
6.6. Other protections
6.6.1. Unbalanced load protection
REF 542plus has one unbalanced load protection function.
A050870
Fig. 6.6.1.-1 Unbalanced load protection

RST Trigger signal (active low-to-high) Reset signal
When the reset input pin (RST) is triggered, the protection function is reset.

The Start signal will be activated when the calculated negative phase sequence
current exceeds the setting threshold value (Is).
The Block Output (BO) signal becomes active when the protection function exit
TRIP status and remains active for the setting delay time (Reset Time).
223
Unit
Protection manual
A050901
Output Channel different from 0 means direct execution of the trip command
(skipping FUPLA cyclic evaluation).
224
Unit
Protection manual
A050902
A050903
225
Unit
Protection manual
Is: Current threshold for negative sequence

condition detection
K: Heating parameter to vary time delay for
trip condition
Reset Time: Time BO output is high (for example to
block the re-closing possibility of a motor)
Timer decreasing rate: Parameter to vary thermal memory effect
A050904
226
Unit
Protection manual
A050905
Fig. 6.6.1.2.-5 Pins
Unbalanced load protection function evaluates the measured amount of negative

phase sequence current at the fundamental frequency.
The negative-sequence three phase system L1 - L3 - L2 is superimposed on the

three-phase system that corresponds to the standard phase sequence. This results in
different field intensities in the magnetic laminated cores. The points with
particularly high field intensities, the so-called hot spots, lead to the local
overheating.
If the calculated negative phase sequence current exceeds the setting threshold value
(Is), then the protection function is started and the start signal will be activated.
When the protection enters the START status, the operating time is continuously
recalculated according to the set parameters (K, Is) and the negative phase
sequence current value.
If the calculated operating time is exceeded, the function goes in TRIP status and the
trip signal becomes active.
227
Unit
Protection manual
when the measured current value falls below 0.4 the setting threshold value. The
operating time depends on the calculated negative phase sequence as follows:
K
t= (21)
I 22 − I S2
where:
t Time until the protective function trips under sustained overcurrent
K Heating parameter of the component
I2 Calculated negative phase sequence current expressed in In
IS Start threshold expressed in In
According to the standard the characteristic is only defined for I2/Is in the range up
to 20. If the values of the mentioned ratio are higher than 20, the operation time
remains constant as the operation time calculated for Is/I2= 20.
If a trip is generated, for example in case of a motor protection, the motor should be
blocked for reclosing. The BO signal is dedicated to block the reclosing possibility
of the motor in this case. The BO signal remains active for the reset time after the
functions exit TRIP status.
If the re-closing of the CB is not intended to be blocked, the Reset

Time setting should be 0 or not used, because during the activation of
BO signal the unbalanced load function is taken out of operation.
Thermal memory
To avoid machine overheating in case of an intermittent negative phase sequence

current, the internal time counter is not cleared when the negative phase sequence
current falls below the start threshold. Instead, it is linearly decremented with time,
using a user-configurable slope (that is timer decreasing rate related to the setting of
the Reset Time). 100% means full memory and 0% means no memory.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the unbalanced load protection function.
228
Unit
Protection manual

Is 0.05 ... 0.30 In 0.10 Current threshold for negative
sequence detection
K 0.5 ... 30.0 - 10.0 Heating parameter
Reset time 0 ... 2000 s 60 Time to reset BO after a trip
Timer decreasing 0 ... 100 % 10 Parameter to vary thermal memory
rate effect

Code Event reason
E18 Protection block is back to inactive state
E19 Protection block is back to inactive state
E20 Reset input is active
E21 Reset input is back to inactive state
6.6.2. Directional power protection
Directional power protection function can be added as a supervision function with

generators, transformers and three-phase asynchronous motors.
A050906
Fig. 6.6.2.-1 Directional power protection
229
Unit
Protection manual

BI Digital signal (active high) Blocking signal
When the BI signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its
then remain in idle state until the BI signal goes low.

TRIP Digital signal (active high) TRIP signal
The Start signal will be activated when the calculated active power exceeds the
setting threshold value (Max Reverse Load) and the power flow is in the opposite
direction to the specified one.
A050907
230
Unit
Protection manual
A050908

Direction: Directional criteria to be assessed with Power flow for START
detection
Nominal Real Power: Power reference Pn for quantities normalization
Max Reverse Load: Power threshold in opposition to set direction for start detection
Operating Time: Time delay for trip condition detection
A050909
231
Unit
Protection manual
A050910
Fig. 6.6.2.2.-4 Pins
The directional power protection function evaluates the active power at the
The directional power supervision compares the calculated active power with a
preset nominal value (Pn, Nominal Real Power) and a set power flow direction
(Direction).
If the calculated active power exceeds the setting threshold value (Max Reverse
Load), and the power flow is in the opposite direction to the specified one
(backward/forward), the protection function is started and the start signal is
generated.
cleared if the calculated active power falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value, or
the power flow changes direction.
(Operating Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the trip
signal is generated.
232
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the directional power protection function.

Direction Forward / Backward Directional criteria for
Backward START detection
Nom. active power 1 ... 1000000 kW 1000 Power reference for
normalization
Max reverse load 1 ... 50 % Pn 5 Power threshold for
START detection
Operating time 1.0 ... 1000 s 10 Time delay for trip
condition

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
6.6.3. Low load protection
REF 542plus has one low load protection function.
Three-phase asynchronous motors are subject to load variations. The low load
monitoring function is provided to supervize the motor operational conditions for
operation below the required load.
A050911
Fig. 6.6.3.-1 Low load protection
233
Unit
Protection manual


The Start signal will be activated when the function is enabled (maximum phase
current above Min. Current) and the calculated active power falls below 0.95 the
setting threshold value (Min. Load).
operating time (Operating Time) has elapsed.
A050912
234
Unit
Protection manual
A050913

A050914
235
Unit
Protection manual
Nominal Real Power: Power reference Pn for quantities normalization

Min. Load: Power threshold for start detection
Min. Current: Current threshold for start detection
Operating Time: Time delay for Trip condition detection
A050915
A050916
Fig. 6.6.3.2.-5 Pins
236
Unit
Protection manual
The low load protection function evaluates the measured amount of current and of
active power at the fundamental frequency.
Low load protection function is enabled only if the maximum phase current of the
configured sensors is above the preset threshold value (Min Current). It then
normalizes the active power on a preset nominal value (Pn, Nominal Real
Power).
When enabled, if the calculated active power falls below 0.95 the preset threshold
value (Min. Load) the protection function is started and the Start signal is
generated.
cleared if the calculated active power exceeds the setting threshold value.
After the protection has entered the start status and the preset operating time
(Operating Time) has elapsed, function goes in TRIP status and the trip signal is
generated.
when the calculated active power exceeds 1.05 the setting threshold value.
Two parameter sets can be configured for low load protection function.

Nom. real power 1 ... 1000000 kW 1000 Power reference for
normalization
Min load 5 ... 100 % Pn 10 Power threshold for start
detection
Min current 2 ... 20 % In 5 Current threshold for start
detection
Operating time 1.0 ... 1000 s 10 Time delay for trip condition
detection
237
Unit
Protection manual

Code Event reason
E0 Start started
E1 Start back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
6.6.4. Frequency supervision
REF 542plus has one frequency supervision function.
It is worth checking the network frequency for it to remain within the set limits
when time and frequency-dependent processes are involved. Frequency changes
influence, for example, the power dissipation, the speed (motors) and the firing
characteristics (converters) of equipment. The frequency supervision function is
used to report frequency variations in a configurable frequency range.
A050917
Fig. 6.6.4.-1 Frequency supervision

238
Unit
Protection manual

The Start signal will be activated when the frequency exceeds the setting threshold
value (Start Value).
A050918
Sensors:
The supervision function selects automatically the best sensor. It operates preferably
on a voltage sensor, but it can work also on a current sensor.
239
Unit
Protection manual
A050919

Start Value: Frequency threshold for start condition detection
A050920
240
Unit
Protection manual
A050921
Fig. 6.6.4.2.-4 Pins
The frequency supervision function evaluates network frequency on the measured

value of the first available (voltage or current) sensor.
If the measured network frequency is outside the allowed range, the supervision
function is started.
If the measured network frequency remains outside the allowed range for at least
operating time setting, a trip signal becomes active.
If the measured network frequency falls outside the allowed range, that is the
network nominal frequency plus/minus the setting threshold value (Start
Value), the frequency supervision function is started and the Start signal is
generated.
The frequency supervision function will come back in passive status and the start
signal will be cleared, if the frequency difference to the nominal network frequency
falls below 0.95 the setting threshold value.
(Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status and the Trip signal is
generated.
when the measured frequency value falls back within the allowed range, that is the
network nominal frequency plus/minus 0.95 the setting threshold value.
241
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for frequency supervision function.

Start value 0.04 ... 5.0 Hz 0.20 Frequency threshold for start
condition detection
Time 1.0 ... 300.00 s 10.00 Time delay for Trip condition
detection

Code Event reason
E0 Start started
E1 Start back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
6.6.5. Synchronism check
REF 542plus has one synchronism check protection function.
Paralleling monitoring is required if two networks are interconnected whose

voltages may differ in quantity, phase angle and frequency as a result of different
power supplies (SYN). The switching operation for coupling the separate systems
can be enabled by the Synchronism Check SYN signal.
A050922
Fig. 6.6.5.-1 Synchronism check
242
Unit
Protection manual

BI Digital signal (active high) Blocking signal
When the BI signal becomes active, the protection function is reset (no matter its
then remain in idle state until the BI signal goes low.

SYN Digital signal (active high) Sync signal
The Start signal will be activated when both the differential voltage ΔU and phase
difference ΔΦ between corresponding line voltages of two networks fall below the
setting threshold values (Delta Voltage AND Delta Phase respectively).
The SYN signal to parallel networks will be activated when the start conditions are
true and the operating time (Time) has elapsed.
243
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function operates on the combinations of phase (or line) voltages
reported in the following table. The two phase voltages belonging to the two
networks or a line voltage belonging to the second network are needed.
Fig. 6.6.5.2.-3 Energizing
244
Unit
Protection manual
Dead line – Dead bus: Maximum allowed amplitude difference between two
synchronous networks
Dead line – Live bus: Maximum allowed phase difference between two synchronous
networks
Live line – Dead bus:
U Dead line: Voltage setting to detect dead line condition
U Live line: Voltage setting to detect live line condition
U Dead bus: Voltage setting to detect dead bus condition
U Live bus: Voltage setting to detect live bus condition
Dead Time: Time delay for detection of synchronism condition

Delta Voltage: Maximum allowed amplitude difference between two
synchronous networks
Delta Phase: Maximum allowed phase difference between two synchronous
networks
Time: Time delay for detection of synchronism condition
245
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.6.5.2.-6 Pins
Synchronism check protection function evaluates the measured amplitude and the
rate of change of differential voltage between two networks corresponding the line
voltages.
246
Unit
Protection manual
The synchronism check protection function monitors the differential voltage ΔU

between corresponding line and phase voltages of two networks and their phase
difference ΔΦ.
If the measured differential voltage and phase difference fall below the setting
threshold values (Delta Voltage AND Delta Phase respectively), the
synchro check protection function is started.
cleared if differential voltage and phase difference exceed 1.05 the setting threshold
value. After the protection has entered the start status and the preset operating time
(Time) has elapsed, the signal for parallel switching of networks (SYN) is
generated.
The protection function will exit the synchro status and the SYN signal will be
cleared when the start conditions on differential voltage and phase difference values
become false. Delta Voltage: Maximum allowed amplitude difference between
the two synchronous networks.
The determination of the setting of the synchronism check function is shown in an

example below. If two networks must be switched in parallel, the voltage amplitudes
in both networks must first be almost the same and should have approximately the
value of the rated voltage.
As long as the frequencies in the networks are different, the two networks can
naturally not be synchronized. A phase displacement will therefore occur between
the two voltages that are compared.
As a result, a voltage difference occurs as a function of time. This voltage difference

is the criteria for whether the two systems can be switched in parallel. The voltage
condition are shown in an example in the following diagram.
A060106
Fig. 6.6.5.4.-1 diagram of the voltage quantities with unequal frequencies.
As shown in the diagram, the phase difference that needs to be set depends on the
setting of the differential voltage as follows:
247
Unit
Protection manual
Δδ = arctan ⎜
⎛ ΔU ⎞
⎟ (22)
⎝ U ⎠
Δδ Setting the phase difference

ΔU Setting the differential voltage as start value
U Rated voltage as reference quantity
The equation for the required voltage difference can be calculated as follows:
ΔU = U tan Δδ (23)
A time window t, which is equal to the time setting, can be used to check the
frequency variation
2Tn Δδ fn
t = D
(24)
360 Δf
t Time window to check frequency deviation

Tn Period duration at rated frequency
fn Rated frequency
Δf Frequency difference
As long as the frequency deviation remains within the allowable limit, the set time
expires and generates the signal "SYN" to be formed for parallel switching of both
networks.
An example of the calculation of the setting is as follows:
In a system with 50 Hz rated frequency the voltage deviation may be 20%.

Consequently, the setting of the phase shift according to the above calculation is, at
the maximum 11°. The minimum time setting can then be calculated according to
the above equation to be 0.6 seconds.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the synchronism check protection
function.
248
Unit
Protection manual

Delta voltage 0.02 ... 0.40 Un 0.05 Max amplitude difference
Delta phase 5 ... 50 ° 10 Max phase difference
Time 0.2 ... 1000 s° 100.00 Time delay for synchro detection

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
E6 Synch is present
E7 Synch is not present
6.6.6. Switching resonance protection
REF 542plus has one switching resonance protection function, to be used together
with the power factor controller and the high harmonic protection.
A050930
Fig. 6.6.6.-1 Switching resonance protection
249
Unit
Protection manual

PFC OP Trigger signal (active low-to-high) PFC operation trigger
The PFC OP trigger is provided by the PFC function block to temporarily enable the
resonance protection function at switching-in or switching-out of PFC controlled
capacitor banks.

Start L1 Digital signal (active high) Start signal of IL1
activated when respective phase current start conditions are true.
The TRIP signal will be activated when at least for one phase current the start
250
Unit
Protection manual
A050931
A050932
The protection function operates on any combination of line or phase voltages in a

triple, for example, it can operate as single-phase, double-phase or three-phase
251
Unit
Protection manual
A050933

Voltage THD Start value: THD amplitude threshold
Delta Voltage THD Start value: THD amplitude difference threshold
Voltage THD Time Delay: Time delay for THD detection
PFC OP Time: Enabling time at PFC trigger
Rms Voltage Start value: Function enabling voltage threshold condition
A050934
252
Unit
Protection manual
A050935
Fig. 6.6.6.2.-5 Pins
Switching resonance protection function evaluates the amount of voltage RMS with
harmonic content up to the 25th harmonic and THD (Total Harmonic Distortion).
Operation of switching resonance protection function is triggered by an external

signal connected to input pin ‘PFC OP’ (provided by the PFC function switch ON/
OFF output pins) and remains enabled for the preset time (PFC OP Time).
At PFC OP trigger instant, the voltage THD values are saved.
While enabled, if there is for at least one phase voltage (respectively line voltage,
depending on the configuration):
* The RMS value is above the preset threshold (Rms Voltage Start value)
* The THD value is above the preset threshold (Voltage THD Start value)
for at least the preset detection time (Voltage THD Time Delay)
* The variation of THD value with respect to the saved value (that is THD value at
trigger time) is above the preset threshold (that is Delta Voltage THD Start
value) for at least the preset detection time (that is Voltage THD Time
Delay)
Then the protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective. When the
above conditions are true at least the for one phase voltage, then the relevant start
signal (S L1-3) will be activated.
253
Unit
Protection manual
all the phases the voltage falls below 0.95 one of the setting threshold values (Rms
OR Voltage THD OR Delta Voltage THD).
generated.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the switching resonance protection
function.

Voltage THD start 5 ... 50 % 5 THD amplitude threshold
value
Delta Voltage THD 1 ... 50 % 2 THD amplitude difference threshold
start value
Voltage THD time 0.01 ... 60.00 s 0.03 Stabilizing delay for THD detection
delay
Time 0.05 ... 60.00 s 0.10 Time delay for Trip condition
detection
PFC OP time 0.01 ... 120.00 s 0.06 Function enabling time at PFC
trigger
Rms voltage start 0.10 ... 1.00 Un 0.50 Function enabling Voltage
value threshold condition

Code Event reason
E2 Protection started timing on phase L2
E16 Block output signal is active
E17 Block output signal is back to inactive
E20 PFC operation started
E21 PFC operation back
254
Unit
Protection manual
6.6.7. High harmonic protection
REF 542plus has one high harmonic protection function, to be used together with
the power factor controller and the switching resonance protection.
A050936
Fig. 6.6.7.-1 High harmonic protection


activated when respective phase current start conditions are true.
255
Unit
Protection manual
A050937
A050938
The protection function operates on phase or line voltages in a triple.
256
Unit
Protection manual
A050939

Voltage THD Startvalue: THD amplitude threshold
Voltage THD Time Delay: Time delay for THD detection
Rms Voltage Startvalue: Function enabling Voltage threshold
condition
A050940
257
Unit
Protection manual
A050941
Fig. 6.6.7.2.-5 Pins
High harmonic protection function evaluates the measured amount of voltage RMS
and THD (Total Harmonic Distortion).
If there is at least one phase voltage (respectively line voltage, depending on the
configuration):
* The RMS value is above the preset threshold (Rms Voltage Start value)
* The THD value is above the preset threshold (Voltage THD Start value)
for at least the preset detection time (Voltage THD Time Delay).
Then the protection function is started. The start signal is phase selective. It means
that when the above conditions are true at least the for one phase voltage, then the
relevant start signal (S L1-3) will be activated.
all the phases the voltage falls below 0.95 one of the setting threshold values (Rms
OR Voltage THD OR Delta Voltage THD).
generated.
258
Unit
Protection manual
Two parameter sets can be configured for the high harmonic protection function.

Voltage THD 1 ... 50 % 10 THD amplitude threshold
start value
Voltage THD 0.01 ... 360 s 0.50 Stabilizing delay for THD detection
time delay
Time 0.05 ... 360 s 0.50 Time delay for Trip condition
detection
Rms voltage 0.10 ... 1.00 Un 0.50 Function enabling Voltage threshold
start value condition

Code Event reason
E0 Start L1 started
E1 Start L1 back
E2 Start L2 started
E3 Start L2 back
E4 Start L3 started
E5 Start L3 back
E6 Trip started
E7 Trip back
E16 Block signal started
E17 Block signal back
6.6.8. Frequency protection
REF 542plus can install up to 6 frequency protection functions per protected net.
The frequency protection function is used to detect frequency variations in a

configurable amplitude and rate of change frequency range.
259
Unit
Protection manual
A050942
Fig. 6.6.8.-1 Frequency protection


BLOCK Digital signal (active high) Block output signal
The start signal is activated if the start condition is fulfilled. If the setting value of
the start signal is selected below the nominal frequency, the protection function
operates as underfrequency protection. If the setting value is selected above the
nominal frequency, the protection function operates as overfrequency protection.
Also the rate rise of the frequency decrease or increase can be detected. The trip
signal is generated according to the selected setting of the trip logic. The block
output signal appears if the line voltage or the phase voltage depending on the
setting parameter is below the setting value of the undervoltage threshold value.
260
Unit
Protection manual
A050943
A050944
Fig. 6.6.8.2.-2 Trip Logic
261
Unit
Protection manual
A050945
The protection functions can operate on any combination of phase or line voltages
in a triple, for example, it can operate as single phase or double phase, three-phase
protection on voltages belonging to the same system. The default setting is to use
the line voltage.
A050946
262
Unit
Protection manual
Start value: Delta frequency amplitude threshold, with

respect to the rated network frequency fr. If set
below fr, it behaves as underfrequency,
otherwise as overfrequency.
Frequency gradient: Rate of frequency change threshold
Undervoltage threshold: Minimum voltage threshold to be exceed for
protection enabling, otherwise it is blocked
A050947
A050948
Fig. 6.6.8.2.-6 Pins
263
Unit
Protection manual
Frequency protection functions evaluate the frequency and/or the frequency gradient
of voltage signals through the zero-crossing detection of the voltage measurement
quantity. The measure is performed on the first voltage measure available above the
minimum voltage amplitude (Undervoltage threshold).
The start condition and trip logic is selected by the user and it can be:
* Frequency only (only frequency value is considered)
* Frequency and frequency gradient (both the values must exceed thresholds to
have a start and trip)
* Frequency or frequency gradient (at least one of the values must exceed the
threshold to have a start and trip)
Depending on the set frequency threshold (Start Value) with respect to the
network rated frequency, the protection function behaves either as underfrequency
or overfrequency protection. For example, if the set frequency threshold is below
rated frequency value, the protection function behaves as underfrequency).
The condition on frequency gradient, when used, is in the same direction as the
condition on frequency. For example, if the protection function is set as
underfrequency, the frequency gradient is significant only if it is negative and if the
actual frequency is below the rated value.
If the frequency cannot be measured or one of the three phases or line voltages
(according to the selected setting parameter) falls below 0.95 the Undervoltage
threshold value, then the protection function is blocked and a block signal is
generated. The protection function will exit the block status and clear the block
signal if the minimum voltage amplitude rises above the setting threshold value.
Do not set the Undervoltage Threshold value too close to 1. The

calculated value of the voltage itself is also dependent on the frequency
due to the impacts of the applied sampling rate. If the frequency goes
down, the calculated value of the voltage might be lower than the
actual voltage value, which again will lead to an unwanted blocking of
the protection.
In case the minimum voltage amplitude is above the undervoltage threshold value
and the frequency can be measured, the start condition is fulfilled if the value of the
measured frequency is below or exceeds the Start value setting parameter. For
setting the value above the rated frequency the overfrequency condition will be
detected. On the contrary an underfrequency condition will generate the start signal.
For selecting a Trip Logic with Frequency gradient, the start signal will be
generated similarly. The Frequency gradient is positive for overfrequency
condition and negative for underfrequency condition.
264
Unit
Protection manual
The protection function will exit the Trip status and the trip signal will be cleared
when all the start conditions fall below 0.95 of the calculated threshold value setting
(Start Value and/or Frequency gradient). For example, if the setting for
the frequency protection with 50 Hz rated frequency is selected as following:
Start Value 49 Hz
Undervoltage threshold 0.7 Ur
The resetting value for the Start Value is:
50 Hz – 0.95 (50 Hz – 49 Hz) = 49.05 Hz
and for the Undervoltage threshold is:
0.7 Ur / 0.95 = 0.74 Ur
When the protection has entered the start status, if the above conditions remain true
and the preset operating time (Time) has elapsed, the function goes in TRIP status
and the trip signal is generated.
when all the start conditions fall below 0.95 the setting threshold value (Start
Value and/or Frequency gradient).
Two parameter sets can be configured for each of the frequency protection
functions.

Trip criteria f / f_AND_df/dt / - f Definition of start/trip criteria
f_OR_df/dt
Start value 40.00 ... 75.00 Hz 49.95 Delta frequency amplitude
59.95 threshold
Frequency 0.10 ... 1.00 Hz/s 0.50 Rate of frequency change
gradient threshold
Time 0.10 ... 30.00 s 0.50 Time delay for trip condition
detection
Undervoltage 0.10 ... 1.00 Un 0.20 Minimum voltage threshold
threshold function block/enabling
265
Unit
Protection manual

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E1 Start cancelled
E16 Block output signal is active state
E17 Block output signal is back to inactive state
6.6.9. Circuit-breaker failure protection
REF 542plus contains the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) to initiate the
isolation of the system fault by the other adjacent circuit breakers.
Fig. 6.6.9.-1 Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP)

EX TRIG Trigger signal (active high) External trigger
any) and all internal registers and timers are cleared. The protection function then
266
Unit
Protection manual

START Digital signal (active high) Start signal
The START signal is generated when an internal or external trigger is detected.
The internal trigger opens the circuit breaker due to a TRIP of a configured
protection. The external trigger is a low to high transition of the EX TRIG input pin.
The trigger activates the CBFP only if the flowing current is exceeding the open
current threshold value. The START signal drops when all the phase currents fall
below the current threshold value.
The TRIP signal occurs when the CBFP detects a start condition and at least one
phase current exceeds the set current threshold at timer expiration. The TRIP signal
drops again after all the phase currents fall below the 40% of the current threshold.
Output Channel different from 0 means direct execution of the external circuit
breaker trip command, that is, skipping FUPLA cyclic evaluation.
267
Unit
Protection manual

on phase currents belonging to the same network.
268
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.6.9.2.-3 Settings

Status: Operating status
CB Open Channel: Internal circuit breaker open channel. It is taken, if available, from
the switching object 2-2 configured as circuit breaker or from PTRC
General. If not available, the user has to set it with the output
channel used to open the internal circuit breaker.
Open Current: Current threshold for internal circuit breaker open detection
Failure time: Time for the protection wait before generating trip signal. Depending
on the related circuit breaker open time.
269
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.6.9.2.-4 Protection
Selection of protection functions which trigger the circuit breaker failure protection.
270
Unit
Protection manual
271
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.6.9.2.-6 Pins
The phase current calculation is done using the RMS Half Period calculated with a
sampling frequency of 1200 Hz (reset time 10 ms at 50Hz or 9 ms at 60Hz). The
number of sample N per period is:
1200
N= (25)
fn
Where fn is the configured network frequency (50, 60 Hz).

N
−1
2
2
RmsHalfPeriod (k ) =
N
∑0
i X (k − i)2 (26)
Where X(k) is the value of the sample k.
272
Unit
Protection manual
When the CBFP detects an internal circuit breaker failure or is activated by an

external trigger, it starts a timer. If the overcurrent condition in one phase still exists
after the timer has expired, the CBFP generates a trip signal at the output channel
indicating that the related internal circuit breaker has failed to operate.
If a trigger occurs while CBFP is blocked, the trigger will never be

processed also in case the trigger condition is still present after the
disappearing of the blocking state.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the CBFP function. Switch-over between
the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of the network configuration. If
this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized identically to avoid wrong
setting if switch-over of parameters has happened accidentally.

CB Open 0 … max. output 0 Internal CB open channel
channel channel
Open Current 0.050 … 40.000 In 0.0500 Current threshold for start
Failure time 0.040 … s 0.080 CB time to open
200.000

Code Event reason
E0 Protection start
E18 Protection block is started
E20 External trigger is started
E21 External trigger is back to inactive
273
Unit
Protection manual
6.7. Trip conditioning
The trip conditioning function block (PTRC) is designed similarly to the same
logical node in IEC 61850 standards. The advantage of this approach is to generate
start and trip events tagged with correct time stamps, and to avoid delay due to
FUPLA cycle time.
Fig. 6.7.-1 PTRC general
Fig. 6.7.-2 PTRC overcurrent protection
Fig. 6.7.-3 PTRC earth fault protection
Fig. 6.7.-4 PTRC overvoltage protection
Fig. 6.7.-5 PTRC undervoltage protection
274
Unit
Protection manual
The PTRC model includes four possible intermediate PTRC instances to collect the
signals from protection functions belonging to the same family and one general
PTRC instance to collect the signals from all installed protection functions
(including the intermediate PTRC). The intermediate PTRC includes:
* PTRC overcurrent
* PTRC earth fault
* PTRC overvoltage
* PTRC undervoltage
According to the application needs, it is possible to use intermediate PTRC and

include them afterwards in the general PTRC or to use only the general PTRC
which includes all the protection functions applied.
PTRC must include only the protection functions tripping to the circuit
breaker. This information can be dependent on the application.
Therefore the protection functions used by the PTRC have to be
selected accordingly.

Each applied protection can be blocked by different conditions:

* Blocking signal active
* Operating status set to off (if available)
If the related PTRC function is blocked, for example by activation of the block
signal or by setting the operation status to off, all of the protection functions
included in the PTRC are blocked too. The specific protection function is released
only when all blocking signals are inactive.

GEN.START Digital signal (active high) General start signal (logical OR combination of all
starts including reset time)
275
Unit
Protection manual
START L1 to L3 are the phase selective start signals. The phase starting signal is
GEN. START is a logical OR combination of the start signal START L1 to L3 and

remains active until the reset time, if used, has expired.
The TRIP signal is activated when, at least for a phase current, the start conditions
are true and the operating time has elapsed.
The main characteristics of the PTRC function are:

* Collects signals (starts/trips) belonging to different configurable protections
* Generates single optional fast trip output configuration (PTRC general)
* Generates single blocking signal to block all the configured protections
* Gives communication events with correct timestamp
* General start/trip updates recorded in fault recorder using real timestamp (direct
connection between the PTRC output pin and the fault recorder input pin)
* Conditioned trip register/events (PTRC general)
The configuration for the PTRC general is shown as an example.
276
Unit
Protection manual
277
Unit
Protection manual

Operating status When the operating status is off, all used protections is put in
(On/Off): inactive status. The off state is equal to the one described for the BS
(blocking signal).
Fast trip mode This setting is available only in the PTRC general. When enabled,
(enabled/ the trip command is directly forwarded to the circuit breaker open
disabled): channel without any FUPLA cyclic execution.
278
Unit
Protection manual
279
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.7.2.-4 Pins
6.7.3. Conditioned trip events
The conditioned trip events are only available in PTRC general. It is defined to
fulfill the IEC 61850 requirements for the common trip of the REF 542plus. If a
conditioning logic scheme on the trip signal is used in the application, the correct
status is also taken into account accordingly.
6.7.4. Multiple use of output channel
When the fast trip is enabled in the PTRC general, the same cannot be enabled
anymore in the used protections.
6.7.5. Different output channel
If the fast trip is not enabled, a used protection cannot have different output channel
from the channel configured in the PTRC general.
280
Unit
Protection manual
6.7.6. PTRC general in context wiht IEC-61850
In case the Ethernet board is used and configured with IEC-61850, the PTRC
general is mandatory.
6.7.7. Events

Code Event reason
E4 Conditioned trip is active
E5 Conditioned trip back to inactive state
E6 General Trip signal is active
E8 Protection general start (logical OR combination of starts)
E26 Protection general operationa) (logical OR combination of all faults)
E28 Operation on fault direction forwardb)
E31 Operation on fault direction both
a)
Protection operation is the start of protection on faults independent on direction.
b)
The fault direction events are available in overcurrent and earth fault PTRC. The fault direction is set to
both when the direction given by the used protection is both forward and backward.
6.8. Autoreclose
The autoreclose function can be used to reclose the circuit breaker automatically
when a protection function has tripped. This function block can be applied to all the
protection functions available in REF 542plus.
A050949
Fig. 6.8.-1 Autoreclose
281
Unit
Protection manual

1 SHOT Digital signal (active high) AR only performing single shot
CB OK Digital signal (active high) CB drive ready for the following AR
EX. TRIG Digital signal (active high) Triggering of AR by an external signal
INCR. Digital signal (active high) Increment the number of shots
STOP AR Digital signal (active high) Immediate stopping of the AR cycles
TEST Digital signal (active high) Test of AR cycle (O-CO-CO…)

CLOSE CB Digital signal (active high) CB close signal
OPEN CB Digital signal (active high) CB open signal
AR ACTIVE Digital signal (active high) High as long as AR is active
AR FAILED Digital signal (active high) High in case of an unsuccessful AR
SHOT 1 Digital signal (active high) 1st Shot signal ofAR
SHOT 2 Digital signal (active high) 2nd Shot signal of AR
SHOT 3 Digital signal (active high) 3rd Shot signal ofAR
SHOT 4 Digital signal (active high) 4th Shot signal of AR
SHOT 5 Digital signal (active high) 5th Shot signal ofAR
282
Unit
Protection manual
A050950
A050951
283
Unit
Protection manual
A050952
A050953
284
Unit
Protection manual
A050954
Fig. 6.8.2.-5 Pins
6.8.3. Operation mode
The autoreclose function block can be operated in two different modes.
Start and trip controlled
In this operation mode, the difference of the time duration between the start and the
trip signal of the related protection function is evaluated. Therefore, the different
settings of the specified time are provided. If the time difference between the
protection start and trip signal is within the specified time, the AR-cycle is released
and respectively continued. The corresponding CB shall be reclosed after the
relating dead time is elapsed. If the condition is not fulfilled, the AR function block
will be blocked. To continue the operation of the feeder, the AR function block
needs to be released locally or remotely via the station control system.
Start controlled
This operation mode initiates the AR-Cycle only by a start signal of the related
protection function. The tripping time for each shot can be delayed separately. This
delayed tripping is need in some application, for example to burn out a falling tree
on the overhead line. Therefore, the operation time of the protection function will
now be controlled by AR. Normally, the first shot shall have a relatively short
operation time in the range of 30 to 100 ms. The second and the following shot shall
285
Unit
Protection manual
have longer operation time in the range of 1 to 10 s. If this mode is selected, the
settings of the specified time are to be used to control the operation time of the
following shots.
Both AR function can carry out a maximum of 5 shots.
The configuration can be done by a selection table. All the protection functions
which can be connected are shown in the table. The columns are foreseen to define,
which of the protection functions will activate specific AR shots. By selecting the
related protection functions in each shot,AR will be initiated according to the
operation mode defined previously. The protection function can be redefined after
each shot. In the example, AR will operate as follows:
Due to the operation time dependency on the fault current, the IDMT
and earth-fault IDMT are not listed. If this protection shall be used to
initiate the AR-cycle, the relating trip signal shall be connected by a
FUPLA wire to the input EX.TRIG of the AR function block.
The distance protection can only be used in start and trip control mode.
If the AR status is ready, the overreach zone of the distance protection
will be activated. After the first shot, the overreach zone will not be
activated anymore. The trip will be done according to the setting of the
related impedance zone.
To ensure the proper function of AR, the trip of the protection shall be
send directly to the so-called 2-2 switch object, which controls and
operatesCB. There is no need to make a FUPLA wiring between the
AR function block, 2-2 switch object and the related protection
functions.
The external trigger is to be selected, if AR will be triggered by an external

protection function. The trip must be connected to a binary input of REF 542plus.
Afterwards, the external trip signal needs to be wired to the external trigger input
EX. TRIG of the AR function block.
If the AR-cycle is initiated by the input EX. TRIG, the same wire of
this input signal must also be used to open CB via the 2-2 switch
object. Otherwise, in case of blocking AR by a blocking signal, no
opening of CB by the external protection will be possible.
286
Unit
Protection manual

Number of reclosure 0 ... 5 1
cycles
Reclaim time 10 ... 30 s 30
Specific time first shot 0.04 ... 30 s 0.5
Dead time first shot 0.1... 100 s 0.3
Specific time second 0.04 ... 30 s 0.5
shot
Dead time second 0.1 ... 100 s 0.3
shot
Specific time third 0.04 ... 30 s 0.5
shot
Dead time third shot 0.1 ... 100 s 0.3
Specific time fourth 0.04 ... 30 s 0.5
shot
Dead time fourth shot 0.1 ... 100 s 0.3
Specific time fourth 0.04 ... 30 0.5
shot
Dead time fourth shot 0.1 ... 100 0.3

Code Event reason
E8 AR active started
E9 AR active back
E10 General enable started
E11 General enable back
E12 Test enable started
E13 Test enable back
E14 AR failed started
E15 AR failed back
E18 Block AR started
E19 Block AR back
E20 AR 1. shot started
E21 AR 1. shot back
E22 CB OK started
E23 CB OK back
E24 CB OK internal drop delayed started
E25 CB OK internal drop delayed back
E26 External trigger started
E27 External trigger back
E28 Shot increment started
E29 Shot increment back
E30 Stop AR started
E31 Stop AR back
287
Unit
Protection manual
Code Event reason

E32 Test started
E33 Test back
E40 Close CB started
E41 Close CB back
E42 Open CB started
E43 Open CB back
E48 Shot 1 started
E49 Shot 1 back
E50 Shot 2 started
E51 Shot 2 back
E52 Shot 3 started
E53 Shot 3 back
E54 Shot 4 started
E55 Shot 4 back
E56 Shot 5 started
E57 Shot 5 back
6.9. Fault recorder
This function block allows the eight REF 542plus analog input signals to be
recorded for a period of at least 1 second and for a maximum of 5 seconds. It is also
possible to record up to 32 digital signals simultaneously from the FUPLA.
A050958
Fig. 6.9.-1 Fault recorder
Inputs
288
Unit
Protection manual
Table 6.9.1.-1 Inputs

1 ... 32 Digital signal (active high) 32 Input for recording binary
signal
START Digital signal (active high) Start of the fault recording
OVERFLOW Digital signal (active high) Overflow signal indication
When the BL signal becomes active, the fault recorder function is reset (no matter
its state). This means that all the output pins go low generating the required events
(if any) and all the internal registers and timers are cleared. The fault recorder
function will then remain in idle state until the BL signal goes low.
A050959
Fig. 6.9.2.-1 General and setting parameters

Name: User defined Analog Input meaning
Factor: Analog input scaling factor used for display
Time before fault: Recording duration before recorder start input
trigger
Recording time: Total allocated duration, it limits the number of
records (from 5 to 1) in the ring buffer
Time after fault: Recording duration after recorder start input
trigger
289
Unit
Protection manual
A050960
Fig. 6.9.2.-2 Pins
6.9.3. Operation
The fault recorder is started within the application. The recording time of the fault
recorder is a combination of the time before the fault and the time after the fault. The
time before the fault refers to the period recorded before the fault recorder is actually
started from a protection start signal. The time after the fault is the period after the
fault recorder has started. Dynamic recording of the fault record, for example, from
start signal to signal CB OFF is not possible.
The ring buffer process saves the specific fault record, that is, the oldest fault record
is always overwritten with a new one. The number of saved fault records depends on
the record time. The total duration of all saved fault records is 5 seconds the
maximum, if it is set to a lower value it limits the number of records in the buffer.
n = int((recording time/(time before + time after)
For example, 5 fault records can be saved with a record time of 1 s, that is, the
minimum record time (time before the fault + time after the fault) that can be set.
The fault records are exported with the configuration software and then converted to
the COMTRADE format. The fault records can also be exported via the bus of the
station control system. The conversion to the COMTRADE format has to be carried
out in the station control system.
The following limitations must be taken into account on the use of the
fault recorder:
290
Unit
Protection manual
* At least one protective function must be configured.

* The start signal for the fault recorder must be implemented inFUPLA.
The analog signals are digitized and processed with a 1.2 kHz sampling rate,
because they are decisive for the protection trips. They are therefore within a time
grid of 0.833 ms. The start and trip signals from the protection functions are
recorded and sent to the binary outputs immediately.
On the contrary, the digital signals are processed in accordance with the FUPLA
cycle time. The cycle time depends on the application in this case. The digital
signals are therefore in a grid that is significantly larger than the analog signal grid.
The fault recorder is dedicated for recording the fault data during a short circuit in
the network. The data can be exported from the REF 542plus later and displayed
with a suitable program.
A050961
Fig. 6.9.3.-1 Graphic display of fault record data of a two-pole short circuit with the
WINEVE® program
291
Unit
Protection manual

Time before fault 100 ... 2000 ms 100 Recording duration before the
recorder start
Recording time 1000 ... 5000 ms 2500 User defined limit to the total
duration of the buffer, that is to
records number
Time after fault 100 ... 4900 ms 1000 Recording duration after the
recorder start
6.10. High speed transfer system
A high speed transfer system comprises the high speed transfer device SUE3000
and REF 542plus devices. The two REF 542plus devices are used to initiate and
release the operation of the high speed transfer system and simultaneously to protect
the corresponding feeders.
The high speed transfer system can only be configured on SUE3000.

Using the REF 542plus hardware is not possible.
Fig. 6.10.-1 High speed transfer system
The condition for activation of the high speed transfer system depends on the
location of the system fault. Therefore the REF 542plus devices are applied for fast
detection of the fault location. Only in case of an upstream fault the high speed
transfer system may be initiated.
The specific function blocks for high speed transfer system are Fast direction
indication (FDI) and Voltage supervision (VS). Both function blocks must be used
in REF 542plus to control the operation of the high speed transfer device
accordingly. Both functions evaluate the phase currents and phase voltages for the
292
Unit
Protection manual
detection of the fault location in the electrical system. In case of a downstream

busbar fault, no system transferring may be performed. The control signals for
starting the operation of the high speed control device are transferred by using the
provided optional optical outputs on the main board of REF 542plus.
6.10.1. Fast directional indication
The Fast directional indication (FDI) monitors the active power flow continuously.
If a fault occurs on the feeder side, a change of the active power flow is detected
because the motors act as generators. The system transferring is released.
Fig. 6.10.1.-1 Fast directional indication

high)

Trip Digital signal (active Trip signal for activation of SUE3000
high)
The TRIP signal is activated when at least one of the start conditions is true and the
293
Unit
Protection manual
294
Unit
Protection manual
FDI operates on any combination of the phase current and phase voltage in a triple
belonging to the same system.
I: 1-3, U: 4-6 Analog inputs 1 to 3 are current inputs and 4 to 6 voltage inputs.
The activation of corresponding fast optical output for the FDI should be checked
accordingly.
295
Unit
Protection manual

Undervoltage Voltage threshold for blocking due to undervoltage condition
limit:
Undercurrent Current threshold for releasing due to undercurrent condition
limit:
Overcurrent limit: Current threshold for blocking due to overcurrent condition
Time delay On: Switch-on time delay
Time delay Off: Drop-off time delay
The setting of the time delay is related to Ts, which is the sampling
period corresponding to sampling frequency of 4.8 KHz (Ts = 208.3
µsec).
296
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.10.1.2.-4 Events
Fig. 6.10.1.2.-5 Pins
297
Unit
Protection manual
FDI combines the voltages and current samples using an advanced algorithm to be
able to detect a power direction change as fast as possible.
FDI continuously calculates the power in each phase. To ensure that the calculation
of the power is performed with relevant and valid voltage signals the phase voltages
are continuously supervised. If the phase-voltage value drops below the setting
value of the undervoltage limit, the power calculation the voltage values of the
previous period is used.
Two parameter sets can be configured for FDI. Switch-over between the parameter
sets can be performed in dependency of the network configuration. If this is not
required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized identically to avoid wrong setting if
switch-over of parameters has happened accidentally.

Undervoltage limit 0.20 … Un 0.80 Voltage threshold for blocking due to
1.00 undervoltage condition
Undercurrent limit 1.00 … Un 1.20 Voltage threshold for blocking due to
2.00 undercurrent condition
Overcurrent limit 0.20 … In 2.00 Current threshold for blocking due to
5.00 overcurrent condition
Time delay On 0 … 100 Tsa) 3 Switch on time delay for trip conditioning
Time delay Off 0 … 1000 Ts a)
240 Drop off time delay for trip conditioning
a)
Ts = 208 µs (in accordance with the sampling frequency of 4.8 kHz).

Code Event reason
6.10.2. Voltage supervision
Voltage supervision (VS) continuously supervises the phase currents and the related
phase voltages. A voltage drop with simultaneously high current flow coming from
the feeder is detected as an electrical system fault on the busbar.
298
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.10.2.-1 Voltage supervision


Trip Digital signal (active high) Trip signal
The TRIP signal is activated when a drop down of the system voltage fault is
detected and the operating time (Time Delay On) has elapsed.
299
Unit
Protection manual
300
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.10.2.2.-2 Sensor
VS operates according to one of the mentioned current and voltage combinations.

The valid parameter set must be selected in the in the Parameters tab.
The fast optical output can be activated by checking the parameter for the
corresponding group of the parameter set.
301
Unit
Protection manual

VS undervoltage Voltage threshold for blocking due to undervoltage condition
limit:
VS overvoltage Voltage threshold for blocking due to overvoltage condition
limit:
VS overcurrent Current threshold for blocking due to overvoltage condition
limit:
Time delay On: Switch-on time delay
Time delay Off: Drop-off time delay
302
Unit
Protection manual
Fig. 6.10.2.2.-4 Events
Fig. 6.10.2.2.-5 Pins
303
Unit
Protection manual
VS evaluates the RMS value of the phase voltages and the RMS values of the
corresponding phase currents.
The phase voltages and the related phase currents are continuously monitored. VS
generates a TRIP if one of the three phase modules has detected a fault condition
and at the same time no internal blocking has been detected. VS will be internally
blocked if one of the measured phase voltage drops below the setting of the VS
undervoltage limit or exceeds the setting of the VS overvoltage limit and at the same
time the related phase current exceeds the setting of the VS overcurrent limit. The
trip signal can additionally be delayed by Time Delay On. It disappearing can be
defined by Time Delay Off.
Two parameter sets can be configured for the Voltage supervision function. Switch-
over between the parameter sets can be performed in dependency of the network
configuration. If this is not required, set 1 and set 2 can be parameterized identically
to avoid wrong setting if switch-over of parameters has happened accidentally.

Parameter Values Unit De- Explanation
fault
VS undervoltage 0.20 … 1.00 Un 0.80 Voltage threshold for blocking due to
limit undervoltage condition
VS overvoltage 1.00 … 2.00 Un 1.20 Voltage threshold for blocking due to
limit overvoltage condition
VS overcurrent 0.20 … 5.00 In 2.00 Current threshold for blocking due to
limit overcurrent condition
Time delay On 0 … 100 Tsa) 3 Switch-on time delay for the trip conditioning
Time delay Off 0 … 1000 Ts a)
240 Drop-off time delay for the trip conditioning
a)
Ts = 208 µs (in accordance with the sampling frequency of 4.8 kHz)

Code Event reason
304
Unit
Protection manual
7. Abbreviations
AR Auto reclosure
BI Binary input
CB Circuit-breaker
DFT Discrete Fourier Transformation
FUPLA Function block programming language; Functional pro-
gramming language; Function plan; Function chart
NPS Negative-phase-sequence
PFC Power factor controller
ROA Relay operating angle
RTD Resistance temperature device
SI Sensor input
VS Voltage supervision
305
1MRS755860 EN 12/2008
ABB Oy
P.O.box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
+358 10 22 11
+358 10 22 224 1094
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Feeder Protection Relay
REF 610

1MRS755310 Feeder Protection Relay REF 610
Issued: 05.10.2004
Version: E/01.10.2007 Technical Reference Manual
Contents
Copyrights ................................................................................. 7
1. Introduction..............................................................9
1.1. This manual.............................................................. 9
1.2. Use of symbols ......................................................... 9
1.5. Document conventions ............................................. 10
1.6. Document revisions...................................................11
2. Safety information................................................... 13
3. Product overview .................................................... 15
3.1. Use of the relay....................................................... 15
3.2. Features................................................................. 15
4. Application ............................................................. 17
4.1. Requirements.......................................................... 17
4.2. Configuration .......................................................... 17
5. Technical description .............................................. 21
5.1. Functional description............................................... 21
5.1.1. Product functions ......................................... 21
5.1.1.1. Protection functions ....................... 21
5.1.1.2. Inputs .......................................... 21
5.1.1.3. Outputs........................................ 22
5.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder...................... 22
5.1.1.5. Front panel................................... 22
5.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory ...................... 23
5.1.1.7. Self-supervision............................. 23
5.1.1.8. Time synchronization ..................... 24
5.1.2. Measurements ............................................ 25
5.1.3. Configuration............................................... 25
5.1.4. Protection ................................................... 27
5.1.4.1. Block diagram............................... 27
5.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection .................... 27
5.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection ...................... 29
5.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables .......... 30
5.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection ......... 35
5.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection....... 35
5.1.4.7. Arc protection ............................... 36
5.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function ..................... 37
5.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time
characteristics............................... 43
3
REF 610 Feeder Protection Relay 1MRS755310
5.1.4.10. Settings ....................................... 57

5.1.4.11. Technical data on protection
functions ...................................... 68
5.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision .................................. 72
5.1.6. Trip lockout function ..................................... 74
5.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition
monitoring .................................................. 75
5.1.8. Indicator LEDs and operation indication
messages................................................... 75
5.1.9. Demand values ........................................... 75
5.1.10. Commissioning tests .................................... 76
5.1.11. Disturbance recorder .................................... 76
5.1.11.1. Function....................................... 76
5.1.11.2. Disturbance recorder data............... 77
5.1.11.3. Control and indication of
disturbance recorder status ............. 78
5.1.11.4. Triggering..................................... 78
5.1.11.5. Settings and unloading ................... 78
5.1.11.6. Event code of the disturbance
recorder ....................................... 79
5.1.12. Recorded data of the last events .................... 79
5.1.13. Communication ports.................................... 81
5.1.14. IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication
protocol...................................................... 82
5.1.15. Modbus remote communication protocol .......... 86
5.1.15.1. Profile of Modbus .......................... 87
5.1.16. DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol ........101
5.1.16.1. Protocol parameters......................102
5.1.16.2. DNP 3.0 point list .........................102
5.1.16.3. DNP 3.0 device profile ..................105
5.1.16.4. Specific DNP features ................... 112
5.1.17. SPA bus communication protocol parameters .. 115
5.1.17.1. Event codes ................................130
5.1.18. Self-supervision (IRF) system .......................135
5.1.19. Relay parameterization ................................137
5.2. Design description ..................................................137
5.2.1. Input/output connections ..............................137
5.2.2. Light sensor input connections ......................144
5.2.3. Serial communication connections .................144
5.2.4. Technical data ............................................150
6. Application examples ............................................ 157
6.1. Auto-reclose function ...............................................157
6.1.1. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two
protection stages ........................................157
4
6.1.2. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start

signals ......................................................158
6.1.3. Selecting adaptive sequence length ...............159
6.2. Arc protection.........................................................160
6.2.1. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay ...........160
6.2.2. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays .....161
6.2.3. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
and one REA 101 .......................................162
7. Ordering information ............................................. 165
8. Check lists ........................................................... 167
9. Abbreviations ....................................................... 173
5
6
Copyrights


license.
Trademarks
respective holders.
Guarantee
7
8
1. Introduction
1.1. This manual
This manual provides thorough information on the protection relay REF 610 and its
applications, focusing on giving a technical description of the relay.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to use the human-machine
interface (HMI) of the relay, also known as the man-machine interface (MMI), and
to the Installation Manual for installation of the relay.
1.2. Use of symbols

in personal injury.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

This manual is intended for operators and engineers to support normal use of as
well as configuration of the product.
9
In addition to the relay and this manual, the delivery contains the following relay-
specific documentation:
Table 1.4.-1 REF 610 product documentation

Name Document ID
Installation Manual 1MRS752265-MUM
Operator's Manual 1MRS755311
1.5. Document conventions
The following conventions are used for the presentation of material:

* Push button navigation in the human-machine interface (HMI) menu structure is
presented by using the push button icons, for example:
To navigate between the options, use and .
* HMI menu paths are presented as follows:
Use the arrow buttons to select CONFIGURATION\COMMUNICATION\SPA
SETTINGS\PASSWORD SPA.
* Parameter names, menu names, relay indication messages and relay's HMI views
are shown in a Courier font, for example:
Use the arrow buttons to monitor other measured values in the menus DEMAND
VALUES and HISTORY DATA.
* HMI messages are shown inside quotation marks when it is good to point out
them for the user, for example:
When you store a new password, the relay confirms the storage by flashing “- -
-” once on the display.
10

Version IED Date History
Revision
A A 05.10.2004 Document created. Version A2 includes
only a minor layout change.
B A 12.09.2005 Content updated
C A 25.01.2006 Minor layout update.
D C 30.11.2006 Content updated
E C 01.10.2007 Content updated
11
12


property damage.

installation.

followed.
When the plug-in unit has been detached from the case, do not touch
the inside of the case. The relay case internals may contain high
voltage potential and touching these may cause personal injury.

Breaking the sealing tape on the upper handle of the device will result
in loss of guarantee and proper operation will no longer be insured.
13
14
3. Product overview
3.1. Use of the relay
The feeder protection relay REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay
mainly designed to protectincoming and outgoing feeders in a wide range of feeder
applications.
The relay is based on a microprocessor environment. A self-supervision system

continuously monitors the operation of the relay.
The HMI includes a liquid crystal display (LCD) which makes the local use of the
relay safe and easy.
Local control of the relay via serial communication can be carried out with a
computer connected to the front communication port. Remote control can be carried
out via the rear connector connected to the control and monitoring system through
the serial communication bus.
3.2. Features
* Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with definite-time or IDMT
characteristic, low-set stage.
* Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, high-set stage
* Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage
* Non-directional earth-fault protection with definite-time or IDMT characteristic,
low-set stage
* Non-directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage.
* Phase discontinuity protection
* Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables
* Arc protection:
* Two lens sensors for arc detection (optional)
* Automatic reference level adjustment based on backlight intensity
* Arc detection via a remote light signal
* Automatic reclosing 1...3 shots
* Circuit-breaker failure protection
* Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring
* Trip-circuit supervision with possibility to route the warning signal to a signal
output
* Trip lockout function
* Four accurate current inputs
* User-selectable rated frequency 50/60 Hz
* Three normally open power output contacts
* Two change-over signal output contacts and three additional change-over signal
output contacts on the optional I/O module
* Output contact functions freely configurable for wanted operation
15
* Two galvanically isolated digital inputs and three additional galvanically isolated
digital inputs on the optional I/O module
* Disturbance recorder:
* Recording time up to 80 seconds
* Triggering by one or several internal or digital input signals
* Records four analog channels and up to eight user-selectable digital channels
* Adjustable sampling rate
* Non-volatile memory for:
* Up to 100 event codes with time stamp
* Setting values
* Disturbance recorder data
* Recorded data of the five last events with time stamp
* Number of AR shots and starts/trips for protection stages
* Operation indication messages and LEDs showing the status at the moment of
power failure
* HMI with an alphanumeric LCD and navigation buttons
* Eight programmable LEDs
* Multi-language support
* User-selectable password protection for the HMI
* Display of primary current values
* Demand values
* All settings can be modified with a PC
* Optical front communication connection: wirelessly or via cable
* Optional rear communication module with plastic fibre-optic, combined fibre-
optic (plastic and glass) or RS-485 connection for system communication using
the SPA-bus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus (RTU and ASCII) communication
protocol
* Optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection for
system communication using the DNP 3.0 communication protocol
* Battery back-up for real-time clock
* Battery charge supervision
* Continuous self-supervision of electronics and software
* Detachable plug-in unit
16
4. Application
REF 610 is a versatile multifunction protection relay mainly designed for protection
of incoming and outgoing feeders in MV distribution substations. The relay can also
be used as back-up protection for motors, transformers and generators, in industrial
as well as in utility applications.
The large number of integrated protection functions, including three-stage

overcurrent protection, two-stage, non-directional earth-fault protection as well as
thermal protection, makes the relay a complete protection against overcurrent and
earth faults.
The optional arc protection for detection of arc situations in air insulated metal-clad
switchgears and the auto-reclose function for automatic clearing of overhead line
faults increase the range of applications further.
The large number of digital inputs and output contacts allows a wide range of
applications.
4.1. Requirements
To secure correct and safe operation of the relay, preventive maintenance is

recommended to be performed every five years when the relay is operating under
the specified conditions; see Table 4.1.-1 and Section 5.2.4. Technical data.
When being used for real-time clock or recorded data functions, the battery should
be changed every five years.
Table 4.1.-1 Environmental conditions

Recommended temperature range (continuous) -10...+55°C
Limit temperature range (short-term) -40...+70°C
Temperature influence on the operation accuracy of the protection relay 0.1%/°C
within the specified service temperature range
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85°C
4.2. Configuration
The appropriate configuration of the output contact matrix enables the use of the
signals from the protection stages as contact functions. The start signals can be used
for blocking co-operating protection relays and signalling.
The figures below represent the relay with the default configuration: all trip signals
are routed to trip the circuit breaker.
In the first example Fig. 4.2.-1, the residual current is measured via a core-balance
current transformer and the output contacts are connected to enable the use of the
auto-reclose function. In the second example Fig. 4.2.-2, the residual current is
measured via a summation connection of the phase current transformers and the
output contacts are connected to enable the use of the trip lockout function with an
external reset switch.
17
L1
18
L2 +
0 -
L3
-
1
Fig. 4.2.-1
I O
REF 610
+ +
Uaux ~
-- -- + +
DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI2 DI 1 IR F SO2 SO1 PO3 PO2 PO 1 SO5 SO4 SO 3

X2.1 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 X3.1 6 5 4 3 2 1 X4.1 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 16 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 X3. 1
~
Self-supervision IRF
Optional
Optional
Warning
SG R5 SGR4 SGR3 SGR2 SGR1 SGR8 SGR7 SGR6
SGB5 SGB4 SGB3 SGB2 SGB1 I> 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Start
11 11 11 11 11 Trip 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Blocking
I>> Start 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12 12 12 12 12 Trip 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Blocking
I>>> Start 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trip 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Start 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Connection diagram, example 1

I0>
13 13 13 13 13 Trip 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Blocking
I 0 >> Start 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
14 14 14 14 14 Trip 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Blocking
DI> Start 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
15 15 15 15 15 Trip 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Blocking
q> Alarm 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
X5.1 Trip 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Light sensor 1 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
Light sensor 2 Arc I>/I 0 > Arc light output 23
9 9 9 9 9 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
X5.2 Opt ional Blocking Trip
0®1
18 18 18 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
CB Position Open Open CB Command
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
19 19 19 19 19 CB Position Closed Close CB Command 17

16 16 16 16 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
AR Inhibit CB Reclosing failed
17 17 17 17 17 CB Close Inhibit 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Shot Due
20 20 20 20 20 External AR Initiation 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Definite Trip Alarm
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
AR Lockout
Trip lockout
8 8 8 8 8
External Triggering
10 10 10 10 10 Reset Trip Lockout
6 6 6 6 6 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
External Trip External Trip
CBFP
7 7 7 7 7
External Triggering Trip
1 1 1 1 1
Indications cleared
2 2 2 2 2
Output contact unlatched
3 3 3 3 3 Memorized values cleared
4 4 4 4 4 Setting group selection
5 5 5 5 5 Time sync
SGF1...SGF5
SGL1...SGL8
= Factory default
= Example settings
A040309_2
1MRS755310
REF 610
19
A040310_2
L1
L2 -
L3 0
- 1
I O
+
U
aux ~
-
+
+ +
DI5 DI4 DI 3 DI2 DI1 IR F SO2 SO 1 PO3 PO2 PO 1 SO 5 SO4 SO3
X2. 1 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 X3. 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 X4. 1 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 16 1718 19 20 21 22 2324 X3.1
~
Self-supervision IRF Optional

Optional Warning
SGR5 SGR4 SGR3 SGR2 SGR1 SGR8 SG R7 SGR6
SGB5 SGB4 SGB3 SGB2 SGB1 I> Start 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 11 11 11 11 Trip 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Blocking
I>> Start 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12 12 12 12 12 Blocking Trip 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
I>>> Start 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trip 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
I0> Start 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Connection diagram, example 2

13 13 13 13 13 Blocking Trip 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
I 0 >> Start 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
14 14 14 14 14 Blocking Trip 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
DI> Start 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
15 15 15 15 15 Blocking Trip 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
q> Alarm 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
X5.1 Trip 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Light sensor 1
Light sensor 2 Arc I>/I 0 > Arc light outputt 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
9 9 9 9 9 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
X5.2 Opt ional Blocking Trip
0®1
18 18 18 18 18 Open CB Command 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
CB Position Open 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
19 19 19 19 19 CB Position Closed Close CB Command
16 16 16 16 16 CB Reclosing failed 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
AR Inhibit 20 20
17 17 17 17 17 Shot Due 20 20 20 20 20 20
CB Close Inhibit
20 20 20 20 20 Definite Trip Alarm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
External AR Initiation
AR Lockout 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
Trip lockout
8 8 8 8 8 External Triggering
10 10 10 10 10 Reset Trip Lockout
6 6 6 6 6 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
External Trip External Trip
CBFP
7 7 7 7 7
External Triggering Trip
1 1 1 1 1
Indications cleared
2 2 2 2 2
Output contact unlatched
1MRS755310
3 3 3 3 3 Memorized values cleared

4 4 4 4 4 Setting group selection
Fig. 4.2.-2
5 5 5 5 5 Time sync
SGF1...SGF5
SGL1...SGL8
= Factory default
= Example settings
20
5. Technical description
5.1. Functional description
5.1.1. Product functions
5.1.1.1. Protection functions
The protection functions of REF 610 with their IEC symbols and IEEE device
numbers are presented in the table below:
Table 5.1.1.1.-1 IEC symbols and IEEE device numbers

Function description IEC symbol IEEE Device No.
Three-phase non-directional I> 51
overcurrent protection, low-
set stage
Three-phase non-directional I>> 50/51
overcurrent protection, high-
set stage
Three-phase non-directional I>>> 50
overcurrent protection,
instantaneous stage
Phase discontinuity protection ΔI> 46
Three-phase thermal overload θ> 49
protection for cables
Non-directional earth-fault I0> 51N
protection, low-set stage
Non-directional earth-fault I0>> 50N/51N
protection, high-set stage
Arc protection ARC 50/50NL
Circuit-breaker failure CBFP 62BF
protection
Automatic reclosing 0→1 79
Lockout relay 86
For descriptions of the protection functions, refer to Section 5.1.4.11. Technical data
on protection functions.
5.1.1.2. Inputs
The relay is provided with four energizing inputs, two optional light sensor inputs,
two digital inputs and three optional digital inputs controlled by an external voltage.
Three of the energizing inputs are for the phase currents and one for the earth-fault
current.
The functions of the digital inputs are determined with the SGB switches. For
details, refer to Section 5.2.1. Input/output connections and Table 5.1.4.10.-7,
Table 5.2.1.-1 and Table 5.2.1.-5.
21
5.1.1.3. Outputs
The relay is provided with:

* Three power output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3
* Two signal output contacts SO1 and SO2
* Three optional signal output contacts SO3, SO4 and SO5
Switchgroups SGR1...8 are used for routing internal signals from the protection
stages, the external trip signal and signals from the auto-reclose function to the
wanted signal or power output contact. The minimum pulse length can be
configured to be 40 or 80 ms and the power output contacts can be configured to be
latched.
5.1.1.4. Disturbance recorder
The relay includes an internal disturbance recorder which records the momentary
measured values or the RMS curves of the measured signals, and up to eight user-
selectable digital signals: the digital input signals and the internal signals from the
protection stages. Any digital signal can be set to trigger the recorder on either the
falling or rising edge.
5.1.1.5. Front panel
The front panel of the relay contains:

* Alphanumeric 2 × 16 characters’ LCD with backlight and automatic contrast
control
* Threeindicator LEDs (green, yellow, red) with fixed functionality
* Eight programmable indicator LEDs (red)
* HMI push-button section with four arrow buttons and buttons for clear/cancel
and enter, used in navigating in the menu structure and in adjusting setting values
* Optically isolated serial communication port with an indicator LED.
There are two levels of HMI passwords; main HMI setting password for all settings
and HMI communication password for communication settings only.
The HMI passwords can be set to protect all user-changeable values from being
changed by an unauthorized person. Both the HMI setting password and the HMI
communication password remain inactive and are not required for altering parameter
values until the default HMI password is replaced.
Entering the HMI setting or communication password successfully can

be selected to generate an event code. This feature can be used to
indicate interaction activities via the local HMI.
For further information on the HMI, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
22
5.1.1.6. Non-volatile memory
The relay can be configured to store various data in a non-volatile memory, which
retains its data also in case of loss of auxiliary voltage (provided that the battery has
been inserted and is charged). Operation indication messages and LEDs, disturbance
recorder data, event codes and recorded data can all be configured to be stored in the
non-volatile memory whereas setting values are always stored in the EEPROM. The
EEPROM does not require battery backup.
5.1.1.7. Self-supervision
The self-supervision system of the relay manages run-time fault situations and
informs the user about an existing fault. There are two types of fault indications:
internal relay fault (IRF) indications and warnings.
When the self-supervision system detects a permanent internal relay fault, which
prevents relay operation, the green indicator LED (ready) will blink. At the same
time, the IRF contact (also referred to as the IRF relay), which is normally picked
up, drops off and a fault code appears on the LCD. The fault code is numerical and
identifies the fault type.
INTERNAL FAULT
FAULT CODE :30
A040278
Fig. 5.1.1.7.-1 Permanent IRF
In case of a warning, the relay continues to operate with full or reduced functionality
and the green indicator LED (ready) remains lit as during normal operation. A fault
indication message (see Fig. 5.1.1.7.-2), with a possible fault code (see
Fig. 5.1.1.7.-3), appears on the LCD indicating the type of fault. In case of a
warning due to an external fault in the trip circuit detected by the trip-circuit
supervision, or due to continuous light on the light sensor inputs, SO2 is activated
(if SGF1/8=1).
WARNING
BATTERY LOW
A040279
Fig. 5.1.1.7.-2 Warning with text message
23
WARNING
FAULT CODE: 33
A040280
Fig. 5.1.1.7.-3 Warning with numeric code
For fault codes, refer to Section 5.1.18. Self-supervision (IRF) system.
5.1.1.8. Time synchronization
Time synchronization of the relay’s real-time clock can be realized in two different
ways: via serial communication using a communication protocol or via a digital
input.
When time synchronization is realized via serial communication, the time is written
directly to the relay’s real-time clock.
Any digital input can be configured for time synchronization and used for either
minute-pulse or second-pulse synchronization. The synchronization pulse is
automatically selected and depends on the time range within which the pulse occurs.
Two detected pulses within acceptable time range are required before the relay
activates pulse synchronization. Respectively, if the synchronization pulses
disappear, the relay takes time that corresponds to the time range of four pulses
before de-activating pulse synchronization. The time must be set once, either via
serial communication or manually via the HMI.
When the time is set via serial communication and minute-pulse synchronization is
used, only year-month-day-hour-minute is written to the relay’s real-time clock, and
when second-pulse synchronization is used, only year-month-day-hour-minute-
second is written. The relay’s real-time clock will be rounded to the nearest whole
second or minute, depending on whether second- or minute-pulse synchronization is
used. When the time is set via the HMI, the entire time is written to the relay’s real-
time clock.
If the synchronization pulse differs more than ±0.05 seconds for second-pulse or ±2
seconds for minute-pulse synchronization from the relay’s real-time clock, the
synchronization pulse is rejected.
Time synchronization is always triggered on the rising edge of the digital input
signal. The time is adjusted by accelerating or decelerating the relay's clock. By this
way the clock neither stops nor makes sudden jumps during the time adjustment.
The typical accuracy achievable with time synchronization via a digital input is ±2.5
milliseconds for second-pulse and ±5 milliseconds for minute-pulse
synchronization.
24
The pulse length of the digital input signal does not affect time
synchronization.
If time synchronization messages are received from a communication

protocol as well, they have to be synchronized within ±0.5 minutes at
minute-pulse or ±0.5 seconds at second-pulse synchronization.
Otherwise the time difference may appear as rounding errors. If it is
possible that the synchronization messages from the communication
protocol are delayed more than 0.5 seconds, minute-pulse
synchronization must be used.
When the minute-pulse synchronization is active and long time format

is sent via a communication protocol, the protocol's second and
millisecond part is ignored. The protocol's minute part is rounded to
the nearest minute. Short time format is ignored altogether.
When the second-pulse synchronization is active and long or short time

format is sent via a communication protocol, the protocol's millisecond
part is ignored. The protocol's second-part is rounded to the nearest
second.
5.1.2. Measurements
The table below presents the measured values which can be accessed through the
HMI.
Table 5.1.2.-1 Measured values

Indicator Description
L1 Current measured on phase L1
I0 Measured earth-fault current
ΔI Calculated phase unbalance
θ Calculated thermal level
I1 minute The average current of the three phase-to-
phase currents during one minute
In minute The average current of the three phase-to-
phase currents during the specified time range
Max I The maximum of one-minute average current of
the I n_min
The Fig. 5.1.3.-1 illustrates how the internal and digital input signals can be
configured to obtain the required protection functionality.
25
26
REF 610
DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 EID SO2 SO1 PO3 PO2 PO1 SO5 SO4 SO3
X3.1 6 5 4 3 2 1 X4.1 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 X3.1
IRF Optional
Optional Self-supervision
Warning
SGR5 SGR4 SGR3 SGR2 SGR1 SGR8 SGR7 SGR6
Fig. 5.1.3.-1
SGB5 SGB4 SGB3 SGB2 SGB1 I> 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Start
11 11 11 11 11 Blocking Trip 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
I>> Start 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12 12 12 12 12 Blocking Trip 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IL1
IL2 I>>> Start 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
IL3 Trip 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
I0 > Start 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
13 13 13 13 13 Blocking Trip 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
corresponding SG_ tables.

Io 9
I0>> Start
14 14 14 14 14 Trip 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Blocking
DI> 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Signal diagram
Start
15 15 15 15 15 Blocking Trip 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
q> Alarm 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
X5.1 Trip 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Light sensor 1 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
Light sensor 2 Arc I>/I0> Arc light output
9 9 9 9 9 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
X5.2 External Arc Trip
Optional
0®1
18 18 18 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
CB Position Open Open CB Command
19 19 19 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
CB Position Closed Close CB Command
16 16 16 16 16 AR Inhibit CB Reclosing Failed 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
17 17 17 17 17 CB Close Inhibit Shot Due 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 External AR Initiation Definite Trip Alarm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
AR Lockout 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
Trip lockout
8 8 8 8 8 External Triggering
10 10 10 10 10 Reset Trip lockout
6 6 6 6 6 External trip 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
External Trip
CBFP
7 7 7 7 7 External Triggering Trip
1 1 1 1 1
Indications cleared
2 2 2 2 2
Output contacts unlatched
3 3 3 3 3
Memorized values cleared
4 4 4 4 4
Setting group selection
5 5 5 5 5
Time sync
SGF1...SGF5
SGL1...SGL8
= Factory default
the HMI menu. The functions of the switches are explained in detail in the
A040311_2
SGR and SGL. The checksums of the switchgroups are found under SETTINGS in
1MRS755310
The functions of the relay are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGF, SGB,
5.1.4. Protection
5.1.4.1. Block diagram
Switchgroups for Switchgroups for

digital inputs Protection relay functions programmable LEDs
SGB1...5 I> Io> SGL1...8
I> Trip
Reset 1 1)
I>> Trip
Reset 2 2)
I>>> Trip
Reset 3 3) Start Start
I0> Trip
Setting group Block Trip Block Trip
Time sync I0>> Trip
DI1 I>> Io>>
Digital inputs Ext Trip DI> Trip LED1
DI2 Ext Trig CBFP LED2
Q> Alarm
Optional digital DI3 Ext Trig Trip lockout LED3
DI4 Start Double Start Q> Trip
inputs Ext Arc Double LED4 Programmable
Trip Trip lockout
(I/O module) DI5 Trip lockout reset Block Trip Block LED5 LEDs
Definite Trip Alarm
Block I> I>>> DI> Shot Due LED6
Block I>> AR Lockout LED7
Block I0> CB Pos Open LED8
Block I0>> Start Start CB Pos Closed
Block DI> Trip Block Trip DI1
AR Inhibit DI2
I q> DI3
CB Close Inhibit
CB Pos Open DI4
CB Pos Closed IL1 Start DI5
Ext AR Initiation IL2 Alarm Arc Trip
IL3 Trip Arc light output
Io CBFP CBFP Trip
DR Triggered
IL1 Switchgroups for

IL2 PO1
Io output contacts
EXT TRIG PO2
IL3
Analogue inputs Trip lockout Arc I>, Arc I0> SGR1...5
I> Start
I> Trip
Ext Trig Light1 I>> Start
I0 Reset Light2 Light output I>> Trip
PO3 Trip lockout Ext Arc Trip I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
0®1, AR
I0> Start
Autoreclose
CB Pos Open Open CB Cmd I0> Trip PO1
Optional arc detector inputs Light sensor input1 CB Pos Closed PO2
Close CB Cmd I0>> Start Digital outputs
(Communication module) Light sensor input2 AR Inhibit PO3
CB Reclose Failed I0>> Trip (Output contacts)
CB Close Inhibit Shot Due SO1
Ext AR Initiation Definite Trip Alarm DI> Start SO2
I> Start AR Lockout DI> Trip SO3 Optional digital
I> Trip Block I> q> Alarm SO4 outputs
I>> Trip Block I>> q> Tr ip SO5 (I/O module)
I>>> Trip Block I>>> Ext Tr ip
Io> Start Block Io> Open CB Cmd
Io> Trip Block Io>> Close CB Cmd
Io>> Trip Definite Tr ip Alarm
DI> Trip CB Reclose Failled
Q> Alarm Shot Due
Q> Trip AR Lockout
Arc Trip Arc Tr ip
CBFP Arc light output
SGF1...SGF5 Tr ip lockout
Warning
Disturbance recorder, DR IRF
(4 analogue + up to 8 digital channels)
IL 1 DI1 I> Start IRF INDICATION IRF indication LED (green)
IL 2 DI2 I> Trip START/ALARM INDICATION Start/Alarm (yellow) and
IL 3 DI3 I>> Start TRIP INDICATION trip (red) indication LEDs
DI4 I>> Trip
I0 DI5 I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
I0> Start
The dashed line indicates optional functionality. I0> Trip
I0>> Start
1) Clear indications by the digital input signal I0>> Trip
2) Clear indications and unlatch output contacts by the
digital input signal DI> Start
3) Reset indications and memorized values; unlatch output DI> Trip
contacts by the digital input signal q> Alarm
q> Trip
A040312_2
Fig. 5.1.4.1.-1 Block diagram
5.1.4.2. Overcurrent protection
The non-directional overcurrent protection detects overcurrent caused by phase-to-

phase and phase-to-earth short circuits.
27
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the low-set stage,
I>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 55 ms’ start time. When the set
operate time at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT
characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal.
Stage I> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT
characteristics), tr>, for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or
for reducing fault clearance times of recurring, transient faults. If stage I> has started
and the phase currents fall below the set start value of the stage, the start of the stage
will remain active for the set resetting time. If the phase currents exceed the set start
value again, while the timer is being reset, the start of the stage will remain active.
Consequently, the set resetting time ensures that when the stage starts because of
current spikes, it will not be immediately reset. However, if stage I> has already
tripped, the stage will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen
below 0.5 times the set start value of the stage.
The inverse-time function of stage I> can be set to be inhibited when stage I>> and/
or I>>> starts. In this case, the operate time will be determined by stage I>> and/or
I>>>. The selection is made in SGF4.
It is possible to block the tripping of the low-set overcurrent stage by applying a

digital input signal to the relay.
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the high-set stage,
I>>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time. When the set
operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip
signal. Stage I>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate
time to the minimum, i.e. 0.04 s.
The set start value of stage I>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start
situation, i.e. when the object to be protected is being connected to a network.
Consequently, a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be
selected for stage I>>. A start situation is defined as a situation where the maximum
phase current rises from a value below 0.12 x I> to a value above 1.5 x I> within
less than 60 ms. The start situation ends when all phase currents fall below 1.25 x I>
and remain below for at least 200 ms. The selection is made in SGF4.
It is possible to block the tripping of the high-set overcurrent stage by applying a

Stage I>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication.
When one or several phase currents exceed the set start value of the instantaneous
stage, I>>>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 30 ms’ start time. When
the set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a
trip signal. Stage I>>> can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the
operate time to the minimum, i.e. 0.04 s.
28
Stage I>>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by
dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial
communication.
Stages I>> and I>>> will be reset in 50 ms after all three phase currents have fallen
below the set start value of the stage.
Stages I> andI>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose function.
5.1.4.3. Earth-fault protection
The non-directional earth-fault current protection detects phase-to-earth currents,

caused by insulation failure due to ageing and thermal cycling, for instance.
When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the low-set stage, I0>, the
stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 60 ms’ start time. When the set operate
time at definite-time characteristic or the calculated operate time at IDMT
characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal. The low-set stage can be
given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate time to the minimum, i.e.
0.05 s.
Stage I0> has a settable resetting time (both at definite-time and IDMT
characteristics), t0r>, for reset coordination with existing electromechanical relays or
for reducing fault clearance times of recurring, transient faults. If stage I0> has
started and the earth-fault current falls below the set start value of the stage, the start
of the stage will remain active for the set resetting time. If the earth-fault current
exceeds the set start value again, while the timer is being reset, the start of the stage
will remain active. Consequently, the set resetting time ensures that when the stage
starts because of current spikes, it will not be immediately reset. However, if stage
I0> has already tripped, the stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault current
has fallen below 0.5 times the set start value of the stage.
The inverse-time function of stage I0> can be set to be inhibited when stage I0>>
starts. In this case, the operate time will be determined by stage I0>>. The selection
is made in SGF4.
When the earth-fault current exceeds the set start value of the high-set stage, I0>>,
the stage will generate a start signal after a ~ 40 ms’ start time. When the set operate
time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip signal. The
high-set stage can be given an instantaneous characteristic by setting the operate
time to the minimum, i.e. 0.05 s. The stage will be reset in 50 ms after the earth-fault
current has fallen below the set start value of the stage.
The set start value of stage I0>> can be set to be automatically doubled in a start
situation, i.e. when the object to be protected is being connected to a network.
Consequently, a set start value below the connection inrush current level can be
selected for the stage. A start situation is defined as a situation where the earth-fault
29
current rises from a value below 0.12 x I0> to a value above 1.5 x I0> within less
than 60 ms. The start situation ends when the current falls below 1.25 x I0> and
remain below for at least 200 ms. The selection is made in SGF4.
Consider carefully when using the automatically doubled setting for

the set start value of stage I0>>.
Stage I0>> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by
dashes on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial
communication. It is possible to block the tripping of an earth-fault stage by
applying a digital input signal to the relay.
Stages I0> and I0>> can be set to be blocked by the auto-reclose

function.
5.1.4.4. Thermal protection for cables
The thermal protection detects long-time overloads during normal operation.

Prolonged overloading results in the thermal stress capacity of the cable being
exceeded, which degrades the insulation of the cable, which in turn may cause a
short circuit or an earth fault. The heating up of the cable follows an exponential
curve, the levelled-out value of which is determined by the squared value of the load
current. The thermal protection may equally well be used to protect dry-type
transformers, capacitor banks, busbars and overhead lines, for instance.
The thermal protection stage continuously calculates the thermal capacity used as a
percentage of the cable’s total thermal capacity. The thermal capacity is calculated
as follows:
2
 I 
 × (1 − e ) × 100%
−t / τ
θ= (1)
 1.05 × Iθ 
θ = thermal capacity
I = phase current value
Iθ = set full load current
t = time (in minutes)
τ = time constant (in minutes)
When one or several phase currents exceed the set full load current, Iθ, stage θ> will
start. At the same time, the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate depending
on the current amplitude and the prior load of the cable.
When the thermal capacity, influenced by the thermal history of the cable, exceeds
the set alarm level, θa>, the stage will generate an alarm signal. The thermal alarm
can be used to avoid unnecessary tripping due to a beginning overload. The thermal
level at various constant currents are presented in the table below:
30
Table 5.1.4.4.-1 Thermal level at constant currents

I/Iθ Thermal level (%)
1.0 90.7
0.9 73.5
0.8 58
0.7 44.4
0.5 22.7
0.3 8.2
0 0
When the thermal capacity exceeds the trip level, θt>, the stage will generate a trip
signal. The operate time, i.e. the time from when the stage starts until it trips, is
determined by the time constant, τ, and depends on the cable (cable cross section
area and cable rated voltage). The time constant is provided by the cable
manufacturer. For a 22 kV cable, the typical time constant is 20 minutes. For operate
times, see Fig. 5.1.4.4.-1...Fig. 5.1.4.4.-3. The operate time is calculated as follows:
 (I / I ) 2 − (I / I ) 2 
 θ p θ 
t = τ × ln   (2)
 (I / Iθ ) − 1.1025 
2
I = phase current value

Iθ = set full load current
Ip = prior load current
t = operate time (in minutes)
τ = time constant (in minutes)
ln = natural logarithm
At power up, the thermal level will be set to 75 percent of the thermal capacity of
the cable. This will ensure that the stage will trip within a safe time span in case of
an overload. The calculated thermal level will approach the thermal level of the
cable.
Stage θ> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set full load current is read via serial
communication.
At an alarm level below 75 percent, connecting the auxiliary supply to

the relay will cause a thermal alarm due to the initialization of the
thermal level to 75 percent of the thermal capacity of the cable. The
thermal level can be reset via the HMI during power up.
The thermal level can be reset or changed via serial communication,

which will generate an event code.
31
t/s
100000
10000
1000
t[min]
100
90
60
40
25
10 15
10
1
1
1.05
0
1 10 I/I q
A040313
Fig. 5.1.4.4.-1 Trip curves when no prior load
32
t/s
100000
10000
1000
t[min]
100
90
60
40
10 25
15
10
5
1
1.05
0
1 10 I/Iq
A040314
Fig. 5.1.4.4.-2 Trip curves at prior load 0.7 x Iθ
33
t/s
100000
10000
1000
t[min]
100
10
90
60
40
25
1
15
10
5
1
1.05
0
1 10 I/Iq
A040315
Fig. 5.1.4.4.-3 Trip curves at prior load I x Iθ
34
5.1.4.5. Phase discontinuity protection
The phase discontinuity protection detects phase unbalance between phases IL1, IL2
and IL3, caused by a broken conductor, for instance. The difference between the
minimum and maximum phase currents is calculated as follows:
(Imax − Imin )
∆I = × 100% (3)
Im ax
When the current difference exceeds the set start value of the phase discontinuity
stage, ΔI>, the stage will generate a start signal after a ~100 ms’ start time. When the
set operate time at definite-time characteristic elapses, the stage will generate a trip
signal. The stage will be reset in 70 ms after the current difference has fallen below
the set start value of the stage.
The phase discontinuity protection will be inhibited when all phase currents fall
below 0.1 x In.
It is possible to block the tripping of the phase discontinuity stage by applying a

Stage ΔI> can be set out of operation in SGF3. This state will be indicated by dashes
on the LCD and by “999” when the set start value is read via serial communication.
5.1.4.6. Circuit-breaker failure protection
The circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) detects situations where the trip
remains active although the circuit breaker should have operated.
If a trip signal generated via output PO1 is still active and the current has not been
cut off on expiration of the CBFP set operate time, the CBFP generates a trip signal
via output PO2.
The CBFP is not triggered in case of:

* Thermal alarm
* Thermal trip
* External trip
The CBFP can also be selected to be triggered externally by applying a digital input
signal to the relay. In this case, the CBFP generates a trip signal via output PO2 if
the current has not been cut off on expiration of the set operate time.
External triggering is inhibited when all phase currents fall below 12 percent of the
rated current, In.
Internal triggering is selected by activating the CBFP in SGF and external triggering
by activating the CBFP in SGB. Both triggering options can be selected at the same
time.
35
Normally, the CBFP controls the upstream circuit breaker. However, it can also be
used for tripping via redundant trip circuits of the same circuit breaker.
5.1.4.7. Arc protection
The arc protection detects arc situations in air insulated metal-clad switchgears,
caused by human error during maintenance or poor contact in the cable connections,
for instance. Local light detection requires the optional arc light detection hardware.
The arc protection can be realized as a stand-alone function in a single REF 610 or
as a station-wide arc protection including several REF 610 protection relays. If
realized as a station-wide arc protection, different tripping schemes can be selected
for the operation of the circuit breakers of the incoming and outgoing feeders.
Consequently, the REF 610 relays in the station can, for instance, be set to trip the
circuit breaker of either the incoming or the outgoing feeder depending on the fault
location in the switchgear. For maximum safety, the REF 610 relays can be set to
always trip both the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and that of the outgoing
feeder.
The arc protection consists of:

* Optional arc light detection hardware with automatic backlight compensation for
two lens sensors
* A light signal output for routing the locally detected light signal to another relay
* The protection stage ARC with phase- and earth-fault current measurement.
The light from an arc is detected either locally or via a remote light signal. Locally,
the light is detected by lens sensors connected to inputs Light sensor 1 and Light
sensor 2 on the serial communication module of the relay. The lens sensors can be
placed, for instance, in the busbar compartment and the cable compartment of the
metal-clad cubicle.
The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted

reference level. Inputs Light sensor 1 and Light sensor 2 have their own reference
levels. When the reference level of either or both inputs is exceeded, an arc has been
detected locally. When light has been detected locally or remotely and one or several
phase currents exceed the set current limit ArcI>, or the earth-fault current the set
current limit ArcI0>, the arc protection stage (ARC) will generate a trip signal in less
than 15 ms. The stage will be reset in 30 ms after all three phase currents and the
earth-fault current have fallen below the set current limits.
The light signal output, L>, can be configured to be activated either immediately
upon detection of light in all situations, or only when the arc has not been
extinguished by the time the trip signal is generated. The selection is made in SGF4.
By routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a digital input of
another REF 610 relay, a station-wide arc protection is realized.
stage ARC and the light signal output can be set out of operation in SGF3.
Inputs not in use should be covered with dust caps.
36
The warning signal generated in case of continuous light on the light

sensor inputs can be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/8 to 1.
Arc protection
IL SGF3/6=1
Arc I> 25 ms Arc Trip
I0
Arc I0>
External Arc
SGF3/7=1
L> light output
Light sensor 1 SGF4/6=0 AND
OR
Light sensor 2
A040316_2
Fig. 5.1.4.7.-1 Block diagram of the arc protection
5.1.4.8. Auto-reclose function
The vast majority of MV overhead line faults are transient and automatically cleared
by momentarily de-energizing the line. De-energizing of the fault location for a
selected time period is implemented through automatic reclosing, during which
most faults can be cleared.
At a permanent fault, auto-reclosing is followed by definite tripping. A permanent

fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The auto-reclose (AR) function of REF 610 can be used with any circuit breaker
suitable for auto-reclosing. The AR function provides three programmable auto-
reclose shots and can thus be set to perform one to three successive auto-reclosures
of desired type and duration, one high-speed and one delayed, for instance.
The AR function can be initiated by pickup and trip signals from certain overcurrent
and earth-fault protection stages. Consequently, tripping of the arc protection stage,
for instance, does not initiate the AR function. Initiation is also possible from an
external device via a digital input.
The AR function can be inhibited (AR inhibit) by trip signals from certain
protection stages or via a digital input. Inhibition is advantageous with tripping
faults as this type of fault cannot be cleared during an auto-reclose sequence.
Tripping faults are detected by the CBFP, for instance. Inhibition will also interrupt
any ongoing shot.
The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by trip
signals from certain protection stages. Blocking is also possible via a digital input.
Blocking can be used to limit the number of shots in an auto-reclose sequence,
which may be advantageous with certain types of faults. In case of shot initiation
while a blocking is active, the next shot will be initiated.
37
The AR function monitors the position and status of the circuit breaker. Information
on the circuit-breaker position is always required whereas circuit-breaker status is
optional. For safety reasons, shot initiation is not possible when the circuit breaker is
open. If the circuit breaker is not ready, due to an discharged spring, for instance,
reclosing can be inhibited via a digital input (CB Close inhibit). Inhibition of
reclosing is checked only when necessary and can therefore not be used to prevent
initiation or progression of a shot.
For co-ordination of the other protection devices in the network, such as down-
stream fuses, the AR function supports optional blocking of selectable overcurrent
and earth-fault protection stages (refer to section Blocking of protection stages). By
setting a stage with a short operate time to trip and initiate only the first auto-reclose
shot, fast tripping and shot initiation will be achieved. After this, the stage will be
blocked to allow selective delayed tripping of another stage in accordance with the
time-grading plan of the system.
The typical auto-reclose sequence is as follows: the overcurrent or earth-fault

protection detects a network fault, trips the circuit breaker and initiates the first auto-
reclose shot. At the time of shot initiation, the set dead time for shot 1 will start.
When the set dead time elapses, the blocking of selected protection stages will be
activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command (Close CB
Command) to the circuit breaker, the duration of which is settable. In addition, the
set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. The
blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the cutout time. For the
cutout time, refer to section Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two
protection stages.
If the network fault is cleared, i.e. the auto-reclosure is successful, the set reclaim
time will expire and the AR function will be automatically reset to the quiescent
condition.
However, if the network fault is not cleared, i.e. the auto-reclosure is unsuccessful,
and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of the set reclaim time,
the next shot will be initiated (provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). At
the time of shot initiation, the set dead time for shot 2 will start. When the set dead
time elapses, the blocking of selected protection stages (may differ from shot 1) will
be activated and the AR function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit
breaker. In addition, the set reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set
dead time elapses. The blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of
the set cutout time.
If the network fault is cleared, the AR function will be automatically reset after the
reclaim time. However, if the fault is not cleared and the protection trips the circuit
breaker before expiration of the reclaim time, the next shot will be initiated
(provided that a further auto-reclosure is allowed). At the time of shot initiation, the
set dead time for shot 3 will start. When the set dead time elapses, the blocking of
selected protection stages (the same as for shot 2) will be activated and the AR
function will issue a reclosing command to the circuit breaker. In addition, the set
reclaim time and set cutout time will start when the set dead time elapses. The
blocking of protection stages will be reset on expiration of the set cutout time.
38
If the network fault has still not been cleared, i.e. all selected auto-reclose shots have
been unsuccessful, and the protection trips the circuit breaker before expiration of
the set reclaim time, the AR function will generate a definite trip alarm. The circuit
breaker will now remain open and the AR function will be locked out.
As default, the AR function is not in use (number of auto-reclose shots = 0). The AR
function can be activated either via the HMI or with SPA parameter S25 by setting
the number of auto-reclose shots to 1, 2 or 3.
OR S
Shot Due
Dead time R
t
Shot 1
Shot Initiation t
Shot 2 OR
Shot 3 t
AND
CB Close Inhibit
S Close CB Command
CB position closed
CB closing time OR R
t
CB Reclosing Failed
AND
A040317
Fig. 5.1.4.8.-1 Simplified shot logic diagram
Shot initiation
The AR function can be initiated by any of the following signals:

* External AR initiation signal
* Start signal from stages I> and I0>
* Trip signal from stages I>, I>>, I0> and I0>>
The start signal from stages I>, and I0> will initiate a shot on expiration of a settable
start delay for the respective stage. At the factory default delay of 300 s, the start
signal will, in practise, not be used for shot initiation. External AR initiation by the
digital input signal is selected in SGB.
Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite

tripping.
The AR function will issue an opening command to the circuit breaker

at shot initiation by a start or a trip signal.
39
100 ms
CB position closed t
Shot Due AND
Shot Initiation
I>> Trip AND
Ext AR Initiation
I> Trip
I> start delay
OR Open CB Command
t
I> Start *) OR
Io>> Trip
Io> Trip OR
Io> start delay
Io> Start *) t
SG1/ Blocking of shot

1...8
*) Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1 and definite tripping.
A040318
Fig. 5.1.4.8.-2 Simplified shot initiation logic diagram
Blocking of shot initiation
The initiation of one or several auto-reclose shots can be set to be blocked by any of
the following signals:
* External AR initiation signal
* Trip signal from overcurrent stages I> and I>>
* Trip signal from earth-fault stages I0> and I0>>
The selection is made in SG1 (see Table 5.1.4.10.-10).
Blocking of shot initiation can also be used to skip the entire shot sequence (by
blocking the initiation of all three shots), and go directly to definite tripping.
Further, it can be used, for instance, to allow shot initiation by the trip signal from
stage I>, but to go directly to definite tripping in case of shot initiation by the trip
signal from stage I>>.
Activation of any above-mentioned signal will always cause the AR

function to issue an opening command to the circuit breaker. If the
signal used for blocking is not simultaneously used for initiation of the
next shot, the AR function will generate a definite trip alarm and be
locked out.
Shot initiation is blocked only for as long as the blocking signal is

active.
In case of shot initiation while a blocking is active, the next shot (if
such has been selected and not blocked) will be initiated. This can be
used to skip Shot 1, for instance.
40
Inhibition of the auto-reclose function
The AR function can be inhibited (AR inhibit) by any of the following signals:
* external AR inhibit signal
* trip signal from the arc protection stage, ARC
* trip signal from the thermal protection stage, θ>
* trip signal from the CBFP
* alarm signal from the thermal protection stage, θ>
* trip signal from overcurrent stage I>>>
* trip signal from earth-fault stage I0>>
* trip signal from the phase discontinuity stage, DI>
The trip signals from stages ARC and θ> and from the CBFP are fixed and will thus
always inhibit the AR function. External CBFP inhibition by the digital input signal
is selected in SGB, and the alarm signal from stage θ> and the trip signals from
stages I>>>, I0>> and ΔI> in SG3 (see Table 5.1.4.10.-12).
The AR function will remain inhibited after all inhibition signals have
been reset for a time equal in length to the set reclaim time.
Inhibition will always also interrupt any ongoing shot.
Information on the circuit-breaker position
The AR function requires information on the circuit-breaker position. Any digital

input can be selected for the information on the circuit breaker being open (CB
Position Open) and closed (CB Position Closed) in SGB. Normally, two
digital inputs is recommended although either one is enough for the AR function.
Information on the circuit-breaker position is used in the following situations:

* At manual circuit-breaker closing, the AR function will be inhibited for the
reclaim time.
* At manual circuit-breaker closing during an ongoing shot, the shot will be
interrupted and the AR function inhibited during the reclaim time.
* Shot initiation is allowed only when the circuit breaker is closed.
* Reclosing of the circuit breaker is ended immediately after the AR function has
received information that the circuit breaker has been closed.
41
Circuit-breaker closing
When the set dead time elapses, the AR function will issue a reclosing command to
the circuit breaker (Close CB Command). Reclosing can be inhibited via a digital
input (CB Close inhibit). External inhibition of reclosing by the digital input
signal is selected in SGB.
When reclosing is inhibited, or the circuit breaker does not close before expiration
of the set CB closing time, the circuit breaker will remain open and the AR function
will generate a CB Reclosing Failed signal.
Reclosing is inhibited and the CB Reclosing Failed signal generated also if an

AR initiation signal is active, i.e. the fault has not been cleared, when reclosing
begins.
The duration of the reclosing command is settable (CB closing time). However,
reclosing of the circuit breaker will end immediately after the AR function has
received information that the circuit breaker has been closed, or if a protection trips
the circuit breaker again.
Blocking of protection elements
In several applications, such as fuse-saving (refer to 6.1.1. Fast tripping and

initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages), the aim is at fast tripping and
initiation of shot 1 and delayed tripping and initiation of shot 2 and 3. Consequently,
if two protection s are used, one fast and the other one delayed, the fast stage should
be set to be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3.
The protection stages can be set to be blocked at shot 1 and/or shot 2 and 3. The
selection is made in SG2 (see Table 5.1.4.10.-11).
Definite trip alarm
The AR function generates a definite trip alarm signal after an unsuccessful auto-
reclose sequence, i.e. when no more auto-reclose shots are allowed but the network
fault has not be cleared, the circuit breaker is open and there is no ongoing shot. The
definite trip alarm signal is also be generated in case a protection trips the circuit
breaker while the AR function is inhibited.
The definite trip alarm signal is active for 1 second.
The definite trip alarm signal will not be generated if the AR function
has been set out of operation.
42
Lockout of the auto-reclose function
The lockout signal indicates whether the AR function is ready for shot initiation.
The AR function will be locked out in any of the following situations:
* The AR function generates a definite trip alarm
* The AR function is inhibited
* Circuit-breaker closing fails
* Manual circuit-breaker closing is detected
The lockout signal is reset and the AR function ready for shot initiation on
expiration of the set reclaim time. The set reclaim time starts when the definite trip
alarm signal, the AR inhibition signal or the CB reclosing failed signal has
been reset or the circuit breaker closed, depending on the reason for the AR function
being locked.
5.1.4.9. Inverse definite minimum time characteristics
The low-set overcurrent and earth-fault stages can be given an inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. At IDMT characteristic, the operate time of
the stage is dependent on the current value: the higher the current value, the shorter
the operate time.
The relay provides nine IDMT characteristics, of which four comply with the IEC
60255-3 and three with the IEEE C37.112 standard. Two are special characteristics
according to ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD.
The time/current characteristics can be selected either via the HMI or the SPA bus as
follows:
Table 5.1.4.9.-1 Time/current characteristic settings

Value Time/current characteristic
0 Definite time
1 IEC Extremely inverse
2 IEC Very inverse
3 IEC Normal inverse
4 IEC Long-time inverse
5 RI-type
6 IEEE Extremely inverse
7 IEEE Very inverse
8 IEEE inverse
9 RD-type (RXIDG)
IDMT characteristics according to IEC 60255-3
The relay provides four time/current curve groups which comply with the
IEC 60255-3 standard: normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and long-
time inverse. The relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:
43
 
 β 
t [ s] =  α ×k (4)
 I 
 − 1
I> 
t = operate time
I = phase (or earth-fault) current value
k (or k0) = time multiplier
I> (or I0>) = set start value
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 5.1.4.9.-1...Fig. 5.1.4.9.-
4), includes an additional filter and detection time, and the operate time
of the trip output contact. When the operate time of the relay is
calculated as above, approximately 30 ms should be added to the
result.
Table 5.1.4.9.-2 Values of constants α and β

Time/current curve group α β
Normal inverse 0.02 0.14
Very inverse 1.0 13.5
Extremely inverse 2.0 80.0
Long-time inverse 1.0 120
According to the standard, the normal current range is 2...20 times the set start value
at normal inverse, very inverse or extremely inverse characteristic. The relay is to
start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1.3 times. At long-time inverse
characteristic, the normal current range is specified to be 2...7 times the set start
value, and the relay is to start before the current exceeds the set start value by 1.1
times
Table 5.1.4.9.-3 Operate time tolerances specified by the standard

I/I>a) Normalb) Veryb) Extremelyb) Long timeb)
2 2,22E 2,34E 2,44E 2,34E
5 1,13E 1,26E 1,48E 1,26E
7 - - - 1,00E
10 1,01E 1,01E 1,02E -
20 1,00E 1,00E 1,00E -
a)
or I0/I0>
b)
E = accuracy in percent; - = not specified
Within the normal current range the inverse-time stage fulfils the tolerance
requirements of class 5 at all degrees of inversity.
44
The time/current curve groups based on the IEC standard are illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-1...Fig. 5.1.4.9.-4.
If the ratio between the current and the set start value is higher than 20,
the operate time is the same as when the ratio is 20.
45
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 k
1.0
2 0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1
0.9 0.4
0.8
0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I>
A040319
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-1 Normal inverse-time characteristic
46
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
0.9 k
0.8
0.7 1.0
0.9
0.6 0.8
0.5 0.7
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.3 0.4
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.09 0.1
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
A040320
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-2 Very inverse-time characteristic
47
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
k
0.2 1.0
0.8
0.6
0.1
0.09 0.4
0.08
0.07 0.3
0.06
0.2
0.05
0.04
0.1
0.03 0.05
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
A040321
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-3 Extremely inverse-time characteristic
48
t/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8 k
7
1.0
6 0.9
5 0.8
0.7
4 0.6
0.5
3
0.4
2
0.3
0.2
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.1
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.05
0.3
0.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I>
A040322
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-4 Long-time inverse-time characteristic
49
IDMT characteristics according to the IEEE C37.112
REF 610 provides three time/current curve groups which comply with the
IEEE C37.112 standard: extremely inverse, very inverse and inverse. The
relationship between time and current is expressed as follows:
 
 
 A
t [ s] = + B ×n (5)
  I P 
   − 1 
 I >  
t = operate time
n (or n0) = time multiplier
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 5.1.4.9.-5...Fig. 5.1.4.9.-
7), includes an additional filter and detection time, and the operate time
of the trip output contact. When the operate time of the relay is
calculated as above, approximately 30 ms should be added to the
result.
Table 5.1.4.9.-4 Values of constants A, B and P

Time/current curve group A B P
Extremely inverse 6.407 0.025 2.0
Very inverse 2.855 0.0712 2.0
Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
The time/current curve groups based on the IEEE standard are illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-5...Fig. 5.1.4.9.-7.
50
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
0.9
0.8 n
0.7
0.6 15
0.5 12
0.4 10
8
0.3
6
5
0.2
4
0.1 2
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 1
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
A040323
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-5 Extremely inverse-time characteristic
51
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
n
15
1
0.9 12
0.8 10
0.7
0.6 8
0.5 6
0.4 5
4
0.3
3
0.2
2
0.1 1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
A040324
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-6 Very inverse-time characteristic
52
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 n
15
2 12
10
8
1 6
0.9
0.8 5
0.7 4
0.6
0.5 3
0.4
2
0.3
0.2
1
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I/I>
A040325
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-7 Inverse-time characteristic
53
RI-type characteristic
The RI-type characteristic is a special characteristic which is principally used for

obtaining time grading with mechanical relays. The relationship between time and
current is expressed as follows:
k
t [ s] =
I> (6)
0.339 − 0.236 ×
I
t = operate time
The actual operate time of the relay (see Fig. 5.1.4.9.-8), includes an
additional filter and detection time, and the operate time of the trip
output contact. When the operate time of the relay is calculated as
above, approximately 30 ms should be added to the result.
The RI-type characteristic is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.4.9.-8.
54
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4 k
3 1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
2
0.6
0.5
0.4
1 0.3
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.05
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 I/I>
A040326
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-8 RI-type characteristic
55
RD-type characteristic (RXIDG)
The RD-type characteristic is a special characteristic, which is principally used in

earth-fault protection and which requires a high degree of selectivity even at high
resistance faults. The protection can operate in a selective way even if it is not
directional. Mathematically, the time/current characteristic can be expressed as
follows:
 I 
t [ s] = 5.8 − 1.35 × loge   (7)
 k ×I > 
t = operate time
The actual operate time of the relay includes an additional filter and
detection time and the operate time of the trip output contact. When the
operate time of the relay is calculated as above, approximately 30 ms
should be added to the result.
If the ratio between the current and the set start value is higher than 40,
the operate time will be the same as when the ratio is 40.
The RD-type characteristic is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.4.9.-9.
56
t/s
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1 k
0 .9
0 .8 1.0
0 .7 0.9
0 .6
0.8
0 .5
0 .4
0.7
0 .3
0 .2
0.6
0 .1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.03
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 I / I >
A051411
Fig. 5.1.4.9.-9 RD-type inverse-time characteristic
5.1.4.10. Settings
There are two alternative setting groups available, setting groups 1 and 2. Either of
these setting groups can be used as the actual settings, one at a time. Both groups
have their related registers. By switching between the setting groups, a whole group
of settings can be changed at the same time. This can be done in any of the
following ways:
* Via the HMI
* Entering SPA parameter V150 via serial communication
* Via a digital input
57
Switching between setting groups via a digital input has a higher

priority than via the HMI or with the parameter V150.
The setting values can be altered via the HMI or with a PC provided with Relay
Setting Tool.
Before the relay is connected to a system it must be assured that the relay has been
given the correct settings. If there is any doubt, the setting values should be read
with the relay trip circuits disconnected or tested with current injection; refer to
Section 8. Check lists for additional information.

Setting Description Setting range Default setting
I>/In Start value of stage I> 0.30...5.00 x In 0.30 x In
t> Operate time of stage I> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
IDMT I> Time/current characteristic for stage 0...9 0
I>
k Time multiplier k 0.05...1.00 0.05
n Time multiplier n 1.0...15.0 1.0
tr> Resetting time of stage I> 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
I>>/In Start value of stage I>> 0.50...35.0 x In 0.50 x In
t>> Operate time of stage I>> 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
I>>>/In Start value of stage I>>> 0.50...35.0 x In 0.50 x In
t>>> Operate time of stage I>>> 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
I0>/In Start value of stage I0> 1.0...100% In 1.0% In
t0> Operate time of stage I0> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
IDMT I0> Time/current characteristic for stage 0...9 0
I0>
k0 Time multiplier k0 0.05...1.00 0.05
n0 Time multiplier n0 1.0…15.0 1.0
t0r> Resetting time of stage I0> 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
I0>>/In Start value of stage I0>> 5.0...800% In 5.0% In
t0>> Operate time of stage I0> 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
ΔI> Start value of stage ΔI> 10...100% 100 %
t Δ> Operate time of stage ΔI> 1...300 s 60 s
Iθ Full load current 0.30...1.50 x In 0.30 x In
T Time constant of stage θ> 1...200 min 1 min
θa> Alarm level of stage θ> 50...100% θt> 95% θt>
CBFP Operate time of CBFP 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
0→1 Number of AR shots 0 = AR is not in use 0
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and 3
ArcI> Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC 0.50...35.0 x In 2.50 x In
ArcI0> Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC 5.0...800% In 20.0% In
58
Switchgroups and parameter masks
The settings can be altered and the functions of the relay selected in the SG_ selector
switchgroups. The switchgroups are software based and thus not physical switches
to be found in the hardware of the relay.
A checksum is used for verifying that the switches have been properly set. The
Fig. 5.1.4.10.-1 shows an example of manual checksum calculation.
Switch Position Weighting Value

number factor
1 1 x 1 = 1
2 0 x 2 = 0
3 1 x 4 = 4
4 0 x 8 = 0
5 1 x 16 = 16
0 x 0
6 32 =
1 64
7 x 64 =
0
8 0 x 128 =
256
9 1 x 256 =
0
10 0 x 512 = 1024
11 1 x 1024 = 0
12 0 x 2048 = 4096
13 1 x 4096 = 0
14 0 x 8192 = 4096
15 1 x 16384 = 0
16 0 x 32768 = 16384
17 1 x 65536 = 0
65536
18 0 x 131072 =
0
19 1 x 262144 = 262144
20 0 x 524288 = 0
21 1 x 1048576 = 1048576
22 0 x 2097152 = 0
23 1 x 4194304 = 4194304
checksum SG_ S = 5505024

A051892
Fig. 5.1.4.10.-1 Example of calculating the checksum of a SG_ selector switchgroup
When the checksum, calculated according to the example above, equals the
checksum of the switchgroup, the switches in the switchgroup are properly set.
The factory default settings of the switches and the corresponding checksums are
presented in the following tables.
SGF1...SGF5
Switchgroups SGF1...SGF5 are used for configuring the wanted function as

follows:
59
Table 5.1.4.10.-2 SGF1

Switch Function Default setting
SGF1/1 Selection of the latching feature for PO1 0
* When the switch is in position 0 and the measuring signal which caused the trip falls below
the set start value, the output contact returns to its initial state.
*
When the switch is in position 1, the output contact remains active although the measuring
signal which caused the trip falls below the set start value.
A latched output contact can be unlatched either via the HMI, a digital input or the serial bus.
SGF1/4 Minimum pulse length for SO1 and SO2 and optional SO3, SO4 and SO5 0
* 0 = 80 ms
* 1 = 40 ms
SGF1/5 Minimum pulse length for PO1, PO2 and PO3 0

* 0 = 80 ms
* 1 = 40 ms
The latching feature being selected for PO1, PO2 and PO3 overrides this
function.
SGF1/6 CBFP 0
* 0 = CBFP is not in use
* 1 = the signal to PO1 starts a timer which generates a delayed signal to PO2, provided that
the fault is not cleared before the CBFP operate time has elapsed
SGF1/7 Trip lockout function 0
* 0 = the trip lockout function is not in use. PO3 works as a normal power output relay.
* 1 = the trip lockout function is in use. PO3 is dedicated to this function.
SGF1/8 External fault warning 0

* When the switch is in position 1, the warning signal from the trip-circuit supervision or
generated in case of continuous light on light sensor inputs is routed to SO2.

ΣSGF1 0
Table 5.1.4.10.-3 SGF2

a)
SGF2/1 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I> 0
SGF2/2 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>> 0
a)
SGF2/3 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I>>> 0
SGF2/4 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I0> 0
a)
SGF2/5 Operation mode of the start indication of stage I0>> 0
SGF2/6 Operation mode of the start indication of stage ΔI> 0
SGF2/7 Operation mode of the alarm indication of stage θ>a) 0
* 0 = the start indication is automatically cleared after the fault has disappeared
* 1 = latching. The start indication remains active although the fault has disappeared.
ΣSGF2 0
a)
When the switch is on, the phase(s) that caused the start are shown on LCD.
60
Table 5.1.4.10.-4 SGF3

SGF3/1 Inhibition of stage I>> 0
SGF3/2 Inhibition of stage I>>> 0
SGF3/3 Inhibition of stage I0>> 0
SGF3/4 Inhibition of stage ΔI> 1
SGF3/5 Inhibition of stage θ> 1
SGF3/6 Inhibition of stage ARC 1
* When the switch is in position 1, the stage is inhibited.
SGF3/7 Inhibition of light signal output 1
* When the switch is in position 1, the output is inhibited.
ΣSGF3 120
Table 5.1.4.10.-5 SGF4

SGF4/1 Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I>> 0
* When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the stage is automatically doubled at
high inrush situations.

SGF4/2 Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage I>> 0
SGF4/3 Inverse-time operation of stage I> inhibited by the start of stage I>>> 0
* When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is inhibited.
SGF4/4 Automatic doubling of the start value of stage I0>> 0

* When the switch is in position 1, the set start value of the stage is automatically doubled at
high inrush situations.
Consider carefully when using this function!
SGF4/5 Inverse-time operation of stage I0> inhibited by the start of stage I0>> 0
* When the switch is in position 1, inverse-time operation is inhibited.
SGF4/6 Operation mode of light signal output 0

* When the switch is in position 1, the light signal output is blocked by the trip signal from stage
ARC.
ΣSGF4 0
Table 5.1.4.10.-6 SGF5

SGF5/1 Selection of the latching feature for programmable LED1 0
61
Table 5.1.4.10.-6 SGF5 (Continued)

* When the switch is in position 0 and the signal routed to the LED is reset, the programmable
LED is cleared.
* When the switch is in position 1, the programmable LED remains lit although the signal
routed to the LED is reset.

A latched programmable LED can be cleared either via the HMI, a digital input or the serial bus.
ΣSGF5 0
SGB1...SGB5
The DI1 signal is routed to the functions below with the switches of switchgroup
SGB1, the DI2 signal with those of SGB2, and so forth.
Table 5.1.4.10.-7 SGB1...SGB5

SGB1...5/1 *
0 = indications are not cleared by the digital input signal 0
* 1 = indications are cleared by the digital input signal
SGB1...5/2 * 0 = indications are not cleared and latched output contacts are not unlatched by the digital 0
input signal
*
1 = indications are cleared and latched output contacts are unlatched by the digital input
signal
SGB1...5/3 * 0 = indications and memorized values are not cleared and latched output contacts are not 0
unlatched by the digital input signal
*
1 = indications and memorized values are cleared and latched output contacts are unlatched
by the digital input signal
SGB1...5/4 Switching between setting groups 1 and 2 by using the digital input 0
* 0 = the setting group cannot be changed using the digital input
*
1 = the setting group is changed by using the digital input. When the digital input is energized,
setting group 2 is activated, if not, setting group 1 is activated.
When SGB1...5/4 is set to 1, it is important that the switch has the same setting
in both setting groups.
SGB1...5/5 Time synchronization by the digital input signal 0

SGB1...5/6 External tripping by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/7 External triggering of the CBFP by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/8 External triggering of the trip lockout by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/9 External arc signalling by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/10 Resetting of the trip lockout by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/11 Blocking of tripping of stage I> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/12 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/13 Blocking of tripping of stage I0> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/14 Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/15 Blocking of tripping of stage ΔI> by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/16 External AR inhibition by the digital input signal 0
SGB1...5/17 External inhibition of CB reclosing by the digital input signal 0
62
Table 5.1.4.10.-7 SGB1...SGB5 (Continued)

SGB1...5/18 CB position open 0
SGB1...5/19 CB position closed 0
SGB1...5/20 External AR initiation by the digital input signal 0
ΣSGB1...5 0
SGR1...SGR8
The start, trip and alarm signals from the protection stages, the signals from the
auto-reclose function, and the external trip signal are routed to the output contacts
with the switches of switchgroups SGR1...SGR8.
The signals are routed to PO1...PO3 with the switches of switchgroup SGR1...SGR3
and to SO1...SO5 with those of SGR4...SGR8.
The matrix below can be of help when making the wanted selections. The start, trip
and alarm signals from the protection stages and the external trip signal are
combined with the output contacts by encircling the wanted intersection point. Each
intersection point is marked with a switch number, and the corresponding weighting
factor of the switch is shown to the right in the matrix. The switchgroup checksum is
obtained by vertically adding the weighting factors of all the selected switches of the
switchgroup.
The trip lockout signal is always routed to PO3.
The trip signal from CBFP is always routed to PO2.
The external fault warning is always routed to SO2.
63
PS_I/O card Optional I/O card

Weighting
PO1 PO2 PO3 SO1 SO2 SO3 SO4 SO5 factor
SGR1...8/1 I> 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SGR1...8/2 t> 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
SGR1...8/3 I>> 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
SGR1...8/4 t>> 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8
SGR1...8/5 I>>> 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 16
SGR1...8/6 t>>> 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 32
SGR1...8/7 I0 > 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 64
SGR1...8/8 t0 > 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 128
SGR1...8/9 I0>> 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 256
SGR1...8/10 t0>> 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 512
SGR1...8/11 ∆I> 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1024
SGR1...8/12 ∆t> 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 2048
θ> 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 4096
SGR1...8/13 Alarm
θ> 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 8192
SGR1...8/14 Trip
Ext.
SGR1...8/15 Trip 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16384
Open
SGR1...8/16 CB
Command
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 32768
Close
SGR1...8/17 CB
Command
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 65536
Definite
SGR1...8/18 Trip
Alarm
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 131072
CB
SGR1...8/19 Reclosing
Failed
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 262144
Shot
SGR1...8/20 Due
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 524288
SGR1...8/21
AR
Lockout 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 1048576
ARC 22 22 22 22 2097152
SGR1...8/22 22 22 22 22
Trip
SGR1...8/23 L> 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 4194304

ΣSGR4
ΣSGR1
ΣSGR3
ΣSGR2
ΣSGR5
ΣSGR6
ΣSGR7
ΣSGR8
Checksum
A040327
Fig. 5.1.4.10.-2 Output signal matrix
Table 5.1.4.10.-8 SGR1...SGR8

SGR1...SGR3 SGR4...SGR5 SGR6...SGR8a)
SGR1...8/1 Start signal from stage I> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/2 Trip signal from stage I> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/3 Start signal from stage I>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/4 Trip signal from stage I>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/5 Start signal from stage I>>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/6 Trip signal from stage I>>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/7 Start signal from stage I0> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/8 Trip signal from stage I0> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/9 Start signal from stage I0>> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/10 Trip signal from stage I0>> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/11 Start signal from stage ΔI> 0 1 0
SGR1...8/12 Trip signal from stage ΔI> 1 0 0
64
Table 5.1.4.10.-8 SGR1...SGR8 (Continued)

SGR1...SGR3 SGR4...SGR5 SGR6...SGR8
SGR1...8/13 Alarm signal from stage θ> 0 0 0
SGR1...8/14 Trip signal from stage θ> 1 0 0
SGR1...8/15 External trip signal 0 0 0
SGR1...8/16 Open CB command from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/17 Close CB command from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/18 Definite trip alarm signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/19 CB reclosing failed signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/20 Shot due signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/21 Lockout signal from AR 0 0 0
SGR1...8/22 Trip signal from stage ARC 1 0 0
SGR1...8/23 Light signal output 0 0 0
ΣSGR1...8 2108074 5461 0
a)
If the optional I/O module has not been installed, dashes are shown on the LCD and “9999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
SGL1...SGL8
The signals are routed to LED1 with the switches of switchgroup SGL1, to LED2
with those of SGL2, and so forth.
Table 5.1.4.10.-9 SGL1...SGL8

SGL1...8/1 Trip signal from stage I> 0
SGL1...8/2 Trip signal from stage I>> 0
SGL1...8/3 Trip signal from stage I>>> 0
SGL1...8/4 Trip signal from stage I0> 0
SGL1...8/5 Trip signal from stage I0>> 0
SGL1...8/6 Trip signal from stage ΔI> 0
SGL1...8/7 Alarm signal from stage θ> 0
SGL1...8/8 Trip signal from stage θ> 0
SGL1...8/9 Trip lockout signal 0
SGL1...8/10 Definite trip alarm signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/11 Shot due signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/12 Lockout signal from AR 0
SGL1...8/13 CB position open 0
SGL1...8/14 CB position closed 0
SGL1...8/15 DI1 signal 0
SGL1...8/20 Trip signal from stage ARC 0
SGL1...8/21 Light signal output 0
SGL1...8/22 Trip signal from CBFP 0
65
Table 5.1.4.10.-9 SGL1...SGL8 (Continued)

SGL1...8/23 Disturbance recorder triggered 0
ΣSGL1...SGL8 0
Auto-reclose SG1...SG3
Switchgroup SG1 is used for blocking the initiation of one or several auto-reclose
shots, SG2 for blocking of protection stages at one or several auto-reclose shots, and
SG3 for inhibiting the AR function as follows:
Table 5.1.4.10.-10 SG1

SG1/1 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from stage I>> 0
SG1/2 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the external AR initiation signal 0
SG1/3 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I> 0
SG1/4 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip or delayed start signal from stage I0> 0
or the trip signal from stage I0>>
SG1/5 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal from stage I>> 0
SG1/6 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the external AR initiation signal 0
SG1/7 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed start signal from 0
stage I>
SG1/8 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip or delayed start signal from 0
stage I0> or the trip signal from stage I0>>
* When the switch is in position 1, shot initiation is blocked.
ΣSG1 0
Table 5.1.4.10.-11 SG2

Switch Functiona) Default setting
SG2/1 Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shot 1 0
SG2/2 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shot 1 0
SG2/3 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>> at shot 1 0
SG2/4 Blocking of tripping of stage I0> at shot 1 0
SG2/5 Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> at shot 1 0
SG2/6 Blocking of tripping of stage I> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/7 Blocking of tripping of stage I>> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/8 Blocking of tripping of stage I>>>; at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/9 Blocking of tripping of stage I0> at shots 2 and 3 0
SG2/10 Blocking of tripping of stage I0>> at shots 2 and 3 0
*
When the switch is in position 1, the stage is blocked. 0
ΣSG2 0
a)
The blocking is active until the set cutout time or the set reclaim time elapses or the AR function is locked out.
66
Table 5.1.4.10.-12 SG3

SG3/1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I>>> 1
SG3/2 Ihibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage I0>> 1
SG3/3 Inhibition of the AR function by the alarm signal from stage θ> 1
SG3/4 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage ΔI> 1
* When the switch is in position 1, the AR function is inhibited.
SG3/5 Resetting indications at CB reclosing 0
* When the switch is in position 1, indications are reset when the AR function
issues a reclosing command to the circuit breaker.
ΣSG3 15
New trip indication timer
The new trip indication timer can be configured to allow a second trip indication on
the LCD. When several protection stages trip, the first trip indication is displayed
until the time, as specified by the NEW TRIP IND. setting value, has expired. After
this, a new trip indication can displace the old one. The basic protection functions
are not affected by the NEW TRIP IND. setting.
Table 5.1.4.10.-13 New trip indication timer

Setting Description Setting range Default setting
New trip New trip indication timer in minutes 0...998 60
indication
No new trip indication allowed until the 999 -
previous one has been manually
cleared.
Non-volatile memory settings
Non-volatile memory is backed up by a battery; the battery must be

inserted and charged.
The table below presents data which can be configured to be stored in the non-
volatile memory. All of the functions mentioned below can be selected separately
with switches 1...5 either via the HMI or the SPA bus.
Table 5.1.4.10.-14 Memory settings

Setting Switch Function Default setting
Non-volatile 1 * 0 = operation indication messages and 1
memory settings LEDs are cleared
* 1 = operation indication messages and
LEDs are retaineda)
2 * 1 = disturbance recorder data is retained a) 1
a)
3 * 1 = event codes are retained 1
67
Table 5.1.4.10.-14 Memory settings (Continued)

Setting Switch Function Default setting
4 * 1 = recorded data and information on the 1
number of starts of the protection stages
are retaineda)
5 * 1 = the real-time clock is running also 1
during loss of auxiliary voltagea)
Σ 31
a)
The prerequisite is that the battery has been inserted and is charged.
When all switches are set to zero, the battery supervision is disabled.
5.1.4.11. Technical data on protection functions
Table 5.1.4.11.-1 Stages I>, I>> and I>>>

Feature Stage I> Stage I>> Stage I>>>
Set start value, I>, I>> and
I>>>
* at definite-time 0.30...5.00 x In 0.50...35.0 x In 0.50...35.0 x In
characteristic
* at IDMT characteristic 0.30...2.50 x Ina)
Start time, typical 55 ms 30 ms 30 ms
Time/current characteristic
* definite-time
operate time, t>, t>> and 0.05...300 s 0.04...300 s 0.04...300 s

t>>>
* IDMT according to IEC Extremely inverse
60255-3 Very inverse
Normal inverse
Long-time inverse
time multiplier, k 0.05...1.00
* Special type of IDMT RI-type inverse
characteristic RD-type inverse
(RXIDG)
time multiplier, k 0.05...1.00
* IDMT according to Extremely inverse
IEEE C37.112 Very inverse
Inverse
time dial, n 1...15

Resetting time, maximum 50 msb) 50 ms 50 ms
Retardation time, typical 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms
Set resetting time, tr> 0.05...2.50 s
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, 0.96 0.96 0.96
typical
Operate time accuracy
68
Table 5.1.4.11.-1 Stages I>, I>> and I>>> (Continued)

Feature Stage I> Stage I>> Stage I>>>
* at definite-time ±2% of the set ±2% of the set ±2% of the set
characteristic operate time or ±25 operate time or ±25 operate time or ±25
ms ms ms
* at IDMT characteristic 5
according to IEC 60255-
3: accuracy class index
E
* at IDMT characteristic ±7% of the
according to calculated operate
IEEE C37.112 time
* at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the
calculated operate
time
* at RD-type characteristic ±7% of the
(RXIDG) calculated operate
time
Operation accuracy
* 0.3...0.5 x In ±5% of the set start
value
* 0.5...5.0 x In ±3% of the set start ±3% of the set start ±3% of the set start
value value value
* 5.0...35.0 x In ±3% of the set start ±3% of the set start
value value
a)
Because of the maximum measured current (50 × In), the setting value 2.5 is used for the IDMT
calculation if the set value is greater than 2.5. This makes the operate time faster than the theoretical
IDMT curve. However, the stage always starts according to the set value.
b)
Resetting time of the trip signal.
Table 5.1.4.11.-2 Stages I0> and I0>>

Feature Stage I0> Stage I0>>
Set start value, I0> and I0>>
* at definite-time 1.0...100% In 5.0...800% In
characteristic
* at IDMT characteristic 1.0...100% Ina)
Start time, typical 60 ms 50 ms
Time/current characteristic
* definite time
operate time, 51N TDLY and 0.05...300 s 0.05...300 s
50N TDLY
* IDMT according to Extremely inverse
IEC 60255-3 Very inverse
Normal inverse
Long-time inverse
time multiplier, k0 0.05...1.00
* Special type of IDMT RI-type inverse
characteristic RD-type inverse
time multiplier, k0 0.05...1.00
*
IDMT according to Extremely inverse
IEEE C37.112 Very inverse
Inverse
69
Table 5.1.4.11.-2 Stages I0> and I0>> (Continued)

Feature Stage I0> Stage I0>>
time dial, n 1...15
Resetting time, maximum 50 msb) 50 ms
Retardation time, typical 30 ms 30 ms
Set resetting time, t0r> 0.05...2.50 s
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, typical 0.96 0.96
*
at definite-time ±2% of the set operate time or ±2% of the set operate time or
characteristic ±25 ms ±25 ms
* at IDMT characteristic 5
according to IEC 60255-3:
accuracy class index E
* at IDMT characteristic ±7% of the calculated operate
according to IEEE C37.112 time
* at RI-type characteristic ±7% of the calculated operate
time
* at RD-type characteristic ±7% of the calculated operate
(RXIDG) time
Operation accuracy
* 1.0...10.0% In ±5% of the set start value + ±5% of the set start value +
0.05% In 0.05% In
* 10.0...100% In ±3% of the set start value ±3% of the set start value
* 100...800% In ±3% of the set start value
a)
In REF 610 revision A and B, the setting value 40% In is used for the IDMT calculation, if the set value is
greater than 40% In. In revision C (or later), the full setting range is used for the IDMT calculation.
b)
Resetting time of the trip signal.
Table 5.1.4.11.-3 Stage θ>

Feature Value
Set full load current, Iθ 0.30...1.50 x In
Set alarm level, θa> 50...100%
Trip level, θt> 100 %
Time constant, τ 1...200 min
I/Iθ >1.2 ±2% of the set operate time or ±1 s
Table 5.1.4.11.-4 Stage ΔI>

Feature Value
Set pickup value, ΔI>
at definite-time characteristic 10...100%
Start time, typical 100 ms
Time/current characteristics
definite time
operate time, tΔ> 1...300 s
Resetting time, maximum 70 ms
Drop-off/pick-up ratio, typical 0.90
* at definite-time characteristic ±2% of the set operate time or ±75 ms
70
Table 5.1.4.11.-4 Stage ΔI> (Continued)

Feature Value
Operation accuracy
* 10...100% ±3% of the set start value and ±1 unit
Table 5.1.4.11.-5 Stage ARC and L>

Feature Value
Stage ARC
Set trip value ArcI> 0.5...35.0 x In
Operate time < 15 msa)
ArcI0> 5.0...800% In
Operate time < 17 msa)
Resetting time 30 ms
Operation accuracy ±7% of the set start value
L>
Activation time of L> < 15 ms
Resetting time 20 ms
a)
Applies only if a signal output contact (SO1...5) is used. If a power output contact (PO1...3) is used, 2...3
ms will be added.
Fig. 5.1.4.11.-1 Relative sensitivity of lens sensors
71
Table 5.1.4.11.-6 Auto-reclose function

Feature Value
Number of shots 0...3
CB Closing time 0.1...10 s
Start delay of stage I> 0...300 s
Start delay of stage I0> 0...300 s
Reset time 3...300 s
Cutout time 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 1 0.1...300 s
Operate time accuracy ±2% of the set time and ±25 ms
Table 5.1.4.11.-7 CBFP

Feature Value
Set operate time 0.10...60.0 s
Phase-current threshold for external
triggering of the CBFP
* pick-up/drop-off 0.08/0.04 x In
5.1.5. Trip-circuit supervision
The trip-circuit supervision (TCS) detects open circuits, both when the circuit
breaker is open and closed, and trip-circuit supply failure.
The trip-circuit supervision is based on a constant current injection principle: by

applying an external voltage, a constant current is forced to flow through the
external trip circuit. If the resistance of the trip circuit exceeds a certain limit, due to
oxidation or a bad contact, for instance, the trip-circuit supervision is activated and a
warning appears on the LCD together with a fault code. The warning signal from the
trip-circuit supervision can also be routed to SO2 by setting switch SGF1/8 to 1.
Under normal operating conditions, the applied external voltage is divided between
the relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at least 20 V remains
over the relay’s internal circuit. If the external trip circuit’s resistance is too high or
the internal circuit’s too low, due to welded relay contacts, for instance, the voltage
over the relay’s internal circuit falls below 20 V (15...20 V), which activates the trip-
circuit supervision.
The operation condition is:

Uc - (Re xt + Rint + Rs ) × Ic ≥ 20 V ac/dc (8)
Uc = operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit

Ic = current flowing through the trip circuit, ~1.5 mA
Rext = external shunt resistor
Rint = internal shunt resistor, 1 kΩ
Rs = trip coil resistance
72
The external shunt resistor is used to enable trip-circuit supervision also when the
circuit breaker is open.
The resistance of the external shunt resistor is to be calculated so that it does not
cause malfunction of the trip-circuit supervision or affect the operation of the trip
coil. Too high resistance causes too high voltage drop, which in turn results in the
operation conditions not being fulfilled, whereas too low resistance may cause
faulty operation of the trip coil.
The following values are recommended for the external resistor, Rext:
Table 5.1.5.-1 Recommended values for Rext

Operating voltage, Uc Shunt resistor Rext
48 V DC 1.2 kΩ, 5 W
60 V DC 5.6 kΩ, 5 W
110 V DC 22 kΩ, 5 W
220 V DC 33 kΩ, 5 W
The circuit breaker is to be provided with two external contacts, one opening and
one closing contact. The closing contact is to be connected in parallel with the
external shunt resistor, which enables trip-circuit supervision when the circuit
breaker is closed. The opening contact, on the contrary, is to be connected in series
with the external shunt resistor, which enables trip-circuit supervision when the
circuit breaker is open; see Fig. 5.1.5.-1.
Trip-circuit supervision can be selected either via the HMI or with SPA parameter
V113.
73
X4.1
18 +
PO1
Rint
Rext Rs
19
16
TCS
17 -
SO2 7
6
HW
SW SGF1/8
TRIP-CIRCUIT
SUPERVISION
TCS STATE WARNING HMI
A040329_2
Fig. 5.1.5.-1 Connecting the trip-circuit supervision using two external contacts and
the external resistor in the trip circuit
5.1.6. Trip lockout function
The trip lockout function is used to prevent accidental closing of the circuit breaker
after a trip. The trip lockout function must be locally reset with a separate reset
command before the circuit breaker can be closed again. This function is useful
when the trip output contact of the relay is latched or the open circuit of the circuit
breaker remains activated.
The trip lockout function is selected in SGF1. When selected, PO3 is dedicated to
this function. As long as no trip occurs, PO3 is closed.
Every signal which has been routed to PO3 via the output signal matrix activates the
trip lockout function and opens the contacts of PO3. When the contacts have
opened, they are locked into the open state.
The trip lockout function can also be activated externally, via a digital input. The
trip lockout function can be reset via a digital input, the HMI or SPA parameter
V103, but not before the signal which activated the function has been reset.
In case of loss of auxiliary power when the trip lockout function is in use, the
contacts of PO3 return to the same state as before the loss, provided that the battery
has been inserted and is charged. If no battery has been inserted, the trip lockout
function is activated and the contacts of PO3 remain open when the auxiliary power
is switched on again.
74
5.1.7. Trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring
The trip counters for circuit-breaker condition monitoring provide history data,
which can be used for circuit-breaker service scheduling. With this information, the
service cycle can be estimated for the future.
The monitoring function consists of four counters, which count the number of trip
signals generated to the circuit breaker by the relay. Every time a stage generates a
trip signal, the corresponding counter value is increased by one. The number of trips
is stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory.
There are separate counters for the different protection stages because breaking the
current in different fault situations wears the circuit breaker differently. Each
overcurrent stage (I>, I>> and I>>>) has its own trip counter, whereas there is a
common trip counter for stages I0>, I0>>, ΔI>, θ>, ARC and the external trip.
The counters can be read via the HMI or SPA parameters V9...V12 and cleared via
SPA parameter V166. When a counter reaches its maximum value, it rolls over.
In case several stages trip during the same fault sequence, only the
counter of the stage which tripped first is increased by one.
5.1.8. Indicator LEDs and operation indication messages
The operation of the relay can be monitored via the HMI by means of LED
indications and text messages on the LCD. On the front panel of the relay there are
three indicator LEDs with fixed functionality:
* Green indicator LED (ready)
* Yellow indicator LED (start/alarm)
* Red indicator LED (trip)
In addition, there are eight programmable LEDs and an indicator LED for front
communication. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for a more thorough presentation.
The indication messages on the LCD have a certain priority order. If different types
of indications are activated simultaneously, the message with the highest priority
appears on the LCD.
The priority order of the operation indication messages:

1. CBFP
2. Trip
3. Start/Alarm
5.1.9. Demand values
The relay provides three different kinds of demand values.
75
The first value shows the average current of all three phases measured during one
minute. The value is updated once a minute.
The second value shows the average current during an adjustable time range,
ranging from 0 to 999 minutes, with an accuracy of one minute. This value is
updated at the expiration of each time range.
The third value shows the highest one-minute average current value measured
during the previous time range. However, if the time range is set to zero, only the
one-minute and the maximum demand value is shown. The maximum value is the
highest one-minute mean value since the last reset.
The demand values can be set to zero through serial communication using SPA
parameter V102. The average values are also reset if SPA parameter V105 is
changed or the relay is reset.
5.1.10. Commissioning tests
The following two product functions can be used during the commissioning of the
relay: function test and digital input test.
The function test is used for testing the configuration as well as the connections
from the relay. By selecting this test, the internal signals from the protection stages,
the motor start-up signal, the external trip signal and the IRF function can be
activated one by one. Provided that the signals have been set to be routed to the
output contacts (PO1...PO3 and SO1...SO5) with the switches of SGR1...SGR8, the
output contacts are activated and their corresponding event codes are generated
when the test is run. However, activation of the internal signals from the protection
stages, the signals from the auto-reclose function, the external trip signal and the
IRF function do not generate an event code.
The digital input test is used for testing the connections to the relay. The state of the
digital inputs can be monitored via the HMI.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual for instructions on how to perform the tests.
5.1.11. Disturbance recorder
5.1.11.1. Function
The relay features an integrated disturbance recorder which continuously captures

the curve forms of the currents as well as the status of both internal signals and
digital input signals and stores these in the memory.
Triggering of the recorder generates an event code. After the recorder has been
triggered, it continues to record data for a pre-defined post-triggering time. An
asterisk is shown on the LCD on completion of the recording. The status of the
recording can also be viewed using SPA parameter V246.
76
As soon as the recorder has been triggered and the recording has finished, the
recording can be uploaded and analyzed by means of a PC provided with a special
program.
5.1.11.2. Disturbance recorder data
One recording contains data from the four analog channels and up to eight digital
channels. The analog channels, whose data is stored either as RMS curves or as
momentary measured values, are the currents measured by the relay. The digital
channels, referred to as digital signals, are start and trip signals from the protection
stages , the alarm signal from stage θ>, the signals from the auto-reclose function
and the digital input signals linked to the relay.
The user can select up to eight digital signals to be recorded. If more than eight
signals are selected, the first eight signals are stored, beginning with the internal
signals followed by the digital input signals.
The digital signals to be stored are selected with parameters V238 and V243; see
Table 5.1.17.-6 and Table 5.1.17.-7.
The recording length varies according to the selected sampling frequency. The RMS
curve is recorded by selecting the sampling frequency to be the same as the nominal
frequency of the relay. The sampling frequency is selected with SPA parameter M15;
see the table below for details.
Table 5.1.11.2.-1 Sampling frequency

Nominal frequency Hz Sampling frequency Hz Cycles
50 800 250
400 500
a)
50 4000
60 960 250
480 500
a)
60 4000
a)
RMS curve.
Recording length:
Cycles
[s ] = (9)
Nominal frequency [Hz]
Changing the setting values of parameters M15, V238 and V243 is allowed only
when the recorder is not triggered.
The post-triggering recording length defines the time during which the recorder
continues to store data after it has been triggered. The length can be changed with
SPA parameter V240. If the post-triggering recording length is defined to be the
same as the total recording length, no data stored prior to the triggering is retained in
the memory. By the time the post-triggering recording finishes, a complete
recording is created.
77
Triggering of the recorder immediately after it has been cleared or the auxiliary
voltage connected may result in a shortened total recording length. Disconnection of
the auxiliary voltage after the recorder has been triggered, but before the recording
has finished, on the other hand, may result in a shortened post-triggering recording
length. This, however, does not affect the total recording length.
At a power reset, triggered recorder data is retained in the memory provided that it
has been defined non-volatile.
5.1.11.3. Control and indication of disturbance recorder status
It is possible to control and monitor the recording status of the disturbance recorder
by writing to and reading SPA parameters M1, M2 and V246. Reading SPA
parameter V246 returns either the value 0 or 1, indicating whether the recorder has
not been triggered or triggered and ready to be uploaded. Event code E31 is
generated the moment the disturbance recorder is triggered. If the recorder is ready
to be uploaded, this is also indicated by an asterisk shown in the lower right-hand
corner of the LCD when it is in the idle mode. Indication can also be routed to
programmable LEDs.
Writing the value 1 to SPA parameter M2 clears the recorder memory and enables
the triggering of the recorder. Recorder data can be cleared by performing a master
reset, that is, clearing indications and memorized values and unlatching output
contacts.
Writing the value 2 to SPA parameter V246 restarts the unloading process by setting
the time stamp and the first data ready to be read.
5.1.11.4. Triggering
The user can select one or several internal or digital input signals to trigger the
disturbance recorder, either on the rising or falling edge of the signal(s). Triggering
on the rising edge means that the post-triggering recording sequence starts when the
signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge means that the
post-triggering recording sequence starts when the active signal is reset.
The trigger signal(s) and the edge are selected with SPA parameters V236...V237
and V241...V242; see Table 5.1.17.-6 and Table 5.1.17.-7. The recorder can also be
triggered manually with SPA parameter M1.
Triggering of the disturbance recorder is only possible if the recorder is not already
triggered.
5.1.11.5. Settings and unloading
The setting parameters for the disturbance recorder are V parameters V236...V238,
V240...V243 and V246, and M parameters M15, M18, M20 and M80...M83.
78
Unloading correct information from the recorder requires that M80 and M83 have
been set. Unloading is done by using a PC application. The uploaded recorder data
is stored in separate files defined by the comtrade® format.
5.1.11.6. Event code of the disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder generates an event code on triggering (E31) and clearing
(E32) the recorder. The event mask is determined using SPA parameter V155.
5.1.12. Recorded data of the last events
The relay records up to five events. This enables the user to analyze the last five
fault conditions in the electrical power network. Each event includes the measured
currents, start durations and time stamp, for instance. Additionally, information on
the number of starts of the stages, trips and auto-reclose shots is provided.
Recorded data is non-volatile by default, provided that the battery has been inserted
and is charged. A master reset, that is, clearing of indications and memorized values
and unlatching of output contacts, erases the contents of the stored events and the
number of starts of the stages.
The number of trips and auto-reclose shots is stored in the non-volatile

memory (EEPROM) and is thereby not cleared when performing a
master reset. The number of trips can be erased by entering the value 1
and the number of auto-reclose shots by entering the value 2 into
parameter V166.
The relay collects data during fault conditions. When all start or thermal alarm
signals have been reset or a stage trips, the collected data and time stamp is stored as
EVENT1 and the previously stored events move one step forward. When a sixth
event is stored, the oldest event is cleared.
79
Table 5.1.12.-1 Recorded data

REGISTER Data description
EVENT1 * Phase current L1, measured as a multiple of the rated current, In, is
displayed in two registers: the main register and the sub register. When a
stage starts but does not trip, the maximum fault current during the start
period will be stored in both the main register and the sub register. When a
stage trips, the fault current at the time of the trip will be stored in the main
register and the maximum fault current during the start period in the sub
register. The same applies to phase currents L2, L3 and I0.
*
The phase unbalance, ΔI, as a percentage of the maximum phase current
value. When the stage starts but does not trip, the maximum phase
unbalance value during the start period will be stored. When the stage trips,
the fault unbalance at the time of the trip will be stored.
* Thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, at
activation of a start or alarm signal. If the thermal protection stage has been
set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when read
via serial communication.
* The maximum thermal level during the time the start or alarm signal was
active, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of the cable, or in case
of a trip, the thermal level, as a percentage of the maximum thermal level of
the cable, at activation of a trip signal. If the thermal protection stage has
been set out of operation, dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when
read via serial communication.
* Duration of the starts of stages I>, I>>, I>>>, ΔI, I0> and I0>>, the trip of
stage ARC (local), the trip of stage ARC (remote), and of the external trip. A
value other than zero indicates that the corresponding stage has started
whereas the value 100% indicates that the operate time of the stage has
elapsed, i.e. the stage has tripped. If the operate time of a stage has elapsed
but the stage is blocked, the value will be 99% of the set or calculated
operate time.
* Trip number in the auto-reclose sequence. The number 1...20 indicates the
order of the trip in the AR sequence. The value 1 indicates the first trip in the
AR sequence, the value 2 the second trip, and so forth. On expiration of the
set reclaim time, the value will start from 1 again. If the AR function has been
set out of operation, the value will always be 1.
*
Time stamp for the event. The time when the collected data was stored. The
time stamp is displayed in two registers, one including the date expressed as
yy-mm-dd, and the other including the time expressed as HH.MM; SS.sss.
EVENT 2 Same as EVENT 1.
80
Table 5.1.12.-1 Recorded data (Continued)

REGISTER Data description
Number of The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>>, I>>>, ΔI, I0> and I0>>, has
starts started, counting up to 999.
Number of * The number of times each protection stage, I>, I>>, I>>>, has tripped. When
trips the counters reach their maximum values (65535), it will roll over.
* The number of times protection stages, I0> and I0>>, θ> and ARC has
tripped and external trips. When the counter reaches its maximum value
(65535), it will roll over.
Number of * Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
AR shots counting up to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the digital input signal, counting up
to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I> ,
counting up to 255
*
Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by the pickup or trip signal from stage
I0>, counting up to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
counting up to 255
to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>,
counting up to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 2) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0>,
counting up to 255
*
Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the trip signal from stage I>>,
counting up to 255
to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I>,
counting up to 255
* Number of AR shots (shot 3) initiated by the start or trip signal from stage I0>,
counting up to 255
5.1.13. Communication ports
The relay is provided with an optical communication port (infrared) on the front
panel. Rear communication is optional and requires a communication module,
which can be provided with either a plastic fibre-optic, combined fibre-optic (plastic
and glass) or RS-485 connection. The relay is connected to an automation system
via the rear connection. The optional rear communication module allows the use of
either the SPA bus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus communication protocol.
For connection to the DNP 3.0 communication system, the relay can be provided
with an optional DNP 3.0 rear communication module with RS-485 connection. For
further information on optional rear communication module connections, refer to
Section 5.2.3. Serial communication connections.
81
A051551
Fig. 5.1.13.-1 Communication port

1) Front connection for local communication
The relay is connected to a PC used for local parameterization via the infrared port
on the front panel. The front connection allows the use of the SPA bus protocol only.
The optical front connection galvanically isolates the PC from the relay. The front
connection can be used in two different ways: wirelessly using a PC compatible to
the IrDA®‚ Standard specifications or using a specific front communication cable
(refer to Section 7. Ordering information). The cable is connected to the serial RS-
232 port of the PC. The optical stage of the cable is powered by RS-232 control
signals. The cable has a fixed baud rate of 9.6 kbps.
The following serial communication parameters are to be set for RS-232:

* Number of data bits: 7
* Number of stop bits: 1
* Parity: even
* Baud rate: 9.6 kbps
Relay data such as events, setting values and all input data and memorized values
can be read via the front communication port.
When setting values are altered via the front communication port, the relay checks
that the entered parameter values are within the permitted setting range. If an entered
value is too high or too low, the setting value remains unchanged.
The relay has a counter which can be accessed via CONFIGURATION

\COMMUNICATION in the HMI menu. The counter value is set to zero when the
relay receives a valid message.
5.1.14. IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol
The relay supports the IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol in the
unbalanced transmission mode. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is used to transfer
measurand and status data from the slave to the master. However, the IEC 60870-5-
103 protocol cannot be used to transfer disturbance recorder data.
82
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be used only through the rear connection of the
relay on the optional communication module. Connecting the relay to a fibre-optic
communication bus requires a fibre-optic communication module. The line-idle
state of the fibre-optic communication module can be selected either via the HMI or
the SPA bus. According to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the line-idle state is “light
on”. To ensure communication, the line-idle state should be the same for both the
master and the slave device. The connection topology can be selected to be either
loop or star, the default being loop, and either via the HMI or the SPA bus. The
selected line-idle state and connection topology apply irrespective of which rear
communication protocol is active.
The relay uses the SPA bus protocol as default when the optional communication
module is in use. The protocol selection is memorized and is therefore always
activated when the rear connection is in use. The baud rate can be selected either via
the HMI or the SPA bus. According to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the baud rate
is 9.6 kbps. When the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is active, event masks are not in
use. Consequently, all events in the selected configuration set are included in the
event reporting.
The relay is provided with two different selectable configuration sets, of which
configuration set 1 is used by default.
Configuration set 1 is intended to be used when the optional I/O module is not
installed. Configuration set 2 includes additional information, for example output
contact events 6...8 (SO3...SO5) and digital input events 3...5 (DI3...DI5), provided
that the optional I/O module is installed.
Function type and information number are mapped into configuration sets according
to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard to the extent that these have been defined by the
standard. If not defined by the standard, the type of function and/or the information
number are/is mapped into a private range.
The tables below indicate the information mapping of the corresponding

configuration sets. The column GI indicates whether the status of the specified
information object is transmitted within the general interrogation cycle. The relative
time in messages with the type identification 2 is calculated as a time difference
between the occurred event and the event specified in the column Relative time. The
measurand multiplied by the normalize factor is proportional to the rated value.
Therefore, the maximum value of each measurand is the normalize factor multiplied
by the rated value.
83
Table 5.1.14.-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2

Event reason
Information number
Configuration set 1
Configuration set 2
Type identification
Function type
Relative time
Event code
GI
Disturbance recorder Triggered/Cleared 0E31/ X X 178 100 - - 1
0E32
HMI Setting password Opened/Closed 0E33/ X X 178 101 - - 1
0E34
HMI Communication password Opened/Closed 0E35/ X X 178 102 - - 1
0E36
I> Start/Reset 1E1/ X X 160 84 X 1E1 2
1E2
I> Trip/Reset 1E3/ X X 160 90 - 1E1 2
1E4
I>> Start/Reset 1E5/ X X 162 94 X 1E5 2
1E6
I>> Trip/Reset 1E7/ X X 160 91 - 1E5 2
1E8
I>>> Start/Reset 1E9/ X X 162 96 X 1E9 2
1E10
I>>> Trip/Reset 1E11/ X X 162 98 - 1E9 2
1E12
I0> Start/Reset 1E13/ X X 160 67 X 1E13 2
1E14
I0> Trip/Reset 1E15/ X X 160 92 - 1E13 2
1E16
I0>> Start/Reset 1E17/ X X 162 95 X 1E17 2
1E18
I0>> Trip/Reset 1E19/ X X 160 93 - 1E17 2
1E20
ΔI> Start/Reset 1E21/ X X 173 84 X 1E21 2
1E22
ΔI> Trip/Reset 1E23/ X X 173 90 - 1E21 2
1E24
θ> Start/Reset 1E25/ X X 184 84 X 1E25 2
1E26
θ> Alarm/Reset 1E27/ X X 184 11 X - 1
1E28
θ> Trip/Reset 1E29/ X X 184 90 - 1E25 2
1E30
ARC (light and current) Trip/Reset 1E31/ X X 100 90 - 1E31 2
1E32
ARC (DI and current) Trip/Reset 1E33/ X X 100 50 - 1E33 2
1E34
Arc light signal output Activated/Reset 1E35/ X X 100 20 - - 1
1E36
84
Table 5.1.14.-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 (Continued)

Event reason
Information number
Configuration set 1
Configuration set 2
Type identification
Function type
Relative time
Event code
GI
Trip lockout Activated/Reset 1E37/ X X 10 223 X - 1
1E38
External Trip/Reset 1E39/ X X 10 222 - - 1
1E40
CBFP Activated/Reset 1E41/ X X 160 85 - - 1
1E42
PO1 Activated/Reset 2E1/ X X 251 27 X - 1
2E2
2E4
2E6
SO1 Activated/Reset 2E7/ X X 251 30 X - 1
2E8
SO2 Activated/Reset 2E9/ X X 251 31 X - 1
2E10
SO3 Activated/Reset 2E11/ - X 251 32 X - 1
2E12
2E14
2E16
DI1 Activated/Deactivated 2E17/ X X 249 231 X - 1
2E18
DI2 Activated/Deactivated 2E19/ X X 249 232 X - 1
2E20
DI3 Activated/Deactivated 2E21/ - X 249 233 X - 1
2E22
2E24
2E26
Shot 1 Initiated/Ended 3E1/ X X 169 101 - - 1
3E2
3E4
3E6
CB Position 3E7/ X X 240 160 - - 1
Open/Closed 3E8
Definite Trip Alarm/Reset 3E9/ X X 169 150 - - 1
3E10
85
Table 5.1.14.-1 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2 (Continued)

Event reason
Information number
Configuration set 1
Configuration set 2
Type identification
Function type
Relative time
Event code
GI
AR Lockout/Reset 3E11/ X X 169 164 - - 1
3E12
Open CB Command/Reset 3E13/ X X 169 127 - - 1
3E14
Close CB Command/Reset 3E15/ X X 169 128 - - 1
3E16
CB Reclosing Failed/Reset 3E17/ X X 169 163 - - 1
3E18
CB Reclosing inhibited/Reset 3E19/ X X 169 162 - - 1
3E20
AR Cancelled/Reset 3E21/ X X 169 130 - - 1
3E22
Table 5.1.14.-2 Information mapping of configuration set 1 and 2

Measurand
Information number
Configuration set 1
Configuration set 2
Type identification
Normalize factor
Function type
Rated value
Current IL1 2.4 In X X 135 140 9

Current IL2 2.4 In X X
Current IL3 2.4 In X X
Current I0 2.4 In X X
5.1.15. Modbus remote communication protocol
The master/slave protocol Modbus was first introduced by Modicon Inc. and is
widely accepted as a communication standard for industrial device controllers and
PLCs. For the protocol definition, refer to Section 1.4. Product documentation.
The implementation of the Modbus protocol in the relay supports both the RTU and
the ASCII link mode. Both the link mode and the line setting parameters are user-
configurable. The character codings of the link modes follow the protocol
definition. The RTU character format is presented in Table 5.1.15.-1 and the ASCII
character format in Table 5.1.15.-2:
86
Table 5.1.15.-1 RTU character format

Coding system 8-bit binary
Bits per 1 start bit
character 8 data bits, the least significant bit is sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit if parity is not used
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 stop bits if parity is not used
Table 5.1.15.-2 ASCII character format

Coding system Two ASCII characters representing a hexadecimal number
Bits per 1 start bit
character 7 data bits, the least significant bit is sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit if parity is not used
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 stop bits if parity is not used
The turnaround time (response time) of the relay depends on the

amount of data requested in a query. Therefore, the turnaround time
can vary between approximately 20 and 100 ms. However, a
turnaround timeout no lower than 150 ms is recommended for the
Modbus master.
The data address range in the Modbus network follows the protocol
definition and starts from 0. Consequently, the data addresses in
Table 5.1.15.1.-5...Table 5.1.15.1.-13 are decreased by one when
transferred over the network.
The Modbus data type digital input (DI) is commonly also referred to
as 1X, coils as 0X, input register (IR) as 3X and holding register (HR)
as 4X, of which the former is used here. Thus, HR 123, for instance,
can also be referred to as register 400123.
5.1.15.1. Profile of Modbus
The Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU) is selected via the HMI and can be used only
through the rear connection of the relay on the optional communication module.
Modbus line settings, that is, parity, CRC byte order and baud rate, can be adjusted
either via the HMI or the SPA bus.
The implementation of the Modbus protocol in REF 610 supports the following
functions:
87
Table 5.1.15.1.-1 Supported application functions

Function code Function description
01 Read coil status
Reads the status of discrete outputs.
02 Read digital input status
Reads the status of discrete inputs.
03 Read holding registers
Reads the contents of output registers.
04 Read input registers
Reads the contents of input registers.
05 Force single coil
Sets the status of a discrete output.
06 Preset single register
Sets the value of a holding register.
08 Diagnostics
Checks the communication system between the
master and the slave.
15 Force multiple coils
Sets the status of multiple discrete outputs.
16 Preset multiple registers
Sets the value of multiple holding registers.
23 Read/write holding registers
Exchanges holding registers in one query.
Table 5.1.15.1.-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions

Code Name Description
00 Return query data The data in the query data field is returned (looped back)
in the response. The entire response is to be identical to
the query.
01 Restart The slave’s peripheral port is initialized and restarted
communication and the communication event counters are cleared.
option Before this, a normal response will be sent provided that
the port is not in the listen only mode. However, if the
port is in the listen only mode, no response will be sent.
04 Force listen only The slave is forced to enter the listen only mode for
mode Modbus communication.
10 Clear counters and All counters and the diagnostic register are cleared.
diagnostic register
11 Return bus The number of messages in the communications system
message count detected by the slave since its last restart, clear counters
operation or power up is returned in the response.
12 Return bus The number of CRC errors encountered by the slave
communication error since its last restart, clear counters operation or power
count up is returned in the response.
13 Return bus The number of Modbus exception responses sent by the
exception error slave since its last restart, clear counters operation or
count power up is returned in the response.
14 Return slave The number of messages addressed to the slave or
message count broadcast which the slave has processed since its last
restart, clear counters operation or power up is returned
in the response.
88
Table 5.1.15.1.-2 Supported diagnostic subfunctions (Continued)

15 Return slave no The number of messages addressed to the slave for
response count which a response (neither a normal response nor an
exception response) has not been sent since its last
restart, clear counters operation or power up is returned
in the response.
16 Return slave NACK The number of messages addressed to the slave for
response count which a NACK response has been sent is returned in the
response.
18 Return bus The number of messages addressed to the slave for
character overrun which it has not been able to send a response due to a
count character overrun since its last restart, clear counters
operation or power up is returned in the response.
Sending other subfunction codes than those listed above cause an

Illegal data value response.
The Modbus protocol provides the following diagnostic counters:
Table 5.1.15.1.-3 Diagnostic counters

Name Description
Bus message count The number of messages in the communications
system detected by the slave since its last restart,
clear counters operation or power up.
Bus communication error count The number of CRC or LRC errors encountered by the
slave since its last restart, clear counters operation or
power up.
Bus exception error count The number of Modbus exception responses sent by
the slave since its last restart, clear counters operation
or power up.
Slave message count The number of messages addressed to the slave or
broadcast which the slave has processed since its last
restart, clear counters operation or power up.
Slave no response count The number of messages addressed to the slave for
which a response (neither a normal response nor an
exception response) has not been sent since its last
restart, clear counters operation or power up.
Slave NACK response count The number of messages addressed to the slave for
which a NACK response has been sent.
Bus character overrun count The number of messages addressed to the slave for
which it has not been able to send a response due to a
character overrun since its last restart, clear counters
operation or power up.
The following exception codes may be generated by the Modbus protocol:
89
Table 5.1.15.1.-4 Possible exception codes

01 Illegal function The slave does not support the requested function.
02 Illegal data address The slave does not support the data address or the
number of items in the query is incorrect.
03 Illegal data value A value contained in the query data field is out of range.
04 Slave device failure An unrecoverable error has occurred while the slave
was attempting to perform the requested task.
If an Illegal data value exception response is generated when

attempting to preset multiple registers, the contents of the register to
which an illegal value has been imposed and of the following registers
is not changed. Registers which have already been preset are not
restored.
User-defined registers
Reading of unwanted data in a data block wastes bandwidth and complicates data
interpretation. For optimum efficiency in Modbus communication, data has
therefore been organized into consecutive blocks. In addition, a set of programmable
user-defined registers (UDR) has been defined in the holding register area.
The first sixteen holding registers, that is, HR1...16, are user-defined registers. The
UDRs can be linked to any holding register, except for HR721...727, using SPA
parameters 504V1...504V16. However, one UDR cannot be linked to another, that
is, linking cannot be nested. Each parameter contains the address of the holding
register to which the UDR is linked.
If a UDR is linked to a non-existent holding register, reading from the register fails
and an Illegal address exception response is sent. Giving the link address
the value 0 disables the UDR. If the master reads from a disabled UDR, the value 0
is returned.
The UDRs are mirrored in HR385…400.
Fault records
The data recorded during a fault sequence is called a fault record (FR). The slave
stores the five latest fault records. When a sixth record is stored, the oldest record is
deleted.
90
To read a fault record:

1. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR601 using a selection
code as data value.
2. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR601, register count 28.
Alternatively, a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only.
Selection code 1: the master reads the oldest unread record
Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread fault records (see
Fig. 5.1.15.1.-2). If there is one or several unread fault records, the master can read
the contents using selection code 1.
The fault record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master
to determine whether one or several unread fault records have been deleted due to
overflow. The master compares the sequence number to that of the previously read
fault record.
The slave keeps track of which fault record is currently the oldest unread. The
master can continue reading fault records for as long as Status register 3 indicates
that there are unread records.
* Special case 1: If there are no unread fault records, the contents of the last read
record is returned. If the buffer is empty, however, the registers contain only
zeros. This is the only time when sequence number zero appears.
* Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread fault record without
entering selection code 1 again, the contents of the last read record will be
returned.
Selection code 2: the master reads the oldest stored record
By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2, the master can read the oldest
stored fault record. After this, the master can continue reading the following records
using selection code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
Resetting the read pointer does not affect the sequence number of the
fault record.
A master reset, that is, clearing of indications and memorized values

and unlatching of output contacts, clears the fault records, after which
the sequence number starts from 1 again.
Event records
Modbus events are derived from SPA events. With a few exceptions, SPA events
update binary points in the DI and the packed HR area. Simultaneously, a
corresponding Modbus event record is generated. The event record contains the
91
Modbus DI/CO data point address and the value to which the point has changed (0
or 1). SPA events lacking a corresponding DI/CO data point are shown as SPA
channel and event code (informative event) in the event record. The maximum
capacity of the Modbus event buffer is 99 events. The time stamp of Modbus events
is extended to contain complete information, from date to millisecond.
To read an event record:

1. Write a preset single register command (function 06) to HR671 using a selection
code as data value.
2. Read the selected fault record (function 04) from HR672, register count 8.
Alternatively, a fault record can be read using one command (function 23) only.
Selection code 1: reading the oldest unread record
Status register 3 (HR403) informs whether there are unread event records (see
Fig. 5.1.15.1.-2). If there is one or several unread event records, the master can read
the contents using selection code 1.
The event record contains a sequence number which makes it possible for the master
to determine whether one or several unread event records have been deleted due to
overflow by comparing it to the sequence number of the previously read event
record.
The slave keeps track of which event record is currently the oldest unread. The
master can continue reading event records for as long as Status register 3 indicates
that there are unread records.
* Special case 1: If there are no unread event records, the contents of the last read
record is returned. If the buffer is empty, however, the registers contain only
zeros. This is the only time when sequence number zero appears.
* Special case 2: If the master tries to read the next unread event record without
entering selection code 1 again, the contents of the last read record is returned.
Selection code 2: reading the oldest stored record
By resetting the read pointer using selection code 2, the master can read the oldest
stored event record. After this, the master can continue reading the following
records using selection code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
Resetting the read pointer does not affect the sequence number of the
event record.
92
Selection code -1...-99
With selection code -1...-99, the master can move backwards from the newest event
as many events as defined by the selection code and read that specific event record.
After this, the master can continue reading the following records using selection
code 1, irrespective of whether they have been read before.
* Special case: If there is not as many events in the buffer as specified by the
selection code, the oldest stored event is read.
Selection code 3
The Modbus event buffer is cleared with selection code 3. Clearing the buffer does
not require any read operation to follow.
Digital inputs
As the master may not detect the state changes of all digital signals when scanning,
an additional change detect (CD) indication bit is created for every momentary
indication point; see the example below.
Momentary
Change detect
Master reads
Master reads
Master reads
Master reads
A040332
Fig. 5.1.15.1.-1 Change detection bit
If the momentary value of an indication bit has changed two or more times since the
master last read it, the CD bit is set to one. When the CD bit has been read, it is set
to zero.
The momentary and the CD bit of a certain indication point always occur as a pair in
the Modbus memory map.
93
Modbus data mapping
There are two types of monitoring data: digital indications and measurands. For
convenience and efficiency, the same data can be read from different data areas.
Measurands and other 16-bit values can be read either from the IR or HR (read-
only) area and digital indication values from either the DI or coil (read-only) area. It
is also possible to read the status of the DIs as packed 16-bit registers from both the
IR and the HR area.
Consequently, all monitoring data can be read as consecutive blocks of data from
the IR or HR area.
The register and bit addresses are presented in the tables below. Some register
structures are presented in separate sections below.
The HR and IR values are unsigned 16-bit integers unless otherwise

specified.
Table 5.1.15.1.-5 Mapping of Modbus data: user-defined registers

Description HR/IR address DI/Coil bit Writeable Value range Comment
(.bit) address
UDR 1 1 or 385
UDR 2 2 or 386
UDR 3 3 or 387
UDR 4 4 or 388
UDR 5 5 or 389
UDR 6 6 or 390
UDR 7 7 or 391
UDR 8 8 or 392
UDR 9 9 or 393
UDR 10 10 or 394
UDR 11 11 or 395
UDR 12 12 or 396
UDR 13 13 or 397
UDR 14 14 or 398
UDR 15 15 or 399
UDR 16 16 or 400
Table 5.1.15.1.-6 Mapping of Modbus data: status registers

(.bit) address
Status register 1 401 IRF code See Structure 1
Status register 2 402 Warning See Structure 1
codes
Status register 3 403 See Structure 1
94
Table 5.1.15.1.-7 Mapping of Modbus data: analog data

(.bit) address
Phase current IL1 x In 404 0...5000 0...50 x
Phase current IL2 x In 405 0...5000
Phase current IL3 x In 406 0...5000 0...50 x
Earth-fault current x In 407 0...20000 0...2000% In
Phase unbalance ΔI 408 0...100 0...100%
Table 5.1.15.1.-8 Mapping of Modbus data: digital data

Description HR/IR address (.bit) DI/Coil bit Writeable Value Comment
address range
Start signal from stage I> 409.00 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I> CD 409.01 2
Trip signal from stage I> 409.02 3 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I> CD 409.03 4
Start signal from stage I>> 409.04 5 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>> CD 409.05 6
Trip signal from stage I>> 409.06 7 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>> CD 409.07 8
Start signal from stage I>>> 409.08 9 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>>> CD 409.09 10
Trip signal from stage I>>> 409.10 11 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>>> CD 409.11 12
Start signal from stage I0> 409.12 13 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I0> CD 409.13 14
Trip signal from stage I0> 409.14 15 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I0> CD 409.15 16
Start signal from stage I0>> 410.00 17 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I0>> CD 410.01 18
Trip signal from stage I0>> 410.02 19 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I0>> CD 410.03 20
Start signal from stage ΔI> 410.04 21 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage ΔI> CD 410.05 22
Trip signal from stage ΔI> 410.06 23 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ΔI> CD 410.07 24
Start signal from stage θ> 410.08 25 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage θ> CD 410.09 26
Alarm signal from stage θ> 410.10 27 0/1 1 = activated
Alarm signal from stage θ> CD 410.11 28
Trip signal from stage θ> 410.12 29 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage θ> CD 410.13 30
Trip signal from stage ARC (light and 410.14 31 0/1 1 = activated
current)
Trip signal from stage ARC (light and 410.15 32
current) CD
95
Table 5.1.15.1.-8 Mapping of Modbus data: digital data (Continued)

address range
Trip signal from stage ARC (light and DI) 411.00 33 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC (light and DI) 411.01 34
CD
Light signal output 411.02 35 0/1 1 = activated
Light signal output CD 411.03 36
Trip lockout signal 411.04 37 0/1 1 = activated
Trip lockout signal CD 411.05 38
External trip signal 411.06 39 0/1 1 = activated
External trip signal CD 411.07 40
CBFP 411.08 41 0/1 1 = failure
CBFP CD 411.09 42
Shot 1 411.10 43 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 1 CD 411.11 44
Shot 2 411.12 45 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 2 CD 411.13 46
Shot 3 411.14 47 0/1 1 = initiated
Shot 3 CD 411.15 48
CB position 412.00 49 0/1 1 =closed
0 = open
CB position CD 412.01 50
Definite trip alarm signal 412.02 51 0/1 1 = activated
Definite trip alarm signal CD 412.03 52
AR lockout signal 412.04 53 0/1 1 = activated
AR lockout signal CD 412.05 54
Open CB command 412.06 55 0/1 1 = activated
Open CB command CD 412.07 56
Close CB command 412.08 57 0/1 1 = activated
Close CB command CD 412.09 58
CB reclosing failed signal 412.10 59 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing failed signal CD 412.11 60
CB reclosing inhibited 412.12 61 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing inhibited CD 412.13 62
AR cancelled 412.14 63 0/1 1 = activated
AR cancelled CD 412.15 64
PO1 413.00 65 0/1 1 = activated
PO1 CD 413.01 66
PO2 413.02 67 0/1 1 = activated
PO2 CD 413.03 68
PO3 413.04 69 0/1 1 = activated
PO3 CD 413.05 70
SO1 413.06 71 0/1 1 = activated
SO1 CD 413.07 72
SO2 413.08 73 0/1 1 = activated
96
Table 5.1.15.1.-8 Mapping of Modbus data: digital data (Continued)

address range
SO2 CD 413.09 74
SO3 413.10 75 0/1 1 = activated
SO3 CD 413.11 76
SO4 413.12 77 0/1 1 = activated
SO4 CD 413.13 78
SO5 413.14 79 0/1 1 = activated
O5 CD 413.15 80
DI1 414.00 81 0/1 1 = activated
DI1 CD 414.01 82
DI2 414.02 83 0/1 1 = activated
DI2 CD 414.03 84
DI3 414.04 85 0/1 1 = activated
DI3 CD 414.05 86
DI4 414.06 87 0/1 1 = activated
DI4 CD 414.07 88
DI5 414.08 89 0/1 1 = activated
DI5 CD 414.09 90
Disturbance recorder 414.10 91 0/1 1 = triggered
0 = cleared
Disturbance recorder CD 414.11 92
HMI Setting password 414.12 93 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
HMI Setting password CD 414.13 94
IRF 414.14 95 0/1 1 = activated
IRF CD 414.15 96
Warning 415.00 97 0/1 1 = activated
Warning CD 415.01 98
SPA event overflow 415.02 99
SPA event overflow CD 415.03 100 Only the CD
bit will be
activated in
case of
overflow.
HMI Communication password 415.04 101 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
HMI Communication password CD 415.05 102
97
Table 5.1.15.1.-9 Mapping of Modbus data: recorded data

(.bit) address
Fault record 601...628 See Structure 2
Event record 671...679 See Structure 3
Table 5.1.15.1.-10 Mapping of Modbus data: relay identification

(.bit) address
Type designation of the relay 701...708 ASCII chars, 2
chars/register
Table 5.1.15.1.-11 Mapping of Modbus data: real-time clock

(.bit) address
Time reading and setting 721...727 W See Structure 4
Table 5.1.15.1.-12 Mapping of Modbus data: additional analog data

(.bit) address
Thermal level 801 0...106 %
One-minute demand value 802 0...5000 0...50 x In
Demand value during the specified 803 0...5000 0...50 x In
time range
Maximum one-minute demand value 804 0...5000 0...50 x In
during the specified time range
Stage/phase which caused the trip 805 HI word 0...131071 See Table 5.1.17.-
3
806 LO word
Trip indication code 807 0...21 See Table 5.1.17.-
3
Number of starts of stage I> 808 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I>> 809 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I>>> 810 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I0> 811 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage I0>> 812 0...999 Counter
Number of starts of stage ΔI> 813 0...999 Counter
Number of trips of stage I> 814 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of stage I>> 815 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of stage I>>> 816 0...65535 Counter
Number of trips of other stages 817 0...65535 Counter
Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated 818 0...255 Counter
by the trip signal from stage I>>
by the start or trip signal from stage I>
by the start or trip signal from stage I0>
98
Table 5.1.15.1.-12 Mapping of Modbus data: additional analog data (Continued)

(.bit) address
Table 5.1.15.1.-13 Mapping of Modbus data: control points

(.bit) address
LED reset 501 W 1 1 = LED reseta)
a)
Coil area, only writeable.
Structure 1
The status registers contain information on unread fault and event records, and relay
status. The registers are arranged as in Fig. 5.1.15.1.-2 below.
15 8 7 0
401 Reserved IRF code
402 Warning code
403 FR ER Reserved SP MP
A040333
Fig. 5.1.15.1.-2 Status registers
When the value of the FR/ER bit is 1, there is one or several unread fault/event
records. If time synchronization is realized via a digital input, either the SP (second-
pulse) or MP (minute-pulse) bit will be activated.
Refer to Table 5.1.18.-1 for IRF codes and Table 5.1.18.-2 for warning codes.
Structure 2
This structure contains data recorded during a fault sequence. Refer to Fault records
earlier in this section for the reading method.
99
Table 5.1.15.1.-14 Fault record

Address Signal name Range Comment
a)
601 Latest selection code 1...2 1 = read oldest unread record
2 = read oldest stored record
602 Sequence number 1...255
603 Unread records left 0...6
604 Time stamp of the recorded data, date 2 bytes: YY.MM
605 Time stamp of the recorded data, date and time 2 bytes: DD.HH
606 Time stamp of the recorded data, time 2 bytes: MM.SS
607 Time stamp of the recorded data, time 0...999 0...999 ms
608 Phase current IL1 0...5000 0...50 x In
611 Earth-fault current 0...20000 0...2000% In
612 Phase discontinuity 0...100 0...100%
613 Thermal level at start 0...106 0...106%
614 Thermal level at trip 0...106 0...106%
615 Maximum pickup phase current IL1 0...5000 0...50 x In
618 Maximum pickup earth-fault current 0...20000 0...2000% In
619 Start duration of stage I> 0...100 0...100%
620 Start duration of stage I>> 0...100 0...100%
621 Start duration of stage I>>> 0...100 0...100%
622 Start duration of stage I0> 0...100 0...100%
623 Start duration of stage I0>> 0...100 0...100%
624 Start duration of stage ΔI> 0...100 0...100%
625 Start duration of external trip 0/100 0/100%
626 Trip number of AR sequence 0...255
627 Start duration of stage ARC (local) 0/100 0/100%
628 Start duration of stage ARC (remote) 0/100 0/100%
a)
Readable and writeable register.
Structure 3
This structure contains Modbus event records. Refer to Event records earlier in this
section for the reading method.
Table 5.1.15.1.-15 Event record

671 Latest selection codea) 1...3 1 = read oldest unread record
2 = read oldest stored record
3 = clear Modbus event buffer
-1...-99 -1...-99 = move to the nth
newest record
672 Sequence number 1...255
100
Table 5.1.15.1.-15 Event record (Continued)

673 Unread records left 0...99
674 Time stamp of the event, date 2 bytes: YY.MM
675 Time stamp of the event, date and time 2 bytes: DD.HH
676 Time stamp of the event, time 2 bytes: MM.SS
677 Time stamp of the event, time 0...999 0...999 ms
678 Modbus DI point or informative event (SPA channel) 0/1
*
DI event 0 When MSB = 0, bits 14...0
indicate the DI point.
* Informative event 1 When MSB = 1, bits 14...0
indicate the SPA channel.
679 DI value or SPA event code
* DI event 0/1 In case of a DI event, the
register will contain the DI
value.
* Informative event 0...63 In case of an informative event,
the register will contain the
SPA event code.
a)
Readable and writeable register.
Structure 4
The relay's real-time clock is stored in this structure. It can be updated by presetting
the whole register structure in one Modbus transaction.
Table 5.1.15.1.-16 Real-time clock structure

Address Description Range
721 Year 0...99
722 Month 1...12
723 Day 1...31
724 Hour 0...23
725 Minute 0...59
726 Second 0...59
727 Hundredth of a second 0...99
5.1.16. DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol
The DNP 3.0 protocol was developed by Harris Control based on the early versions
of the IEC 60870-5 standard telecontrol protocol specifications. Today, the DNP
protocol specifications are controlled by the DNP Users Group.
The DNP protocol supports the ISO OSI (Open System Interconnection) based
model, which only specifies physical, data link and application layers. This reduced
protocol stack is referred to as Enhanced Performance Architecture (EPA). To
support advanced RTU functions and messages larger than the maximum frame
length as defined in the IEC 60870-1, the DNP 3.0 Data Link is to be used with a
transport pseudo-layer. As a minimum, the transport pseudo-layer implements
message assembly and disassembly services.
101
5.1.16.1. Protocol parameters
The DNP parameters can all be adjusted using Relay Setting Tool. For the DNP
parameters, refer to Table 5.1.17.-14.
Storing DNP 3.0 parameters
All DNP parameters are stored on the external DNP 3.0 module. After
parameterization with Relay Setting Tool, REF 610 must be switched to the rear
communication mode for at least 10 seconds in order for the DNP parameters to be
replicated and stored onto the DNP module. However, this is necessary only if the
DNP parameters have been altered.
5.1.16.2. DNP 3.0 point list
The DNP data points (binary, analog and counters) of the relay, presented in
Table 5.1.16.2.-1...Table 5.1.16.2.-3, are all in use as default.
The default class settings of the DNP points within the different event object groups
are:
* Binary inputs change events: class 1
* Analog inputs change events: class 2
* Counter change events: class 3
All static data points belong to class 0.
Unsolicited reporting is enabled for all event objects as default. However, the point-
specific enable/disable parameters are meaningless unless unsolicited reporting has
been enabled with SPA parameter 503V24.
The pointers to the scaling factors for analog objects are all 0 as default.
Consequently, the DNP and Modbus analog values of the relay are identical as
default.
All DNP process points can be edited using Relay Setting Tool. Editing features
include:
* Re-organizing, adding and removing DNP points
* Assigning event classes to specific DNP points
* DNP point-specific enabling/disabling of unsolicited reporting
* Defining deadbands for event reporting
* Defining scaling factors for analog values
102
Table 5.1.16.2.-1 Binary data

Description DNP point Event class UR enable Value range Comment
address
Start signal from stage I> 0 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I> 1 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>> 2 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>> 3 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I>>> 4 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I>>> 5 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I0> 6 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I0> 7 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage I0>> 8 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage I0>> 9 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage ΔI> 10 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ΔI> 11 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Start signal from stage θ> 12 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Alarm signal from stage θ> 13 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage θ> 14 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Trip signal from stage ARC (light and 15 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
current)
Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and 16 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
current)
Light signal output 17 1 1 0/1 1 = detected
Trip lockout signal 18 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
External trip signal 19 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CBFP 20 1 1 0/1 1 = failure
Shot 1 21 1 1 0/1 1 = initiated
CB position 24 1 1 0/1 1 = closed
Definite trip alarm signal 25 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
AR lockout signal 26 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Open CB command 27 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Close CB command 28 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing failed signal 29 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
CB reclosing inhibited 30 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
AR cancelled 31 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO1 32 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO2 33 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
PO3 34 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO1 35 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO2 36 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO3 37 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO4 38 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SO5 39 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI1 40 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
103
Table 5.1.16.2.-1 Binary data (Continued)

Description DNP point Event class UR enable Value range Comment
address
DI2 41 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI3 42 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI4 43 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
DI5 44 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Disturbance recorder 45 1 1 0/1 1 = triggered
0 = cleared
HMI Setting password 46 1 1 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
IRF 47 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
Warning 48 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
SPA event overflow 49 1 1 0/1 1 = activated
HMI Communication password 50 1 1 0/1 1 = opened
0 = closed
Table 5.1.16.2.-2 Analog data

Description DNP point Event class UR enable Deadband Value range Internal
address scaling
factor (ix = 0)
Phase current IL1 x In 0 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Earth-fault current x In 3 2 1 1 0...20000 10
Phase unbalance 4 2 1 1 0...100 100
Thermal level 5 2 1 1 0...106 100
One-minute demand value 6 2 1 1 0...5000 100
Demand value during the specified 7 2 1 1 0...5000 100
time range
Maximum one-minute demand 8 2 1 1 0...5000 100
value during the specified time
range
Table 5.1.16.2.-3 Counters

Description DNP point Event class UR enable Deadband Value range
address
Number of starts of stage I> 0 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I>> 1 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I>>> 2 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I0> 3 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage I0>> 4 3 1 1 0...999
Number of starts of stage ΔI> 5 3 1 1 0...999
Number of trips of stage I> 6 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>> 7 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of stage I>>> 8 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of trips of other stages 9 3 1 1 0...65535
Number of AR shots (shot 1) initiated by 10 3 1 1 0...255
the trip signal from stage I>>
104
Table 5.1.16.2.-3 Counters (Continued)

Description DNP point Event class UR enable Deadband Value range
address
the digital input signal
the start or trip signal from stage I>
the start or trip signal from stage I0>
5.1.16.3. DNP 3.0 device profile

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: ABB Oy, Distribution Automation, Vaasa, Finland
Device Name: REF 610
Highest DNP Level Supported Device Function
For Requests L2 Slave
For Responses L2
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
Additions to level 2 are marked as shaded in the implementation table
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets) Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 2048
Received 292 Received 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
Configurable, range from 0 to 255 with Configurable, range from 0 to 255 with
primary data link layer retransmission count application layer retransmission count
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Configurable, with confirmation type selector, default NO ACK
Requires Application Layer Confirmation
Configurable with confirmation type selector when reporting Event Data (Slave devices
only)
Always after response to reset request
105
Always when sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)

Configurable, with confirmation type selector
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm Configurable with primary data link layer
timeout, not relevant when NO ACK
Complete Appl. Fragment No, multi-fragment application frames not
supported
Application Confirm Configurable with application layer timeout
Complete Appl. Response No, not relevant in slave
Sends/Executes Control Operations
WRITE Binary Outputs Never
SELECT/OPERATE Never
DIRECT OPERATE Never
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never
Count Never
Code Never
Trip/Close Never
Pulse On Never
Queue Never
Clear Queue Never
FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY:
Reports Digital Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Digital Input Change
specific variation requested Events when no specific variation requested
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other Configurable, depends on objects basic
(depends on default variation) variation (variation used at initialization)
Sends Unsolicited Responses Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses
Never Never
Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flags Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation Counters Roll Over at
No Counters Reported No Counters Reported
Configurable, default object and variation Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object 20 16 Bits (Counters 6...9)
Default Variation 2
Point-by-point list attached 32 Bits, but roll-over bits not used
106
Other value: 999 (Counters 0...5) and 255

(Counters 10...21)
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses Yes No
Table 5.1.16.3.-1 Supported function codes

Code Function Description Supported
Transfer Function Codes
0 Confirm Message fragment confirmation Yes
No response
1 Read Request objects from outstation Yes
Respond with requested objects
2 Write Store specified objects to outstation Yes
Respond with status of operation
Control Function Codes
3 Select Select output point of outstation No
Respond with status of control point
4 Operate Set previously selected output No
5 Direct operate Set output directly No
6 Direct operate NO ACK Set output directly No
No response
Freeze Function Codes
7 Immediate Freeze Copy specified objects to freeze buffer Yes
8 Immediate Freeze NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer Yes
No response
9 Freeze and Clear Copy specified objects to freeze buffer and clear objects Yesa)
10 Freeze and Clear NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer and clear objects Yesa)
No response
11 Freeze with time Copy specified objects to freeze buffer at specified time No
12 Freeze with time NO ACK Copy specified objects to freeze buffer at specified time No
No response
Application Control Function Codes
13 Cold Restart Perform desired reset sequence Yes
Respond with a time object
14 Warm Restart Perform desired partial reset operation Yes
Respond with a time object
15 Initialize Data to Defaults Initialize the specified data to default No
16 Initialize Application Set the specified application ready to be run No
17 Start Application Start the specified application to run Yes
18 Stop Application Stop the specified application to run Yes
Configuration Function Codes
107
Table 5.1.16.3.-1 Supported function codes (Continued)

Code Function Description Supported
19 Save configuration Save configuration No
20 Enable Unsolicited Messages Enable Unsolicited Messages Yes
21 Disable Unsolicited Messages Disable Unsolicited Messages Yes
22 Assign Class Assign specified objects to a class Yes
Time Synchronization Function Codes
23 Delay Measurement Perform propagation delay measurement Yes
Response Function Codes
0 Confirm Message fragment confirmation Yes
129 Response Response to request message Yes
130 Unsolicited Message Spontaneous message without request Yes
a)
Counters of the relay cannot be cleared by using the DNP 3.0 protocol.
Table 5.1.16.3.-2 Supported objects

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Object Variation Description Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
group codes (dec) codes (hex) codes (dec) codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input, all variations 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08, 17, 28
1 1 Binary Input 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08, 17, 28
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1, 20, 21, 22, 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
2 0 Binary Input Change, all variation 1 06, 07, 08
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative
Time
10 0 Binary Output, all variations
10 1 Binary Output
10 2 Binary Output with Status
12 0 Control Block, all variations
12 1 Control Relay Output Block
12 2 Pattern Control Block
12 3 Pattern Mask
20 0 Binary Counter, all variations 1, 7, 8, 20, 21, 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
22 08, 17, 28
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 20, 21, 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
22 08, 17, 28
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 20, 21, 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
22 08, 17, 28
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter
108
Table 5.1.16.3.-2 Supported objects (Continued)

20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
21 0 Frozen Counter, all variations 1 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08, 17, 28
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08, 17, 28
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08, 17, 28
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of 1 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
Freeze 08, 17, 28
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of 1 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
Freeze 08, 17, 28
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with
Time of Freeze
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with
Time of Freeze
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
without Flag
without Flag
22 0 Counter Change Event, all 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
variations
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
without Time
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
without Time
22 3 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event
without Time
without Time
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
Time
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
Time
with Time
with Time
109

23 0 Frozen Counter Event, all
variations
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
without Time
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
without Time
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event
without Time
without Time
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with
Time
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with
Time
with Time
with Time
30 0 Analog Input, all variations 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1, 20, 21, 22 00, 01, 06, 07, 129 00, 01, 17, 28
08 17, 28
31 0 Frozen Analog Input, all variations
31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with
Time of Freeze
31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with
Time of Freeze
31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without
Flag
31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without
Flag
32 0 Analog Change Event, all variations 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
without Time
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
without Time
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
Time
110

32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with 1 06, 07, 08 129, 130 17, 28
Time
33 0 Frozen Analog Event, all variations
33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without
Time
33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without
Time
33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with
Time
33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with
Time
40 0 Analog Output Status, all variations
40 1 32-Bit Analog Output Status
40 2 16-Bit Analog Output Status
41 0 Analog Output Block, all variations
41 1 32-Bit Analog Output Block
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block
50 0 Time and Date, all variations 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
50 1 Time and Date 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
(def)
50 1 Time and Date 2 06, 07, 08 129
(def)
50 2 Time and Date with Interval
51 0 Time and Date CTO, all variations
51 1 Time and Date CTO
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date
CTO
52 0 Time Delay, all variations
52 1 Time Delay Coarse
52 2 Time Delay Fine 23 7 129 7
60 0 All classes 1 6 129 28
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 06, 07, 08 129 17, 28
70 1 File Identifier
80 1 Internal Indications 2 00 129
81 1 Storage Object
82 1 Device Profile
83 1 Private Registration Object
83 2 Private Registration Object
Descriptor
90 1 Application Identifier
111

100 1 Short Floating Point
100 2 Long Floating Point
100 3 Extended Floating Point
101 1 Small Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
101 2 Medium Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
101 3 Large Packed Binary-Coded
Decimal
No Object 13, 14
5.1.16.4. Specific DNP features
Time synchronization
If time synchronization (minute-pulse or second-pulse) of the relay’s real-time clock

is realized via a digital input, the following applies to the DNP interface of the relay:
* Depending on the pulse type, either the date-to-minute or the date-to-second
information of the DNP time synchronization message is used.
* The relay sends only one request for time synchronization to the DNP master,
which is at power up.
Unsolicited reporting start up
Due to implementation differences in DNP master devices, the following alternative

unsolicited reporting (SPA parameter 503V24) start ups are available in the relay:
* 1 = Unsolicited reporting starts immediately, without permission from the master.
* 2 = The relay sends an empty unsolicited response message when
communication begins, which the master confirms. After this, the relay starts to
send unsolicited responses.
* 3 = The relay sends an empty unsolicited response message when
communication begins, which the master confirms. After this, the master enables
unsolicited reporting for certain or all classes using function 20. Classes which
are not enabled remain disabled.
Only the last alternative is compliant with the DNP 3.0 standard.
112
Event handling
The maximum capacity of the DNP event buffer is 100 events. When unsolicited
reporting has been enabled (SPA parameter 503V24), the event reporting uses the
following SPA parameters, called send throttle parameters:
503V18 Class 1 Event delay

503V19 Class 1 Event count
Example:
(class 1)
The events are reported when the event delay (SPA parameter 503V18) has
elapsed or the defined amount of events (SPA parameter 503V19) are
generated for class 1.
If send throttles are not wanted, the event delay should be set to 0 and the
event count to 1. In this case, the class events are sent to the host immediately
as they occur.
Event buffer overflow
DNP 3.0 event buffer overflow is indicated with the internal indication IIN2.3, as
defined by the standard. IIN2.3 can also indicate event buffer overflow in the
internal communication between the DNP3.0 module and the main CPU module of
the relay. In this case, the relay automatically activates and resets the IIN2.3 bit.
As events have been lost in both cases, the DNP 3.0 master should perform an
integrity scan after the IIN2.3 bit has been reset.
DNP counters and frozen counters
DNP counters in use have a corresponding frozen counter. The frozen counters in
object group 21 have the same DNP point index as the ordinary DNP counters.
Further, frozen counters can only be read as static objects, and frozen counter events
(object group 23) are not supported.
Collision avoidance and detection
The relay supports both collision avoidance and detection. Collision detection can
be enabled or disabled with SPA parameter 503V235. Collision avoidance occurs
before message transmission. When preparing to transmit and the link is busy, the
113
relay first waits until the link becomes idle. After this, a backoff time starts. When
the backoff time elapses, the relay checks the link again. If the link is not busy, the
relay starts the transmission. The backoff time is calculated as follows:
backoff time = silent interval + random delay
The silent interval is set with SPA parameter 503V232 and the maximum random
delay with SPA parameters 503V233 (the width of a single time slot in
milliseconds) and 503V234 (the maximum number of time slots). By setting the
time-slot width to 10 milliseconds and the maximum number of time slots to 10, for
instance, the maximum random delay is 100 milliseconds.
In a network consisting of several slaves, the priority between the

devices are defined with SPA parameters 503V233 and 503V234. A
device with shorter silent interval and maximum random delay has
higher sending priority than a device with longer silent interval and
maximum random delay.
Collision detection is always active during transmission (provided that it has been
enabled). While sending a message, the relay supervises collisions on the link. If a
collision is detected, the transmission is immediately cancelled. After this, the relay
tries to transmit the message again, using collision avoidance before sending the
message.
Scaling DNP analog values
The DNP analog values can be scaled using either an internal (fixed) or a user-
defined scaling factor. If the scaling factor index for a certain analog value is set to
0, the internal scaling factor is used. If set to 1...5, the user-defined scaling factor of
the corresponding scaling factor parameter, SPA parameter 503V (100+index), is
used:
503V101 Scaling factor 1

Example:
Phase current IL1 0.00...50.0 × In

Internal scaling factor 100
Default DNP range 0...5000
114
To show the analog value in primary units, and if In = 300 A and the accuracy of the
analog value = 1 A:
1. Take any unused scaling factor and set it to 300.
2. Set the scaling index pointer of the analog value to point at the scaling factor.
3. The value range is now 0.00 ×300....50.0 × 300 = 0...15000 A.
DNP analog values deadband
The deadband is always defined in units of the original value when scaled using the
internal (fixed) scaling factor, irrespective of whether the internal scaling factor is
used for value presentation or not.
Example:
For a deadband of 2% In when the internal scaling factor is 100, the deadband
value is set as follows: 0.02 × 100 = 2. If the scaling factor is set to 300 A, the
scaled deadband is 300 A × 0.02 = 6 A.
5.1.17. SPA bus communication protocol parameters
Altering parameter values via serial communication requires the use of the SPA
password in some cases. The password is a user-defined number within the range
1...999, the default value being 001. SPA parameters are found on channels 0...5,
503...504, 507 and 601...603.
To enter the setting mode, enter the password into parameter V160. To exit the
setting mode, enter the same password into parameter V161. The password
protection is also reactivated in case of loss of auxiliary voltage.
The password can be changed with parameter V162, but it is not possible to read
the password via this parameter. Abbreviations used in the following tables:
* R = readable data
* W = writeable data
* P = password protected writeable data
115
Settings
Table 5.1.17.-1 Settings

Variable Actual settings Group/Channel 1 Group/Channel 2 Setting range
(R), channel 0 (R, W, P) (R, W, P)
Start value of stage I> S1 1S1 2S1 0.30...5.00 x In
Operate time of stage I> S2 1S2 2S2 0.05...300 s
Time/current characteristic for stage I> S3 1S3 2S3 0...9
Time multiplier k S4 1S4 2S4 0.05...1.00
Time multiplier n S5 1S5 2S5 1.0...15.0
Resetting time of stage I> S6 1S6 2S6 0.05...2.50 s
a)
Start value of stage I>> S7 1S7 2S7 0.50...35.0 x In
Operate time of stage I>> S8 1S8 2S8 0.04...300 s
a)
Start value of stage I>>> S9 1S9 2S9 0.50...35.0 x In
Operate time of stage I>>> S10 1S10 2S10 0.04...30.0 s
Start value of stage I0> S11 1S11 2S11 1.0...100% In
Operate time of stage I0> S12 1S12 2S12 0.05...300 s
Time/current characteristic for stage I0> S13 1S13 2S13 0...9
Time multiplier k0 S14 1S14 2S14 0.05...1.00 s
Time multiplier n0 S15 1S15 2S15 1.0…15.0
Resetting time of stage I0> S16 1S16 2S16 0.05...2.50
Start value of stage I0>> S17a) 1S17 2S17 5.0...800% In
Operate time of stage I0>> S18 1S18 2S18 0.05...300 s
Start value of value of stage ΔI> S19a) 1S19 2S19 10...100%
Operate time of stage ΔI> S20 1S20 2S20 1...300 s
a)
Full load current S21 1S21 2S21 0.30...1.50 x In
Time constant of stage θ> S22 1S22 2S22 1...200 min
Alarm level of stage θ> S23 1S23 2S23 50...100% θt>
Operate time of CBFP S24 1S24 2S24 0.10...60.0 s
Number of AR shots S25 1S25 2S25 0 = AR is not in
use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and
3
Current limit Arc I> of stage ARC S26a)b) 1S26 2S26 0.50...35.0 x In
a)b)
Current limit Arc I0> of stage ARC S27 1S27 2S27 5.0...800% In
Checksum, SGF 1 S61 1S61 2S61 0...255
Checksum, SGF 2 S62 1S62 2S62 0...127
Checksum, SGF 3 S63 1S63 2S63 0...127
Checksum, SGF 4 S64 1S64 2S64 0...63
Checksum, SGF 5 S65 1S65 2S65 0...255
Checksum, SGB 1 S71 1S71 2S71 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 2 S72 1S72 2S72 0...1048575
Checksum, SGB 3 S73c) 1S73 2S73 0...1048575
c)
Checksum, SGB 4 S74 1S74 2S74 0...1048575
116
Table 5.1.17.-1 Settings (Continued)

Variable Actual settings Group/Channel 1 Group/Channel 2 Setting range
(R), channel 0 (R, W, P) (R, W, P)
Checksum, SGB 5 S75c) 1S75 2S75 0...1048575
Checksum, SGR 1 S81 1S81 2S81 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 2 S82 1S82 2S82 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 3 S83 1S83 2S83 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 4 S84 1S84 2S84 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 5 S85 1S85 2S85 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 6 S86c) 1S86 2S86 0...8388607
c)
Checksum, SGR 7 S87 1S87 2S87 0...8388607
Checksum, SGR 8 S88c) 1S88 2S88 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 1 S91 1S91 2S91 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 2 S92 1S92 2S92 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 3 S93 1S93 2S93 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 4 S94 1S94 2S94 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 5 S95 1S95 2S95 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 6 S96 1S96 2S96 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 7 S97 1S97 2S97 0...8388607
Checksum, SGL 8 S98 1S98 2S98 0...8388607
a)
If the protection stage is out of operation, the number indicating the currently used value will be displaced by “999” when the parameter is read
via the SPA bus and by dashes on the LCD.
b)
If the optional/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
c)
If the optional/O module has not been installed, a dash will be shown on the LCD and “9999999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Auto-reclose parameters
Table 5.1.17.-2 Auto-reclose parameters

Description Parameter (R, Value
W, P), channel
0
CB Closing time V121 0.1...10 s
Start delay of stage I> V122 0...300 s
Start delay of stage I0> V123 0...300 s
Reclaim time V124 3...300 s
Cutout time V125 0.1...300 s
Dead time of shot 1 V126 0.1...300 s
SG1 V129 0...255
SG2 V130 0...1023
SG3 V131 0...31
The AR function can be activated either via the or with SPA parameter S25 by
setting the number of auto-reclose shots to 1, 2 or 3.
117
Recorded data
Parameter V1 shows the stage and phase which caused the trip. Parameter V2 shows
the trip indication code.
Parameters V3...V8 show the number of starts of the protection stages, parameters
V9...V12 the number of trips of the protection stages , and parameters V13...V24
the number of initiated auto-reclose shots.
Table 5.1.17.-3 Recorded data: Channel 0

Recorded data Parameter (R) Value
Stage/phase which V1 1=IL3>
caused the trip 2=IL2>
4=IL1>
8=I0>
16=IL3>>
32=IL2>>
64=IL1>>
128=I0>>
256=IL3>>>
512=IL2>>>
1024=IL1>>>
2048=ΔI>
4096=θ>
8192=external trip
16384=AR
32768=trip of stage ARC (local)
65536=trip of stage ARC (remote)
Trip indication V2 0=—
code
1=start of stage I>
2=trip of stage I>
3=start of stage I>>
4=trip of stage I>>
5=start of stage I>>>
6=trip of stage I>>>
7=start of stage I0>
8=trip of stage I0>
9=start of stage I0>>
10=trip of stage I0>>
11=start of stage ΔI>
12=trip of stage ΔI>
13=alarm of stage θ>
14=trip of stage θ>
15=external trip
16=definite trip alarm
17=CB reclosing failed
118
Table 5.1.17.-3 Recorded data: Channel 0 (Continued)

18=AR shot due
19=AR lockout
20=trip of stage ARC
21=CBFP
Number of starts of V3 0...999
stage I>
stage I>>
stage I>>>
stage I0>
stage I0>>
stage ΔI>
Number of trips of V9 0...65535
stage I>
stage I>>
stage I>>>
other stages
Number of AR V13 0...255
shots (shot 1)
initiated by the trip
signal from stage
I>>
shots (shot 1)
initiated by the
digital input signal
shots (shot 1)
initiated by the
start or trip signal
from stage I>
shots (shot 1)
initiated by the
from stage I0>
shots (shot 2)
signal from stage
I>>
119
Table 5.1.17.-3 Recorded data: Channel 0 (Continued)

shots (shot 2)
initiated by the
shots (shot 2)
initiated by the
from stage I>
shots (shot 2)
initiated by the
from stage I0>
shots (shot 3)
signal from stage
I>>
shots (shot 3)
initiated by the
shots (shot 3)
initiated by the
from stage I>
shots (shot 3)
initiated by the
from stage I0>
The last five recorded values can be read with parameters V1...V23 on channels
1...5. Event n denotes the last recorded value, n-1 the next one, and so forth.
Table 5.1.17.-4 Recorded data: Channels 1...5

Recorded data Event (R) Value
n Channel 1 n-1 Channel 2 n-2 Channel 3 n-3 Channel 4 n-4 Channel 5
Phase current IL1 1V1 2V1 3V1 4V1 5V1 0...50 x In
Earth-fault current 1V4 2V4 3V4 4V4 5V4 0...2000% In
Phase discontinuity 1V5 2V5 3V5 4V5 5V5 0...100%
Thermal level at start 1V6 2V6 3V6 4V6 5V6 0...106%a)
Thermal level at trip 1V7 2V7 3V7 4V7 5V7 0...106%a)
Maximum pickup 1V8 2V8 3V8 4V8 5V8 0...50 x In
phase current IL1
phase current IL2
120
Table 5.1.17.-4 Recorded data: Channels 1...5 (Continued)

Recorded data Event (R) Value
n Channel 1 n-1 Channel 2 n-2 Channel 3 n-3 Channel 4 n-4 Channel 5
phase current IL3
Maximum pickup 1V11 2V11 3V11 4V11 5V11 0...2000%
earth-fault current
Start Pickup duration 1V12 2V12 3V12 4V12 5V12 0...100%
of stage I>
Start duration of stage 1V13 2V13 3V13 4V13 5V13 0...100%
I>>
I>>>
I0>
I0>>
ΔI>
Start duration of 1V18 2V18 3V18 4V18 5V18 0/100%
external trip
Trip number of AR 1V19 2V19 3V19 4V19 5V19 0...255
sequence
Start duration of stage 1V20 2V20 3V20 4V20 5V20 0/100%
ARC (local)
Start duration of stage 1V21 2V21 3V21 4V21 5V21 0/100%
ARC (remote)
Time stamp of the 1V22 2V22 3V22 4V22 5V22 YY-MM-DD
recorded data, date
Time stamp of the 1V23 2V23 3V23 4V23 5V23 HH.MM;
recorded data, time SS.sss
a)
If the thermal protection has been set out of operation (SGF3/5), dashes will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the parameter is read via
the SPA bus.
Disturbance recorder
Table 5.1.17.-5 Parameters for the disturbance recorder

Description Parameter (channel 0) R, W Value
a)
Remote triggering M1 W 1
Clear recorder memory M2 W 1
Sampling rate M15b) R, W 800/960 Hz
400/480 Hz
50/60 Hz
Station identification/unit number M18 R, W 0...9999
Rated frequency M19 R 50 or 60 Hz
Name of the feeder M20 R, W Max 16 characters
Digital channel texts M40...M47 R -
Analog channel texts M60...M63 R -
Analog channel conversion factor and unit M80c)d) R, W Factor 0...65535, unit (A,
for IL1, IL2 and IL3 kA), e.g. 10,kA
121
Table 5.1.17.-5 Parameters for the disturbance recorder (Continued)

Description Parameter (channel 0) R, W Value
M81 and R
M82 R
Analog channel conversion factor and unit M83c) R, W Factor 0...65535, unit (A,
for the earth-fault current kA), e.g. 10,kA
Internal trigger signals' checksum V236 R, W 0...16383
Internal trigger signal's edge V237 R, W 0...16383
b)
Checksum of internal signal storing mask V238 R, W 0...16383
Post-triggering recording length V240 R, W 0...100%
External trigger signal's checksum V241 R, W 0...31
External trigger signal's edge V242 R, W 0...31
b)
Checksum of external signal storing mask V243 R, W 0...31
Triggering state, clearing and restart V246 R, W R:
0 = Recorder not triggered
1 = Recorder triggered
and recording stored in
the memory
W:
0 = Clear recorder
memory
2 = Download restart; sets
the first information and
the time stamp for
triggering ready to be read
4 = Manual triggering
a)
M1 can be used for broadcast triggering by using the unit address “900”.
b)
Parameters can be written if the recorder has not been triggered.
c)
The disturbance recorder requires this parameter to be set. The conversion factor is the transformation ratio multiplied by the rated current
voltage of the relay. If value 0 is given to this parameter, dashes are shown on the LCD instead of the primary values and the recorded data will
be redundant.
d)
This value is copied to parameters M81 and M82.
Table 5.1.17.-6 Disturbance recorder internal triggering and storing

Event Weighting Default value of Default value Default value of
factor triggering of triggering storing mask,
mask, V236 edge, V237a) V238
Start of stage I> 1 0 0 1
Trip of stage I> 2 1 0 1
Start of stage I>> 4 0 0 1
Trip of stage I>> 8 1 0 1
Start of stage I>>> 16 0 0 0
Trip of stage I>>> 32 1 0 1
Start of stage I0> 64 0 0 1
Trip of stage I0> 128 1 0 1
Start of stage I0>> 256 0 0 0
Trip of stage I0>> 512 1 0 1
Start of stage ΔI> 1024 0 0 0
Trip of stage ΔI> 2048 0 0 0
122
Table 5.1.17.-6 Disturbance recorder internal triggering and storing (Con-

tinued)
Event Weighting Default value of Default value Default value of
factor triggering of triggering storing mask,
mask, V236 edge, V237 V238
Alarm of stage θ> 4096 0 0 0
Trip of stage θ> 8192 0 0 0
Σ 682 0 751
a)
0 = rising edge; 1 = falling edge.
Table 5.1.17.-7 Disturbance recorder external triggering and storing

Event Weighting factor Default value of Default value of Default value of
triggering mask, triggering edge, storing mask,
V241 V242a) V243
DI1 1 0 0 0
DI2 2 0 0 0
DI3 4 0 0 0
DI4 8 0 0 0
DI5 16 0 0 0
Σ 0 0 0
a)
0 = rising edge; 1 = falling edge.
Table 5.1.17.-8 Control parameters

Description Parameter R, W, P Value
Reading of the event buffer L R Time, channel number and event code
Re-reading of the event buffer B R Time, channel number and event code
Reading of relay state data C R 0 = Normal state
1 = The relay has been subject to an
automatic reset
2 = Overflow of the event buffer
3 = Both 1 and 2
Resetting of relay state data C W 0 = Reset E50 and E51
1 = Reset only E50
2 = Reset only E51
4 = Reset all events including E51 except for
E50
Time reading and setting T R, W SS.sss
Date and time reading and setting D R, W YY-MM-DD HH.MM;SS.sss
Type designation of the relay F R REF 610
Unlatching output contacts V101 W 1 = Unlatch
Clearing indications and memorized values and V102 W 1 = Clear and unlatch
unlatching contacts (master reset)
Resetting of trip lockout V103 W 1 = Reset
Rated frequency V104 R, W (P) 50 or 60 Hz
Time setting range for demand values in V105 R, W 0...999 min
minutes
Non-volatile memory settings V106 R, W 0...31
Time setting for disabling new trip indications on V108 R, W (P) 0...999 min
the LCD
123
Table 5.1.17.-8 Control parameters (Continued)

Testing the self-supervision V109 W (P) 1 = Self-supervision output contact is
activated and the READY indicator LED
starts to blink
0 = Normal operation
LED test for start and trip indicators V110 W (P) 0 = Start and trip LEDs off
1 = Trip LED on, start LED off
2 = Start LED on, trip LED off
3 = Start and trip LEDs on
LED test for programmable LEDs V111 W (P) 0...255
Trip-circuit supervision V113 R, W 0 = Not in use
1 = In use
Store countera) V114 R 0...65535
Remote control of setting group V150 R, W 0 = Setting group 1
1 = Setting group 2
Entering the SPA password for settings V160 W 1...999
Changing the SPA password or taking the V161 W (P) 1...999
password protection into use
Changing the HMI Setting password V162 W 1...999
Changing the HMI Communication password V163 W 1...999
Clearing trip counters or AR counter V166 W (P) 1 = Clear trip counters
2 = Clear AR counters
Restoring factory settings V167 W (P) 2 = Restore factory settings for CPU
3 = Restore factory settings for DNP
Warning code V168 R 0...63b)
IRF code V169 R 0...255b)
Unit address of the relay V200 R, W 1...254
Data transfer rate (SPA), kbps V201 R, W 9.6/4.8
Rear communication V202 W 1 = Rear connector activated
c)
Rear communication protocol V203 R, W 0 = SPA
1 = IEC_103
2 = Modbus RTU
3 = Modbus ASCII
4 = DNP 3.0 (read-only)
Connection type V204 R, W 0 = Loop
1 = Star
Line-idle state V205 R, W 0 = Light off
1 = Light on
Optional communication module V206 R, W (P) 0 = Not in use
1 = In used)
CPU software number V227 R 1MRS118512
CPU software revision V228 R A...Z
CPU build number V229 R XXX
DNP protocol name 2V226 R DNP 3.0
DNP software number 2V227 R 1MRS118531
DNP software revision 2V228 R A...Z
DNP build number 2V229 R XXX
Relay serial number V230 R BAxxxxxx
CPU serial number V231 R ACxxxxxx
124
Table 5.1.17.-8 Control parameters (Continued)

DNP serial number V232 R AKxxxxxx
Test date V235 R YYMMDD
Date reading and setting V250 R, W YY-MM-DD
(RED 500 format)
Time reading and setting V251 R, W HH.MM;SS.sss
(RED 500 format)
a)
The store counter can be used for monitoring parameter changes, for instance. The store counter is incremented by one on each parameter
change via the HMI or serial communication. When the counter reaches its maximum value, it will roll over. If the factory settings are restored,
the counter is cleared.
b)
In case of a warning, the value 255 is stored in V169. This enables the master to continuously read only V169.
c)
If the optional DNP 3.0 module has been installed, the DNP 3.0 communication protocol is automatically selected.
d)
If the optional communication module is not installed, a warning of a faulty communication module appears on the LCD together with the fault
code.
The measured currents can be read with parameters I1...I4, the calculated phase
discontinuity value with parameter I5, the status of light detection with parameter
I6, the CB position with parameter I7 and the status of the digital inputs with
parameters I8...I12.
Table 5.1.17.-9 Input signals

Description Channel Parameter (R) Value
Current measured on phase IL1 0 I1 0...50 x In
Measured earth-fault current 0 I4 0...2000% In
Calculated phase discontinuity 0 I5 0...100%
value
Light detected (arc) 0 I6 0/1
CB position 0,3 I7 0 = undefined
1 = closed
2 = open
3 = undefined
DI1 status 0,2 I8 0/1a)
a)
When the value is 1, the digital input is energized.
Each protection stage has its internal output signal. These signals can be read with
parameters O1...O26 and the recorded functions with parameters O61...O86. The
state of the output contacts can be read or changed with parameters O41...O49 and
the recorded functions read with parameters O101...O109.
125
Table 5.1.17.-10 Output signals

Status of the Channel State of stage Recorded Value
protection (R) functions (R)
stages
Start of stage I> 0,1 O1 O61 0/1
Trip of stage 0,1 O2 O62 0/1
Start of stage 0,1 O3 O63 0/1
I>>
stage I>>
I>>>
Trip of stage 0,1 O6 O66 0/1 ;
I>>>
Start of stage I0> 0,1 O7 O67 0/1
Trip of stage I0> 0,1 O8 O68 0/1
I0>>
I0>>
ΔI>
Trip of stage ΔI> 0,1 O12 O72 0/1
Start of stage θ> 0,1 O13 O73 0/1
Alarm of stage 0,1 O14 O74 0/1
θ>
Trip of stage θ> 0,1 O15 O75 0/1
External trip 0,1 O16 O76 0/1
Trip lockout 0,1 O17 O77 0/1
CBFP Trip 0,1 O18 O78 0/1
ARC
Light signal 0,1 O20 O80 0/1
output
Open CB 0,3 O21 O81 0/1
command
Close CB 0,3 O22 O82 0/1
command
Definite trip 0,3 O23 O83 0/1
alarm
CB reclosing 0,3 O24 O84 0/1
failed
Shot due 0,3 O25 O85 0/1
AR Lockout 0,3 O26 O86 0/1
126
Table 5.1.17.-11 Outputs

Operation of Channel State of Recorded Value
output output (R, W, functions (R)
contact P)
Output PO1 0,2 O41 O101 0/1
Output PO2 0,2 O42 O102 0/1
a)
Output PO3 0,2 O43 O103 0/1b)
Output SO1 0,2 O44 O104 0/1
Output SO2 0,2 O45 O105 0/1
Output PO3 0,2 O46 - 0/1b)
(trip lockout)c)
Output SO3 0,2 O47 O107 0/1d)
Output SO4 0,2 O48 O108 0/1d)
Output SO5 0,2 O49 O109 0/1d)
Enabling 0,2 O51 - 0/1
activation of
output
contacts PO1,
PO2, PO3,
SO1, SO2,
SO3, SO4 and
SO5 via the
SPA bus
a)
State of output when the trip lockout function is not in use.
b)
Either O43/O103 or O46 is to be used at a time.
c)
State of output when the trip lockout function is in use.
d)
If the optional I/O module has not been installed, a dash is shown on the LCD and “9” when the
parameter is read via the SPA bus.
Parameters O41...O49 and O51 control the physical output contacts

which can be connected to circuit breakers, for instance.
Parameters for IEC 60870-5-103 remote communication protocol

(channel 507)
Unit address of the relay 507V200 R, W 1...254
Data transfer rate (IEC 60870-5- 507V201 R, W (P) 9.6/4.8
103), kbps
127
Parameters for Modbus remote communication protocol

(channel 504)
User-defined register 1 504V1 R, W 0...65535a)
Unit address of the relay 504V200 R, W 1...254
Data transfer rate (Modbus), 504V201 R, W 9.6/4.8/2.4/1.2/0.3
kbps
Modbus link parity 504V220 R, W 0 = even
1 = odd
2 = no parity
CRC order of Modbus RTU link 504V221 R, W 0 = low/high
1 = high/low
a)
The default value is 0.
128
Parameters for DNP 3.0 remote communication protocol

Description SPA R, W Value range Default Explanation
parameter
(channel 503)
Unit address 503V1 R, W 0...65532 1 Address of the relay in the DNP 3.0
network
Master address 503V2 R, W 0...65532 2 Address of the master station (destination
address for unsolicited responses)
Primary data link timeout 503V3 R, W 0 = no data link 0 Used when the relay sends data using
timeout used service 3
1...65535 ms
Primary data link layer 503V4 R, W 0...255 0 Number of retransmissions on data link
retransmission count layer
Application layer 503V6 R, W 0...65535 ms 5000 Used when the relay sends messages
confirmation timeout with confirmation request
Application layer 503V7 R, W 0...255 0 Number of retransmissions on the
retransmission count application layer when the relay sends
messages with confirmation request
Confirmation on application 503V9 R, W 0 = enabled only 0 Used to enforce inclusion of confirmation
layer for event request in all application messages
messages (DNP 3.0 standard requires inclusion of
1 = enabled for all confirmation request in event messages
messages only)
Default variation of binary 503V10 R, W 1...2 2
input objects
Default variation of binary 503V11 R, W 1...2 2
input change event objects
Default variation of analog 503V15 R, W 1...4 2
input objects
Default variation of analog 503V16 R, W 1...4 2
input change event objects
Default variation of counter 503V13 R, W 1...2 2
objects
Default variation of counter 503V14 R, W 1, 2, 5, 6 2
change event objects
Default variation of frozen 503V30 R, W 1, 2, 5, 6 2
counter objects
Class 1 event delay 503V18 R, W 0...255 s 0
Class 1 event count 503V19 R, W 0...255 1
Unsolicited reporting mode 503V24 R, W 0 = UR disabled 0 Refer to Unsolicited reporting start up in
1 = immediate Section 5.1.16.4. Specific DNP features.
2 = empty UR
3 = empty UR and
enable UR
129
Table 5.1.17.-14 Settings (Continued)

Description SPA R, W Value range Default Explanation
parameter
(channel 503)
Scaling factor 1 503V101 R, W 0...4294967295 1
Baud rate 503V211 R, W 4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4 9.6
Number of stop bits 503V212 R, W 1...2 1
Parity 503V230 R, W 0 = no parity 0
1 = odd
2 = even
Silent interval 503V232 R, W 0...65535 ms 20
Time slot width 503V233 R, W 0...255 ms 10
Number of time slots 503V234 R, W 0...255 8
Collision detection enabled 503V235 R, W 0 = disabled 0
1 = enabled
DNP module warning 503V168 R Bit coded
register 0 = OK
DNP module status 503V169 R Bit coded
register 0 = OK
Measurements
Table 5.1.17.-15 Measured values

(channel 0)
Thermal level V60 R, W (P) 0...106%a)b)
One-minute average current value V61 R 0...50 x Inc)
Average current value during the specified V62 R 0...50 x Inc)
time range
Maximum one-minute average current V63 R 0...50 x Inc)
value during the specified time range
a)
Changing the thermal level via serial communication will generate an event code.
b)
If the thermal protection has been set out of operation, the parameter cannot be written to, and dashes
will be shown on the LCD and “999” when the thermal level is read via the SPA bus.
c)
If the demand value is reset and the specified time has not elapsed, dashes are shown on the LCD and
“999” when the parameter is read via the SPA bus.
5.1.17.1. Event codes
Special codes are determined to represent certain events, such as start and tripping
of protection stages and different states of output signals.
The events are stored in the event buffer of the relay. The maximum capacity of the
buffer is 100 events. Under normal conditions the buffer is empty.
130
The contents of the buffer can be read using the L command, 5 events at a time.
Using the L command erases the previously read events from the buffer, with the
exception of events E50 and E51 which have to be reset by using the C command. If
a fault occurs and reading fails for example in data communication, the events can
be re-read by using the B command. If needed, the B command can also be repeated.
Events to be included in the event reporting are marked with the multiplier 1. The
event mask is formed by the sum of the weighting factors of all those events which
are to be included in event reporting.
Table 5.1.17.1.-1 Event masks

Event mask Code Setting range Default setting
V155 E31...E36 0...63 1
1V155 1E1...1E12 0...4095 1365
1V156 1E13...1E24 0...4095 1365
1V157 1E25...1E42 0...262143 4180
2V155 2E1...2E16 0...65535 3
2V156 2E17...2E26 0...1023 0
3V155 3E1...3E12 0...4095 1023
3V156 3E13...3E22 0...1023 1008
Channel 0
Events always included in the event reporting:
Table 5.1.17.1.-2 Event codes E1...E4 and E7

Channel Event Description
0 E1 IRF
0 E2 IRF disappeared
0 E3 Warning
0 E4 Warning disappeared
0 E7 The thermal level has been changed via serial communication
Table 5.1.17.1.-3 Event codes E50...E51

Channel Event Description
0 E50 Relay restart
0 E51 Event buffer overflow
Events possible to mask out:

Channel Event Description Weighting Default
factor value
0 E31 Disturbance recorder triggered 1 1
0 E32 Disturbance recorder memory cleared 2 0
0 E33 HMI Setting password opened 4 0
0 E34 HMI Setting password closed 8 0
0 E35 HMI Communication password opened 16 0
131
Table 5.1.17.1.-4 Event codes E31...E36 (Continued)

factor value
0 E36 HMI Communication password closed 32 0
Default value of event mask V155 1
Channel 1

factor value
1 E1 Start signal from stage I> activated 1 1
1 E2 Start signal from stage I> reset 2 0
1 E3 Trip signal from stage I> activated 4 1
1 E4 Trip signal from stage I> reset 8 0
1 E5 Start signal from stage I>> activated 16 1
1 E6 Start signal from stage I>> reset 32 0
1 E7 Trip signal from stage I>> activated 64 1
1 E8 Trip signal from stage I>> reset 128 0
1 E9 Start signal from stage I>>> activated 256 1
1 E10 Start signal from stage I>>> reset 512 0
1 E11 Trip signal from stage I>>> activated 1024 1
1 E12 Trip signal from stage I>>> reset 2048 0
Default value of event mask 1V155 1365

factor value
1 E13 Start signal from stage I0> activated 1 1
1 E14 Start signal from stage I0> reset 2 0
1 E15 Trip signal from stage I0> activated 4 1
1 E16 Trip signal from stage I0> reset 8 0
1 E17 Start signal from stage I0>> activated 16 1
1 E18 Start signal from stage I0>> reset 32 0
1 E19 Trip signal from stage I0>> activated 64 1
1 E20 Trip signal from stage I0>> reset 128 0
1 E21 Start signal from stage ΔI> activated 256 1
1 E22 Start signal from stage ΔI> reset 512 0
1 E23 Trip signal from stage ΔI> activated 1024 1
1 E24 Trip signal from stage ΔI> reset 2048 0
132

factor value
1 E25 Start signal from stage θ> activated 1 0
1 E26 Start signal from stage θ> reset 2 0
1 E27 Alarm signal from stage θ> activated 4 1
1 E28 Alarm signal from stage θ> reset 8 0
1 E29 Trip signal from stage θ> activated 16 1
1 E30 Trip signal from stage θ> reset 32 0
1 E31 Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) 64 1
activated
1 E32 Trip signal from stage ARC (light and current) 128 0
reset
1 E33 Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current) 256 0
activated
1 E34 Trip signal from stage ARC (DI and current) 512 0
reset
1 E35 Light signal output activated 1024 0
1 E36 Light signal output reset 2048 0
1 E37 Trip lockout signal activated 4096 1
1 E38 Trip lockout signal reset 8192 0
1 E39 External trip signal activated 16384 0
1 E40 External trip signal reset 32768 0
1 E41 CBFP activated 65536 0
1 E42 CBFP reset 131072 0
Channel 2

factor value
2 E1 PO1 activated 1 1
2 E2 PO1 reset 2 1
2 E4 PO2 reset 8 0
2 E6 PO3 reset 32 0
2 E7 SO1 activated 64 0
2 E8 SO1 reset 128 0
2 E10 SO2 reset 512 0
2 E12 SO3 reset 2048 0
2 E14 SO4 reset 8192 0
133
Table 5.1.17.1.-8 Event codes E1...E16 (Continued)

factor value
2 E16 SO5 reset 32768 0

factor value
2 E17 DI1 activated 1 0
2 E18 DI1 deactivated 2 0
Channel 3

factor value
3 E1 Shot 1 initiated 1 1
3 E2 Shot 1 ended 2 1
3 E3 Shot 2 Initiated 4 1
3 E5 Shot 3 initiated 16 1
3 E7 CB position open 64 1
3 E8 CB position closed 128 1
3 E9 Definite trip alarm signal activated 256 1
3 E10 Definite trip alarm signal reset 512 1
3 E11 AR lockout signal activated 1024 0
3 E12 AR lockout signal reset 2048 0
134
Table 5.1.17.1.-11 E13...E22

factor value
3 E13 Open CB command activated 1 0
3 E14 Open CB command reset 2 0
3 E15 Close CB command activated 4 0
3 E16 Close CB command reset 8 0
3 E17 CB reclosing failed signal activated 16 1
3 E18 CB reclosing failed signal reset 32 1
3 E19 CB reclosing inhibited 64 1
3 E20 CB reclosing inhibited reset 128 1
3 E21 AR cancelled 256 1
3 E22 AR cancelled reset 512 1
5.1.18. Self-supervision (IRF) system
The relay is provided with an extensive self-supervision system which continuously

supervises the software and the electronics of the relay. It handles run-time fault
situations and informs the user about an existing fault via a LED on the HMI and a
text message on the LCD. There are two types of fault indications: IRF indications
and warnings.
Internal relay fault
When an internal relay fault preventing relay operation is detected, the relay first
tries to eliminate the fault by restarting. Only after the fault is found to be
permanent, the green indicator LED (ready) begins to blink and the self-supervision
output contact is activated. All other output contacts are returned to the initial state
and locked for the internal relay fault. Further, a fault indication message appears on
the LCD, including a fault code.
IRF indications have the highest priority on the HMI. None of the other HMI
indications can override the IRF indication. As long as the green indicator LED
(ready) is blinking, the fault indication cannot be cleared. In case an internal fault
disappears, the green indicator LED (ready) stops blinking and the relay is returned
to the normal service state, but the fault indication message remains on the LCD
until manually cleared.
The IRF code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the
code is to be recorded and stated when ordering service. The fault codes are listed in
the following table:
135
Table 5.1.18.-1 IRF codes

Fault code Type of fault
4 Error in output relay PO1
7 Error in output relay SO1
8 Error in output relay SO2
9 Error in the enable signal for output relay PO1, PO2, SO1 or SO2
10, 11, 12 Error in the feedback, enable signal or output relay PO1, PO2, SO1
or SO2
13 Error in optional output relay SO3
16 Error in the enable signal for optional output relay SO3, SO4 or SO5
17, 18, 19 Error in the feedback, enable signal or optional output relay SO3,
SO4 or SO5
20, 21 Auxiliary voltage dip
30 Faulty program memory
50, 59 Faulty work memory
51, 52, 53a), 54, 56 Faulty parameter memoryb)
55 Faulty parameter memory, calibration parameters
80 Optional I/O module missing
81 Optional I/O module unknown
82 Optional I/O module configuration error
85 Power supply module faulty
86 Power supply module unknown
90 Hardware configuration error
95 Communication module unknown
104 Faulty configuration set (for IEC 60870-5-103)
131, 139, 195, 203, Internal reference voltage error
222, 223
240 Faulty input, Light sensor 2
241 Faulty input, Light sensor 1
253 Error in the measuring unit
a)
Can be corrected by restoring factory settings for CPU.
b)
All settings will be zero during the fault.
For further information on internal relay faults, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
Warnings
In case of a warning, the relay continues to operate except for those protection
functions possibly affected by the fault, and the green indicator LED (ready)
remains lit as during normal operation. Further, a fault indication message, which
depending on the type of fault includes a fault code, appears on the LCD. If more
136
than one type of fault occur at the same time, one single numeric code which
indicates all the faults is displayed. The fault indication message cannot be manually
cleared but it disappears with the fault.
When a fault appears, the fault indication message is to be recorded and stated when
ordering service. The fault codes are listed in the following table:
Table 5.1.18.-2 Warning codes

Fault Weight value
Battery low 1
a)
Trip-circuit supervision 2
Power supply module temperature high 4
Communication module faulty or missing 8
b)
DNP 3.0 configuration error 16
DNP 3.0 module faulty 32
Continuous light detected by Light sensor 1 or 2a) 64
∑ 127
a)
The external fault warning can be routed to SO2 with SGF1/8.
b)
Can be corrected by restoring factory settings for DNP
For further information on warnings, refer to the Operator’s Manual.
5.1.19. Relay parameterization
The parameters of the relay can be set either locally via the HMI or externally via
serial communication with Relay Setting Tool.
Local parameterization
When the parameters are set locally, the setting parameters can be chosen via the
hierarchical menu structure. The wanted language can be selected for parameter
descriptions. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for further information.
External parameterization
Relay Setting Tool is used for parameterizing the relay units. Adjusting the
parameter values using Relay Setting Tool is done off-line, after which the
parameters can be downloaded to the relay via a communication port.
5.2. Design description
5.2.1. Input/output connections
All external circuits are connected to the terminals on the rear panel of the relay.
137
* Terminals X2.1-_ are dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm2 ( 20-8) wire or two max
2.5 mm2 ( 24-12) wires
* Terminals X3.1-_ and X4.1-_ are dimensioned for one 0.2...2.5 mm2 wire or two
0.2...1.0 mm2 ( 24-16) wires.
The energizing phase currents of the relay are connected to terminals:
* X2.1/1-2
* X2.1/3-4
* X2.1/5-6
For inputs for phase and earth-fault currents, refer to Table 5.2.1.-1.
The relay can also be used in single or two-phase applications by

leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied. However, at least
terminals X2.1/1-2 must be connected.
The energizing earth-fault current of the relay is connected to terminals X2.1/7-8,

see Table 5.2.1.-1.
The input terminals of the optional I/O module are located on connection socket
X3.1, see Table 5.2.1.-4 and Table 5.2.1.-5.
When connection socket X3.1 is used, the optional I/O module must be
installed.
Terminals X4.1/21-24 and X3.1/1-6 (optional) are digital input terminals, see
Table 5.2.1.-5. The digital inputs can be used to generate a blocking signal, to
unlatch output contacts or for remote control of relay settings, for instance. The
requested functions are selected separately for each input in switchgroups SGB1...5.
The digital inputs can also be used to trigger the disturbance recorder; this function
is selected with SPA parameter V243.
The auxiliary voltage of the relay is connected to terminals X4.1/1-2, see

Table 5.2.1.-2. At DC supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X4.1/1. The
permitted auxiliary voltage range of the relay is marked on the front panel of the
relay under the handle of the plug-in unit.
Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable of
controlling most circuit breakers, see Table 5.2.1.-4.The signals to be routed to
PO1...PO3 are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR1...SGR3. On
delivery from the factory, the trip signals from all the protection stages are routed to
PO1, PO2 and PO3.
Output contacts SO1...SO5 can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the
relay, see Table 5.2.1.-4.Output contacts SO3...SO5 are optional and available only
if the optional I/O module has been installed. The signals to be routed to SO1...SO5
138
are selected with the switches of switchgroups SGR4...SGR8. On delivery from the
factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protection stages are routed to SO1
and SO2.
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of the
protection relay, see Table 5.2.1.-3. Under normal operating conditions, the relay is
energized and the contact is closed (X4.1/3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-
supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the output contact drops
off and the contact closes (X4.1/3-4).
Fig. 5.2.1.-1...Fig. 5.2.1.-3 present a rear view of the relay, showing four connecting
sockets: one for measuring transformers, one for the optional I/O module, one for
power supply and one for optional serial communication.
139
X2.1
X3.1
11 12
X4.1
1 1
2 2
X5.1 3 3
10
4 4
5 5
9
X5.2 6 6
7 7
DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
8 8
8
TX 9 9
NEAR INSTRUMENT TERMINALS
X5.3 10 10 7
11 11
RX 12 12
13 13
6
14 14
TX 15 15
5
16 16
X5.4 17 17
18 18
4
RX
19 19
20 20
3
21 21
22 22
23 23
!
24 24
1
A040188
Fig. 5.2.1.-1 Rear view of the relay with the fibre-optic communication module for plastic and glass fibrewith light
sensor inputs
140
X2.1
X3.1
11 12
X4.1
1 1
2 2
3 3
10
4 4
5 5
9
6 6
7 7
8 8
8
9 9
10 10
11 11 7
12 12
13 13
6
14 14
15 15
5
X5.5 16 16
17 17
6 18 18
4
5 19 19
4
3 20 20
3
2 21 21
1 22 22
23 23
!
24 24
1
A040187
Fig. 5.2.1.-2 Rear view of the relay with the RS-485 communication module
141
X2.1
X3.1
11 12
X4.1
1 1
2 2
3 3
10
4 4
5 5
9
6 6
7 7
8 8
8
9 9
10 10 7
11 11
12 12
13 13
6
14 14
15 15
5
16 16
8 17 17
7
6 18 18
4
X5.8 5 19 19
4
3 20 20
3
2 21 21
1 22 22
23 23
!
24 24
1
A040189
Fig. 5.2.1.-3 Rear view of the relay with the DNP 3.0 communication module for RS-485
Table 5.2.1.-1 Inputs for phase and earth-fault currents

Terminal Functiona)
REF610A12xxxx
REF610A15xxxx
REF610A51xxxx
REF610A52xxxx
REF610A55xxxx
REF610A11xxxx
X2.1-1 IL1 1 A IL1 1 A IL1 1 A IL1 5 A IL1 5 A IL1 5 A

X2.1-2
X2.1-4
X2.1-6
142
Table 5.2.1.-1 Inputs for phase and earth-fault currents (Continued)

Terminal Function
REF610A12xxxx
REF610A15xxxx
REF610A51xxxx
REF610A52xxxx
REF610A55xxxx
REF610A11xxxx
X2.1-7 I0 1 A I0 0.2 A I0 5 A I0 1 A I0 0.2 A I0 5 A
X2.1-8
X2.1-9 - - - -
X2.1-10 - - - -
X2.1-11 - - - -
X2.1-12 - - - -
a)
The value denotes the rated current for each input.
Table 5.2.1.-2 Auxiliary supply voltage

Terminal Function
X4.1-1 Input, +
X4.1-2 Input, -
Table 5.2.1.-3 IRF contact

Terminal Function
X4.1-3 IRF, common
X4.1-4 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected
X4.1-5 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected
Table 5.2.1.-4 Output contacts

Terminal Function
X3.1-16 SO5, commona)
X3.1-17 SO5, NCa)
X3.1-18 SO5, NOa)
X3.1-20 SO4, NCa)
X3.1-21 SO4, NOa)
X3.1-23 SO3, NCa)
X3.1-24 SO3, NOa)
X4.1-6 SO2, common
X4.1-7 SO2, NC
X4.1-8 SO2, NO
X4.1-9 SO1, common
X4.1-10 SO1, NC
X4.1-11 SO1, NO
X4.1-12 PO3 (trip lockout relay), NO
X4.1-13
X4.1-14 PO2, NO
X4.1-15
143
Table 5.2.1.-4 Output contacts (Continued)

Terminal Function
X4.1-16 PO1, NO
X4.1-17
X4.1-18 PO1 (TCS), NO
X4.1-19
X4.1-20 -
a)
Optional.
Table 5.2.1.-5 Digital inputs

Terminal Function
X4.1-23 DI1
X4.1-24
X4.1-21 DI2
X4.1-22
X3.1-1 DI3a)
X3.1-2
X3.1-3 DI4a)
X3.1-4
X3.1-5 DI5a)
X3.1-6
a)
Optional.
5.2.2. Light sensor input connections
If REF 610 is provided with the optional communication module with light sensor
inputs, the pre-manufactured lens-sensor fibres are connected to inputs X5.1 and
X5.2 (see 5.2.2.-1 and ). For further information on the arc protection, refer to
5.1.4.7. Arc protection.
REF 610 is provided with connection sockets X5.1 and X5.2 only if
the optional communication module with light sensor inputs has been
installed (refer to section Ordering information).
Table 5.2.2.-1 Light sensor input connectors

Terminal Function
X5.1 Input Light sensor 1
X5.2 Input Light sensor 2
5.2.3. Serial communication connections
The optical front connection of the relay is used to connect the relay to the SPA bus
via the front communication cable, refer to Section 7. Ordering information. If a PC
compatible to the IrDA® Standard specifications is used, wireless communication is
possible as well. The maximum wireless operating distance depends on the
transceiver of the PC.
144
Rear communication of the relay is optional and the physical connection varies with
the communication option.
Plastic fibre-optic connection
If the relay is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for
plastic fibre, the fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals as follows:
Table 5.2.3.-1 Plastic fibre-optic rear connection

Terminal Function
X5.3-TX Transmitter
X5.3-RX Receiver
RS-485 connection
If the relay is provided with the optional RS-485 communication module, the cable
is connected to terminals X5.5/1-2 and X5.5/4-6. The connection socket is a 6-pin
header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type.
The RS-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is

intended to be used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire, half-duplex,
multi-point communication.
The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where

the relay is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is
1200 meters.
When connecting the relay to the bus, a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be
used. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. If signal ground is being
used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes, a quality dual
twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. In this case, one pair is connected to A and
B, and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground. When connecting
one device to another, A is connected to A and B to B.
The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one point/
device of the bus. Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable shield
connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).
Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences

between devices/nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated
RS-485 interfaces.
The RS-485 communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus
termination and fail-safe biasing. The bus is to be terminated at both ends, which
can be done by using the internal termination resistor on the communication
145
module. The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X5 to the ON

position. If the internal termination resistor of 120 Ω is used, the impedance of the
cable should be the same.
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The pull-
up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3 and X4 to the ON
position.
The jumpers have been set to no termination (X5 in the OFF position) and no
biasing (X3 and X4 in the OFF position) as default.
off
on X3
off X4
on
off
X5
on
A040334
Fig. 5.2.3.-1 Jumper location on the RS-485 communication module
Table 5.2.3.-2 RS-485 rear connector

Terminal Function
X5.5-6 Data A (+)
X5.5-5 Data B (-)
X5.5-4 Signal GND (for potential balancing)
X5.5-3 -
X5.5-2 Shield GND (via capacitor)
X5.5-1 Shield GND
146
Combined fibre-optic connection (plastic and glass)
If the relay is provided with the optional fibre-optic communication module for
plastic and glass fibre, the plastic fibre-optic cables are connected to terminals X5.3-
RX (Receiver) and X5.3-TX (Transmitter) and the glass fibre-optic cables to
terminals X5.4-RX (Receiver) and X5.4-TX (Transmitter).
The fibre-optic interface is selected with jumpers X6 and X2 located on the PCB of
the communication module (see Fig. 5.2.3.-2).
Table 5.2.3.-3 Transmitter selection

Transmitter Position of jumper X6
Plastic X5.3-TX
Glass X5.4-TX
Table 5.2.3.-4 Receiver selection

Transmitter Position of jumper X2
Plastic X5.3-RX
Glass X5.4-RX
X5.3-TX(plastic)
X5.3-RX(plastic)
Fibre-optic Interface
X5.3 TX
X5.4 TX X6
X5.3 RX
X5.4 RX X2
X6
X2
X5.4-TX(glass)
X5.4-RX(glass)
A040335
Fig. 5.2.3.-2 Jumper location on the communication module for plastic and glass fibre
147
Table 5.2.3.-5 Fibre-optic rear connectors (plastic and glass)

Terminal Function
X5.3-TX Transmitter for plastic fibre
X5.3-RX Receiver for plastic fibre
X5.4-TX Transmitter for glass fibre
X5.4-RX Receiver for plastic fibre
RS-485 connection for the DNP 3.0 communication module
If the relay is provided with the optional DNP 3.0 communication module, the cable
is connected to terminals X5.8/1-2 and X5.8/4-8. The connection socket is a 8-pin
header-type socket and the terminals are of screw compression type.
The DNP communication module follows the DNP standard and is intended to be
used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2- or 4-wire, half-duplex, multi-point
communication.
The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where

the relay is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is
1200 meters in optimum conditions and with slow communication
speed.
When connecting the relay to the bus, a quality twisted pair shielded cable is to be
used. The conductors of the pair are connected to A and B. If signal ground is being
used for balancing potential differences between devices/nodes, a quality dual
twisted pair shielded cable is to be used. In this case, one pair is connected to A and
B, and one of the conductors of the other pair to signal ground. When connecting
one device to another, A is connected to A and B to B.
When using a 4-wire bus, one pair is connected to +RX and -RX and the other to
+TX and -TX. If signal ground is being used, a quality cable with three or several
pairs is to be used and one of the conductors of a pair connected to signal ground.
The cable shield is to be connected directly to earth (shield GND) in one point/
device of the bus. Other devices connected to the bus should have the cable shield
connected to earth via a capacitor (shield GND via capacitor).
Signal ground can only be used for balancing potential differences

between devices/nodes if all devices connected to the bus have isolated
DNP interfaces.
The DNP communication module is provided with jumpers for setting bus
termination and fail-safe biasing. The bus is to be terminated at both ends, which
can be done by using the internal termination resistor on the DNP communication
148
module. The termination resistor is selected by setting jumper X6 or/and X12 to the
ON position. If the internal termination resistor of 120Ω is used, the impedance of
the cable should be the same.
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. The pull-
up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X8, X7, X13 and X11 to
the ON position.
The 2-wire bus is selected by default (jumper X14) without termination or biasing.
The jumpers X6, X7, X8 and X12 are in OFF position. The jumpers X11 and X13
are in ON position.
Table 5.2.3.-6 RS-485 rear connector (DNP 3.0)

Terminal Function
X5.8-8 Data A (+ RX)
X5.8-7 Data B (- RX)
X5.8-6 Data A (+ TX)
X5.8-5 Data B (- TX)
X5.8-4 Signal GND (for potential balancing)
X5.8-3 -
X5.8-2 Shield GND (via capacitor)
X5.8-1 Shield GND
Table 5.2.3.-7 Jumper numbering

Terminal Function Signal
X8 Pull-up Data A (+ TX)
X6 Termination TX
X7 Pull-down Data B (- TX)
X13 Pull-up Data A (+ RX)
X12 Termination RX
X11 Pull-down Data B (- RX)
X14 4-wire/2-wire -
149
ON X13
X8 ON
ON X12
X6 ON
ON X11
X7 ON
X14
4-Wire
2-Wire
A040357_2
Fig. 5.2.3.-3 Jumper location on the DNP 3.0 communication module
5.2.4. Technical data
Table 5.2.4.-1 Dimensions (for dimension drawings, refer to the Installa-

tion Manual)
Width, frame 177 mm, case 164 mm
Height, frame 177 mm (4U), case 160 mm
Depth, case 149.3 mm
Weight of the relay ~3.5 kg
Weight of the spare unit ~1.8 kg
Table 5.2.4.-2 Power supply

Uaux rated:
-REF610CxxHxxx Ur = 100/110/120/220/240 V AC
Ur = 110/125/220/250 V DC
-REF610CxxLxxx Ur = 24/48/60 V DC
Uaux variation (temporary):
-REF610CxxHxxx 85...110% of Ur (AC)
80...120% of Ur (DC)
-REF610CxxLxxx 80...120% of Ur (DC)
Burden of auxiliary voltage supply under quiescent <9 W/13 W
(Pq)/operating condition
150
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 12% of the DC value (at

frequency of 100 Hz)
Interruption time in the auxiliary DC voltage without <50 ms at Uaux rated
resetting the relay
Time to trip from switching on the auxiliary voltage <350 ms
Internal over temperature limit +100°C
Fuse type T2A/250 V
Table 5.2.4.-3 Energizing inputs

Rated frequency 50/60 Hz ±5 Hz
Rated current, In() 0.2 A 1A 5A
Thermal withstand capability:
* continuously 1.5 A 4A 20 A
*
for 1 s 20 A 100 A 500 A
* for 10 s 5A 25 A 100 A
Dynamic current withstand:
* half-wave value 50 A 250 A 1250
A
Input impedance <750 <100 <20
mΩ mΩ mΩ
Table 5.2.4.-4 Measuring range

Measured currents on phases IL1, IL2 and IL3 as 0...50 × In
multiples of the rated currents of the energizing
inputs
Earth-fault current as a multiple of the rated 0...20 × In
current of the energizing input
Table 5.2.4.-5 Digital inputs

Rated voltage: DI1...DI2 DI3...DI5 (optional)
REF610CxxHxxx 110/125/220/250 V DC
Activating threshold Max. 88 V DC (110 V DC -
20%)
REF610CxxLxxx 24/48/60/110/125/
220/250 V DC
Activating threshold Max. 19,2 V DC (24 V DC -
20%)
REF610CxxxxLx 24/48/60/110/125/
220/250 V DC
Activating threshold Max. 19,2 V DC (24 V DC -20%)
REF610CxxxxHx 110/125/220/250 V DC
Activating threshold Max. 88 V DC (110 V DC -20%)
Operating range ±20% of the rated voltage
Current drain 2...18 mA
Power consumption/input ≤0.9 W
151
Table 5.2.4.-6 Signal output SO1 and optional SO4 and SO5
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (5 A/3 A/1 A for series connection
of SO4 and SO5)
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
Table 5.2.4.-7 Signal output SO2, optional SO3, and IRF output
Continuous carry 5A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Table 5.2.4.-8 Power outputs (PO1, PO2, PO3)

Continuous carry 5A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant L/ 5 A/3 A/1 A
R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (PO1 with both contacts
connected in series)
Trip-circuit supervision (TCS):
* Control voltage range 20...265 V AC/DC
* Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.5 mA
*
Minimum voltage over a contact 20 V AC/DC (15...20 V)
Table 5.2.4.-9 Lens sensor and optic fibre for arc protection
Normal service temperature range -40...+100 °C
Maximum service temperature range, max 1 h +140°C
Minimum permissible bending radius of the connection 100 mm
fibre
Table 5.2.4.-10 Enclosure class of the flush-mounted relay

Front side IP 54
Rear side, top of the relay IP 40
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20
152
Table 5.2.4.-11 Environmental tests and conditions

Recommended service temperature range (continuous) -10...+55°C
Humidity < 95% RH
Limit temperature range (short-term) -40...+70°C
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85°C according to
IEC 60068-2-48
Dry heat test (humidity <50%) According to IEC 60068-2-2
Dry cold test According to IEC 60068-2-1
Damp heat test, cyclic (humidity >93%) According to IEC 60068-2-30
Atmospheric pressure 86...106 kPa
Table 5.2.4.-12 Electromagnetic compatibility tests

EMC immunity test level meets the requirements listed below:
1 MHz burst disturbance test, class III According to IEC 60255-22-1
* Common mode 2.5 kV
* Differential mode 1.0 kV
Electrostatic discharge test, class IV According to IEC 61000-4-2, IEC 60255-22-2
and ANSI C37.90.3-2001
*
For contact discharge 8 kV
*
For air discharge 15 kV
Radio frequency interference tests:
* Conducted, common mode According to IEC 61000-4-6 and IEC 60255-
22-6 (2000)
10 V (rms), f = 150 kHz...80 MHz
* Radiated, amplitude-modulated According to IEC 61000-4-3 and IEC 60255-
22-3 (2000)
10 V/m (rms), f = 80...1000 MHz
* Radiated, pulse-modulated According to the ENV 50204 and IEC 60255-
22-3 (2000)
10 V/m, f = 900 MHz
Fast transient disturbance tests According to IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-
4-4
* Power outputs, energizing inputs, power 4 kV
supply
* I/O ports 2 kV
Surge immunity test According to IEC 61000-4-5
* Power outputs, energizing inputs, power 4 kV, line-to-earth
supply 2 kV, line-to-line
* I/O ports 2 kV, line-to-earth
1 kV, line-to-line
Power frequency (50 Hz) magnetic field 300 A/m continuous
IEC 61000-4-8
Voltage dips and short interruptions According to IEC 61000-4-11
30%/10 ms
60%/100 ms
60%/1000 ms
>95%/5000 ms
Electromagnetic emission tests According to the EN 55011
153
* Conducted, RF-emission (Mains terminal) EN 55011, class A, IEC 60255-25

* Radiated RF-emission EN 55011, class A, IEC 60255-25
CE approval Complies with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC
and the LV directive 73/23/EEC
Table 5.2.4.-13 Standard tests

Insulation tests:
Dielectric tests According to IEC 60255-5
* Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
Impulse voltage test According to IEC 60255-5
* Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses, waveform
1.2/50 μs, source energy 0.5 J
Insulation resistance measurements According to IEC 60255-5
*
Isolation resistance >100 MΩ, 500 V DC
Mechanical tests:
Vibration tests (sinusoidal) According to IEC 60255-21-1, class I
Shock and bump test According to IEC 60255-21-2, class I
Table 5.2.4.-14 Data communication

Rear interface:
* Fibre-optic or RS-485 connection
* SPA bus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 or Modbus protocol
* 9.6 or 4.8 kbps (additionally 2.4, 1.2 or 0.3 kbps for Modbus)
Front interface:
* Optical connection (infrared): wirelessly or via the front communication cable
(1MRS050698)
* SPA bus protocol
* 9.6 or 4.8 kbps (9.6 kbps with front communication cable)
Optional communication modules and protocols

* SPA-bus, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® (RTU and ASCII):
* Plastic fibre
* Plastic fibre with arc protection input
* Plastic and glass fibre
* Plastic and glass fibre with arc protection input
* RS485
* RS485 with arc protection input
* DNP 3.0:
* RS485 including DNP 3.0 protocol
* RS485 including DNP 3.0 protocol and arc protection input
154
Auxiliary voltage
The relay requires a secured auxiliary voltage supply to operate. The internal power
supply of the relay forms the voltages required by the relay electronics. The power
supply is a galvanically isolated (flyback-type) DC/DC converter. When the
auxiliary voltage is connected, the green indicator LED (ready) on the front panel is
lit. For detailed information on power supply, refer to Table 5.2.4.-2.
The primary side of the power supply is protected with a fuse located on the printed
circuit board of the relay.
155
156
6. Application examples
6.1. Auto-reclose function
6.1.1. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using two protection stages
In several applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream

fuses, tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time
delayed) and of shot 2 and 3, and definite tripping time delayed. In this example,
two overcurrent stages are used, I> and I>>. Stage I>> is given an instantaneous
characteristic and Stage I> a time delay. By setting SG2/2 to 1 and SG2/7 to 1, Stage
I>> will be blocked by the AR function during shot 2 and 3.
Open CB
Open CB
Trip 0→1 Close CB

I>
Block I>> at
Shot 1, 2 and 3 Block I>>
Trip SG2/2=1
I>>
SG2/7=1
I>> Trip I> Trip I> Trip I> Trip
Block I>> Block I>> Block I>>

CB closed
CB open
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Definite Trip
t>> t> t> t>
A040360
Fig. 6.1.1.-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using one fast and one delayed stage
In case of a short-circuit in the network, stage I>> will trip the circuit breaker and
initiate shot 1. At the time of shot initiation, the blocking of stage I>> will be
activated. If the network fault is not cleared, stage I> will trip the circuit breaker and
continue the auto-reclose sequence to shot 2, shot 3 and finally definite tripping.
As the set start value of stage I> in this example is higher than that of stage I>>, as
sometimes is the case, it is possible that the current will not exceed the set start value
of stage I> while the blocking of stage I>> is active. This will lead to a pumping
effect when the AR function is reset (the blocking of stage I>> included), i.e. the AR
sequence will start over and over again.
To avoid such a pumping effect, a cutout time is used. The cutout time, like the
reclaim time, will start when the set dead time elapses and the AR function issues a
reclosing command to the circuit breaker. By setting the cutout time to be shorter
157
than the reclaim time (e.g. half of the reclaim time), the blocking of stage I>> (in
this case) will be reset before the AR function. Stage I>> will now be able to
continue the AR sequence and the pumping effect will thus be avoided.
6.1.2. Fast tripping and initiation of shot 1 using start signals
An alternative way to achieve fast tripping and shot initiation (typical for certain
countries, such as Finland), is to use start signals from protection stages for shot
initiation. The AR function of REF 610 can be initiated by the start signals from
stages I> and I0>.
The start time of stages I> and I0> is very short but can be extended with the settings
AR I> start Delay and AR I0> start Delay of the AR function. When the
set start delay elapses, the shot will be initiated and the AR function will trip the
circuit breaker by issuing the Open CB Command.
Open CB
0→1
Trip Shots 1, 2 and 3
I> initiation
Start t Shot 1 initiation
I> start delay
Open CB
Open CB Command
Close CB Command
Close CB
Open CB Close CB Close CB Close CB

Command Command Command Command
I> Start I> Trip I> Trip I> Start
Open CB
CB closed Command
CB open
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Definite Trip
t> t>
I> start delay I> start delay
A040361
Fig. 6.1.2.-1 Fast initiation of shot 1 using start signals
Shot initiation by a start signal applies only to shot 1, and to definite tripping, i.e.
when no more shots are allowed but the network fault has not been cleared. In this
case, the AR function will trip the circuit breaker on expiration of AR I> start
Delay and AR I0> start Delay.
The signal Open CB Command must be routed to the output contact

used for tripping the circuit breaker.
158
At the factory default delay of 300 s for AR I> start Delay and AR
I0> start Delay, the start signals will, in practise, not be used for
shot initiation. However, if stages I> or I0> have been given an IDMT
characteristic, the factory default delay of 300 s will function as a trip
time limiter. With small currents, the operate time at IDMT
characteristic may be relatively long. However, since the start signals
are always routed to the AR function, the circuit breaker will be tripped
and a shot initiated (provided that the signal Open CB Command has
been routed to the trip output contact) on expiration of the factory
default delay.
When using AR I> start Delay and AR I0> start Delay for
shot initiation and the signal Open CB Command has been routed to
the trip output contact, stages I> and I0> should not be used for
blocking of shot 1.
6.1.3. Selecting adaptive sequence length
The auto-reclose sequence can be set to adapt to the fault current, either through
blocking of shot initiation or inhibition of the AR function.
In the examples below, three overcurrent stages (I>, I>> and I>>>) are used and the
number of shots of the AR sequence vary depending on which stages trips.
Example:
Start by checking that the switches have been properly set:
Settings Function
SG1/1=1 Blocking of initiation of shot 1 by the trip signal from
stage I>>
SG3/1=1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage
I>>>
Number of shots = 3
If one or several phase currents

* exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I> and I>>, the AR
sequence will include shot 1, 2 and 3.
* exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>, the
AR sequence will include shot 2 and 3.
* exceed the set start value of stages I>, I>> and I>>>, no shots will be
performed (AR function inhibited).
Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest
operate time.
159
Example:
Start by checking that the switches have been properly set:
Settings Function
SG1/5=1 Blocking of initiation of shot 2 and 3 by the trip signal
from stage I>>
SG3/1=1 Inhibition of the AR function by the trip signal from stage
I>>>
Number of shots = 3
If one or several phase currents

* exceed the set start value of stage I> but not of stages I>> and I>>>, the
AR sequence will include shot 1, 2 and 3
* exceed the set start value of stages I> and I>> but not of stage I>>>, the
AR sequence includes only shot 1
* exceed the set start value of stages I>, I>> and I>>>, no shots will be
performed (AR function inhibited).
Stage I>>> should have the shortest and stage I> the longest
operate time.
6.2. Arc protection
6.2.1. Arc protection with one REF 610 relay
In installations with limited possibilities to realize signalling between relays

protecting incoming and outgoing feeders, or if only the relay for the incoming
feeder is to be exchanged, an arc protection with a lower protective level can be
achieved with one protection relay.
An arc protection with one REF 610 only (see Fig. 6.2.1.-1) is realized by installing
two arc lens sensors, connected to the relay protecting the incoming feeder, to detect
an arc on the busbar. On arc detection, the arc protection stage will trip the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder. The maximum recommended installation distance
between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is 6 meters and the maximum
distance from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar 3 meters.
160
Q1
M1
3l
PO3
Q2
PO1
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
A040362
Fig. 6.2.1.-1 Arc protection with one REF 610
6.2.2. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
When using several REF 610 relays (see Fig. 6.2.2.-1), a REF 610 protecting an
outgoing feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an
arc at the cable terminations. If the REF 610 protecting the outgoing feeder detects
an arc on the busbar (via the other lens sensor), however, it will generate a signal to
the REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder. On detection of the signal, the
REF 610 protecting the incoming feeder will trip the circuit breaker of the incoming
feeder and generate an external trip signal to all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing
feeders, which in turn will result in tripping of all circuit breakers of outgoing
feeders.
For maximum safety, the REF 610 relays can be configured to trip all circuit
breakers, regardless of where the arc is detected.
161
Q1
DI1
M1
3l
SO1
PO3
Q2
PO1
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
3I+Io 3I+Io 3I+Io 3I+Io
SO1 SO1 SO1 SO1
A040363
Fig. 6.2.2.-1 Arc protection with several REF 610 relays
6.2.3. Arc protection with several REF 610 relays and one REA 101
When realizing an arc protection with both REF 610 relays and an REA 101 (see
Fig. 6.2.3.-1), the cable terminations of outgoing feeders are protected by REF 610
relays using one lens sensor for each relay. The busbar and the incoming feeder is
protected by the sensor loop of the REA 101.
On arc detection at the cable terminations, REF 610 will trip the circuit breaker of
the outgoing feeder. However, on detection of an arc on the busbar, REA 101 will
trip the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generate an external trip signal to
all REF 610 relays protecting outgoing feeders, which in turn will result in tripping
of all circuit breakers of outgoing feeders.
162
Q1
M1
3l
TRIP 3
Q2 HSO 2
HSO 1
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
3I+Io 3I+Io 3I+Io 3I+Io
S1 S2 S3 S4
A040364
Fig. 6.2.3.-1 Arc protection with REF 610 and REA 101
163
164
7. Ordering information
When ordering protection relays and/or accessories, specify the following:
* Order number
* HMI language set number
* Quantity
The order number identifies the protection relay type and hardware as described in
the figures below and is labelled on the marking strip under the lower handle of the
relay.
Use the ordering key information in Fig. 7.-1 to generate the order number when
ordering complete protection relays.
REF610C55HCNP 01
Language set:
01 = (IEC) English, Svenska, Suomi
02 = (IEC) English, Deutsch, Francais, Italiano, Español, Polski
11 = (ANSI) English, Español, Portugese
Communication module:
P = plastic fiber
M = plastic fibre with input for arc protection
G = plastic and glass fiber
K = plastic and glass fibre with input for arc protection
R = RS-485
T = RS-485 with input for arc protection
D = RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol
E = RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol and input for arc protection
N = none
I/O extension module:
H = 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V DC)
L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V DC)
N = none
Power supply:
H = 100-240 V AC/110-250 V DC,
2xDI (110/125/220/250 V DC),
3xPO
2xSO
L = 24-60 V DC,
2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V DC),
3xPO,
2xSO
Earth-fault current input:
5 = 5A
1 = 1A
2 = 0.2A
Phase-current inputs:
5 = 5A
1 = 1A
Revision
A040365_2
Fig. 7.-1 Ordering key for complete relays
Use the ordering key information in Fig. 7.-2 to generate the order number when
ordering spare units.
165
REF610C55HSNS 01
Language set:
01 = (IEC) English, Svenska, Suomi
02 = (IEC) English, Deutsch, Francais, Italiano, Español, Polski
11 = (ANSI) English, Español, Portugese
I/O extension module:

H = 3xSO and 3xDI (110/125/220/250 V DC)
L = 3xSO and 3xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V DC)
N = none
Power supply:
H = 100-240 V AC/110-250 V DC,
2xDI (110/125/220/250 V DC),
3xPO
2xSO
L = 24-60 V DC,
2xDI (24/48/60/110/125/220/250 V DC),
3xPO,
2xSO
Earth-fault current input:
5 = 5A
1 = 1A
2 = 0.2A
Phase-current inputs:
5 = 5A
1 = 1A
A040366_2
Fig. 7.-2 Ordering key for spare units
The following accessories are available:
Item Order number

Semi-flush mounting kit 1MRS050696
Inclined (/ 25º) semi-flush mounting kit 1MRS050831
Wall mounting kit 1MRS050697
19” Rack mounting kit, side-by-side 1MRS050695
19" Rack mounting kit, single relay 1MRS050694
19" Rack mounting kit for single relay and RTXP18 1MRS050783
19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex), plain bracket 1MRS061208
19" equipment frame mounting (Combiflex), bracket for 1MRS061207
RTXP18
Pre-manufactured lens sensor and optic fibre for arc protection:
* 1.5 m ±3% 1MRS120534-1.5
* 3 m ±3% 1MRS120534-3.0
* 5 m ±3% 1MRS120534-5.0
Front communication cable 1MRS050698
Communication modules:
* Plastic fibre 1MRS050889
* Plastic fibre with input for arc protection 1MRS050890
*
RS-485 1MRS050892
*
RS-485 with input for arc protection 1MRS050888
* Plastic and glass fibre 1MRS050891
* Plastic and glass fibre with input for arc protection 1MRS050885
* RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol 1MRS050887
* RS-485 including DNP 3.0 protocol and input for arc 1MRS050886
protection
166
8. Check lists
Table 8.-1 Setting group 1
Variable Group/ Setting Default Custo-
Channel range setting mer’s
1 (R, W, setting
P)
Start value of stage I> 1S1 0.30...5.0 x In 0.30 x In
Operate time of stage I> 1S2 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic for stage I> 1S3 0...9 0
Time multiplier k 1S4 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n 1S5 1.0...15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I> 1S6 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I>> 1S7 0.50...35.0 x 0.50 x In
In
Operate time of stage I>> 1S8 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I>>> 1S9 0.50...35.0 x 0.50 x In
In
Operate time of stage I>>> 1S10 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I0> 1S11 1.0...100% In 1.0% In
Operate time of stage I0> 1S12 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic for stage I0> 1S13 0...9 0
Time multiplier k0 1S14 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n0 1S15 1.0…15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I0> 1S16 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I0>> 1S17 5.0...800% In 5.0% In
Operate time of stage I0>> 1S18 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage ΔI> 1S19 10...100% 100 %
Operate time of stage ΔI> 1S20 1...300 s 60 s
Full load current 1S21 0.30...1.50 x 0.30 x In
In
Time constant of stage θ> 1S22 1...200 min 1 min
Alarm level of stage θ> 1S23 50...100% 95% θt>
θt>
Operate time of CBFP 1S24 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
Number of AR shots 1S25 0 = AR is not 0
in use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1
and 2
3 = shot 1, 2
and 3
Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC 1S26 0.50...35.0 x 2.50 x In
In
Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC 1S27 5.0...800% In 20% In
Checksum, SGF 1 1S61 0...255 0
Checksum, SGF 3 1S63 0...127 120
167
Table 8.-1 Setting group 1 (Continued)

Variable Group/ Setting Default Custo-
Channel range setting mer’s
1 (R, W, setting
P)
Checksum, SGB 1 1S71 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 2 1S72 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 3 1S73 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 4 1S74 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 5 1S75 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGR 1 1S81 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 2 1S82 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 3 1S83 0...8388607 2108074
Checksum, SGR 4 1S84 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 5 1S85 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 6 1S86 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 7 1S87 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 8 1S88 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 1 1S91 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 2 1S92 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 3 1S93 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 4 1S94 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 5 1S95 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 6 1S96 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 7 1S97 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 8 1S98 0...8388607 0
Table 8.-2 Setting group 2

Variable Group/ Setting range Default Custo-
Channel 2 setting mer’s
(R, W, P) setting
Start value of stage I> 2S1 0.30...5.0 x In 0.30 x In
Operate time of stage I> 2S2 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic for 2S3 0...9 0
stage I>
Time multiplier k 2S4 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n 2S5 1.0...15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I> 2S6 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I>> 2S7 0.50...35.0 x In 0.50 x In
Operate time of stage I>> 2S8 0.04...300 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I>>> 2S9 0.50...35.0 x In 0.50 x In
Operate time of stage I>>> 2S10 0.04...30.0 s 0.04 s
Start value of stage I0> 2S11 1.0...100% In 1.0% In
Operate time of stage I0> 2S12 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Time/current characteristic for 2S13 0...9 0
stage I0>
168

(R, W, P) setting
Time multiplier k0 2S14 0.05...1.00 0.05
Time multiplier n0 2S15 1.0…15.0 1.0
Resetting time of stage I0> 2S16 0.05...2.50 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage I0>> 2S17 5.0...800% In 5.0% In
Operate time of stage I0>> 2S18 0.05...300 s 0.05 s
Start value of stage ΔI> 2S19 10...100% 100 %
Operate time of stage ΔI> 2S20 1...300 s 60 s
Full load current 2S21 0.30...1.50 x In 0.30 x In
Time constant of stage θ> 2S22 1...200 min 1 min
Alarm level of stage θ> 2S23 50...100% θt> 95% θt>
Operate time of CBFP 2S24 0.10...60.0 s 0.10 s
Number of AR shots 2S25 0 = AR is not in 0
use
1 = shot 1
2 = shot 1 and 2
3 = shot 1, 2 and
3
Current limit ArcI> of stage ARC 2S26 0.50...35.0 x In 2.50 x In
Current limit ArcI0> of stage ARC 2S27 5.0...800% In 20% In
Checksum, SGF 3 2S63 0...127 120
Checksum, SGB 1 2S71 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 2 2S72 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 3 2S73 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 4 2S74 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGB 5 2S75 0...1048575 0
Checksum, SGR 1 2S81 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 2 2S82 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 3 2S83 0...8388607 10922
Checksum, SGR 4 2S84 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 5 2S85 0...8388607 5461
Checksum, SGR 6 2S86 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 7 2S87 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGR 8 2S88 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 1 2S91 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 2 2S92 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 3 2S93 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 4 2S94 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 5 2S95 0...8388607 0
169

(R, W, P) setting
Checksum, SGL 6 2S96 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 7 2S97 0...8388607 0
Checksum, SGL 8 2S98 0...8388607 0
Table 8.-3 Control parameters

Description Parameter Setting range Default setting Customer’s
(channel 0) setting
Rated frequency V104 50 or 60 Hz 50 Hz
Time setting range for V105 0...999 min 10 min
demand values in
minutes
Non-volatile memory V106 0...31 31
settings
Time setting for disabling V108 0...999 min 60 min
new trip indications on the
LCD
Trip-circuit supervision V113 0 = not in use 0
1 = in use
Remote control of settings V150 0 = setting 0
group 1
1 = setting
group 2
Unit address of the relay V200 1...254 1
Data transfer rate (SPA), V201 9.6/4.8 9.6
kbps
Rear communication V203 0 = SPA 0
protocol 1 = IEC_103
2 = Modbus
RTU
3 = Modbus
ASCII
Connection type V204 0 = loop 0
1 = star
Line-idle state V205 0 = light off 0
1 = light on
Optional communication V206 0 = not in use 0
module 1 = in use
Table 8.-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder

(channel 0) setting
Sampling rate M15 800/960 Hz 800 Hz
400/480 Hz
50/60 Hz
Station identification/unit M18 0...9999 0
number
Name of the feeder M20 Max 16 - ABB -
characters
170
Table 8.-4 Parameters for the disturbance recorder (Continued)

(channel 0) setting
Analogue channel M80, M81, M82 Factor 00001, CT
conversion factor and unit 0...65535, unit
for IL1, IL2 and IL3 (A, kA), e.g. 10,
kA
Analogue channel M83 Factor 00001, CT
conversion factor and unit 0...65535, unit
for the earth-fault current (A, kA), e.g. 10,
kA
Internal trigger signals' V236 0...16383 682
checksum
Internal trigger signal's V237 0...16383 0
edge
Checksum of internal V238 0...16383 751
signal storing mask
Post-triggering recording V240 0...100% 50 %
length
External trigger signal's V241 0...31 0
checksum
External trigger signal's V242 0...31 0
edge
Checksum of external V243 0...31 0
signal storing mask
Table 8.-5 Auto-reclose parameters

Description Parameter Value Default setting Customer’s
(channel 0) setting
CB Closing time V121 0.1...10 s 0.2 s
Start delay of stage I> V122 0...300 s 300 s
Start delay of stage I0> V123 0...300 s 300 s
Reclaim time V124 3...300 s 10 s
Cutout time V125 0.1...300 s 0.1 s
Dead time of shot 1 V126 0.1...300 s 0.3 s
Dead time of shot 2 V127 0.1...300 s 30 s
Dead time of shot 3 V128 0.1...300 s 30 s
SG1 V129 0...255 0
SG2 V130 0...1023 0
SG3 V131 0...31 15
171
172
9. Abbreviations
AR Auto reclosure
CB Circuit-breaker
CBFP Circuit-breaker failure protection
CD Change detect; compact disk
CPU Central processing unit
CRC Cyclical redundancy check
DI Digital input
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPA Enhanced Performance Architecture
ER Event records
FR Fault record
GI General interrogation
HR Holding register
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC_103 Standard IEC 60870-5-103
IED Intelligent electronic device
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IR Input register
IRF Internal relay fault
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LRC Longitudinal redundancy check
MP Minute-pulse
MSB Most significant bit
MV Medium voltage
NACK Negative acknowledgments
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
OSI Open System Interconnection
PC Personal computer
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable logical controller
PO Power output, process object
RTU Remote terminal unit
173
SGB Switchgroup for digital inputs

SGF Switchgroup for functions
SGL Switchgroup for LEDs
SGR Switchgroup for output contacts
SO Signal output
SP Second-pulse
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
UDR User-defined register
UR Unsolicited reporting
174
1MRS755310 EN 10/2007
ABB Oy
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
+358 10 2211
+358 10 224 1080
www.abb.com/substationautomation

E4-5 MV Switchgear

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E4-5 MV Switchgear

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOR REVIEW

A Jan.14.10 Initial Issued J.H.Kim J.T.Choi J.T.Choi Y.S.Lee

INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SCALE PROJ. NO. CONTRACTOR’S DOCUMENT NO.

N/A 25458 AK-0-ESE-NM-78-001

OWNER’S DOCUMENT NO. :

2. Vacuum Circuit Breaker VD4

3. Multifunction Relay REF542plus

4. Multifunction Relay REF610

1.2 Standards and specifications

1.3 Operating conditions

1.3.2 Special operating conditions

Note on any special climatic operating conditions:

Rated voltage kV 12 17.5 24

Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV 28 38 50

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 95 125

Rated frequency Hz 50/60

Rated current of busbars A …4000 …4000 …2500

Rated current of circuit-breaker branches A …4000 …4000 …2500

Rated peak withstand current1) kA …125 …100 …63

Rated short-circuit breaking current of c.-breaker kA …50 …40 …25

Rated short- time current 3 s 1) kA …50 …40 …25

2.1.2 Main parameters for panels with switch-disconnectors NALF

Rated voltage kV 12 17,5 24

Rated power frequency withstand voltage kV 28 38 50

Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage kV 75 95 125

Rated frequency Hz 50/60

Rated current of busbars A ...4000 ...2500

Rated current of branches A ...630 ...630

Rated breaking current of switch-disconnector A ...630 ...630

Rated short-time withstand current of

Rated short-circuit making current kA ...40 ...38

Rated peak withstand current kA ...62.5 ...62.5

Auxiliary voltage V DC 24, 48, 110, 220;

2.2 Resistance to internal arc faults

2.3.1 Dimensions and weights of 12/17.5 kV units

Depth C 1300/13403) or 1350/13904)

Height of the basic part of panel D 2100

Weights of 12/17.5 kV panels (including withdrawable circuit-breaker parts):

Rated current Mass

Height of the basic part of panel D 2200

Weights of 24 kV panels (including withdrawable circuit-breaker parts):

Rated current Mass

Weights of 12/17,5 kV panel (including the switch-disconnector):

2.3.4 Dimensions and weights of panels with the switch-disconnector NALF 24 kV

Weights of 24 kV panel (including the switch-disconnector):

3.2 Enclosure and partitioning (Figure 3/3)

3.2.1 Ventilation of the panels (Figures 3/3, 6/20, 6/21)

3.3 Compartments in the panels

Rated voltage Rated short-time withstand current Partitions

12/17.5 kV 31.5 kA Every third panel 2)

40 kA, 50 kA Every panel 3)

Marine version All ratings Every panel

Cable connection of 12/17.5 kV units:

Cable connection of 24 kV units:

3.3.5 Control cabinet (Figures 3/3, 3/7, 5/20, 5/39)

3.3.6 Switch-disconnector and cable compartment in the panel with switch-disconnector

3.4 Interlock/protection against erroneous operation

3.4.2 Doors interlocking (Figure 3/4-1 to 3/4-8)

3.4.3 Interlocks between panels (Figure 3/1-6, 3/1-7, 3/2-6, 3/2-7)

3.4.4 Locking devices (Figures 3/3, 6/13, 6/22)

3.4.5 Internal interlocking of panel with switch-disconnector

3.6 Fast recovery (Figure 3/5-1 to 3/5-4)